EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP STATION REHABILITATION PROJECT - 13-0016-UT•
S
East WRF Influent Pump Station
Rehabilitation Project (13 -0016 -UT)
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS &
SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared for
CLEA RWATER
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH
Bid Documents
September 2023
City of Clearwater, Florida
East WRF Influent Pump Station
Rehabilitation Project (13 -0016 -UT)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION IIIc SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT
DOCUMENTATION
SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
COVER Page ii Updated 2/11/2016
•
•
•
•
•
•
INVITATION TO BID
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
East WRF Influent Pump Station
Rehabilitation Project
Documents and plans for Project #13 -0016 -UT
are available at www.myclearwater.com/bid.
The work includes: demolition and disposal of the odor
control scrubber system; replacement of the influent
pumps, pipe assembly, and the new influent flow meter
assembly; installation of a bypass manhole; rehabilitate
existing wet well with new coating and installation of
new bubble mixing system and spray cleaning system;
installation of electrical improvements, and the
operation of temporary bypass pumping during
construction.
Pre -Bid Conference:
Oct. 31,2023 at 10:OOam
Zoom Meeting:
Meeting ID 823 6229 0433
Passcode 638182
Pre -qualification DEADLINE: Nov. 22, 2023
Category: Sanitary & Storm Sewers
Pre-aualification Amount: $2 Million
Bids DUE: Dec. 6, 2023 at 2:OOpm
City of Clearwater, Project # 13 -0016 -UT
Procurement Office, 3rd Floor
100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756-5520
Bid Opening: Dec. 6, 2023 at 2:OOpm
Zoom Meeting:
Meeting ID 880 1841 8733
Passcode 637762
Issued by Lori Vogel, CPPB, Procurement Manager
For additional information contact Public Works Dept.:
727-562-4750
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents
1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1
2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1
3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1
4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2
5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3
6. CONTRACT TIME 3
7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3
8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3
9. SUBCONTRACTORS 3
10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4
11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4
12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5
13. REJECTION OF BIDS 5
14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5
15. OPENING OF BIDS 5
16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5
17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6
18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 7
19. BID PROTEST 7
20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 8
21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES 8
SECTION II i Updated 12/22/2021
•
•
•
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
III 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are accessible through the City of Clearwater
website at address: www.myclearwater.com/bid. Bidding Documents may include, but are
not limited to, plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits, bid/proposal form,
and addendums.
•
•
1.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the
Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete
sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub -bidders, or others.
2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1. Each prospective Bidder must pre -qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner. An application
package for pre -qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater,
Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address);
100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address) or by phone at
(727) 562-4750. Pre -qualification requirement information is also available on the City of
Clearwater Website at address:
www.myclearwater.com/government/city-departments/engineering/construction-
management.
Contractors wanting to pre -qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two
weeks (ten workdays) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre -qualified by the
City do not have to make reapplication. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm pre -
qualification status before a Bid Opening.
The Contractor shall provide copies of the current Contractor License/Registration with the
State of Florida and Pinellas County in the bid response.
3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d)
study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify
Engineer in writing of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2. For the purposes of bidding or construction, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the
technical data contained in reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the
site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents,
but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the
completeness thereof. Drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and
subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site
and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, may
be relied upon by Bidder for accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but
not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction.
SECTION II
Page 1 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
3.3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City
and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible
conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions
appear in the General Conditions.
3.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6. On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission
of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition
upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents.
3.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without
exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the
Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1. All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in
writing to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer
in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, via the Jiffy Reprographics Plan
Room to all parties recorded by the Plan Room as plan holders having received the Bidding
Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified on the pre-bid meeting agenda,
prior to the date for opening of Bids, may not be answered. Only information provided by
formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will
be without legal effect.
4.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
SECTION II
Page 2 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
• 5.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an
amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a
certified or cashier's check or a Proposal/Bid Bond (on form provided in Section V) issued
by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions.
5.2. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the
Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid
Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and
furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council,
the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid
Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the
award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the
successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of
other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid Opening.
5.3. The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in, the State of Florida.
6. CONTRACT TIME
6.1. The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
• 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
7.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement, Section V.
•
8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1. The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or
equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that
a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will
not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement.
The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions
and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9. SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1. If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested,
shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience
statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification
for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the
completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%)
of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after
due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other
person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City
Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase
in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such
substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder
SECTION II
Page 3 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and
organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for
sacrificing the Bid Security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other
person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make
written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed
acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the
Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person, or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1. The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be printed in ink
or typewritten. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be
to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the
Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the
price for which they will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders
are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or
item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or
item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts
shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they
be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section
or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed
individual items.
10.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown
below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership
shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation
or partnership.
10.3. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner,
whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be
shown below the signature.
10.4. All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1. Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the project name and
number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in
another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the
City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated
in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Bids in any other form will not be
accepted.
11.2. The sealed bid envelope shall contain, but not be limited to, the Proposal/Bid Bond and
corresponding Power of Attorney, Affidavit, Non -Collusion Affidavit, Proposal (pages one
SECTION II Page 4 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
and two), Addendum Sheet, Bidder's Proposal, and Scrutinized Companies and Business
• Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form, and E -Verify form.
•
•
12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner
that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A
request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly
authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a
new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no
Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2. After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical
or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or
scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction
of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City.
The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid.
13. REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1. To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves
the right to reject any, and all Bids, and to waive any, and all informalities. Grounds for the
rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of
form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of
any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would
not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the
Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to
meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the
right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public.
14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among
the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for
the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non -Collusion Affidavit contained in the
Contract Documents.
15. OPENING OF BIDS
15.1. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for
Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1. The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in
any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and
impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
SECTION II
Page 5 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
16.2. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
16.3. The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use, and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax
and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
16.4. The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials purchased by the City and
incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the
Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, as may be indicated in the Scope of Work Description
in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions.
17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect
to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or
contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a
drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established
procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a
drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor
shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the
accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace
and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees
for drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee
will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction
of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any
controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring
in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any
employee who is so convicted.
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
SECTION II
Page 6 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
18. AWARD OF CONTRACT
• 18.1. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies
in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices.
Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof
will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
•
•
18.2. In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether the
Bids comply or not with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be
requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience
of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor
for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist
in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial
ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations
to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's
satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best
interest of the City.
18.4. Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the
best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be
awarded to only one Contractor.
18.5. The successful bidder/contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida
Statutes, specifically to:
(a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required
by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service;
(b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions
that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not
exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law;
(c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public
records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and
(d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City
of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of
the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential
and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored
electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible
with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater.
19. BID PROTEST
19.1. RIGHT TO PROTEST:
Pursuant to Section 2.562(3), Clearwater Code of Ordinances, a bidder who submitted a
response to a competitive solicitation and was not selected may appeal the decision through
the bid protest procedures, a copy of which shall be available in the Procurement Division. A
protesting bidder must include a fee of one percent of the amount of the bid or proposed
contract to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed
SECTION II
Page 7 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
$5,000.00 nor be less than $50.00. Full refund will be provided should the protest be upheld.
No partial refunds will be made.
20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related
to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act
(Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650
Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
21.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and
implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management
programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent
the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters.
A. The control of construction -related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water
quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during
the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters.
B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment
control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment
control provisions.
NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering
Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction -related Best
Management Practices.
SECTION II Page 8 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021
•
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents:
1. DEFINITIONS 1
2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5
2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5
2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5
2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED, STARTING
THE PROJECT 5
2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 5
2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6
2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS 6
3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 6
3.1. INTENT 6
3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7
4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS, SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS, REFERENCE POINTS 7
4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 7
4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 7
4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8
II 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS 8
5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 8
5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND 8
5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 9
5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE 9
5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 9
5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE...10
5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS
INSURANCE 10
5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE10
5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 10
5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 10
5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS 11
6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 12
6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12
6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 12
6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 13
6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 13
6.5. USE OF PREMISES 14
6.5.1. STAGING AREAS 15
6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15
6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 15
1111 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16
6.7.1. E -VERIFY 16
6.8. PERMITS 16
SECTION III i Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17
6.10. EMERGENCIES 18 •
6.11. DRAWINGS 18
6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18
6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19
6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 21
6.11.4. DELIVERABLES 23
6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23
6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK 23
6.14. INDEMNIFICATION 24
6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24
6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS 24
7. OTHER WORK 25
7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE 25
7.2. COORDINATION 26
8. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITY 26
9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
26
9.1. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 26
9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 27
9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 27
9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 27
9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27
9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 28 •
10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 29
11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29
11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29
11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 31
11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK 31
12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31
13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32
13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION 32
13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK 33
13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33
13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33
13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD 34
13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34
13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34
14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35
14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35
14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 36
14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36
14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37
14.5. FINAL INSPECTION 37
14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 37
14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38
14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS 38
SECTION III ii Updated 6/1/2021
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39
• 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 39
15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39
15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 40
17. MISCELLANEOUS 41
17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41
17.2. GIVING NOTICE 41
17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM 41
17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41
17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41
17.6. RENEWAL OPTION 41
17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS 42
18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42
19. MATERIAL USED 42
20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42
21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 42
21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS 42
21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK 42
21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 43
21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES, AND INDEMNIFICATION 43
22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44
• 22.1. GENERAL 44
22.2. EXAMPLE 45
23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 45
23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE 45
23.2. PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 46
23.3. FIXED SIGN 46
23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS 46
23.5. SIGN COLORING 46
23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT 46
23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE 46
23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 47
24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 47
25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH
CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM AND ISRAEL
CERTIFICATION FORM 48
•
SECTION III iii Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
1. DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct,
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agent
Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the
City.
Agreement
The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress
or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment, or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida.
Construction Inspector
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects
City construction projects in order to ensure the Contractor's work complies with the
intent of the Contract Documents.
Construction Manager
The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The
Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction
contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the
Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding
SECTION III
Page 1 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the
Owner's Representative during construction.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of
this contract, the person, firm, or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has
been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Critical Path Method Construction Schedule (CPM)
A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate
to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work
in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution
of the schedule.
Day
A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County,
Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as
the Owner's Representative during construction.
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
SECTION III Page 2 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
F.D. O. T. Specifications
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida
Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending,
or overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
Notice to Proceed (NTP)
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the
City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be
responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed.
For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative
during construction.
Owner's Representative
Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction.
Person
A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial
entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
SECTION III
Page 3 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times, that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre -construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Request for Information (RFI)
An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from
the Contractor to the Engineer.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Surety
Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
SECTION III Page 4 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF
INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by
this contract.
2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional
copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO
PROCEED, STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall
start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done
at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. Pursuant to Section
255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until Contractor provides
City with a certified copy of the recorded bond issued by the Pinellas County Clerk of Court.
2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field
measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
SECTION III
Page 5 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy
in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or
Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify
any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any
time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this
insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
After Contract has been fully executed and before the start of the Work, the Owner's
Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer,
Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the
Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a color
Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including
submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at the preconstruction
conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also
submit a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is
complete, and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a
completed Emergency Call List, a completed Authorized Signature List, and Verification of Illegal
Discharge Construction Site Training.
2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a
weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall
bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a
look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and
all material test reports generated in the same time period.
3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1. INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which
may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade
usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or
not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-known technical or
construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such
words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and
SECTION III
Page 6 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative.
Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or
association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such
reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or
code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise
specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard
specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the
responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the
duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of
their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and
interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every
provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be
deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included
herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly
inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be
physically amended to make such insertion.
3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision
of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard,
specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the
Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work
affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract
Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications,
provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for
failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or
reasonably should have known thereof
4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS, SUBSURFACE AND
PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, REFERENCE POINTS
4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work
is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements, rights of entry for access thereto, and such other
lands which are designated for the use of Contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances
or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with
which Contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures
or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification
of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site
or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by
Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to
accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly
SECTION III
Page 7 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
•
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the
site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the
Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further
investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional
investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that
the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical
conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which
could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change, or Change Order will
be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will
be included in the Contract Price and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing
and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or
indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such
Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor
is required to call the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation per State
regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the Sunshine State One Call
of Florida prior to any excavation. The Sunshine State One Call of Florida is an agency for the
protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local
telephone directory.
4.4. REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in
Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall
be responsible for laying out the Work, unless otherwise noted in the Contract, shall protect and
preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the
prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever
any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in
grades or locations and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such
reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the
Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction
surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement
caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined
by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $200.00 per hour. Time shall be
computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with
a minimum charge of one hour.
SECTION III
Page 8 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
5. BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond pursuant to Section 255.05, Florida
Statutes in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and
payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in
effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due unless a longer period of
time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also
furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in
the form prescribed by the Contract Documents in Section V and shall be executed by such sureties
as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable
Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570
(amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury
Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents'
authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05,
Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety
shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to
reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or
becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project
is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be
acceptable to Owner.
5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, acquire and maintain (and cause any
Subcontractors, representatives or agents to acquire and maintain) during the term with the City,
sufficient insurance to adequately protect the respective interest of the parties. Coverage shall be
obtained with a carrier having an AM Best Rating of A -VII or better. In addition, the City has the
right to review the Contractor's deductible or self-insured retention and to require that it be reduced
or eliminated.
Specifically, the Contractor must carry the following minimum types and amounts of insurance on
an occurrence basis or in the case of coverage that cannot be obtained on an occurrence basis, then
coverage can be obtained on a claims -made basis with a minimum four (4) year tail following the
termination or expiration of this Agreement:
The following insurance limits may be achieved by a combination of primary and umbrella/excess
liability policies.
5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE
Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises
operations, products/completed operations, products liability, contractual liability, advertising
injury, personal injury, death, and property damage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one
million dollars) per occurrence and $2,000,000 (two million dollars) general aggregate.
SECTION III Page 9 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE
Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage for any owned, non -owned, hired or
borrowed automobile is required in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars)
combined single limit.
5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY
INSURANCE
Statutory Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage in accordance with the laws of the State of
Florida, and Employer's Liability Insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 (one hundred
thousand dollars) each employee each accident, $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each
employee by disease and $500,000 (five hundred thousand dollars) aggregate by disease with
benefits afforded under the laws of the State of Florida. Coverage should include Voluntary
Compensation, Jones Act, and U.S. Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act coverage where
applicable. Coverage must be applicable to Employees, Contractors, Subcontractors, and
Volunteers, if any.
5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR
OMISSIONS INSURANCE
Professional Liability/Malpractice/Errors or Omissions Insurance coverage appropriate for the
type of business engaged in by the Contractor with minimum limits of $1,000,000 (one million
dollars) per occurrence. If a claims -made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of
coverage shall be no later than the inception date of claims -made coverage, unless prior policy was
extended indefinitely to cover prior acts. Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year either
by a supplemental extended reporting period (ERP) of as great a duration as available, and with
no less coverage and with reinstated aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy provide
a retroactive date no later than the inception date of claims -made coverage.
5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY
INSURANCE
If Contractor is using its own property in connection with the performance of its obligations under
this Agreement, then Contractor's Equipment—Inland Marine Insurance and/or Property Insurance
on an "All Risks" basis with replacement cost coverage for property and equipment in the care,
custody and control of others is recommended. City is not responsible for Contractor's (or any
Subcontractors, Representatives, or Agents) equipment or property.
5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE
The City will provide at its expense, Builder's Risk Insurance for the project to cover all risks of
loss in the complete and full value of the project. Contractor agrees to cooperate in a timely manner
with providing any information or documentation required for the application and by the carrier as
the project proceeds.
5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS
Upon approval of this Agreement by City Council, and then annually upon the anniversary date(s)
of the insurance policy's renewal date(s) for as long as this Agreement remains in effect, the
Contractor will furnish the City with a Certificate of Insurance(s) (using appropriate ACORD
certificate, SIGNED by the Issuer, and with applicable endorsements) evidencing all of the
SECTION III
Page 10 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
coverage set forth above and naming the City as an "Additional Insured." In addition, when
requested in writing from the City, Contractor will provide the City with certified copies of all
applicable policies. The address where such certificates and certified policies shall be sent or
delivered is as follows:
Attn: Contract and Procurement Specialist
City of Clearwater
Engineering Department
P.O. Box 4748
Clearwater, FL 33758-4748
1. The Description (of Operations/Locations/Vehicles) should specify Project Name and Project
Number.
2. Contractor shall provide thirty (30) days written notice of any cancellation, non -renewal,
termination, material change or reduction in coverage.
3. Contractor's insurance as outlined above shall be primary and non-contributory coverage for
Contractor's negligence.
4. Contractor reserves the right to appoint legal counsel to provide for the Contractor's defense,
for any and all claims that may arise related to Agreement, work performed under this
Agreement, or to Contractor's design, equipment, or service. Contractor agrees that the City
shall not be liable to reimburse Contractor for any legal fees or costs as a result of Contractor
providing its defense as contemplated herein.
The stipulated limits of coverage above shall not be construed as a limitation of any potential
liability to the City, and the City's failure to request evidence of this insurance shall not be
construed as a waiver of Contractor's (or Subcontractors, Representatives, or Agents) obligation
to provide the insurance coverage specified.
5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS
The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on
Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured
or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages
caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in
the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against
any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights
against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and
damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and
any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for
losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party
making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so
issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer,
Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss
due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct
physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the
completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured
peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the
Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment.
SECTION III
Page 11 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
•
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such
attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method,
technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly
required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent
resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative
except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative
at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall
keep a mobile cell phone on his person, so he can be contacted whenever necessary.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's
Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, disrespectful or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be
removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of
the Owner's Representative. Contractor represents the City of Clearwater and shall conduct
themselves in a professional manner to the public at all times.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a
result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved
holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime
slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the
end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to
the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector
overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check.
Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four
hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $80.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons
or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the
Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours.
Contractor shall adhere to the Community Development Code, Section 3-1508 regarding noise
restrictions from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. any day and all -day Sunday. Contractor will not permit
overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without
Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
SECTION III
Page 12 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in
the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored,
may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment or
materials to be incorporated into the Work under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, per
Section III, Article 21. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of
Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures.
6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification
or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item
or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of
other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material
or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar
so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval.
If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does
not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor
shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine
that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an
acceptable substitute, therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be
not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's
Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. Request for substitute shall identify why a substitute is submitted and include
advantages to the Owner. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or
"or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of
acceptability.
6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction
conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list
SECTION III
Page 13 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization
for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative
for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and
organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor.
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work
under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors,
Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with
the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work
to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
obj ection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5. USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by
negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or
at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and
hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees
and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from
any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner,
SECTION III
Page 14 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon
Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work
or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish
and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment
and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not
designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.5.1. STAGING AREAS
The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and
storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. Use of right of way within the limits of
construction must be approved by the City. All applicable erosion control, tree barricade and
restoration, including time limits, specifications, etc., must be followed. Contractor must provide
portable restroom that is lockable for the safety of the Contractor and the surrounding residents.
6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS
The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially in the Right -of -Ways, is very important to
the Citizens of Clearwater therefore, these time limits are imposed:
• Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days.
• Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
• Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is
generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days.
Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• Any irrigation systems or components damaged or impacted by construction activities
shall be repaired or replaced "in-kind" within forty-eight (48) hours to minimize the
loss of turfgrass or landscape plantings, particularly during periods of drought.
• Sod must be restored "in-kind" within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a
successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations,
replacement of driveways or sidewalks or another project specific milestone. It must
be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust
control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod
restoration may be considered.
6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the
performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to
patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the
existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents.
SECTION III
Page 15 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies,
which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing
and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and
Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring
Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing
or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims,
costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be
Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in
accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's
obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above.
6.7.1. E -VERIFY
IIIIContractor and its Subcontractors shall register with and use the E -Verify system to verify the
work authorization status of all newly hired employees. Contractor will not enter into a contract
with any Subcontractor unless each party to the contract registers with and uses the E -Verify
system. Subcontractor must provide Contractor with an affidavit stating that Subcontractor does
not employ, contract with, or subcontract with an unauthorized alien. Contractor shall maintain a
copy of such affidavit.
The City may terminate this Contract on the good faith belief that Contractor or its Subcontractors
knowingly violated Florida Statutes 448.09(1) or 448.095(2)(c). If this Contract is terminated
pursuant to Florida Statute 448.095(2)(c), Contractor may not be awarded a public contract for at
least 1 year after the date of which this Contract was terminated. Contractor is liable for any
additional costs incurred by the City as a result of the termination of this Contract.
See Section 448.095, Florida Statutes (2020).
See "VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY FORM" in Appendix.
•
6.8. PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection
fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of
Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner
shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment
fees.
SECTION III
Page 16 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be
waived.
6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the
safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all
persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and
equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property
at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways,
structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or
replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or
during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and
shall cause Subcontractors, to carefully protect the Work and materials against damage or injury
from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or
materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or
any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced
at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention
program which shall include but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of
programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention
of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his
employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention
program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases
of construction, repair, alteration, or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal
protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The
Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's
employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or
risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall
remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all
persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his
employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their
safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians
and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury, or loss; and
shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall
notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
execution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal,
relocation, and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused,
directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other
person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any
of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor.
Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue
until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and
Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
SECTION III
Page 17 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.10. EMERGENCIES
III In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall
give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work
or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's
Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the
action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change
Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
•
•
6.11. DRAWINGS
6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL
REVIEW
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to
Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor
shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified
performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information
with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling,
storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all
information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.
Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other
Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each
submittal will have a transmittal cover sheet identifying the shop drawing name, number, and
technical specification reference; will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor
has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's
review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer
specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may
have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written
communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be
made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each
such variation.
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall
receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal
within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for
information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at
each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within fourteen (14)
consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for
a delay claim from the Contractor.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
SECTION III
Page 18 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop
Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct
specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on
previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will
any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the
requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to
achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves
the right to back charge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number
greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first-time submittals, per the approved
initial submittal log. Owner's Representative reserves the right to back charge Contractor for all
third submittals. The number of first-time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals
agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal
of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be back charged to Contractor
at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due
Contractor for Work completed. In the event, that Contractor requests a substitution for a
previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution
will be back charged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of
Contractor.
6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including
revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction
process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile,
of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the
Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed
during the construction period. All abandoned during construction pipes and utilities must be
clearly identified on the As-Builts including the methods used to abandon.
The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant,
and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project.
The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for
accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the
monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up redline prints do not
SECTION 111
Page 19 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
•
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay
request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by
the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The Owner's acceptance of the As -Built Drawings does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1. General
The Contractor shall prepare an AS -BUILT SURVEY per chapter 5J-17.052, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The Contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
5J-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or
vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also
known as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "AS -BUILT SURVEY" and shall be signed and sealed by a
Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater
Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the
Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of
Florida and will back charge the Contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to
provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey.
6.11.2.2. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting, and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New and replaced service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest
downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations,
manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the
plan view and also on the profile if one exists. The terminal ends of all subdrains, inverts of all
pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets shall also be noted on the plan view and also on
the profile if one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3. Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Force
Main)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting, and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans.
Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also, all new and
replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above.
Additionally, there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type
construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
SECTION III Page 20 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.11.2.4. Electrical and Control Wiring
The As -Built Drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The As -Built
Drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As -Built Survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90
(horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be
the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must
be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department.
6.11.2.6. Standards
The As -Built Survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J-17 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the As -Built Survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points
at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7. Other
The As -Built Drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1. Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1. Prefixes and Suffixes
AB-...
prefix denotes As -Built information
DI-...
prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
DEMO-...
prefix denotes demolition
P-...
prefix denotes proposed entities — line work and symbols
F-...
prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
X-...
prefix denotes existing entities — line work and symbols
... -CANOPY
Suffix denotes tree canopies
...-CL
suffix denotes centerline of road, ditch, swale etc.
...-LN
suffix denotes all linework
...-PT
suffix denotes points from survey data or from design stakeout
...-TX
suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix
6.11.3.1.2. Laver Naming Definitions:
BENCH
benchmark, temporary benchmarks
BLDG
buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
SECTION III
Page 21 of 49
Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
BOC
curbs
BOLLARD
bollards
BRUSH
brush lines
CABLE
cable TV lines and appurtenances
CONCSLAB
concrete slabs
DRIVE
driveways
EASEMENT
easements
EOP
edge of pavement without curbs
FENCE
all fences
FLOW
flow lines
GRADE
grade slopes, grade breaks
GROUND
soft ground (unpaved, unimproved)
HANDRAIL
handrails
HEDGE
hedges
LANDSCAPE
landscape areas
LOT
platted lot lines information
MISC
miscellaneous linework
MONU
property corners, monumentation
PHONE
telephone lines and appurtenances
PROPERTY
property lines information
ROAD
roads
ROW
Right -of -Way information
SEAWALL
seawalls
SHORE
shoreline, water elevation
SWALE
swales
TOB
top of bank
TOE
toe of slope
TRAFFIC
signal poles, control boxes
TREE
trees, bushes, planters
UT-ELEC
power lines and appurtenances
UT -GAS
gas lines and appurtenances
UT-RCW
reclaimed water
UT -SAN
sanitary lines and appurtenances
UT -STM
storm lines and appurtenances
UT-TCOM
telecommunication systems
UT-WAT
potable water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
WALK
sidewalk
WALL
walls, except seawall
Other layers may be created as required or needed, using above format or easy to understand logic.
6.11.3.2. Layer Properties
All AutoCAD objects shall be drawn with their General Properties to be "ByLayer", pertaining to
"Color", "Linetype", and "Lineweight".
• 6.11.3.3. Text Styles
All text shall use standard AutoCAD fonts.
SECTION III
Page 22 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
Text style for X-... (existing) layers shall use the Simplex font, oblique angle of 00, and a text
height of 0.06 times the plot scale.
Text style for P-... (proposed) and F-... (future) layers shall use the Simplex font, oblique angle
of 22.5°, and a text height of 0.1 times the plot scale.
6.11.4. DELIVERABLES
The As -Built Survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=20' unless
approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver two hard copies and one digital copy of all
drawings. Requested file formats are Autodesk DWG and Adobe PDF files.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Thomas.Mahony@myClearwater.com.
6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND
GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty
and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification, or
operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of
the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he
shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the
elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non -execution of the
Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or
damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final
acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his
own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a
period of one year from the date of final acceptance".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is
not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative,
(ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance
of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the
Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any
acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer.
6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
SECTION III
Page 23 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III —General Conditions
6.14. INDEMNIFICATION
III To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the City,
its officers, agents, and employees, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, demands,
claims, suits, losses, damages, causes of action, fines or judgments, including costs, attorneys',
witnesses', and expert witnesses' fees, and expenses incident thereto, relating to, arising out of, or
resulting from: (i) the services provided by Contractor personnel under this Agreement; (ii) any
negligent acts, errors, mistakes or omissions by Contractor or Contractor personnel; and (iii)
Contractor or Contractor personnel's failure to comply with or fulfill the obligations established
by this Agreement.
Contractor will update the City during the course of the litigation to timely notify the City of any
issues that may involve the independent negligence of the City that is not covered by this
indemnification.
The City assumes no liability for actions of Contractor and will not indemnify or hold Contractor
or any third party harmless for claims based on this Agreement or use of Contractor -provided
supplies or services.
Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, this indemnification provision shall
not be construed as a waiver of any immunity to which Owner is entitled or the extent of any
limitation of liability pursuant to § 768.28, Florida Statutes. Furthermore, this provision is not
intended to nor shall be interpreted as limiting or in any way affecting any defense Owner may
have under § 768.28, Florida Statutes or as consent to be sued by third parties.
6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
IIIContractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in
company contact information. This includes contact phone, address, project manager, email
addresses, etc.
•
6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS
The CONTRACTOR will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes.
IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION
OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, TO THE CONTRACTOR'S DUTY
TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT,
CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS, Rosemarie Call, phone:
727-562-4092 or Rosemarie.Call@myclearwater.com, 600 Cleveland Street, Suite 600,
Clearwater, FL 33755.
The Contractor's duty to comply with public records law applies specifically to:
a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public
agency") to perform the service being provided by the Contractor hereunder.
b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public
agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or
copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in
Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise
provided by law.
c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public
records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the
SECTION 111
Page 24 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the Contractor
does not transfer the records to the public agency.
d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public
records in possession of the Contractor or keep and maintain public records required by
the public agency to perform the service. If the Contractor transfers all public records to
the public agency upon completion of the contract, the Contractor shall destroy any
public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure
requirements. If the Contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of
the contract, the Contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for the retaining public
records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon
request from the public agency's custodian of public records in a format that is
compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency.
e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for
services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess
the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the Contractor of the
request and the Contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the
records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time.
f) The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the Contractor does not comply
with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract
provisions in accordance with the contract.
g) A Contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a
reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes.
h) If a civil action is filed against a Contractor to compel production of public records
relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award
against the Contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney
fees, if:
1. The court determines that the Contractor unlawfully refused to comply with
the public records request within a reasonable time; and
2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written
notice of the public request, including a statement that the Contractor has not
complied with the request, to the public agency and to the Contractor.
i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of
public records and to the Contractor at the Contractor's address listed on its contract with
the public agency or to the Contractor's registered agent. Global Express Guaranteed, or
certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery,
which may be in an electronic format.
j) A Contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the
notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement.
7. OTHER WORK
7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE
The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform
work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the
project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes.
The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work
will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is
SECTION III
Page 25 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the
Contractor's work or schedule.
7.2. COORDINATION
If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the
following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime Contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all
communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative.
The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly
and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the
Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer
may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's
right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
9.1. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will
either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties,
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are
set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner
and Engineer.
SECTION III
Page 26 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the
requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal
responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which
shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other
clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's
Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and
Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the
amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the
Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's
Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the
Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed
Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's
Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders,
see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with
Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to
Contractor and Completion.
9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other
matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the
Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under
the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will
be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be
delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement
promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving
rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other
party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's
Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more
accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit
any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's
Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's
written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner
SECTION III
Page 27 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty
(30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a
Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or
(ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention
to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor
to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision
and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction
to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days
of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the
Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise
by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the
Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other
matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other
provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good
faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise
or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose
or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of
them.
Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible
for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative
will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the work.
Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and
certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by
the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and
approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants.
SECTION III
Page 28 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
10. CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time
or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions,
or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change
Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work
involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents
(except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work
Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract
Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as
amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case
of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for
Uncovering Work.
The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Owner's Representative covering:
• changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of
acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or
correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or
(iii) agreed to by the parties;
• changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
• changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any
written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions
on Disputes;
• provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from
any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and
applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on
the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing
the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable
to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or
undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price.
The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any
claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the
general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to
Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the
occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting
SECTION III
Page 29 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless
Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate
data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the
claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said
occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted
in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any
claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work
involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such
unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by
unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may
include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices
contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the
Work.
Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and
Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed
changes in the Work, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for
compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, Subcontractors, and other items
of direct costs required for the directed work.
The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:
1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual
payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes
established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with
negotiating the subject change.
2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall
be substantiated through vendors' invoices.
3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs
if specifically used for the Work. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental
rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the
full -unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and
shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated
with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be
paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost
combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated
operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment
on stand-by.
4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater.
The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the
Contractor or Subcontractor.
A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work
is performed by a Subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent
(5%), and the Subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%).
B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above.
C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4.
SECTION III Page 30 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION 111— General Conditions
The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision,
overhead, profit, and other general expense.
11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE
ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's
costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other
expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the
allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's
Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be
correspondingly adjusted.
11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids
and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's
Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to
be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The
Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity
of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from
the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes
that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional
expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price
contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the
construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and
completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change
order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction
of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable
deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid.
12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's
Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the
SECTION III
Page 31 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence,
unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data
in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the
adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled
as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or
Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements
of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or
Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may
be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as
provided in the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension
of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be
Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or
agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within
the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited
to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or
other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work.
13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL
OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work
for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing
personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or
approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required
certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner
SECTION III
Page 32 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and
obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for
Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or
of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase
thereof for incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by
Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this
paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative
and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative
has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if
requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and
replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price
for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however,
such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract
Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim
therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to
any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this
paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract
Price.
13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either
correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has
SECTION III
Page 33 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with
Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or
resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required
by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is
found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with
the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the
Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily
correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom.
If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency
where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work
corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages
caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs
of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically, and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner
prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation
of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's
Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner
Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating
the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall
be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change
of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for
final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner.
13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to
correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's
Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if
Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor
fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven
SECTION III Page 34 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights
and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such
corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take
possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's
Representatives, Agents and Employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's
Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to
exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages
incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against
Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease
in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims,
costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's
defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones)
because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of
the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein.
Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed.
14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review
an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed once
each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's
Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will
only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor,
and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for
Payment for the total of all Work, including As -Built Survey and Inspector overtime
reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work
covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of
any portion of the Work under contract.
The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and
work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official
Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up
As -Built Drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract
Documents.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative
may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any
progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all Subcontractors and Suppliers have
been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the Contractor to provide the report
as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report
is provided.
SECTION III
Page 35 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
• Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any
Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no
later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall
be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional
sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants
that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens,
claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims
growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics,
materialmen, and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all
supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the
Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of nature hereinabove
designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner
may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the
Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money
deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is
furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be
resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this
sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety.
In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor
and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract
by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment
made in good faith.
•
•
14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and
process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment
unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review
and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be
paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected,
notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing
payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying
deficiencies, and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case,
Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's
Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner.
Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because
of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any
such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner
Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is
defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the
Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required
to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual
knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work
and Termination.
The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's
Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of
Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with
the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to
SECTION III
Page 36 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner
to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of
the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in
accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or
Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount
so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor
corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which
(i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with
Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part
of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete.
If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to
Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete
and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part
of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in
writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and
substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner,
Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the
Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to
be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in
writing giving the reasons, therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially
complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will
apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the
division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
14.5. FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,
Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and
will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection
reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final
punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this
work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any
corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all
the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take
such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative
and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating
instructions, As -Built, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance
SECTION III
Page 37 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime
reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make
application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application
for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called
for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by
paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, and (ii) executed consent of the surety to final payment using
the form contained in Section V of the Contract Documents.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final
Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating
the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or
corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished
as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment
of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted
by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment
shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment
shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner' s Representative
is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract
Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his
recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon,
Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is
acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return
the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and
substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay Contractor the amount
recommended by Owner's Representative.
14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those
previously made in writing and still unsettled.
SECTION III
Page 38 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which
will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so
fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an
approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of
Contract Time.
15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events:
• Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or
suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted
from time to time);
• Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
• Contractor violates Article 6.7.1 of this Section III;
• Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative;
• Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this
Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner,
or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as
herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner
that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work
or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed;
• Lack of funding. The City's performance and obligation to pay under this Contract is
contingent upon an annual appropriation by the Clearwater City Council.
The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to
the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances,
construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be
used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the
Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor
but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such
case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If
the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages sustained
by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to
Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be
reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's
Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or
remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the
Work performed.
SECTION III
Page 39 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect
any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter
accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release
Contractor from liability.
Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate
the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
• for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents
prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead
and profit on such Work;
• for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
• for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others;
• and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic
loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
(90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's
Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to
be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's
Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if
the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not
be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an
Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for
thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon
seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until
payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to
preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change
of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping
Work as permitted by this article.
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise
SECTION III Page 40 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided,
however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration.
17. MISCELLANEOUS
17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other
documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be
determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner.
17.2. GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the
notice.
17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error,
omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents
or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other
party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of
this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any
applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to
notice of assignment.
17.6. RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to three (3)
years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in
the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and
the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department.
SECTION III
Page 41 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS
IIII All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers
and/or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs. For availability or pricing contact City of
Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, by phone: (727) 562-4929.
•
•
18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
19. MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General
Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications and Technical
Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. In the case of an
inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by
addendum, the better quality, more stringent or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in
accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation.
21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP)
21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS
The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials or equipment for the
Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner
is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other
applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's
Work. Owner -purchasing of construction materials or equipment, if selected, will be administered
on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the
materials or equipment purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax, even if the
actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials or equipment as -bid by the Contractor. For
purposes of calculating Engineering Fees, Contractor Fees, Architects' Fees, and any other
amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall
be used.
Direct purchase shall be considered for single items or materials that exceed $10,000 in value
and/or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an
ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, equipment, and materials for consideration as
ODP materials or equipment (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix).
SECTION III
Page 42 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK
Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copy of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification
of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials or
equipment. Invoices for ODP materials or equipment shall be issued to the Owner, and a copy sent
to the Contractor.
Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials or equipment by the Owner to the Contractor's
possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials or
equipment; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or
delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor.
21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials or
equipment furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities,
verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining
all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance
of the goods at the time of delivery. The Owner shall coordinate with Contractor and Vendor
delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally
required by the Contractor for the particular materials or equipment furnished. The Contractor
shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials or equipment. The
Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever
nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor.
As ODP materials or equipment are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect
all shipments from the suppliers and approve the vendor's invoice for items delivered. The
Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials or equipment is accompanied by
documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This
documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and/or an invoice from the supplier conforming to
the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The
Contractor will then forward an electronic copy of the invoice and supporting documentation to
the Owner for payment within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of said goods or materials.
Such payment shall be directly from public funds, from Owner to Vendor.
The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials or equipment conform to the Specifications and
determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials or equipment are
patently defective, and whether such materials or equipment are identical to the materials or
equipment ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers
defective or non -conformities in ODP materials or equipment upon such visual inspection, the
Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials or equipment in the
Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming
condition so that repair or replacement of those materials or equipment can occur without undue
delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise
incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials or
equipment, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an
inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from
Contractor's incorporation of such materials or equipment into the Project, including liquidated
damages.
SECTION III
Page 43 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES, AND INDEMNIFICATION
III The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials or equipment it incorporates into
Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials or equipment in its possession. The Contractor
shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials or equipment delivered into the
Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials or equipment which have been
incorporated in the Contractor's Work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for
all materials, equipment and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair,
maintenance, or damage -repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the
appropriate supplier, vendor, or Subcontractor.
The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and
penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases
made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final
determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject
to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not
subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed
assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials
or equipment. ODP Purchase Orders must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor
Purchase Order. If material costs needed for project exceed the ODP Purchase Order amount, the
ODP Purchase Order will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP Purchase Order will be
paid for by the Contractor.
• 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF
CONSTRUCTION
•
22.1. GENERAL
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius,
unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating
the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing
the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction;
general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption
and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name,
Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for
residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the
proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample
door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of
construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be
a minimum of 4-1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences
and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to
the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all
Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access
routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice
period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries
during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive
citizen inquires after business hours.
SECTION III Page 44 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
22.2. EXAMPLE
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE: / /
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing the (state project name) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property
owners of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not
be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner
wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-
of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any
particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager
at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public
funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this
purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during
the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work.
Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be
SECTION III
Page 45 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
•
SECTION III — General Conditions
included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV,
SCOPE OF WORK.
23.2. PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined
after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on
sign at the preconstruction conference.
23.3. FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size. Sign material shall be Aluminum DIBOND or
exterior grade plywood with a minimum thickness of 1/2 -inches painted white on both sides with
exterior rated paint. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (3 %2"x3 %2")
below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts
shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum
of 24 -inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed
structure can be considered for approval.
23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24 -inches by 30 -inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached
to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 -inches or
thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable
sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade.
23.5. SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering
shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign
itself. Each sign shall depict the City's logo. The Project Manager/City Representative shall
provide the appropriate electronic logo file(s) to the Contractor.
23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project
site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian
or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will
be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs
will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work
on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations
at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place
until the request for final payment.
23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal, and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
SECTION 111 Page 46 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
Project Sign Details:
Font Type: Franklin Gothic Medium, (ALL CAPS)
Font Colors: Blue - Pantone 3015 and Black.
24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written Notice to Proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article
2 of these General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number
of consecutive calendar days as determined in Section IV, Scope of Work. Contract Time to
commence at start date noted on the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work
within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day,
for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays,
Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on
Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of
the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of
SECTION III
Page 47 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8)
day for each Inspector given such assignment.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance.
25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS
OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION
FORM AND ISRAEL CERTIFICATION FORM
Pursuant to Section 287.135, Florida Statutes, any vendor, company, individual, principal,
subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in
business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for,
or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount
equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Any vendor, company, individual,
principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or
is engaged in a boycott of Israel, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or
enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for ANY amount.
Each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of
Clearwater that it is not on the aforementioned lists, or engaged in business operations in Cuba or
Syria, or engaged in a boycott of Israel at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in
accordance with Section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes
specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria,
including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing,
leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real
property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. Boycott Israel or
boycott of Israel means refusing to deal, terminating business activities, or taking other actions to
limit commercial relations with Israel, or persons or entities doing business in Israel or in Israeli -
controlled territories, in a discriminatory manner. A statement by a company that it is participating
in a boycott of Israel, or that it has initiated a boycott in response to a request for a boycott of Israel
or in compliance with, or in furtherance of, calls for a boycott of Israel, may be considered as
evidence that a company is participating in a boycott of Israel.
The certification forms (the Certification) are attached hereto, and must be submitted, along with
all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure
to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If the City of
Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed on the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities
in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or
engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, or engaged in a boycott of Israel, then the contract
may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false
certification, the City of Clearwater, on a case-by-case basis and in its sole discretion, may allow
a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract for goods or services,
if the conditions set forth in Section 287.135, Florida Statutes, apply.
The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as
provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification forms.
SECTION III Page 48 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
SECTION III — General Conditions
See Section V of the Contract for Certification Forms to be executed and submitted with the
Bid/Proposal Form.
SECTION III
Page 49 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021
• SECTION IIIA
•
•
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
These Supplemental General Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All
provisions that are not so amended or supplementary remain in full force and effect. The terms
used in these Supplemental General Conditions have the meanings stated in the General
Conditions.
1. In Paragraph 1 Definitions, delete the definition for Contract Time in its entirety and
insert the following in its place:
Contract Time - The number of days or the dates stated in the Contract to: (i) achieve Milestones,
if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) achieve Final Completion.
2. In Paragraph 1 Definitions, add the following new paragraph:
Final Completion — The time at which the Work has progressed to the point where, in the opinion
of the Engineer, the Work, including all "punch list" items, is fully and finally completed in a good
and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the Contract Documents; is free of all defects and
deficiencies; all required final governmental inspections and approvals have been obtained; and
all final paperwork, including that necessary to prepare a Final Change Order (if required), has
been submitted and approved.
3. Delete Paragraph 2.3 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE
PROJECT
The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. The
Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No
Work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. A Notice
to Proceed may be issued at any time within 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. A
Notice to Proceed will not be issued prior to the Contractor providing the City a certified copy of
the recorded payment and performance bond, pursuant to §255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes.
4. In Paragraph 6.1, delete the last sentence in the 4th paragraph and insert the following in
its place:
The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be the City's actual cost per hour, not to exceed
$120 per hour. When inspection is being provided by the Engineer or a consultant to the City, the
cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be 3.0 times the Engineer's or consultant's direct
technical labor cost.
Section IIIA.docx Page 1 of 4 4/7/23
5. In Paragraph 6.11.1, delete the first full sentence of the first paragraph and insert the
following in its place:
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples as called for in the Technical Specifications,
and all other items specified to be submitted in the Division 1 specifications, to Engineer for review
as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. Items required to be
submitted in accordance with Division 1 shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements
for Shop Drawings as specified in the General Requirements.
6. Delete the last paragraph in Paragraph 6.11.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its
place:
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy. Owner
reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for Engineer's actual direct technical labor cost times
a 3.0 multiplier for the review of any first time submittals that account for a number greater than
fifty (50), not to exceed $400 each. Contractor may combine or group similar items into a single
submittal, such as valves or valve O&M manuals, or may group submittals pertaining to a single
item into a single submittal, such as a valve shop drawing and the corresponding O&M manual.
Contractor shall not combine unrelated items into a single submittal, such as valves and concrete
mix. Owner reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for Engineer's actual direct technical
labor cost times a 3.0 multiplier for the review of any re -submittals, or submittals requiring
confirmation, that account for a number greater than ten (10), not to exceed a cost of $300 each.
In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's
costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless
the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. Said costs shall be Engineer's
actual direct technical labor cost times a 3.0 multiplier, not to exceed $400 each.
7. Delete Paragraph 24 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
24 CONTRACT TIMES AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
24.1 Time is of the Essence
24.1.1 It is mutually agreed between the parties that time is of the essence. All Contract Time(s)
for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, Final Completion and readiness for final payment
as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
24.2 Substantial Completion
24.2.1 Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within 153 days from the date
on which Owner issues Contractor a Notice to Proceed.
24.2.2 The term Substantial Completion means the time at which the Work has progressed to the
point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work is otherwise sufficiently complete in accordance
with the Contract Documents, so that the Work can be utilized for the purposes for which it is
Section IIIA.docx Page 2 of 4 4/7/23
•
•
•
•
intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or
part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
24.3 Final Completion
24.3.1 Contractor shall achieve Final Completion of the Work within 183 days from the date on
which Owner issues Contractor a Notice to Proceed.
24.4 Liquidated Damages
24.4.1 Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence of this Contract and that Owner
will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified herein, plus any
extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. The parties
also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration
proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly,
instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for
delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay as follows:
24.4.2 In the event Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the time
specified above, Contractor shall be required to pay Owner the sum as specified in the Contract
per day for each and every calendar day elapsing after the time specified above, until the Contractor
has achieved Substantial Completion.
• 24.4.3 In the event Contractor fails to achieve Final Completion of the Work within the time
•
specified above, the Owner shall also have the right to:
A. Terminate the Contractor without further notice;
B. Complete any of the remaining items and backcharge Contractor for all costs incurred,
and exercise all other rights and remedies available at law or in equity.
Section IIIA.docx Page 3 of 4 4/7/23
Section IIIA.docx
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Page 4 of 4 4/7/23
•
•
• SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Content:
100 SERIES: GENERAL 1
101. SCOPE OF WORK 1
102. FIELD ENGINEERING 1
102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 1
102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 2
103. DEFINITION OF TERMS 2
103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS 2
104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 3
105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 3
105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 3
105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 3
105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 3
105-4. EQUIPMENT 3
105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION 3
105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION 4
III
105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION 4
105-8. LIGHTING 4
105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL 4
105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX 4
105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE 4
105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 5
106. STREET SIGNS 5
107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5
107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5
107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 5
107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 6
107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 7
107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 7
107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 7
107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 7
108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 8
108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS 8
108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 8
200 SERIES: SITEWORK 9
201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND INFRASTRUCTURE WORK 9
201-1. EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION FOR UNDERGROUND
• INFRASTRUCTURE 10
202. OBSTRUCTIONS 21
SECTION IV i 6/2/2021
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
203. DEWATERING 22
203-1. GENERAL 22
203-2. OBSERVATION WELLS 23
203-3. PUMPING AND DRAINAGE - GENERAL 23
203-4. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 27
204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 28
204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 28
204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 28
205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 28
206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 28
206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 29
206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 29
207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 29
207-1. GENERAL 29
207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL 29
207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 29
207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 30
207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 30
207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 30
207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 30
207-8. MAINTENANCE 30
207-9. COMPLIANCE 30
208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH
EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES 31
208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS 31
208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION 31
208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL 31
208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL 31
208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY 32
208-6. RIP -RAP 32
208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL 32
209. MAINTENANCE OF OPERATIONS 32
209-1. GENERAL 32
209-2. EXECUTION 32
209-3. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 34
210. DETECTION OF FACILITIES 34
211. RELOCATIONS 35
211-1. RELOCATION SHOWN ON DRAWINGS 35
211-2. RELOCATIONS NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS 35
212. RESTORATION PROCEDURES 35
212-1. INTERIM RESTORATION 35
212-2. FINAL RESTORATION 35
300 SERIES: MATERIALS 37
301. CONCRETE 37
302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 37
SECTION IV ii Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
410
302-1. EXCAVATION 37
302-2. FORMS 37
303. REINFORCEMENT 37
303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 38
304. BACKFILL 38
304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL 38
304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION 38
305. RIPRAP 39
305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 39
305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 39
306. FLOWABLE FILL 40
307. MATERIAL INDEPENDENT TESTING 41
400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 42
401. SANITARY MANHOLES 42
401-1. BUILT UP TYPE 42
401-2. PRECAST TYPE 43
401-3. DROP MANHOLES 45
401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS 45
401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS 45
401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 45
401-7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 45
• 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 45
402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 45
403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 45
403-1. MATERIALS 45
403-2. INSTALLATION 46
403-3. INSPECTIONS OF LINES AND MANHOLES 46
403-4. TESTING 48
403-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 48
404. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE SANITARY SEWER REHABILITATION 49
404-1. GENERAL 49
404-2. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT 50
404-3. SUBMITTALS 50
404-4. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) FOR GRAVITY SEWER MAINS 51
404-5. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) FOR SERVICE LATERALS 54
405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 58
405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT 58
405-2. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT 59
405-3. CEMENTITIOUS COATING SYSTEM 60
405-4. RAVEN 405 EPDXY COATING SYSTEM 64
405-5. SPRAYWALL POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM 68
405-6. INTERNAL MANHOLE CORBEL SEALING SYSTEM 72
406. SMOKE AND DYE TESTING 75
• 406-1. GENERAL PROTOCOL 75
406-2. REPORTING 75
SECTION IV iii Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
406-3. DYE INVESTIGATION 77
406-4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 79
406-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 79
500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE
LINES AND APPURTENANCES 80
501. SCOPE 80
502. MATERIALS 80
502-1. GENERAL 80
502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 80
502-3. GATE VALVES 92
502-4. VALVE BOXES 93
502-5. HYDRANTS 94
502-6. SERVICE SADDLES/ POLYETHYLENE SERVICE LINES 95
502-7. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 96
502-8. TAPPING SLEEVES AND LINESTOPS 96
502-9. LINE STOPPING ASSEMBLIES 98
502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 99
503. CONSTRUCTION 99
503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING 99
503-2. PIPE LAYING 100
503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 118
503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING POTABLE WATER OR RECLAIMED WATER LINES
121
504. PIPELINE CLEANING 122
504-1. PIPELINE PIGGING 122
504-2. FINAL PIPELINE FLUSHING 123
505. TESTS 123
505-1. HYDROSTATIC PIPELINE TESTING 123
505-2. NOTICE OF TEST 124
506. DISINFECTION AND TESTING 124
506-1. DISINFECTION MATERIALS 124
506-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM 125
506-3. FINAL DISINFECTION PROCEDURE FOR POTABLE WATER MAINS 125
506-4. FLUSHING AND RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 127
506-5. BACTERIALOGICAL TESTS 127
507. CORRECTION OF NON -CONFORMING WORK 128
508. OBTAINING WATER FOR FLUSHING AND TESTING 128
509. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 128
509-1. GENERAL 128
509-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 129
509-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 129
509-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS
129
509-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 129
600 SERIES: STORMWATER 131
SECTION IV iv Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
• 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 131
601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 131
602. UNDERDRAINS 131
602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 131
602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 131
603. STORM SEWERS 132
603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION 132
603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 132
604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES 133
604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 133
604-2. PRECAST TYPE 133
604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT 134
605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 134
605-1. MATERIAL 134
605-2. PERFORMANCE 135
700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 136
701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS,
SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 136
702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 136
702-1. BASE 136
702-2. SUBGRADE 138
703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 138
703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 138
703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY
ASSURANCE 139
703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 139
703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 139
703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 139
703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 140
703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES AND APPURTANENCES 140
703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 141
703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 141
703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 141
704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 142
705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS 142
705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 142
705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 142
706. CONCRETE CURBS 142
706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 143
706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 143
707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 143
• 707-1.143 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 143
707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 144
SECTION IV v Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV -Technical Specifications
707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 144 •
707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 144
708. MILLING OPERATIONS 144
708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 144
708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 144
708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 145
708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 145
708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 145
708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 145
708-7. TYPES OF MILLING 145
708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 146
708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 146
708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 146
800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 147
801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 147
801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 147
802. SIGNING AND MARKING 147
802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 148
803. ROADWAY LIGHTING 148
803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 148
900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 149
901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 149
902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 149
902-1. IRRIGATION 149
902-2. LANDSCAPE 155
903. SODDING 165
904. SEEDING 166
905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 166
905-1. SCOPE 166
905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK 166
905-3. WORK METHODS 167
906. LEVEL OF SERVICE 168
907. COMPLETION OF WORK 169
908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 169
909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 169
910. TREE PROTECTION 169
910-1. TREE BARRICADES 169
910-2. ROOT PRUNING 170
910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING 171
911. IRRIGATION SYSTEM DESIGN 171
912. IRRIGATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION 172
SECTION IV vi Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
100 SERIES: GENERAL
101. SCOPE OF WORK
Project Name: East WTF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation Project
Project Number: 13 -0016 -UT
Scope of Work:
The scope of work includes the following: demolition and disposal of the existing odor control scrubber
tower; demolition and disposal of the influent pumps and piping assembly; the installation of new bypass
manhole; the installation of the new influent pumps and pipe assembly; the replacement of the existing
influent flow meter assembly; the application of new coating inside the wet well and bypass manhole; the
installation of a new large bubble mixing system and a new spray cleaning system; the installation of new
electrical equipment; and the operation of temporary bypass pumping during construction.
The Contractor shall provide copies of a current Contractor License/Registration with the state of Florida
and Pinellas County in the bid response.
The Contractor shall provide (1) fixed project signs as described in Section III, Section 23 of the Contract
Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on
the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required at no
additional cost to the city due to the Contractor's schedule of work.
Contract Period: 480 Consecutive Calendar Days
102. FIELD ENGINEERING
102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for
the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site
improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also
included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction
methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the State of Florida.
The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -Built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final
payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Section 6.11.2 of these Contract
Documents.
102-1.1. GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or
provided by the city. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent
reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers,
the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markers. In the event that markers must be
SECTION IV
Page 1 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them
referenced and reset by a Professional Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida.
102-1.2. LAYOUT DATA
The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings.
Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall
be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project.
102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
If line and grade is supplied by the city, at the completion of all work the Contractor shall be responsible to
have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction
of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line
and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate
of $200.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in
one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $200.00. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of
As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General
Conditions), Section 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents.
103. DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the Purpose of these Technical Specifications, the Definition of Terms from Section III, Article 1 —
Definitions of these Contract Documents shall apply.
For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate
of quantities as shown on the Proposal is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which
the award of the contract is to be made. The city does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities
will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstandings
or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other
conditions or situations pertaining thereto.
The basis of payment for work and materials will be the actual amount of work done and materials
furnished. Contractor agrees that they will make no claim for damages, anticipated profits, or otherwise on
account of any difference between the amounts of work performed and materials actually furnished and the
estimated amounts thereof.
103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state
authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published
at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
The most stringent specification prevails in the case where more than one specification is referenced for the
same task.
Contractor shall utilize applicable Florida Depat liuent of Transportation (FDOT) Standards and
Specifications for tasks that are not covered by city's Standards and Specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 2 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, trenches shall be bridged in an open
and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and
also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of
constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer.
•
•
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
105. AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS
105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along
the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots
or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre -construction conditions.
105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area.
105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio/video recording
shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the
business of pre -construction color audio/video recording documentation. Use of drones must be in
accordance with Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations.
105-4. EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials, and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor.
The total audio/video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be
free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording
shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from
distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio/video coverage may be required in areas not
accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking.
105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION
Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e.,
viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a
corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing
the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed
identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video
portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations.
105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time
of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day, and year. The time information shall
SECTION IV
Page 3 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
contain the hour, minutes, and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such
information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the
viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen.
Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will
be clearly viewed during video playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such
as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be
properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality.
105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall
establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed
construction location will not be readily apparent to the video viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be
placed by the Contractor in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction.
When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance
between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed ten feet (10'). The camera shall be firmly mounted
such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
105-8. LIGHTING
All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No videoing shall be done during precipitation,
mist, or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient light is present to properly illuminate the
subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects.
105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the
number, size, and value of the surface features within the construction area's zone of influence. The rate of
speed in the general direction of travel used during videoing shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute.
105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX
All videos shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by video number and project title.
Each video shall have a log of that video's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage
contained on the video in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning
and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if
reasonably available) and the date.
105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE
Video coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction
supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing
driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts,
fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the area covered by the project. Of
particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited
to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time.
105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in
the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
SECTION IV Page 4 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
106. STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is prohibited.
All street signs shall be removed, covered, or relocated by the city's Traffic Engineering Division in
accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The Contractor shall notify the city's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours
in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE
TRAFFIC CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control
associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any
other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points.
107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance
outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas
County and/or the FDOT for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI,
Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and
Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S.
Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or
most recent addition. This plan shall be reviewed and approved by city Engineering Department Traffic
Operations personnel regardless if Maintenance of Traffic (MOT) plan details are included in the contract
plans.
107-2.1. WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety are to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and
motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by
meeting the following specific objectives:
• Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
• Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation they will be facing as the driver
proceeds through or around the work zone.
• Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
• Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
• Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
• Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
• Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance
work zones.
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved
pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone
pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours shall be provided by
SECTION IV
Page 5 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
appropriate signs." Per the 2014 FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction or latest
revision.
FDOT Design Standards (DS): 102-5 Traffic Control, 102-5.1 Standards, are the minimum standards for
the use in the development of all traffic control plans (use the latest edition).
All traffic control plans must be submitted to the city Engineering Department, Traffic Operations Division
for review and approval prior to installation. Contractor shall also provide notification to city Engineering,
Traffic Operations Division a minimum of 72 -hours in advance of mobilization. Approved MOT must
always be on site and accessible to the city Project Manager and/ or Representative.
107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements
increases with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access
routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures
are allowed without prior approval by the City Engineer or designated Representative (Engineering Traffic
Operations Manager).
107-3.1. ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County or Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
107-3.1.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the
construction process.
107-3.2. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL
COLLECTORS
Consult with city Engineering Traffic Operations Division staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
107-3.2.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of seven (7) day notice period prior to road closure and potentially
longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
107-3.3. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
107-3.3.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Releases can be issued as PowerPoint Presentation for C -View System utilizing television monitors.
107-3.4. MAJOR ARTERIALS
107-3.4.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Releases shall be issued by the city Public Communication Department. The Message Board may
need to be displayed for a period longer than seven (7) days.
SECTION IV
Page 6 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification
of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations
Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone (727) 562-4747, for the
purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. All maintenance of traffic
(MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the
preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. Contractor is required to submit the MOT preparer's
accreditation along with the plan submittal.
107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
OPERATION
The city Engineering Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and
traffic control devices of the Contractor. The city's Construction Inspector assigned to the project may make
known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall
take direction from the city representative.
107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs
associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise.
107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Ill SUPERVISOR
•
The city may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project
have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification
or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional
current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will
be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified
supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is
being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty-four (24) hour per day basis and shall review
the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite
Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and
handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are
corrected within a twenty-four (24) hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an
emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide
alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this sub section may be grounds
for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic
Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities
except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance
and safety.
SECTION IV
Page 7 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE
108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS
When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall utilize one of the following
options:
Option 1: Having the power lines de -energized and visibly grounded.
Option 2: Maintaining a minimum distance of twenty feet (20') of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV
and fifty feet (50') of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV.
Option 3: Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the following table.
108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES
VOLTAGE
[nominal, kV,
alternating current]
MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE
[feet]
Up to 50
10
Over 50 to 200
15
Over 200 to 350
20
Over 350 to 500
25
Over 500 to 750
35
Over 750 to 1,000
45
Over 1,000
(as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer
who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and
distribution)
Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up
to and including 200kV.
The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the National Electric Code and all
applicable local codes and regulations
SECTION IV
Page 8 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 200 SERIES: SITEWORK
•
•
201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND
INFRASTRUCTURE WORK
The Contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which
provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the
workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The Contractor's methods of work will
be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies,
particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation.
Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and
compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the
Contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the Contractor is to consider all
excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The
Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry,
location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface
encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The
Contractor shall submit to the city if requested prior to the start of work a safety plan for the excavation and
work activities. The Contractor will identify their Competent Person to city staff at the start of construction.
Clearwater Fire Dept. requires a Trench Permit and site inspection for any depths greater than five feet (5')
and any excavation that exceeds twenty feet (20') shall require the submittal of a trench shoring plan
prepared by a Professional Engineer actively licensed in the State of Florida.
City staff is required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar
activity in an excavation prepared by the Contractor. City staff, in conformance with the OSHA Excavation
Safety Requirements, is to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The city's
staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the city's staff,
the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform to OSHA requirements. If this
circumstance occurs, the Contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide
alternate means for the accomplishment of the city's work at the Contractor's expense.
The construction quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract do not contain sufficient
quantities to allow the Contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby
no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without
a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench -
shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the
amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project.
Not more than four hundred feet (400') of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed
work unless written permission is received from the city and/or the Engineer for the distance specified. For
pipe installation projects, the trench shall be a minimum of six inches (6") wider on each side than the
greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The
bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest
throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, except at joints, below the grade of its
bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such
manner as the Engineer shall direct, without additional compensation.
SECTION IV
Page 9 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
201-1. EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION FOR
UNDERGROUND INFRASTRUCTURE
201-1.1. GENERAL
Scope of Work: The work included under this Section consists of dewatering, excavating, trenching,
sheeting/shoring, grading, backfilling, and compacting those soil materials required for the construction of
the structures, piping, ditches, utility structures and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified
herein.
Definitions:
A. Maximum Density: Maximum weight in pounds per cubic foot of a specific material as determined
by ASTM D1557.
B. Optimum Moisture Content: The optimum moisture content shall be determined by ASTM D 1557
specified to determine the maximum dry density for relative compaction. Field moisture content
shall be determined on the basis of the fraction passing the 3/4 -inch sieve.
C. Rock Excavation: Excavation of any hard -natural substance which requires the use of special
impact tools such as jack hammers, sledges, chisels, or similar devices specifically designed for
use in cutting or breaking rock, but exclusive of trench excavating machinery.
D. Suitable Soil Materials: Suitable materials for fills shall be a non -cohesive, non -plastic granular
local sand and shall be free from vegetation, organic material, marl, silt or muck and shall be
classified as A-1, A-3 or A-2-4 in accordance with AASHTO Designation M-145. Not more than
10 percent (%) by weight of fill material shall pass the No. 200 Sieve. The Contractor shall furnish
all additional fill material required.
E. Unsuitable Soil Materials: Unsuitable materials are classified as A-2-5, A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-
6, A-7, and A-8 in accordance with AASHTO Designation M-145.
Plan for Earthwork:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined to his satisfaction, prior to the
submission of his bid, the conformation of the ground, the character and quality of the substrata,
the types and quantities of materials to be encountered, the nature of the groundwater conditions,
the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any
way affect the work under this Contract according to the General Conditions.
B. Prior to commencing the excavation, the Contractor shall submit a plan of his proposed operations,
including maintenance of traffic, to the Engineer and the city for review and approval. The
Contractor shall consider, and his plan for excavation shall reflect, the equipment and methods to
be employed in the excavation. The prices established in the Proposal for the work to be done will
reflect all costs pertaining to the work. No claims for extras based on substrata or groundwater table
conditions shall be allowed.
Trench Safety:
A. All trench excavations which exceed 5 feet in depth shall comply at all times with the applicable
trench safety standards as stated in the OSHA excavation safety standards 29 CFR S. 1926.650
Subpart P as regulated and administered by the Florida Department of Labor and Employment
Security as the "Florida Trench Safety Act".
B. The Contractor shall comply with all of the requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act. The
Contractor shall acknowledge that included in various items of his bid proposal and in the total bid
price are costs for complying with the provisions of the Act.
Testing: A Certified Testing Laboratory employed by the Contractor shall make such tests as are required
to demonstrate compliance with these specifications. The Contractor shall schedule his work to permit a
SECTION IV
Page 10 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
reasonable time for testing before placing succeeding lifts and shall keep the laboratory informed of his
progress. All costs for all testing shall be paid by the Contractor.
Changed Job Conditions: If, in the opinion of the Engineer or the city Representative, conditions
encountered during construction warrant a change in the structure footing elevation, or in the depth of
removal of unsuitable material from that indicated in the soils report, an adjustment will be made in the
contract price as provided in the General and Special Conditions.
Utility Construction Surveys:
A. Prior to commencing excavation, backfill or dewatering for utilities, the Contractor shall conduct a
survey of those existing structures which, in the opinion of the Engineer, may be subject to
settlement or distress resulting from excavation or dewatering operations.
B. The Contractor shall monitor the structures surveyed to ascertain evidence of settlement or distress
during construction. If settlement or distress becomes evident, the Contractor shall be required to
repair the structures to the previous condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the city. All
costs for repairs shall be paid by the Contractor.
Submittals:
A. Submit to the Engineer for review the proposed methods of construction, including dewatering,
excavation, bedding, filling, compaction, and backfilling for the various portions of the work.
Review shall be for method only. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the adequacy and
safety of the methods.
B. Submit to the Engineer for review and approval the sieve analyses and soil classifications
completed by the Geotechnical Engineer hired by the Contractor, for materials to be used for pipe
bedding and trench and structural backfill including Structural Fill, Class I and Class II soil
materials, Crushed Stone bedding materials and Coarse Sand materials.
C. Submit to the Engineer for review, the soil compaction results
201-1.2. mATERIALS
General Requirements:
A. All fill materials from on and off-site sources shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and
the city.
B. All fill material shall be unfrozen and free of organic material, trash, or other objectionable material.
Excess or unsuitable material as designated by the Engineer shall be removed from the job site by
the Contractor.
Common Fill Materials:
A. Common fill shall be sand, free of clay, organic material, muck, loam, wood, trash and other
objectionable material which may be compressible, or which cannot be compacted properly. It shall
not contain stones, rock, concrete or other rubble larger than 1 -1/2 -inches in diameter. It shall have
physical properties which allow it to be easily spread and compacted.
B. Common fill shall be no more than 10 percent by weight finer than the No. 200 mesh sieve.
C. The Contractor shall utilize as much excavated material as possible for reuse as backfill material in
accordance with the Contract Drawings and Project Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
D. The Engineer shall direct the Contractor on the type of material allowed in certain sections of the
earthwork operations.
SECTION IV
Page 11 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
Structural Fill:
Structural fill shall be well graded sand to gravel -sand having the following gradation:
U.S. Sieve Size
Percent Passing by Weight
1 -inch
100%
No. 4 Sieve
75% to 100%
No. 40 Sieve
15% to 80%
No. 100 Sieve
0 to 30%
No. 200 Sieve
0 to 10%
Class I Soils*:
Manufactured angular, granular material, 1/4 -inch to 1-1/2- inches in size, including materials
having significance such as crushed stone or rock, broken coral, crushed slag, cinders, or crushed
shells. Sieve analysis for crushed stone is given below separately.
A. Crushed Stone: Crushed stone shall consist of clean mineral aggregate free from clay, loam or
organic matter conforming with particle size limits as included in Table 201-A below. Unless
approved otherwise by the engineer, crushed stone for PVC, FRP or HDPE pipe bedding shall
conform with ASTM C33 stone size No. 89 and crushed stone for ductile iron pipe shall conform
to ASTM C33 stone size No. 68 or 78.
* Soils defined as Class I soils are not defined in ASTM D2487.
Class II Soils**:
A. GW: Well -graded gravels and gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines, clean. Fifty (50) percent or
more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve.
B. GP: Poorly graded gravels and gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines, clean. Fifty (50) percent or
more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve.
C. SW: Well -graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no fines, clean. More than fifty (50) percent
passing No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve.
D. SP: Poorly graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no fines, clean. More than fifty (50) percent
passing No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve.
** In accordance with ASTM D2487, less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve.
Coarse Sand:
Sand shall consist of clean mineral aggregate with particle size limits as follow
U.S. Sieve Size
Percent Passing By Weight
No. 10 Sieve
100%
No. 20 Sieve
0 to 30%
No. 40 Sieve
0 to 5%
Other Material:
All other material, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work shall
be selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
201-1.3. cLEARING AND gRUBBING
201-1.3.1. GENERAL
A. Clearing: Clearing shall completely remove and dispose of all timber, shrubs, brush, stumps, limbs,
roots, grass, weeds, other vegetative growth, rubbish and all other objectionable obstructions
resting on or protruding through the surface of the ground. Remove all evidence of their presence
from the surface including sticks and branches. Remove and dispose of trash piles and rubbish that
is scattered over the construction site or collects there during construction. Those trees, shrubs,
vegetative growth, and fencing, if any, which are designed by the Engineer to remain, shall be
SECTION IV
Page 12 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
preserved and protected as hereinafter specified. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to
prevent damage to existing structures and installations and to those under construction, so as to
provide for safety of employees and others.
B. Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of the complete removal of all stumps, roots larger than 1-1/2
inches in diameter, matted roots, brush, timber, logs, and any other organic or metallic debris
remaining after clearing not suitable for foundation purposes, resting on, under or protruding
through the surface of the ground to a depth of 18 -inches below the subgrade or the bottom of utility
trenches. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of such
objects, shall be refilled with suitable materials and compacted to a density conforming to the
surrounding ground surface.
C. Stripping: Remove and dispose of all organics and sod, topsoil, grass, and grass roots, and other
objectionable material remaining after clearing and grubbing from the areas designated to be
stripped. Grass, grass roots and organic material in areas to be excavated or filled shall be stripped
to the depth as noted in the soils report. In areas so designated, topsoil shall be stockpiled. Stripped
material and unsuitable material, such as organic material, shall be disposed of by the Contractor
unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
1. In areas so designated, topsoil shall be stripped and stockpiled. Topsoil so stockpiled shall
be protected until it is placed as specified. Any topsoil remaining after all work is in place
shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
201-1.3.2. CLEARING AND GRUBBING OPERATIONS
Clearing and Grubbing Limits: All excavation areas associated with new structures, slabs, utilities and
roadways shall be cleared and grubbed to the following depths:
A. Proposed Structures: 2 -feet below existing grade within a 5 -foot margin of each structure and
replaced with compacted structural fill material as specified in Section 201-2.2
B. Building Site Areas not specifically noted above: 2 -feet below existing grade within a 5 -foot margin
of each building site area and replaced with compacted structural fill material as specified in Section
201-2.2.
C. Utility Trenches: 1.5 -feet below the bottom of the utility trench within the entire width of the trench
and replaced with compacted Class II Soils, Type SW or SP material as specified in Section 201-
2.2.
D. Roadway and Paved Area: 2 -feet below existing grade within a 5 -foot margin of areas paved and
replaced with compacted common fill material as specified.
E. All Other Areas: 1 -foot below completed surface and replaced with compacted common fill
material as specified.
Areas to be Stripped: All excavation and embankment areas associated with new structures, slabs, walks,
and roadways shall be stripped. Stockpile areas shall be stripped.
201-1.3.3. DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS MATERIAL
A. Disposal of Clearing and Grubbing Debris: The Contractor shall dispose of all material and debris
from the clearing and grubbing operations by hauling such material and debris away to an approved
disposal site and dispose of in accordance with all local laws, codes, and ordinances. Disposal by
burning or burial on-site shall not be permitted. The cost of disposal (including hauling) of cleared
and grubbed material and debris shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, the
cost of which shall be included in the contract price.
B. Disposal of Stripped Material: Remove all stripped material and dispose off-site in a legal manner,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer to stockpile the material, such as topsoil, for use in the
final Work.
SECTION IV
Page 13 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
201-1.3.4. PRESERVATION OF TREES AND SHRUBBERY
A. Trees and Shrubbery: All existing trees, shrubbery, and other vegetative material may not be shown
on the Drawings. Inspect the site as to the nature, location, size, and extent of vegetative material
to be removed or preserved, as specified herein. Preserve, in place, trees that are specifically shown
on the Drawings and designated to be preserved.
B. Tree Protection: Those trees which are designated for preservation shall be carefully protected from
damage. The Contractor shall erect such barricades, guards, and enclosures as may be considered
necessary for the protection of the trees during all construction operations.
C. Preservation and Protection of Trees, Shrubs, and Other Plant Material:
1. All plant materials (trees, shrubbery, and plants) beyond the limits of clearing and grubbing
shall be saved and protected from damage resulting from the work. No filling, excavating,
trenching, or stockpiling of materials will be permitted within the drip line of these trees
or plants. The drip line is defined as a circle drawn by extending a line vertically to the
ground from the outermost branches of a tree, plant, or group of plants. To prevent soil
compaction within the drip line area, no equipment will be permitted within this area.
2. When trees are close together, restrict entry to area within drip line by fencing or a
protective barrier. In areas where no fence or barrier is erected, the trunks of all trees 2 -
inches or greater in caliper shall be protected by encircling the trunk entirely with boards
held securely by 10 -gauge wire and staples. This protection shall extend from ground level
to a height of 6 -feet. Neatly cut and remove tree branches where such cutting is necessary
to affect construction operations. The cutting and removing must be performed or
supervised by an I.S.A certified arborist. Remove branches other than those required to
affect the work to provide a balanced appearance of any tree. Scars resulting from the
removal of branches shall be treated with a tree sealant.
201-1.3.5. PRESERVATION OF DEVELOPED PRIVATE PROPERTY
A. The Contractor shall exercise extreme care to avoid unnecessary disturbance of developed private
property. Trees, shrubbery, gardens, lawns, and other landscaping, which in the opinion of the
Engineer must be removed, shall be replaced and replanted to restore the construction easement to
the condition existing prior to construction.
B. All soil preparation procedures and replanting operations shall be under the supervision of a
nurseryman experienced in such operations.
C. Improvements to the land such as fences, walls, outbuildings, etc., which of the necessity of
construction activities must be removed, shall be replaced with equal quality materials and
workmanship.
D. The Contractor shall clean up the construction site across from developed private property directly
after construction is completed upon approval of the Engineer.
201-1.3.6. PRESERVATION OF PUBLIC PROPERTY
The appropriate paragraphs of Sections 203-2.3.4. and 203-2.3.5. of these specifications shall apply to the
preservation and restoration of all damaged areas of public lands, parks, rights-of-way, easements, etc.
201-1.4. EXCAVATION PROTECTION
201-1.4.1. SHEETING AND BRACING
A. Furnish, put in place, and maintain such sheeting and bracing as required to support the sides of
excavations, to prevent any movement which could in any way diminish the width of the excavation
below that necessary for proper construction, and to protect adjacent utilities or structures, other
aboveground structures, utility poles, etc. from being undermined, and to protect workers from
SECTION IV
Page 14 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
hazardous conditions or other damage. Such support shall consist of braced steel sheet piling,
braced wood lagging and soldier piles and beams or other approved methods. If the Engineer or the
city is of the opinion that at any points, sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, they
may order additional supports to be put in place at the expense of the Contractor, and compliance
with such order shall not relieve or release the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency
of such supports. Care shall be taken to prevent voids from occurring adjacent to the sheeting, but
if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled and compacted. Where soil cannot be properly
compacted to fill a void, lean concrete shall be used as backfill, at no additional expense to the city.
B. The Contractor shall construct the sheeting outside the neat lines of the foundation unless deemed
otherwise for the Contractor's method of operation. Sheeting shall be plumb and securely braced
and tied in position. Sheeting and bracing shall be adequate to withstand all pressure to which the
structure or trench shall be subjected. Any deformation, movement or bulging which may occur,
shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense, to provide the necessary clearances and
dimensions.
C. Where sheeting and bracing is required to support the sides of excavations for utility structures,
other structures, power poles, etc., the Contractor shall engage a Professional Geotechnical
Engineer, registered in the state of Florida, to design the sheeting and bracing. The sheeting and
bracing installed shall conform to the design, and certification of the installation shall be provided
by the Professional Geotechnical Engineer.
D. The installation of sheeting, particularly by driving or vibrating, may cause distress to existing
structures. The Contractor shall evaluate the potential for such distress and, if necessary, take all
precautions to prevent distress of existing structures because of sheeting installation.
E. The Contractor shall leave in place to be embedded in the backfill all sheeting and bracing not
shown on the Drawings but which the Engineer or the city may direct him in writing to leave in
place at any time during the progress of the work for the purpose of preventing injury to any
structures or property, whether public or private. The Engineer or the city may direct that timber or
steel sheeting used for sheeting and bracing be cut off at any specified elevation.
F. The right of the Engineer or the city to order sheeting and bracing to be left in place shall not be
construed as creating any obligation on their part to issue such orders, and their failure to exercise
their right to do so shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages to persons or property
occurring from or upon the work occasioned by negligence or otherwise, growing out of a failure
on the part of the Contractor to leave in place sufficient sheeting and bracing to prevent any caving
or moving of the ground.
G. Steel or wood sheeting installed for utility pipeline construction shall not, under any circumstances
be withdrawn, if driven below the top of any utility pipeline. Steel sheeting, soldier piles and wood
sheeting earth support systems installed for utility pipeline construction shall be cut-off and left -in-
place at least 3 -feet below the ground surface, but no lower than 2 -feet above the top of the utility
pipe.
H. All sheeting and bracing not left in place shall be carefully removed in such manner as not to
endanger the new construction or other structures, utilities, or property outside the construction
area. All voids left or caused by withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately refilled with sand by
compacting with tools specifically adapted to that purpose, or otherwise as may be directed by the
Engineer or the city.
201-1.5. EXCAVATING FOR UTILITY STRUCTURES
Excavation work shall be performed in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions being taken
against all hazards. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the work to be
performed therein and for installation and removal of concrete forms. In no case shall excavation faces be
undercut for extended footings.
SECTION IV
Page 15 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Excavation shall be made to such dimensions as will give suitable room for building the foundations and
the structures, for bracing and supporting, for pumping and draining, for installing the pipelines, and for all
other work required.
A. Excavation for precast or prefabricated structures shall be carried to an elevation two (2) feet lower
than the proposed outside bottom of the structure to provide space for the backfill and bedding
material.
B. Excavation for structures constructed or cast -in-place in dewatered or dry excavations shall be
carried down to the 2 -feet below the bottom of the structure where dewatering methods are such
that a dry evacuation bottom is exposed and the naturally occurring material at this elevation leveled
and left ready to receive construction. Material disturbed below the founding elevation in dewatered
excavations shall be replaced with Class B concrete.
Prior to backfilling, document the location, elevation, size, material type and function of all new subsurface
installations, and utilities encountered during excavation and construction. Excavation equipment operators
and other concerned parties shall be familiar with subsurface obstructions as shown on the Drawings and
should anticipate the encounter of unknown obstructions during the work.
Encounters with subsurface obstructions shall be hand excavated.
Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of
subgrade soils. Subgrade soils which become soft, loose, "quick" or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of
structures as a result of inadequate dewatering or caused by other construction methods, shall be removed
and replaced with crushed stone as required by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
The bottom of excavations shall be rendered firm and dry before placing any structure or pipe. Excavated
material not suitable for backfill shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor, in a legal
manner. The bedding schedule for pipes shall be as shown in Table 201-C.
If the sub -grade is unsuitable, the Contractor shall, remove and replace all unsuitable material below pipe
with selected common fill or bedding rock, compacted to 95 percent Modified Proctor density.
All pavements and sidewalks shall be cut prior to removal, with saws or accepted power tools.
Excavated material shall be stockpiled in such a manner as to prevent nuisance conditions. Surface drainage
shall not be hindered.
All structure and pipe locations and elevations as required herein must be permanently documented by the
Contractor, on the As-Builts, prior to the Engineer's approval of the Application for Payment for that work.
201-1.6. TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY PIPELINES
201-1.6.1. TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPE LAYING - GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall not open more trench in advance of pipe laying than is necessary to expedite
the work. Four hundred (400) feet shall be the maximum length of open trench for any pipeline
under construction. All trench excavation shall be open cut from the surface.
B. Alignment, Grade, and Minimum Cover: The alignment and grade or elevation of each pipeline
shall be fixed and determined from offset stakes. Vertical and horizontal alignment of pipes, and
the maximum joint deflection used in connection therewith shall be in conformance with the
requirements of Section 500 covering installation of pipe.
C. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the Contract Drawings, trenches shall
be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a depth of backfill cover over the top of the pipe of
Between the range of 30- 42 -inches. Greater pipe cover depths may be necessary on vertical curves
or to provide necessary clearance beneath existing pipes conduits, drains, drainage structures, or
SECTION IV
Page 16 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
other obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be
made vertically from the outside top of pipe to finished ground or pavement surface elevation.
201-1.6.2. LIMITED TRENCH WIDTHS
A. Trenches shall be excavated to a width which shall provide adequate working space and sidewall
clearances for proper pipe installation, jointing, and embedment. However, minimum permissible
sidewall clearances between the installed pipe and each trench wall, expressed in inches, shall be
as follows:
Nominal Pipe Size, in Inches
Nominal Sidewall Clearance, in Inches
60
24
54
21
48
19
36 or smaller
12
B. Stipulated minimum sidewall clearances are not minimum average clearances but are minimum
clear distances which shall be required.
C. Cutting trench banks on slopes to reduce earth load to prevent sliding and caving will be permitted
only in areas where the increased trench width will not interface with surface features or encroach
on right-of-way limits. Slopes shall not extend lower than one foot above the top of the pipe.
201-1.6.3. MECHANICAL EXCAVATION
The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in locations where its operation would cause damage
to trees, buildings, culverts, and other existing property, utilities, or structures above or below ground. In
all such locations, hand excavating methods shall be used.
Mechanical excavation equipment used for trench excavation shall be of the type, design, and construction,
and shall be so operated, such that the rough trench excavation bottom elevation can be controlled, that
uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained at least from an elevation one foot above the top
of the installed pipe to the bottom of the trench, and that trench alignment is such that the pipe when
accurately laid to specified alignment will be centered in the trench with adequate clearance between the
pipe and sidewalls of the trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain clearance shall not be permitted.
201-1.6.4. PAVEMENT CUTTING
Cuts in concrete pavement, asphalt pavement, and asphaltic base pavements shall be no larger than
necessary to provide adequate working space for proper installation of pipe and appurtenances. Cutting
shall be started with an asphalt or concrete saw in a manner which will provide a clean groove for the full
depth of pavement along each side of the trench and along the perimeter of cuts for structures.
Asphalt pavement and asphaltic base pavement over trenches excavated for pipelines shall be removed so
that a shoulder not less than 6 -inches in width at any point is left between the cut edge of the pavement and
the top edge of the trench. Trench width at the bottom shall not be greater than at the top and no undercutting
shall be permitted. Pavement cuts shall be made to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines
which, unless otherwise required, shall be parallel to the centerline of the trench.
Pavement removed for connections to existing lines or structures shall not be greater than necessary for the
installation as determined by the Engineer. Road restoration shall be full road width.
201-1.6.5. ARTIFICIAL FOUNDATIONS IN TRENCHES
Whenever so ordered by the Engineer due to the presence of unsuitable material at the designed depth, the
Contractor shall excavate to such depth below grade as the Engineer may direct and the trench bottom shall
be brought to grade with such material as the Engineer may order installed. AH piling, concrete, or other
SECTION IV
Page 17 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
foundations made necessary by unstable soil shall be installed as directed by the Engineer. Compensation
for extra excavation and piling, concrete, or other foundations, except where provided by contract unit
prices, shall be made in accordance with the contract provisions for extra work.
201-1.6.6. BELL HOLES
Bell holes shall provide adequate clearance for tools and methods used in installing pipe. No part of any
bell or coupling shall be in contact with the trench bottom, trench walls, or granular embedment when the
pipe is jointed.
201-1.7. UNDERCUT OF EXCAVATIONS
If the bottom of any structure or trench excavation is below that shown on the Drawings or specified because
of Contractor error, convenience, or unsuitable subgrade due the Contractor's excavation methods, the
Contractor shall refill to normal grade with approved fill at his own cost. Fill material and compaction
method shall be as directed by the Engineer.
201-1.8. STABILIZATION OF EXCAVATIONS
Subgrades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm, dense, and thoroughly compacted and
consolidated; shall be free from mud and muck; and shall be sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact.
Subgrades for concrete structures or trench bottoms which are otherwise solid, but which becomes mucky
on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with one or more layers of crushed rock or gravel.
Not more than 1/2 -inch depth of mud or muck shall be allowed to remain on stabilized trench bottoms when
the pipe bedding material is placed thereon. The finished elevation of stabilized subgrades for concrete
structures shall not be above subgrade elevations shown on the Drawings.
All stabilization work shall be performed by and at the expense of the Contractor.
201-1.9. BACKFILL AND COMPACTION
201-1.9.1. MATERIALS
A. To the maximum extent available, excess earth obtained from structure and trench excavation shall
be used for the construction of fills and embankments.
B. Materials used as backfill shall be free from rocks or stones larger than 1 -1/2 -inches in their greatest
dimension; brush or vegetation, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and organic or other deleterious
materials; and must be acceptable to the Engineer.
C. Backfilling and construction of fills and embankments during freezing weather shall not be done
except by permission of the Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment materials shall be installed
on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials be in any backfill, fill or embankment.
201-1.9.2. BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION
A. Backfill materials shall be placed in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 8 -inches in un -
compacted thickness. Material deposited in piles or windrows by excavating and hauling equipment
shall be spread and leveled before compaction.
B. Each layer of material being compacted shall have the optimum uniform moisture content to ensure
satisfactory compaction. The Contractor shall be required to add water and harrow, disc, blade, or
otherwise work the material in each layer to ensure uniform moisture content and adequate
compaction.
SECTION IV
Page 18 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
C. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling or other method acceptable to the Engineer to
95% of relative density at optimum moisture content as determined by Modified Proctor Method,
ASTM D1557, latest revision.
D. Whenever a trench passes through a backfill or embankment area, material shall be placed and
compacted to an elevation 12 -inches above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated.
E. Backfill and compact excavations and construct embankments for structures according to the
schedule listed in Table 201-B. Backfill and bedding schedule for pipes is listed in Table 201-C.
(Modified Proctor for compaction shall be as determined by ASTM D-1557, latest revision).
F. Pipe shall be laid in open trenches unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
G. Excavations shall be backfilled to the original grade or as indicated on the Drawings. Deviation
from this grade because of settling shall be corrected. Backfill operation shall be performed to
comply with all rules and regulations and in such a manner that it does not create a nuisance or
safety hazard.
H. Embankments shall be constructed true to lines, grades and cross sections shown on the plans or
ordered by the Engineer or the city. Embankments shall be placed in successive layers of not more
than 8 -inches in thickness, loose measure, for the full width of the embankment. As far as
practicable, traffic over the work during the construction phase shall be distributed so as to cover
the maximum surface area of each layer.
I. If the Contractor requests approval to backfill material utilizing lifts and/or methods other than
those specified herein, such request shall be in writing to the Engineer. Approval will be considered
only after the Contractor has performed tests, at the Contractor's expense, to identify the material
used and density achieved throughout the backfill area utilizing the method of backfill requested.
The Engineer's approval shall be in writing.
• 201-1.9.3. STRUCTURE FOUNDATION PREPARATION
The existing ground beneath proposed tankage, building foundations and equipment base slabs and slabs
on grade shall be removed and the area proof rolled. Proof -rolling should consist of at least 10 passes of a
self-propelled vibrator compactor capable of delivering a minimum impact force of 30,000 to 35,000
pounds per drum to the soils. Each pass should overlap the preceding pass by 30 percent to insure complete
coverage. Backfilled areas shall be compacted in 8 -inch layers to a density of not less than 95 percent of
Modified Proctor Dry Density as determined by ASTM D1557, latest revision, for a depth of not less than
2 -feet below the bottom of the foundations or concrete slabs. Any unsuitable foundation material shall be
removed and replaced with suitable material.
Slabs on Grade: Subgrades for concrete slabs shall be removed, backfilled, and compacted to the required
grade. The top 2 -feet of concrete slab subgrade in cut sections and all fill material shall be compacted in 8 -
inch layers to a density of not less than 95 percent of Modified Proctor Dry Density as determined by ASTM
D1557, latest revision.
•
201-1.10. DRAINAGE FROM EXCAVATIONS
Trenches across roadways, driveways, walks, or other traffic ways adjacent to drainage ditches or water
courses shall not be backfilled prior to completion of backfilling the trench on the upstream side of the
traffic way to prevent impounding water after the pipe has been laid.
Bridges and other temporary structures required to maintain traffic across such unfilled trenches shall be
constructed and maintained by the Contractor. Backfilling shall be done so that water will not accumulate
in unfilled or partially filled trenches.
SECTION IV
Page 19 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
All material deposited in roadway ditches or other water courses crossed by the line of trench shall be
removed immediately after backfilling is completed and the original sections, grades, and contours of
ditches or water courses shall be restored. Surface drainage shall not be obstructed longer than necessary.
201-1.11. FINAL GRADING
After other outside work has been finished, and backfilling completed and settled, all areas on the site of
the work which are to be graded shall be brought to grade within the tolerance of ± 0.1 feet at the indicated
elevations, slopes, and contours where seeding or sodding is not required or, where sodding is required
within three (3) inches of finished grade. Use of graders or other power equipment will be permitted for
final grading and dressing of slopes, provided the result is uniform and equivalent to hand work. All surfaces
shall be graded to secure effective drainage. Unless otherwise shown, a slope of at least one percent shall
be provided.
After grading and where seeding is required, topsoil shall be evenly spread to a minimum depth of six (6)
inches. Topsoil shall be from an Engineer approved source and shall be free of trash, debris and surface
vegetation.
Grading and surfacing shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner.
201-1.12. EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
Insofar as needed, suitable excavated materials shall be used in fills and embankments as shown on the
Drawings. All suitable excess excavated material shall be placed at an on-site stockpile area as directed by
the city.
The Contractor shall segregate different types of excavated materials (i.e. sands, clayey sands) as much as
possible in the stockpile areas. All unsuitable materials shall be disposed of by the Contractor offsite, in a
legal manner.
The Contractor shall slope and compact the stockpile with a light roller type vehicle to maintain stability.
The Contractor shall maintain proper soil and erosion control measures.
201-1.13. SETTLEMENT
The Contractor shall be responsible for all settlement of backfill, fills, and embankments which may occur
within the guarantee period stipulated in the General Conditions of the Contract.
The Contractor shall make, or cause to be made, all repairs or replacements made necessary by settlement
within 30 days after notice from the Engineer or the city.
SECTION IV
Page 20 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
TABLE 201-A
STANDARD SIZES OF COARSE AGGREGATE AMOUNTS FINER
THEN EACH LABORATORY SIEVE (SQUARE OPENINGS), MASS PERCENT
TABLE 201-B
COMPACTION AND BACKFILL SCHEDULE
FOR STRUCTURES
Area
U. S. Sieve Size, Percent Passing By Weight
Aggregate
Size
No.
Nominal Size
Square
Openings
1 -1/2 -in
1 -in.
3/4 -in.
1/2 -in.
3/8 -in.
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
No. 50
57
1 -in. to
No. 4
100%
95%-
100%
--
25%-
60%
--
0-10%
0-5%
--
--
68
3/4 -in. to
No. 8
--
100%
90%-
100%
--
30%-
65%
5%-
25%
0-
10%
0-5%--
78
1/12 -in.
No.
--
--
100%
900%
70%- 05%
25%
10%
0-5%
--
89
3/8 -in. to
No. 16
--
--
--
100%
90%-
100%
20%-
55%
5%-
30%
0-10%
0-5%
TABLE 201-B
COMPACTION AND BACKFILL SCHEDULE
FOR STRUCTURES
Area
Material
Compaction
Beneath structures,
foundations, slabs, and
pavements.
(minimum 2 -foot depth
below concrete foundation
bottom)
Structural Fill
(Section 201-2.2.,
Structural Fill)
8 -inch lifts compacted to 95% Modified Proctor
maximum dry density (98% Modified Proctor
maximum dry density under pavement). Fill should
not be placed over any in-place soils until those
layers have been compacted to 95% Modified Proctor
maximum dry density (98% Modified Proctor
maximum dry density under pavement).
Around structures,
foundations and slabs
(minimum 5 -foot outside
structure)
Structural Fill
(Section 201 2.2.,
Structural Fill)
8 -inch lifts compacted to 95% Modified Proctor
maximum dry density (98% Modified Proctor
maximum dry density under pavement). Use light
rubber -tired or vibratory plate compactors.
From cleared existing
surface to subgrade for
paved and gravel roadway
surfaces
Common Fill
(Section 201-2.2.,
Common Fill)
12 -inch lifts, compacted to 95% Modified Proctor
maximum dry density (98% Modified Proctor
maximum dry density under pavement).
Disturbed area requiring
seeding and mulching
Topsoil
2 -inch to 4 -inch lifts, compacted to 85% Modified
Proctor maximum dry density.
202. OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully
protected from damage or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired
by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the city of Clearwater thereof. Any survey
monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless
otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a Florida registered Professional
Surveyor and Mapper (PSM). Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to
the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector/Project Manager for the
approved means of removal and replacement.
SECTION IV
Page 21 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
203. DEWATERING
203-1. GENERAL
The work to be performed under this Section shall include the design and installation of a temporary
dewatering system(s) until completion of construction to remove subsurface waters from structure or utility
trench excavations as required. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment; labor and materials necessary
to remove storm water or subsurface groundwater from excavation areas in accordance with the
requirements set forth, as shown on the Drawings, and/or geotechnical report.
Qualifications: For major dewatering activities the temporary dewatering system shall be designed,
installed and operated by a firm who regularly engages in the design, installation and operation of
dewatering systems and who is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the design, installation and
operation of such dewatering systems. The firm shall have a successful record of operation for a minimum
of five (5) years prior to bid date. The dewatering system firm shall have experience for installation of at
least three (3) successful dewatering operations of a similar nature and size in the state of Florida.
The dewatering system shall be developed to the point that it is capable of dewatering the site surrounding
all structures or utility trenches as shown on the Drawings. Each dewatering system shall be capable of
dewatering and maintaining groundwater levels at the respective excavations. Observation wells shall be
constructed for the purpose of testing each system.
The Contractor shall at all times during construction provide and maintain proper equipment and facilities
to remove and dispose of all water entering excavations, and shall keep such excavations dry so as to obtain
a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade foundation condition until the fill, structures or pipes to be built thereon
have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing water
levels to return to natural levels. In critical dewatering situations, the Contractor shall have on hand at the
construction site, backup dewatering pumps and other critical components of the dewatering system that
are operational and could be used in the event of breakdowns of the primary equipment.
The Contractor's plan shall include temporary culverts, barricades, and other protective measures to prevent
damage to property or injury to any person or persons.
Prior to construction, the dewatering plan shall be prepared and submitted to the city's Engineering
Department, Public Utilities Department, Industrial Pretreatment Program (IPP) Coordinator, Wastewater
Environmental Manager and the Public Utilities Department Director or Assistant Director for review and
approval. It shall include site-specific notes and details presenting the Contractor's proposed dewatering
and disposal methods. The city will field -inspect the dewatering operation throughout construction.
All costs for dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe, or, in the case of other
underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
203-1.1. Definition of Terms for Dewatering System
Minor Dewatering Activity: A single stage well point dewatering system, operating for less than 30 days
total duration, and not requiring a Notice of Dewatering Activity filed with the local Water Management
District.
Major Dewatering Activity: Any major dewatering system, operating for more than 30 days duration,
requiring a Notice of Dewatering Activity filed with the local Water Management District. Major
dewatering systems shall include, but not be limited to, multi -stage well point dewatering systems, drilled
horizontal or vertical sock drain systems, dewatering deep well pump systems and educator dewatering
systems.
SECTION IV
Page 22 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
203-2. OBSERVATION WELLS
For major dewatering activities, prior to excavation, the Contractor shall install groundwater observation
wells at locations as directed and designed by the Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer and as approved by
the Engineer adjacent to structures or underground utility under construction for the purpose of monitoring
water levels during excavations.
Where required, the observation well construction shall consist of well screen, casing, and cap of approved
size and material of construction. The observation well shall be placed in a 2-1 /2 -inch bore hole which shall
be carried to an elevation at least 4 feet below the final bottom grade of structure or utility trench excavation.
The annular space surrounding the intake point and the riser pipe shall be sealed in such a way as to prevent
infiltration from surface water. The observation well shall be developed in such a manner as to ensure
proper indication of subsurface water levels adjacent to the well.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the observation wells and for observing and recording
the elevation of groundwater until the structure or utilities requiring excavation are completed and
backfilled. Each observation well shall be observed and recorded daily. Measurements shall be supplied
daily to the Engineer and the city. The Engineer may require that the observation wells reflect true
groundwater levels by adding water to the well, recording the drop in the level from the time the water was
added. Any plugged observation well shall be redeveloped, if necessary, to indicate true groundwater levels.
Observation wells shall be fully grouted and abandoned when the dewatering system is removed as directed
by the Geotechnical Engineer, and in a manner acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer.
203-3. PUMPING AND DRAINAGE - GENERAL
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipes, except sub drains, shall be laid "in the dry". In the
dry shall be defined to be within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content of the soil. The Contractor shall
dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the
following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity under drain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and
maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The
well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable
of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity
of the subgrade soils 2 -feet below the proposed bottom of excavation and to preserve the integrity of
adjacent structures. As a minimum, the water level shall be 2 -feet below the trench bottom. Well or sump
installations shall be constructed with proper sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grained soil from the
surrounding soils. Dewatering by trench pumping shall not be permitted if migration of fine-grained natural
material from bottom, side walls, or bedding material may occur.
A well point system, trench drain, sump pump operation, or other dewatering method shall be utilized to
maintain the excavation in a dry condition for preparation of the trench bottom and until the structures or
pipes to be built thereon have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise
damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural levels. No water shall be allowed to contact masonry
or concrete within 24 hours after being placed.
Water entering the excavation from surface runoff shall be collected in shallow ditches around the perimeter
of the excavation, drained to sumps, and pumped from the excavation to maintain the excavation bottom
free from standing water.
The Contractor shall take all additional necessary precautions and prevent uplift of any structure during
construction.
SECTION IV
Page 23 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Flotation of structures or piping shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive and
continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for all
damages which may result from failure of the dewatering system.
The conveying of water other than storm water surface runoff in open ditches or trenches will not be allowed
unless prior approval is obtained. Permission to use any drainage ditches, storm sewers, drains or other
storm drainage facilities for water conveyance or disposal purposes during dewatering operations shall be
obtained from the controlling authority having jurisdiction. Any requirements and costs for such use shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor. However, the Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading or
blocking up the flow in the drainage facilities, and the Contractor shall leave the facilities unrestricted and
as clean as originally found. Any damage to existing facilities shall be repaired or restored, as directed by
the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction, at no cost to the city or the Owner of the facilities.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations
and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area,
or the general public. The Contractor may be required to divert the water from the dewatering process to a
location determined by the Engineer or city Project Manager or Inspector and obtain a discharge permit
from Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP). Alternatively, if Contractor elects to contain
produced groundwater on the project site, a dewatering plan must be submitted to the Engineer or city for
approval (even if a discharge permit is not required).
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to preclude the accidental discharge of fuel, oil, or other
contaminants in order to prevent adverse effects on groundwater or receiving water quality.
203-3.1. DEWATERING EQUIPMENT
The dewatering equipment shall be standard dewatering equipment of proven ability as designed,
manufactured, and installed by firms having experience in the design and production of such equipment.
The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices
and methods.
The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of surface or subsurface waters that may
accumulate in the excavation. Flotation and migration of fines shall be prevented by the Contractor by
maintaining a positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully
responsible and liable for all damages that may result from the operation and/or failure of this system.
Sound levels for dewatering pumps shall meet governmental agencies ordinance levels. Sound levels in
excess of such ordinance are sufficient cause to have the work halted until equipment can be quieted to
these levels Work stoppage by the Engineer, city or other governmental agencies for excessive noise shall
not relieve the Contractor of the other portions of this specification including, but not limited to contract
time and contract price. Engine -driven pumps shall be equipped with critical grade type silencers, sound
blankets or other types of sound mitigation measures to comply with Noise Ordinances. Engine driven
dewatering pumps shall have a maximum rating of 80 decibels at a distance of 5 feet from the engine for
sound attenuation, nor shall the pump engine noise exceed 50 decibels at a distance of 50 feet from the
engine. There may be practical and feasible, electrical "power drops" and electric motor -driven equipment
shall be used in lieu of portable generators.
The dewatering system shall operate in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of
the subgrade soils at the proposed structures or utilities and to preserve the integrity of any adjacent
structures.
Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished following backfilling and compaction, and after
the Contractor and the Engineer both agree, that the system is no longer required. All materials and
equipment constituting the dewatering system shall be removed by the Contractor.
SECTION IV
Page 24 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Immediately upon completion of the dewatering operations, the Contractor shall remove all of his
equipment, materials, and supplies from the site of the Work, remove all surplus materials and debris, fill
in all holes or excavations, grout all groundwater monitoring wells installed for the dewatering operations
and grade the site to elevations of the surface levels which existed before the work started. The site shall be
thoroughly cleaned and graded as directed by the Engineer and approved by the city.
203-3.2. DEWATERING CONSIDERATIONS
The Contractor shall install a temporary dewatering system for the removal of subsurface water encountered
during construction of the proposed structures or underground utilities. The Contractor shall provide
adequate equipment for the removal of storm or subsurface waters which may accumulate in the
excavations.
If well points are used, Contractor shall adequately space well points to maintain the necessary dewatering.
Provide suitable filter sand and/or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands and silts. A continual check
shall be maintained by the Contractor to ensure that the subsurface soil is not being removed by the
dewatering operations. Pumping from well points shall be continuous and standby pumps shall be provided.
The Contractor's proposed method of dewatering shall include groundwater observation wells to determine
the water level during construction. Observation wells shall be installed along pipelines as required to verify
depth to water level and at locations approved by the Engineer.
At all times, site grading shall promote drainage. Surface runoff shall be diverted from excavations. Water
entering the excavation from the surface shall be collected in shallow ditches around the perimeter of the
excavation, drained to sumps, and pumped or drained by gravity to maintain an excavation bottom free
from standing water.
Flotation shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive and continuous removal of water.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all damages which may result from failure to adequately keep
excavations dewatered.
The Contractor shall construct and place all pipelines, structures, concrete work, structural fill, backfill and
bedding material in -the -dry. If subsurface water is encountered, utilize suitable equipment to adequately
dewater the excavation so that it will be "in -the -dry" for work and pipe laying. For the purposes of this
specification, "in -the -dry" is defined to be within ±2 percent of the optimum moisture content of the soil.
A well point system or other dewatering method accepted by the respective jurisdictional agency (agencies)
shall be utilized, if necessary, to maintain the excavation in a dry condition for preparation of the trench
bottom and for pipe laying. The Contractor shall not make the final 24 -inches of excavation until the water
level is a minimum of 2 -feet below proposed bottom of the excavation.
Dewatering by trench pumping will not be permitted if migration of fine-grained natural material from
bottom, side walls, or bedding material will occur.
In the event that satisfactory dewatering cannot be accomplished due to subsurface conditions or where
dewatering could damage existing structures, obtain the Owner's and the Engineer's approval of wet trench
construction procedures before commencing construction.
203-3.3. DISPOSAL OF PUMPED WATER
Discharge water to on-site disposal areas (if shown on the Drawings) or as required by permits.
The Contractor shall dispose of water from the Work in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent
properties or facilities. No water shall be discharged without appropriate treatment for adverse
contaminants. No water shall be drained in work built or under construction without prior consent from the
Owner. Water shall be filtered to remove sand and fine soil particles before disposal into any drainage
system.
SECTION IV
Page 25 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
Discharge water from dewatering operations to temporary infiltration pits, if possible.
Discharge to storm sewers, canals, stream, or wetlands, only if specifically allowed for in Dewatering
Permit.
No discharges from dewatering operations shall be allowed to wastewater collection systems or wastewater
pumping stations at any time.
In no case, shall discharges from dewatering operations result in turbidity reaching wetlands or any
waterways. If turbidity exceeds limits allowed by jurisdictional permitting agency(ies), stop all activities,
and install additional erosion and sedimentation control as required by the Southwest Florida Water
Management District or the FDEP.
Flooding of streets, roadways, driveways, or private property shall not be permitted during dewatering
activities. Contractor shall not dam -up, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, roadway
pavements or other structures. For proper water discharges and disposal from dewatering operations, the
Contractor may be required to divert or provide discharge piping to transport the water to a suitable place
for legal discharge, as determined by the Engineer and the city.
203-3.4. GROUNDWATER TREATMENT (IF REQUIRED)
If the concentrations of tested groundwater quality parameters exceed those allowable in the FDEP Generic
Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from any Non -Contaminated Site Activity (62-
621.300(2), F.A.C.), the Contractor shall treat the effluent discharged from the dewatering system.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and the city Engineering Department and discuss the
parameters that exceed allowable limits.
The Contractor shall meet with the FDEP to determine treatment and disposal alternatives that are
acceptable to the FDEP.
The Contractor shall apply for and obtain any and all permits and/or treatment approvals that FDEP requires
including but not limited to the following:
1. Generic Permit for Discharges from Petroleum Contaminated Sites (62-621.300(1)). Allows
discharges from sites with automotive gasoline, aviation gasoline, jet fuel, or diesel fuel
contamination; or,
2. Permit for all Other Contaminated Sites (62-04; 62-302; 62-620 & 62-660). The coverage is
available only through the individual NPDES permit issued by FDEP, allows discharges from sites
with general contaminant issues i.e. ground water and/or soil contamination other than petroleum
fuel contamination; or,
3. Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any Non -Contaminated Site
Activity (62-621.300(2), F.A.C.); or,
4. Generic Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large or Small Construction Activities (62-
621.300(4)(a), F.A.C.); or,
5. An Individual Wastewater Permit (62-604.300(8) (a).
The Contractor shall implement the appropriate treatment that is acceptable to FDEP, the Engineer and the
city to attain compliance for all excess limits encountered during dewatering activities. Treatment may
include, but is not limited to: Chemical, Physical, Biological, Electrolysis, Ion Exchange, Aeration,
Activated Carbon Absorption, or any combination of the these.
The Contractor shall make every effort to minimize the spread of contamination into uncontaminated areas.
Provide for the health and safety of all workers at the job site and make provisions necessary for the health
and safety of the public that may be exposed to any potentially hazardous conditions. Ensure provision
SECTION IV
Page 26 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
adhere to all applicable laws, rules or regulations covering hazardous conditions and will be in a manner
commensurate with the level of severity of the conditions.
If necessary, provide contamination assessment and remediation personnel to handle site assessment,
determine the course of action necessary for site security and perform the necessary steps under applicable
laws, rules and regulations for additional assessment and/or remediation work to resolve the contamination
issue.
Delineate the contamination area(s) and any staging or holding area required and develop a work plan that
will provide the schedule of projected completion dates for the final resolution of the contamination issue.
Maintain jurisdiction over activities inside any delineated contamination areas and any associated staging
or holding areas. Be responsible for the health and safety of workers within the delineated areas. Provide
continuous access to representatives of regulatory or enforcement agencies having jurisdiction.
203-4. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
The dewatering of any excavation areas and the disposal of water during construction shall be in strict
accordance with the latest revisions of the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), and
all local and state government rules and regulations.
The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent to use the Generic Permit for the
Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations and associated fee in accordance with FDEP
Requirements, F.A.C. 62-621.300(2)(b) and must receive written notice from the FDEP prior to discharging
produced groundwater into the city's streets, storm sewers or waterways.
The Contractor shall obtain and pay all respective fees for all local, state, and federal permits required
applicable to the withdrawal, treatment and disposal/discharge of water produced from the dewatering
operations, prior to the start of work.
Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring and complying with all permits required to discharge produced
water from dewatering and shall protect waterways from turbidity during the operation. Prior to discharging
produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the
groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits per FDEP "Generic Permit for the Discharge of
Produced Ground Water from Any Non -Contaminated Site Activity" Chapter 62-621.300(2), FAC. The
Contractor shall have on-site and available for review the analytical testing results performed in accordance
with FDEP Chapter 62-621.300(2), FAC.
Consumptive Use Permit (CUP): If pumping requirements exceed certain limits, the Contractor shall pay
for and obtain a CUP from the regional Water Management District for such pumped volumes. If a
consumptive use permit is required by the local Water Management District, the Contractor shall be
responsible for obtaining said permit. Comply with all conditions of the Dewatering Permit issued by the
Water Management District. Apply for permit extensions or modifications, when required.
All water produced from dewatering shall be pumped from the trench or other excavation and shall be
disposed of in strict accordance with applicable permits. The Contractor will be allowed to discharge
product water from dewatering into storm sewers, or ditches having adequate capacity, canals or suitable
disposal pits, or other surface waters in accordance with the Dewatering Plan, provided that the water has
been sampled and tested by the Contractor, is in compliance with the concentration limits specified in 62-
621.300(2) FAC, and the Contractor has obtained an FDEP Generic Permit for the production of
groundwater. The frequency of water sampling and testing shall be determined by the Engineer based on
existing conditions and field observations.
SECTION IV
Page 27 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated from under pipes, structures and
roadways and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose
of said material off-site at their expense. The limits and depths of the excavation shall be determined in the
field by the Engineer. Approved replacement materials shall meet the requirements of Section 304.
204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of cubic yards of clean fill placed as determined by either
cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract
Proposal. Included in the cost of removing unsuitable material is the cost to place suitable material/clean
fill.
204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor,
disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to
complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most
appropriate bid item.
205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back
of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location
on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb.
The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the current code adopted by
the American Public Works Association:
SAFETY RED
Electric Power Lines, Cables, Conduit and Lighting Cables
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW
Gas, Oil, Steam, Petroleum or Gaseous Materials
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE
Communication, Alarm or Signal Lines, Cables or Conduit
SAFETY BLUE
Potable Water
SAFETY GREEN
Sewer Systems and Drain Lines
PURPLE
Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry Lines
WHITE
Proposed Excavation
PINK
Temporary Survey Markings
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to
the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be six-inch (6") x three
inch (3") and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be four -
inch (4") x two inch (2") and be placed on the curb face.
206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances,
asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush,
stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to
prepare the area for construction.
SECTION IV
Page 28 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership
of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal
Requirements.
206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed
as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures
as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
207-1. GENERAL
Erosion and sediment control shall conform to the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications for
Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. Contractor shall use temporary erosion
and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and
Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the city of Clearwater Standard Indices. Contractor shall prepare and
submit a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and National Pollutant Discharge Elimination
System (NPDES) permit in accordance with FDEP criteria for an NPDES construction activity permit.
Visit www.dep.state.fl.us/water/stormwater/npdes for more information. Contractor shall obtain a FDEP
generic permit for the discharge of produced groundwater. All soil erosion and sediment control measures
shall be installed prior to disturbance and maintained through project completion.
207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL
The city may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project
have a current FDEP Florida Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Inspector Training &
Certification. All personnel working on the Project shall complete illicit discharge training once per
calendar year. Contractor shall provide documentation to the city prior to Notice to Proceed (NTP).
Example of training and training sign -in sheet will be provided by the city to the Contractor at the Pre -
Construction Meeting.
207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by
the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay,
filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other temporary vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after
final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with
established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface
or landscaping.
SECTION IV
Page 29 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL
STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of
the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location
and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an un -stabilized stockpile
remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by temporary
erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer
and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the city of Clearwater Standard Indices, or equals approved by
the City Engineer before installation.
207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days after finished
grade is established. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded and maintained
by the Contractor prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the
following standards: no more than 400 linear feet of trench shall be open at any one time; and, wherever
consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches.
Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. No
trench shall be open at the end of a workday, weekdays, or weekends.
207-8. MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked daily by the Contractor, especially after each
rainfall. The erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be cleaned out and/or repaired as required so
sediment removal for the device does not exceed fifty (50) percent of its capacity. Contractor shall prepare
and submit a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) Construction Inspection Report on a weekly
basis and within 24 hours of a storm that is 0.50 inches or greater. No additional payment will be made to
the Contractor for the re-establishment of erosion control devices which may become damaged, destroyed,
or otherwise rendered unsuitable for their intended function during the construction of the Project. Near
completion of the project, after obtaining written approval by the Engineer, the Contractor shall dismantle
and remove the temporary devices used for sediment control during construction. All erosion control
devices in seeded areas shall be left in place until the grass is established. Seed areas around devices, and
mulch after removing or filling temporary control devices. Cleanup all areas.
207-9. COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements as determined by the city's project manager or
inspector may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to)
issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
SECTION IV
Page 30 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND
OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES
•
•
208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS
Existing seawalls and revetments on natural water bodies may be replaced with a revetment or with a
vertical seawall with the provision of rip rap placed at the base of the wall up to the mean high water line
for the entire length of the seawall. Revetments and seawalls may be replaced with a vertical seawall in
manmade water bodies, provided that the seawall is within the property line and maintains the established
shoreline.
208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION
The top of cap elevation for all replacement and new seawalls and seawall caps shall not exceed 4.8 feet
North American Vertical Datum (NAVD 88) If the top of a seawall cap is constructed at an elevation
differing from the adjacent property owner top of cap elevation by greater than one foot, then a return wall
is required to sufficiently provide for the break in grade at the property line. Seawalls exceeding 4.8 feet
NAVD 88 in height prior to the effective date of this Section may be maintained, repaired, and replaced to
their current height.
208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF
THE CCL
Seawalls and revetments located seaward of the coastal construction setback line are controlled by
regulations of the Division of Beaches and Shores of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection.
Replacement of a seawall or revetment that is located seaward of the coastal construction setback line
necessitates submission of a permit application to the state department of environmental protection.
208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL
The placement of a new seawall waterward of an existing seawall is permitted, subject to the following
conditions:
A. A Florida registered professional engineer must certify the new seawall design.
B. The new seawall shall not extend more than 18 inches from the waterward face of the original
alignment of the existing vertical seawall location.
C. The new seawall shall be placed vertically plumb.
D. Placing a seawall in front of an existing seawall shall only be permitted once unless the seawall
behind the new seawall is removed.
E. Existing seawall sections that interfere with new seawall location shall be removed.
F. The new seawall shall include an adequate closure of gaps at each property line.
G. For zoning purposes, the setbacks for the property will be measured from either the property line
or the waterside of the original seawall slab, whichever is more restrictive, and will not be adjusted
to accommodate the new seawall addition. For purposes of pier construction, the shore normal
dimensions will be measured from the waterside of the original seawall slab.
SECTION IV
Page 31 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY
Prior to final inspection and approval of a new or replacement seawall or seawall cap, a post -construction
survey shall be required. Repairs of existing seawalls and seawall caps which do not alter the height or
location shall not be subject to this requirement.
208-6. RIP -RAP
On all -natural waterways, an apron of rip -rap shall be placed at the base of all new and repaired seawalls
up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall to absorb the wave energy and protect
the underlying soft earth or sand from being carried away, as well as to provide habitat for desirable marine
species. This rip -rap shall be required at the base of all new seawalls and at the time that an existing seawall
is repaired where the replacement constitutes greater than 50 percent of the entire length of the seawall or
includes the replacement of a panel.
208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL
A retaining wall may be built as an alternative to a vertical seawall, provided that all activities, including
dredging, filling, slope grading, or equipment access and similar activities and all portions of the wall are
located landward of the mean high water line.
209. MAINTENANCE OF OPERATIONS
209-1. GENERAL
This Section sets forth the requirements for scheduling and performing the work to keep existing utilities
in continuous, reliable operation.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to maintain existing
utilities service during construction. Contractor shall also keep on hand adequate equipment, supplies, and
incidentals to repair pipe breaks and to contain and dispose of all spilled materials.
209-2. EXECUTION
A. Before any work begins, the Contractor shall submit for city review a Maintenance of Flow Plan.
The Maintenance of Flow Plan shall include all procedures to be performed by the Contractor to
maintain continuous operation of the city's existing utility services. The Plan shall also include
emergency response and remedial action measures.
Maintenance of Flow Plan:
1. The Contractor shall prepare a Maintenance of Flow Plan with two points of contact that
describes in detail the work that will be performed by the Contractor to maintain continuous
operation of the city's existing utility services. Maintenance of Flow Plan shall address the
temporary and permanent flow diversion of utilities and other city facilities.
2. Temporary diversion of the utility flows shall be done using a minimum of two (2) bypass
pumps (one duty, one standby) to pump from the upstream manhole to the downstream
manhole. Bypass pumps shall have hospital grade sound attenuation. The Contractor shall
obtain peak wet weather flow rates in the utility from the city and shall demonstrate in the
Maintenance of Flow Plan that adequate pumping capacity is provided to accommodate
peak wet weather flow. The Contractor and city personnel that are experienced in the
SECTION IV Page 32 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
collection system shall determine the float levels in the field, pump on, standby or lag pump
on, and high-level alarm. The Contractor shall have full responsibility for the operation and
management of the temporary diversion/ bypass. The high-level alarm shall be connected
to an auto dialer or remote monitoring system to notify the Contractor of an alarm
condition. The bypass pump suction manhole shall use the collection system for a
temporary wet well storage; however, surcharging in the existing utility system shall be
limited. Once the high-level float alarm is triggered, it shall allow enough time for
emergency Contractor personnel to arrive on scene and resolve the problem prior to any
utility overflows. The bypass suction and discharge pipes may require the removal of the
manhole tops which will result in excess odor escaping from the manholes. The Contractor
shall provide a means to seal odors within the bypass manholes to minimize odors during
the temporary diversion.
3. The Maintenance of Flow Plan shall include a sequence of construction with projected
time, in days, for each step in the sequence.
4. If the work required to maintain utility operation must occur during evening, night or
weekend hours, the Contractor shall notify the affected residents in advance of the
projected work. The Contractor shall reimburse the city for overtime work, including
inspector overtime, in excess of regular working hours. The Contractor must also get
permission from city Project Manager before working outside of Noise Ordinance hours.
5. Identify the person(s) responsible for executing the Maintenance of Flow Plan and the
systems to be put in place for monitoring the existing utility system's ability to maintain
flow.
B. All utility relocation work shall be completed prior to construction. The Contractor shall familiarize
himself with the site, including the locations, sizes, and conditions of the existing utilities in and
around the work zones where relocation of existing utilities is required. The location of storm sewer
inlets, drainage swales, and runoff patterns should be identified, and a Plan developed to contain
potential releases.
C. The Contractor shall carry out his operations in accordance with all applicable OSHA regulations,
including confined space entry requirements, as well as local, city, and state requirements, and in
accordance with the approved MOT plan. In addition, the Contractor shall protect the public from
harm while performing the work by using barricades, warning lights and other means as necessary.
D. The Contractor shall keep existing utilities in service during all phases of construction and
coordinate any system shutdowns with the city sufficiently in advance to provide alternative
service. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 10 days' notice. Contractor shall protect the
city's utility system for any spills or overflows during construction. The city's Project Manager and
Dispatch (727-462-6633) shall be notified of any spills or overflows immediately.
E. Any temporary work, facilities, roads, walks, protection of existing structures, piping, blind flanges,
valves, equipment, etc. that may be required shall be furnished and maintained by the Contractor.
The cost shall be included in the appropriate bid items.
F. The Contractor shall schedule the work in such a manner so that all existing utility systems are
maintained in continuous operation. All short-term or partial utility system shutdowns shall be
approved in writing by the city. If, in the opinion of the city, a shutdown is not required in order
for the Contractor to perform the work, the Contractor shall utilize alternative methods to
accomplish the work. The city shall be provided a minimum of ten (10) business days' notice of
Contractor's need for any existing utility system shutdown or if there is a need of assistance from
the Public Utilities Department. Contractor must also provide the city with at least two (2) business
days' notice before Contractor is allowed to work at city facilities.
G. Required shutdowns shall not begin until all materials are on -hand, pre -assembled, as possible, and
ready for installation. Upon commencement of the shutdown period, the Contractor shall proceed
with the work continuously, start to finish, until the work is completed, and the system is tested,
cleared for service, and ready for operation. If the Contractor completes all required work before
SECTION IV
Page 33 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
the specified shutdown period has ended, the city may immediately place the system back in
service.
H. The city shall have the sole authority to prohibit or order work stopped. The city reserves the right
to cancel scheduled shutdowns if conditions warrant. Delays to the Contractor caused by
cancellations will be considered in evaluating requests for a time extension. They will not be
considered an entitlement to additional compensation. However, compensation may be considered
at city's sole discretion.
I. During inclement weather, all work which might be damaged or rendered inferior by such weather
conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of the city as to suspensions shall be final
and binding. During suspension of the work from any cause, the work shall be suitably covered and
protected to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise, if the city shall so direct surplus
materials shall be removed. Contractor shall protect the city's utility system from inflow during
inclement weather during the construction.
J. The Contractor shall submit a Critical Path Method (CPM) work schedule at the pre -construction
meeting showing all critical items of work and anticipated shut down times. Note that no activity
will be allowed until the CPM is approved by the city or the Engineer of Record (EOR).
K. Contractor must submit a detailed schedule and process description for proposed testing. Training
of all new equipment must be videotaped including two weeks of training prior to startup. If there
are multiple sites under the same contract each site startup shall occur as soon as it is complete. If
there are multiple shifts at any site(s) where city staff require training, Contractor shall hold
multiple trainings convenient for each shift.
L. Required shutdowns shall not begin until all materials are on -hand, pre -assembled to the extent
possible, and ready for installation. Upon commencement of the shutdown period, the Contractor
shall proceed with the work continuously, start to finish, until the work is completed, and the system
is tested, cleared for service, and ready for operation. If the Contractor completes all required work
before the specified shutdown period has ended, the city may immediately place the system back
in service.
209-3. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for this task.
210. DETECTION OF FACILITIES
The locations of all existing underground piping, structures, and other facilities are shown based on
information received from the respective owner. The locations are shown without express or implied
representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete, correct, or a represent a true picture of the
actual underground facilities to be encountered. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify the correct
location and sizing of all utilities (including connection points).
All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One
Call"/ "Sunshine 811" at 8-1-1; "Sunshine 811" administrative offices may be reached at (800) 638-4097.
The Contractor shall at all times employ acceptable methods and exercise reasonable care and skill so as to
avoid unnecessary delay, injury, damage, or destruction of existing utilities or cause interference.
The Contractor shall conduct exploratory excavations as necessary for the purpose of locating underground
pipelines, structures, and utilities in advance of construction. Test pits shall be excavated in areas of
potential conflicts between existing and proposed facilities and at piping connections to existing facilities
a minimum of 48 hours and 1000 ft in advance of work. If there is a potential conflict, the Contractor shall
notify the Owner and Engineer immediately and provide as much information as possible including but not
SECTION IV
Page 34 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
• limited to location, elevation, utility type, material, and size. Test pits shall be backfilled immediately after
their purpose has been satisfied. There shall be no additional compensation for exploratory excavations.
•
211. RELOCATIONS
211-1. RELOCATION SHOWN ON DRAWINGS
Relocations shown on the Drawings: Public utility installations or structures, including but not limited to
poles, signs, fences, piping, conduits and drains that interfere with the positioning of the work which are
shown on the Drawings to be removed, relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered
as part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various contract
items. No separate payment shall be made, therefore.
All existing castings, including valve boxes, junction boxes, manholes, hand holes, pull boxes, inlets and
similar structures in the areas of construction that are to remain in service and in areas of trench restoration
and pavement replacement, shall be adjusted by the Contractor to bring them flush with the surface of the
finished work.
All existing utility systems which conflict with the construction of the work herein, which can be
temporarily removed and replaced, shall be accomplished at the expense of the Contractor. Work shall be
done by the utility unless the utility approves in writing that the Work may be done by the Contractor.
211-2. RELOCATIONS NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS
Where public utility installations or structures are encountered during the course of work, and are not
indicated on the Drawings or in the specifications, and when in the opinion of the city, removal, relocation,
replacement, or rebuilding is necessary to complete the work, such work shall be accomplished by the utility
having jurisdiction or such work may be requested in writing by the city for the Contractor to perform and
fairly compensated once work is complete.
If such work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, it will be carried out expeditiously and the
Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal, relocation, replacement,
or rebuilding as necessary.
212. RESTORATION PROCEDURES
212-1. INTERIM RESTORATION
All excavations shall be backfilled and compacted as specified by the city and Engineer at the end of each
working day. For excavations within existing paved areas, the limerock base or soil cement base shall be
spread and compacted to provide a smooth surface free of aggregate material. The Contractor shall keep
the site accessible to the city Staff at all times for the purpose of operating and maintaining the existing
facility during construction.
All pipe and fittings shall be neatly stored in a location, which will cause the least disturbance to the public.
All debris shall be removed and properly disposed of by the end of each working day.
212-2. FINAL RESTORATION
111/
After completing all installations, pressure testing, bacteriological testing, and associated work, final
restoration shall be performed. In no event shall final restoration begin after substantial completion. Any
SECTION IV
Page 35 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
additional restoration required after testing shall be repaired in a timely manner at no additional cost to the
city. Maintenance of all restored facilities shall be the Contractor's responsibility. This maintenance shall
be performed on an on-going basis during the course of construction. The Contractor's Progress Schedule
shall reflect the above restoration requirements.
SECTION IV
Page 36 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
• 300 SERIES: MATERIALS
•
•
301. CONCRETE
The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of
all concrete placements. Contact Building Inspectors from the city Planning Department if building a
structure is required. The Contractor shall give Building Inspectors a minimum of 48 hours in advance to
inspect.
Unless otherwise noted elsewhere or directed, the following requirements shall be adhered to:
All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of
Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's
Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have
a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days. The cement type shall be Type I
and shall conform to AASHTO M85 latest edition. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 or latest
current edition. All ready -mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C94 or latest edition. The slump for all
concrete shall be in the range of three inches (3") to five inches (5"), except when admixtures or special
placement considerations are required.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than five cubic yards (5 cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for
each class, for each day, for every fifty cubic yards (50 cy) or part thereof exceeding five cubic yards (5
cy), one set of three (3) compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At
the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests,
as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation
or denial thereof.
302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
302-1. EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the
concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point six inches (6")
outside said concrete work before the forms are placed.
302-2. FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal, except curbs. Curb forms shall be metal only, unless
at radius, intermittent sections less than ten (10) linear feet or with written permission from the Engineer.
The forms shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the
depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the
pressure of concrete without moving or springing.
303. REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Reinforcement deformation shall be
performed as per ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement or latest edition. Reinforcement steel grades shall be billet intermediate or hard.
Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A1064
SECTION IV
Page 37 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
or latest edition that is relevant. Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet
the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A1064) or latest edition that is relevant. Welded wires shall
be elevated with the use of chairs. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM A775/A77
requirements or latest edition.
303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit
price for the item of work specified.
304. BACKFILL
304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL
Material for backfill other than under Gabion mattresses shall be carefully selected from the excavated
material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free
from any deleterious material including but not limited to clay, muck, organic matter or debris, contain no
rocks or other hard fragments greater than three inches (3") in the largest dimension and all fill shall be
similar material.
Material for backfill under Gabion mattresses shall be an A-1 soil meeting AASHTO M145 (latest edition).
Backfill shall be carried up evenly in layers not exceeding eight inches (8") in thickness and shall be
compacted into place by mechanical tamping to 98% before the next layer is applied. A hydro -hammer
shall not be used for compaction. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed below the pipe
haunch, around the sides, and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to twelve inches (12")
above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
For backfill in small areas that do not permit any type of tamping, Contractor may use flowable fill to
achieve required density. Refer to Section 306 for more details on flowable fill. Where wet conditions are
such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be effective, as determined by the Engineer,
Contractor may use #57 stone (meeting FDOT's specifications) and hand tamping until backfill has reached
an elevation and condition such as to make the use of the mechanical tampers practical. Fully wrap the
stones with a layer of Type D filter fabric of FDOT Index 199 (latest edition). Do not place stones within
four feet (4') of the ends of trench or ditch; use normally accepted backfill material at the ends.
Where new cast -in-place concrete work is performed, do not place backfill until the specified twenty-eight
(28) days compressive strength occurs.
Heavy construction equipment shall not be permitted to cross over pipes or culverts until placing and
compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation of at least four feet (4')
above the top of the pipe or culvert.
The cost of backfill, flowable fill, alternative approved material for wet conditions, and extra dewatering
effort to achieve required density, etc., shall be included in the contract unit price or lump sum price for the
item of the work specified.
304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved by the
Engineer, to perform density testing on backfilled material. All testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer's
Representative. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The Contractor shall be
charged for all retests and re -inspection services.
SECTION IV
Page 38 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
Backfill under all types of pavement areas shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 6" in thickness unless
an alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as
determined by AASHTO T 180 - Modified Proctor Density Test (latest edition) to the bottom of pavement.
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted to the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum
of 95% compaction as determined by AASHTO T 180 - Modified Proctor Density Test (latest edition).
Backfill under buried structures shall be in accordance with these specifications to prevent future
subsidence.
Backfill Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of backfill compaction by performing
density testing. For each test location, density testing shall be performed at six-inch (6") lifts. The character
of the backfill material will be observed during the excavation for density testing to determine conformance
with the specifications. Density testing shall be performed using nuclear field density equipment or
conventional weight -volume methods. If the weight -volume method is used, volume shall be determined
by using the sand replacement test (ASTM D1556/ D1556M the latest edition) or liquid displacement
methods (ASTM D2167 latest edition). If nuclear methods are used, the trench correction effect shall be
accounted for by recalibrating the nuclear gauge on its calibration block at the location of each test prior to
taking the density measurement. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, tools, and labor to prepare the
test site for testing.
Normal Testing Frequency: One test shall be performed for each one hundred feet (100') of backfill or
fraction thereof or for each single run of pipe/culvert connecting two (2) successive structures whichever is
less. The location of the test within each section shall be selected by the Engineer's Representative. Testing
shall progress as each one hundred -foot (100') section is completed. Four (4) tests equally spaced around
each structure shall be performed on each six-inch (6") lift. Testing which indicates that unacceptable
material has been incorporated into the backfill, or that insufficient compaction is being obtained shall be
followed by expanded testing to determine the limits of the unacceptable backfill.
Expanded Testing Requirements: If normal testing within a testing section indicates unacceptable
backfill, the Engineer's Representative may require additional testing within the same test section to
determine the limits of unacceptable backfill. Additional testing required by the Engineer's Representative
shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall not exceed testing of four (4) additional locations within the
test section. Unacceptable backfill within the limits established by the testing shall be removed and replaced
by the Contractor at no additional cost to the city. Additional testing beyond that required may be performed
by the Contractor at his expense to further delineate limits of unacceptable backfill.
305. RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap
shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap will be weight, in tons, in surface dry natural state. The scales must be
calibrated and certified by an independent party and carry a state certification.
305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand -cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment,
excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand -cement and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work.
SECTION IV
Page 39 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for
placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for
placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if
concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
306. FLOWABLE FILL
Flowable fill is used in backfill and to fill all abandoned pipelines that are not removed. Mains that need to
be abandoned shall be cut, capped, and filled with flowable fill meeting the requirements specified herein.
Flowable fill shall adhere to Section 121 of FDOT specifications (latest edition).
The Contractor shall be responsible for producing a flowable mixture using these guidelines and adjusting
his mixture design as called for by circumstances or as may be directed by the Engineer.
General mix requirements are as follows:
Components
Excavatable
Non Excavatable
Cellular Concrete
Cement (lb/yd3)
75-100
75-150
Min 150
Supplementary Cementitious Materials (lb/yd3)
None
150-600
Fine Aggregate
*
*
*
Water
**
**
**
Air
5-35%
5-15%
***
Unit Weight (Ib/ft3)
90-110
100-125
20-80
28 Day Compressive Strength
****
****
****
* Fine aggregate shall be proportioned to yield 1 cubic yard (yd3).
** Mix design shall produce a consistency that will result in a flowable self -leveling product at the time of
placement
* * * In cellular concrete, preformed foam shall be proportioned at the jobsite to yield 1 cubic yard in
accordance with design requirements
* * * * The requirements for percent air, compressive strength, and unit weight are for laboratory designs
only and are not intended for jobsite acceptance requirements
Weights for fine aggregate and water shall be adjusted according to cementitious content. The mix
proportions shall be adjusted for removability, pumpability and flowability. If required, strength test data
shall be provided prior to batching.
If required by the Engineer, the flowability can be measured by afflux time determined in accordance with
ASTM C939/ C939M — 16a (latest edition) and shall be 30 seconds +/- 5 seconds as measured on mortar
passing the No. 4 sieve. The equipment required to perform this test shall be provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall flush all raw sewage, sludge, debris, and water from the force mains prior to filling
pipeline with flowable fill. If not discharged into a sanitary sewer system, the Contractor shall collect all
flushing water and dispose of at a wastewater treatment facility. City Public Utilities Department IPP
Coordinator and Director and/or Assistant Director must approve of the discharge into the collection system
or wastewater treatment plant.
The Contractor must locate and verify all connections of the piping before filling the pipeline with flowable
fill to avoid redirection and reconnection and report them to the Engineer. During placement of fill,
compensate for irregularities in sewer pipe, such as obstructions, open joints, or broken pipe to ensure no
voids remain unfilled.
SECTION IV Page 40 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Clean placement areas of sewer and water lines of debris that may hinder fill placement. Remove excessive
amounts of sludge and other substances that may degrade performance of fill. Remove free water prior to
starting fill placement.
All proposed new force mains shall be installed, pressure tested, and placed in-service prior to abandoning
the existing force mains. All pipes shall be abandoned in a manner which results in the abandoned pipeline
not being pressurized.
Flowable fill shall be produced and delivered using concrete construction equipment. Placing flowable fill
shall be by chute, pumping or other methods approved by the Engineer.
The flowable fill shall be placed to the designated fill line without vibration or other means of compaction.
Placement shall be avoided during inclement weather, e.g. rain or ambient temperatures below 40°F. The
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent any damages caused by the hydraulic pressure of
the fill during placement prior to hardening. Also, necessary means to confine the materials within the
designated space shall be provided by the Contractor.
During placement of the fill, the Contractor is to avoid construction stoppage that would exceed the working
time of the fill. If for any case that the fill would harden, the Contractor is responsible for properly installing
fill into the abandoned pipeline from another location and shall meet the requirements specified herein.
A city Engineering Department Representative shall be present to witness the placement of flowable fill in
abandoned pipelines. A 48-hour notice shall be given to the city before the placement of fill.
The flowable fill shall be proportioned and placed as specified herein. In general, the strength desired is the
maximum hardness that can be excavated at a later date using conventional excavating equipment. No
curing protection is required.
The fill shall be left undisturbed until material obtains sufficient strength. Sufficient strength is a minimum
of 150 psi penetration resistance as measured using a handheld penetrometer. The penetrometer shall be
provided by the Contractor.
All flowable fill areas subjected to traffic loads must have a durable riding surface.
Payment of the applicable lump sum price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and
equipment necessary and will include, but is not limited to the necessary costs associated with the
installation of the flowable fill as shown in the Drawings and as described in the Contract Documents.
307. MATERIAL INDEPENDENT TESTING
The city shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the
expense of the city, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests and analyses
shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with
the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and
accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or
investigation by the city, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such
independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair
of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor.
SECTION IV Page 41 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER
401. SANITARY MANHOLES
401-1. BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert
channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to the inside of the adjacent
sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible.
Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed
by one of the following methods: formed directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and
mortar, or lay half tile in concrete. For invert channels formed using the brick and mortar, or the half tile in
concrete approaches the entire bench and channel area will be coated with a minimum of one-half inch of
Xypex Megamix II or approved equal.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in
manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed 12 inches (12").
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twelve inches (12"). Doghouse
manholes and flat top manholes are not permitted. If a drop manhole is needed, only outside drop manholes
allowed.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled with mortar, shall be smoothed from
inside of manholes.
The entire interior and exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch (1/2") of Mega Mix
II with Bio San as supplied by Xypex or approved equal.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
Maintenance of Flow Plan:
1. The Contractor shall prepare a Maintenance of Flow Plan that describes in detail the work that will
be performed by the Contractor to maintain continuous operation of the city's existing utility
services. Maintenance of Flow Plan shall address the temporary and permanent flow diversion of
gravity sewers and service laterals.
2. Temporary diversion of the gravity sewer flows shall be done using bypass pumps (one duty, one
standby) to pump from the upstream manhole to the downstream manhole. Bypass pumps shall
have hospital grade sound attenuation. The Contractor shall obtain peak wet weather flow rates in
the gravity sewer from the city and shall demonstrate in the Maintenance of Flow Plan that adequate
pumping capacity is provided to accommodate peak wet weather flow. The Contractor and city
personnel that are experienced in the collection system shall determine the float levels in the field,
pump on, standby or lag pump on, and high-level alarm. The high-level alarm shall be connected
to an auto dialer to notify the Contractor of an alarm condition. The bypass pump suction manhole
shall use the collection system for a temporary wet well storage; however, surcharging in the
existing sewer system shall be limited. Once the high-level float alarm is triggered, it shall allow
enough time for emergency Contractor personnel to arrive on scene and resolve the problem prior
to any sanitary sewer overflows. The bypass suction and discharge pipes may require the removal
of the manhole tops which will result in excess odor escaping from the manholes. The contractor
shall provide a means to seal odors within the bypass manholes to minimize odors during the
temporary diversion.
3. The Maintenance of Flow Plan shall include a sequence of construction with projected time, in
days, for each step in the sequence.
SECTION IV Page 42 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
4. If the work required to maintain utility operation must occur during evening, night or weekend
hours, the Contractor shall notify the affected residents in advance of the projected work. The
Contractor shall reimburse the city for overtime work, including inspector overtime, in excess of
regular working hours. The Contractor must also get permission from city Project Manager before
working outside of Noise Ordinance hours.
5. Identify the person(s) responsible for executing the Maintenance of Flow Plan and the systems to
be put in place for monitoring the existing utility system's ability to maintain flow.
401-2. PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement, with Xypex Admix C -1000R or approved equal, shall be used throughout
with a minimum wall thickness of five inches (5"). The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C478
(latest edition). Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket, Pro Stik Butyl Sealant
or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Caulking of joint shall not be allowed. Minimum concrete strength
shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Xypex admixture must be added to the concrete at the time of batching. Under
normal conditions, the crystalline powder shall be added to the concrete mix at the following rates:
1. Xypex Admix C -1000R 3.5 % by weight of cement content
Note: For enhanced chemical protection or for meeting specific project requirements or where the concrete
mix design contains higher than 25% type F fly ash content or includes a Portland cement/slag cement/type
C fly ash blend, consult with manufacturer or its authorized representative to determine appropriate dosage
rates.
One set of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the city Project Manager and
Engineer of Record for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility
for compliance to these specifications unless letter from Contractor requesting specific variance is approved
by the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on
the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to
permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job
site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of
channel, etc., shall be as shown on city of Clearwater Engineering Index 302 Sheets.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not
properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base
shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification compacted soil approximately five inches (5") thick as
referenced in Section 304-2 and twelve inches (12") of # 57 grade stone, wrapped in geotextile to secure
proper seating and bearing. Refer to these Technical Specifications, Section 304 for backfill and compaction
requirements.
401-2.1. MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
Between the top of the manhole cone/corbel and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall
be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without
disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Section 703-7, Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. All
final grade adjustment of manhole covers, and frame assemblies shall be completed utilizing injection
molded high density polyethylene (HDPE) adjustment rings as manufactured by LADTECH, Inc. or an
approved equal. The adjustment rings shall be manufactured from polyethylene plastic as identified in
ASTM Specification D4976 (Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Molding and Extrusion
SECTION IV
Page 43 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Materials) the latest edition. Material properties shall be tested and qualified for usage per the ASTM Test
Methods referenced in the above ASTM standard. The adjustment rings shall be molded from 100%
recycled material. The plastic rings shall be manufactured utilizing the injection molding process as defined
by SPE (Society of Plastic Engineers). The adjustment rings shall be tested to assure compliance with
impact and loading requirements per the AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges latest
edition. Installation shall be per manufacture's recommendations for vacuum test installations only. The
annular space between the rings and cone basin, the rings, and the rings and cover frame shall be sealed
utilizing an approved butyl rope (not caulk) sealant. All adjustment for matching road grade shall be made
utilizing a molded and indexed slope ring. All grade rings shall be covered by the LADTECH, Inc. warranty
or one of equal terms and duration. Grade rings shall be Traffic Rated AASHTO HS -20 (latest edition).
401-2.2. STAINLESS STEEL MANHOLE STORM WATER INFLOW
ABATEMENT INSERTS (DISH/PAN)
401-2.2.1. MATERIALS AND DESIGN
General: The insert, gasket and relief valve shall be manufactured of materials resistant to corrosion from
atmospheres containing hydrogen sulfide and dilute sulfuric acid.
Insert: The insert body shall be manufactured of 304 stainless steel with a thickness of not less than 18
gauge. The insert shall have straight sides designed to allow a loose fit into the ring for easy removal. The
insert manufacturer must furnish a "load test verification" showing a load test failure in excess of 3000 lbs.
For added strength, no less than three (3) ribs shall be stamped in bottom of the insert.
Gasket: The gasket shall be extruded onto the stainless dish with a Synthetic elastomer having the
following physical properties:
Tensile Strength: 335 psi - ASTM D412 Elongation 400-600% - ASTM D412 Shore Hardness: 25 Shore
A - ASTM D2240 Adhesion to Stainless: 580 psi - ASTM D454 1/D7234 (Use latest edition)
Relief Valve: The gas relief valve shall be designed to release at a pressure of .5 to 1.5 PSI and have a
water leak down rate no greater than 5 gallons per 24 hours. The valve shall be installed in the insert by
means of a hole tapped in the insert by the manufacturer. The valve shall be made of nitrite for prevention
of corrosion from contact with hydrogen sulfide, dilute sulfuric acid and other gases associated with waste-
water collections systems.
Handle: The dish shall have a handle of 3/16" plastic -coated stainless-steel cable installed on the body of
the dish. The handle shall be attached with a #6 high-grade stainless-steel rivet. The cable shall be braided
in a manner which resists cutting with common bolt cutters. The cable terminal and eye shall be stainless
steel.
Manhole Frames: Manhole frame sizes vary, and the city will provide the successful bidder with specific
dimensions and number of required inserts for each manhole frame size. Maximum insert outside diameter
(OD) will not exceed 26.5 inches nor be less than 23 inches. Most frames have an outside diameter of 23.5
inches with a clear opening of 21.5 inches.
401-2.2.2. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment of each inflow abatement insert shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and
equipment necessary but not limited to the costs associated for the installation of the sanitary manholes'
pans/dishes.
SECTION IV Page 44 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
401-3. DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings, and specials as detailed
on the drawings. Only outside drop manholes allowed.
401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher
than finished grade as directed. Refer to Clearwater Standard Detail Index 301.
401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior of all precast manholes shall not require any specific coating. The interior shall be coated with
either Spraywall®, Polyurethane or Raven 405 Epoxy at the direction of the city at a thickness not less than
125 mil. For new manholes install geotextile wrap at the joints.
401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole
adapter coupling by NPC Kor-N-Seal® with stainless steel bands or approved equal water stop coupling.
401-7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment of each inflow abatement insert shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and
equipment necessary but not limited to the costs associated for the installation of the sanitary manholes.
402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER
STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the
Engineer.
402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
403-1. MATERIALS
403-1.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. All
polyvinyl chloride mains (pipe and fittings) shall be at least 6 -inch -diameter, SDR 26, and conform to
ASTM D3034; laterals can be four -inch (4") PVC schedule 40. Pipe and fittings shall be plainly marked
with the ASTM designation. Strong back stainless steel Fernco is required for all non-mechanical PVC
connections. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible
seal in conformance with ASTM D3212 (latest edition). The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum
of twenty feet (20').
SECTION IV
Page 45 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or the construction plans, ductile iron pipe and fittings for
gravity sewer shall conform to Section 502-2.1. of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except
the pipe interior shall be lined with Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between buildings lots in a sideline easement,
the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the
side easement. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line.
403-1.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE, DUCTILE IRON OR HDPE. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, polyvinyl chloride, ductile iron and HDPE force
main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 502-2.1 and 502-2.2 of these Technical Specifications for
water main pipe except that DIP shall be lined with Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to
exposure to ultraviolet radiation shall be rejected.
403-2. INSTALLATION
403-2.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of Thermoplastic gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices
contained in ASTM D2321 (latest edition).
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width
(typically pipe OD plus eight inches (8") to twelve inches (12") on each side) allowing working space to
place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be
performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching
material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of
bedding, placement of the haunching material and placement of the pipe in the trench without standing
water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or
misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support the pipe, the Contractor will be required to remove
unsuitable material and pipe bedding and replace with Class I material (one half inch (1/2") diameter
aggregate) to provide firm support of the pipe.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The Contractor is required to
locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector, the location
of all new laterals.
403-2.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 503 of these Technical Specifications
for water main pipe.
403-3. INSPECTIONS OF LINES AND MANHOLES
A. Inspection of completed lines and manholes shall be scheduled within a reasonable time after
construction or when required by the Engineer. Before scheduling an inspection, the Contractor
shall prepare the lines by cleaning and flushing. Manholes shall be clean, finished, and free of leaks.
B. Manholes shall be on a true and uniform grade. The inverts shall have a smooth steel troweled
finish. All benches shall be uniformly sloping. The frames shall be tight and properly set in mortar
SECTION IV Page 46 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
on solid masonry. The invert, benches and adjacent pipe shall be free of splattered mortar. All
required interior lining or paint shall be kept intact. Manhole frames shall be adjusted to grade with
the covers and frames cleaned and free of mortar and asphaltic mixtures. All precast manhole seams
shall be filled with an approved asphaltic compound.
C. Pipe between manholes shall be true to line and grade. Dips and sags with one inch or more of
trapped water shall be cause for rejection. Air testing may be required also at the Contractor's
expense. Contractor shall provide personnel to assist with inspections.
D. The Contractor shall provide city Public Utilities Department and the Engineer with a Television
Inspection of the completed gravity sewers in accordance with the following:
1. Shall be performed by a National Association of Sewer Service Companies (NASSCO)
Pipeline Assessment & Certification Program (PACP) Certified Operator who will use
software that is compatible with CUES Granite products latest version software to
NASSCO PACP Standards.
2. Shall be submitted as digital media that includes video and data base file in PACP format
and include a printed copy of the PACP television inspection log.
3. Shall perform a manhole inspection and provide a completed NASSCO Manhole Inspection
form (latest version) for each manhole that is inspected
4. All pertinent data recorded in audio on the media to include:
a. Subdivision name and phase number.
b. Manhole numbers (these numbers must match manhole numbers on "as built" and
record drawings).
c. Date of inspection
d. Size and material of pipe
e. Service connection locations, right or left
f. All distances between manholes
g. Locations of suspected and obvious pipe deficiencies (i.e., bad joints, breaks or leaks,
etc.)
5. PVC pipe shall have a deflection test using a seven and one-half percent (go -no-go) test
mandrel of appropriate size, which shall be visible on video at all times.
6. The printed NASSCO PACP television report (indicating manhole numbers) which will
accompany the media. This written report must include:
a. Manhole numbers (these numbers must match manhole numbers on "as -built" and
record drawings).
b. Service connection locations, right or left.
c. Reference to service connection locations out of manholes.
d. Locations of suspected and obvious pipe deficiencies (i.e., bad joints, breaks or
leaks, etc.).
e. Depth of each manhole.
f. Actual measured distance (on ground) between manholes.
7. All visual and television inspections shall be completed by the contractor and approved by
city Public Utilities Department and Engineer after the road base has been constructed
but prior to the placing of any asphalt.
8. Television Inspection Media must clearly show details of structural defects, misalignments
and infiltration.
SECTION IV
Page 47 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
403-4. TESTING
403-4.1. TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. The
water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level shall be tested by measuring
infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level shall be tested by
filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the
sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and
then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed fifty (50) gallons per
inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test
the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration
is excessive, the Contractor at their own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions
by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the
Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains and provide to
the Engineer to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to
acceptance. Any dips or sags of more than five percent (5%) of the pipe inside diameter (ID) dimension
from its design alignment shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion
of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line.
403-4.2. TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi for two (2) hours, as described in Section
504 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
403-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT
403-5.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per linear foot per appropriate
range of depth of cut as contained in the contract bid. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline
of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per linear
foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe
including a two-way cleanout at the property line.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to complete the
installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and
grading.
403-5.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE PAYMENT
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 506 of these
Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
SECTION IV
Page 48 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
• 404. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE SANITARY SEWER
REHABILITATION
•
•
404-1. GENERAL
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewers, mains and
service laterals, by the installation and curing of a resin impregnated felt tube/cured-in-place pipe (CIPP)
liner. The liner shall be jointless, continuous from manhole to manhole, watertight and chemically resistant
to withstand exposure to domestic sewage. Installation and curing shall include all labor, materials and
equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. Any proposed
installer/contractor, or liner system, must be pre -approved by the city prior to receiving bids.
The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The city
reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the
installer.
The contractor shall provide trenchless reconstruction of service laterals and mainline sewers. The
contractor shall have the capability of performing city's selected services which include televised
inspection, data collection, system flow analysis, and pipeline reconstruction.
The contractor shall employ adequate staff to perform the services required, staff should include Project
Representative, Project Manager, Field Supervisor and Senior Foreman. Field supervisory personnel
employed by the CIPP Contractor will have at least five (5) years of experience in the performance of the
work and tasks as stated in the Contract Documents.
Staff shall be proficient and experienced in all phases of services mentioned.
The contractor shall perform all work and shall be a licensed Contractor for these services.
The contractor shall be certified in confined space entry (OSHA) and traffic control.
The contractor shall provide services that include safety measures for both the public and workers, including
traffic control, and shall coordinate all scheduling with the city.
The contractor shall work with the city in establishing priorities and in preparing work assignments.
The contractor shall be completely responsible for the control of the environment of the work site during
on-site operations. All precautions shall be taken by the selected contractor to protect the workers, public
and city staff from the exposure to harmful or hazardous substances with the sewer system.
The contractor shall be responsible for the transport and disposal of all waste materials. The selected
contractor shall be responsible for all waste material spills and clean-up in the loading, hauling, and
unloading of the contractor's equipment.
The contractor shall be responsible for conforming to any and all requirements regarding hauling and
disposal of sewer wastes from each city's work site in accordance with OSHA regulations and those that
may be mandated by the Federal of State Governments. The contractor shall ensure that all waste material
transporters possess all required local, state and federal transportation permits and that they comply with
all local, state and federal regulations, including but without limitation, 40 CFR Part 263, "Standards
Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Wastes" and Chapter 17-730, Part 3, Florida Administrative Code,
as may be amended from time to time.
The contractor shall inform the city of its planned work schedules and shall afford the city reasonable
opportunity to observe and inspect the contractor's work in process. The city will be advised of all schedule
changes and notified when a work site is left for a 24-hour period when work is not complete.
The contractor shall report to city's Inspector their daily progress.
SECTION IV
Page 49 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
Work hours shall be from 7:00 AM to 3:30 PM Monday through Friday unless authorized in writing by the
city's Project Manager.
404-2. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer rehabilitation using the cured -in-place product shall be made per linear foot
including all preparation, installation, curing, flow maintenance, lateral reconnection, submittals, light
cleaning (3 passes of cleaning head) of piping, material removal & disposal, CCTV inspection/reporting
(pre & post installation) sealing of all leaks, connection to all manholes, traffic control on city streets, testing
such as infiltration and/or exfiltration, provision of equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc.,
to provide a fully completed and operational sewer.
Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary sewer mains and
from the connection to the main to the terminus of the liner for service laterals.
404-3. SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following information:
1. Manufacturer's certification that the materials to be used meet the referenced standards and these
specifications.
2. License or certificate verifying Manufacture's/Licensor's approval of the installer.
3. Proposed equipment and procedures for accomplishing the work.
4. Lining Manufacturer's product data and instructions for resin and catalyst system.
5. Design Calculations, in accordance with the Appendix of ASTM F1216 or latest edition, for each
length of liner to be installed including the thickness of each proposed CIPP. It will be acceptable
for the Contractor to submit a design for the most severe line condition and apply that design to all
of the line sections. To be completed and certified by a Professional Engineer proficient in the
design of pipeline systems. All calculations shall include data that conforms to the requirements of
these specifications.
6. A detailed installation plan describing all preparation work, cleaning operation, pre -closed-circuit
television (CCTV) inspections, flow maintenance, traffic control, installation procedure, method of
curing, service reconnection, quality control, testing to be performed, final CCTV inspection, and
all else necessary and appropriate for a complete CIPP liner installation.
7. Tube wet -out and cure method including: a complete description of the proposed wet -out
procedure, manufacturer's recommended cure method- for each diameter and thickness of CIPP
liner to be installed, and detailed curing procedure detailing the curing medium and the method of
application.
8. A detailed installation schedules.
9. All SDS sheets for all materials to be furnished for the project.
10. Weekly work schedules shall be submitted no later than close of business on proceeding Thursdays
for the work on the following week. Scope of the schedule shall include the following: cleaning
operations, CCTV pre & post operations, lining, and crew leader's information including phone
number.
SECTION IV
Page 50 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 404-4. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) FOR GRAVITY SEWER
MAINS
•
•
404-4.1. LINER MATERIAL
The liner material shall be an epoxy, vinyl ester or polyester fiber felt resin -impregnated tubing or city
Engineering Department approved equal, sized to tightly fit the internal circumference and length of the
designated gravity sewer. The cured liner shall meet the minimum initial structural properties as listed in
ASTM F1216. The liner shall be designed in accordance with the Appendices in ASTM F1216. It shall be
assumed that a fully deteriorated gravity sewer pipeline having no structural strength will be rehabilitated
with H-20 traffic loading, the water table's at the ground surface and the product installed will have a
minimum expected lifetime of fifty (50) years. In no case shall the liner thickness be less than six
millimeters (6 mm) for pipe sizes six inches (6") through eight inches (8") and 7.5 millimeters for pipe
sizes ten inches (10") through twelve inches (12") in diameter. Minimum liner thickness for pipes greater
than twelve inches (12") shall be as specified by the city. Liner shall be sized by Contractor to provide a
tight fit to the inside circumference of the host pipe and shall be a continuous jointless lining from manhole
to manhole.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall use an epoxy vinyl ester or polyester resin and catalyst
system, and a fiber felt tube compatible with the inversion or other approved alternate installation process
and having the following minimum physical nronerties for the cured nine:
PROPERTY VALUE
TEST METHOD
MINIMUM (psi)
Tensile Strength
ASTM D638 or latest edition
3,000
Flexural Strength
Modified ASTM D790 or latest edition
4,500
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity
Modified ASTM D790
250,000
Long -Term (50 year) Modulus of
Elasticity
ASTM D7790 or latest edition
125,000
The epoxy vinyl ester or polyester resin and fiber felt tubing system shall be in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM F1216 and be fabricated to a size that, when installed, will neatly fit the interior of
the host pipe. Allowance shall be made for circumferential stretching during a direct (non -inversion) pull
in. The CIPP product shall fit tightly to the host sewer pipe (with minimal shrinkage) in such a way as to
minimize water migration (tracking) between the liner and the host pipe. A vacuum impregnation process
shall be used in conjunction with a roller system to achieve a uniform distribution of the resin throughout
the tube under controlled conditions. The volume shall be adjusted by adding five to ten (10) percent excess
resin for the change in resin volume due to polymerization and to allow for any migration of resin into
cracks or joints in the host pipe.
The outside of the fabric tube shall be marked every 5 feet with the name of the manufacturer or CIPP
system, manufacturing lot and production footage.
404-4.2. CHEMICAL JOINT, CRACK AND ANNULAR SPACE SEALING
MATERIALS FOR ACTIVE LEAKS AND SERVICE LATERAL
CONNECTIONS
Chemical joint and crack sealing materials shall have the following properties:
1. React quickly to form a permanent watertight seal
2. Resultant seal shall be flexible and immune to the effects of wet/dry cycles
3. Non -biodegradable and immune to the effects of acids, alkalis, and organics in sewage
4. Component packaging and mixing compatible with field conditions and worker safety
SECTION IV
Page 51 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
5. Extraneous sealant left inside pipe shall be readily removable; and shall be compatible with the
repair resin utilized.
Chemical joint sealing material shall be acrylic resin type and shall be furnished with activators, initiators,
inhibitors, and any other materials recommended by the manufacturer for a complete grout system. Sealing
grout shall be furnished in liquid form in standard manufacturer's containers.
404-4.3. MANHOLE CONNECTIONS
A seal, consisting of a resin mixture or hydrophilic seal compatible with the installed CIPP shall be applied
at manhole walls in accordance with the CIPP System manufacturer's recommendation. Cost associated
with manhole seals shall be included in the contract price of CIPP installation.
404-4.4. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
404-4.4.1. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The
Contractor shall perform light cleaning (3 passes of the jet head) using a jetting system capable of providing
60 gallons of flow at 3,000 psi. After light cleaning has been completed the Contractor shall attempt a pre-
installation CCTV inspection. If the Contractor believes that the piping requires additional cleaning the
collected CCTV video will be provided to the Inspector before beginning any heavy cleaning of the piping.
Light cleaning is included in the cost of liner installation and heavy cleaning will be measured as a separate
pay item. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface
free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Flow
maintenance will be provided by the Contractor as required. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to
cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and commercial facilities. During the cleaning and
preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sanitary sewer facilities from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in
accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of
sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the city's treatment plants.
404-4.4.2. TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of pipe is completed, all pipe sections
shall be visually inspected with a digital CCTV camera and recorded in DVD format. Cost of CCTV
inspections is included in the cost of pipe lining CCTV data shall be provided to the city designated Project
Manager. Asset Management (OWAM) software. This section describes the requirements of the Contractor
in providing the following minimum requirements for video capture, photo capture and database structure
to the city. The city is currently using CUES Granite video and data collection software. The Contractor
shall provide the TV Inspections in the same CUES Granite product database, photo, and video capture
format. The Contractor -provided TV inspections, database, DVDs, photos, and related files shall have the
ability to direct synchronize to the city's existing CUES Granite product database.
404-4.4.2.1. IMAGE (PHOTOS) CAPTURE FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS
The Inspection image files (pictures) shall have the ability to export to industry standard formats to include
JPEG, BMP, and TIFF formats and be transferable by disk, thumb drive, DVD and/or external hard drive
to an external personal computer utilizing standard viewers and printers.
SECTION IV
Page 52 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
• 404-4.4.2.2. DIGITAL VIDEO FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS
Digital video files (Inspection Videos) shall be captured and/or recorded in the MPEG format or as specified
by the city. The video capture files shall be in MPEG format with data linking (Inspection Observations) to
the database file(s). The "Link" of the video capture file to the database observation file is required. The
inspection observation(s) shall link to the video record in real-time.
The accompanying database shall support the following code system: PACP, or current code system being
utilized by the city. The Database and Software program (CUES Granite products) shall be able to import
asset data from an Esri ArcGIS (v.10.1+) geodatabase utilizing the network features to associate Sewer
Mains with corresponding Sewer Nodes.
The database structure shall retain information on the various structures found within a sewer or storm
system. It is important that the structures, nodes, manholes and pipe identifiers and related attribute
information be retained as separate tables from the inspection allowing import of existing data from multiple
sources. The data structure allows different projects to reside within a single database. Information gathered
in projects shall be available to view by project or by system. Data gathered during project inspection shall
be available to view by the selected structure. Therefore, all inspections can be viewed on a structure even
if gathered in different projects.
404-4.4.2.3. SYNCHRONIZATION
The database shall have the ability to synchronize assets and inspections from replicated databases. The
synchronization process should have built-in error checking for duplicates, updates and any modifications
to the data being synched. This allows for multiple sources of data to be effectively consolidated into a
single unitary database for analysis and evaluation.
• 404-4.4.3. LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior
circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, joint -less liner product from inside
of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner
manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and
reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the city of any construction delays taking
place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall provide flow maintenance measures as described by
the approved Flow Maintenance Plan. Flow Maintenance Plan shall be approved by the city Project
Manager prior to 48 -hours of mobilization. Flow Maintenance Plan shall include redundancy. Liner entries
at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or
other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at their expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be
met.
•
404-4.4.4. LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected
by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All
lateral reconnections are to be grouted, as directed by the city to prevent leakage. Grouting method and
material is to be approved by the city. Cost for robotic reconnection shall be included in the cost to install
the liner. If the city wishes to reconnect service lateral using a different method the cost to do so will be
measured and paid for separately.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by
the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically
directed otherwise by the city. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will
not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers seven days before commencement with
SECTION IV
Page 53 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
appropriate information regarding the construction project. Contractor shall notify the Senior Public
Information Coordinator from the city Public Communications Department prior to distribution.
404-4.4.5. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the city. At no time will any
sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight (8) hour period without a
service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters
buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims.
404-4.4.6. TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Post cleaning and television inspection shall proceed only after all necessary work and preparation has been
completed, including the following:
• Placement of traffic control measures in accordance with these specifications
• Implementation of adequate flow control
• Pre -installation cleaning and television inspection
• Installation of CIPP liner in accordance with specifications
• All services re -instated including grout sealing in accordance with these specifications
The Contractor shall clean and televise the assigned gravity sewer in accordance with Sections 404-4.4.1,
404-4.4.2, 404-4.4.2.1, 404-4.4.2.2 and 404-4.4.2.3. The interior surface of the pipeline shall be cleaned
with high pressure water jet equipment immediately prior to conducting the post television inspection.
Jetting equipment will provide a minimum of sixty (60) gallons per minute of water at 3,000 psi. All service
locations, gouges, cracks, bumps, bulges and obstructions, such as dropped joints, shall be noted on the
inspection. In the case of bellies in the line, the pipe shall be cleared of any standing water to provide
continuous visibility during the post inspection. The Contractor shall provide all inspections in digital PACP
format including printed inspection logs to the city. Cost associated with post -televising and cleaning shall
be included in the contract price of CIPP installation.
The finished liner shall be free of significant visual defects, damage, deflection, holes, leaks and other
defects.
Each individual pipe segment contained in a development is to be considered an "individual project" such
that all work, including all deliverables shall be reviewed and accepted prior to the city accepting and
processing payment for that individual project. No partial payments will be made on individual sewer
projects.
404-4.4.7. CLEANUP
Cleanup is an essential part of the work. As the work progresses and is completed, the Contractor shall
clean the various sites of all operations and completely restore all work areas to the satisfaction of the city.
This cleanup shall be done as promptly as practicable and shall not be left until the end of the construction
period. No part of the work shall be considered complete and no payment will be made until cleanup is
completed.
404-5. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) FOR SERVICE LATERALS
404-5.1. LINER MATERIAL
The lining material shall be a fiberglass/polyester needle fleece vacuum epoxy resin -impregnated or
equivalent material tube, matching the diameter of the lateral pipe, which is inserted into the service lateral
to be rehabilitated and cured -in-place by an acceptable curing method. No Polyester resins will be accepted.
SECTION IV
Page 54 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
The epoxy shall be suitable for the design conditions as well as the curing process. The cured liner shall
rovide a service life of 50 years and shall have the minimum structural properties listed below:
PROPERTY VALUE
TEST METHOD
MINIMUM (psi)
Tensile Strength
ASTM D638
3,000
Flexural Strength
Modified ASTM D790
4,500
Modulus of Elasticity
ASTM D790
250,000
The liner system shall consist of a sectional liner in the mainline (full wrap around the circumference of the
main line extending 5" on either side of the service) and the continuous lateral liner shall have the capacity
to extend to within 10 feet of the building foundation. The liner shall form a continuous, one-piece, tight
fitting, corrosion resistant and verifiable non -leaking cured in place pipe. The one-piece section liner shall
be manufactured in a factory setting prior to its arrival on site. No component of the liner (i.e. lateral tube
to mainline piece) shall be glued or sewn fused in the field prior to installation. The material shall be capable
of conforming to offset joints, bells, and disfigured pipe sections.
The liner shall be designed, fabricated, and installed for the actual conditions encountered for this
application including the material of the host pipe, in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM
F1216(latest edition), and shall meet the following minimum design conditions: AASHTO H-20 live load
with one truck passing; Soil Weight 120 pounds per cubic foot. Coefficient of friction Ku'=0.130;
Groundwater: At the ground surface; fully deteriorated pipe with 2 percent (min.) ovality. If ovality of
existing pipe is found to be worse, use actual percent up to 5 percent (max.); Soil Modulus 1,000 psi; Factor
of Safety = 2; Soil Depth: Depth of Cover will be determined by field measurements.
The liner shall be designed to withstand all imposed loads, including live loads and, if applicable hydrostatic
pressure. The liner shall have sufficient wall thickness to withstand all anticipated external pressures and
loads that may be imposed after installation. The design shall be performed and certified by a professional
engineer licensed by the Florida.
The liner and resin shall be manufactured by Trelleborg Pipe Seals, BLD, Inc., LMK, Inc., or approved
equal. The finished liner product shall be chemically resistant to domestic sewage over the expected lifetime
of the rehabilitated pipe.
The lateral liner system shall create epoxy resin migration into the defect/joints of the existing lateral. A
combination of mechanical and chemical bonding shall be created between the lateral lining system and
existing host pipe.
404-5.2. EPDXY RESIN MATERIAL
The epoxy system shall meet the requirements of ASTM F1216 (latest edition), Section 5.2. The epoxy
installed liner system shall produce a liner that will comply with the structural requirements specified herein
and shall provide chemical resistance for the flow media in the gravity pipe. The epoxy shall be compatible
with the rehabilitation process, shall be able to cure in the presence or absence of water, and shall have an
initiation temperature for cure as recommended by the epoxy manufacturer. Polyester and Vinylester resins
contain styrene and volatile organic compounds which are susceptible to shrinkage and UV Curing will not
be accepted.
Submitted documentation from the epoxy manufacturer specifically describing the chemical characteristics
of the epoxy system, including allowable mixing, impregnation, and handling time, transportation and
storage time, and recommended curing cycle including temperatures, pressures, and times. The epoxy
manufacturer's documentation must also include maximum allowable time for handling the impregnated
tube prior to insertion and the maximum allowable elapsed time from insertion to exotherm. If remedial
measures are available to extend either of the maximum allowable times indicated above, without affecting
the physical properties of the epoxy, the epoxy manufacturer should describe these measures and the time
limits beyond which even these measures will not prevent alteration of the physical properties of the epoxy.
SECTION IV
Page 55 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
404-5.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
The Contractor, when required, shall provide for the flow of sewage around the section(s) of main pipe
where the service lateral designated for lining is located. The bypass shall be made by plugging the line at
an existing upstream manhole and pumping the flow into a downstream manhole or adjacent system. The
pump and bypass lines shall be of adequate capacity and size to handle the flow. Contractor must coordinate
installation with property owner(s).
Delivery, storage, and handling of approved products are the responsibility of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall keep them safe from damage and stored with the proper environmental containment as
outlined by the manufacturer. No products should be used that have exceeded the designated shelf life as
outlined by the manufacturer. Remove damaged products from site. Promptly replace damaged products
with new products at no additional cost to the city.
If the service lateral lining process requires the installation of a cleanout, the city must approve the work
before it is done.
404-5.3.1. PRE -LINING INSPECTION
Prior to inspecting each service lateral the piping will be cleaned to allow passage of the camera. A recorded
CCTV video survey must be completed on the sewer main and service laterals with a pan and tilt camera.
The inspection shall confirm the location and clock reference of the lateral junctions to be lined, any offsets
within the mainline or service lateral, any intrusion from the lateral into the main; the angle at which the
connection comes in; any changes in angle of approach of the lateral for the length of the repair; the potential
flows coming through the lateral pipe; the potential flows going through the sewer main pipe; the diametric
size of the connection for the length of the liner; the size of the main pipe at the point of the liner and the
presence of active infiltration within the vicinity of the work area. Cost to complete the necessary pipe
cleaning and CCTV inspection will be included in the cost to install the lateral liner.
Two copies of the pre -lining inspection shall be submitted to the Public Utilities Dept. The Contractor shall
be responsible for having a copy of the pre -lining inspections in the field as well. Immediately prior to liner
insertion, the camera shall traverse the lateral to inspect for debris which may have entered the line after
the existing condition video recording.
404-5.3.2. LATERAL PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clear the line of obstructions such as solids, roots, or broken
pipe that will prevent the insertion of the liner. A high speed rotating hydraulic cutter shall be used to cut
roots, grease or other obstructions in the pipe. The cut shall be made flush with the wall of the pipe to be
restored, and the debris shall be pushed down the lateral pipe to the main pipe and to the downstream
manhole and is to be removed by the contractor. If inspection reveals an obstruction that cannot be removed
by conventional cleaning equipment, the Contractor shall notify the city and the cleaning effort shall be
abandoned. The Contractor shall confirm that the sewer is clean enough to ensure an effective lining. The
line segment shall not be lined until approved by the city.
Built-up deposits on the sewer main and lateral pipe walls shall be removed. The removal shall reach at
least one foot beyond the liner product to allow the bladder to inflate tightly against the pipe walls ensuring
a smooth transition from the liner product to the existing pipe wall.
Where the sewer main pipe has been lined previously with a CIPP liner, a check should be made to ensure
the prior lateral reopening work created a lateral opening that is flush with the lateral pipe. If this is not the
case, the mainline CIPP must be trimmed back using a lateral cutter.
Where active infiltration is present and when it is recommended by the liner manufacturer the infiltration
must be stopped in advance by grouting.
SECTION IV Page 56 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
• 404-5.3.3. LINER INSTALLATION
Notify all property owners not identified for service flow maintenance that their sewage service will be
discontinued while the liner is being installed. Notify each affected property owner at least 7 days in
advance of commencement of the work, giving the date, start time and time when service will be completely
restored. Also provide a telephone number which property owners can call for information during the work.
If required for flow maintenance for selected services, Contractor shall excavate at the property line down
to the service lateral for the installation of a cleanout. The preferred method of excavation shall be vacuum
excavation. Although other installation techniques may be accepted, they must be pre -approved by the city.
The service lateral shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to attaching the PVC wye connection. The riser pipe
shall be sealed with a screw type plug, the excavation backfilled with sand or pea gravel, and the surface
restored to preconstruction conditions.
Service lateral liner material shall be vacuum impregnated on site with the epoxy resin immediately prior
to installation. Impregnation should be carried out under vacuum using electric impregnation table with
pinch rollers set at the correct gap as per the manufacturer's instructions. Impregnation should take place
in a clean, temperature -controlled cab in which the materials are protected from direct sunlight, objects
which may damage the coating.
Impregnation should not take place using a manual roller in which the material is subject to excessive
pressure and that the materials are squeezed resulting in a resin slug. All the calculated resin shall be
confined to the liner to ensure the correct mechanical properties can be achieved.
Impregnation should not take place outside in an uncontrolled environment in which the materials are
exposed to the elements. The liner should not be placed on the ground where it is susceptible to damage
from objects such as stones, grit, glass etc. During and upon completion of the impregnation process the
liner should be stored in a container to avoid damage prior to loading the material into the installation
device.
The liner product shall be loaded inside a pressure apparatus above ground. The pressure apparatus, with
an end attached to a robotic manipulator device, shall be positioned in the mainline pipe at the service
connection that is to be rehabilitated. The robotic device together with a television camera will be used to
align the repair product with the service connection opening. The robotic device shall hold the collar in
place while air pressure, supplied to the pressure apparatus through a hose, shall be used to invert the liner
into the lateral pipe. The insertion pressure will be adjusted to fully deploy the liner product into the lateral
connection and hold the liner product tight to the main and lateral pipe walls.
After insertion is completed, recommended pressure must be maintained on the impregnated liner product
for the duration of the curing process. The Contractor shall apply a heat source and circulation system to
affect a cure of the epoxy system. The equipment shall be capable of uniformly raising the temperature of
the pressurized fluid above the temperature required to affect a complete curing of the epoxy system. Initial
cure shall be deemed to be completed when the temperature gauge on the heat source indicates that the
temperature inside the tube is of a magnitude to realize an exotherm. The minimum cure period shall be as
recommended by the system manufacturer.
The finished liner product shall be free of dry spots, lifts, delamination, and excess epoxy. The installed
liner product should not inhibit the post installation video inspection, using a closed-circuit television
camera, of the mainline and service lateral pipes or future pipe cleaning operations. During the warranty
period any defects with the liner product that affect the performance or cleaning of the lateral connection
shall be repaired at the contractor's expense in a manner acceptable to the city.
The Contractor shall inform the city of service laterals in which a liner product cannot be installed due to
pre-existing conditions. These services will be identified, documented, video recorded, and the city will be
•
•
SECTION IV
Page 57 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
informed of the conditions encountered. The Contractor will not attempt to install a liner product in these
services unless directed by the city.
Contractor may be permitted, at the direction of the city, to install service liners from inside the existing
cleanout location to the main line sewer if conditions allow. Final liner product must include a lateral
connection repair brim type liner to seal the connection at the host pipe and overlap the service liner installed
from the cleanout.
404-5.3.4. TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Following installation of the service lateral liners, conduct a final, video recorded, CCTV/color television
inspection of the completed work including the service lateral connections at the sewer main and the full
length of all service laterals lined during the progress of the work. Copies of these recordings and those
made prior to the liner installation shall be submitted to the city for approval and shall be retained by the
city. Field acceptance of the liner shall be based on the city's evaluation of the installation including CCTV
inspection video recordings and a review of certified test data for the installed pipe samples. groundwater
infiltration of the liner shall be zero. There shall be no evidence of splits, cracks, breaks, lifts, kinks,
delamination or crazing in the liner. If any defective liner is discovered after it has been installed, it shall
be removed and replaced with either a sound liner or a new pipe at no additional cost to the city. The cost
for all necessary testing shall be included in the cost associated with the lining.
The Contractor shall clean up each project area after the work is completed and all testing is accepted.
Remove and dispose of all excess materials and debris at each location as directed by the city.
405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the repair, rehabilitation and groundwater
infiltration abatement of manhole walls, corbels/cones, pipe connections and bench and channel/trough
areas. All manhole rehabilitation products will be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and these specifications. The purpose of the rehabilitation work is to eliminate inflow
and infiltration, provide corrosion protection, and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any
particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All
OSHA regulations shall be met in the completion of the work and the contractor shall be responsible for all
necessary maintenance of traffic. The contractor shall warrant all work against defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of one 1 years, unless otherwise noted, from the date of final acceptance of the
project. Contractor shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice thereof, repair defects in
materials or workmanship which may develop during said one year period, and any damage to other work
caused by such defects or the repairing of same, at his own expense and without cost to the city.
The following lists all elements of potential rehabilitation activity:
1. REMOVE STEPS
2. STOP ACTIVE INFILTRATION.
3. PATCH VOIDS AND ALL FRAME CONNECTIONS WITH NON -SHRINK GROUT.
4. REMOVE LOOSE COATING MATERIALS.
5. RESURFACE CORBEL/WALLS WITH CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR.
6. REBUILD/REPAIR BENCH & CHANNEL/TROUGH/SEAL PIPE CONNECTIONS.
7. COAT CORBEL/CONE, WALLS, BENCH AND TROUGH WITH AN APPROVED
CEMENTITIOUS, EPDXY, OR POLYURATHANE, COATING/LINING SYSTEM.
8. ADJUST FRAME AND COVER HEIGHT.
9. RESET FRAME AND COVER.
SECTION IV
Page 58 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
10. REMOVE ROOTS.
11. PROVIDE INFLOW INSERT/DISH/PAN.
12. REMOVE DEBRIS.
13. PERFORM STRUCTURAL REPAIR.
14. REPLACE FRAME AND COVER.
15. SEAL FRAME TO CORBEL/CONE CONNECTION WITH AN APPROVED POLYUREA
COATING/LINING SYSTEM
It is implicit that many of the repair activities listed above will not be measured and paid for separately as
they will be included in the cost of rehabilitating the manhole substrate. These activities include stopping
active infiltration, patching voids, removal of loose coating materials, resurfacing of the corbel & wall,
removing roots, and removing miscellaneous debris. Repair activities which will have a separate
measurement and payment item include: Rebuilding/Repairing Bench & Channel/Trough; Interior Manhole
Coating; Adjusting/Resetting Frame & Cover, Replacing Frame & Cover and Sealing Frame to Corbel
Connection.
405-2. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT
405-2.1. MANHOLE LINERS/COATING
Payment for manhole rehabilitation shall be per vertical linear foot of liner/coating which is
installed/applied. Lining systems will generally be measured from the manhole bench to the top of existing,
or new, corbel/cone. Cementitious, Epoxy and Polyurethane coating systems will be measured from the
lowest pipe invert to the bottom of the manhole frame. No separate payment will be made for the following
items: Flow Maintenance; Maintenance of Traffic; Debris Disposal; Miscellaneous Excavation, including
necessary pavement removal and replacement; Infiltration control in manhole and at all pipe connections;
Grout, Brick and mortar placement to fill voids and level surfaces; Brick replacement; Root removal,
Installation of pipe extensions and connectors as necessary; Removal and replacement of manhole steps,
Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery; Replacement of roadway base (including backfill
and compaction) and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required to complete the identified
rehabilitation. The cost of such work shall be included in the pay item, per vertical linear foot of
liner/coating.
405-2.2. REPLACE FRAME & COVER
Payment for manhole frame and cover replacement will include removal of existing frame and cover and
replacement with a new frame and cover which meets the criteria established by Section 401-4 of the city's
specifications. The Contractor will also install and/or replace manhole pans and dishes if it is damaged or
missing. Refer to Section 401-2.2. from these Section IV Technical Specifications. Where manholes fall in
paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway Replacement for Concrete and
Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces ". Payment will be made for each manhole frame and cover replaced. No
separate payment will be made for maintenance of traffic, necessary pavement removal and replacement,
or replacement of grass or shrubbery.
405-2.3. REBUILD BENCH & CHANNEL/TROUGH
Payment for rebuilding bench and channel/trough will include removal of existing bench and channel (if
applicable) and constructing a new bench and channel using the criteria established by Section 401-1 of the
city's specifications. Payment will be made for each bench and channel repaired/installed. No separate
payment will be made for the removal of the existing bench and channel, by-pass pumping, and preparation
of the manhole invert.
SECTION IV
Page 59 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405-2.4. RESET/ADJUST MANHOLE FRAME & COVER
Payment for adjusting, or resetting, manhole frame will include removal of existing frame, removal of
existing mortar, preparing top of corbel surface, installation of necessary riser material as described in
Section 401-2.1, and placement of existing frame. No separate payment will be made for necessary
maintenance of traffic, pavement removal and replacement, or replacement of grass or shrubbery. All work
will be performed in accordance with Section 401-4 of the city's specifications. Where manholes fall in
paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway Replacement for Concrete and
Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces". Payment will be made for each manhole frame and cover adjusted. No
separate payment will be made for maintenance of traffic, necessary pavement removal and replacement,
or replacement of grass or shrubbery.
405-2.5. SEAL MANHOLE FRAME TO CORBEL CONNECTION WITH
POLYUREA MATERIAL
Payment for providing a water tight connection between the manhole frame and the manhole corbel /cone
will include placement of non -shrink grout in any area between the frame and corbel which is void of
mortar, preparing the frame and corbel/cone to accept the polyurea material and testing the thickness of the
application. No separate payment will be made for necessary maintenance of traffic. All work will be
performed in accordance with Section 405-7 of the city's specifications.
405-3. CEMENTITIOUS COATING SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray/apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to
the wall, channel, invert and bench surfaces of brick, concrete, or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2C product or approved equal.
Described are procedures for manhole cleaning preparation, application of material and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The
applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2C
product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum one
half inch (1/2") thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. As it is the intention of
the city to rehabilitate the entire structure; corbel, walls, bench and channel/trough the contractor will be
required to provide by-pass pumping as the necessary cure time exceeds four (4) hours. In no case will flow
through plugs be allowed. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
3. The sprayapplication of a pre -blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a two (2)
coat application.
405-3.1. SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the following:
1. Technical data sheet on each product used, including ASTM test results indicating the product
conforms to and is suitable for its intended use per these specifications.
2. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each product used.
3. Project specific guidelines and recommendations.
4. Applicator Qualifications:
a. Manufacturer certification that the Applicator has been trained in the handling, mixing and
application of the products to be used.
SECTION IV
Page 60 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
b. Certification that the equipment to be used for applying the products has been approved by
the protective coating manufacturer and Applicator personnel have been trained and
certified for proper use of the equipment.
c. Written document providing three (3) years of experience and five (5) recent references of
Applicator indicating successful application of the materials provided
d. Installed a minimum of 50,000 square feet of plural component spray applied coating the
same or similar to that specified within the last two (2) years.
e. Proof of any necessary federal, state, or local permits or licenses necessary for the project.
405-3.2. MATERIALS
405-3.2.1. PATCHING MIX
A Strong A Seal or approved equal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum reauirements:
1.
Compressive Strength (ASTM C109)
15 min., 200 psi; 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2.
Shrinkage (ASTM C596)
28 days, 150 psi
3.
Bond (ASTM C1072)
28 days, 150 psi
4.
Cement Sulfate resistant
0% at 90% R.H.
5.
Density, when applied
105 +/- 5 pcf
405-3.2.2. INFILTRATION CONTROL
A Strong A Plug or approved equal shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the
manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum reauirements:
1.
Compressive strength (ASTM C109)
600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2.
Bond (ASTM C1072)
30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
405-3.2.3. GROUTING MIX
Strong -Seal Grout or approved equal shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids
according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable and have a minimum
twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi.
405-3.2.4. COATING MIX
Strong Seal MS 2C or approved equal shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior
manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at twenty-eight (28) days: The
physical requirements must be verified by an independent, certified, third party testing laboratory within
the last five years. The proposed third -party laboratory must be submitted with the bid package; any bid
package not including the verifiable, independent third -party testing shall be ruled non-responsive and will
be refected.
1.
Compressive strength (ASTM C109)
3,000 psi
2.
Tensile strength (ASTM C496)
300 psi
3.
Flexural strength (ASTM C78)
600 psi
4.
Shrinkage (ASTM C596)
0% at 90% R.H.
5.
Bond (ASTM C1072)
130 psi
6.
Density, when applied
105 + pcf
7.
Chemical Resistance (ASTM D543/G20) immersion service for:
a. Municipal sanitary sewer environment
b. Sulfuric Acid, 30%
c. Sodium Hydroxide, 10%
d. Sodium Hypochlorite, 3%
SECTION IV
Page 61 of 172
Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be one-half inch
(1/2") to five-eighths inch (5/8") long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the unmixed
state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made
with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in
applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 to
51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content
must be 65% to 75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water
must have a wet density of 95 to 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of 0.67 cubic foot
of volume. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for
any heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide SDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two (2) coat
application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force
materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure a minimum
of one-half inch (1/2") thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish.
405-3.2.5. WATER
Water shall be clean and potable not to exceed 80°F (Fahrenheit).
405-3.2.6. OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
405-3.3. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a
minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and
an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering
system. Mixer and pump are to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty
construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal
combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor.
405-3.4. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
405-3.4.1. PREPARATION
1. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high-pressure water
spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed
using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with brick and quick setting
patching mix.
2. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the
manufacturer's recommendations. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in
order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be
followed when pressure grouting is required.
3. Any bench, invert/channel/trough or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick
setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Any active flows shall be dammed, plugged, or diverted as required to ensure all liquids are
maintained below or away from the surfaces to be coated until final applications are cured as
recommended by the manufacturer.
SECTION IV
Page 62 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
5. Prior to commencing surface preparation, Contractor shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive
the coating and notify city, in writing, of any noticeable disparity in the site, structure or surfaces
which may interfere with the work, use of materials or procedures as specified herein.
405-3.4.2. MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray
Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for thirty (30) seconds to one (1) minute after all materials have been
placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing
such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is
complete.
405-3.4.3. SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water.
Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to ensure that all cracks, crevices and
voids are filled, and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is
performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun
to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour
depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished
thickness of one-half inch (1/2"). The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over
trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the
finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more
than twenty-four (24) hours have elapsed between applications. The bench will be sprayed such that a
gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no
less than one-half inch (1/2"). The invert/channel/trough area shall also be sprayed in a manner that provides
a gradual slope through the structure while achieving one-quarter inch (1/4") thickness coverage. The
wall/bench and bench/invert/channel/trough intersections shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full
circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time
before being subjected to active flow. The corbel/cone to manhole frame joint shall be sealed according to
Section 405-7.
405-3.4.4. PREPARATION OF SAMPLES
At some point during the application, at least four (4) two inch (2") cubes will be prepared for each manhole,
or from every fifty (50) bags of product used, identified and submitted, in accordance with the city's or
Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109.
405-3.4.5. CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative
that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed.
405-3.5. TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole will be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the
manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The
test head shall be placed, and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A
vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves
closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the
time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty-eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for
sixty inch diameter (60"), and ninety (90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the
manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory
test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the city.
SECTION IV
Page 63 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
405-4. RAVEN 405 EPDXY COATING SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray/apply a monolithic epoxy material to the wall, channel,
invert and bench surfaces of brick, concrete, or any other construction material; Raven 405 product or
approved equal.
Described are procedures for manhole cleaning preparation, application of material and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained, and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The
applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials for applying the Raven 405 product
directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural liner of a minimum 125 mil thickness using a
machine specially designed for the application. As it is the intention of the city to rehabilitate the entire
structure; corbel, walls, bench, and channel/trough the contractor will be required to provide by-pass
pumping as necessary if the cure time exceeds one (1) hour. In no case will flow through plugs be allowed.
All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the
following specifications:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
3. Preparing the manhole to provide a clean, dry, sound and monolithically smooth surface
4. The spray application of a Solvent -free epoxy coating to be applied to specified thickness
405-4.1. SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the following:
1. Technical data sheet on each product used, including ASTM test results indicating the product
conforms to and is suitable for its intended use per these specifications.
2. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each product used.
3. Project specific guidelines and recommendations.
4. Applicator Qualifications:
a. Manufacturer certification that the Applicator has been trained in the handling, mixing and
application of the products to be used.
b. Certification that the equipment to be used for applying the products has been approved by
the protective coating manufacturer and Applicator personnel have been trained and
certified for proper use of the equipment.
c. Written document providing three (3) years of experience and five (5) recent references of
Applicator indicating successful application of a 100% solids high -build solvent -free
coating by spray application.
d. Applicator must provide written documentation of having installed a minimum of 50,000
square feet of plural component spray applied epoxy coating the same or similar to that
specified within the last two (2) years.
e. Proof of any necessary federal, state, or local permits or licenses necessary for the project.
405-4.2. MATERIALS
405-4.2.1. PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal, or approved equal, shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall have the followin minimum requirements:
1.
Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109)
15 min., 200 psi; 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2.
Shrinkage (ASTM C-596)
28 days, 150 psi
3.
Bond (ASTM C-952)
28 days, 150 psi
4.
Cement Sulfate resistance
SECTION IV
Page 64 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
5.
Density, when applied
105 +/- 5 pcf
405-4.2.2. INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug, or approved equal, shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the
manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1.
Compressive strength (ASTM C109)
600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2.
Bond (ASTM C1072)
30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
405-4.2.3. GROUTING MIX
Strong -Seal Grout, or approved equal, shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids
according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable and have a minimum
twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and one (1) day strength of 50 psi.
405-4.2.4. COATING MATERIAL
Coating product shall be applied to all interior surfaces to protect the host substrate and repair materials
from all forms of chemical or bacteriological attack typically found in municipal sanitary sewer systems
and to impart a degree of structural enhancement.
Coating product physical properties shall be substantiated through submittal of accredited third -party
testing results and shall be representative of the actual field applied product and cure mechanism(s) to be
employed in the field. The physical requirements must be verified by an independent third -party testing
shall be ruled non-responsive and will be rejected.
100% Solids, Solvent -Free, Ultra -High Build Epoxy Coating to be spray applied to all interior surfaces of
exposed concrete above the spring line or as otherwise detailed:
1. Manufacturer: Raven Lining Systems, Broken Arrow, Oklahoma 800-324-2810 or 918-615-0140
fax.
2. Product: Raven 405, or approved equal — 100% solids, solvent -free ultra -high -build epoxy system
exhibiting the following characteristics:
a. Product Type: amine cured epoxy
b. VOC Content (ASTM D2584): 0%
c. Compressive Strength, (ASTM D695): 18,000 psi
d. Tensile Strength, (ASTM D638): 7,600 psi
e. Flexural Modulus, (ASTM D790): 700,000 psi
f. Adhesion to Concrete, (ASTM D4541/7234): >200 psi with substrate (concrete) failure
g. Chemical Resistance (ASTM D543/G20) immersion service for:
• Municipal sanitary sewer environment
• Sulfuric Acid, 30%
• Sodium Hydroxide, 10%
• Sodium Hypochlorite, 3%
h. Successful Pass: Sanitation District of L.A. County Coating Evaluation Study and SSPWC
210.2.3.3 (Greenbook "Pickle Jar" Chemical Resistance test) 100% Solids, Solvent -Free,
Ultra -High Build Epoxy Coating to be manually or spray applied to interior surfaces of
exposed concrete above or below the typical flow line; specifically designed for accelerated
cure and suitable for release of flow in less than 45 minutes at normal service temperatures
or as otherwise detailed.
405-4.2.5. OTHER MATERIALS
• No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior city approval.
SECTION IV
Page 65 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405-4.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
405-4.3.1. PREPARATION
1. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high-pressure water
spray (minimum 5,000 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed
using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with brick and quick setting
patching mix.
2. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the
manufacturer's recommendations. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in
order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be
followed when pressure grouting is required.
3. Any bench, invert/channel/trough or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick
setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Any active flows shall be dammed, plugged, or diverted as required to ensure all liquids are
maintained below or away from the surfaces to be coated until final applications are cured as
recommended by the manufacturer.
5. The area between the corbel and the manhole frame and any other area that might exhibit movement
or cracking due to expansion and contraction shall be grouted with a flexible grout or gel. A
termination groove "key" cut into the substrate between the bottom of the manhole frame and
concrete is recommended for placement of the flexible grout or gel. The "key" shall be a minimum
1/4" w x 1/4" d, cut at a minimum 45° angle (60° maximum).
6. Prior to commencing surface preparation, Contractor shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive
the coating and notify city, in writing, of any noticeable disparity in the site, structure or surfaces
which may interfere with the work, use of materials or procedures as specified herein.
405-4.3.2. APPLICATION
Application procedures shall conform to the recommendations of the coating product(s) manufacturer,
including environmental controls, product handling, mixing, application equipment, and methods. Spray
equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply the coating product(s) and s Prepared
surfaces shall be coated via spray application of the coating product(s) described herein unless otherwise
recommended by the coating product manufacturer.
In all cases the coating product shall be applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 125 mils to surface
profiles. Subsequent top coating or additional coats of the coating product(s) shall occur within the products
recoat window. Additional surface preparation procedures will be required if this recoat window is
exceeded.
Coating product(s) shall interface with adjoining construction materials/components throughout the
manhole structure to effectively seal and protect substrates from attack by corrosive elements and to ensure
the effective elimination of infiltration into the sewer system. Termination points of the coating product(s)
shall be made at the manhole frame and corbel joint (or other man way as is present), and a minimum of 1"
interfacing within each pipe penetrating the structure. The corbel/cone to manhole frame joint shall be
sealed according to Section 405-7. The entire bench and invert/channel/trough will be thoroughly coated
noting that the invert/channel/trough area will be sprayed in a manner that provides a gradual slope through
the structure while achieving 125 mils thickness coverage.
405-4.4. TESTING & ACCEPTANCE
Coating system thickness shall be inspected to ensure compliance with the specifications herein.
1. During application a wet film thickness gauge, meeting ASTM D4414 (latest edition) - Standard
Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of Organic Coatings by Notched Gages, shall be
SECTION IV
Page 66 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
used. Measurements shall be taken, documented, and attested to by Contractor for submission to
the city.
2. After the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, coating
system thickness shall be measured according to SSPC-PA 9 - Measurement of Dry Coating
Thickness on Cementitious Substrates Using Ultrasonic Gages.
High voltage holiday detection for coating systems installed in corrosive environments, when it can be
safely and effectively employed, shall be performed to ensure monolithic protection of the substrate. After
the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, all surfaces shall be
inspected for holidays in accordance with NACE RPO 188-99 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New
Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates or ASTM D4787 Standard Practice for Continuity
Verification of Liquid or Sheet Linings Applied to Concrete Substrates. All detected holidays shall be
marked and repaired according to the coating product(s) manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Test voltage shall be a minimum of 100 volts per mil of coating system thickness.
2. Detection of a known or induced holiday in the coating product shall be confirmed to ensure proper
operation of the test unit.
3. All areas repaired shall be retested following cure of the repair material(s).
4. In instances where high voltage holiday detection is not feasible a close visual inspection shall be
conducted, and all possible holidays shall be marked and repaired as described above.
5. Documentation of areas tested, equipment employed, results, and repairs made shall be submitted
to the city by the Contractor.
Adhesion of the coating system to the substrate shall be confirmed in a minimum of 10% of the manholes
coated, or for large structures once every 1000 square feet of coated area. After the coating product(s) have
cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, testing shall be conducted in accordance with
ASTM D7234 Pull -Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull -Off Adhesion
Testers. city's Project Manager shall select the manholes/areas to be tested.
1. For each test manhole a minimum of three 20 mm dollies shall be affixed to the coated surface; one
at the cone/corbel area, one at the midsection and one near the bottom of the structure.
2. For larger structures a minimum of three 20 mm dollies shall be affixed to the coated surface at
random locations within each 1000 square foot area or as otherwise agreed upon.
3. The adhesive used to attach the dollies to the coating shall be rapid setting with tensile strengths in
excess of at least twice the anticipated failure point (generally 1000 psi) and permitted to cure in
accordance with manufacturer recommendations. The coating and dollies shall be adequately
cleaned and prepared to receive the adhesive. Failure of the dolly adhesive shall be deemed a non -
test and require retesting.
4. Prior to performing the pull test, the coating shall be scored to the substrate, or within 10 mils of
the substrate surface, by mechanical means without disturbing the dolly or coating system bond
within the test area.
5. Two of the three adhesion pulls in each test area shall exceed 200 psi and shall include substrate
adhered to the back of the dolly or no visual signs of the coating product in the test hole. Pulls tests
with results between 150 and 200 psi may be acceptable if more than 50 percent of the substrate in
the test area is adhered to the dolly.
6. Should a structure, or area, fail to achieve two successful pulls as described above, additional
testing shall be performed at the discretion of the Owner or Project Engineer. Any areas detected
to have inadequate bond strength shall be evaluated by the city. Further bond tests may be
performed in that area to determine the extent of potentially deficient bonded area and repairs shall
be made by Contractor.
7. All adhesion testing shall be performed by qualified personnel using calibrated equipment as
specified by the applicable ASTM standard(s).
SECTION IV
Page 67 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
8. All adhesion testing shall be documented and submitted in a consistent format detailing location,
test values, description of the failure point/mode, scoring method employed, adhesive used, cure
time of coating and adhesive and other data as deemed necessary by the city.
9. All adhesion test locations shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the city.
10. Visual inspection shall be made by the Project Engineer and/or Inspector. Any deficiencies in the
finished coating affecting the performance of the coating system or the operational functionality of
the structure shall be marked and repaired according to the recommendations of the coating
product(s) manufacturer.
405-5. SPRAYWALL POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray/apply a monolithic polyurethane material to the wall,
channel, invert and bench surfaces of brick, concrete, or any other construction material; SprayWall product
or approved equal.
Described are procedures for manhole cleaning preparation, application of material and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The
applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the SprayWall product
directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural liner of a minimum 125 thickness using a machine
specially designed for the application. As it is the intention of the city to rehabilitate the entire structure;
corbel, walls, bench and channel/trough the contractor will be required to provide by-pass pumping as the
necessary if the cure time exceeds one (1) hour. In no case will flow through plugs be allowed. All aspects
of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following
specifications:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
3. Preparing the manhole to provide a clean, dry, sound and monolithically smooth surface
4. The spray application of a Solvent -free polyurethane coating to be applied to specified thickness.
405-5.1. SUBMITTALS
The following items shall be submitted:
1. Technical data sheet on each product used, including ASTM test results indicating the product
conforms to and is suitable for its intended use per these specifications.
2. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each product used.
3. Project specific guidelines and recommendations.
4. Applicator Qualifications:
a. Manufacturer certification that the Applicator has been trained in the handling, mixing and
application of the products to be used.
b. Certification that the equipment to be used for applying the products has been approved by
the protective coating manufacturer and Applicator personnel have been trained and
certified for proper use of the equipment.
c. Written document providing three (3) years of experience and five (5) recent references of
Applicator indicating successful application of a 100% solids high -build solvent -free
coating by spray application.
d. Written document stating that the contractor has installed a minimum of 50,000 square feet
of plural component spray applied polyurethane coating the same or similar to that
specified within the last two (2) years.
e. Proof of any necessary federal, state or local permits or licenses necessary for the project.
SECTION IV
Page 68 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
405-5.2. MATERIALS
405-5.2.1. PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal, or approved equal, shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum reuuirements:
1.
Compressive Strength (ASTM C109)
15 min., 200 psi; 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2.
Shrinkage (ASTM C596)
28 days, 150 psi
3.
Bond (ASTM C952)
28 days, 150 psi
4.
Cement Sulfate resistant
735,000 psi
5.
Density, when applied
105 +/- 5 pcf
405-5.2.2. INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug, or approved equal, shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the
manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1.
Compressive strength (ASTM C109)
600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2.
Bond (ASTM C952)
30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
405-5.2.3. GROUTING MIX
Strong -Seal Grout, or approved equal, shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids
according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable and have a minimum
twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi.
405-5.2.4. COATING MATERIAL
1111 The resin -based material shall be used to form the sprayed structurally enhanced monolithic liner covering
all interior surfaces of the structure, including benches and channels/troughs of manholes. The finished liner
shall be SprayWall® as manufactured by Sprayroq, Inc. or approved equal and conform to the minimum
physical requirements listed below. A minimum of 125 mil. coating thickness is required.
•
The physical requirements must be verified by an independent, certified, third party testing laboratory
within the last five years and must be submitted with the bid package. Any bid package not including the
verifiable, independent third -party testing sha 1 be ruled non-responsive and will be rejected.
1.
VOC Content (ASTM D2584)
0%
2.
Compressive Strength, (ASTM D695)
18,000 psi
3.
Tensile Strength, (ASTM D638)
> 7,450 psi
4.
Flexural Modulus, (ASTM D790)
735,000 psi
5.
Adhesion to Concrete, (ASTM
D4541/7234)
>200 psi with substrate (concrete) failure
6.
Chemical Resistance (ASTM
D543/G20) immersion service for:
• Municipal sanitary sewer environment
• Sulfuric Acid, 30%
• Sodium Hydroxide, 10%
• Sodium Hypochlorite, 3%
7.
Successful Pass:
Sanitation District of L.A. County Coating Evaluation
Study and SSPWC 210.2.3.3 (Greenbook "Pickle Jar"
Chemical Resistance test)
The initial flexural modulus of elasticity (short term) of the submitted resin material will be utilized with
the long-term deformation percentage as determined by ASTM D2990 (see below) in the design equation
outlined in ASTM 1216-09, Appendix X1. The value of the long-term flexural modulus of the proposed
product will be certified by an independent, certified, third party testing lab, independent of the
SECTION IV
Page 69 of 172
Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Manufacturer and submitted with the bid package. [The definition of long-term value will be identified as
initial flexural VER 01 w/Flat Wall 2015 Page 7 of 12 modulus of elasticity less the reduction in value
caused by Creep over a fifty (50) year minimum period and verified by third party DMA testing (ASTM
D2990).] All design submittals will include this certified third -party DMA testing (ASTM D2990) value in
their respective design calculations for each structure being rehabilitated.
Coating product physical properties shall be substantiated through submittal of accredited third -party
testing results and shall be representative of the actual field applied product and cure mechanism(s) to be
employed in the field.
Polyurethane coating to be manually or spray applied to interior surfaces of exposed concrete above or
below the typical flow line; specifically designed for accelerated cure and suitable for release of flow in
less than 45 minutes at normal service temperatures or as otherwise detailed.
405-5.2.5. OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
405-5.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
405-5.3.1. PREPARATION
1. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high-pressure water
spray (minimum 5,000 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed
using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with brick and quick setting
patching mix.
2. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the
manufacturer's recommendations. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in
order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be
followed when pressure grouting is required.
3. Any bench, invert/channel/trough or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick
setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Any active flows shall be dammed, plugged, or diverted as required to ensure all liquids are
maintained below or away from the surfaces to be coated until final applications are cured as
recommended by the manufacturer.
5. The area between the corbel and the manhole frame and any other area that might exhibit movement
or cracking due to expansion and contraction, shall be grouted with a flexible grout or gel (Sikadur
42 Grout Pak LE, Pro-Stik Butyl Sealant, or equal). A termination groove "key" cut into the
substrate between the bottom of the manhole frame and concrete is recommended for placement of
the flexible grout or gel. The "key" shall be a minimum '/4" w x '/4" d, cut at a minimum 45° angle
(60° maximum).
6. Prior to commencing surface preparation, Contractor shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive
the coating and notify city, in writing, of any noticeable disparity in the site, structure or surfaces
which may interfere with the work, use of materials or procedures as specified herein.
405-5.3.2. APPLICATION
Application procedures shall conform to the recommendations of the protective coating manufacturer,
including material handling, mixing, environmental controls during application, safety, and spray
equipment. The spray equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply the specified
protective coating materials and shall be regularly maintained and in proper working order.
SECTION IV
Page 70 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
The protective coating material must be spray applied by a Certified Applicator of the protective coating
manufacturer. Specified surfaces shall be coated by spray application of a solvent -free, 100% solids, rigid
polyurethane structural lining as further described herein. Airless spray application equipment approved by
the coating manufacturer shall be used to apply each coat of the protective coating. The air source is to be
filtered to completely remove all oil and water.
If necessary, subsequent top coating or additional coats of the protective coating should occur as soon as
the basecoat becomes tack free, no later than the recoat window for the specified products. Additional
surface preparation procedures will be required if this recoat window is exceeded.
The roughness of the substrate will dictate the thickness needed to create the monolithic liner and eliminate
any opportunity for voids in the coating. The minimum value for coating thickness shall be a minimum 125
mils.
Coating product(s) shall interface with adjoining construction materials/components throughout the
manhole structure to effectively seal and protect substrates from attack by corrosive elements and to ensure
the effective elimination of infiltration into the sewer system.
Termination points of the coating product(s) shall be made at the manhole frame and corbel joint (or other
man way as is present), and a minimum of 1" interfacing within each pipe penetrating the structure. The
entire bench and invert/channel/trough will be thoroughly coated noting that the invert/channel/trough area
will be sprayed in a manner that provides a gradual slope through the structure while achieving 125 mils.
thickness coverage.
405-5.4. TESTING & ACCEPTANCE
Coating system thickness shall be inspected to ensure compliance with the specifications herein.
1. During application a wet film thickness gauge, meeting ASTM D4414 - Standard Practice for
Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of Organic Coatings by Notched Gages, shall be used.
Measurements shall be taken, documented, and attested to by Contractor for submission to the city.
2. After the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, coating
system thickness may be measured according to SSPC-PA 9 - Measurement of Dry Coating
Thickness on Cementitious Substrates Using Ultrasonic Gages.
High voltage holiday detection for coating systems installed in corrosive environments, when it can be
safely and effectively employed, shall be performed to ensure monolithic protection of the substrate. After
the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, all surfaces shall be
inspected for holidays in accordance with NACE RPO 188-99 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New
Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates or ASTM D4787 Standard Practice for Continuity
Verification of Liquid or Sheet Linings Applied to Concrete Substrates. All detected holidays shall be
marked and repaired according to the coating product(s) manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Test voltage shall be a minimum of 100 volts per mil of coating system thickness.
2. Detection of a known or induced holiday in the coating product shall be confirmed to ensure proper
operation of the test unit.
3. All areas repaired shall be retested following cure of the repair material(s).
4. In instances where high voltage holiday detection is not feasible a close visual inspection shall be
conducted, and all possible holidays shall be marked and repaired as described above.
5. Documentation of areas tested, equipment employed, results, and repairs made shall be submitted
to the city by the Contractor.
Adhesion of the coating system to the substrate shall be confirmed in a minimum of 10% of the manholes
coated, or for large structures once every 1000 square feet of coated area. After the coating product(s) have
cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, testing shall be conducted in accordance with
SECTION IV
Page 71 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
ASTM D7234 Pull -Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull -Off Adhesion
Testers. City's Project Manager shall select the manholes/areas to be tested.
1. For each test manhole a minimum of three 20 mm dollies shall be affixed to the coated surface; one
at the cone/corbel area, one at the midsection and one near the bottom of the structure.
2. For larger structures a minimum of three 20 mm dollies shall be affixed to the coated surface at
random locations within each 1000 square foot area or as otherwise agreed upon.
3. The adhesive used to attach the dollies to the coating shall be rapid setting with tensile strengths in
excess of at least twice the anticipated failure point (generally 1000 psi) and permitted to cure in
accordance with manufacturer recommendations. The coating and dollies shall be adequately
cleaned and prepared to receive the adhesive. Failure of the dolly adhesive shall be deemed a non -
test and require retesting.
4. Prior to performing the pull test, the coating shall be scored to the substrate, or within 10 mils of
the substrate surface, by mechanical means without disturbing the dolly or coating system bond
within the test area.
5. Two of the three adhesion pulls in each test area shall exceed 200 psi and shall include substrate
adhered to the back of the dolly or no visual signs of the coating product in the test hole. Pulls tests
with results between 150 and 200 psi may be acceptable if more than 50 percent of the substrate in
the test area is adhered to the dolly.
6. Should a structure, or area, fail to achieve two successful pulls as described above, additional
testing shall be performed at the discretion of the Owner or Project Engineer. Any areas detected
to have inadequate bond strength shall be evaluated by the city. Further bond tests may be
performed in that area to determine the extent of potentially deficient bonded area and repairs shall
be made by Contractor.
7. All adhesion testing shall be performed by qualified personnel using calibrated equipment as
specified by the applicable ASTM standard(s).
8. All adhesion testing shall be documented and submitted in a consistent format detailing location,
test values, description of the failure point/mode, scoring method employed, adhesive used, cure
time of coating and adhesive and other data as deemed necessary by the city.
9. All adhesion test locations shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the city.
10. Visual inspection shall be made by the city's agent and/or Inspector. Any deficiencies in the
finished coating affecting the performance of the coating system or the operational functionality of
the structure shall be marked and repaired according to the recommendations of the coating
product(s) manufacturer.
405-6. INTERNAL MANHOLE CORBEL SEALING SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray/apply a monolithic polyurea material to the frame and
adjacent corbel surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material.
The work covered by this item includes but is not limited to furnishing all labor, equipment, materials and
supervision, and performing all work necessary to seal the manhole as specified herein or equal to the
manhole through the frame joint area and the area above the manhole corbel/cone.
Described are procedures for manhole/frame cleaning preparation, application of material and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The
applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the product directly to
the manhole and frame joint with a minimum of 6 -inch overlap on each surface and a minimum thickness
of 125 mils. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and with the following specifications:
1. The removal of any rust or loose and unsound material.
SECTION IV
Page 72 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
2. Preparing the manhole corbel/cone and frame to provide a clean, dry, sound and monolithically
smooth surface
3. The spray application of a Solvent -free polyurea coating to be applied to specified thickness.
405-6.1. SUBMITTALS
The following items shall be submitted:
1. Technical data sheet, including ASTM test results indicating the product conforms to and is suitable
for its intended use per these specifications.
2. Safety Data Sheet for the product (SDS).
3. Project specific guidelines and recommendations.
4. Applicator Qualifications:
a. Manufacturer certification that the Applicator has been trained in the handling, mixing and
application of the products to be used.
b. Certification that the equipment to be used for applying the products has been approved by
the protective coating manufacturer and Applicator personnel have been trained and
certified for proper use of the equipment.
c. Written document providing three (3) years of experience and five (5) recent references of
Applicator indicating successful application of a 100% solids high -build solvent -free
coating by spray application.
d. Proof of any necessary federal, state, or local permits or licenses necessary for the project.
405-6.2. MATERIALS
III 405-6.2.1. PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal, or approved equal, shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's
•
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1.
Compressive Strength (ASTM C109)
15 min., 200 psi; 6 hrs.; 1,400 psi
2.
Shrinkage (ASTM C596)
28 days, 150 psi
3.
Bond (ASTM C952)
28 days, 150 psi
4.
Cement Sulfate resistant
5.
Density, when applied
105 +/- 5 pcf
405-6.2.2. INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug, or approved equal, shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the
manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1.
Compressive strength (ASTM C109)
600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2.
Bond (ASTM C952)
30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
405-6.2.3. COATING MATERIAL
Manhole seal shall be designed to prevent leakage of water into the manhole through the frame joint area
and the area above the manhole cone including all extensions to the corbel area. The seal shall remain
flexible allowing for the repeated vertical or horizontal movements of the frame due to frost lift, ground
movement or the thermal movement of pavements. The final coating shall be made no less than 125 mils.
of corrosion resistant aromatic or approved equal. The product shall have a minimum elongation of 800%.
Final liner shall have a minimum tensile strength of 3250 psi. The manhole sealing system shall conform
to the physical requirements of ASTM D412.
SECTION IV
Page 73 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
The physical requirements must be verified by an independent, certified, third party testing laboratory
within the last five years and must be submitted with the bid package. Any bid package not including the
verifiable, independent third -party testing shall be ruled non-responsive and will be rejected.
405-6.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
405-6.3.1. PREPARATION
1. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high-pressure water
spray (minimum 5,000 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed
using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with brick and quick setting
patching mix.
2. All patching materials shall be cured prior to the installation. Preparation of the frame surface shall
include sandblasting (minimum of 70 CFM) and an acetone wet wipe to ensure a clean surface as
required by manufacturer on uncoated substrate.
3. If coating is to be on top of SprayWall, or Raven 405, then termination points need to be cut which
are 1/4" x 1/4" cut on 45° angle at top and bottom of application, then sanding of the SprayWall, or
Raven 405, with 40 grit paper, cleaned and an application of Lords 7701 is required prior to
application to ensure adhesion.
4. Prior to commencing surface preparation, Contractor shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive
the coating and notify city, in writing, of any noticeable disparity in the site, structure or surfaces
which may interfere with the work, use of materials or procedures as specified herein.
405-6.3.2. APPLICATION
Application procedures shall conform to the recommendations of the polyurea coating manufacturer,
including material handling, mixing, environmental controls during application, safety, and spray
equipment.
The spray equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply the specified protective
coating materials and shall be regularly maintained and in proper working order. The polyuria coating
material must be spray applied by a Certified Applicator of the coating manufacturer.
Airless spray application equipment approved by the coating manufacturer shall be used to apply each coat
of the protective coating. The air source is to be filtered to completely remove all oil and water.
If necessary, subsequent top coating or additional coats of the polyurea coating should occur as soon as the
basecoat becomes tack free, no later than the recoat window for the specified products. Additional surface
preparation procedures will be required if this recoat window is exceeded.
405-6.3.3. TESTING & ACCEPTANCE
Coating system thickness shall be inspected to ensure compliance with the specifications herein.
1. During application a wet film thickness gauge, meeting ASTM D4414 - Standard Practice for
Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of Organic Coatings by Notched Gages, shall be used.
Measurements shall be taken, documented, and attested to by Contractor for submission to the city.
2. After the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, coating
system thickness may be measured according to SSPC-PA 9 - Measurement of Dry Coating
Thickness on Cementitious Substrates Using Ultrasonic Gages.
3. Visual inspection shall be made by the city's agent and/or Inspector. Any deficiencies in the
finished coating affecting the performance of the coating system or the operational functionality of
the structure shall be marked and repaired according to the recommendations of the coating
product(s) manufacturer. The contractor shall warrantee proper adhesion of the coating material to
the frame and corbel/cone for a minimum of ten (10) years.
SECTION IV
Page 74 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 406. SMOKE AND DYE TESTING
•
•
406-1. GENERAL PROTOCOL
Conduct smoke testing of gravity sewers for defects and identify manholes which could not be located, and
all new structures not shown on GIS. Smoke and Dye testing will be completed using the following
Protocols:
Smoke testing will provide detailed information on wet weather inflow sources to the sanitary sewer. In
order to identify collection system defects and illicit connections, non-toxic smoke will be forced into the
sewer by high-capacity blower capable of achieving a minimum of 1,750 cfin of airflow. Any break in the
sewer will allow the smoke to escape provided the smoke machine generates sufficient pressure. One line
segment will be tested at one time with plugging. The maximum length of sewer to be smoke tested in a
single setup shall be 400 linear feet per blower. Dual blower smoke testing shall be performed for pipe
sections over 400 linear feet with a maximum of 800 linear feet. Smoke testing shall not be performed
during or following weather conditions that may impair detecting escaping smoke (i.e. very windy, rainy,
or high groundwater conditions, etc.) Smoke testing will not be performed on surcharged lines. In case of
surcharged lines, the selected Contractor will contact the city and identify the issue. Once the surcharge has
been eliminated, the city will contact the selected Contractor to re -smoke the test area. Smoke testing will
document when smoke does not travel the entire length of piping, or when smoke is not detected at the roof
stack of connecting buildings. In these cases, CCTV inspection (by others) will be required of both mainline
and lateral piping. When a defect is identified as being a potential significant inflow source it will be
recommended for dye testing. The smoke shall be non-toxic, odorless, and non -staining. A Safety Data
Sheet shall be submitted and approved by city prior to the commencement of smoke testing.
Prior to testing, the selected Contractor shall submit a schedule outlining test dates and locations to the city,
three weeks prior to commencing the smoke testing. The selected Contractor shall prepare Smoke Testing
notices (English & Spanish) advising residents and local authorities of the smoke testing program. The
notices shall be approved by the city prior to distribution. Extra copies of the notices will be provided to
the city for distribution to other city agencies, including the Fire Department, Police Depactiuent,
Emergency Services and others. The selected Contractor shall distribute smoke testing notices to residences
in the project area including the local fire and police precincts, approximately 48-72 hours in advance of
the smoke testing. For large facilities such as schools or hospitals, a log will be maintained that documents
the property manager's notification of planned smoke testing activities. A local Contractor's telephone
number will be provided for those individuals with questions or for anyone requiring special assistance.
Field personnel will be uniformed and will conspicuously display identification badges. Private individuals
requesting additional identification will be asked to contact the city and crews shall carry a letter from the
city authorizing the holder of the letter to perform the work described. Each day the fire department and
other affected agencies will be notified of the crew location since smoke may enter homes through defective
plumbing.
406-2. REPORTING
Field results shall be documented in an Excel spreadsheet and on printed maps. The Excel spreadsheet shall
include the following information:
a. defect and photo number
b. address and locations of defects
c. type of defect found
d. is defect public or private
e. address of residences that did not smoke during testing and residents' houses that were
smoked with defect description (if possible)
SECTION IV
Page 75 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
f. address of residences that did not have a cleanout plug(s) or lids and or in low-lying areas
g. manholes ID on those with no manhole inserts, with debris, or in low-lying areas
h. any defective sewer mains found in the field.
The printed and digital maps shall include the following:
a. boundary of the test area
b. sanitary sewer line segments tested
c. location and boundary of blower setups
d. locations of defects with defect number and photo of defect
e. address of residences that did not smoke during testing (plumbing roof vent: negative) and
residences that smoke in house
f. ID numbers for manhole missing water -tight manhole inserts
g. location of smoking storm sewer catches basins
The field documentation will include:
a. sketched of the location and nature of each system defect
b. pertinent information for prioritizing repair of the defects
c. information needed to assess the best mitigation method
d. color digital photographs will be taken to document defects during smoke testing
e. location of defect will be measured from permanent objects (corner of house, light pole,
etc.).
In addition to the standard documentation procedure, each smoke testing crew will be equipped with a
computer tablet which is `blue -toothed' to a GPS receiver. The crew can see their location on the
downloaded `cloud -based' map and as inflow sources are identified photographs will be taken to document
each defect and an X, Y coordinate value will be assigned to each image. As each defect image is
automatically uploaded to the `cloud -based' map a defect type code will be attached to the image. Each
inflow source or defect can then be displayed on the map and each defect type is assigned a different
symbol/color/indicator. This form of documentation allows for comprehensive QA/QC of each completed
smoke test and assurance that no defect is left unrecorded. The following is an overview of the required
smoke testing process and reporting.
1. Field review the area selected area and note on the map all "hundred block" addresses.
2. Distribute smoke notice to all homes, businesses, schools, police and Fire & Rescue, etc. In
addition, Fire & Rescue will be notified of any proposed smoke testing activities forty-eight to
seventy-two hours prior to initiation.
3. During the initial field review, identify all types of businesses, specifically any doctors' offices,
hospitals, schools, retirement homes (communities), assisted living facilities (ALFs), or any other
establishment that may need special consideration and handling during the actual smoke test. Strict
consideration and coordination with customers who have sensitive needs must be adhered to, some
of whom will not be included on any smoke testing schedule as the nature of their business, such
as hospitals, is far too delicate.
4. Twenty -Four hours minimum must expire from the issuance of smoke testing notices to allow all
affected to prepare for the testing. For special exceptions, such ALFs and persons with health
problems living at home, etc., direct in person of telephone contact shall be made if at all possible.
5. On the day of the testing, the selected portion of the study area will be identified and all street
names and related hundred block addresses will be given to the police and fire
department/emergency personnel for the area where the testing will occur. UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES WILL THE AREA SELECTED FOR THAT DAY'S TESTING BE
MODIFIED TO INCLUDE ADDITIONAL WORK UNLESS THE POLICE & FIRE
DEPARTMENT/EMERGENCY PERSONNEL HAVE BEEN NOTIFIED FIRST. The name and
ID number of the fire department person contacted will be documented on the appropriate form.
SECTION IV
Page 76 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
The fire department/emergency personnel will be provided the exact locations and specific time
frames of where and when the tests will be performed.
6. Multi -day scheduling with one-time reporting to the police and fire department/emergency
personnel will not be permitted.
7. The city's Project Manager will be notified on a daily basis with the same information.
8. Should the fire depa' lment/emergency personnel respond to the target area during the actual smoke
testing, all testing will cease immediately and the Smoke Testing Team's field supervisor in charge
will contact the fire unit responding to answer any questions that the fire department officer may
have.
9. All testing activity will cease when any resident complains of smoke entering their establishment.
Smoke Testing Team's field personnel will then attempt to isolate where the smoke is entering the
establishment and make the occupant aware of what the problem may be. All defective plumbing
found inside should be documented appropriately for future reference. The occupant will be advised
to have the defect repaired by a licensed plumber.
10. During the actual smoke testing, Smoke Testing Team field personnel will scout the area for smoke
escaping from ground sources, roof vents, storm drain structures, etc. All sources of Rainfall
Dependent Infiltration/Inflow will be photographed, measured, drawn, and documented
accordingly with addresses, data, and sketches. The smoke test form will identify which sewer
segment is being tested by its component identification in the city's GIS database.
11. All defects encountered will also be recorded using handheld tablets 'blue tooth' to a GPS receiver.
The tablet will have access to the city's wastewater collection system GIS which will be overlaid
on a digital ortho map and the GPS unit will allow the smoke test team member to see his location
on the map in real time and allow for the accurate recording of a defect's type and location. Each
defect image taken will be geocoded to a specific location and the information will be stored
electronically for future use.
It is understood that the city staff members may accompany the selected Contractor's field staff during the
smoke testing initiative to gain a better understanding of how to quantify potential inflow volumes from the
smoke defects recorded and how to compare the smoke testing defect results to the previously recorded
flow data. It is further understood that the selected Contractor's staff will install cleanout plugs and storm
water manhole inflow dishes (provided by the city) concurrently with the smoke testing operations. The
selected Contractor will develop a `Smoke Testing Results' spreadsheet that identifies each pipe section
tested and the results of the test, whether positive or negative. A separate spreadsheet: `Smoke Testing
Defects', will be prepared that identifies all defects encountered during the smoke testing activity. This
spreadsheet will contain a column which identifies the surface area associated with each defect, and if there
is a need to conduct dye water testing/flooding.
406-3. DYE INVESTIGATION
The results of the smoke testing may not always clearly or positively indicate the source of a sanitary sewer
interconnection or defect. Further investigation may be required to fully define the I/I sources or defects
under the following conditions:
1. Smoke injected into the sanitary sewer is seen in storm sewer catch basins. This may be caused by
defective catch basin laterals in the vicinity of the sanitary sewer (if the sanitary sewer has open
joints, cracks or breaks). Dye testing may be needed to determine if the catch basin is connected to
the sanitary sewer. CCTV (by others) of the sanitary sewer may be needed to identify the point of
the smoke exfiltration.
2. Smoke does not freely pass from one manhole to the next, or vent from property's roof stack/ roof
plumbing vent, during the sanitary sewer smoke testing. CCTV (by others) of the sanitary
sewer/lateral may be needed to identify sewer blockages or pipe sags.
SECTION IV
Page 77 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
Upon completion of the initial smoke testing within a service area, the selected Contractor will submit a list
of locations that require further investigation to the city. Upon approval from the city, the city may request
the selected contractor to accompany a city diagnostic crew to further investigate the inconclusive smoke
test results. Techniques employed by the city may include dye testing, CCTV inspections (by others)
manhole/catch basin inspection, sewer line lamping (by others), and storm sewer cleaning (by others).
Where initial smoke test results warrant further investigation as approved by the city, a non-toxic dye
approved by the city will be used to investigate specific potential interconnections. Contractor shall submit
the SDS for all dyes used. Storm sewer cross -connections and area drains that are suspected of being
connected to the sanitary sewer will be positively identified using the dye tracer procedure. Laterals
suspected of having significant leaks or breaks will also be investigated. Field documentation, including
sketches showing the location of all tests conducted and digital photographs, where feasible, will be used
to record findings. Internal pipeline inspection will determine the exact source of the suspected
interconnection and establish the best abatement option. The following identifies the dye water protocols
to be implemented.
406-3.1. DYE WATER TRACING
Private/Public sector dye water tracing will be conducted by introducing a small quantity of liquid dye
concentrate into suspect sources such as downspouts, area drains, patio drains, window well drains, and
driveway drains, and then introducing a sufficient volume of clean water to locate the source's discharge
point. During each tracing, sanitary sewers, storm drains, and curb lines located downstream of the sources
shall be monitored for signs of dyed water. The quantity of dye concentrate and water used will vary
depending on pipe size and the quantity of flow and debris in each line section. A report will be prepared
for each location where dye water tracing has been performed. The report will identify where the dye water
was introduced and its' susceptibility for entering the wastewater collection system. Photos will be taken
of where the dye water is introduced and where it is recorded discharging into the downstream wastewater
collection system manhole. CCTV inspection equipment (by others) will be utilized to identify exactly
where the dye water is entering the wastewater collection system piping.
406-3.2. DYE WATER FLOODING
Dye water flooding results will be documented for each location where the storm drainage system is
flooded. Each dye water flood report will identify the section of wastewater gravity piping being tested, the
location(s) where the storm water system piping was isolated and flooded, photographs of each setup and
CCTV inspection results (by others) identifying the location(s) where dye water was identified entering the
wastewater collection system. The following information will also be documented; evidence of dyed water
in manholes downstream from the ponding area, stream crossing, or other suspected sources where the dyed
water is placed, and time of travel from contributing source to the manhole sampled, and the concentration
of the dyed water observed;
The Field Inspection Procedures for Dyed Water Flooding are as follows:
1. A mixture of water and any approved dye coloring substance will be introduced to the identified
source. Dye water team inspectors will be stationed immediately downstream on the local sanitary
and storm sewer lines. Observations, whether positive or negative, will be documented
appropriately. Whenever possible the dyed water point of exit will be documented by CCTV
inspection equipment (by others).
2. Prior to any dye testing, the appropriate city staff shall be notified of the specific location of testing
and what adjacent waterways may be affected when the dye water is released into the storm
drainage system.
SECTION IV
Page 78 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Fire hydrants used to supply the water source needed will be opened slowly and closed in the same manner.
A flow restrictive device shall be used on the hydrant to prevent discoloration problems. Should the water
be running cloudy or dirty after use, the fire hydrant shall be left open at a slow pace until the water clears.
If long term draining is required, the Dye Water Team shall notify the city.
406-4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Measurement shall be the number of linear feet smoke tested and each occurrence of dye water tracing and
dye water flooding.
406-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for smoke testing as measured above and each
occurrence of dye water tracing and dye water flooding, which shall be full compensation for all work
described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary
to perform the smoke and dye testing.
SECTION IV
Page 79 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER
MAINS, FIRE LINES AND
APPURTENANCES
501. SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials, and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of potable water mains, fire lines, reclaimed water mains and
appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. All materials identified
and specified in this section shall be NSF 61 and ISO 9001 compliant.
502. MATERIALS
502-1. GENERAL
Materials, equipment, and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of the
best quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship.
Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering, and shall be
fabricated in a first-class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and
shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to
installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt,
chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction.
All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification
and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted to the
Engineer of Record with each shipment of materials.
Engineer of Record shall certify and submit all material test results to the city Project Manager within 10
calendar days of performing test(s).
502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
502-2.1. DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151/ A21.51, latest revision. The
minimum thickness class for underground pipe shall be Thickness Class 51 for 4 -inch pipe or greater, 3"
ductile iron water mains or service lines are not allowed, Thickness Class 50 for 6 -inch through 12 -inch
pipe and Pressure Class 250 for 16 -inch pipe and larger. Flanged pipe shall have a minimum thickness class
of Class 53. Pipe thickness class or pressure class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to
the following table:
Size
Thickness Class (TC)
Pressure Class (PC)
Thickness
(In.)
Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
4"
TC51
0.26
350
6"
TC50
0.25
350
8"
TC50
0.27
350
12"
TC50
0.31
350
16"
PC250
0.31
250
20"
PC250
0.33
250
SECTION IV
Page 80 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
24"
PC250
0.37
250
30"
PC250
0.42
250
36"
PC250
0.47
250
Pipe larger than 8 -inches in diameter or pipes which are deeper than 10 -feet shall be ductile iron only, for
open cut installations. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4 -inch
through 12 -inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
Pipe shall have a minimum rated water working pressure of 250 psi and shall be furnished in laying lengths
of 20 feet or less, unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. All piping and fittings shall be new
and unused, no refurbished piping or fittings shall be accepted.
Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all hydrant installations, large meter sets 3" or larger and for fire line
installations from the main to the backflow preventer.
Fittings:, Fittings for bends, tees, crosses, etc. from 4 -inch through 36 -inch in size installed on ductile iron
pipe shall be either mechanical joint, restrained joint or flanged joint as indicated on the Drawings and shall
have a minimum working pressure of 250 psi. Fittings shall be cast ductile iron and shall conform to
ANSI/AWWA C110, ANSI/AWWA C111 and ANSI/AWWA C153, latest revisions for flanged and
mechanical joint pipe. Fittings for compact ductile iron cast fittings in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C153/A 21.53, latest revision with mechanical joint bells or ductile iron cast fittings in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10, latest revision with mechanical joint bells. Fittings shall be coated and lined
as indicated on the Drawings, in the manner specified below for ductile iron pipe. The rubber gaskets for
flanged, mechanical, and push -on joints shall be as described below.
The working pressure minimum rating shall be 350 psi for 4 -inch to 24 -inch fittings. Fittings larger than
24 -inch shall be pressure rated to 250 psi minimum. Fittings shall be designed to withstand without bursting
a hydrostatic test of three times the rated water working pressure. All fittings shall have a date code cast
into the fitting in addition to the pressure rating and material code. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and
lined in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be
ductile iron in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA
Standards, the latest revisions shall apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA)
manufacture shall be acceptable.
Push -On Joints: Push -on -joints shall be used for straight pipe lengths only. No fittings with push -on -joints
shall be allowed. Pipe using push -on joints shall be in strict accordance with AWWA C111 and ANSI
A21.11, latest revision. Jointing materials shall be provided by the pipe manufacturer and installation shall
be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended practice. The gaskets for push -on pipe joints
shall be made of EPDM rubber. Push -on joints shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved
Products List, or an equal approved by the city.
Mechanical Joints: Jointing materials for mechanical joints shall be provided by the pipe and fitting
manufacturer. Materials assembly, bolting and gaskets shall be in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C111 and ANSI/AWWA C110/ A 21.10 and ANSI/AWWA C153/ A 21.53, latest revisions. Tee head bolts
and nuts for underground mechanical joint ductile iron fittings shall be manufactured of CORTEN, high
strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel in accordance with ASTM A242, or an equal approved by the
Engineer. The gaskets for mechanical joints shall be made of EPDM rubber.
Flanged Joints: Bolt circle and bolt holes for flanges shall be drilled and faced to match ANSI B16.1, Class
125, with any special drilling and tapping as required to insure correct alignment and bolting. All accessory
hex -head bolts and nuts and full faced gaskets for each joint size shall be furnished as a flange accessory
package.
SECTION IV
Page 81 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
1. Gaskets: Full face, Toruseal gaskets, or approved equal shall be used for flanged pipe connections.
Gaskets shall be suitable for a water pressure of 350 psi at a temperature of 180F. The gaskets for
flanged joints shall be made of EPDM rubber.
2. Bolts and Nuts for Flanges: Bolts and nuts for flanges shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming
to ASTM A193, Grade B8M for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8M for nuts. The nuts shall have a
hardness that is lower than that of the bolts and washers by a difference of 50 Brinnell hardness to
prevent galling during installation.
3. Flanges shall be long -hub type screwed tightly on pipe by machine at the foundry prior to facing
and drilling. Flange machine surfaces shall be coated with rust inhibitor immediately after facing
and drilling. Field assembled screwed on flanges are prohibited.
502-2.1.1. MANUFACTURED RESTRAINED JOINTS FOR DUCTILE IRON
PIPE
Restrained Pipe Joints and Fittings: Thrust restraint for buried piping shall be provided by restrained
joints. Concrete thrust blocks shall not be acceptable. Pipe joints and fittings shall be restrained in
accordance with the Drawings and the requirements of this Specification. It is intended that, at a minimum,
all fittings shall be restrained. In cases where the calculated required length of restrained pipe is not evenly
divisible by nominal laying lengths of pipe, the total required length of restrained pipe shall be rounded up
to the next closest nominal length that is evenly divisible by the standard laying length.
A. Manufactured Restrained Joints: Manufactured restrained joints shall be manufacturer's standard
specifically modified push -on type joints with joint restraint provided by ductile iron retainer rings
joined together by corrosion -resistant, high strength steel tee head bolts and nuts or with joint
restraint provided by a welded -on retainer ring and a split flexible ring assembled behind the
retainer ring. Gaskets for manufactured restrained pipe joints shall be made of EPDM rubber.
Manufactured restrained joints shall be as listed as an equal approved by the city.
B. Gripping -Type Gasket Restraint: Gripping -type gaskets may be used for ductile iron pipe 12 -inches
in size and smaller, when approved by the city. This type of restrained joint shall be the
manufacturer's standard push -on type joint with joint restraint provided by a specially designed
gasket with high strength stainless steel gripping elements which have sharp teeth on its inner
surface for gripping the spigot end of the pipe joint. The gripping type gasket shall be made of
EPDM rubber. The gripping type gasket manufacturer's joint restraint shall only be considered for
use on pipe sizes from 4 -inch to 12 -inch. Gripping type gasket restraints shall be as listed in the
City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city.
C. Manufactured restrained joint pipe and fittings shall be ductile iron only and shall comply with
applicable portions of this Specification. Manufactured restrained joints shall be capable of
deflection during assembly. Deflection shall not exceed 50 percent of the manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Tee head bolts and nuts for restrained joints shall be manufactured of CORTEN, high strength, low
alloy, corrosion resistant steel in accordance with ASTM A242, or an equal approved by the
Engineer.
502-2.1.2. ALTERNATE MECHANICALLY RESTRAINED JOINTS FOR DI
PIPE
Thrust restraint for buried piping shall be provided by restrained joints. Concrete thrust blocks shall not be
acceptable. When prior approval is obtained from the Engineer, ductile iron pipe and fittings with
mechanical joints or ductile iron pipe with push -on joints may be restrained using a follower gland or ring
which includes a restraining mechanism. Joint restraints shall have a working pressure rating of 350 psi for
3 -inch to 16 -inch ductile iron pipe, 250 psi for 18 -inch to 36 -inch ductile iron pipe, with a minimum pressure
SECTION IV
Page 82 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
rating safety factor of 2 to 1. The restraint shall be accomplished by multiple gripping wedges incorporated
into a follower gland meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C 110/A21.10.
502-2.1.2.1. Restraints for Ductile Iron Pipe with Mechanical Joint Fittings
Joint restraints for ductile iron pipe to mechanical joint fittings shall be MEGALUG Series 1100 restraints
by EBAA Iron, or an approved equal listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List. When
actuated during installation, the restraining device shall impart a multiple wedging action against the pipe
wall, which increases resistance as internal pressure in the pipeline increases.
A. The restrained joint shall maintain flexibility after installation. Glands shall be manufactured of
ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 and restraining devices shall be of heat-treated ductile iron
with a minimum hardness of 370 BHN. The gland shall have standard dimension and bolting
patterns for mechanical joints conforming to ANSI/AWWA C111 and C153, latest revisions. The
restraining wedges shall have twist -off nuts to insure proper torquing.
B. Tee head bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion -resistant, high strength, low alloy
CORTEN steel in accordance with ASTM A242.
C. No other retainer gland type device will be acceptable. After installation prior to backfilling, all
parts of the joint restraint system shall be coated with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic
No. 300-M.
502-2.1.2.2. Restraints for Ductile Iron Pipe with Push -on Joints
Joint restraints for ductile iron push -on pipe joints 4 -inch to 36 -inch shall be constructed of ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A536 and shall have a working pressure for 350 psi for 4 -inch to 16 -inch and 250 psi
for 18 -inch and larger fittings. Restraint shall be accomplished by a wedge action restraint ring on the spigot
joined to a split ductile iron ring behind the bell and the two rings connected by restraint rods and nuts.
Torque limiting twist off nuts shall be used to ensure proper actuation of the restraining wedges. The
restraints shall be MEGALUG® Series 1700 restraint harnesses as manufactured by EBAA Iron or an
approved equal.
A. The restrained joint shall maintain flexibility after installation. Restraint rings shall be
manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 and the ring restraining wedge devices
shall be of heat-treated ductile iron with a minimum hardness of 370 BHN. The restraining wedges
shall have twist -off nuts to insure proper torquing.
B. Restraint rods and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion -resistant, high strength, low alloy
CORTEN steel in accordance with ASTM A242.
C. No other restraint harness type device will be acceptable. After installation prior to backfilling, all
parts of the joint restraint system shall be coated with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic
No. 300-M.
502-2.1.3. Ductile Iron Pipe Installed with Steel Casings
General: All pipe placed within steel casings shall be push -on joint ductile iron pipe restrained by the use
of mechanical bell restraints as specified above in Section 502-2.1.2.2. The rods for the bell restraints shall
be double nutted to prevent over -belling of the joint during push -in of the carrier pipe into the casing. The
carrier pipe shall have properly sized casing spacers installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered
within the casing. Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or
debris within the casing itself. It shall be double sealed by brick and cement mortar and include a casing
end seal with stainless steel bands as shown on in the engineering construction standards.
Cement -Mortar Interior Lining (Potable or Reclaimed Water): Ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials
shall be cement lined in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104, latest edition, "Cement -Mortar Lining for
Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water". The cement lining shall have standard thickness
SECTION IV
Page 83 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
and, after curing, the lining shall have a seal coat of bituminous material in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C104/A21.4 80, latest revision and shall be listed by ANSI/NSF Standard 61 for potable water contact.
Pipe Labeling: Pipe manufacturer shall label in large legible lettering on the exterior of the pipe the type
of pipe interior lining.
Exterior Coatings for Buried Pipe: Ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials to be installed underground
shall be coated on the exterior at the factory with one coat, 1 mil DFT, of asphaltic coating per AWWA
C151, C110 and C153. All clamps, bolts, nuts, studs, and other uncoated parts of joints for underground
installation shall be coated with coal tar epoxy prior to backfilling. Coal tar epoxy shall be equal to
Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M.
Exterior Coating for Exposed Pipe: Ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials to be installed aboveground
shall be furnished with a shop applied primer on the exterior. All above ground ductile iron pipe and fitting
installations shall be painted in the field with an epoxy -epoxy -urethane system coating from an approved
coating manufacturer, color: Safety Blue for potable water, Pantone Purple for reclaimed water or Safety
Green for wastewater.
502-2.1.4. POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT FOR BURIED DUCTILE IRON
PIPE
Polyethylene tube encasement shall be provided and installed for all buried ductile iron pipe segments and
fittings for corrosion protection as specified herein. Both material and installation procedures shall be in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/ A21.5-10. Polyethylene encasement material shall be manufactured
with UV inhibitors. The polyethylene encasement shall be color coded as follows:
A. Potable Water Service — Blue Polyethylene Encasement.
B. Reclaimed Water Service — Pantone Purple Polyethylene Encasement.
C. Wastewater Service — Green Polyethylene Encasement.
The polyethylene encasement shall be a minimum of 8 mils thick and shall be certified by the manufacturer
to provide suitable protection of pipe installation in corrosive soil.
All pipe joints shall consist of a minimum of one foot of polyethylene overlap onto the adjacent pipe at both
ends. All overlap material shall be secured in place with at least two wraps of 1 -inch wide x 8 mils thick
polyethylene adhesive tape. Any slack liner material along the pipe barrel shall be taken up by folds secured
in-place with adhesive tape. Repair any rips, punctures, or other damage to polyethylene with tape or by
patching.
All valves, fittings and specialty items shall be jointed with proper overlaps and fastening as described
above. Prepare openings for service taps, air -reliefs, etc., by making a cut in the polyethylene and
temporarily folding back the edges. After installation is completed, replace the polyethylene and repair the
cut with polyethylene adhesive tape.
Care shall be taken during backfilling so that no damage will occur to the polyethylene encasement. In
general, backfilling shall be done in accordance with AWWA Standard C 600.
The Contractor shall install polyethylene encasement in accordance with all liner and pipe manufacturer
recommendations.
Polyethylene encasement shall be required for below ground installations of ductile iron pipe and fittings
where the installed ductile iron utility pipe will be located less than 10 feet from a gas main.
502-2.2. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Each length of PVC pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage
and installation such as the name or trademark of the manufacturer, the location of the manufacturing plant,
SECTION IV
Page 84 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
and the class or strength classification of the pipe. All PVC pipe shall bear the NSF -DW seal. Each length
of pipe shall also bear and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material
for potable water service. The markings shall be plainly visible on the pipe barrel. This required
identification shall be factory applied by the manufacturer. Pipe which is not marked clearly with the
required identification is subject to rejection. All rejected pipe shall be promptly removed from the project
site by the Contractor. PVC pipe is approved for underground installations only.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4 -inch through 8 -inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900,
DR18, latest revision and the American Society for Testing & Materials for the PVC Resin Compound
conforming to ASTM Specification D1784. Pipe shall have gasketed integral bell ends and shall be
homogeneous throughout and be free of visible cracks, holes, foreign material, blisters, or other visible
deleterious faults. Pipe shall be designed for maximum working pressure of not less than 235 psi and with
not less than a sustained hydrostatic pressure of 470 psi for a safety factor of 2 to 1 for AWWA C900 pipe.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall be manufactured to the same outside diameter (O.D.) as Ductile Iron Pipe
only. Pipe larger than 8 -inches in diameter or pipes which are deeper than 10 -feet shall be ductile iron only.
The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4 -inch through 8 -inch when
needed due to laying conditions or usage.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
Size
Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.)
Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
Laying Length
(Ft)
4
18
235
20
6
18
235
20
8
18
235
20
12
18
235
20
Bell and Spigot Pipe Joints: Pipe joints shall be gasketed, push -on type made with integral bell and spigot
pipe ends in accordance with ASTM D3139, latest revision. The bell shall consist of an integral thickened
wall section designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. The bell shall be supplied with factory glued
rubber ring gasket which conforms to the manufacturer's standard dimensions and tolerances. The gasket
shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477 "Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" and
shall be manufactured of EPDM elastomeric material. PVC pipe shall be approved by the Engineer and the
Owner or approved equal.
Integral Pipe Color: All PVC pipe for potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and wastewater force
mains shall be extruded or fabricated with an integral color in the PVC material. The integral color for the
PVC pipe shall be as follows:
A. Potable Water: PVC pipeline color - Blue.
B. Reclaimed Water: PVC pipeline color — Pantone Purple
C. Wastewater: PVC pipeline color — Green
The use of white or any other color pipe for potable water, reclaimed water or wastewater service shall be
prohibited.
Fittings: Fittings for PVC pressure pipe shall be ductile iron fittings with restrained mechanical joint ends,
linings and coatings as specified in Section 502-2.1 for ductile iron fittings.
Restrained Joints for PVC Pipe: Thrust restraint for buried piping shall be provided by restrained joints.
Concrete thrust blocks shall not be acceptable. Thrust restraints shall be used at all valves, tees, bends, and
other fittings for the Restrained Joint PVC pipe and Push -on Joint PVC pipe. Where indicated on the
Drawings, to prevent pipe joints and fittings from separating under pressure, pipe joints and fittings for
PVC pipe shall be restrained as follows:
SECTION IV
Page 85 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
A. PVC pipe bell and spigot push -on joints, adjacent to restrained fittings, shall be restrained using a
harness type restraint device. The harness restraint shall be split to enable installation of the restraint
after the spigot has been installed into the bell. The restraint unit shall consist of a split ring that
fits behind the bell, a split restraint ring that installs on the spigot and a number of clamping bolts
to connect the other two parts. The restraining device shall consist of multiple individually activated
gripping wedges or a series of serrations to grip the pipe and maximize restraint capability in
conjunction with a sufficient number of clamping bolts connecting the retainer on the bell side of
the joint pipe to the restraint ring on the other side to hold the spigot. The restraining device and
components shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A536, Grade 65-
42-10. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low
alloy CORTEN steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A242. The restraint device shall be the
EBBA Iron MEGALUG- Series 1500 TD Restrainer or an equal.
B. Mechanical joint fittings used with PVC pipe shall be restrained with the EBBA Iron MEGALUGE
Series 2000 PV Restrainer or an equal approved. The restraining device shall consist of a retainer
gland such that it can replace the standard mechanical joint gland and can be used with the standard
mechanical joint bell conforming to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 and ANSI/AWWA C153/A21-
53. The restraining device shall have a pressure rating equal to that of the PVC pipe on which it is
used. Twist off nuts, sized same as the tee -head bolts shall be used to insure proper actuating of
restraining devices. The restraining gland shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron
meeting ASTM A536, Grade 65-42-10. The tee head bolts and nuts, and the clamping bolts and
nuts, shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting
the requirements of ASTM A242.
502-2.2.1. RESTRAINED JOINT PVC PIPE (DIRECTIONAL BORE)
Restrained Joint PVC pipe and couplings used for directional bores shall be made from un -plasticized PVC
compounds having a minimum cell classification of 12454-B, as defined in ASTM D1784 (latest edition).
All compounds shall qualify for a Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4°F,
in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2837 (latest edition latest edition). Blue pipe (safety blue
paint color) shall be supplied for the potable water system and purple pipe (pantone 522C paint color) shall
be supplied for the reclaimed water system as specified in Section 502-2.2.
Nominal outside diameters and wall thickness of PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA
C900 for pipe sizes between 4 and 16 -inches. Nominal outside diameters and wall thickness of 4" PVC
pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2241 (latest edition). PVC pipe shall be furnished in
sizes 4" (Pressure Rating 250 psi, DR17), 4" (Class 305, DR -14) and 6" and 8" (Class 235, DR -18). Pipe
shall be furnished in standard laying lengths of 20 ft. + 1 in.
PVC pipe used for directional bores shall be joined using a restrained joint coupling system or ring restraint
with Rieber Gasket meeting the requirements of ASTM F477, latest edition. Pipe and/or couplings shall be
designed as an integral system and shall be provided by a single manufacturer for maximum reliability and
interchangeability. Assembled joints shall meet the leakage test requirements of ASTM D3139 (latest
edition). No external pipe -to -pipe restraining devices which clamp onto or otherwise damage the pipe
surface as a result of point -loading shall be permitted.
Maximum allowable axial jacking loads for the pipe shall be provided by the pipe manufacturer. The
Contractor shall provide and utilize appropriate instrumentation that the Engineer shall monitor, to ensure
that the jacking loads never exceed 80% of the maximum allowable axial jacking loads allowed by the pipe
manufacturer. Only experienced personnel shall be used to install pipe. If used, coupling edges shall be
beveled to reduce drag force when pipe is installed by directional bore or Micro tunneling. Assembly of
joints shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
Manufacturer/Product: Certain Teed Certa-Lok C-900, no approved equal.
SECTION IV Page 86 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
• 502-2.3. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE
This Section includes materials and methods of installation of high-density polyethylene pipe (HDPE) and
fittings for water, reclaimed water, and wastewater utility use as required and as specified herein. For point
repairs only if the flow cannot be stopped the use of stiffeners is allowed.
The high density, very high molecular weight polyethylene pipe shall be made from a HDPE material
having a minimum material designation code of PE4710 and shall conform to AWWA C906, latest revision.
The material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3350 and shall have a minimum cell classification of
PE445574C/E. In addition, the pipe shall be listed as meeting NSF -61. HDPE pipe shall have outside
diameter sizes matching ductile iron pipe (DIPS) and shall have the minimum wall thickness and dimension
ratio (DR) as shown on the Drawings for a particular installation. Minimum pressure ratings for HDPE pipe
shall be 250 psi DR 9 and 200 psi for DR -11. The DR rating or the minimum pipe wall thickness of the
pipe for a particular HDD installation shall be as called out on the Drawings. The polyethylene compound
shall be suitably protected against degradation by ultraviolet light by means of carbon black, well dispersed
by pre -compounding in a concentration of not less than 2 percent.
The pipe manufacturer shall be listed and in good standing with the Plastic Pipe Institute as meeting the
recipe and mixing requirements of the resin manufacturer for the resin used to manufacture the pipe. Pipe
shall be manufactured by Performance Pipe (Chevron), JM Eagle or an approved equal.
HDPE pipe shall be manufactured and identified by color based on the type of utility service. HDPE pipe
and tubing less than 6 -inch in size shall be manufactured entirely in the required color. For HDPE pipe 6 -
inch and greater, color coding shall be accomplished either through an exterior surface entirely of the
required color or through striping. The color coding shall be permanently co -extruded on the pipe exterior
surface as part of the pipe's manufacturing process. The pipe shall be manufactured as one solid color per
the applicable service color or shall be black in color with three (3) permanent solid color stripes, per the
applicable service color, extruded into the piping material. The colored stripes shall appear on three (3)
sides of the pipe, run the entire length of the pipe, and each stripe shall be no less than 1 -inch wide. Painting
HDPE pipe to accomplish color coding shall not be permitted. The pipe identification color coding based
on the intended Type of Utility Service shall be as follows:
1. Sewer — green (safety green paint color)
2. Water — blue (safety blue paint color)
3. Reclaimed water — purple (pantone 522C paint color)
In addition to the identification color being co -extruded, HDPE Pipe shall have been continuously marked
by the manufacturer with permanent printing with the following information at a minimum:
A. Nominal Size (Inches).
B. Dimension Ratio (DR).
C. Pressure Rating (psi).
D. Trade Name.
E. Material Classification (PE4710).
F. Plant, Extruder and Operator Codes.
G. Resin Supplier Code.
H. Date Produced; and
I. HDPE pipe used for potable water mains shall bear the NSF Seal of Approval.
502-2.3.1. MECHANICAL JOINT ADAPTERS (MJ ADPATERS)
Mechanical Joint Adapter Fittings shall have a material designation code of PE4710, and a minimum Cell
Classification of PE445474C/E. Mechanical Joint Adapters can be made to ASTM D3261 or if machined,
must meet the requirements of ASTM F2206. MJ Adapters shall have a pressure rating equal to the pipe
•
•
SECTION IV Page 87 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
unless otherwise specified on the plans. Markings for molded or machined MJ Adapters shall be per ASTM
D3261.
Where shown on the drawings, 4 -inch and larger transitions to mechanical joint fittings and valves shall be
ductile iron mechanical joint. Connection to the mechanical joint fittings shall be accomplished using a
mechanical joint adapter kit. The mechanical joint adapter fitting shall be fused onto the pipe and shall
result in a restrained joint with a pressure rating no less than 150 psi. The D.I./HDPE mechanical joint
adaptor shall consist of:
1. A molded or fabricated HDPE mechanical joint transition fitting.
2. A mechanical joint rubber gasket fabricated of EPDM.
3. A mechanical joint restraining gland. The restraining gland shall be manufactured of high strength,
ductile iron meeting ASTM A536, Grade 65-42-10.
4. The tee head bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy
CORTEN steel, meeting the requirements of ASTM A242.
502-2.3.2. BUTT FUSION PROCESS AND INSTALLATION
The pipe shall be joined by the butt fusion procedure outlined in ASTM F2620 or PPI TR -33. All fusion
joints shall be made in compliance with the pipe or fitting manufacturer's recommendations and shall be
butt -welded flush to the outside diameter of the pipe. Joints shall provide axial pullout resistance. Fusion
joints shall be made by qualified fusion technicians per PPI TN -42. A record or certificate of training for
the fusion operator must be provided to the Engineer that documents training to the fundamentals of ASTM
F 2620.
All HDPE fusion equipment operators shall be qualified to perform pipe joining. Fusion equipment
operators shall have current, formal training on all fusion equipment employed on the project and shall be
certified by the pipe supplier/manufacturer. Training records for qualified fusion technicians shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review. Training received more than two years prior to operation with no
evidence of activity within the past 6 months shall not be considered current.
When the fusion machine operator is employed by the HDPE pipe and fusion machine supplier, the supplier
shall maintain an ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System.
Sections of HDPE shall be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground and butt fused in
strict accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The finished pipe assembly shall be pressure
tested prior to insertion underground.
All HDPE pipe shall be cut, fabricated, and installed in strict conformance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. Joining, laying, and pulling of polyethylene pipe shall be accomplished by personnel
experienced in working with high density polyethylene pipe. The pipe supplier shall certify in writing to
the Engineer that the Contractor is qualified to join, lay, and pull the pipe or representative of the pipe
manufacturer shall be on site to oversee the pipe joining. Expenses for the representative shall be paid for
by the Contractor.
The butt fused joint shall have a zero -leak rate under the following conditions:
A. External pressure up to 60 psi from bentonite injection, slurry system operation, or groundwater
head.
B. Internal hydrostatic pressure testing of 150 psi.
The Contractor shall obtain from the pipe manufacturer a certificate of compliance to the effect that the
pipe and fittings supplied for this Contract have been inspected at the plant and that they meet the
requirements of these specifications. The Contractor shall submit these certificates to the Engineer prior to
installation of the pipe materials. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to visual inspection at time of
delivery and before they are lowered into the trench to be laid. Joints or fittings that do not conform to these
SECTION IV
Page 88 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
specifications will be rejected and must be removed immediately by the Contractor. The entire product of
any plant may be rejected when, in the opinion of the city, the methods of manufacture fail to secure uniform
results, or where the materials used are such as to produce inferior pipe or fittings.
Each joint fusion shall be recorded and logged by an electronic monitoring device (data logger) affixed to
the fusion machine. Joint data shall be submitted as part of the As -Built record information, in accordance
with this Technical Specification.
Butt Fusion Machines: Only appropriately sized, and outfitted fusion machines that have been approved
by the pipe supplier shall be used for the fusion process. Fusion machines must incorporate the following
properties, including the following elements:
A. Heat Plate: Heat plates shall be in good condition with no deep gouges or scratches within the pipe
circle being fused. Plates shall be clean and free of any contamination. Heater controls shall
properly function, and cord and plug shall be in good condition. The appropriately sized heat plate
shall be capable of maintaining a uniform and consistent heat profile and temperature for the size
of pipe being fused, per the pipe supplier's recommendations.
B. Carriage: Carriage shall travel smoothly with no binding at less than 50 psi. Jaws shall be in good
condition with proper inserts for the pipe size being fused. Insert pins shall be installed with no
interference to carriage travel.
C. General Machine: Overview of machine body shall yield no obvious defects, missing parts, or
potential safety issues during fusion.
D. Data Logger: The current version of the pipe supplier's recommended and compatible software
shall be used. Protective case shall be utilized for the hand-held wireless portion of the unit. Data
Logger operations and maintenance manual shall always be with the unit. If fusing for extended
periods of time, an independent 110V power source shall be available to extend battery life.
E. Joint Recording: Each fusion joint shall be recorded and logged by an electronic monitoring device
(data logger) connected to the fusion machine. The fusion data logging and joint report shall be
generated by software developed specifically for the butt -fusion of thermoplastic pipe. The
software shall register and/or record the parameters required by the manufacturer and these
Specifications. Data not logged by the data logger shall be logged manually and be included in the
Fusion Technician's joint report.
Required Auxiliary Equipment: Other equipment specifically required for the butt fusion process shall
include the following:
A. Pipe rollers shall be used for support of pipe on either side of the fusion machine.
B. A weather protection canopy that allows full machine motion of the heat plate, fusion assembly
and carriage shall be provided for fusion in inclement and /or windy weather.
C. Fusion machine operations and maintenance manual shall always be kept with the fusion machine.
D. Facing blades specifically designed for cutting HDPE pipe.
The pipe shall be installed in a manner that does not exceed 70 percent of the recommended maximum
bending radius of the pipe. When the pipe is installed by pulling in tension, 75 percent of the recommended
Safe Pulling Force, according to the pipe supplier, shall not be exceeded.
Joint Fusion Bead Removal: Contractor shall trim and remove the butt fusion beads from the inside and
the outside of the HDPE pipe at the butt fused joint following joint fusing. without disrupting pipe service.
The restraints shall be manufactured by EBAA Iron Series 1500 or 1600 or approved equal.
SECTION IV
Page 89 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
502-2.4. PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
502-2.4.1. EXTERIOR MARKINGS FOR BURIED PIPE
All ductile iron and polyvinyl chloride pressure pipelines installed by open cut shall receive a color -coded
continuous self-adhesive vinyl tape, installed by the contractor, with the width and located as indicated
below. Pipe tape striping shall be in the color required for the service as specified below.
A. Tape Striae Markin Locations:
Up to 4 -inch
diameter pipe
(1 location)
3 -inch wide tape placed at center -top of pipe.
6 to 16 -inch
diameter pipe
(2 locations)
6 -inch wide tape placed on both sides, top half of pipe.
20 -inch and larger
diameter pipe
(3 locations)
6 -inch wide tape placed on both sides' top half of pipe with
a third stripe centered along top of pipe.
B. Color of Tape Stripe Marking:
Potable Water Marking Stripe Tape
Blue with Black or White Lettering,
"POTABLE WATER MAIN" or similar wording.
Reclaimed Water Marking Stripe Tape
Purple with White or Yellow Lettering,
"RECLAIMED WATER MAIN" or similar wording
Force Main Marking Stripe Tape
Green with Black or White Lettering,
"WASTEWATER FORCE MAIN" or similar wording
502-2.4.2. LOCATION DETECTION WIRE:
A. Location Detection Wire for Open -Cut Pipeline Installations: All ductile iron and polyvinyl
chloride pressure pipelines installed by open cut shall be laid with two (2) strands of Location
Detection Wire applied to the pipe. The detection wire shall be continuous, high strength copper
clad steel (HS -CCS) 10 gauge AWG wire insulated with 30 mil thick high molecular weight — high
density polyethylene (HMW -HDPE) insulation with a minimum break load of 684 pounds and
specifically designed for use in open cut installations, equal to "1030 -HS High Strength Tracer
Wire" manufactured by Copperhead Industries, LLC, or an approved equal. Each wire shall be
continuous with splices made only by spicing connectors manufactured by the wire manufacturer
equal to "LSC1030C Snake BiteTM Locking Connectors" as manufactured by Copperhead
Industries, LLC or an approved equal. The 2 wires shall be taped to the top of each joint of pipe
with about 5 -feet between each piece of tape, with a minimum of 3 taping locations for each 20 -
foot length of pipe. The tape used shall be 3M Scotch Rap All -Weather Corrosion Protection Tape,
polyvinyl chloride backing with rubber adhesive, 4 -inches wide or Engineer Approved Equal.
Following installation of the pipeline including backfill and compaction, the Contractor shall perform a
second 12 -volt DC electrical continuity test on each of the two (2) tracer wires.
B. Location Detection Wire for Horizontal Directional Drilling Pipeline Installations: All
polyvinyl chloride or HDPE pressure pipe installed by directional drilling methods shall be installed
with three (3) insulated tracer wires. The three (3) tracer wires shall be attached at 120 -degree
locations around the pipe to help ensure continuity of at least one wire subsequent to the HDD
installation. The tracer wire shall be continuous, extra high strength copper clad steel (EHS-CCS)
10 gauge AWG wire insulated with 45 mil thick high molecular weight — high density polyethylene
(HMW -HDPE) insulation with a minimum break load of 2,032 pounds and specifically designed
for use in directional drilling installations, equal to "1045-EHS Solo Shot EHS, Extra High Strength
Tracer Wire" manufactured by Copperhead Industries, LLC, or an approved equal.
SECTION IV
Page 90 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Continuity shall be maintained in the wire along the entire length of the pipe installed by HDD. No splices
shall be allowed for each wire attached to the HDD pipeline unless approved by the city or the Engineer. If
approved, permanent splices shall be made using wire connectors approved for underground applications
with splices made only by spicing connectors manufactured by the wire manufacturer equal to "LSC1030C
Snake BiteTM Locking Connectors" as manufactured by Copperhead Industries, LLC or an approved equal.
If splices are approved by the city or the Engineer, all miscellaneous splicing components shall be furnished,
installed, and tested by the Contractor and witnessed by the city or the Engineer.
At a minimum, the location detection wires shall be attached to the pipe with nylon wire ties, with ties
located at 5 -foot intervals, as shown in the Standard Details. The Contractor may suggest other methods of
attachment, with the approval of the city or the Engineer.
Prior to installation of the pipeline into the bore hole, the Contractor shall perform a 12 -volt DC electrical
continuity test on each of the three (3) wires during the aboveground pressure test.
Following installation of the pipeline into the bore hole, the Contractor shall perform a second 12 -volt DC
electrical continuity test on each of the three (3) tracer wires. Failure of continuous continuity for at least
one of the three tracing wires attached to the HDD pipeline, at the discretion of the city or the Engineer,
shall be cause for rejection of the HDD installation, resulting in the abandonment and reinstallation of the
directionally drilled pipeline.
The HDD tracer wires shall be spliced twelve (12) inches below grade to three (3) 10 -gauge tracer wires,
as specified above for open cut installations, and brought up in the valve boxes at the ends of each HDD
line segment. The splices shall be made only by methods per the tracer wire manufacturer's
recommendations and by splicing connections manufactured by the tracer wire manufacturer. The splicing
connectors shall be the "LSC1030C SnakeBiteTM Locking Connector" as manufactured by Copperhead
Industries, LLC, the Direct Bury Lug as manufactured by DryConn®, or an approved equal.
C. Color of Location Detection Wires: The insulation color for the wire shall match the color for the
pipes intended service as follows:
1. Potable Water Mains — Blue Insulation.
2. Reclaimed Water Mains - Pantone Purple Insulation.
3. Wastewater Force Mains — Green Insulation.
D. Termination of the Location Detection Wires: The tracer wires shall be secured to all valves,
tees and elbows. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2 -inch PVC pipe to 18 -inches
above the top of the concrete slab. The 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable
valve box, and the 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2 -inch removable brass plug with
recessed square nut
502-2.4.3. WARNING TAPE:
In addition, all underground pipelines installed by open -cut methods shall be buried with identification tape
installed over the centerline of the pipe at a depth of 1.0 foot below finished grade. The identification tape
shall be as follows:
A. Identification tape shall be manufactured of reinforced polyethylene film with a minimum overall
thickness of 4 mils and shall have a 0.35 mil thick magnetic metallic foil core. The tape shall be
highly resistant to alkalis, acids, and other destructive agents found in soil. Tape width shall be 3 -
inches and shall have background color specified below, imprinted with black letters. Imprint shall
be as specified below and shall repeat itself a minimum of once every 2 -feet for entire length of
tape. Tape shall be Terra Tape Sentry Line, or an approved equal.
B. Tape background colors and imprints shall be in accordance with the following table:
Tape Imprint
Background Color
Imprint Color
"Caution — Potable Water Main Buried Below"
Blue
Black
SECTION IV
Page 91 of 172
Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
"Caution — Reclaimed Water Main Buried Below"
Purple
White
"Caution — Wastewater Force Main Buried Below"
Green
Black
502-2.5. RESTRAINED JOINT COUPLINGS
Restrained Joint Pipe Couplings: Restrained joint pipe couplings used to join and restrain two pieces of
plain end pipe shall be sized to suit the outside diameter of the pipe ends to be jointed with restrained ends.
Transition couplings shall be used to join pipes of different outside diameters. Pipe couplings shall be bolted
type with ASTM A536 ductile iron middle ring and end followers.
Coatings: All ductile iron parts of the coupling shall be coated on the interior and exterior with a fusion
bonded thermosetting epoxy coating, applied electrostatically prior to assembly, and complying with
AWWA C550 with a 12 -mil nominal coating thickness. The coating shall be equal to Mega -Bond as
manufactured by EBBA Iron, Inc., or an approved equal.
Gaskets: Gaskets for the coupling shall be wedge type manufactured of EPDM resilient rubber.
Bolts: Torque limiting nuts and gripping restraint wedges shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant, low
alloy, high strength steel. Threaded restraint rods and hexagonal nuts shall be manufactured of high
strength, Type 316 stainless steel. Bolts and nuts shall conform dimensionally to ANSI/AWWA C111,
latest revision.
Approved Manufacturer: Restrained joint couplings shall be Series 3800 as manufactured by EBBA Iron,
Inc., or an approved equal.
502-3. GATE VALVES
General: Gate valves shall open by turning to the left (counterclockwise), when viewed from the stem.
When fully open, gate valves shall have a clear, unobstructed waterway equal to the nominal diameter of
the pipe. All internal valve components shall be removable from the valve bonnet without removing the
valve body from the pressure main. Operating nut or hand wheel shall have an arrow cast in the metal
indicating the direction of opening. Each valve shall have the manufacturer's distinctive marking, pressure
rating and year of manufacture cast on the body. Prior to shipment from the factory, each valve shall be
tested by applying to it a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the specified working pressure. Hydrostatic
and leakage tests shall be conducted in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C500 or ANSI/AWWA C509,
latest revisions, whichever is applicable. Only gate valve sizes 4 -inch and larger shall be acceptable.
Large Gate Valves: Gate valves with nominal sizes from 4- to 12 -inches shall conform to ANSI/AWWA
C509, latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 250 psi differential pressure
with zero leakage. Gate valves with nominal sizes from 16- to 36 -inches shall conform to AWWA C515,
latest revision, and shall be designed for a working pressure of 250 psi differential pressure with zero
leakage. Valves shall be ductile iron body resilient wedge type with Nitrile rubber 0 -ring stem seals. Stems
shall be sealed with three (3) 0 -rings. The top two 0 -rings shall be replaceable with the valve fully open
and subject to the full rated working pressure. 0 -rings in a cartridge shall not be allowed.
All cast ferrous components of the gate valve including the valve body, wedge, bonnet and stuffing box
shall be constructed of ductile iron in conformance with ASTM A536. The valve stem shall be
manufactured of manganese bronze in accordance with ASTM B763 and the wedge nut shall be
manufactured of bronze in accordance with ASTM B584. The valve stem shall have an integral thrust collar;
two-piece stem collars shall not be acceptable. The valve shall have Delrin thrust washers above and below
the thrust collar to assist in the operation of the valve.
Valve wedge shall be symmetrical and constructed to assure uniform seating pressure between the wedge
seat circumference and body seating surface, providing a complete seal at the rated pressure with flow from
either direction. Resilient wedge of the valve shall be formed by a special corrosion and chloramine
SECTION IV
Page 92 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
resistant, EPDM synthetic elastomer which is permanently bonded to and completely encapsulates the
ductile iron valve disc. The wedge nut shall be independent of the wedge and held in place on three sides
by the wedge to prevent possible misalignment.
All bolting materials for buried gate valves shall be Type 304 stainless steel with hexagonal shaped heads
with dimensions conforming to ANSI B18.2.1; metric bolting materials shall not be allowed. Gate valves
shall be NSF 61 listed.
Resilient wedge type gate valves shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an
equal approved by the city.
Valve End Joints: All gate valves shall have either mechanical joints per ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 or
restrained joints as specified above for ductile iron or PVC pipe for underground service, or flanged ends,
Class 125 per ANSI B16.1, for above ground service or valves in vaults to fit the pipe run in which they
are to be used. Gate valves installed on push -on joint pipe shall have mechanical joint ends unless otherwise
specified.
Gate Valve Operators: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein, gate valves shall
have non -rising stems. Buried gate valves shall be furnished with a 2 -inch square AWWA standard nut
operator with a valve box and cover. All buried gate valves shall be installed in the vertical position only.
Buried gate valves 16 -inches and larger in nominal size installed vertically shall be provided with a spur
gear box, valve operator. The spur gear shall be an EXEECO 1S-5 to IS -10 spur gear, depending on the
valve size, with a gear ratio not more than 2:1. Gate valves located aboveground or inside structures shall
be furnished with a rising stem and a handwheel operator which shall have an arrow cast in the metal
indicating the direction of opening. Gate valves used as isolation valves for double check valve backflow
preventers for fire lines or reduced pressure back flow preventers shall be of the open screw and yoke
(OS&Y) design with rising stems and with a handwheel operator.
Gate valves larger than 16 -inches in nominal size shall be provided with a smaller gate valve bypass sized
by the gate valve manufacturer.
Interior Valve Lining: Interior of the valve body shall be lined with a fusion bonded or thermo-setting
epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550, latest revision. Lining shall be holiday -free, NSF 61
approved, with a minimum thickness of 16 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free from rust and grease
before lining.
Exterior Valve Coatings: All exterior surfaces of iron body gate valves shall be clean, dry, and free from
rust and grease before coating. For buried service, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be coated at
the factory with coal tar epoxy with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 20 mils. Prior to back
filling, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods, and other parts of joints shall be coated in the field with coal
tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. For valves installed above -ground, the exterior ferrous
parts of all valves shall be shop primed at the factory with one coat, minimum dry film thickness of 4 mils,
of a rust -inhibitive universal epoxy primer. Primer shall be suitable for finish paint specified. Following
installation, above -ground valves shall be finish painted in accordance with city Construction Standards.
Two Inch (2") diameter gate valves or smaller are not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.
Three Inch (3") diameter valves are not allowed.
502-4. VALVE BOXES
Furnish, assemble, and place a valve box over the operating nut for each buried valve. The valve box shall
be designed to prevent the transmission of surface loads directly to the valve or piping.
Valve boxes shall be of the adjustable screw-type of suitable length with an interior diameter of not less
than 5-1/4 inches. The valve boxes shall be manufactured of cast iron and shall be of the three-piece design
SECTION IV
Page 93 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
including a bottom section, middle section and top section with cover. The bottom section shall have a
flange at the bottom having sufficient bearing area to prevent settling. The cast iron cover shall be cast with
the applicable service; "WATER", markings for potable water mains, "RECLAIMED" marking for
reclaimed water mains or "SEWER", markings for wastewater force mains. The top section shall be
adjustable for elevation and shall be set to allow equal movement above and below finished grade.
The castings shall be manufactured of clean, even grain, gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class
30B for Gray Iron Castings; and shall be smooth, true to pattern, free from blow holes, sand holes,
projections, and other harmful defects. The seating surfaces of both the cover and the top section shall be
machined so that the cover will not rock after it has been seated.
The valve boxes shall be coated inside and outside with an asphaltic coating prior to machining, so that the
machined seating surfaces will be free of any coating. Valve extension stems shall be provided for all buried
valves when the valve operating nut is deeper than 3 feet below final grade.
Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Standard Detail
Index 402; Sheet 1 of 3 & Sheet 2 of 3 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Standard Detail Index
502; Sheet 1 of 3 & Sheet 2 of 3 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail.
502-5. HYDRANTS
Fire hydrants shall be dry barrel, break away type with 5 -1/4 -inch minimum main valve opening and shall
comply with AWWA C502, latest revision, for a 150 -psi working pressure and shall also be UL/FM listed.
All hydrants shall be hydrostatically tested at the factory in accordance with AWWA C502, latest revision.
Hydrants shall be the compression type, closing with line pressure. The main valve shall be solid
encapsulated EPDM rubber. The main valve stem shall be Type 304 or higher -grade stainless steel and
manufactured in two sections with a breakable coupling. The main hydrant valve shall open left
(counterclockwise). Hydrants shall be fully bronze mounted with all working parts of bronze. Valve seat
ring shall be threaded bronze and shall screw into a bronze retainer insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0 -rings
to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. All interior working parts of the hydrant, including the
seat ring, shall be removable through the top of the hydrant to allow repairs without disturbing the barrel of
the hydrant after it has been installed. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism
from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating
nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. The hydrant operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or
ductile iron construction and open counterclockwise. Operating nut shall be a No. 7, 1 -1/2 -inch, pentagonal
shaped nut. The operating threads shall be totally enclosed in an operating chamber, separated from the
hydrant barrel by a rubber 0 -ring stem seal and lubricated by a grease or an oil reservoir.
Fire hydrants shall be the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in at least two sections bolted
together, of ample length for 3-1/2 foot depth of bury with necessary extensions to place the safety break
flange located approximately 2 -inches above finished grade. Breakaway bolts shall not be approved. The
fire hydrant shall be provided with a 6 -inch mechanical joint epoxy lined elbow. The hydrant shall be
provided with two, 2 -1/2 -inch hose nozzles and one, 4 -1/2 -inch pumper nozzle, all having National
Standard hose threads. All nozzles shall have caps attached by stainless steel chains. Hose nozzle cap nuts
shall be 1 -1/2 -inch AWWA standard pentagonal shape. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 -turn
type with 0 -ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless-steel locking
device.
The hydrant shall be cast with no drain or weep holes or the drain or weep holes shall be permanently
plugged by the manufacturer. All bolts, nuts and studs for fire hydrants shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
Fire hydrant base, lower barrel and 6 -inch elbow shall be epoxy coated inside and outside. Upper barrel
shall have an interior epoxy coating with the exterior coated with an epoxy primer and a two-part
SECTION IV
Page 94 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
polyurethane top coating. Fire hydrant upper barrel exterior colors shall have National Standard Yellow,
UV resistant enamel, polyurethane, or fusion bonded epoxy.
Approved Fire Hydrants: Only those fire hydrants listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products
List, shall be used in extension to or replacement of the city's potable water system: Absolutely no
substitutions for fire hydrants shall be allowed without the approval of the city Engineering Department.
All shipments of fire hydrants to the project site shall be palletized, securely anchored to the pallet(s) and
delivered by delivery trucks with mechanical, motorized tailgates for receipt by the Contractor.
All hydrant assemblies shall be provided with an auxiliary 6 -inch resilient seated gate valve for isolation so
that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the
distribution system. Gate valves for fire hydrant installations shall be as specified above in Section 502-2.7.
Piping used from the water main tee to the fire hydrant shall be 6 -inch ductile iron pipe only. Ductile iron
pipe shall be in accordance with Section 502-2.1.
The fire hydrant assembly shall be provided with anchoring hydrant fittings including a locked hydrant tee
with split gland to provide the locking together of the entire assembly for joint restraint. Hydrants shall be
restrained by using bolted mechanical swivel -type connecting joints from the hydrant tee through to the
hydrant. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length
precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. Restrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement
of the hydrant. If used, mechanical restrained joints shall comply with Section 502-2.1.2 of these Technical
Specifications.
All fire hydrants shall be provided with a fiber mesh reinforced concrete shear pad with dimensions as
shown in the Drawings.
Fire hydrants shall be located in the general location as shown on the Drawings. Final field location of all
hydrants shall be as required by the city. All hydrants shall be located no less than 6 -feet and no more than
10 -feet from the curb or edge of pavement of the adjacent roadway.
Fire hydrants shall be located in a manner to provide complete accessibility and separated from any and all
obstructions such as utility poles, posts, walls, etc., by a distance of at least five feet, measured from the
centerline of the fire hydrant to the nearest physical feature, which may obstruct access or view of any fire
hydrant, unless otherwise required by the Owner. All fire hydrants located within FDOT rights-of-way shall
conform to FDOT clear zone requirements.
In order to minimize any inconvenience to property owners, new fire hydrants shall be installed at or near
side property lines. Fire hydrants shall be installed such that the 4 -1/2 -inch pumper nozzle faces the street
or driveway, unless otherwise directed by the Fire Department or the Owner's representative.
No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the city Engineering
Department.
502-6. SERVICE SADDLES/ POLYETHYLENE SERVICE LINES
Service Saddles: Service saddles shall have ductile iron bodies in accordance with ASTM A536, latest
revision, with double stainless-steel straps. Ductile iron body shall have a fusion bonded nylon coating with
a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Straps shall be Type 304 stainless steel with premium grade Type 304 L
stainless steel bolts and Type 304 stainless steel washers and nuts. The nuts shall be Teflon coated. The
gasket material shall be an EPDM elastomeric compound resistant to degradation by oil, natural gas, acids,
alkalis, most aliphatic fluids, and chloramines. The outlet of the saddle shall have female NPT threads.
Approved service saddles shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an equal
approved by the city.
SECTION IV
Page 95 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps on water main pipelines 4 -inch in size and larger. The
largest service connection allowable for a 4 -inch main shall be a 1 -1/2 -inch tapped connection. Service
saddles shall be used on all 2 -inch service connections on water main pipelines 6 -inch and larger. Taps
larger than 2 -inch in size shall require using a tapping sleeve as specified below in Section 502-12.
Corporation Stops: Corporation stops shall be all bronze bodies with an all bronze ball and Teflon seats,
in accordance with AWWA C800. Inlet and outlet threads shall have NPT threads. Corporation stops shall
be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city.
Polyethylene Service Lines: All polyethylene service lines require stiffeners must be approved by the city
and manufactured by Mars Company, Ocala, FL 34483.3" service lines are not allowed. Refer to reclaimed
water Standard Detail Index 501 Sheet 2 of 2.
502-7. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
The city owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system.
Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the city and installed by city work forces.
Backflow prevention devices that are installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service
connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA C511, latest edition for Reduced Pressure
Principle Backflow Prevention Devices or AWWA C506, latest edition for Double Check Valve Assembly
Backflow Prevention Devices.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. The type of device, and when required,
shall be determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow
of water within the customer's private system, as determined by the city Utility Engineering Department.
The two types of backflow prevention devices allowed are:
1. Double Check Valve Assembly Backflow Prevention Device: a device composed of two (2)
single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves
located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the water tightness of each
check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device: a device containing a minimum of two
(2) independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure
differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing
shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located
test cocks.
a. Reduced -pressure principle back flow preventers shall include an integral sensing system
that will automatically open a relief valve whenever the differential pressure between the
inlet supply and the reduced pressure zone drops to 2 psi. The relief valve shall remain
open until a positive pressure differential of 2 psi is re-established. If pressure upstream of
the first check valve drops to atmospheric or below, the relief valve shall remain fully open
providing an internal air gap between the first check valve and the water level in the
reduced pressure zone. The unit shall also be constructed such that any minor leakage of
the second check valve will result in visible flow from the relief valve, even if the first
check valve is totally disabled.
502-8. TAPPING SLEEVES AND LINESTOPS
Tapping valves and tapping sleeves shall be installed where shown on the drawings to make "wet" taps into
existing potable water, reclaimed water mains or wastewater force mains. Tapping valves shall only be
installed in the vertical position.
SECTION IV
Page 96 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
Tapping Sleeves for Taps 4 -inch to 12 -inch in Size: Fabricated all stainless steel body tapping sleeves to
tap pipelines 4 -inch through 30 -inch in size with outlet tap sizes ranging from 4 -inches through 12 -inches,
shall have heavy welded ASTM A240, Type 304 stainless steel body; Type 304 stainless steel bolts, Grade
8 per ASTM A194, epoxy coated; Type 304 stainless steel nuts, Grade 8 per ASTM A194, fluoropolymer
coated; and a 3/4 -inch Type 304 stainless steel test plug. The tapping sleeve, unless otherwise specified
shall have a 18-8 Type 304 stainless steel outlet flange which meets the requirements of ANSI/AWWA
C228 Class SD, ANSI 150 LB drilling recessed for tapping valve per MSS-SP60. The tapping sleeve gasket
shall be EPDM rubber. Stainless steel body tapping sleeves shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater
Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city.
Mechanical Tapping Sleeves for Taps Larger Than 12 -inch in Size: Mechanical joint split tapping
sleeves shall be ductile iron capable of withstanding a 250 -psi working pressure or the pipe rated working
pressure, whichever is greater. The tapping flange for the sleeve shall have a groove that shall mate to the
raised lip on the tapping valve flange. Gaskets shall be vulcanized EPDM resilient rubber material. All
tapping connections for "size on size" taps shall utilize mechanical joint tapping sleeves only. The tapping
sleeve shall be provided by the same manufacturer as the tapping valve. Bolts and nuts for the tapping
sleeve split flange connection shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8M
for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8M for nuts. The nuts shall be fluoropolymer coated and have a hardness
that is lower than that of the bolts and washers by a difference of 50 Brinnell hardness to prevent galling
during installation. All interior and exterior surfaces of the mechanical joint split tapping sleeves shall be
clean, dry, and free from rust and grease before coating. The interior and exterior surfaces of all mechanical
joint split tapping sleeves shall be coated at the factory with fusion bonded or thermo-setting epoxy coating
with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 16 mils.
Tapping Valves: Tapping valves are special gate valves designed to mate to the flange of a mechanical
tapping sleeve with a mechanical joint outlet connection. The tapping flange of the valve shall have a raised
hp that will mate with the grooved flange of the tapping sleeve flange. The tapping valve shall have an
oversized diameter waterway to allow passage of the tapping machine cutter assembly, without sustaining
damage to the valve. Each tapping valve shall have the manufacturer's distinctive marking, pressure rating,
the words" Ductile Iron" or "DI", and year of manufacture cast on the body. Prior to shipment from the
factory, each valve shall be tested by applying to it a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the specified
working pressure. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be conducted in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C509, latest revision. Resilient -seated type tapping valves shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater
Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city.
A. Tapping valves with nominal sizes from 4- to 12 -inches shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C509,
latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 250 psi. Tapping valves
with nominal sizes from 16 inches and larger shall conform to AWWA C515, latest revision, and
shall be designed for a working pressure of 250 psi. Valves shall be ductile iron body, resilient
wedge type with Nitrile rubber 0 -ring stem seals. Stems shall be sealed with three (3) 0 -rings. The
top two 0 -rings shall be replaceable with the valve fully open and subject to the full rated working
pressure. O -rings in a cartridge shall not be allowed. All cast ferrous components of the tapping
valve including the valve body, wedge, bonnet and stuffing box shall be constructed of ductile iron
in conformance with ASTM A536. The valve stem shall be manufactured of manganese bronze in
accordance with ASTM B763 and the wedge nut shall be manufactured of bronze in accordance
with ASTM B584. The valve stem shall have an integral thrust collar; two-piece stem collars shall
not be acceptable. The valve shall have Delrin thrust washers above and below the thrust collar to
assist in the operation of the valve. Valve wedge shall be symmetrical and constructed to assure
uniform seating pressure between the wedge seat circumference and body seating surface,
providing a complete seal at the rated pressure with flow from either direction. Resilient wedge of
the valve shall be formed by a special corrosion and chloramine resistant, EPDM synthetic
elastomer which is permanently bonded to and completely encapsulates the ductile iron valve disc.
SECTION IV
Page 97 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
The wedge nut shall be independent of the wedge and held in place on three sides by the wedge to
prevent possible misalignment. All bolting materials for buried tapping valves shall be Type 316
stainless steel, as specified below, with hexagonal shaped heads with dimensions conforming to
ANSI B18.2.1; metric bolting materials shall not be allowed. Tapping valves shall be NSF 61 listed.
B. Tapping Valve Ends: All tapping valves shall have a special flange with a raised lip to mate with
the groove in the tapping sleeve flange and a mechanical joint end on the discharge side of the
valve.
C. Tapping Valve Connection Bolting: Bolts and nuts for the tapping valve flange connection shall
be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8M for bolts and ASTM A194,
Grade 8M for nuts. The nuts shall be fluoropolymer coated and have a hardness that is lower than
that of the bolts and washers by a difference of 50 Brinnell hardness to prevent galling during
installation. Jointing materials for the mechanical joint valve end and the mechanical joint tapping
sleeve ends shall be in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111 and ANSI/AWWA C153, latest
revisions. Tee head bolts and nuts for the mechanical joint ends shall be manufactured of CORTEN,
high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel in accordance with ASTM A242, or an equal
approved by the Engineer and the Owner.
D. Tapping Valve Operators: Tapping gate valves shall have non -rising stems and shall open by
turning to the left (counterclockwise), when viewed from the stem. Tapping valves shall be
furnished with a ductile iron 2 -inch square AWWA standard nut operator with an arrow cast into
the metal indicating the direction of opening. Tapping valves 16 -inches and larger in nominal size
shall be provided with a spur gear box, valve operator. The spur gear shall be an EXEECO IS -5 to
IS -10 spur gear, depending on valve size, with a gear ratio not more than 2:1.
E. Interior Tapping Valve Linings: The interior of the tapping valve body shall be lined with a
fusion bonded or thermo-setting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550, latest revision.
Lining shall be holiday -free, NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 16 mils. Surfaces shall
be clean, dry, and free from rust and grease before lining.
F. Exterior Tapping Valve Coatings: All exterior surfaces of tapping valves shall be clean, dry, and
free from rust and grease before coating. The exterior ferrous parts of all tapping valves shall be
coated at the factory with fusion bonded or thermo-setting epoxy coating with a minimum total
finish dry film thickness of 16 mils. Prior to back filling, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods, and
other parts of joints shall be coated in the field with two coats of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline
Bitumastic No. 300-M.
502-9. LINE STOPPING ASSEMBLIES
Specialty line stop fittings shall be used for applications where it is necessary to isolate a section of pipe
without interrupting service. The Contractor shall provide a submittal which clearly identifies the materials
used for line stop applications.
Sleeves used to line -stop existing mains shall be provided and installed at locations as shown on the
Drawings or as required for construction of the new force main tie-in to an existing force main. Line -
stopping sleeve shall be steel fusion epoxy coated body with stainless steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
Contractor shall determine the outside diameter of the existing main prior to ordering sleeve. The back
(bottom) section shall be solid and designed within an outside diameter range specific to the pipe it is being
installed on. The front (top) section will also be full encirclement design with a welded installed nozzle and
flange outlet.
Line stop fitting sleeves shall be the high strength type having a wide body, made of a minimum material
strength of A-283 grade steel, ASTM A-36 Steel or equal, which conforms to and reinforces the pipe. The
sleeve shall have as a minimum 7/8 -inch wide gasket of Nitrile Butadiene Rubber (NBR, Buna-N) per
ASTM D2000 with hydro activated lip, captured in a recessed groove around the outlet. Bolts, nuts and
washers shall be 3/4 -inch stainless steel 18-8 type 304. A 3/4 -inch forged steel test outlet will be placed
SECTION IV Page 98 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
into the nozzle branch outlet, at the factory, for the purposes of site pressure testing after the fitting has
been installed around the pipe.
Tapping sleeves and line stops shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
for the specified model. The fitting may not be retrofitted in any way after being installed on the pipe. The
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the fitting is properly restrained.
The line -stopping equipment shall consist of a resilient sealing element, which shall be attached to and
transported by a plug inserted perpendicularly into the pipe. The linear actuator shall extend and retract the
Line -Stopper into and out of the pipe. When retracted from the pipe, the element and inserter shall be
contained within the stopper housing.
The hollow cylindrical sealing element shall be molded of natural rubber. The lower interior chamber of
the element shall be enlarged into a hemispherical cavity to allow symmetrical deformation into sealing
conformity with the bore of the pipe. The linear actuator shall be hydraulic and shall have a self-contained
hand operated pump. The actuator shall exert a force sufficient to perpendicularly deform the cylindrical
element into axially symmetrical sealing contact with the bore of the pipe. Design of actuator shall provide
adequate stroke and means to continually align the line -stop bullet stopping assemblies in sizes 4 -inch thru
20 -inch with pressure rating to 250 psig.
Equalization of pressure across the sealed element shall not be required to retract the element from the pipe.
No equalization fittings shall be required downstream of the line -stopper.
Line -stopping equipment must be capable of function and acceptance of multiple stopper heads and shall
be compatible with existing system fittings.
502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
IIIHydrant Blow offs are not allowed.
•
503. CONSTRUCTION
503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING
1. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent damage to the pipe or fittings
and their respective coatings. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and accessories shall be loaded and
unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances
shall such materials be rolled off the carrier or dropped. Unloading shall be done by lifting with a
forklift or crane using straps and a spreader bar. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or
rolled against pipe already on the ground.
2. Pipe shall be stored on level ground, preferably turf or sand, free of sharp objects which could
damage the pipe. Stacking of the pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause excessive
deformation of the bottom layers of pipes. Pipe shall be stacked no higher than 6 -feet high on the
project site for safety reasons. Where necessary, due to ground conditions, the pipe shall be stored
on wooden sleepers, suitably spaced and of such width as not to allow deformation of the pipe at
the point of contact with the sleeper or between supports.
3. The interior surfaces of valves and piping shall be kept free of dirt and debris.
4. Pipe and fittings which require the protection from UV, such as PVC or HDPE pipe, shall be
covered and protected in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
5. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of
the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at their expense in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
SECTION IV
Page 99 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
6. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the
place where it is to be laid in the trench.
7. All materials shall be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no
broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged, unsatisfactory or defective
material shall be used.
8. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be
rejected and promptly removed from the site.
9. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the
damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe
corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
503-2. PIPE LAYING
503-2.1. INSPECTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
All pipe, fittings, valves, and other material shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer and
the City after delivery and prior to installation. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or
accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer
shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. No broken, cracked, imperfectly coated,
or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be installed. When a defect or crack is discovered,
the injured or defective piece shall not be installed and shall be removed from the project site. All homing
marks shall be checked for proper length to not allow a separation or over homing of connected pipe.
Homing marks incorrectly marked on pipe shall result in rejection of pipe and removal from the site at the
Contractor's expense.
503-2.2. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
General: Excavation, backfill, and compaction shall conform to the provisions of Section 201-2. —
Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities. Upon satisfactory installation of the pipe bedding
material as specified in Section 201-2. — Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities, a continuous
trough for the pipe barrel and recesses for the pipe bells or couplings shall be excavated by hand digging.
When the pipe is laid in the prepared trench, true to line and grade, the pipe barrel shall receive continuous,
uniform support and no pressure will be exerted on the pipe joints from the trench bottom.
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the
Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants
shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools
or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under
no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench.
Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be installed as shown or indicated on the Drawings. All joint
lubricant compounds shall be NSF approved.
Water in Excavations: Water shall not be allowed in the trenches while underground pipes are being laid
and/or tested. All pipe shall be laid "in the dry". Installation of potable water pipes, reclaimed water pipes
or wastewater force main pipes shall not proceed in the trench until the trench has been properly dewatered
and prepared. Refer to Section 203, Dewatering for dewatering requirements for the installation of
pipelines. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. Water
shall not be allowed in the trenches while the pipes are being laid and/or tested. The Contractor shall not
open more trench than the available pumping facilities are able to dewater the trench to the satisfaction of
the Engineer or the city's Inspector. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for legally disposing of all
water so as not to injure or interfere with the normal drainage of the area in which he is working. In no case
SECTION IV
Page 100 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
shall the pipelines being installed be used as drains for such water, and the ends of the pipe shall be kept
properly and adequately plugged during construction by the use of approved stoppers and not by improvised
equipment. All necessary precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent the entrance of mud, sand,
or other obstructing matter into the pipelines. If on completion of the work any such materials have entered
the pipelines, it must be cleaned as directed by the Engineer and the city's Inspector so that the entire system
will be left clean and unobstructed. The Contractor shall not leave trenches open overnight.
Pipe Bedding: The Contractor shall provide pipe bedding material in accordance with the Standard Details
on the Drawings and Section 201-2. —Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities. The Contractor
shall hand -grade bedding to proper grade ahead of pipe laying operation. Bedding shall provide a firm,
unyielding support along the entire pipe length. If the trench has been excavated below the required depth
for pipe bedding material placement, the Contractor shall fill the excess depth with pipe bedding material
to the proper grade. The Contractor shall excavate bell holes at each joint to permit proper assembly and
inspection of the entire joint.
Pipe Cradle: Upon satisfactory installation of the pipe trench as specified in Section 201-2. — Excavation,
Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities and the pipe bedding, a continuous trough for the pipe barrel and
recesses for the pipe bells or couplings shall be excavated by hand digging so that when the pipe is laid in
the prepared trench, true to line and grade, the pipe barrel shall receive continuous, uniform support and no
pressure will be exerted on the pipe joints or pipe bell from the trench bottom.
Cleanliness: Mud, silt, gravel, and other foreign material shall be kept out of the pipe and off the jointing
surface. The interior of the pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material before being gently
lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during laying operations by means of plugs or other methods
accepted by the Engineer and the city. During suspension of work for any reason at any time, a suitable
watertight plug shall be placed in the end of the pipe last laid to prevent mud or other foreign material from
entering the pipe.
Connections to Existing Utilities: All connections to existing piping systems shall be made as shown or
indicated on the Drawings after consultation and cooperation with the city Utility Department. Some such
connections may have to be made during off-peak hours (late night or early morning).
Pipe Joint Deflection: Whenever it is desirable to deflect pipe joints to avoid obstructions or to maintain
required alignment, the amount of the joint deflection shall not exceed 50 percent of the maximum limits
allowed by the pipe manufacturer for ductile iron pipe. No bending or joint deflection of PVC pipe shall be
permitted at any time. Changes in horizontal and vertical alignment of PVC pipe shall be achieved by use
of fittings only.
Pipe Installation: In preparation for pipe installation, placement (stringing) of pipe should be as close to
the trench as practical on the opposite side of the trench from the excavated material.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the
trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care
as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling.
Pipe laying shall proceed with the bell ends of the pipe pointing in the direction of the work progress unless
directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on a grade of 10 percent or greater, the laying shall
start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe pointing upgrade. Before pipe is
joined, gaskets shall be cleaned of all dirt and stones and other foreign material. The spigot ends of the pipe
and/or pipe gaskets shall be lubricated lightly with an NSF approved lubricant as specified by the pipe
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer and the city. No sulfur based joint compound shall be used.
Sufficient pressure shall be applied to the pipe to properly seat the spigot end into the bell of the previously
laid pipe. Any damage to the pipe due to over-exertion shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense All
damaged pipe shall be removed for the Project site.
SECTION IV
Page 101 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Pipe and fittings shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades indicated on Drawings or required. The
depth of cover over the pipeline shall vary to provide uniform gradient or slope to the pipe, whether grading
is completed or proposed at time of pipe installation. Where grades for the pipeline are not indicated on the
Drawings, maintain a uniform depth of cover with respect to finish grade.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced
home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill
material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the
joint space.
All pipe laid shall be retained in position to maintain alignment and joint closure until sufficient backfill
has been completed to adequately hold the pipe in place. Care shall be taken to ensure a good alignment
both horizontally and vertically and to give the pipe a firm bearing along its entire length. Any pipe which
has its grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relayed.
All pipe and fittings shall be cleared of sand, dirt, and debris before laying. All precautions shall be taken
to prevent sand, dirt, or other foreign material from entering the pipe during installation. If necessary, a
heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end of the pipe before lowering
into the trench and left there until the connection is made to the adjacent pipe. Any sand, dirt, or other
foreign material that enters the pipe shall be removed from the pipe immediately. During pipe laying
operations, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed into the pipe interior. Interior of all
pipe and fittings shall be kept clean after installation until accepted in the complete Work.
Any time that pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug
or other method approved by the Engineer and the city Inspector. Plugs shall remain in pipe ends until all
water is removed from the trench. No pipe shall be installed when trench conditions are unsuitable for such
work, including standing water, excess mud, or rain.
Thrust Restraint:
A. General: Thrust restraint shall be accomplished by piping restrained joints or mechanical
restraining devices.
B. Required Length of Restrained Joints: The length of restrained joints required shall be in
accordance with the lengths shown on the Plan and Profile Drawings. The restrained joint lengths
listed in the Restrained Joint Pipe Tables in the Drawings are absolute minimum lengths required
and may not reflect the actual length of restrained joints required for a particular fitting arrangement
or situation.
C. Concrete Trust Blocks: Concrete thrust blocks shall not under any circumstances be allowed on the
Project for thrust restraint at fittings.
D. Concrete Trust Collars: Concrete thrust collars shall be used under extraordinary circumstances
when approved by the Engineer and the city. If thrust collars are used, they shall conform to the
details shown on the Drawings and shall be constructed of Class I concrete, which shall have a
minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days. No pipeline work shall be accomplished
adjacent to a thrust collar until the concrete has reached its full compressive strength and can handle
the required thrust restraint.
Initial Backfill:
A. After pipe has been laid, inspected, and found satisfactory, sufficient backfill shall be placed along
the pipe barrel to hold the pipe securely in place while conducting the preliminary hydrostatic test.
No backfill shall be placed over the joints until the preliminary test is satisfactorily completed,
leaving them exposed to view for the detection of visible leaks.
B. Upon satisfactory completion of the preliminary hydrostatic test, backfilling and compaction of the
trench shall be completed.
SECTION IV
Page 102 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
Location Detection Wire: Refer to the city Standard Detail Drawings for wire location and installation
notes. Location Detection Wires shall be installed for all potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and
wastewater force mains. For open cut installation the two (2) detection wires shall be attached generally at
the three o'clock and nine o'clock positions on the pipe with nylon pipe straps or tape located at 5 -foot
intervals for each 20 -foot length of pipe. The wire shall be installed through valve boxes, valve vaults, air
release valve enclosures, etc., and provide sufficient excess (12 -inches minimum) such that a loop in the
wire can be raised above ground level. An energy source shall be attached to each of the wires to energize
each wire to facilitate location of the wire and pipe using a metal detector. Prior to acceptance, the
Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer and the city Inspector that each of the wires is continuous and
unbroken through the complete run of the pipe by performing a continuity test of the 10 gauge location
detection wires for the entire length of the potable water main, the reclaimed water main or the wastewater
force main at each valve test station box. The test shall also include energizing each of the wires and locating
the entire run of pipe with the Engineer and the city Inspector present.
Underground Identification Tape: Install a continuous underground utility identification tape for all
underground potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and wastewater force mains installed by open -
cut methods. The identification tape shall be installed over the centerline of the pipe at a depth of 12 -inches
below finished grade.
Aboveground and Exposed Piping: Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the job
site and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all equipment access
areas and openings. Changes in sizes shall be made with appropriate reducing fittings. Pipe connections
shall be made in accordance with the details shown and manufacturer's recommendations. Open ends of
pipelines shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt and other foreign material out
of the system. Pipe supports and hangers shall be provided where indicated or as required to ensure adequate
support of the piping. All above ground piping shall be painted with the appropriate color.
503-2.3. INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Handling and Cutting Pipe:
A. Care shall be taken in handling, cutting, and laying ductile iron pipe and fittings to avoid damaging
the pipe and interior cement mortar lining, scratching, or marring machined surfaces, and abrasion
of the exterior pipe coating. All cracked pipe and fittings shall be removed at once from the Work.
B. Pipe cutting shall be done by skilled workmen in a neat workmanlike manner without creating
damage to the pipe and interior lining and to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the
pipe. Cut ends shall be square and rough edges of ductile iron pipe shall be ground smooth. For
push -on joint connections, the cut end shall be beveled to prevent gasket damage during joint
assembly. Interior lining and exterior coatings of the pipe shall be repaired at cut ends per the
manufacturer's instructions prior to joint assembly.
Laying Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings:
A. Bedding for Ductile Iron Pipe: Minimum bedding requirements shall be Type 3 as defined in
ANSI/AWWA C600, latest revision. Provide proper bedding required, in accordance with
thickness class of pipe being laid, restrained joints required and depth of cover. At a minimum the
pipe shall be bedded in compacted 4 -inch thick select fill and backfilled and compacted to the top
of the pipe to a minimum of 95% Modified Proctor. Proper pipe laying conditions shall be in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C150 and C151, latest revisions, and ANSI/AWWA C600, latest
revision.
B. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be laid in accordance with American Water Works
Association Standard ANSI/AWWA C600, latest revision, entitled "Standard for Installation of
Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances ", with the following sections specifically
applying:
SECTION IV
Page 103 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
1. Section 3.3 - Pipe Installation.
2. Section 3.4 - Joint Assembly.
C. Polyethylene tube encasement shall be installed for all buried ductile iron pipe segments and fittings
for corrosion protection. Installation procedures shall be in accordance with AWWA C105/ANSI
A21.5-10, latest revision, entitled Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe Systems, Section
4.4 - Installation.
Ductile Iron Pipe Joints:
A. General: The joints of all pipelines shall be made leak tight. The particular joint used shall be
approved by the Engineer and the city Inspector prior to installation. Where shown on the Drawings
or where, in the opinion of the Engineer or the city Inspector, settlement or vibration is likely to
occur, all pipe joints shall be bolted mechanical joint type with mechanical restraints, push -on joints
with mechanical restraints or manufactured restrained joint type as specified above, or as indicated
on the Drawings.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the
outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from
oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Mechanical Restrained Joints: All types of mechanical joint and push -on joint pipes with
mechanical restraints shall be laid and jointed in full conformance with manufacturer's
recommendations, which shall be submitted to the Engineer and the city Inspector for review and
approval before work is begun. Only specially trained and skilled workmen shall be permitted to
makeup mechanical restrained joints. Torque wrenches, set as specified in AWWA Standard C111,
shall be used; or spanner type wrenches not longer than specified therein may be used with the
permission of the Engineer and the city Inspector. The gasket shall be inserted, and the joint
surfaces cleaned and lubricated with soapy water before tightening the bolts to the specified torque.
C. Manufactured Restrained Joints: Manufactured restrained joints shall be provided where indicated
on the Drawings. Joint assembly shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions, which shall be submitted to the Engineer or the city Inspector for review and approval
before commencing work.
D. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made up by inserting the gasket between the flanges. The
threads of the bolts and the faces of the gaskets shall be coated with suitable lubricant immediately
before installation. Joints shall be fitted so that the contact faces bear uniformly on the gasket.
1. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe. Clean
flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged fittings. Clean flange bolts and nuts by
wire brushing and lubricate bolts with oil and graphite.
2. Insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and progressively tighten diametrically
opposite bolts uniformly around the flange to the proper tension.
3. Execute care when tightening joints to prevent undue strain upon valves, pumps, backflow
preventers and other equipment.
If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen, or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or replace the gasket, re-
install or re -tighten the bolts and nuts, and re -test the joints. Joints shall be watertight; no leaks shall be
allowed.
503-2.4. INSTALLATION OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Storage and Handling of PVC Pipe: PVC pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles packaged
in such manner as to provide protection against damage. When possible, pipe should be stored at the job
site in the unit packages until ready for use. Packaged units shall be handled using a forklift or a spreader
bar with fabric straps. Packaged units shall not be stacked at the job site higher than two units high.
SECTION IV
Page 104 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
When it is necessary to store PVC pipe for long periods of time, exposure to direct sunlight shall be
prevented by covering the pipe with an opaque material. Adequate air circulation above and around the
pipe shall be provided as required to prevent excessive heat accumulation. PVC pipe shall not be stored
close to heat sources of hot objects such as heaters, fires, boilers, or engine exhaust. Pipe gaskets shall be
protected from excessive exposure to heat, direct sunlight, ozone, oil, and grease. The interior and all sealing
surfaces of pipe, fittings, and other appurtenances shall be kept clean and free of dirt and foreign matter.
Care shall be taken in handling and laying pipe and fittings to avoid severe impact blows, crushing, abrasion
damage, gouging, or cutting. Pipe shall be lowered, not dropped, from trucks or into trenches. All cracked,
damaged, or defective pipe and fittings, or any length of PVC pipe having a gouge, scratch, or other
permanent indentation of more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth, shall be rejected and removed
at once from the Work and replaced with new acceptable pipe.
Field Cutting PVC Pipe: Field cutting of pipe shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner without creating
damage to the pipe. The pipe shall be cut square with a fine-toothed hand or power saw or other cutter or
knife designed for use with plastic pipe. Prior to cutting, the pipe shall be marked around its entire
circumference or a square -in vise shall be used to ensure the pipe end is cut square. Remove burrs by
smoothing edges with a knife, file, or sandpaper.
Field Cutting Bell and Spigot PVC Pipe: Bevel the cut end of the pipe using a pipe beveling tool, wood
rasp, or portable sander to prevent damage to the gasket during joint assembly. A factory -finished beveled
end should be used as a guide to ensure proper beveling angle and correct depth of bevel. Round off any
sharp edges on the leading edge of the bevel with a knife or file. The Contractor shall provide a seat homing
mark on the field cut pipe in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
Laying PVC Bell and Spigot Pipe:
A. Pipe Bedding: Bedding for PVC pipe shall be as specified in Section 201-2. — Excavation,
Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities using granular pipe bedding material.
B. All PVC pipe shall be laid in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's published installation guide,
the AWWA Manual of Practice No. M23 "PVC Pipe - Design and Installation" and the Uni-Bell
Plastic Pipe Association installation recommendations.
PVC Pipe Joint Assembly for Rubber Gasketed Bell and Spigot Pipe:
A. The PVC bell and spigot joint shall be assembled in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
installation instructions, ASTM D2774, and AWWA Manual M23. Clean the interior of the bell,
the gasket, and the spigot of the pipe to be jointed with a rag to remove any dirt or foreign material
before assembling. Inspect the gasket, pipe spigot bevel, gasket groove, and sealing surfaces for
damage or deformation.
B. Lubricate the spigot end of the pipe with an NSF approved lubricant supplied or specified by the
pipe manufacturer for use with gasketed PVC pipe in potable water systems. The lubricant should
be supplied as specified by the pipe manufacturer and shall be NSF approved. After the spigot end
is lubricated, it must be kept clean and free of dirt and sand. If dirt and sand adhere to the lubricated
end, the spigot must be wiped clean and re -lubricated.
C. Insert the spigot into the bell so that it contacts the gasket uniformly. Align the pipe sections and
push the spigot end into the bell until the manufacturer's reference mark on the spigot is flush with
the end of the bell. The pipe should be pushed into the bell using a bar and wood block. The joint
shall not be assembled by "stabbing" or swinging the pipe into the bell, nor shall construction
machinery be used to push the pipe into the bell. After joining the pipe, a metal feeler gauge shall
be used to verify that the joint gasket is properly located.
D. If undue resistance to insertion of the spigot end is encountered or if the reference mark does not
reach the flush position, disassemble the joint and check the position of the gasket. If the gasket is
twisted or pushed out of its seat, inspect the components, repair, or replace damaged items, clean
SECTION IV
Page 105 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
the components, and repeat the assembly steps. Be sure the pipe is in proper alignment during
assembly. If the gasket was not out of position, check the distance between the spigot end and the
reference mark and relocate the mark if it is out of position.
E. Restrained joints for PVC pipe shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Joint assembly
shall be made in strict accordance with the joint restraint manufacturer's instructions, which shall
be submitted to the Engineer and the city for review and approval before commencing work.
503-2.5. DIRECTIONAL BORING INSTALLATION
The work of this Section includes all labor, machinery, construction equipment and appliances required for
installation of high-density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe or Certa-Loc PVC pipe below the ground using
directionally controlled horizontal drilling equipment and methods. All directional boring methods and
equipment shall be approved by the Engineer and the city before any work shall be permitted. All directional
boring and pipe installation methods shall be performed in a good workmanlike and safe manner.
Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) is a construction method consisting of drilling a small diameter pilot
hole within the designed tolerances for radius requirements, followed by enlargement of the hole by back
reaming to accommodate the utility pipeline.
503-2.5.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The overall work scope shall include, but not be limited to steerable directional boring equipment, boring
pits and equipment, sheeting, location signs as required, maintenance of traffic and miscellaneous
appurtenances to complete the entire Work as shown on the Contract Drawings, and restoration. Directional
boring operations shall be performed within the right-of-way and/or easements shown on the Drawings.
The HDD Contractor shall assume full responsibility for his methods of construction, the stability and
accuracy of the drilled and reamed hole and pits constructed by him, and all costs for damages resulting
from any failure thereof and be solely responsible for the safety of the pits and related structures, and
personnel engaged in underground construction throughout the duration of the work.
The general dimensions, arrangement and details for the drilled pilot hole and entry and exit pits to be
constructed shall be as indicated on the approved Shop Drawings.
Methods of excavation, equipment and procedures for the HDD operation and pits shall be selected to
provide adequate working space and clearances for the work to be performed.
Utility Protection: Utility lines and structures indicated on the Drawings, which are to remain in service,
shall be protected from any damage. Where utility lines or structures not shown on the Drawings are
encountered, Contractor shall report them to the city and the Engineer before proceeding with the Work.
All utilities within 10 feet of the drill pilot bore, back ream or utility carrier pipe installation will be exposed
through a soft -dig "pot -hole" or other opening, in accordance with appropriate utility locate laws and
regulations, to ensure, through visual inspection, that the drill, reamer or utility carrier pipe has caused no
damage to the utility and maintains adequate clearance. All potholes to locate existing utilities shall be
sealed with an excavatable grout to avoid a possible flow path for the HDD drilling mud.
Prior to commencing drilling operations, positively locate and stake all existing utility pipelines, cables,
storm sewers, or other underground facilities which are located within 10 feet of the designed drilled path.
All work covered by these Technical Specifications shall be performed in accordance with the applicable
local, state and federal codes and laws which pertain to such work and supplemental regulations which are
contained in these Technical Specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 106 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
At all times when construction is not in progress, watertight plugs shall be installed in all pipe ends and
openings, either following aboveground pipe fusing and storage before pipe pulling or following
underground installation after pipe pull back.
503-2.5.2. SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed schedule for the work and submit it to the Engineer and the city for
approval. The schedule shall include all major tasks to be performed, including but not limited to the
following: pipe delivery; rig mobilization and setup; pipe assembly; pilot hole drilling; reaming; pressure
testing the pipe before installation; pipe pulling; pressure testing and pigging/flushing the pipe after
installation; disinfection of potable water pipelines; anticipated work hours for each task, daily work hours
and dates anticipated for each task.
At least 10 days prior to mobilization of equipment, the Contractor shall submit a detailed installation plan
to the city and the Engineer for review and approval. The plan shall also include a detailed Plan and Profile
of the bore plotted at a scale no smaller than 1 -inch equals 20 feet horizontally and 1 -inch equals 4 feet
vertically. The Contractor shall include a site plan of the entrance and exit pits, the pipe lay down area and
equipment staging. Traffic control plans for entry pit, exit pit, and pipe lay down area if different than what
is indicated on the Roadway Traffic Control Plan Drawings.
Submit pipe, fittings, specials, joint restraint systems, adapters and couplings shop drawings including
complete dimensions including length, internal diameter, pressure rating and wall thickness; maximum
allowable deflection of the pipe; detailing; mechanical connections; and necessary accessories for
manufacture, transportation, storage, handling, and installation.
Submit pipe assembly procedures including:
1. Descriptions of procedures means and methods for storing, fabricating, handling, transporting, and
protecting pipe segments.
2. Calculations of stresses and longitudinal strains developed in pipe during handling and installation.
3. Description of controls to safeguard that the allowable pulling forces will not be exceeded during
the installation.
4. Description of procedures for lifting pipe.
5. Calculations showing allowable lifting configurations so allowable stresses will not be exceeded.
6. Welding procedures for high density polyethylene pipe.
Submit a description of procedures, methods and materials that will be used to repair pipe or pipe joints
damaged during installation.
Submit a description of methods and materials that will be used to correct leaks in pipe or pipe joints.
Equipment Submittal: Contractor shall submit manufacturer and specifications of directional drilling
equipment to be used to ensure that the equipment will be adequate to complete the project. Submittal shall
demonstrate that anticipated pullback forces do not exceed the tensile strength of the HDPE pipe with a
minimum factor of safety of 2.0. Include calculations prepared by a Professional Engineer licensed in the
State of Florida demonstrating maximum allowable pullback forces for this installation / material
combination.
Drilling Plan Submittal: Contractor shall submit a Drilling Plan including: Drilling Operations, Reaming
Operations, Estimated Pullback Loads, Drilling Fluids Management, Safety Plan, and a Contingency Plan.
A. Drilling Operations submittal shall include:
1. The number and size of construction crew, hours to be worked, pilot hole drilling
procedure, reaming procedure, method of tracking and controlling the drilling head,
method of verifying pipe location for as -built drawing and schedule for completing major
activities.
SECTION IV
Page 107 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
2. Provide a 2 -inch x 34 -inch layout drawing(s), scale 1 -inch = 20 feet, indicating location of
the entry, exit pits, and fluid storage pits, location of fused pipe before pulling (shall not
block access to private property), location and type of fusion equipment, storage of waste
fluid, and fluid recycling plan (if used).
3. Spoil handling, separation and disposal.
4. Provide a detail of the planned bore path and the method of monitoring and controlling the
speed, line, grade, and rate of fluids delivery.
5. Include the sequence, size and description of each reamer and the capabilities of each
through the type of soils anticipated to be encountered in the project area.
6. The Contractor shall maintain the alignment and minimum radii as detailed on the plan
sheets and as specified herein.
7. The drill plan should include a final swabbing of the bore path prior to pipe pullback.
8. Contractor shall not proceed with work until Drilling Plan is approved by the Engineer and
the city.
B. Reaming Operations submittal shall include the required bore hole size for pullback of the pipeline.
The Reaming Operation Plan shall be submitted for review prior to initiation of construction.
C. Estimated Pullback Loads submittal shall include:
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an estimate of the anticipated pullback loads
that will be required to install the pipe.
2. Contractor shall include the calculated buoyant force or buoyant weight of the pipe and
proposed method for counterweighting or ballasting the pipe during pullback.
a. Calculation shall be based on anticipated density of the drilling fluid(s) to be used.
b. Any counterweight or ballast pipe placed inside the pipe shall be free from any
dirt, grease, oil, or other contaminants that may prevent proper disinfection.
D. Drilling Fluids Management submittal shall include:
1. Submit MSDS sheets for drilling fluid additives proposed, demonstrating they are non-
hazardous.
2. Proposed mix design for each specific geological strata or formation anticipated during
drilling of the bore path.
3. Estimate of drilling fluids and quantities to be utilized during each reaming pass.
4. Delivery volume and pressure for each reaming pass and the proposed method for
monitoring.
5. Details of the drilling fluid/soil slurry solids separation, recycling or disposal plan that will
describe the equipment and capacities for separation and recirculation.
a. If direct vacuum excavation of the slurry is selected, the disposal site shall be
identified, and copies of all required permits shall be presented to the Engineer.
b. The Contractor shall submit a written plan that details the estimated quantity of
slurry to be vacuum excavated and provide substantiation that there is sufficient
equipment to adequately pump or shuttle the slurry to and from the disposal site(s)
as required to maintain a near continuous drilling and pipe pull-back.
6. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a contingency plan for a quick response team
to address inadvertent fluid discharges to the surface (frac-outs). In the event that a drilling
fluid fracture, inadvertent returns or loss of returns occurs during pilot hole drilling
operations, Contractor shall cease drilling, wait at least 30 minutes, inject a quantity of
drilling fluid with a viscosity exceeding 120 seconds as measured by a March funnel and
then wait another 30 minutes. If mud fractures or returns loss continues, Contractor will
cease operations and notify the Engineer and the city.
The Engineer, the city and the Contractor will discuss additional options and the Work will then
proceed accordingly. Repair and clean-up of damages associated with frac-outs will be resolved in
a timely fashion as directed by the city at the Contractor's expense.
SECTION IV
Page 108 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
E. Safety Plan submittal: The Contractor shall be responsible for securing a safe worksite that meets
all Federal, State, and Local government codes. A project safety and contingency plan which shall
include but shall not be limited to drilling fluid containment and cleanup procedures, equipment
and plan for compromised utility installations including electrical and power lines, potable water,
reclaimed water, wastewater, storm water and any other subsurface utility.
F. Contingency Plan submittal: Contractor shall submit contingency plans to address procedures to be
employed in the event the following may occur:
1. Obstruction encountered during drilling or reaming.
2. Broken drill pipe.
3. Collapsed or buckled carrier pipe or casing pipe.
4. HDD fails to advance or fails to respond to steering actions.
5. Alignment deviation is outside allowable limits.
6. Installation (pull back) forces reach 75% of the max allowable forces.
7. Ground settlement/heaving exceed allowable limits set by the Engineer and the city.
Project Records and As -Built Drawings submittals shall include the following:
A. Fusion joint data and fusion technician data indicating conformance with this Technical
Specification and applicable standards. This will include fusion joint warranty information and
recommended project specific fusion parameters, including criteria logged and recorded by data
logger.
B. Certified copies of test reports of factory tests for the pipe to be inserted into the bore hole prepared
by HDD methods required by the applicable standards and this Technical Special Provision. Report
shall include at minimum include following information:
1. Dimensional Checks
2. Pipe Burst
3. Flattening
4. Extrusion Quality (Acetone Immersion)
C. Project Records: Maintain a complete set of project records. Maintain a daily activity log during
Horizontal Directional Drilling operations. Log shall accurately record entire workday. These
documents shall include but not be limited to:
1. Start and finish time of each section of drill pipe for pilot hole drilling and reaming.
2. For pilot hole drilling, drill bit location at least every 10 ft. along the drill path. Mark the
as -built drawings on a daily basis with drilling progress.
3. General description of ground condition drilled.
4. Details and perceived reasons for delays greater than one hour other than normal breaks
and shift changes.
5. Details of any unusual conditions or events.
As -built Drawings: Maintain at the construction site a set of field drawings for recording the pilot hole as -
built conditions. Plot as -built conditions on the field drawings, including the location in plan and elevation
of the pilot hole.
503-2.5.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND COORDINATION OF WORK
HDD Contractor's Experience: Any horizontal directional drilling operations 16" or larger diameter
installation shall be conducted by an experienced HDD Contractor. The HDD Contractor shall have
minimum of five years of experience constructing horizontal directional drills for pipelines of the same or
larger diameter and the same or greater lengths. A responsible representative of the HDD Contractor and
the city must be present at all times during a directional drilling operation. A responsible representative as
specified herein is defined as a person experienced in the type of Work being performed and who has
authority to represent the Contractor in a routine decision making capacity concerning the manner and
method of carrying out the Work.
SECTION IV
Page 109 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
Qualifications and Experience of Contractor Personnel: The Contractor shall employ skilled,
experienced superintendent(s), drill rig operators, and key personnel. A competent and experienced
superintendent representing the HDD Contractor, that is thoroughly familiar with the equipment and type
work to be performed, must always be in direct charge and control of their operation. In all cases the
superintendent shall be continually present at the job site during the actual directional drilling.
The superintendent(s) and drill rig operators shall each have at least three years of successful experience
using the HDD process, on at least five (5) projects with similar or greater diameters, pull back length and
ground conditions. The superintendent(s), drill rig operator, and key personnel shall demonstrate successful
completion of at least five (5) projects where pipe was installed with horizontal directional drilling
techniques. The Contractor shall furnish resumes of the superintendent(s), drill rig operator(s) and other
key personnel. Personnel experience records should include project names, locations, pull back lengths,
ground conditions, pipe materials, project description, city project number, Engineer, and references with
names, addresses and telephone numbers. The superintendent, drill rig operator(s) and other key personnel
listed in the submittal shall be on-site during all construction related activities required for HDD installation.
A responsible representative of the HDD Contractor and the city shall be present at all times during the
directional drilling operation. A responsible representative as specified herein is defined as a person
experienced in the type of Work being performed and who has authority to represent the Contractor in a
routine decision making capacity concerning the manner and method of carrying out the Work.
The HDD Contractor shall always have a sufficient number of competent workers on the job to ensure the
directional bore is made in a timely and satisfactory manner. Adequate personnel for carrying out all phases
of the actual drilling operation must be on the job site from the beginning through the completion of the
work.
The Contractor shall use certified HDPE pipe welding and fusion operators. The certifications of these
individuals shall be made available prior to construction. HDPE pipe welding and fusion operators shall be
certified by the pipe manufacturer prior to commencement of pipe welding and fusing operations.
The equipment used in directional boring, also known as horizontal directional drilling, shall be of adequate
commercial size and satisfactory working condition for safe operation, and may be subject to approval by
the city or at the discretion of the Engineer. Such approval, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for making a satisfactory installation meeting the criteria set forth herein. Only workmen
experienced in directional boring operations shall be used in performing the Work.
The Contractor shall provide all structures, safety equipment, and professional services required to provide
for the health and safety of the general public and of personnel involved in directional boring work in
accordance with the requirements of the regulatory agencies having jurisdiction The Contractor shall take
all measures necessary to protect surrounding public and private property, adjacent buildings, roads, drives,
sidewalks, and appurtenances from damage due to directional boring work. Responsibility and payment for
correction of such damage shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the
city.
The HDD operation is to be operated in a manner to eliminate the discharge of water, drilling mud, and
cuttings to nearby water bodies or to the land areas involved during the construction process. If inadvertent
spills to nearby water bodies occur, the Contractor shall immediately provide environmental controls and
cleanup to the satisfaction of, and at no additional expense to the city.
Best Management Practices (BMP's) for erosion control within the Contractor's work area shall be
implemented and maintained at all times during drilling and back -reaming operations to prevent siltation
and turbid discharges in excess of State Water quality Standards pursuant to Rule 62-302, F.A.C. Methods
shall include but are not limited to the immediate placement of turbidity containment devices such as
turbidity screen, silt containment fence, hay bales, and earthen berms, etc. to contain the drilling mud.
SECTION IV
Page 110 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 503-2.5.4. HDD PIPE PRODUCTS
The horizontal directional drilling shall only use Certa-Loc PVC or butt -welded
HDPE pipe which meets the requirements specified in Section 502. Refer to Section 502-2.4. for the HDPE
Butt Fusion Process and installation procedures for HDD installations.
503-2.5.5. GENERAL HDD INSTALLATION CONSIDERATION
The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials required, including but not limited to the
following:
1. Drilling equipment (Drilling rig, drill head, drill pipe, drilling control system, pipe pull heads, pipe
rollers).
2. Water pumps, hoses, fittings, storage tanks, vacuum truck(s), filters, hay bales, and silt fences, as
required.
3. Drilling fluids containment, collection, cleaning and disposal equipment, and materials.
4. Fuel and lubricants.
5. Bentonite and related mixing equipment.
6. All hydrostatic testing equipment and materials.
7. Side booms, cranes, backhoes, trucks and other equipment and materials necessary to load and
unload pipe, and to support and smoothly transition the pipe while being pulled into the reamed
hole.
All equipment used in the horizontal directional drilling operation shall have the built-in capacity, stability
and necessary safety features required to fully comply with the Technical Specifications and requirements
of this section without showing evidence of undue stress or failure, and shall otherwise be in sound
operating condition.
Backup equipment, sufficient spares and replacement items shall be required where job site conditions
indicate that severe damage to the roadway or a hazardous condition may result in the event of an equipment
breakdown and where the condition of the equipment to be used indicates that routine component
replacement or repair will likely be necessary during the drilling operation.
If equipment breakdowns or other unforeseen stoppages occur and forward motion of the directional cutting
head is halted at any time other than for reasons planned in advance (addition of drill stems, etc.), the bore
hole shall remain filled with Bentonite slurry and the slurry shall be recirculated periodically.
If an existing utility is damaged, pavement cutting for inspection may be approved by the roadway authority
(state, county or city) and the city representative after consideration of all pertinent facts indicates that such
action would offer the most practical solution to the problem for all parties concerned.
Any such authorized pavement opening shall be repaired according to appropriate regulatory agency's
specifications and requirements. No cutting of the pavement will be allowed on interstate or other limited
access roadways unless approved by FDOT.
The boring tool shall have a steering capability and have an electronic tool detection system. The position
of the tool during operation shall be capable of being determined accurately both horizontally and vertically.
503-2.5.6. HDD DRILLING EQUIPMENT AND DRILLING FLUID
General: The directional drilling equipment shall consist of a directional drilling rig of sufficient capacity
to perform the bore(s) and pullback of the pipe(s), a drilling fluid mixing and delivery system of sufficient
capacity to successfully complete the crossing, a drilling guidance system to accurately guide boring
operations, a vacuum truck or mud separation plant of sufficient capacity to handle the drilling fluid volume,
and trained and competent personnel to operate the system. All equipment shall be in good, safe operating
condition with sufficient supplies, materials and spare parts on hand to maintain the system in good working
SECTION IV
Page 111 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
order for the duration of this project. All required equipment shall be included per the emergency and
contingency plan as submitted per these Technical Specifications.
Drilling Rig:
A. The directional drilling machine shall consist of a hydraulically powered system to rotate, push and
pull drill pipe while delivering a pressurized fluid mixture to a steerable drill head. The machine
shall be anchored to withstand the pulling, pushing and rotating forces required to complete the
project.
B. The drilling rig hydraulic system shall be self-contained with sufficient pressure and volume to
power drilling operations. Hydraulic system shall be free of leaks.
C. The drilling rig shall have a system to monitor and record maximum pull-back forces during pull-
back operations.
D. The drilling rig shall be grounded during drilling and pullback operations. There shall be a system
to detect electrical current from the drilling string and an audible alarm that automatically sounds
when an electrical current is detected.
Drill Head:
A. The horizontal directional drilling equipment shall produce a stable fluid filled bore hole with the
use of a steerable drill head.
B. The system shall be able to control the depth and direction of the pipe.
C. Drill head shall contain all necessary cutters and fluid jets for the operation and shall be of the
appropriate design for the soil or rock being drilled.
Drill Pipe: Drill pipe shall be constructed of high quality 4130 seamless tubing, Grade D or better, with
threaded box and pins. Tool joints should be hardened to 32-36 RC. Drill pipe shall be capable of drilling
the design drill path and of pulling back the HDPE pipe.
Drilling Fluid System:
A. Drilling Fluid (Mud):
1. Drilling Fluid shall be a high-quality bentonite drilling fluid or equivalent to ensure hole
stabilization, cuttings transport, bit and electronics cooling and hole lubrication to reduce
drag on the drill pipe and the product pipe. Oil based drilling fluids or fluids containing
additives that can contaminate the soil or ground water shall not be considered acceptable
substitutes. Composition of the fluid must comply with all applicable local, state and
federal environmental regulations.
2. Drilling fluid shall be composed of clean potable water and the appropriate additive(s) for
the fluid to be used. Water shall be from a clean potable source and shall meet the mixing
requirements of the manufacturer. Reclaimed water shall not be considered an acceptable
alternative to potable water.
3. Potable water shall be obtained from a metered city Water Utility construction service
connection paid for by the Contractor. The contractor shall follow all city Water Utility
Department requirements regarding backflow prevention, service water metering, and
cross connection control.
4. The water and additives shall be mixed thoroughly to assure the absence of any clumps or
clods. No hazardous additives may be used.
5. Drilling fluid shall be maintained at a viscosity sufficient to suspend cuttings and maintain
the integrity of bore wall(s).
6. Drilling fluid shall be disposed of off-site in accordance with local, state and federal
requirements and/or permit conditions. Disposal of drilling fluids shall be in compliance
with environmental regulations, right-of-way and workspace agreements and permit
requirements.
SECTION IV Page 112 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
7. No additional chemicals or polymer surfactants shall be allowed to be added to the drilling
fluid as submitted for this project without written consent of the city and the Engineer.
B. Drilling Fluid Mixing System:
1. A self-contained, closed, drilling fluid mixing system shall be of sufficient size to mix and
deliver drilling fluid for the project.
2. The drilling fluid reservoir tank shall be a minimum of 1,000 gallons.
3. The mixing system shall be able to ensure thorough mixing of the drilling fluid. The drilling
fluid reservoir tank shall be sized for adequate storage of the fluid.
4. The mixing system shall continually agitate the drilling fluid during drilling operations.
C. Drilling Fluid Delivery and Recovery System:
1. The mud pumping system shall have a minimum variable capacity of 35 to 500 gpm and
the capability of delivering the drilling fluid at a constant minimum pressure of 1200 psi.
2. The delivery system shall have filters or other appropriate in-line equipment to prevent
solids from being pumped into the drill pipe.
3. Used drilling fluid and drilling fluid spilled during drilling operations shall be contained
and disposed of in a legal manner at approved solid waste landfills. The use of spill
containment measures shall be maintained around drill rigs, drilling fluid mixing system,
entry and exit pits and drilling fluid recycling system (if used) to prevent spills into the
surrounding environment. Pumps, vacuum truck(s), and/or storage of sufficient size shall
be in place to contain excess drilling fluid.
4. A closed-loop drilling fluid system and a drilling fluid cleaning system should be used to
the extent practical, depending upon project size and conditions. Under no circumstances
shall drilling fluid that has escaped containment (i.e. inadvertent returns) be reused in the
drilling system.
Pipe Pull Heads:
A. Pipe pull heads shall be utilized that employ a positive through -bolt design assuring a smooth wall
against the pipe cross-section at all times.
B. Pipe pull heads shall be specifically designed for use with high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe
or PVC fusible pipe as appropriate and shall be as recommended by the pipe supplier.
Drilling Control System:
A. Calibration of the electronic detection and control system shall be verified prior to the start of the
bore.
B. The drilling head shall be remotely steerable by means of an electronic or magnetic detection
system. The drilling head location shall be monitored in three dimensions, X, Y and Z:
1. Distance along the baseline, X.
2. Offset from the baseline, Y, and.
3. Depth of bore, Z.
C. The guidance system shall be capable of tracking at all depths up to 50 feet and in any soil condition,
including hard rock. It shall enable the driller to guide the drill head by providing immediate
information on the tool face, azimuth (horizontal direction), and inclination (vertical direction). The
guidance system shall be accurate and calibrated to the manufacturer 's specifications of the vertical
depth of the borehole at sensing position at depths up to 50 feet and accurate to 2 -feet horizontally.
D. Point of rotation of the head shall also be monitored.
Pipe Rollers:
Pipe rollers shall be used for pipe assembly and during final product pull back.
SECTION IV
Page 113 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
503-2.5.7. PREPARATION AND MOBILIZATION FOR HDD OPERATIONS
Do not commence directional drilling until all required submittals have been approved by the Engineer and
the city.
Do not begin drilling until all pipe and special items for drilling have been delivered.
All drilling operations shall be accomplished during daylight hours and shall not begin after the hour pre-
established as the latest starting time that will allow completion during daylight hours. Planned nighttime
work will generally not be allowed unless stipulated in the special conditions of the city's Agreement. In
emergency situations, or where delay would increase the likelihood of a failure, nighttime work may be
allowed to complete the drilling operations.
Mobilize all necessary personnel, equipment, and materials to construct an entry area for drilling operations.
Provide appropriate supports to maintain safe working conditions; ensure stability of the entry, exit,
settlement, and containment pits; minimize loosening, deterioration and disturbance of the surrounding
ground.
The drilling site shall contain the horizontal directional drilling rig, drill pipe storage racks, water and slurry
pumps, slurry mixing tank, cuttings separation equipment, primary settlement and containment pits, dry
storage area for bentonite, crane or lifting equipment, and site office.
The pipe launcher/roller system (or equal) shall be constructed in the specified area. The pipe lay down area
shall be as determined in conjunction with the Engineer and the city and shall be used to facilitate the
installation of the pipeline.
503-2.5.8. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Provide equipment and procedures to maximize the recirculation of drilling mud and to minimize waste.
Provide solids control and fluid cleaning equipment of a configuration and capacity that can process surface
returns and produce drilling fluid suitable for reuse.
Inadvertent surface returns or "frac-outs" of drilling fluid that is accessible on land must be cleaned up
immediately and the surface area washed and returned to original condition. All drilling fluids, spoils and
separated material will be disposed of in compliance of state and local environmental regulations. If the
amount of surface returns exceeds that which can be contained and collected using small sumps, drilling
operations shall be discontinued until surface return volumes can be brought under control. Equipment and
materials for cleanup and contingencies must be provided and stored at all HDD sites.
Construction related activities involving fuels and lubricants such as vehicle refueling and equipment
maintenance, including the draining and pumping of lubricants shall be conducted at a minimum distance
of 50 feet from surface water bodies, drainage ditches or swales, drainage pathways and storm water
collection structures to eliminate contamination in case of a spill. Any fuels, drilling fluids, or lubricants
spilled shall be cleaned up immediately and comply with all FDEP requirements.
Contractor shall provide sanitation and garbage facilities on both sides of the HDD operation. Wastes shall
be transported offsite for disposal.
Immediately upon completion of work, all rubbish and debris shall be removed from the job site. All
construction equipment and implements of service shall be removed and the entire area involved shall be
left in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition approved by the city.
503-2.5.9. DRILLING OPERATIONS
Supply all necessary drilling equipment for completing the HDD installation as shown on the approved
Shop Drawings.
SECTION IV
Page 114 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
The plan and profile for the horizontal directional drilling operation shall be in accordance with the
approved Shop Drawings.
Drill entrance and exit angles shall be as shown on the approved Shop Drawings.
Drilling Tolerances: A smoothly curved pilot hole shall follow the designated centerline of the pipe
profiles as shown on the Drawings. The directional tolerance of the holes will be as follows:
A. Deviations from, and corrections to, the design centerline of the HDD pipeline construction shall
not exceed 2 percent in depth per 100 feet horizontal or a lesser rate determined by the structural
characteristics of the selected pipe and jointing system.
B. The as -built variance from the designed bore path shall not exceed plus or minus 1 -foot in the
vertical plane and plus or minus 2 -feet in the horizontal plane.
503-2.5.10. HDD INSTALLATION
General: The Contractor shall install the HDPE pipe by the horizontally drilled, directionally controlled
method of construction.
Instrumentation: The Contractor shall always provide and maintain instrumentation which shall
accurately locate the pilot hole position in the X, Y and Z axes relative to the ground surface and measure
drill string axial and torsional loads. Drilling fluid flow rate and pressure shall also be monitored. The
Contractor shall maintain and provide to the city Inspector and the Engineer access to the data generated
by the downhole survey tools.
Drilling Guidance and Pullback:
A. Pipe installed by horizontal directional drilling shall be located as shown on the Drawings. The
Contractor shall plot the actual horizontal and vertical alignment and the depth of the pilot bore at
intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Deviations between the recorded position of the drill string and the
specified position of the drill string shall be documented and immediately brought to the attention
of the Engineer. This "as -built" plan and profile shall be updated as the pilot bore is advanced. At
the completion of the pilot hole, the Contractor shall provide the coordinates of the pilot hole as
specified.
B. The Contractor shall provide and use on land, a separate steering system employing a ground survey
grid system, equal to "Tru -Tracker".
C. The Contractor shall have accurate working gauges which register tensile force being used to pull
the pipeline back through the reamed borehole. If, during the pipeline pulling process, this force
reaches 75 percent of the allowable load for the pipeline, the Engineer shall be notified
immediately, and the Contractor shall prepare to initiate the contingency plan provided within the
approved Project submittals. Logs shall be kept referencing all forces exerted on the pipeline during
the installation.
D. The Contractor shall provide adequate pipe supports/rollers along the stringing area (for both entry
and exit pits) to support the required length of pipe for each location. The rollers shall be comprised
of a non-abrasive material arranged in a manner to provide support to the bottom and bottom quarter
points of the pipeline allowing for free movement of the pipeline during pullback.
E. The pipe entry area shall be graded to provide support for the pipe to allow free movement into the
borehole. The pipe shall be guided in the borehole to avoid deformation of, or damage to the pipe.
The pipe shall be installed in a manner which will not cause upheaval, settlement, cracking,
movement, or distortion of surface features.
F. During pullback operations, the Contractor shall monitor roller operation and use side booms if
required to assist movement of the pipe and to avoid damage to the pipe.
G. Cease installation operations if damage to the pipe occurs. Damage to the pipe shall be repaired
immediately. Pulling operations shall not resume until the pipe has been repaired.
SECTION IV
Page 115 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
H. Pipe pullback shall be planned to occur continuously until complete, except for stoppages planned
in the course of the operation such as drill rod removal or if damage to the pipe is observed during
pullback that needs to be repaired before continuing. Contractor shall implement necessary
buoyancy control as stated in the approved HDD Method and Work Plan.
Location Detection Wire for HDD Pipeline Installations: Refer to Section 502-2.5.2. B. for specifications
regarding material and installation of Location Detection Wires for HDD installations.
503-2.5.11. DRILLING MUD AND CUTTINGS
The horizontal directional drilling operation shall be conducted in a manner to eliminate the discharge of
water, drilling mud, and cuttings to areas not involved in the construction process. The Contractor shall
immediately contain and clean-up any inadvertent drilling fluid returns. The Contractor shall also provide
equipment and procedures to maximize the recirculation or reuse of drilling mud to minimize waste
disposal.
Disposal of water, drilling fluids, drilling mud, cuttings, and muck shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
Disposal of waste materials shall be in a legal manner at approved solid waste landfills.
503-2.5.12. REAMING AND PULLBACK
Reaming: Reaming operations shall be conducted at the discretion of the Contractor. Choosing to
simultaneously ream and pull back the pipe is at the discretion and the sole risk of the Contractor. All
provisions herein relating to simultaneous reaming and pulling back operations shall also pertain to reaming
operations.
A. Prior to pulling pipe, enlarge pilot hole to the diameter identified in the reaming procedure
submittal. The Contractor shall ream the borehole to a minimum of 12 -inches larger than the outside
diameter of the pipe or 1.5 times the outside diameter of the pipe, whichever is less, using the
appropriate tools. Complete a swab pass if necessary.
B. Ream at rates consistent with the drilling equipment and mud system selected.
C. Continue to monitor the drilling fluid viscosity and density to reduce the potential for frac-out.
Pulling Loads: The Contractor shall be responsible for determining safe pulling loads required for proper
installation. Such loads shall be minimized to prevent failure of the pipeline during installation. Once
pullback operations have commenced, operations shall continue without interruption until the pipe is
completely pulled into the borehole. During pullback operations, the Contractor shall not apply more than
the maximum safe pipe pull pressure at any time. A break away head rated at the maximum safe pull
pressure shall be utilized.
Torsional Stress: A properly sized and fully operational swivel shall be installed between the reaming
assembly at the end of the drilling pipe and the pipeline to restrict torsional stress from being transmitted
to the pipeline.
Ballast: The pipeline must be filled with water (ballasting) as installation proceeds, to prevent buckling
and reduce buoyancy.
Pull Section Support: The pipe section shall be supported as it proceeds during pull back so that it moves
freely.
503-2.5.13. PIPELINE PROTECTION
Protect the interior of the pipe from entry of foreign matter until the installation is complete and accepted.
Contractor shall video record the inside of the pipe after it has been installed and verify that no cracks,
breaches, gouges, holes, etc. have occurred during pullback that would decrease the integrity of the pipe.
SECTION IV
Page 116 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
503-2.5.14. PIPELINE CLEANING
Following installation of the pipeline installed by HDD, the pipeline shall be hydraulically cleaned and
flushed as specified in Section 504 of these Technical Specifications.
503-2.5.15. PIPELINE TESTING
Pressure Testing: Hydrostatically test pipe before and after installation in accordance with ASTMF2164-
Field Leak Testing of Polyethylene Pressure Piping Using Hydrostatic Pressure and Section 505. of these
Technical Specifications.
A. Test Duration: The total test time including initial pressurization, initial expansion, and time at test
pressure, must not exceed a total of 8 hours. If the test is not completed due to leakage, equipment
failure, etc., the test section shall be depressurized and allowed to "relax" for a minimum of 8 hours
before it is brought back up to test pressure. The test procedure consists of initial expansion phase
and leakage test phase.
B. Initial Expansion Phase: During the initial expansion phase, the test section is pressured to the test
pressure and enough make-up water is added each hour for a total of three hours to return to test
pressure.
C. Leakage Test Phase: The leakage test phase immediately follows the initial expansion phase. The
test section shall be brought back up to the test pressure and remain at that pressure for 4 -hours in
duration. At the end of the 4 -hour test time period, the test section shall be within +/-2 psig of the
test pressure with zero leakage (no water added).
D. Zero Leakage: The portion of the HDD pipeline to be hydrostatically tested with HDPE butt fused
joints shall have zero leakage for the entire 4 -hour leakage test duration for the HDD pipe section
to have passed the leakage test.
Test Pressure: The test pressure for the HDD pipeline shall be 150 psi for potable water and
reclaimed water or 100 psi for wastewater.
The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, and labor required for making pressure and leakage
tests. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer and the city Inspector.
503-2.5.16. DISINFECTION FOR HDD POTABLE WATER PIPELINES
Final disinfection for potable water pipelines installed by HDD, following cleaning, flushing and pipeline
testing, shall be in accordance with Section 506. of these Technical Specifications.
503-2.5.17. CITY ACCEPTANCE
If the finished installation of the HDD is not satisfactory to the city, the Engineer or other jurisdictional
entity, due to any of the following: the pipe alignment being outside of the specified limits of +1.0 foot of
the coordinates for the entry or exit points stated on the Drawings; failure to pass the leakage or pressure
tests; or internal damage to the pipeline; the pipeline shall be abandoned, fully pressure grouted in place, in
accordance with the jurisdictional authority, and an alternate installation shall be constructed. The
abandoned pipeline shall be properly shown on Record Drawings to be submitted following conclusion of
the construction work.
If the HDD pipeline construction is to provide an HDPE casing pipe for a carrier utility pipe, casing spacers
shall not be permitted inside the HDPE casing pipe.
If the HDD installation is for a casing pipe, the Contractor shall end -seal the annular space between the
casing pipe and the carrier pipe using concrete brick and mortar which shall extend at least 8 -inches into
the casing pipe. To secure the ends of the casing and to preclude the entrance of water and soil into the
casing, the casing ends shall be completely sealed to be watertight with a neoprene rubber seal specifically
manufactured for that purpose. The neoprene end seal shall be attached to the casing and the carrier pipe
SECTION IV Page 117 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
with Type 304 stainless steel bands. The casing end seals shall be constructed to be basically watertight to
preclude the intrusion of groundwater into the casing. Casing end seals shall be equal to Cascade Water
Works Model CCES or an approved equal listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List.
The Engineer shall inspect the installed pipe ends for roundness and/or damage. Evidence of significant
surface scratching shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Gouges or excessive surface damage of
more than 10 percent of the wall thickness will be grounds to abandon the bore and have the Contractor re -
drill another pipeline at no cost to the city.
The city shall be provided with test logs from the Contractor indicating the actual maximum pull loads,
maximum deflection angle encountered during the pulling operation and the actual X, Y and Z coordinates
of the pipe centerline at a maximum of every 10 feet horizontally of the HDD pipe for review as part of
final acceptance.
Contractor shall review the internal video of the HDD installation and report any deficiencies to the
Engineer and the city. A copy of the video shall be provided to the city as part of the Record Documents
submittal for the completed and accepted Work.
503-2.5.18. REPAIR
Pipes damaged during handling or installation shall be pushed or pulled out or repaired in-place using
replacement sections and butt fusion welds recommended by the pipe manufacturer following methods
described in the approved submittal.
503-2.5.19. CLEANUP AND REPAIR
Following the installation, remove all equipment, material, drilling mud and waste from both work area
ends of the HDD installation. The project site shall be returned to a condition equal to or better than the
pre -construction condition of the site. All excavations will be backfilled and compacted to 98% maximum
dry density under roadways and hardscape, or to 95% maximum dry density for all other areas and shall be
graded to original contours. Compaction Testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 201-2.9 —
Backfill and Compaction of these Technical Specifications. All pavement and hardscape shall be repaired
per applicable jurisdictional standards, excess materials shall be removed from the site, and disturbed areas
shall be re -landscaped. All drilling fluid shall be properly disposed of per these Technical Specifications
and all applicable jurisdictional laws.
Areas or facilities disturbed or damaged during construction shall be restored to original or better condition
with new materials prior to the completion of construction unless specifically identified on the Drawings
to be modified. This includes areas or facilities outside or inside the roadway rights-of-way, previous
construction activities being done as part of this Project, and ancillary roadways, retention ponds,
landscaping, signage, billboards, utility boxes and equipment, utility poles, and utility lines.
503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
503-3.1. GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for
installation of pipe.
503-3.2. Fittings
The weight of ductile iron fittings shall not be carried by the pipe on which they are installed. The fitting
shall be supported by a concrete cradle as shown on the standard details. Concrete used for supports shall
SECTION IV
Page 118 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
have a minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days. Concrete for the support cradle shall be
poured against undisturbed soil.
All glands, clamps, bolts, nuts, studs, and other uncoated parts of fitting joints for underground installation
shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No.
300-M.
503-3.3. VALVES
Valves for potable water mains and reclaimed water mains shall be located within the street rights-of-way
lines unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed adjacent to the tee in all cases, not
to exceed 18 -inches from the main line.
Valves of the size and type shown on the Drawings shall be set plumb and installed at the locations indicated
on the Drawings. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation and
operation instructions; with the approved shop drawing submittals; and with the details shown on the
Drawings.
Buried valves shall be installed such that they are supported properly in their respective positions, free from
distortion and strain with a concrete cradle as shown on the Standard Details. Concrete used for supports
shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days. Concrete for the support cradle shall
be poured against undisturbed soil. Valves shall be installed such that their weight is not borne by piping
or equipment that are not designed to support the weight of the valve. Exposed aboveground valves shall
be supported with fabricated piping supports so that the weight of the valve is not carried by the pipeline.
Install gate valves with the operating stem in the vertical position. Valves shall be carefully inspected during
installation; they shall be opened wide and then tightly closed and the various nuts and bolts shall be tested
for tightness. Special care shall be taken to prevent any foreign material from becoming lodged in the valve
seat. Check and adjust all valves for smooth operation.
Aboveground Valves: For aboveground flanged valves, clean iron flanges by wire brushing before
installing the valves. Clean stainless-steel flange bolts and nuts lubricate threads with a fluoropolymer
coating to prevent galling and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. Flanged joints shall be watertight;
no leaks shall be allowed.
Buried Valves: For buried valves, a valve box shall be centered accurately over the operating nut and the
entire assembly shall be plumb. Extensions or risers for valve boxes shall be an integral part of the box. No
cut sections of ductile iron or PVC pipe shall be used to extend the valve box to its proper height. The tops
of valve boxes shall be adjusted to the proper elevation as specified below and as shown on the Drawings.
Care shall be taken while constructing valve boxes to ensure that valve stems are vertical and the cast iron
valve box has been placed centered and plumb over the valve stem nut of the valve with base bearing on
compacted fill and the top flush or above final grade, as specified below. Valve boxes shall have sufficient
bracing to maintain alignment during backfilling. When installation is complete, no pressure shall be
exerted by the valve box on either the valve or the pipe. The Contractor shall remove any sand or undesirable
trash or debris from valve box interior prior to final inspection.
A. In paved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set 1/4 -inch below pavement. Following paving
operations, a 24 -inch square shall be neatly cut in the pavement around the box and the paving
removed. The top of the box shall then be adjusted to the proper elevation and a 24 -inch square by
6 -inch thick concrete pad poured around the box cover. Concrete pads in traffic areas shall be
reinforced with No. 4 reinforcement bars as shown on the Drawings. Concrete for the pad shall be
3,500 psi compressive strength at 28 days.
B. In unpaved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set 2 inches above finished grade. After the top
of the box is set to the proper elevation, a 24 -inch square by 6 -inch thick concrete pad shall be
SECTION IV
Page 119 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
poured around the box cover. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,500 psi compressive strength at 28
days.
C. The concrete pad for the valve box cover shall have a 3 -inch diameter, brass identification disc
embedded in the concrete surface as shown on the Drawings. The brass identification disc shall
have the information as shown on the Drawings neatly engraved, not stamped, on it.
Refer to City Standard Detail Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 3 & Sheet 2 of 3 for potable water valve pad detail,
and City Standard Detail Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 3 & Sheet 2 of 3 for reclaimed water valve box and pad
detail.
Hydrostatic Testing: Valves shall be tested hydrostatically, concurrently with the pipeline in which they
are installed. Protect or isolate any parts of valves, operators, or control and instrumentation systems whose
pressure rating is less than the pressure used for the pressure test(s). If valve joints leak during pressure
testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and
nuts, and hydrostatically retest the joints.
Coating Repair: Following installation of buried valves, repair any scratches, marks and other types of
surface damage, etc., with a coating equal to the original coating supplied by the manufacturer. Prior to
backfilling, all nuts, bolts, and other parts of the valve joints shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT
per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M.
503-3.4. FIRE HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the
possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the potable water main with a 6 -inch ductile iron branch tee with flow
controlled by an independent 6 -inch mechanical joint gate valve for isolation at the branch of the water
main tee. If the fire hydrant is placed greater than 20 -feet from the main, an additional 6 -inch mechanical
joint valve shall be installed at the hydrant location and shall be included in the hydrant assembly cost. The
fire hydrant valve cannot be located anywhere within the hydrant ductile iron pipe branch line to circumvent
the requirement of using two valves. Refer to City Standard Detail Index 409, for potable water hydrants.
All fire hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb,
with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Fire hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as
shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Hydrostatic Testing: Fire hydrants shall be tested hydrostatically, concurrently with the pipeline in which
they are installed. If the hydrant mechanical joints leak during pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts
and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and hydrostatically retest the
joints.
Coating Repair: Following installation of buried portions of the hydrants, repair any scratches, marks and
other types of surface damage, etc., with a coating equal to the original coating supplied by the
manufacturer. Prior to backfilling, all buried nuts, bolts, and other parts of the hydrant mechanical joints
shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No.
300-M.
Reclaimed Water System: No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved
by the city's Engineering Department.
503-3.5. ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching
approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturer' s recommendations.
SECTION IV
Page 120 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
hydrants may be used where hydrant run out length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans.
503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING POTABLE WATER OR
RECLAIMED WATER LINES
The Contractor shall coordinate making connection of the new mains to mains which are in service at the
time of construction with the city. All potable water or reclaimed water main connections, regardless of
new or existing pipe size, to existing potable water or reclaimed water mains shall be made by the
Contractor only after the connection procedure and his Work scheduling has been reviewed and approved
by the Engineer and the city Engineering Department. The Contractor shall submit a written request to the
Engineer and the city Engineering Depai intent a minimum of 5 working days prior to scheduling said
connections. The request shall outline the following.
A. Location of points of connection, fittings to be used, and method of flushing and disinfection, if
applicable.
B. Estimated construction time for said connections.
The Engineer and the city Engineering Department shall review the Contractor's submittal within 3 working
days after receiving it and inform the Contractor regarding approval or denial of his request. If this request
is rejected by the city, the Contractor shall resubmit his request modifying it in a manner acceptable to the
city.
Connections to existing potable water or reclaimed water mains shall only be made following completion
• of new potable water or reclaimed water main cleaning operations and successful completion of pressure
and leakage testing and disinfection clearance of the new potable water main.
The Contractor shall not connect to existing facilities unless the Engineer and a representative of the city
are present. All connections shall only be made on the agreed upon date and time. If the Contractor does
not initiate and complete the connection work in the agreed upon manner, the Contractor shall be required
to reschedule the said connection by following the procedure outlined above.
Operation of all existing potable water or reclaimed water system valves shall be the responsibility of the
city's personnel only. At no time shall the Contractor operate any existing system valves. System valves
shall be defined as any valve which has main pressure against either side of the valve. The Contractor shall
notify the city to request that a valve be operated, at least 5 days prior to the time operation is required.
Upon satisfactory completion of all hydrostatic testing of the new potable water or reclaimed water pipeline,
and disinfection of the new potable water pipeline, remove restrained joint caps from both ends of the new
pipeline, close main line isolation valves on the existing main, cut and drain the existing main and swab all
pipe and fittings for the connection to be installed on the new main with 10 percent hypochlorite solution.
The connection of the new main to the existing main shall be made as swiftly as possible and any water
collected in the ditch shall be pumped out and kept below the level of the pipe bottom. Following connection
and make-up of all fittings, the new pipeline shall then be placed into service by the city's operating
personnel.
In the event any existing customers will be without potable water while a connection is being made, the
Contractor shall notify the city's Inspector 72 hours prior to disconnection. The city Utility Depalalent
shall notify the affected customer(s) when the water will be turned off and when the service is estimated to
be resumed. In some instances, these connections may have to be made at late night or early morning hours.
No user shall be without potable water service for more than three hours, unless approved otherwise by the
III
city.
SECTION IV
Page 121 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
504. PIPELINE CLEANING
Following installation of the potable water or reclaimed water pipelines, the pipelines shall be cleaned using
a combination of hydraulic cleaning using poly -pig swabbing devices and full bore flushing as specified
below.
504-1. PIPELINE PIGGING
All pipelines shall be hydraulically cleaned utilizing multiple pass operations with a polypropylene
swabbing device, also referred to as "pigging" operations, of the piping system. Between successive
operations, the pig diameter shall increase, and the pig material shall stiffen. Poly pigs shall be blown
elastomer polyurethane with open cell -type construction having a material density suitable for use within
the system to be cleaned. Pipe cleaning poly pigs shall have a parabolic nose, crisscross coated with a
resilient peripheral surface that engages the inner cylindrical wall of the pipe to maintain a sliding seal. Pipe
cleaning poly pigs shall be able to pass through a reduction of a minimum of sixty-five percent (65%) of
the original cross-sectional area of the pipe and shall be bi-directional. Cleaning procedures shall conform
to the Poly Pig manufacturer's recommendations.
The Contractor shall provide pig launching and retrieval points for the pipeline cleaning, as required. The
poly pig cleaning operation shall be completed prior to connection of the new potable water main or
reclaimed water main to an existing potable water main or reclaimed water main.
Passage of cleaning poly pigs through the system shall be constantly monitored, controlled, and all poly
pigs entered into the system shall be individually marked and identified so that the exiting of the poly pigs
from the system can be confirmed.
Cleaning of the pipeline system shall be done in conjunction with the initial filling of the system for the
hydrostatic testing.
The line to be cleaned shall only be connected to an existing potable water or reclaimed water distribution
system at a single connection point. Only the city's operating personnel shall operate the supply valve from
the existing potable water or reclaimed water distribution system.
The Contractor shall locate and open all new in-line valves beyond the point of connection on the pipeline
to be cleaned during the swabbing operation.
At the receiving or exit point for the poly pig, the Contractor is responsible for creating a safe environment
for collection of debris, water, and the swab. The Contractor shall provide for the protection of surrounding
personnel and property and the safe retrieval of the poly pig.
Temporary blowoffs may be required for the purpose of flushing mains. Temporary blowoffs shall be
installed as close as possible to the ends of the main being flushed. Blowoffs installed on the main shall be
the same diameter as the main. Temporary blowoffs shall be removed and plugged after the main is flushed.
The city Utility Department shall be notified at least 72 hours prior to pigging and flushing mains.
Cleaning and flushing shall be accomplished by propelling the poly pig down the pipeline to the exit point
with potable or reclaimed water, depending on the type of main being cleaned. Flushing shall continue until
the water is completely clear and poly pig is retrieved.
A. Re -apply a series of individual poly pigs in varying diameters and/or densities as required, to attain
proper cleanliness of pipeline.
B. Pigging speed shall range between two and five feet per second.
SECTION IV
Page 122 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
III 504-2. FINAL PIPELINE FLUSHING
Following the pigging process for cleaning the pipeline, the length of new water main shall be final flushed
with a full -bore clean water flush with a flushing velocity of at least 2.5 fps. The time required for the final
full bore flush shall be based on the time needed at the required flushing velocity to provide one complete
turnover of the quantity of water in the pipeline based on the length and diameter of water main being
flushed.
•
•
Blowoffs and temporary drainage piping used for flushing shall not be discharged into any gravity sewer
or pumping station wet well. The Contractor shall obtain prior approvals from the Engineer and the city as
to the methods and locations of flushing water discharge.
At the discretion of the city, full bore water flushing may not be required for a particular water main based
on the size of the main being cleaned and the quantity of water usage required for a full bore water flush.
Following the pigging and flushing process, pressure testing of the pipeline shall be completed in
accordance with Section 505 below.
505. TESTS
505-1. HYDROSTATIC PIPELINE TESTING
General: The Contractor shall perform hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pressure
pipes, fittings and valves for potable water mains and reclaimed water mains. After installation of the water
mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid water
main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test as described below.
Standard: AWWA C600, Section 4, with the exceptions required herein. The Contractor shall furnish all
closure pieces in the pipe as required. All equipment required for the hydrostatic pressure test shall be
furnished by the Contractor and shall include, but not be limited to, graduated containers, pressure gauges,
meters, testing taps and valves, hydraulic pressure pumps, suitable hoses and piping and any other
equipment needed to hydrostatically test the pipelines. Hydrostatic tests shall be conducted on all newly
laid potable water main or reclaimed water main pipes, fittings, and valves including any branch lines to
the curb. Tests shall be made between valves not exceeding 2,000 feet.
The Contractor may conduct a preliminary hydrostatic test after the trench has been partially backfilled
with the joints left exposed for an initial leakage test for his inspection and informational purposes only.
The hydrostatic testing for acceptance shall only be conducted after the trenches have been completely
backfilled and compacted as specified.
Test new pipelines which are to be connected to existing pipelines by isolating the new line from the existing
line by means of pipe caps, special flanges, or blind flanges. After the new line has been successfully tested,
remove temporary caps or blind flanges and connect to the existing piping.
The Engineer and the city's Inspector shall be present during all inspection, pressure, and leakage testing
for the results to be considered acceptable for the city's acceptance of the new potable water main or
reclaimed water main system. Successful passage of both the pressure test and the leakage test is required
before acceptance by the city.
The hydrostatic pressure and leakage testing described herein is intended for non -butt -welded jointed pipe
with gasketed joints.
Where any section of the piping contains concrete thrust collars, do not proceed with the pressure test until
at least 10 days after the concrete has been poured. If high -early cement is used for the concrete thrust
collars, the time may be reduced to three (3) days, if the Engineer and the city Engineering Department
SECTION IV
Page 123 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
both concur that the concrete has cured and reached adequate strength. When testing cement mortar -lined
piping, fill the pipe to be tested with water and allow it to soak for at least 48 hours to absorb water before
conducting the pressure test.
Each section of pipe to be tested shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure shall be
applied by means of a pressure pump connected to the pipe in a satisfactory manner. Before applying the
specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe as described below. If defective pipes, fittings
or valves are discovered in consequence of this pressure test, all such items shall be removed and replaced
by the Contractor with sound new material, the pipe shall be re -cleaned and the pressure test shall be
repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. Provisions of AWWA C-600, where applicable, shall apply.
Hydrostatic Pressure Test:
A. Test Pressure: Potable Water Mains - 150 psi; Reclaimed Water Mains — 150 psi; Wastewater Force
Mains — 150 psi. Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a hydraulic pressure pump. The
test pressure shall be maintained ±2 psig throughout the entire test period.
B. Test Duration: 2 -hours. If during the test, the integrity of the tested line is in question, the Engineer
or the city's Inspector may require an additional pressure test.
C. Air Release Requirements: Tapping saddles and corporation cocks at least 3/4 -inch in diameter,
pipe riser and angle globe valves shall be installed by the Contractor at each dead-end and at all
high points in the main to bleed all air from the water main to be tested.
D. Zero leakage and no pressure loss shall be allowed for the pressure pipe being tested.
Visible Leakage: All visible leaks evident at the ground surface shall be repaired and leakage eliminated.
Leakage Repair: Repairs to leaks shall be completed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
written recommendations. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage.
Damage or Defects: Any exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints shall be examined during the
test. Any damage or defects that are discovered shall be replaced with new material at no additional cost to
the city. The test shall be repeated until no damage or defects are discovered.
505-2. NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the city's Project Manager and/or Representative forty-eight (48) hours advance
notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
City inspector/CEI shall certify and submit all hydrostatic pressure and leakage testing results to the city
Project Manager within 10 days of performing test(s).
506. DISINFECTION AND TESTING
Before the new potable water system is put into operation, all new potable water mains and appurtenances
and any item of new construction with which the water comes into contact, shall be thoroughly disinfected
in accordance with AWWA C651. This section includes materials and procedures for disinfection of water
mains by the continuous feed method.
506-1. DISINFECTION MATERIALS
Dry Calcium Hypochlorite: High test granular calcium hypochlorite (HTH) used as the chlorinating agent
shall contain between 65 to 70 percent of available chlorine by weight. The dry calcium hypochlorite shall
be stored in a cool, dry, and dark environment, prior to its use, to minimize deterioration.
Sodium Hypochlorite Solution: Sodium hypochlorite solution used as the chlorinating agent shall be
obtained fresh and shall have a minimum concentration of 10 percent by weight available chlorine. To
SECTION IV
Page 124 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
minimize degradation, sodium hypochlorite solution shall be stored in opaque, closed polypropylene
containers, isolated from contact with any metals and out of direct sunlight. The solution shall be stored in
covered (as dark as possible) areas and as cool as possible, prior to use on the jobsite. Sodium hypochlorite
solution is highly corrosive. Therefore, the Contractor shall use this chlorinating agent with caution and per
the recommendations of the sodium hypochlorite solution manufacturer.
Chlorine Residual Test Kit: To measure chlorine concentration, provide and use a mid-range total chlorine
test kit with a digital titrator, using sodium thiosulfate as the titrant. Maintain fresh reagents for the test kit
and maintain all components of the kit in good working order available for immediate testing of chlorine
residuals at the point of sampling.
506-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to pressure testing and application of the disinfection agent for disinfection, all pipelines shall be
hydraulically cleaned utilizing multiple pass operations with a polypropylene swabbing device, also
referred to as "pigging" operations, of the piping system, followed by full bore flushing. Flushing shall
continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for
flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the
lines. Cleaning and flushing prior to pressure testing and disinfection shall be in accordance with Section
504 of these Technical Specifications.
506-3. FINAL DISINFECTION PROCEDURE FOR POTABLE
WATER MAINS
Before any portion of a new potable water piping system is to be placed into service, it shall be disinfected;
and proper disinfection shall be demonstrated by bacteriological testing conducted in accordance with
"Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Sewage" for the coli -aerogenes group, by a commercial
laboratory approved by the FDEP, and acceptable to the Engineer and the city, or may be completed by the
Pinellas County Health Department.
All pipe, fittings, valves, and all other appurtenances installed for use in potable water pipelines shall be
disinfected prior to being placed in service. Disinfection procedures shall be approved by the Engineer and
the city and shall be in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C651, latest revision. Contractor shall comply
with all General Notes on the Drawings and special requirements that are included with the FDEP permit
related to disinfection and clearance of new potable water mains.
Pipe subjected to contaminating materials shall be treated in a manner approved by the Engineer and the
city. Should such treatment fail to remove contaminants from the pipe, contaminated sections of pipe shall
be replaced with new uncontaminated pipe.
Only potable water from an existing city water main shall be used for disinfection and final flushing of new
potable water pipelines. The potable water shall be obtained as described below in Section 508 of these
Technical Specifications.
Disinfection Procedure: Disinfection of a completed potable water pipeline shall be accomplished using
the following procedure:
A. All water piping, fittings, valves, and appurtenances shall be disinfected with a chlorine solution
with a sufficient concentration such that the initial chlorine concentration in the water line shall be
a minimum of 75 mg/1 available chlorine, at any point in the line, and that a chlorine residual of not
less than 30 mg/1 remains in the water, at any point in the line, after standing 24 hours in the
pipeline. The contact period may be longer than 24 -hours, if required by the city or the Engineer
SECTION IV
Page 125 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being disinfection shall be opened and closed several
times during the contact period.
B. Chlorine may be applied to the water pipeline as a liquid 10% sodium hypochlorite solution, or as
a mixture of water and high-test calcium hypochlorite. The Contractor shall assume responsibility
for safe handling of chlorinating agents and shall meet requirements of OSHA and other regulatory
agencies for safe handling of chlorinating agents.
C. The dry high-test calcium hypochlorite (HTH) may be used to make up a high concentration
chlorine solution which will be used for disinfection. The hypochlorite solution to be used for
disinfection should be mixed based on the HTH manufacturer's recommendations. Under no
circumstances will undiluted, dry calcium hypochlorite be placed in the pipeline to be disinfected.
D. The chlorine solution, either 10% sodium hypochlorite or a calcium hypochlorite mixed solution,
shall be metered into the pipeline with a small metering pump.
E. Disinfection of Valves, Blind Flanges and Appurtenances: Swab exposed interior surfaces of valves
and blind flanges with a 10% sodium hypochlorite solution prior to installation and bolting in place.
F. Disinfection of Tapping Sleeves, Tapping Valves and Line Stops: Flush exterior of pipe with
potable water after removal of existing coating. Swab exterior of pipe and interior of tapping,
sleeve, tapping valve and line stop valve with a 10% sodium hypochlorite solution. Disinfect per
AWWA C651, Section 4.8. After completion of tapping and line stopping, swab interior of pipe,
valves, and faces of flanges to be connected to bypass piping with a 10% sodium hypochlorite
solution.
G. Disinfection of Connections to Existing Pipelines: Disinfect isolation valves, pipe, and
appurtenances per AWWA C651, Section 4.7. Flush with potable water until discolored water,
mud, and debris are eliminated. Swab interior of pipe and fittings with a 10% sodium hypochlorite
solution. Following disinfection procedures, flush with potable water again until water is free of
chlorine odor.
H. Water from the existing, in-service water line shall be made to flow at a constant, slow rate into the
water line to be disinfected. A jumper connection from the existing potable water main to the new
water main, utilizing a reduced pressure principle backflow preventer approved by the city, shall
be used to obtain water for disinfection. Chlorine solution shall be injected or pumped at a regulated
rate into the new main, at a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new
water main. The method of tapping the water main for the chlorine injection point and the location
of the tap shall be approved by the Engineer and the city.
I. Proportion the two rates so that the chlorine concentration in the pipeline is maintained at a
minimum concentration of 75 mg/L. Check the concentration at points downstream during the
filling to ascertain that sufficient chlorine is being added.
J. Chlorine solution shall be circulated in the water main by opening the water control valve and
systematically manipulating valves, fire hydrants and blowoffs.
K. Water service lines, if applicable, shall be disinfected in a similar manner as that for water mains,
including corrective measures, by methods acceptable to the Engineer and the city.
L. Chlorine solution shall remain in the water lines for not less than 24 -hours, but longer than 24 -
hours, if directed by the Engineer or the city.
M. Extreme care shall be exercised at all times to prevent concentrated chlorine solution from entering
existing water mains.
If methods of disinfection used by the Contractor differ materially from those outlined above, such methods
shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency.
SECTION IV
Page 126 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 506-4. FLUSHING AND RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After 24 -hours, or when approved by the Engineer and the city, the free residual chlorine concentration in
the water line at the pipe extremity sample points shall be checked to make sure the free residual chlorine
concentration is at least 30 mg/1; if not, the water lines shall be re -disinfected as described above.
Final flushing of lines with potable water may proceed after 24 hours, or when approved by the Engineer
and the city, provided the free residual chlorine analysis is satisfactory at 30 mg/L or above. Flushing shall
be continued until a chlorine residual test shows that the pipelines contain only the normal chlorine residual
in the feed potable water, not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in
accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test kit. Prior to flushing water with high chlorine
concentrations, obtain approvals from the Engineer and the Owner as to the methods and locations of
discharge.
City inspector/CEI must certify and submit all residual chlorine test results to the city Project Manager
within 10 days of performing test(s).
•
•
506-5. BACTERIALOGICAL TESTS
Following disinfection and thorough flushing of the water lines, as specified herein, the Contractor, and/or
the city Public Utilities Department Water Division (or the Engineering Department), shall furnish all labor
and materials required to obtain samples of water from the potable water line, at established remote
sampling points approved by the FDEP, properly collected in suitable sterilized containers obtained from
the Pinellas County Health Department or an analytical laboratory approved by the city and certified by the
Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. Proper
techniques and procedures shall be used to collect the water samples to avoid outside contamination
resulting in a false positive coliform result. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of
bacteriological samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sample collection and shall be followed
in all respects.
Two (2) series of successive samples shall be obtained at each established sampling point in accordance
with AWWA C651, Section 5.1, to obtain a bacteriological quality test result to demonstrate the absence
of coliform bacteria in each separate section of the pipeline being tested after chlorination, flushing and
refilling. Each test series will require two samples at each sampling point. The period between each series
of samples shall be a minimum of 24 -hours. Samples shall be delivered by the Contractor to the County
Health Department or the approved analytical laboratory for bacteriological examination within 6 hours of
obtaining the samples. Samples shall be collected in conformance with the County Health Department
standards and lab testing schedule. Prior to collecting samples, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and
the city, who will have representatives present during bacteriological sample collection.
Collect at least one set of samples from every 1,000 feet of the new water main and line stopping insertion
point, plus one set from the end of the line and at least one set from each branch. At each connection to an
existing pipeline, take two additional samples.
Bacteriological test results will be available approximately 48- to 72 -hours after samples have been
submitted to the testing laboratory. If test results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall immediately re -
chlorinate and retest the water lines as described above and proceed with such corrective measures as are
necessary to secure disinfected lines. All services shall be re -chlorinated if the lines are re -chlorinated. The
water lines shall be re -disinfected and re -tested, at the Contractor's expense, until approved by the Engineer,
the city, and the Pinellas County Health Department or FDEP, as applicable.
At satisfactory completion of the bacteriological test requirements, potable water pipelines shall be placed
into service in a manner approved by the Engineer and the city Engineering Department. Complete the
pipeline where temporary disinfection or test facilities were installed. Potable water mains shall not be
SECTION IV
Page 127 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
placed into service until all requirements of the State and Pinellas County Public Health Departments are
met, and the Letter of Clearance is obtained from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection
(FDEP). The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the city at least 72 hours prior to placing potable
water pipelines into service.
The city Inspector/CEI shall certify and submit all bacteriological test results to the city Project Manager
within 10 days of performing the test(s) as required by the Florida Department of Environmental Protection.
507. CORRECTION OF NON -CONFORMING WORK
All non -conforming work shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional expense to the
city. Non -conforming work shall be defined as failure to adhere to any specific or implied directive of this
Project Manual and/or the drawings, including but not limited to paid not laid straight, true to the lines and
grades as shown on the drawings, damaged or unacceptable materials, misalignment or diameter ring
deflection in pipe due to bedding or backfilling, visible or detectable leakage and failure to pass any
specified test or inspection.
508. OBTAINING WATER FOR FLUSHING AND TESTING
The potable water supply shall be protected with an air gap or a reduced pressure principle backflow
preventer approved by the city if potable water is used for flushing and testing. Only potable water shall be
use for flushing and pressure testing of potable water pipelines. Reclaimed water may be used for flushing
and pressure testing of reclaimed water lines or wastewater force mains.
The city will provide the water required for city Projects. The Contractor shall coordinate with the city for
a temporary construction water service connection, intended for usage during flushing and testing.
For private development projects the Contractor will need to obtain temporary potable water service during
construction, the Contractor shall be required to pay for the installation and for the water used. The piping,
fittings, backflow preventer, and appurtenances required for the temporary construction water service shall
be supplied by the city of Clearwater.
509. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
509-1. GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the
work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work
as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and
materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the
cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work unless otherwise specified:
• Clearing and grubbing
• Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
• Shoring and/or dewatering
• Structural fill
• Backfill
• Grading
• Tracer wire
• Refill materials
• Joint materials
SECTION IV
Page 128 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
• Tests and sterilization
• Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
509-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
509-2.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily
furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipeline, including the length of
valves and fittings.
509-2.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and
equipment, and constructing the water mains completely and ready for operation.
509-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
509-3.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the actual number of size and type of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily
furnished and installed.
509-3.2. PAYMENT
IIIIPayment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials,
and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
•
509-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH
BOXES AND COVERS
509-4.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and
installed.
509-4.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor,
materials, and equipment and installing the gate valve complete with valve box and cover, concrete pad and
valve disc, including any jointing materials and any restraint devices required.
509-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
509-5.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The
only hydrants allowed to be installed in the city utilities system are listed in Section 502-5 of these Technical
Specifications. No exceptions.
SECTION IV
Page 129 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
509-5.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and
equipment and installing the fire hydrant assembly complete including all necessary anchor tees, swivel -
type thrust anchorage, 6 -inch ductile iron pipe between the main and the fire hydrant and gate valve(s) and
valve boxes and covers, concrete pad(s) and valve disc(s) on the hydrant branch line and , including any
jointing materials and any restraint devices required.
SECTION IV
Page 130 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 600 SERIES: STORMWATER
•
•
601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES
Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the
Engineer.
601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
602. UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub -surface drainage pipe as directed in the Scope of Work and detail
drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a
bed of #6 FDOT aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-
degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and
screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on
the plans, underdrain pipe shall be eight inches (8") in diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance
with ASTM F758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest
revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with
AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-1.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM
D3034 - SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe that exceeds
ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM
F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe
is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non -perforated pipe with
compacted backfill. All poly -chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultraviolet
radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified
for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in
a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi® 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings.
Filter aggregate for underdrains shall be as specified in the FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 901 —
Coarse Aggregate, and shall be either #6 or #57. If #57 is used, it must be washed and screened to remove
fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel.
602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of linear feet of eight inch (8") Sub -drain in place and accepted.
602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall
be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe,
SECTION IV
Page 131 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be
paid by a separate bid item.
603. STORM SEWERS
All storm drainpipe installed within the city shall be steel reinforced concrete unless otherwise approved
by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 ofFDOT Standard Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi® 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as
approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the
pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found
in fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and
the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit.
Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each
joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide, and pipe is clear throughout.
603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a watertight sewer under all conditions.
The work under this Section shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage pipes
and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the city with a video of the completed stormwater
drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the pipes and drainage
structures, to the satisfaction of the city, prior to video recording. The video shall be of the standard DVD
format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded as audio on the DVD. The data should
include:
1. An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths.
2. The drainage structure number and pipe size.
3. The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S-1 to S-2).
4. Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions, and infiltration.
The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously.
All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in accordance with
Section 430-4.8 of FDOT Standard Specifications. Any deficient or damaged pipe discovered during the
video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace at their own expense
within the contractual duration.
As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of concern in
electronic (computer CD/DVD) and hard copy form (in color).
All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by the
Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage structures
rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re-laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe that are repaired,
re-laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction video inspection at the
Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re -inspection shall be required at the Contractor's
expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved.
603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along
the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage
SECTION IV
Page 132 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe
(i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, gravel bedding if needed for stabilization, labor, and
incidentals, etc.).
604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR
OTHER STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to city of Clearwater Standards Details
Index Numbers 201 to 236.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and
applicable parts of these Technical Specifications, Sections 301, 302, 303 and 202, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance
of the work.
604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Built up type manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on city of
Clearwater Standard Details Index Numbers 201. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and
semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be
made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with grout.
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled, and the mortar shall be smoothed
from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with a skim coat of one-half inch (1/2") of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw
and shall not be removed with a sledgehammer.
604-2. PRECAST TYPE
Precast manholes shall be constructed as shown on city of Clearwater Standards Details Index 202. The
manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches (5") thick to secure proper
seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes
in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable.
When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C478,
or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the
distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less
than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future
adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided.
SECTION IV
Page 133 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
605-1. MATERIAL
605-1.1. PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
605-1.1.1. GABION & MATTRESS BASKETS
Gabion and mattress baskets units shall conform to ASTM A975, be of non -raveling construction and
fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the
appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.106 inches.
605-1.1.2. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than
0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from
exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial
compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall
be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 '/2 inches.
The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches.
Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.134 inches in diameter, coated
with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.174 inches. Lacing
and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087
inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing
the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot
while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced
from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge
wires.
605-1.1.3. GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL
The filler stone shall be from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative
preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing
by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability
sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and
other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones
to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and
shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the
stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. Crushed concrete shall not be
used for filler material.
605-1.1.4. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to the latest edition of FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 985.
SECTION IV
Page 134 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
411 605-2. PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as
shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid
and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and
shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and
sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section
of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to
that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width,
they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished
with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required
at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to
resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a
section of mesh is cut.
•
•
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire
shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are
alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire
shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top
selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to
the latter at front and back.
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be
filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of
each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in
each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then
be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than twelve inches (12") into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall
be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel
shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced
during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer
at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light
more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
In wet conditions, a base shall be established by spreading and compacting #57 stone prior to placement of
geotextile fabric and gabions or mattresses.
SECTION IV
Page 135 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS,
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced with the same
type of material that was destroyed or damaged, or to existing city Standards, whichever provides the
stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material,
to existing city Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the
base shall be replaced with city approved material. All replaced base shall be at least eight inches (8")
compacted thickness, or same compacted thickness as the base destroyed plus two inches (2") and
compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-180. Refer to Standard Detail Index 104.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials
and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per linear foot of main or square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include
all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard
basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the
depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All necessary restoration exceeding this footprint
will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the
proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid
for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot;
curbs - per linear foot; sidewalk four inches (4") or six inches (6") thick - per square foot. Concrete walks
at drives shall be a minimum of six inches (6") thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh.
The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of
all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
702-1. BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to
Section IV, Section 101 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base
and subgrade items.
Roadway base shall be eight inches (8") compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans
or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be twelve inches (12") compacted minimum thickness with
a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for
each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required
density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Section 204 -
Unsuitable Material Removal of the city's Technical Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer) per Section 300 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to the base that result from
a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the city's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's
expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the city approves the repaired base. The cost
for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base.
SECTION IV Page 136 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all
base and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. Shell Base: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with the latest edition of Sections 200
and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as
shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included
in the bid item price for base.
2. Limerock Base: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of
FDOT 's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the
plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall
be included in the bid item price for base. When used, Contractor is required to submit
documentation certifying the materials were obtained from a FDOT certified pit.
3. Crushed Concrete Base: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with the latest
edition of Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT
approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the
crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum
of 100. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for
continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City
Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
4. Superpave Asphalt Base: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with the latest
edition of Section 234 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be
included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base.
5. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base: Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) base shall be
constructed in accordance with the latest edition of Section 283 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications
and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. As per FDOT Section 283,
RAP material shall be used as a base course only on non -limited access paved shoulders, shared
use paths, or other non -traffic bearing applications. The cost for preparation, placement, and
compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project
scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base.
702-1.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED
BASE
The basis of measurement shall be the number of cubic yards of base in place and accepted as called for on
the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall
either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so, approved in writing by the City
Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in
place.
702-1.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction,
finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing,
equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt
base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and
plans.
SECTION IV
Page 137 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
702-2. SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with the latest edition of Sections 160 and
914 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum
compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock
is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT 's Standard Specifications. Where
unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Section 204 - Unsuitable Material
Removal of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by
the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing,
grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per
the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall
obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value of the subgrade after the materials are
mixed for the stabilized subgrade and provide the results to the Engineer.
702-2.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of cubic yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted
as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per the latest edition
of Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per the latest
edition of Section 160-7.2 of FDOT 's Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing
values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so, approved in writing
by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that
are left in place.
702-2.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing,
testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete
the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base.
703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all asphaltic concrete materials on roadway
surfaces unless otherwise noted.
703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
703-1.1. AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to the latest edition of
Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
703-1.2. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to the latest edition of Section 916 of FDOT 's Standard
Specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 138 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
• 703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
•
•
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall
conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise noted,
all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of
Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The city shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the
expense of the city, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests and analyses
shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with
the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and
accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or
investigation by the city, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such
independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair
of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor.
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following:
1. Density per FDOT's Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per FDOT's Standard Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of /4" or greater shall be corrected
by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length
extending at least twenty-five feet (25') from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer
allows for an overlay per FDOT's Standard Specifications. In addition, for excesses of one-quarter
inch (1/4") or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced
at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on
the thickness specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the
placement of all asphalt.
703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs, acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to
the requirements of the latest edition of Sections 330 and 334 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All asphalt
mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the paving operation.
Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete
mixes up to 25% by weight.
703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following FDOT requirements:
• Type SP/Spec 334-1
• Type FC/Spec 337-8
• Type B/Spec 234-8
• ATPB/287-8
703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface
SECTION IV
Page 139 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, Quality Control Testing, etc.) shall be in accordance
with Section 330 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications(latest edition).
703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
703-6.1. CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following
steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the
depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway
surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded
to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
703-6.2. POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES AND APPURTANENCES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be
accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. Refer to
Section 401-2 of these Technical Specifications for additional information.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
1. The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
2. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements
of ASTM A36.
3. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless-steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant
finish.
4. The use of cast iron or fiberglass risers is not permitted.
In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be
individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used.
Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original
casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the manholes are
measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is
properly applied prior to installation of each riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around
manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway
materials prior to paving. A full depth backfills using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for
backfill is not acceptable.
SECTION IV
Page 140 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
All manhole and valve box adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic
concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur
within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes
are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water
and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc., will be adjusted by the Contractor
with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said
appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the
owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments, so they are completed prior to
the scheduled paving.
703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the
Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt.
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open
to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at
their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction
areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up
and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre -wetting
to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off from sidewalks, driveways, curbs
and roadways each day before leaving the job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be
placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Tack shall also be applied to the face of all
curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling, and applying) shall be included in the per
ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as
directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The cost shall be
included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be one-quarter inch (V) above
the lip or face of said curb per City Standard Detail Index 101.
703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted.
Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. The scales must be calibrated and
certified by an independent party and carry a state certification.
703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured
above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either
required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair,
sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work
in accordance with the plans and specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 141 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Section applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with
the following provisions:
1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies
more than ten percent (10%) from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be
used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address
is: https://www.fdot.gov/construction/fuel-bit/fuel-bit.shtm For additional information, call FDOT
at (850) 414-4252.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the
initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used
for payment calculation.
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the
FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any
month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The city reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing asphalt driveways that must be altered for project construction shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that
the base shall be six inches (6"). Remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street. Use
Section 703 Asphaltic Concrete, of these Technical Specifications, as specified for the street paving.
When the finished surface of the existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment
shall be the same as Asphalt Driveways.
705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yards of Asphalt Driveways in place and accepted.
705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Asphalt Driveways as measured above, which price shall
be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
706. CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless
otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of
3000 psi at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed a hundred feet (100') and
scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed ten feet (10'). In addition, all the requirements of
these city Technical Specifications Sections 301, 302 and 303 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify
the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete
curbs.
SECTION IV
Page 142 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
The finished surface must have a reasonably uniform texture, must be within 1/4 inch of a true profile grade,
and must have no deviation in excess of 1/4 inch from a straight edge applied to the pavement perpendicular
to the centerline. Areas varying from a true surface in excess of the above stated tolerance may be accepted
without correction if the Engineer determines that they were caused by preexisting conditions which could
not reasonably have been corrected by the milling operations. Any unsuitable texture or profile, as
determined by the Engineer, must be corrected by the Contractor at no additional expense to the city.
706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be linear feet of curb in place and accepted.
706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work
described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment,
tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein
specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a
minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"),
except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10
welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh
shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100
hundred feet and scoring marks shall be made every five feet (5'). Concrete shall be poured only on
compacted subgrade prepared in accordance with Section 702 of these Technical Specifications. In addition,
all the requirements of Sections 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply.
707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six inches (6") in
thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between
expansion joints of no less than four feet (4') measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire
mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade prepared in accordance
with Section 702 of these Technical Specifications. In addition, all the requirements of Sections 301, 302
and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the
placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
SECTION IV
Page 143 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS
The contractor is responsible for constructing ADA compliant concrete curb ramps per the plans and
installing detectable warning surfaces on said ramps as called for in the plan set. Concrete curb ramps and
detectable warning surfaces are to be constructed per FDOT Standards and Specifications.
707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of four inch (4") concrete sidewalk, six inch
(6") concrete sidewalk, and six inch (6") concrete driveways in place and accepted.
707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which shall be full
compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall
include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary
to complete the work.
708. MILLING OPERATIONS
708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Section, the milling operation shall be performed in
accordance with Section 327 of FDOT 's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the city
Project Manager a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all milling.
708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
The following are the additional milling requirements:
A. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the Contractor is responsible to secure
any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations
governing operation of this type of equipment.
B. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven (7) days from the time it was milled, unless
otherwise noted in the contract documents.
C. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum
or the mechanical type that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped
with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep
debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site.
D. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow
for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or
median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be
included in the bid item for milling.
F. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
G. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as
noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications
The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project
scope and plans.
SECTION IV
Page 144 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
H. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same
day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications. Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely
manner shall be done to the city's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the
exposed base can commence until the city approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall
be included in the bid item for milling.
I. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling
operation is complete.
708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified, all salvageable materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the
property of the city. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the city Project Manager to schedule delivery of material at least
48 hours prior to starting work.
708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the city shall become the responsibility of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the city.
708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND
UTILITIES
All private utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners
at the owner's expense. city -owned utilities and structures shall be located by the Owner/City and adjusted
by the contractor. The Contractor shall arrange their schedule to allow utility owners the time required for
such adjustments (minimum 48 hours' notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed
prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations.
708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be
accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Sections 703-7 of the city's Technical
Specifications.
708-7. TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the city:
A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot (6') wide strip along the curb line of the pavement
adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross
section.
B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb
line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise
indicated or approved by the Engineer.
SECTION IV
Page 145 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or
improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately fifty (50) feet from
the low point of the existing Swale.
708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of
salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and
intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt
from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance
with the plans and specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 146 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
• 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND
MARKINGS
•
•
801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 603 through 699,
unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials,
guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect
cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal
assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller
assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally
illuminated signs.
All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm
Assembly standard and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of
Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a
professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and
approved by the city's Traffic Engineering Division prior to ordering from the manufacturer.
All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LEDs and, approved by both the city's
Traffic Engineering Division and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize
countdown features.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is prohibited unless directed by the city's Traffic
Engineering Division.
All damaged inductive loop detectors shall be restored by the contractor per FDOT Index 17781.
801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall
include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the
plans.
802. SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per most current FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless
otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work:
RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings
(Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall
be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these
incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the city's
satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
The Contractor is responsible for restoring all striping in paint and reflective beading per the FDOT indices
mentioned above. The city's Traffic Engineering department shall follow up with thermoplastic striping at
a later date unless otherwise specified.
SECTION IV
Page 147 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall
include all equipment, preparation, materials, and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans.
803. ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per most current Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall
include all equipment, materials, testing, and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans.
SECTION IV
Page 148 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION
901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction
progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration activities within a reasonable time following
primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time
shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial
payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or
disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The Contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and
all phases of the contract work. The Contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses
except as the Contractor shall obtain written permission.
902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
902-1. IRRIGATION
902-1.1. DESCRIPTION
• A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation
system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities
required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system as indicated
on the drawings and/or specifications. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included
in this pay item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape
areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the
irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer.
•
902-1.1.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting
company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure,
controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FEDSPEC Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building
codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply.
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly, and responsible manner with the
recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which
does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest
possible time at the Contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within
ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders,
with three rings and a USB with the electronic design files (including the irrigation As Builts),
containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the Contractor's address and business telephone number, twenty-four (24) hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of
SECTION IV
Page 149 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be
purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the city maintenance staff with a written the Operations Manual and
"hands on" training for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the
conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Irrigation Zones equipment operation and
maintenance.
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance.
902-1.1.2. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the
location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation of twenty-
four -inch (24") diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials during the construction period.
C. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the
Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular
maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to
initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic
signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the
safety of its employees and the public.
902-1.1.3. WARRANTY
A. The Contractor(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one
(1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the city. Should any problems develop
within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, the Contractor shall be corrected at no
expense to the city.
902-1.2. PRODUCTS
902-1.2.1. GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the
specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
902-1.2.2. PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in
accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to
ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required
to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80 per detail drawings.
902-1.2.3. PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material
designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe
SECTION IV
Page 150 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded
Schedule 80 nipples.
902-1.2.4. PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the
manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. Submit to the city Project Manager for
approval. The solvent that cement that should be used is 303 PVC Cement Regular Clear.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings have been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall
be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. The purple primer cleaner for PVC
is 8800.
902-1.2.5. THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
902-1.2.6. GATE VALVES
902-1.2.6.1. MANUAL GATE VALVES TWO INCHES (2") AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. Nibco Brass Body Construction, female threaded on both sides, sized appropriately to source pipe
- with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Slip/Threaded Coupler
4. Schedule 80 Nipple
III
902-1.2.6.2. GATE VALVES TWO AND A HALF INCHES (21/2") AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA-0509
2. 200 lb. O.W.G.
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with two inches (2") square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve three inches (3") and larger. The "street key" shall be five
feet (5') long with a two inch (2") square operating nut.
902-1.2.7. SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by city of Clearwater)
1. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility
and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
B. Schedule 80 or higher, sized two (2) times the diameter of pipe to be sleeved
•
902-1.2.8. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The electric globe remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated; balance -pressure across -the -
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate per manufacturer's recommendations with a pressure loss
not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (psi). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi.
Submit to the city Project Manager for approval.
SECTION IV
Page 151 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel,
and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable
santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a one -inch (1"), 1 1/2", 2", 3" (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one -inch (1")
female threaded inlet and outlet for threaded connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of
the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Irritrol or approved equal. Any valve that is 3" or larger than
must submit to the city Project Manager for approval.
F. Identify all control valves using Aluminum or Bronze metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
G. All electric valves to have gate valves on source side of each valve.
902-1.2.9. VALVE BOXES
A. For electronic irrigation valves use a Brooks #36 concrete valve box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing
cover or approved equal.
B. For wire splices and gate valves use a Carson with T cover (Heavy Duty) ten inch (10") circular valve
box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks or approved equal. The color of the lids need to be
Pantone 522C if reclaimed.
902-1.2.10. AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only.
The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared
connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground.
The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the
transmitter shall function if submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof
operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be
securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the
number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or
independently.
D. The controller shall have three (3) independent programs with eight (8) start times each, station run
time capability from one (1) minute to twelve (12) hours in one (1) minute increments, and a seven (7)
day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual
operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming
a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA.
Submit to the city Project Manager for approval.
902-1.2.11. FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter)
only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection or
over air. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable,
reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery.
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound
shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in
use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules
or A/C placed times, whichever is applicable.
SECTION IV
Page 152 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
E. Field transmitter to be provided to city Parks and Recreation at time of acceptance of project.
F. Submit to the city Project Manager for approval.
902-1.3. EXECUTION
902-1.3.1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on
site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent
of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in Contractor's absence and all
directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside
authorities.
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned
in these Technical Specifications.
F. No irrigation piping or any irrigation component shall be installed in a retention pond bottom or slopes
or passing through retention pond. No piping shall be 12" from top of bank.
G. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or
clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the
Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In the event the installation contradicts
the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
H. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment
is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall
employ all data contained in the Contract Documents and shall verify this information at the
construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation.
I. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or
grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered.
All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer.
J. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway
base installation.
902-1.3.2. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
902-1.3.2.1. TRENCHING - GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight(vertically). Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings.
B. Maintain six inch (6") horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines
of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain six inch (6") vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45° to 90°.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching, and working near existing utilities.
902-1.3.2.2. BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have eighteen inches (18") of fill placed over the pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than one
• half inch (1/4").
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Standard Specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 153 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs before landscape installation begins.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO
T180. Under landscaped areas, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density.
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand
tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six inches (6") thick. The
hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square
inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent
utilities.
902-1.3.2.3. ROUTING OF PIPING
A. Routing of pressure and non -pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings.
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Engineer and/or city any major deviation from routing indicated.
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line.
D. Layout all systems using an approved staking method and maintain the staking of approved layout.
902-1.3.3. INSTALLATION
902-1.3.3.1. WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make
minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the city.
902-1.3.3.2. ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and
required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When
used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accordance with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Specifications.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only.
902-1.3.3.3. SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The Contractor shall verify the location and size of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility
and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies before work begins.
902-1.3.3.4. PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least fifteen (15) minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on.
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four (4) hours has elapsed for solvent weld
setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer.
C. Curing
1. When the temperature is above 80°F, allow soluble weld joints at least twenty-four (24) hours
curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
1. After all sprinkler pipelines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush
out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
SECTION IV
Page 154 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. Refer to Section 503-2.3. of
these Technical Specifications.
2. Secure permission from the city Landscape Architect before cutting or breaking any existing
pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by city and shall be accomplished at no
additional cost.
902-1.3.3.5. CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the city's Project Manager and/or
Representative prior to installation.
902-1.3.3.6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at final grade. Set in turf areas whenever possible.
B. Install valves in turf areas in a plumb position with twenty-four inch (24") minimum maintenance
clearance from other equipment, three feet (3') minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls,
and no closer than seven feet (7') from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler
zone.
902-1.3.3.7. GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfilling.
C. Install in 10" round, Carson Heavy Duty valve box or approved equal (Pantone 522C if reclaim).
• 902-2. LANDSCAPE
902-2.1. GENERAL
•
902-2.1.1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities, and regulatory agencies,
without additional cost to the city in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which
are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by
the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
902-2.1.2. SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work
specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and
completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil
for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove
and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch
and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the
Plans.
C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the
site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform,
will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
SECTION IV
Page 155 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
902-2.1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn
subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the
Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the city and the
city Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project.
B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's
convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between
the Plans and Specifications exists, submit to the city Project Manager for approval.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in their
employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and
all subsequent amendments). City and city Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any
accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these
standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or
affects the work in this Section.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call
"One Call"/ "Sunshine 811" at 8-1-1; "Sunshine 811" administrative offices may be reached at (800)
638-4097.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as:
soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the
Landscape Architect.
902-2.1.4. SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two (2)
copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Contractor for
maintenance of landscape work for a period of one (1) year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work.
902-2.1.5. ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose
prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding.
B. The city, through their Project Manager, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated
herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the city Project Manager for any substitutions not
previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the
Contractor's risk.
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties
stated herein.
902-2.1.6. ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT.: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the
majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C.T.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage
from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear
trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
SECTION IV
Page 156 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
C. W.: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot,
trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear
wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including
extreme leaves, branches, or fronds.
ST. TR.: Straight trunk.
MIN.: Minimum.
GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 -gallon, 7 gallons, etc.
O.C.: On center, distance between plant centers.
DIA.: Diameter.
LVS.: Leaves.
D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade.
CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four -inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger
trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of
Nurserymen.
PPP: Plants per pot.
FG: Field grown.
STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is
performed.
Owner's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and
quality of materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor.
Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces
the landscape Plans and Specifications.
902-2.1.7. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
902-2.1.7.1. PLANT MATERIALS
A. Use Florida Grades and Standards (most current edition) for all plant materials within these Technical
Specifications.
B. Provide container -grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery.
Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy
natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles,
the entire load shall be suitably covered.
C. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun,
cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken
shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor
handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate root balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be
done a minimum of four (4) weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls
SECTION IV
Page 157 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport
only.
E. Palms shall be planted within twenty-four (24) hours of delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If
planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather
and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist.
G. Label all plants of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of
botanical and common name.
H. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod
against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area.
902-2.1.8. JOB CONDITIONS
902-2.1.8.1. ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub -grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which
work is to be performed and notify the city Landscape Architect or Project Manager in writing of
unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the city Landscape Architect. Start of work
shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available,
working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved
schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the city Landscape Architect for adjustments to the
Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures
before plant installations begin.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or
obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the city Landscape Architect in writing for change approval
before work is performed
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to sod installation or seeding lawns.
Protect existing lawn, trees, and promptly repair all damages from planting operations that is
satisfactory and approved by the city.
902-2.1.8.2. SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract,
the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the city's Project Manager
and/or the city Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance
with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc., in order to complete
the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs
shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the city.
C. The city's Project Manager and/or Representatives may request work stoppage in writing. Upon written
request from the city's Project Manager, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material
and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the city of Clearwater, the city's Project
Manager, or the General Contractor, with respect to any additional costs which may result from work
stoppage.
902-2.1.8.3. UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate,
as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by
others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned.
SECTION IV
Page 158 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
902-2.2. PRODUCTS
902-2.2.1. MATERIALS
902-2.2.1.1. PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A. Plant species, sizes, etc., shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Schedule.
Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey,
or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature
(latest editions) or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. The scientific and common name
both need to be provided for each plant materials.
902-2.2.1.2. PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use Florida Grades and Standards (latest edition) for all plant materials within these Technical
Specifications.
B. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of
the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy,
vigorous, and free from insects, pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be
well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
C. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may
be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Tree species must have a single main
trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or
parallel branching are not acceptable.
D. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species
as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture
and Consumer Services (latest edition).
E. The city Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth
or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size, quality,
or designated area.
F. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental
authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape
materials.
G. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit to the Landscape
Architect proof of it being non -available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an
available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change
order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount.
H. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal
crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include
immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees
and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant
material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the city Landscape Architect, with no
increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
I. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is
required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
J. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to
encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the
standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged
by improper binding and B & B procedures. Only natural biodegradable burlap will be acceptable.
K. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the
quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution.
SECTION IV
Page 159 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
L. Container -grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two
years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists.
902-2.2.1.3. GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a certified species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even
thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious weed, freshly mowed before cutting, and
pest and disease free when laid. It must not be stacked more than twenty-four (24) hours before laying
and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist
prior to and after installation through the acceptance of the project.
B. Sod shall be laid side to side with no gaps and all at level grade, so no scalping occurs. Contractor will
make changes as deemed necessary by the city before acceptance of work.
C. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination
and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
902-2.2.1.4. MULCH
A. Mulch shall be as specified in the plans
B. Install mulch to an even depth of three inches (3") before compaction, as shown in the PLANTING
DETAILS in the plans.
902-2.2.1.5. STAKES AND GUYS
A. Use the University of Florida Urban Tree Foundation Planting Details and Specifications Staking
details. Use the latest edition of the Staking Details from the Urban Tree Foundation
(http://urbantree.org/details staking.shtml)
B. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum
of three (3) stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood
connected with two — three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. Submit
to the city Project Manager for approval.
C. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
902-2.2.1.6. PLANTING SOIL
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native
soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no
additional cost to the city, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants.
Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of one-third
(1/3) peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy loam, with no lumps over one inch (1").
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a native, friable soil with known
analysis and composition that is like soil makeup. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about
6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from weeds, clay, stones,
stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a
hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil,
such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
902-2.2.1.7. TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space
vertical members six feet (6') to eight feet (8') on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect
the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a
radius of one foot (1') for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH (four and one half feet)
above grade.
SECTION IV
Page 160 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 902-2.2.1.8. ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Submit to city Project Manager and Landscape Architect for approval (if applicable).
•
•
902-2.2.1.9. PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect
materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site.
902-2.2.1.10. PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions.
902-2.3. EXECUTION
902-2.3.1. PREPARATION
902-2.3.1.1. OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation
lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities, or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting
areas or pits, the city Project Manager and Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select
a relocated position for any materials necessary.
902-2.3.1.2. GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with mutually
agreed on herbicide per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water
bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" or approved equal per the manufacturer's specifications.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than
one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed.
C. Pre -emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Rodeo" or approved equal and may
be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size,
quantity, and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the city.
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All
planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions,
lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and
provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling.
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over one- and one-half inches (1'/2") in any
dimension from individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site.
902-2.3.1.3. PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread three inches (3") of one-
third (1/3) Florida peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy, or other approved organic soil amendment over the
full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer six inches (6") to eight inches
(8") into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to ensure that surface drainage,
percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates.
902-2.3.1.4. PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's
"Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall
be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 161 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub -grade of seed
and sod areas to a minimum depth of four inches (4").
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface
assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent
curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains.
D. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface
moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition.
902-2.3.2. INSTALLATION
902-2.3.2.1. BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated
is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such
changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well -drained, free of
rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil,
such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
902-2.3.2.2. LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale
measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc., as the measuring reference
point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule
C. Leave an eighteen -inch (18") (450 millimeters) borders of mulched space between outer leaves of
installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the
approval of the city Project Manager and Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible
to the intent of the Plans.
902-2.3.2.3. PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being
circular in outline. Planting pit shall be two (2) times the width of the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, planted "high" withl0% of the root ball
height above the surrounding grade.
C. Native soil shall be used in back -filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible
for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
D. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root
ball to prevent voids. Backfill loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4
four inches (4") (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not
remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back-
fill up to the proper grade. Use the Florida Grades and Standards (latest edition). Failure to comply is
cause for rejection.
E. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball
to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled
and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the
backfill up to the proper grade.
F. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of
plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground cover adjacent to straight or curved edges shall
be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of eighteen inches (18") from
the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
SECTION IV
Page 162 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• 902-2.3.2.4. SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately
to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod
edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to
one inch (1") to one- and one-half inches (1-1/2") below top of walks prior to laying sod.
C. Within two (2) hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be
applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of two inches (2") (50 millimeters).
Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities,
and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface.
Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
D. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved
equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without
any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation
has been completed and rolled, the edges of the area shall be smooth and conform to the grades
indicated.
E. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand
shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and
voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
F. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, and as required, a geotextile fabric shall be installed per manufacturer's
specifications prior to placing sod. The sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by
other approved method.
902-2.3.2.5. SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Depai anent of Transportation. See
plan for type of seed.
902-2.3.2.6. TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Use the latest edition of the Staking Details from the Urban Tree Foundation
(http://urbantree.org/details staking.shtml). Submit to the city Project Manager for approval.
B. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees 1 year after the date of final
acceptance of the landscape work.
902-2.3.2.7. MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching.
B. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a three inch (3") layer (before compaction)
of 1.5" round pine bark nuggets or brown shredded hard wood mulch, or other mulch as specified on
the Plans or General Notes. Submit to the city Project Manager for approval.
C. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a
minimum six-inch (6") clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum six-inch (6") clearance for
the walls of buildings.
902-2.3.2.8. CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the city.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area
neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving
pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and
bracing materials as described in specifications. No pruning should be done by the contractor, but can
be done by the landscape contractor.
•
•
SECTION IV
Page 163 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
902-2.3.2.9. PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent
to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the city's and adjacent property from damage.
C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape
operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified.
902-2.3.2.10. REPAIR OF DAMAGES
A. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by their operations to other materials, property, or trades
to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
B. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by their work or employees to other
materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the
city's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage.
902-2.3.3. MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first-class condition from the beginning of
landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing,
fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials,
straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and
guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent
with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all
work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the
University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the city of any maintenance practices being
followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch (1") of water
for all planted materials before leaving the site.
902-2.3.4. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
902-2.3.4.1. INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the city or the city's Project Manager
that the job is ready for inspection. Within fifteen (15) days of notifications, the installation will be
inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the city
and/or Landscape Contractor.
902-2.3.4.2. REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the
work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in the Plans and
Specifications.
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within fifteen (15) days and notify the Landscape
Architect that the correction has been made.
902-2.3.4.3. ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material, if any, have been made, and completion of all other
correction items, the city or Project Manager will accept the project in writing.
SECTION IV
Page 164 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the city assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the
Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance
of this Contract, the city shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such
claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to
that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal,
giving the price to be added or deducted from their Contract price. The final selection rests with
the city or their representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the city reserves the right to request plant
replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not
received from the under -specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the
Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications.
902-2.3.5. WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1)
year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during
this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the city. Should any of the plant materials
show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality
or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same
with no additional cost to the city. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the
equal amount of warranty.
• 903. SODDING
•
Unless otherwise noted herein, the Contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the
direction of the Engineer, in conformance with the latest editions of Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications. The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable
depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges
in contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement.
In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent
sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than seventy-two (72) hours can be used. The city shall be
notified in advance by 2 business days and reserves the right to view and inspect the sod before installation.
A city Project Manager shall inspect the sod at the site once delivered and will not be allowed to be laid
until approved. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall
continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat,
and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not
acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation.
Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement,
rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be
withheld until the Contractor provides the city a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is
given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required
for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for
sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the city a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
SECTION IV
Page 165 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
904. SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or
mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be
brought to the required line and grade, fertilized, and seeded in basic conformance with FDOT's Standard
Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine
Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of
20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 Ib. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also
required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water),
required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called
for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included
in the cost of other work.
905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
905-1. SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and
landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm
pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to
work with the city in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the specified landscaped street
areas including:
• Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic.
• Trash and debris removal from the job site.
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces.
• Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms.
• Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted).
• Irrigation service and repair.
• Mulch replacement.
• Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
• Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the
hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The city may
grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, such as cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be
completed before leaving the job site.
SECTION IV
Page 166 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
905-3. WORK METHODS
905-3.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the city (see Level of Service). Any variations
to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized
representative of the other party.
905-3.2. DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The Contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location:
905-3.2.1. LITTER AND DEBRIS
Remove trash and debris from the project site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is the
Contractor's responsibility. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism,
etc., would be the responsibility of the city to clean up. The Contractor should report such accumulations
of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the Contractor would be
considered. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. All debris from
pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the Contractor.
905-3.2.2. VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged
plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the city within twenty-four (24) hours after
providing the service.
• 905-3.2.3. PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
•
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the
particular species. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance.
Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in
Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb.
Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower
formation, consistent with the following specification.
1. PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.):
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads
that are encountered in the pruning process; and remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation, such
as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk.
Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms.
905-3.2.3.1. TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the Contractor,
according to the approved Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
905-3.2.3.2. PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are
present. The city reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas.
SECTION IV
Page 167 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
905-3.2.4. WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed
control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified
applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by Contractor at their expense.
905-3.2.5. MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture,
usually three inches (3").
905-3.2.6. IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the system's proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should
be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks
or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time.
905-3.2.7. LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than
damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the
Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on city properties.
905-3.2.8. PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three (3) pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root
zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
905-3.2.9. FREEZE PROTECTION
The city will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive
plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a city facility. Contractor will remove
the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the
material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The city will furnish metal pins needed for securing
fabric to the ground. The city will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum
prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and
return it to the designated city facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or
remain in place as directed by the city. The city shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing
the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The city may cancel the freeze
protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor
will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-
hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering
fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The city and Contractor will
coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the
Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the city.
906. LEVEL OF SERVICE
The Project Site is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within seven (7)
working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six (6) and no further than
ten (10) calendar days apart.
SECTION IV
Page 168 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV—Technical Specifications
• 907. COMPLETION OF WORK
Within twenty-four (24) hours of completing work, notify the city Project Manager either in writing of said
completion and request the substantial completion letter.
•
•
908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the city shall inspect the serviced location the following
business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the city shall contact the
Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given forty-eight (48)
hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully
then the city will pay for services billed.
909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a twelve (12) month period
on plants, trees, and palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the
Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be
responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as they feel appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
3. All work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and
standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the
Contractor or their employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the
damage and cost of repair. The city shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce
by the amount of the repairs on the next regular payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may
make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify
the city Supervisor of such occurrences and shall schedule to perform the required work to the location
as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved.
910. TREE PROTECTION
910-1. TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or
construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas.
Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species.
3. At or greater than two-thirds (2/3) of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch (2") lumber for upright posts.
Upright posts are to be at least four feet (4') in length with a minimum of one foot (1') anchored in the
ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet (8') apart. Horizontal rails
are to be constructed using no less than one -inch (1") by four -inch (4") lumber and shall be securely
attached to the top of the upright post. The city's Project Manager must approve any variation from the
above requirements.
SECTION IV
Page 169 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated.
The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native
ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout
construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by
other means if authorized in writing by the city's Project Manager
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall
be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or
litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or
construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected
tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section,
and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
910-2. ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone
of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture
(ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of
construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing
or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where
grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning
equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw,
chain saw, or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or
excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted
by construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") below existing
grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than eighteen inches (18") from existing grade. Any
questions should be addressed to the city's Project Manager.
B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of
Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and
approved by the city's Project Manager and/or Representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at
a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures
should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning
activities.
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches (10") per one inch (1") of the trunk diameter
from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the city's Project Manager prior to said root
pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a
minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less
than eighteen inches (18").
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a root cutting machine specifically designed for this purpose.
Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the city's Project Manager, prior to any work
adjacent to trees to be preserved.
I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected, and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation
or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots
must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation or tunneled around to prevent
damage to the root.
SECTION IV
Page 170 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and
kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the city Project Manager may require a
temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning
requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to
open trenching.
910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the
direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all
tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National
Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub, and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard
practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning
cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper
techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on
the project in a healthy growing condition and will require replacement consistent with the current City
Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code.
C. No protected tree shall have more than thirty percent (30%) of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked, or lion tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly
pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code.
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and
bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a
manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition and will
require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development
Code.
911. IRRIGATION SYSTEM DESIGN
The requirements for Irrigation System Design are the following:
A. The application rate must not exceed the ability of the soil to absorb and retain the water applied during
any one application.
B. The design operating pressure must not be greater than the available source pressure.
C. The design operating pressure must account for peak use times and supply line pressures at final
buildout for the entire system.
D. Distribution devices and pipes should be designed for optimum uniform coverage. The first and last
distribution device should have no more than a 10% difference in flow rate. This usually corresponds
to about a 20% difference in pressure.
E. "Head to head" placement of sprinklers to achieve 100% coverage.
F. Flexibility must exist to meet a site's peak water requirements and allow for the modification of the
system's operation to meet seasonal irrigation changes or local restrictions.
G. Distribution equipment (such as pop -ups, rotors, bubblers and drip) in a given zone must have the same
precipitation rate.
H. Turf and landscape areas should be zoned separately based on plant water requirements. Bubblers, drip,
rotors and pop -ups will all be on separate zones.
I. All water delivery devices (heads, tree bubblers, valves) shall be free of buried obstructions 8-10"
below each device to be acceptable.
SECTION IV
Page 171 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
J. Install valves in Turf areas where possible
K. Install all irrigation heads at finish grade unless approved by Parks and Rec. before installation.
L. The design package should include a general irrigation schedule with recommendations and instructions
on modifying the schedule for local climatic and growing conditions.
M. If required by plant species, the design should account for the need to leach out salt buildup from poor
quality water.
N. Water supply systems (such as wells and pipelines) should be designed for varying control devices, and
backflow prevention.
O. Water conveyance systems should be designed with thrust blocks and air release valves, such that flow
velocity is 5 feet per second or less.
P. Pipelines should be designed to provide the system with the appropriate pressure required for maximum
irrigation uniformity.
Q. Pressure regulating or compensating equipment must be used where the system pressure exceeds the
manufacturer's recommendations.
R. Equipment with check valves must be used in low areas to prevent low head drainage.
S. A rain -sensing device must be used to automatically shut off system when raining.
T. Non -planted areas, including impervious surfaces should not be irrigated.
U. The city of Clearwater, Parks and Beautification must approve irrigation plan before irrigation
construction begins.
912. IRRIGATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
The requirements for Irrigation System Installation are the following:
A. Only qualified specialists under the direct supervision of a "Certified Irrigation Designer" or a
"Certified Irrigation Contractor" should install the irrigation system. Certifications are through "The
Irrigation Association".
B. The construction must be consistent with the design.
C. The designer must approve any design changes before construction.
D. Construction and materials should meet existing standards and criteria.
E. Mainline — To be laid with tracking wire / tape firmly attached throughout project. Leave 18" of excess
cable at terminal ends in 6" round valve boxes. See Parks and Rec Irrigation Spec page for type.
F. Sleeve size will be 2 times the diameter of pipe to be sleeved. Example 1.5" feed pipe dia. = 3" sleeve
diameter.
G. Acceptable safety practices must be followed during construction.
H. All underground cables, pipes and other obstacles should be identified, and their locations flagged.
I. Obtain all permits before construction.
J. Always give the city Engineering and Parks & Recreation Department a copy of the As -Built plans,
operating manuals, warranties, and written instructions on how to change the irrigation system's
timers/clock/controllers.
K. At the end of construction, the site must be cleaned of all construction materials.
SECTION IV
Page 172 of 172 Updated 6/2/2021
•
SECTION IVA
EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP STATION REHABILITATION PROJECT
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(PROJECT No. 13 -0016 -UT)
PREPARED FOR:
v4t,
This item has been digitally signed and
sealed by Loc P. Truong, P.E. on the date
adjacent to the seal.
inted copies of this document are not
sidered signed and sealed and the
nature must be verified on any
electronic copies.
CLEARWATER
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
100 SOUTH MYRTLE AVENUE
CLEARWATER, FL 33756
PREPARED BY:
/\\/
ARDURRA
ARDURRA GROUP, INC.
4921 MEMORIAL HIGHWAY, SUITE 300
TAMPA, FL 33634
Bid Documents
September 2023
•
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01014 SUMMARY OF WORK
01015 CONTROL OF WORK
01016 CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01030 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01040 COORDINATION
01050 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01065 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS
• 01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01153 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01200 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01300 SUBMITTALS
01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND
SAMPLES
01385 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01410 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01505 MOBILIZATION
• 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01625 START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01640 QUALITY CONTROL
01670 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01710 CLEANING
01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
DIVISION 02 SITEWORK
02062 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND
EQUIPMENT
02140 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02221 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02222 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
02485 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCING
03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03350 MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03480 PRECAST CONCRETE
03600 GROUT
- iv -
•
•
•
• 03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
DIVISION 05 METALS
05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
09865 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09900 PAINTING
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
13208 SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMPS
13280 NOZZLE SPRAY SYSTEM
13290 LARGE BUBBLE MIXING SYSTEM
• 13305 CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
13340 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13567 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15094 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15242 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
• 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
-v-
16110 RACEWAYS
16120 WIRES AND CABLES
16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES, CONTROL PANELS, AND FITTINGS
16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
16143 WIRING DEVICES
16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES
16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16452 GROUNDING
16480 MOTORS
- vi -
•
•
•
•1 SECTION 01005
2
3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Description
10
11 The work to be completed consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials
12 and equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract.
13 At all times during the project the Water Reclamation Facility (WRF) shall
14 remain in service. Throughout the project, the Contractor shall cooperate
15 fully with operations staff in order to minimize disruption to facility
16 operations. No facility or structure shall be taken out of service, except
17 those specifically scheduled to be renovated or demolished, without the
18 prior written approval of the Owner or Engineer. Plant operations and
19 regulatory compliance will take priority over and may impact the
20 construction schedule.
21
22 B. The construction period for this project is four hundred fifty (450) consecutive
23 calendar days until Substantial Completion, followed by an additional thirty
• 24 (30) consecutive calendar days for Final Completion.
25
26 C. Work Included
27
28 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plants,
29 power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies and
30 other means of construction necessary or proper for performing and
31 completing the Work. The Contractor shall perform and complete the Work
32 in the manner best calculated to promote rapid construction consistent with
33 safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in
34 strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall clean
35 up the Work and maintain it during and after construction, until accepted,
36 and shall do all work and pay all costs incidental thereto. The Contractor
37 shall repair or restore all structures and property that may be damaged or
38 disturbed during performance of the Work.
39
40 The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for
41 which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of
42 the general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices for the
43 various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore.
44
45 The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and
•46 equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-1 09/28/2023
1 in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this •
2 Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency
3 shall be used. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy
4 of his workmanship, materials and equipment, prior review of the Engineer
5 notwithstanding.
6
7 D. Public Utility Installation and Structures
8
9 Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all
10 poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vaults,
11 manholes and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto
12 whether owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies or
13 privately owned by individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the
14 public with transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone,
15 sewerage, drainage, water or other public or private property which may be
16 affected by the work shall be deemed included hereunder.
17
18 The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from
19 damage during the work. Access across any buried public utility installation,
20 or structure, shall be made only in such locations and by means reviewed
21 by the Engineer. The Contractor shall so arrange their operations as to
22 avoid any damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and
23 construction shall be provided by the Contractor at their expense. All
24 existing public utilities damaged by the Contractor, which are shown on the
25 Plans or have been located in the field by the utility, shall be repaired by the
26 Contractor, at their expense, as directed by the Engineer. No separate
27 payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to public utility
28 installations or structures.
29
30 Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or
31 other governmental body, which are shown on the Plans to be removed,
32 relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part
33 of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid
34 for the various contract items. No separate payment shall be made
35 therefore.
36
37 Where public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the
38 Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the course of
39 the Work, and are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, and
40 when, in the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement or
41 rebuilding is necessary to complete the work under this Contract, such work
42 shall be accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be
43 ordered, in writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such
44 work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out
45 expeditiously and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the
46 utility to complete the removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding as
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-2 09/28/2023
•
•
•1 required. If such work is accomplished by the Contractor, it will be in
2accordance with the General and Supplemental General Conditions.
3
4 The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner and other governmental
5 utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the locations of
6 their proposed construction operations, at least forty-eight hours in advance
7 of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the work.
8
9 The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility
10 installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein
11 provided, shall be done by methods reviewed by the Engineer.
12
13 1.02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
14
15 A. Drawings
16
17 When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be
18 used in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in
19 preference to small scale drawings.
20
21 B. Copies Furnished to Contractor
22
23The Engineer may incorporate the addenda into a set of "conformed"
•24 drawings and specifications, and may provide one electronic copy of each
25 to the Contractor. The conformed drawings and specifications shall not
26 supersede the Contract Documents provided to the Contractor. It shall be
27 the responsibility of the Contractor to check that the conformed drawings
28 and specifications properly include all revisions/addenda to the Contract
29 Documents. The Contractor shall furnish each of the subcontractors,
30 manufacturers, and suppliers such copies of the Contract Documents as
31 may be required for their work. Additional copies of the Drawings and
32 Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the Contractor at cost
33 of reproduction.
34
35 C. Supplementary Drawings
36
37 When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more
38 fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any
39 changes which may be required, Drawings known as Supplementary
40 Drawings, with Specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the
41 Engineer and copies thereof will be given to the Contractor and the Owner.
42
43 D. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data
44
45 The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on
•46 the Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-3 09/28/2023
1 data received from the Engineer and shall notify him of any errors, 1111
2 omissions, conflicts and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall
3 submit to the Engineer a Request for Information (RFI), consecutively
4 numbered, detailing all conflicts and discrepancies. Engineer shall promptly
5 provide a response to all RFIs submitted by the Contractor. Contractor will
6 not be allowed to take advantage of any conflicts and discrepancies, as full
7 instructions will be furnished by the Engineer, should such conflicts and
8 discrepancies be discovered.
9
10 E. Specifications
11
12 The Technical Specifications generally consist of three parts: General,
13 Products, and Execution. The General Section contains General
14, Requirements that govern the work. Products and Execution modify and
15 supplement these by detailed requirements for the work and shall always
16 govern whenever there appears to be a conflict.
17
18 F. Intent
19
20 All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not
21 shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like
22 effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the
23 Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or
24 in the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be
25 performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or
26 described.
27
28 The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent
29 omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be
30 done and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only
31 the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and
32 workmanship of the best quality is to be used, and interpretation of these
33 Specifications shall be made upon that basis.
34
35 The inclusion of the Related Requirements (or work specified elsewhere) in
36 the General part of the specifications is only for the convenience of the
37 Contractor, and shall not be interpreted as a complete list of related
38 Specification Sections.
39
40 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
41
42 A. Manufacturer
43
44 The names of proposed manufacturers, suppliers and dealers who are to
45 furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be
46 submitted to the Engineer for review. Such review must be obtained before
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-4 09/28/2023
•
•
•1 shop drawings will be checked. No manufacturer will be approved for any
2materials to be furnished under this Contract unless the Contractor shall be
3 of good reputation and have a plant of ample capacity. The Contractor
4 shall, upon the request of the Engineer, be required to submit evidence that
5 he has manufactured a similar product to the one specified and that it has
6 been previously used for a like purpose for a sufficient length of time to
7 demonstrate its satisfactory performance. All transactions with the
8 manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the Contractor, unless the
9 Contractor shall request, in writing to the Engineer, that the manufacturer or
10 subcontractor deal directly with the Engineer. Any such transactions shall
11 not in any way release the Contractor from his full responsibility under this
12 Contract.
13
14 Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or
15 classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made
16 by the same manufacturer.
17
18 B. Delivery
19
20 The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to ensure the most
21 speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work
22 within the allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in
23 order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any
• 24 related Contractor.
25
26 C. Tools and Accessories
27
28 The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
29 furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of
30 suitably marked high grade special tools and appliances that are needed to
31 adjust, operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools and
32 appliances shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly
33 labeled and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys.
34
35 Spare parts shall be furnished as specified. Where spare parts are
36 specified to be "manufacturer's recommended" or "as recommended by the
37 manufacturer", the Contractor shall furnish those spare parts that are
38 normally or commonly recommended by the manufacturer as shown on the
39 manufacturer's readily available literature.
40
41 Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate,
42 securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's
43 name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data.
44
45 D. Installation of Equipment
•46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-5 09/28/2023
1 The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and
III
2 machinery of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all
3 emergencies normally encountered in work of this character.
4
5 Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the
6 foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless
7 directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All equipment shall
8 be correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and
9 shall be installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made
10 readily between the various units.
11
12 The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and
13 attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of
14 the devices included in the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be as
15 reviewed by the Engineer and made of ample size and strength for the
16 purpose intended. Substantial templates and working drawings for
17 installation shall be furnished.
18
19 The Contractor shall, at their own expense, furnish all materials and labor
20 for, and shall properly bed in non -shrink grout, each piece of equipment on
21 its supporting base that rests on masonry foundations. Grout shall
22 completely fill the space between the equipment base and the foundation.
23 All metal surfaces coming in contact with concrete or grout shall receive a III
24 coat of coal tar epoxy equal to Kop-Coat 300M.
25
26 E. Service of Manufacturer's Representative
27
28 The prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent
29 and experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the
30 manufacturer and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install,
31 adjust, test and place in operation the equipment in conformity with the
32 Contract Documents.
33
34 Prior to placing the equipment in permanent operation, the manufacturer
35 shall furnish to the Engineer and Contractor a written Certificate of Proper
36 Installation stating that the equipment has been installed in strict
37 accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
38
39 After the equipment is placed in operation by the Contractor, such engineer
40 or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by the
41 Engineer to prove that such equipment is proper and in satisfactory
42 operating condition, and shall instruct/train such personnel as may be
43 designated by the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such
44 equipment.
45
46 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-6 09/28/2023
•
•1
2 A. General
3
4 For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall
5 make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be
6 in such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the
7 Contract Documents. Five copies of the reports shall be submitted and the
8 authorities' certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a
9 prerequisite for the acceptance of any material or equipment.
10
11 If in the making of any test of any material or equipment it is ascertained by
12 the Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the
13 Contract, the Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to
14 refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly
15 from the site or from the work and replace it with acceptable material,
16 without cost to the Owner.
17
18 Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be
19 conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or
20 the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein.
21
22 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of
23 equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor
• 24 make any claim for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time
25 when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof.
26
27 B. Costs
28
29 All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be
30 performed by the Owner or duly authorized inspections engineers or
31 inspection bureaus without cost to the Contractor, unless otherwise
32 expressly specified.
33
34 The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests
35 specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the
36 Contractor and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract
37 price.
38
39 Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as equivalent to those
40 specified may be tested by the Owner for compliance with the
41 specifications. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the
42 expenditures incurred in making such tests on materials and equipment that
43 are rejected for non-compliance.
44
45 C. Inspection of Materials
•46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-7 09/28/2023
1 The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer, sufficiently in III
2 advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of
3 materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the
4 permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspection,
5 the date of commencement and the expected date of completion of the
6 manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the
7 Engineer will arrange to have a representative present at such times during
8 the manufacture as may be necessary to inspect the materials or they will
9 notify the Contractor that the inspection will be made at a point other than
10 the point of manufacture, or they will notify the Contractor that inspection
11 will be waived. The Contractor must comply with these provisions before
12 shipping any material. Such inspection shall not release the Contractor
13 from its responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of
14 the Contract Documents.
15
16 D. Certificate of Manufacture
17
18 When inspection is waived or when the Engineer so requires, the Contractor
19 shall furnish authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of Manufacture
20 that the materials to be used in the work have been manufactured and
21 tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. These certificates shall
22 be notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and
23 chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the
24 product or on similar products of the manufacturer.
25
26 E. Shop Tests of Operating Equipment
27
28 Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating,
29 efficiency, performance, function or special requirements are specified shall
30 be tested in the shop of the maker in a manner that shall conclusively prove
31 that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract
32 Documents. No such equipment shall be shipped to the work until the
33 Engineer notifies the Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are
34 acceptable.
35
36 Five copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results
37 thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a
38 responsible official of the manufacturing company, shall be forwarded to the
39 Engineer for review.
40
41 The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and
42 shop test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.
43
44 F. Preliminary Field Tests
45
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-8 09/28/2023
•
•
1 As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor,
• 2materials, and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of
3 equipment. If the preliminary field tests disclose any equipment furnished
4 under this Contract that does not comply with the requirements of the
5 Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, prior to the acceptance tests,
6 make all changes, adjustments and replacement required. The Contractor
7 shall assist in the preliminary field tests as applicable.
8
9 G. Final Field Tests
10
11 Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and
12 systems installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance tests
13 as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents.
14
15 The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other
16 materials, equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests,
17 at no additional cost to the Owner. The equipment suppliers and
18 subcontractors shall assist in the final field tests, as applicable.
19
20 H. Failure of Tests
21
22 Any defects in the materials and equipment or their failure to meet the tests,
23 guarantee or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be promptly
• 24 corrected by the Contractor by replacement or otherwise as directed by the
25 Engineer. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor
26 has fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive.
27 If the Contractor fails to make these corrections or if the improved materials
28 and equipment, when tested, shall again fail to meet the guarantees or
29 specified requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding its partial payment for
30 work, materials and equipment, may reject the work, materials and
31 equipment and may order the Contractor to remove them from the site at
32 his own expense.
33
34 I. Final Inspection
35
36 During such final inspections, the work shall be clean and free from water.
37 In no case will the final change order be prepared until the Contractor has
38 complied with all requirements set forth and the Engineer has made his final
39 inspection of the entire work and is satisfied that the entire work is properly
40 and satisfactorily constructed in accordance with the requirements of the
41 Contract Documents.
42
43 1.05 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES
44
45 A. Temporary Fences
41)46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-9 09/28/2023
1 If, during the course of the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any III
2 fence or part thereof, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, if so ordered
3 by the Engineer, provide a suitable temporary fence, which shall be
4 maintained until the permanent fence is replaced. The Engineer shall be
5 solely responsible for the determination of the necessity for providing a
6 temporary fence and the type of temporary fence to be used.
7
8 B. Temporary Driveways
9
10 At its own expense, the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and
11 remove all temporary driveways and access roads required to provide
12 access to the work and through the site of the work to maintain existing
13 operations and to allow construction of other projects in the area. The
14 Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner in providing this access.
15
16 C. Temporary Structures and Facilities
17
18 The Contractor shall construct any temporary piping and facilities as
19 required in order to maintain existing treatment capacity and operations
20 during construction.
21
22 1.06 TEMPORARY SERVICES
23
24 A. First Aid
25
26 The Contractor shall keep upon the site, at each location where work is in
27 progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access
28 thereto at all times when people are employed on the work.
29
30 1.07 LINE AND GRADE
31
32 A. Line and Grade
33
34 All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the
35 lines and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The
36 full responsibility for maintaining alignment and grade rests upon the
37 Contractor.
38
39 The Contractor, prior to commencing of construction, shall have established
40 bench marks and base line controlling points. The Contractor shall so place
41 excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of
42 the reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by
43 him contrary to this provision.
44
45 B. Surveys
46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-10 09/28/2023
•
•
•1 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and
2other such materials to establish all working or construction lines and
3 grades, as required, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy
4 thereof.
5
6 All surveying shall be performed in accordance with Specification 01050.
7
8 C. Safeguarding Marks
9
10 The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments
11 and bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of re -
12 establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work
13 improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing
14 without authorization such established points, stakes and marks.
15
16 The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners,
17 monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if
18 required, shall bear the cost of re-establishing them if disturbed or
19 destroyed.
20
21 1.08 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING
22
23 A. The Contractor shall also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage
• 24 or injury as a result of his operations to all other adjacent public and private
25 property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during
26 the progress of the work. The cost of protection, replacement in their
27 original locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such
28 adjacent public and private property and structures affected by the work,
29 whether or not shown on the Drawings or specified shall be included in the
30 various Contract Items and no separate payments will be made therefore.
31 Where such public and private property, structures of any kind and
32 appurtenances thereto are not shown on the Drawings and when, in the
33 opinion to avoid interference with the work, payment therefore will be made
34 as provided for in the General Conditions.
35
36 Contractor is expressly advised that the protection of buildings structures,
37 tunnels, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent to and in the vicinity
38 of their operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility.
39 Conditional inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of
40 the project which may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work
41 shall be performed by and be the responsibility of the Contractor.
42
43 Contractor shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the
44 interior and exterior of the adjacent structures, buildings, facilities, etc., and
45 record by noted, measurements, photographs, etc., conditions which might
•46 be aggravated by open excavation and construction. Repairs or
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-11 09/28/2023
1 replacement of all conditions disturbed by the construction shall be made to III
2 the satisfaction of the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This
3 does not preclude conforming to the requirements of the insurance
4 underwriters. Copies of surveys, photographs, reports, etc., shall be given
5 to the Engineer.
6
7 Prior to the beginning of any excavations, the Contractor shall advise the
8 Engineer of all buildings or structures on which he intends to perform work
9 or which performance of the project work will affect.
10
11 B. Protection of Trees
12
13 1. The Contractor shall adequately protect all trees and shrubs with
14 boxes or otherwise in accordance with ordinances governing the
15 protection of trees. No excavated materials shall be placed so as to
16 injure such trees or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed through
17 negligence of the Contractor or his employees shall be replaced with
18 new stock of similar size and age, in the proper season and at the
19 sole expense of the Contractor.
20
21 2. Beneath trees or other surface structures, where possible, pipelines
22 may be built in short tunnels, backfilled with excavated materials,
23 except as otherwise specified, or the trees or structures carefully III
24 supported and protected from damage.
25
26 3. The Owner may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the
27 Owner, to remove trees along the line or trench excavation. If so
28 ordered, the Owner will obtain any permits required for removal of
29 trees.
30
31 C. Lawn Areas
32
33 Lawn areas shall be left in as good condition as before the starting of the
34 work. Where sod is to be removed, it shall be carefully removed, and later
35 replaced, or the area where sod has been removed shall be restored with
36 new sod.
37
38 D. Restoration of Fences
39
40 Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course
41 of the work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor and shall be left
42 in as good or better a condition as existed before starting the work. The
43 manner in which the fence is repaired or replaced and the materials used in
44 such work shall be subject to the review of the Engineer. No additional
45 payment will be made for the replacement or repair of any fence.
46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-12 09/28/2023
•
•1 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC
2
3 A. Barriers and Lights
4
5 During the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall put up and maintain
6 at all times such barriers and lights as will effectively prevent accidents. The
7 Contractor shall provide suitable barricades, red lights, "danger" or "caution"
8 or "street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the work causes
9 obstructions to the normal traffic or constitutes in any way a hazard to the
10 public.
11
12 B. Smoke Prevention
13
14 The Contractor shall use hard coal, coke, oil or gas as fuel for equipment
15 generating steam. A strict compliance with ordinances regulating the
16 production of emission of smoke will be required. No open fires will be
17 permitted.
18
19 C. Noise
20
21 The Contractor shall eliminate noise to as great an extent as practicable at
22 all times. Air compressing plants shall be equipped with silencers and the
23exhaust of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided
•24 with mufflers. In the vicinity of hospitals and schools, special care shall be
25 used to avoid noise or other nuisances. The Contractor shall strictly
26 observe all local regulations and ordinances covering noise control.
27
28 No work shall be done between the hours of 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M., or on
29 Sundays except as scheduled and required to occur during lower flow
30 periods. If the proper and efficient prosecution of the work requires
31 operations during the night, the written permission of the Engineer shall be
32 obtained before starting such items of the work.
33
34 D. Access to Public Services
35
36 Neither the materials excavated nor the materials or plant used in the
37 construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all
38 fire hydrants, valves or manholes.
39
40 E. Dust Prevention
41
42 The Contractor shall prevent dust nuisance from his operations or from
43 traffic by keeping the roads and/or construction areas sprinkled with water
44 at all times or when directed by the Owner and/or Engineer.
45
11046 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-13 09/28/2023
1 •2 A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the
3 work that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and
4 coordinate in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with
5 the Drawings and Specifications. The work shall be performed by
6 competent workmen skilled in the trade required by the restoration.
7
8 1.11 CLEANING
9
10 A. During construction of the work, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep the
11 site of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and
12 rubbish as is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the
13 site if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such material, debris, or rubbish
14 constitutes a nuisance or is objectionable.
15
16 The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials and
17 temporary structures when no further need therefore develops.
18
19 B. Final Cleaning
20
21 At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary structures
22 and materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away,
23 and he shall remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any III
24 other foreign substances.
25
26 The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed
27 by him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a
28 bright, clean, polished and new operating condition.
29
30 1.12 MISCELLANEOUS
31
32 A. Protection against Siltation and Bank Erosion
33
34 1. The Contractor shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and
35 bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water
36 courses, drainage ditches, wetlands and other areas of concern.
37
38 2. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove any siltation
39 deposits and correct any erosion problems as directed by the
40 Engineer that results from his construction operations.
41
42 3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any fines resulting from
43 the encroachment of any environmentally protected areas.
44
45 B. Protection of Wetland Areas
46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-14 09/28/2023
•
•1 The Contractor shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil,
2in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations and the permits
3 issued for this project. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be
4 disposed of in wetland areas as defined by the Florida Department of
5 Environmental Protection, Southwest Florida Water Management District,
6 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, etc.
7
8 C. Existing Facilities
9
10 The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation
11 insofar as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for
12 maintaining existing facilities in service during construction shall be as
13 described in these Specifications.
14
15 D. Use of Chemicals
16
17 All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project
18 operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or
19 of other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of
20 all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance
21 with manufacturers' instructions.
22
23 E. Tree Removal
• 24
25 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and any regulatory authorities forty -
26 eight (48) hours in advance of any removal of trees on the project. No
27 clearing shall occur and no earth moving equipment shall be placed on-site
28 until after the notice has been issued. The Contractor shall provide
29 maintenance of the tree barricades and other preventive measures to
30 protect the trees that are to remain. Failure to notify the Engineer before
31 removing trees shall result in the in-kind replacement of the tree at no
32 additional cost to the Owner.
33
34 F. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Systems
35
36 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the satisfactory installation
37 of storm sewer and sanitary sewer systems to be in substantial
38 conformance to the approved Drawings. No roadway base or paving shall
39 be constructed until the Contractor has performed Tamping of these lines to
40 his and the Engineer's satisfaction, and all storm sewer and sanitary sewer
41 invert grades are verified in the field by the Owner. The lamping of lines
42 and verification of elevations in no way absolves the Contractor from any of
43 contractual obligations.
44
•
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-15 09/28/2023
1 G. Related Permits
2
3 The Contractor recognizes that the Owner has applied for, and may have
4 received, certain permits pertaining to the work. At the sole discretion of
5 the Owner, the Owner may assign said permits to the Contractor and the
6 Contractor shall accept said assignments upon such request from the
7 Owner.
8
9 H. All work in the vicinity of open waters, wetlands or any jurisdictional area is
10 to be performed in strict accordance with the environmental permits and
11 their conditions. Erosion barriers, when shown on the construction
12 Drawings, are the minimum required. If the Contractor's construction
13 methods require that additional erosion control is necessary to satisfy these
14 permits, such controls shall be supplied, installed and maintained
15 throughout the construction process by the Contractor at no additional cost
16 to the Owner or Engineer.
17
18 It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to submit, in a timely manner,
19 any information, data, etc. that is required as a condition of a permit.
20 Required information, data, etc. shall be submitted directly to the permitting
21 agency by the Contractor with copies to the permittee and the Engineer.
22 The Contractor will be held responsible for any fine(s) or other action
23 resulting from a violation of permit conditions.
24
25 1.13 DISPOSAL
26
27 A. The Contractor shall directly pay all tipping fees associated with disposal of
28 construction demolition debris. The Contractor shall include in its bid all
29 costs associated with disposal of construction debris including collection,
30 storage, hauling and tipping fees.
31
32 1.14 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY
33
34 A. Responsibility. All damage resulting from construction work on existing
35 structures, wetland areas, roadway pavement, driveways, other paved
36 areas, fences, utilities, traffic control devices and any other obstruction not
37 specifically named herein, shall be repaired, restored or replaced by the
38 Contractor unless otherwise specified.
39
40 B. Temporary Repairs. All damage named in Paragraph A above shall be at
41 least temporarily repaired, restored or replaced immediately following
42 construction efforts at that location. Temporary restoration shall mean
43 putting the affected area back into a safe, usable condition. In no case shall
44 trenches remain open over night within a street right-of-way unless the
45 governing Traffic Control Division grants specific approval.
46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-16 09/28/2023
•
•
•
• 1
2 C. Permanent Repairs. All damage shall be permanently repaired, restored,
or replaced not later than the 30th calendar day following the completion of
3 construction at that location unless otherwise stipulated. Permanent repairs
4 shall be accomplished in a professional workmanship -like manner in
5 accordance with Specifications contained herein, or contract documents, if
6 addressed. The Contractor may be relieved of the 30 -day time limit above
7 only by specific written agreement with the Engineer.
8
9 D. Owner Retribution. In the event that the Contractor fails to make the
10 permanent repairs within the time specified, the Owner, at its option, will,
11 with its own resources or by contract with others, cause the repair,
12 restoration, or replacement of the affected area to be accomplished. The
13 costs of such work will be deducted either from the next pay request or from
14 any other monies owed the Contractor.
15
16
17 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
18
19 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
20
21
22 END OF SECTION
23
III
•
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-17 09/28/2023
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-18 09/28/2023
•
•
•
• 1 2 SECTION 01014
3 SUMMARY OF WORK
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 LOCATION OF WORK
8
9 A. All Work of this Contract is located in rights-of-way, easements, or on
10 property owned by the City of Clearwater, Florida.
11
12 1.02 WORK TO BE DONE
13
14 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services
15 and incidentals to complete all work required by these Specifications and as
16 shown on the Drawings.
17
18 B. The Contractor shall perform the work complete, in place and ready for
19 continuous service, and shall include repairs, testing, permits, clean up,
20 replacements, and restoration required as a result of damages caused
21 during this construction.
22
23 C. All materials, equipment, skills, tools, and labor which is reasonably and
• 24 properly inferable and necessary for the proper completion of the work in a
25 substantial manner and in compliance with the requirements stated or
26 implied by these Specifications or Drawings shall be furnished and installed
27 by the Contractor without additional compensation, whether specifically
28 indicated in the Contract Documents or not.
29
30 D. The Contractor shall comply with all Municipal, County, State, Federal, and
31 other codes applicable to the proposed construction work.
32
33 1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED
34
35 A. The work of this Contract comprises the general rehabilitation of the
36 following facilities, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified
37 herein, including but not limited to:
38
39 1. Mobilization, demobilization, insurances, permits and bonds.
40 2. Demolition and disposal of the existing odor control scrubber tower
41 3. Demolition of the influent pumps, piping assemblies and meter
42 assembly
43 4. Demolition of equipment inside the blower room at the sludge
44 handling building
45 5. Installation of new influent pumps and piping assemblies
•46 6. Installation of new influent meter assembly
SUMMARY OF WORK
01014-1 09/28/23
1 7. Installation of new bypass manhole
2 8. Installation of new large bubble mixing unit inside the wet well
3 9. Installation of new spray nozzle system inside the wet well
4 10. Modification of the existing wet well
5 11. Application of coating/painting in wet well, bypass manhole, and
6 blower room
7 12. Installation of new electrical equipment and SCADA programming
8 13. Operation and maintenance of temporary bypass pumping
9
10 1.04 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
11
12 A. General
13
14 1. Upon successful construction completion of each new component, and
15 pre -operational testing, Contractor shall conduct testing as required
16 by the Contract Documents.
17
18 2. Contractor shall ensure that, prior to start-up of any component, all
19 handrails, walkways, lighting and associated safety-related facilities
20 are in place.
21
22 3. Contractor shall provide Engineer a minimum of 14 -calendar days
23 advance written notice of any requested change in operation to the
24 existing facility, bypass requirements or connections to existing
25 facilities, and shall obtain the Engineer's written review before
26 scheduling this work.
27
28 B. Restrictions
29
30 1. In planning its work, the Contractor shall consider the following
31 requirements.
32
33 a. The Contractor shall not take any existing facilities out of service
34 without obtaining the Engineer's prior written review and
35 Owner's approval.
36
37 b. All new facilities shall be tested in accordance with Specification
38 01625 to demonstrate to the Engineer and Owner that the new
39 facility and associated equipment properly operates prior to
40 taking any other existing facilities or equipment out of service.
41
42 c. All manipulation of valves shall be performed by the Owner's
43 personnel. The Contractor shall not be allowed to manipulate
44 any valves except in emergencies. If there is an emergency,
45 the Owner shall be notified immediately.
46
47
SUMMARY OF WORK
01014-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1
• 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
3
4 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
5
6 END OF SECTION
7
•
•
SUMMARY OF WORK
01014-3 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SUMMARY OF WORK
01014-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
• 2 1 SECTION 01015
3 CONTROL OF WORK
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 WORK PROGRESS
8
9 A. The Contractor shall provide equipment that will be efficient, safe,
10 appropriate, and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and
11 a rate of progress that will ensure the completion of the work within the
12 Contract Time(s). If, at any time, such facilities appear to the Engineer to
13 be inefficient, inappropriate, insufficient, or unsafe for securing the quality
14 of work required or for producing the rate of progress aforesaid, he may
15 order the Contractor to increase the facilities equipment, and the Contractor
16 shall conform to such order. Failure of the Engineer to give such order shall
17 in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligations to secure the quality of
18 the work and rate of progress required to meet the Contract Time(s).
19
20 1.02 PRIVATE LAND
21
22 A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements,
23 except by permission of the Owner.
• 24
25 1.03 WORK LOCATIONS
26
27 A. Work shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the
28 Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may
29 be found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other
30 reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the
31 Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing
32 different or additional items where required.
33
34 1.04 OPEN EXCAVATIONS
35
36 A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing
37 temporary barricades, caution signs, lights, and other means to prevent
38 accidents to persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his
39 own expense, provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for
40 accommodating travel by Owner's personnel, pedestrians, and workmen.
41 Bridges provided for access to private property during construction shall be
42 removed when no longer required. The length of open trench will be
43 controlled by the particular surrounding conditions and does not endanger
44 existing facilities. If the excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively
45 restricts traffic, construction procedures such as limiting the length of open
•
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-1 09/28/23
1 trench, prohibiting stacking excavated material in the street, and requiring
2 that the trench shall not remain open overnight.
3
4 B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to
5 open trenches. All trenches, excavated material, equipment, or other
6 obstacles, which could be dangerous to the public, shall be well lighted at
7 night.
8
9 1.05 TEST PITS
10
11 A. The Contractor shall excavate test pits (pot -hole) for locating underground
12 pipelines or structures in advance of construction to verify that the work can
13 be constructed as intended. Test pits shall be excavated and backfilled by
14 the Contractor so as not to create a hazardous area. Test pits shall be
15 backfilled immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and the surface
16 restored and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
17
18 1.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
19
20 A. Unless permission to close a street is received in writing from the proper
21 authority, all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and
22 pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's
23 operations cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide
24 temporary ways, erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures for
25 safety satisfactory to the Engineer.
26
27 B. Detours around construction will be subject to the review and approval of
28 the Owner and the Engineer. Where detours are permitted, the Contractor
29 shall provide all necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the
30 flow of traffic. While traffic is detoured the Contractor shall expedite
31 construction operations and those periods when traffic is being detoured will
32 be strictly controlled by the Owner.
33
34 C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to
35 open trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards
36 exist, or police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The
37 Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not
38 police protection has been provided.
39
40 1.07 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
41
42 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and
43 private property and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent
44 damage thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private
45 property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in
46 the execution of the work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 be restored by the Contractor, at his expense, to a condition similar or equal
• 2to that existing before the damage was done, or he shall make good the
3 damage in other manner acceptable to the Engineer.
4
5 B. All sidewalks that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be
6 restored to their original condition with the use of similar or comparable
7 materials. All curbing shall be restored in a condition equal to the original
8 construction and in accordance with the best modern practice.
9
10 C. Along the location of the work all fences, walks, bushes, trees, shrubbery,
11 and other physical features shall be protected and restored in a thoroughly
12 workmanlike manner. Fences and other features removed by the
13 Contractor shall be replaced in the location indicated by the Engineer as
14 soon as conditions permit. All grass areas beyond the limits of construction
15 that have been damaged by the Contractor shall be restored to original
16 conditions.
17
18 D. Trees close to the work shall be boxed or otherwise protected against injury.
19 The Contractor shall trim all branches that are susceptible to damage
20 because of his operations, but in no case shall any tree be cut or removed
21 without prior notification of the appropriate tree authority. All injuries to bark,
22 trunk, limbs, and roots of trees shall be repaired by dressing, cutting, and
23 painting in accordance with approved methods, using only approved tools
• 24 and materials.
25
26 E. The protection, removal, and replacement of existing physical features shall
27 be part of the work under the Contract and all costs in connection therewith
28 shall be included in the unit and/or lump sum prices established.
29
30 1.08 PROTECTION AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND
31 UTILITIES
32
33 A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all
34 buildings, structures, and utilities, public or private, including poles, signs,
35 services to buildings, utilities in the street, gas pipes, water pipes, hydrants,
36 sewers, drains, and electric and telephone cables, whether or not they are
37 shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall carefully support and protect
38 all such structures and utilities from injury of any kind. Any damage
39 resulting from the Contractor's operations shall be repaired by him at his
40 expense.
41
42 B. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all locations of
43 underground structures and utilities (including existing water services, drain
44 lines, and sewers). Services shall be maintained and all costs or charges
45 resulting from damage thereto shall be paid by the Contractor.
•46
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-3 09/28/23
1 C. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, permanent relocation of a utility owned by III
2 the Owner is required, the Engineer may direct the Contractor in writing, to
3 perform the work. Work so ordered will be paid for at the unit prices bid in
4 the Proposal, if applicable, or as extra work as provided for in the General
5 Conditions. If relocation of a privately owned utility is required, the Owner
6 will notify the Utility to perform the work as expeditiously as possible. The
7 Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner and Utility and shall have
8 no claim for delay due to such relocation.
9
10 D. Underground and above ground utilities/facilities are identified on the
11 Drawings based on best information available at the time for the preparation
12 of the plans. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate all utilities
13 prior to any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
14 damage to existing underground utilities and facilities and shall coordinate
15 the protection of these utilities with the Owner.
16
17 1.09 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES
18
19 A. The Contractor shall interrupt water, telephone, Cable TV, sewer, gas, or
20 other related utility services and disrupt the normal functioning of the system
21 as little as possible and shall notify the Engineer and public well in advance
22 of any requirement for dewatering, isolating, or relocating a section of a
23 utility, so that necessary arrangements may be made with the appropriate
24 agency.
25
26 B. If it appears that utility service will be interrupted for an extended period, the
27 Engineer may order the Contractor to provide temporary service lines.
28 Inconvenience of the users shall be the minimum, consistent with the
29 existing conditions. The safety and integrity of the system is of prime
30 importance in scheduling work.
31
32 1.10 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT
33
34 A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from injury or
35 damage in every way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads
36 shall be allowed and any portion injured or damaged shall be reconstructed
37 by the Contractor at his own expense.
38
39 1.11 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
40
41 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and paying for all water
42 required for construction purposes. The Contractor shall make all
43 connections and other provisions, including backflow prevention and
44 metering provisions, necessary to obtain said water from the local utility's
45 potable and/or reclaimed water system, as required. The Contractor shall
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-4 09/28/23
•
•
•1 pay the appropriate party for all water used for construction purposes. Bid
2 prices shall include the costs incurred for water usage.
3
4 1.12 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW
5
6 A. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide for the flow of sewers, drains,
7 and water courses interrupted during the progress of the work, and shall
8 immediately remove all offensive matter. The entire procedure for
9 maintaining existing flows shall be reviewed by the Engineer in advance of
10 the interruption of any flow.
11
12 1.13 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT
13
14 A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under this Contract shall
15 cooperate with the General Contractor and his subcontractors or trades and
16 shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or
17 required.
18
19 B. Cutting and patching, drilling, and fitting shall be carried out where required
20 by the trade or subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated
21 herein or directed by the Engineer.
22
23 1.14 COOPERATION OUTSIDE THIS CONTRACT
• 24
25 A. As part of normal and/or emergency system operations and maintenance,
26 the Owner may employ the services of contractors outside this contract. As
27 such, the Contractor of this Work shall coordinate their schedule with and
28 accommodate said contractor as necessary for the execution of their work.
29 This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
30
31 B. As part of normal and/or emergency system operations and maintenance,
32 the Owner has normal delivery and maintenance suppliers that will be on -
33 site on a regular basis. Contractor shall allow continuous access to all
34 equipment and facilities, so as not to impede the operation and
35 maintenance of said facility. This coordination shall be provided at no
36 additional cost to the Owner.
37
38 1.15 CLEAN-UP
39
40 A. During the course of the work, the Contractor shall keep the site of his
41 operations in a clean and neat condition. He shall remove, transport, and
42 properly dispose of all surplus broken pavement, crushed concrete, lumber,
43 excess steel, equipment, temporary structures, and any other refuse from
44 the construction operation, on a weekly basis or as directed by the Owner
45 and/or Engineer. At the conclusion of the work, remove, transport and
•46 properly dispose of any surplus excavation, and refuse remaining from the
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-5 09/28/23
1 construction operation, and leave the entire site of his work in a neat and
2 orderly condition.
3
4 B. The Contractor shall provide for disposal of excavated material removed
5 from the site.
6
7 1.16 COORDINATION WITH ELECTRICAL UTILITY
8
9 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power
10 company to have electrical service supplied to the site.
11
12 1.17 WORK SEQUENCE
13
14 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service/operations.
15 Therefore, the Contractor will schedule and complete the work in a manner
16 that assures that the facility maintains service including redundancy
17 throughout the duration of the project. Prior to taking any service or
18 operation off-line, Contractor shall prepare a work sequence plan and
19 coordinate all shut downs with the Owner and Engineer. All temporary
20 measures and materials required to meet this condition during construction
21 shall be provided, installed, maintained and removed by the Contractor. All
22 costs associated with this effort shall be borne by the Contractor. All fines
23 imposed by failure to meet this operating condition, due to the Contractor's
24 Work Sequence, shall be borne by the Contractor.
25
26 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
27
28 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
29
30
31 END OF SECTION
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 SECTION 01016
2
3 CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
8
9 A. At all times during construction of the project, the City of Clearwater's East
10 Water Reclamation Facility shall remain in service, except for temporary
11 shutdowns described herein. Throughout construction, the Contractor shall
12 cooperate fully with operations staff in order to minimize disruption to the
13 facility's operation.
14
15 B. The general intent of this project is to allow the facility to treat raw sewage
16 during the rehabilitation of the existing influent sewer and pump station. This
17 will require the furnishing, installation, and operation of a temporary bypass
18 piping system by the Contractor to allow the rehabilitation of existing piping,
19 influent pump station and the installation of a new influent sewer structure.
20
21 C. No facility or structure shall be taken out of service until a temporary
22 utilities/facility or the new replacement utility/facility or structure is fully
23 constructed, tested, and accepted by the Owner.
• 24
25 D. The suggested phasing plan specified herein shall be representative only.
26 It is up to the Contractor to devise their own phasing plan, which will meet
27 the requirements as specified herein. The Contractor shall submit to the
28 Engineer a construction phasing plan for approval, prior to beginning any
29 construction onsite.
30
31 E. Brief shutdown of equipment may be allowed during critical phases. The
32 Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer for approval, two (2) weeks
33 prior to any temporary shutdowns.
34
35 F. The Contractor shall conduct operations in such a manner that will maintain
36 access to private property/driveways at all times and will result in minimum
37 inconvenience to the public accessing the neighborhood roads and/or
38 business establishments and shall provide temporary access during
39 construction.
40
41 G. The Contractor shall be responsible for constructing any temporary
42 utilities/facilities and temporary pumping in order to keep the stormwater
43 system in-service during construction. All materials, piping, equipment,
44 power, labor, etc. associated with temporary utilities/facilities or temporary
45 pumping shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
•46
CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01016-1 09/28/23
1 H. Suggested Phasing
2
3 1. The Contractor shall be required to maintain all existing
4 utilities/structures in service until those new utilities/structures are
5 constructed, tested and accepted by the Owner.
6
7 2. Prior to taking out any structure or facilities, the Contractor shall
8 make temporary piping connections as required. All power, labor,
9 equipment, and materials for any temporary piping and pumping
10 shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
11
12 3. The following is a non -comprehensive list of tasks that should occur
13 during this project, including but not limited to the following steps:
14
15 a. Demolish odor control scrubber tower, blower room and
16 remove trees;
17 b. Construct bypass manhole;
18 c. Construct and install temporary bypass piping;
19 d. Operate and maintain the new temporary bypass system;
20 e. Isolate existing influent pump station, influent flow meter
21 assembly, influent screen area by closing gates at the
22 headworks;
23 f. Rehabilitate existing influent pump station, influent meter
24 assembly, blower room at the sludge handling building,
25 including equipment demolition and installation;
26 g. Change operation from temporary bypass system to the
27 improved treatment processes;
28 h. Remove temporary bypass system and restore project area.
29
30
31 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
32
33 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
34
35 END OF SECTION
CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN
01016-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1
• 2 SECTION 01030
3
4 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
5
6 PART 1 — GENERAL
7
8 1.01 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
9
10 A. When a particular product is specified or called for, it is intended and shall
11 be understood by the Contractor that the Contractor's proposal includes
12 those products in its bid. Should the Contractor desire to incorporate
13 products equal to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information
14 as described in the General Conditions. The alternate product or products
15 submitted by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of the
16 Specifications and shall, in all respects, be equal to the products specified
17 by name herein.
18
19 B. All apparatus, mechanism, equipment, machinery, and manufactured
20 articles for incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused
21 standard products of recognized reputable manufacturers unless
22 specifically noted otherwise.
23
• 24 C. Contractor shall properly dispose of all excess materials from the site.
25
26 1.02 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS
27
28 A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and
29 prepare for connections to the existing systems, as shown on the Drawings.
30 All connections to existing systems shall be coordinated with the Owner
31 and/or Engineer prior to commencing the work. All connections to existing
32 systems shall be attended by the Owner and/or Owner's Representative.
33 The costs for this work and for the actual connection to the existing systems
34 shall be included in the various prices bid and shall not result in any
35 additional cost to the Owner.
36
37 1.03 EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING, STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
38
39 A. The attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that during excavation,
40 the possibility exists that the Contractor may encounter water, gas,
41 telephone, electrical, and/or other utilities not shown on the Drawings. The
42 Contractor shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to
43 locate and flag these lines so as to avoid damage thereto. Should damage
44 occur to an existing line, the Contractor shall immediately contact the utility
45 and the Owner. If the repair is to be completed by the Contractor, it shall
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-1 09/28/23
1 be carried out in a timely and quality manner. Costs associated with such
2 damage shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
3
4 B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles,
5 the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of
6 excavation, are temporarily supported in position while work proceeds in the
7 vicinity of the pole and that utility or other companies concerned be given
8 reasonable advance notice of any such excavation by the Contractor.
9
10 C. The locations of existing utilities are shown without express or implied
11 representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete or correct
12 or that they represent a true picture of underground piping to be
13 encountered. Encountering existing utilities at different depths or locations
14 than shown on the Drawings shall not be cause for additional costs to the
15 Owner.
16
17 D. The existing piping and utilities that interfere with new construction shall be
18 rerouted as shown, specified, or required. The Contractor shall excavate
19 test pits sufficiently ahead of the proposed work to predict potential conflicts.
20 Before any piping and utilities not shown on the Drawings are disturbed, the
21 Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of the location of the
22 pipeline or utility and shall reroute or relocate the pipeline or utility as
23 directed.
24
25 E. The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing
26 piping and utilities. All utilities that do not interfere with completed work
27 shall be carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged
28 in any way by the Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor
29 at his expense, as directed by the Engineer.
30
31 F. It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, gas, telephone,
32 electrical, or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe
33 within recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear
34 the obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However,
35 when in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer this procedure is not feasible,
36 he may direct the use of fittings for the utility crossing. The Contractor shall
37 verify utility crossings with test pits prior to construction as required by the
38 Engineer.
39
40 1.04 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
41
42 A. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., and install
43 anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to
44 complete the work under this Contract, together with those required by
45 subcontractors, and shall do all cutting and patching, excepting cutting and
46 patching of materials of a specified trade and as stated otherwise in the
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-2 09/28/23
•
• 1 2 following paragraph.
3 B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the subcontractors to provide all
4 sleeves, inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc., of the proper size and material
5 for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
6 corrective cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary openings,
7 chases, etc. In no case shall beams, lintels or other structural members be
8 cut without the written acceptance of the Engineer.
9
10 1.05 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION
11
12 A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the
13 run-off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens,
14 calcium chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or
15 other life, into the supplies and surface waters of the state. Control
16 measures must be adequate to assure that turbidity in the receiving water
17 will not be increased more than 10 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or
18 as otherwise required by the state or other controlling body, in water used
19 for public water supply or fish unless limits have been established for the
20 particular water. In surface water used for other purposes, the turbidity must
21 not exceed 25 NTU unless otherwise permitted. Special precautions shall
22 be taken in the use of construction equipment to prevent operations that
23 promote erosion.
• 24
25 B. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the EPA-NPDES
26 generic permit for storm water discharges and the storm water pollution
27 prevention plan developed for the project.
28
29 1.06 VALVE INDICES
30
31 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing tags for all valves
32 required on the work and installing the tags required for his own work. Tags
33 on above ground valves shall be non -corrosive metal or plastic, 2 inches in
34 diameter, 19 -gauge thickness. Tags for buried valves shall be secured to
35 a concrete base as shown on the Drawings. Submit to the Engineer for
36 review, two (2) samples of each type of tag proposed and manufacturer's
37 standard color chart and letter styles. Tags shall have stamped on them
38 the information shown on the Drawings and the data described herein. The
39 Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, not less than 120 days
40 before start-up, a valve schedule containing all valves required for the work.
41 The schedule shall contain for each valve, the location, type, a number,
42 words to identify the valve's function, and the normal operating position.
43 The information contained in the valve schedules shall be coded on the tags
44 in a system provided by the Owner. Above ground valve tags shall be
45 furnished with non -corrosive metal wire for attachment thereof.
•46
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-3 09/28/23
1 1.07 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN
2
3 A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit
4 to the Engineer and Owner a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The Plan
5 should outline the necessary measures that the Contractor proposes to
6 perform at no additional cost to the Owner in case of a hurricane warning.
7
8 B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever Engineer shall direct; the
9 Contractor shall carefully protect the Work and materials against damage
10 or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work
11 or material has been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of
12 the Contractor or subcontractors to set protect the Work, such Work and
13 materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
14
15 1.08 WARRANTIES
16
17 A. The Contractor's one-year warranty or guarantee period shall be part of the
18 project's Performance Bond.
19
20 1.09 WATERTIGHTNESS
21
22 A. Special precautions shall be taken in the curing of concrete to reduce
23 concrete cracking as called for in Section 03300. All water -retaining
24 structures (those that are intended to hold a liquid) shall be filled and tested
25 for leaks by the Contractor, with water acceptable to the Engineer, prior to
26 surface coating or painting. The procedure and manner in which any leaks
27 are repaired must be reviewed by the Engineer. All costs associated with
28 the testing and repair of leaks shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
29
30 1.10 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
31
32 A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the
33 governmental unit or agencies having jurisdiction over the work. Wherever
34 there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these
35 Specifications, the more stringent shall apply.
36
37 1.11 PUBLIC NUISANCE
38
39 A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited
40 to, encroachment on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or
41 excessive noise.
42
43 B. Sound levels measured by the Engineer personnel shall not exceed 45 dBA
44 7 PM to 7 AM or 55 dBA 7 AM to 7 PM. This sound level shall be measured
45 at the exterior of the exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the
46 equipment shall not exceed 85 dBA measured five (5) feet from the
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-4 09/28/23
•
•1 equipment at any time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient
2 cause to have the work suspended. Work stoppage by the Engineer or
3 Owner for excessive noise shall not relieve the Contractor of completing the
4 Work in accordance with the Contract Time(s), at no additional cost to the
5 Owner.
6
7 C. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to work stoppage resulting
8 from the creation of a public nuisance.
9
10 1.12 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
11
12 A. Contractor shall perform work in accordance with OSHA, state and local
13 safety requirements.
14
15 1.13 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER
16
17 A. During inclement weather, all work that could be damaged or rendered
18 inferior by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and
19 decisions of the Engineer as to suspensions shall be final and binding. The
20 ability to issue such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do
21 so. During suspension of the work for any cause, the work shall be suitably
22 covered and protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or
23 otherwise; and, if the Engineer shall so direct, rubbish and surplus materials
• 24 shall be removed.
25
26 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for documenting all inclement weather
27 conditions.
28
29 1.14 RELOCATIONS
30
31 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of structures,
32 including but not limited to light poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping,
33 conduits, and drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out
34 on the Drawings. The cost of all such relocations shall be borne by the
35 Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
36
37 1.15 SALVAGE
38
39 A. Any existing equipment or material including, but not limited to, valves,
40 pipes, fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of
41 construction under this project may be designated by the Owner to be
42 salvaged. Any existing equipment or material to be salvaged shall remain
43 onsite and the Contractor shall be responsible for delivering the salvage
44 equipment/materials to the exact location onsite as directed by the
45 Engineer.
AI 46
47 1.16 PERMITS
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-5 09/28/23
2 A. 1 •
Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all
3 applicable permits, not previously obtained by the Owner, from the
4 appropriate governmental agency or agencies. No work shall commence
5 until all applicable permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the
6 Engineer. The costs for obtaining all permits shall be borne by the
7 Contractor.
8
9 1.17 PUMPING
10
11 A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall perform all pumping necessary
12 to prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction
13 operations. All water collected during pumping operations shall be properly
14 disposed of in accordance with these specifications and/or regulatory
15 requirements, whichever is more stringent.
16
17 B. The Contractor shall, with his own equipment, pump out water that may
18 seep or leak into the excavations or structures. All water collected during
19 pumping operations shall be properly disposed of in accordance with these
20 specifications and/or regulatory requirements, whichever is more stringent.
21 Below grade galleries and other operating areas shall be kept dry at all
22 times. The extent of pumping required in tanks, channels and other non -
23 operating areas will be determined by the Owner/Engineer.
24
25 1.18 NOTIFICATION OF WORK ON EXISTING FACILITIES
26
27 A. Before commencing work on any of the existing structures or equipment,
28 the Contractor shall notify the Owner/Engineer, in writing, at least 10
29 calendar days in advance of the date he proposed to commence such work.
30
31 1.19 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES
32
33 A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion
34 of the entire work. Upon completion of construction of each individual
35 facility, including testing, if the Owner, at his sole discretion, desires to
36 accept the individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate
37 of completion and acceptance for each individual facility. The Owner will
38 assume ownership and begin operation of the individual facility on that date
39 and the one-year guaranty period shall commence on that date. The Owner
40 has the option of not accepting any individual completed facility but
41 accepting the entire work as a whole when it is completed and tested.
42
43 1.20 POTENTIAL IMPACTS ON THE SCHEDULE
44
45 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service/operations.
46 Therefore, the Bidders are noticed that this work is at an active and
47 operating Water Reclamation Facility and that plant operations, regulatory
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-6 09/28/23
•
•
•1 compliance and required testing will take priority over and may impact the
2 construction schedule.
3
4
5 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
6
7 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
8
9
10 END OF SECTION
11
•
•
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-7 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-8 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 01040
• 2
3 COORDINATION
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 PROJECT COORDINATION
8
9 A. The Contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of all
10 construction efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to
11 coordination of the following:
12
13 1. The work of subcontractors.
14
15 2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers.
16
17 3. The effort of equipment manufacturers during testing and start-up.
18
19 4. The interrelated work with public and private utility companies.
20
21 5. The interrelated work with the Owner where tie-ins to existing
22 facilities are required.
23
• 24 4. The effort of independent testing agencies.
25
26 5. The work to be provided under allowances.
27
28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
29
30 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
31
32
33 END OF SECTION
34
•
COORDINATION
01040-1 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
COORDINATION
01040-2 09/28/23
•
•
•1 SECTION 01050
2
3 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all field engineering and survey
10 services required. Such work shall include survey work to establish existing
11 and/or proposed lines and grades and to locate and lay out site boundaries
12 and easements, project control, site improvements, structures, controlling
13 lines and levels and all other survey required for the construction of the
14 work. Also included are such engineering services as are specified or
15 required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and
16 surveyors shall be licensed professionals registered in the State of Florida.
17
18 B. The accuracy of any method of staking shall be the responsibility of the
19 Contractor. All surveying for vertical and horizontal control shall be the
20 responsibility of the Contractor.
21
22 C. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes
23 and marks. If any stakes or marks are carelessly or willfully disturbed by
i24 the Contractor, the Contractor shall not proceed with any work until he has
25 established such points, marks, lines and elevations as may be necessary
26 for the prosecution of the work.
27
28 1.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
29
30 A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those
31 designated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and protect control
32 points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference
33 points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners
34 or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb
35 any such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are
36 disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall
37 have them referenced and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor.
38
39 1.03 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
40
41 A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a Florida Registered Land
42 Surveyor to establish all lines and grades on the Drawings necessary to
43 fully construct the work in accordance with Chapter 5J-17 of the Florida
44 Administrative Code.
45
•46 B. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish and stake all pipeline and
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01050-1 09/28/23
1 roadway right-of-way adjacent to construction at 100' intervals on tangents, III
2 50' intervals on curves and at all changes in direction. The surveyor shall
3 place lath and hub at such points with stations indicated. Tack in hub shall
4 not be permitted.
5
6 1. The Registered Land Surveyor shall utilize current right-of-way
7 maps, plats and property deeds, all being of public record, in
8 conjunction with existing monumentation to establish the existing
9 right-of-way lines and utility easement boundaries.
10
11 C. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish a temporary benchmark
12 system in accordance with Chapter 5J-17 F.A.C. and shall provide a written
13 list to the Contractor for his use.
14
15 D. The Contractor shall provide an as -built survey of all pipes and structures
16 constructed under the project that shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
17 Registered Surveyor and Mapper. At minimum, the As -Built Survey shall
18 include:
19
20 1. Top of concrete elevations and northings and eastings for all basins
21 and structures;
22 2. Weir elevations for all basins and structures;
23 3. Pipe inverts for gravity pipelines and top of pipe elevations for
24 pressure pipelines for all yard piping, and northings and eastings of
25 all changes in pipe direction.
26
27 1.04 RECORDS
28
29 A. Contractor shall maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey
30 work as construction progresses. Survey notes indicating the information
31 and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept
32 in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the Record Drawings.
33
34 1.05 SUBMITTALS
35
36 A. Submit name and address of surveyor to the Engineer.
37
38 B. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field
39 engineering work.
40
41 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
42
43 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
44
45
46 END OF SECTION
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01050-2 09/28/23
•
•
• 1 2 SECTION 01065
3 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the construction of the project
10 adheres to City, County, State, and Federal standards, and regulations, and to
11 all permits and easements acquired for the project.
12
13 B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work within rights-of-way with the agency
14 having jurisdiction, including all road/lane closures, road/lane narrowing and
15 detours.
16
17 C. Copies of any Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements or License Agreements
18 that the Owner has obtained will be available for review by prospective bidders
19 at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address:
20 www.myclearwater.com/cityproiects. The Contractor shall conduct all operations
21 in accordance with the requirements of all Permits, Easements and License
22 Agreements.
23
• 24 D. Where Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements require
25 that certain Work is to be performed only in the presence of a representative of
26 the permitting entity, the Contractor shall provide all coordination and
27 notification required to assure full compliance with the permit conditions.
28
29 E. The Owner has obtained or will obtain certain Permits, Deeds, Easement
30 Agreements, or License Agreements required for construction of the project. A
31 listing of those Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements
32 that the Owner has obtained or applied for is listed below. The Contractor shall
33 be responsible for obtaining all other Permits, Easement Agreements, or
34 License Agreements necessary for the proper execution of the Work not
35 specifically noted to be obtained by the Owner.
36
37 F. The Contractor shall comply with all terms, conditions, provisions, and
38 requirements of all permits issued or to be issued for the Project. Should the
39 Contractor's failure to comply with said permits lead to enforcement action by
40 any of the permitting or jurisdictional agencies, any resultant costs in the forms
41 of repairs, fines, penalties, administrative costs, attorney's fees, or consultant
42 fees shall be deducted from the Contract Price or shall be otherwise collectible
43 from the Contractor and its Surety, jointly and severally.
44
45 G. The Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of 30 days prior to the
•46 expiration of a permit if said expiration occurs prior to completion of the Work.
47
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-1 09/28/23
1 H. Prior to any land clearing or tree removal, the Contractor shall construct a soil III
2 tracking device in accordance with current Florida Department of Transportation
3 design standards.
4
5 1.02 PERMITS
6
7 A. Each bidder shall be familiar with the requirements of the permit conditions that
8 relate to construction activities and shall include the cost of satisfying these
9 permit conditions in developing a bid for the project.
10
11 B. At a minimum, the Contractor shall register with appropriate authorities, obtain
12 the following permits, comply with their respective conditions, and submit copies
13 of all applications and final permits to Engineer and Owner:
14
15 1. City of Clearwater building permit(s)
16 2. Generic Permit For Discharge of Groundwater From Dewatering
17 Operations —or- Generic Permit for Discharges from Petroleum
18 Contaminated Sites
19 3. Generic Permit for Storm Water Discharge from Large and Small
20 Construction Activities
21
22 C. The Contractor shall obtain all construction permits required including those
23 necessary for clearing, grubbing, and tree removal. No clearing shall occur and
24 no earth -moving equipment shall be placed on-site until after the permits have •
25 been issued.
26
27 D. The Contractor shall obtain, implement, and comply with all local and state
28 permits required for dewatering, including consumptive or water use permitting,
29 if required for construction from the Southwest Florida Water Management
30 District.
31
32 E. The Contractor shall conduct water quality sampling and testing to obtain,
33 implement and comply with the requirements of a Generic Permit for Discharge
34 of Ground Water from Dewatering Operations in accordance with 62-621.300(2)
35 FAC. The Contractor shall submit a Notice of Intent (NOI) To Use the Generic
36 Permit for Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations. If dewatering
37 activities are associated with construction activities, the FDEP currently allows
38 the dewatering activity to be covered under the Generic Permit for Stormwater
39 discharge from Large and Small Construction Activates described in the next
40 paragraph.
41
42 F. In lieu of section F. above, the Contractor may elect to conduct water quality
43 sampling and testing to obtain, implement and comply with the requirements of
44 a Generic Permit for Discharges from Petroleum Contaminated Sites in
45 accordance with 62-621.300 FAC. As of October 2016, the East WRF was •
46 listed by the FDEP as an Active Petroleum Cleanup Site.
47
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-2 09/28/23
1 G. The Contractor shall obtain, implement, and comply with the requirements of a
• 2Generic Permit for Storm Water Discharge from Large and Small Construction
3 Activities (CGP), in accordance with 62-621.300(4) FAC. The Contractor shall
4 submit a CGP Notice of Intent (NOI) to the Florida Department of Environmental
5 Protection (FDEP) and develop and submit a Storm Water Pollution Prevention
6 Plan (SWPPP) as part of the CGP. The Contactor shall:
7
8 1. Obtain the CGP form and NOI Application Form from the FDEP or its
9 website, DEP Documents 62-621.300(4)(a) and 62-621.300(4)(b),
10 respectively.
11
12 2. Develop an SWPPP in compliance with FDEP storm water permitting
13 rules that shall include, at a minimum, the following:
14
15 a. A site evaluation of how and where pollutants may be mobilized
16 by storm water.
17 b. A site plan for managing storm water runoff.
18 c. Identification of appropriate erosion and sediment controls
19 including Best Management Practices to reduce erosion,
20 sedimentation, and storm water pollution.
21 d. A maintenance and inspection schedule.
22 e. Plan and procedures for record keeping.
23 f. A map depicting storm water exit areas.
•24
25 3. Complete and submit the NOI Application, including all attachments, to
26 the local FDEP office along with the appropriate application fee.
27
28 4. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the FDEP Notice of Permit, along
29 with a copy of the SWPPP, to the Engineer.
30
31 1.03 EASEMENTS
32
33 A. The project area is within the property of the City of Clearwater. Refer to the
34 Contract Drawings to see the appropriate staging and working area.
35
36 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
37
38 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
39
40
41 END OF SECTION
•
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-3 09/28/23
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-4 09/28/23
•
•
•1 SECTION 01090
2
3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Contract Documents to identify
10 reference standards.
11
12 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
14 A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with
15 requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when
16 requirements are modified by the Contract Documents or applicable codes
17 establish stricter standards.
18
19 B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract
20 Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified.
21
22 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS
23
Ai 24 Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when
NW 25 needed for proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract
26 Documents.
27
28 AA Aluminum Association
29 900 19th Street NW
30 Washington, DC 20006
31
32 AASHTO American Association of State Highway
33 and Transportation Officials
34 444 North Capitol Street, NW Suite 249
35 Washington, DC 20001
36
37 ACI American Concrete Institute
38 38800 Country Club Drive
39 Farmington Hills, MI 48331
40
41 Al Asphalt Institute
42 2696 Research Park Drive
43 Lexington KY 40511
44
45 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
46 One East Wacker Drive
III47 Suite 3100
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-1 09/28/23
1 Chicago, IL 60601-2001
2
3 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
4 1140 Connecticut Avenue
5 Suite 705
6 Washington DC 20036
7
8 ANSI American National Standards Institute
9 1819 L Street, NW
10 Washington, DC 20036
11
12 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
13 Three Park Avenue
14 New York, NY 10016-5990
15
16 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
17 100 Barr Harbor Drive
18 West Conshohocken, PA, 19428
19
20 AWWA American Water Works Association
21 6666 W. Quincy Avenue
22 Denver, CO 80235
23
24 AWS American Welding Society
25 550 N.W. LeJeune Road
26 Miami, FL 33126
27
28 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
29 933 N. Plum Grove Road
30 Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
31
32 FS Federal Specification General Services
33 Administration Specifications and Consumer
34 Information Distribution Section (WFSIS)
35 470 L'enfant Plaza — Suite 8100
36 Washington, DC 20407
37
38 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
39 1300 North 17th Street
40 Suite 1847
41 Rosslyn, VA 22209
42
43 PCA Portland Cement Association
44 5420 Old Orchard Road
45 Skokie, IL 60077
46
47 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 209 W. Jackson Blvd.
• 2 Chicago, IL 60606
3
4 SSPC Society for Protective Coatings
5 40 24th Street,. 6th floor
6 Pittsburgh, PA 15222
7
8 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
9 333 Pfingston Road
10 Northbrook, IL 60062
11
12 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
13
14 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
15
16
17 END OF SECTION
18
•
•
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-3 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-4 09/28/23
•
• 1 2 SECTION 01150
3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. This section defines the Work included in each bid item in the Bid / Proposal
10 section of the Contract Documents. Payment will be made based on the
11 specified items included in the description in this section for each pay item
12 number and as verified in the field by the Engineer or Owner's
13 Representative.
14
15 B. All prices included in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall be full
16 compensation for all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, and
17 incidentals necessary to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings
18 and/or as specified in the Contract Documents. Actual quantities of each
19 item bid on a unit price basis will be determined upon completion of the
20 construction in the manner established for each item in this section.
21 Payment for all items listed in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall
22 constitute full compensation for all work shown and/or specified to be
23 performed under the Contract.
•24
25 C. Restoration is considered to be an integral part of the Work, and all bid
26 prices shall include the cost of restoration necessitated by the Work related
27 to that bid item. All existing structures and property including, but not limited
28 to, paving, stabilized roads, drainage piping and ditches, catch basins, head
29 walls, yard culverts, lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, decorative
30 walls, walkways, sidewalks, driveways, alleys, curbs, gutters, irrigation
31 systems, buildings, structures and equipment that are altered, removed or
32 damaged during construction shall be restored to the same or better
33 condition than existed prior to construction at no additional cost to the
34 Owner. Cleanup is an integral part of restoration process.
35
36 D. The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve and protect existing facilities
37 during all periods for the construction phase. All existing structures,
38 equipment, and private property, including, but not limited to paving,
39 stabilized roads, drainage piping and ditches, latch basins, head walls, yard
40 culverts, lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, decorative walls,
41 walkways, driveways, alleys, curbs, gutters and irrigations systems that are
42 altered, removed or damaged during construction and are not included in
43 the proposed alterations of the new work shall be restored to the same or
44 better condition than existed prior to construction.
45
•
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-1 09/28/23
1 E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic maintenance requirements
2 necessitated by the construction/installation of those specific bid items
3 requiring traffic maintenance. The cost for this work shall be included in the
4 specific unit price submitted for that particular bid item.
5
6 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
7
8 PART 3 — EXECUTION
9
10 3.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
11
12 A. General Conditions, Mobilization and Demobilization (Bid Item No. 1)
13
14 1. Description: This pay item includes compensation for the furnishing of all
15 labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to perform the
16 work as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including but not limited
17 to preparatory work and operations in mobilizing for beginning work on the
18 project; the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals to
19 the project site; safety equipment, first aid supplies, sanitary and other
20 facilities, as required by these Specifications, special provisions, and State
21 and local laws and regulations. The costs of bonds, permits and required
22 insurance, and any other preconstruction expenses necessary for the start
23 of the work, excluding the cost of construction materials. The price to be paid
24 for this item shall be based on such work being completed and accepted for
25 the site, all site renovations completed, and all materials and equipment
26 removed, for the lump sum unit price in the Bid Schedule. The standard
27 retainage will be applied to this item.
28
29 2. Measurement: Measurement for General Conditions, Mobilization and
30 Demobilization shall be on a lump sum basis, and the cost shall not exceed
31 five percent (5%) of the proposed Base Bid Total (Bid Item No.3 to Bid Item
32 No.8).
33
34 3. Payment: 20% of mobilization payment shall be withheld until all shop
35 drawings have been approved by the Engineer. 50% of this pay item will be
36 paid upon demonstration of mobilization and the balance will be paid with
37 the final pay request.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
4. Bid Item: Payment for General Conditions, Mobilization and Demobilization
shall be made at the Contract Lump Sum price for Item No.1 — Mobilization
and Demobilization as follows:
Bid Item No.
Description
1
Mobilization and Demobilization
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-2
09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 B. Demolition (Bid Item No. 2)
2
3 1. Description: This pay item includes all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
4 and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the drawings and
5 specified herein, including but not limited to the demolition and the disposal
6 of the existing odor control scrubber tower; removal of pumps, valves,
7 piping; electrical equipment at the existing pump station; removal of the
8 influent meter assembly and the equipment in the blower room, located at
9 the sludge handling building.
10
11 2. Measurement: Measurement for Demolition shall be on a lump sum basis,
12 the cost shall not exceed eight percent (8%) of the proposed Base Bid Total
13 (Bid Item No.3 to Bid Item No.8). Percentage complete will be calculated
14 based upon progress of construction of associated individual items in
15 accordance with the breakdown in the approved Schedule of Values.
16
17 3. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 2 shall be made as a percentage complete
18
19
20
21
22
•
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
of the lump sum amount indicated on the Bid Form.
4. Bid Item: Payment for Demolition shall be made at the Contract Lump Sum
price for Item No.2 — Demolition as follows:
Bid Item No.
Description
2
Demolition
C. Sitework (Bid Item 3)
1. Description: This pay item includes furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the
drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the general site
work such as erosion control, paving, grading, site excavation and
restoration; installation of fall protection gratings; coring hole and cover
pipe/wall openings; installation of bypass manhole; dewatering; and repair,
coating and painting requirements for the wet well, bypass manhole and the
blower room in the sludge handling building.
36 2. Measurement: Measurement for Civil Improvements shall be on a lump
37 sum basis. Percentage complete will be calculated based upon progress of
38 construction of associated individual items in accordance with the
39 breakdown in the approved Schedule of Values.
40
41 3. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 3 shall be made as a percentage complete
42 of the lump sum amount indicated on the Bid Form.
•43
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-3 09/28/23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 2. Measurement: Measurement for Pump Station Improvement shall be on a
15 lump sum basis. Percentage complete will be calculated based upon
16 progress of construction of associated individual items in accordance with
17 the breakdown in the approved Schedule of Values.
18
19 3. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 4 shall be made as a percentage complete
20 of the lump sum amount indicated on the Bid Form.
21
4. Bid Item: Payment for Sitework shall be made at the Contract Lump Sum
price for Item No.3 — Sitework as follows:
Bid Item No.
Description
3
Sitework
D. Pump Station Improvement (Bid Item 4)
1. Description: This pay item includes furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the
drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the installation of
influent pumps, piping, valves, pipe supports, baffle wall at the influent pump
station; and the installation of the influent meter assembly at the headworks
such as meter, piping and valves, etc.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
4. Bid Item: Payment for Pump Station Improvement shall be made at the
Contract Lump Sum price for Item No.4 — Pump Station Improvement as
follows:
Bid Item No.
Description
4
Pump Station Improvement
E. Large Bubble Mixing System (Bid Item 5)
1. Description: This pay item includes furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the
drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the Civil,
Mechanical, and Electrical, I&C improvements required to install the
complete Targe bubble mixing system. The work consists of installing air
compressor unit at the blower room inside the sludge handling building; yard
piping; installation of air lines and accumulator plates inside the wet well;
and general electrical and I&C requirements.
2. Measurement: Measurement for Large Bubble Mixing System shall be on
a lump sum basis. Percentage complete will be calculated based upon
progress of construction of associated individual items in accordance with
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
• 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
•21
22 2. Measurement: Measurement for Tank Spray Cleaning System shall be on
23 a lump sum basis. Percentage complete will be calculated based upon
24 progress of construction of associated individual items in accordance with
25 the breakdown in the approved Schedule of Values.
26
27 3. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 6 shall be made as a percentage complete
28 of the lump sum amount indicated on the Bid Form.
29
the breakdown in the approved Schedule of Values.
3. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 5 shall be made as a percentage complete
of the lump sum amount indicated on the Bid Form.
4. Bid Item: Payment for Large Bubble Mixing System shall be made at the
Contract Lump Sum price for Item No.5 — Large Bubble Mixing System as
follows:
Bid Item No.
Description
5
Large Bubble Mixing System
F. Tank Spray Cleaning System (Bid Item 6)
1. Description: This pay item includes furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the
drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the Civil and
Mechanical improvements required to install the complete tank spray
cleaning system. The work consists of installing piping, valves, pressure
gauge, strainer on the exterior of the pump station; and installing piping and
spray heads inside the pump station.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
040
4. Bid Item: Payment for Tank Spray Cleaning System shall be made at the
Contract Lump Sum price for Item No.6 — Tank Spray Cleaning System as
follows:
Bid Item No.
Description
6
Tank Spray Cleaning System
G. Temporary Bypass Pumping (Bid Item 7)
1. Description: This pay item includes furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the
drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the setup,
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-5 09/28/23
1 operation and breakdown of the temporary bypass pumping; the installation
2 of roller pipe support and concrete pipe support.
3
4 2. Measurement: Measurement for Temporary Bypass Pumping shall be on
5 a lump sum basis. Percentage complete will be calculated based upon
6 progress of construction of associated individual items in accordance with
7 the breakdown in the approved Schedule of Values.
8
9 3. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 7 shall be made as a percentage complete
10 of the lump sum amount indicated on the Bid Form.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
4. Bid Item: Payment for Temporary Bypass Pumping shall be made at the
Contract Lump Sum price for Item No.7 — Temporary Bypass Pumping as
follows:
Bid Item No.
Description
7
Temporary Bypass Pumping
H. Electrical, Instrumentation and Controls (Bid Item 8)
1. Description: This pay item includes furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and supervision required to perform the work as shown on the
drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the installation of
power system, testing, and all other work incidental to the completion of
electrical system and SCADA integration; excluding the electrical and I&C
work required for the large bubble mixing system, which is included in Bid
Item 5.
28 2. Measurement: Measurement for Electrical, Instrumentation and Controls
29 shall be on a lump sum basis. Percentage complete will be calculated based
30 upon progress of construction of associated individual items in accordance
31 with the breakdown in the approved Schedule of Values.
32
33 3. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 8 shall be made as a percentage complete
34 of the lump sum amount indicated on the Bid Form.
35
36
37
38
39
40
4. Bid Item: Payment for Electrical, Instrumentation and Controls shall be
made at the Contract Lump Sum price for Item No.8 — Electrical,
Instrumentation and Controls as follows:
Bid Item No.
Description
8
Electrical, Instrumentation and Controls
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-6
09/28/23
•
•
•
1 I Permit Allowance (Bid Item 9)
•
2
3 1. Description: Fees for obtaining applications for permits required by the City
4 of Clearwater and the State of Florida in accordance with the plans and
5 specifications, such as Building Permit, NPDES, and etc. The permit
6 allowance is $5,000 dollars.
7
8 2. Measurement: The quantity measured for payment shall be the actual
9 receipt supporting permit fees.
10
11 3. Payment: Payment will be made at the actual cost to the Contractor for the
12 permits required and acquired. Upon completion of the permitting process,
13 the Contractor will submit receipts for permit fees to the City. A change order
14 shall be executed to adjust (increase or decrease) the lump sum contract
15 price for any difference between the bid item allowance amount and the
16 actual permit fees.
17
18
19
20
.21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
4. Bid Item: Payment for Permit Allowance shall be made at the actual
expenses for Item No.9 — Permit Allowance as follows:
Bid Item No.
Description
9
Permit Allowance
J. Owner's Contingency (Bid Item 10)
1. Description: This pay item includes a contingent amount. Only the amount
properly authorized by the City and documented will be paid to the
Contractor. At project closeout, any amount remaining in contingency funds
shall not be paid out as part of any final payment and shall remain with the
contract. The total of the contingency fee will be no more than 15% of the
Base Bid Schedule Subtotal (Bid Item No.1 to Bid Item No. 8).
32 2. Measurement: Measurement will be for the negotiated work acceptably
33 furnished and installed as directed by the Owner.
34
35 3. Payment: Payment will be for the actual negotiated work installed. The
36 basis of negotiated prices and subcontractors' invoices will be included in
37 the Contractor's pay application. Copies of all invoices, equipment costs,
38 and other supporting documentation shall be included.
39
40 4. Bid Item: Payment for Owner's Contingency shall be made at the
41 negotiated expenses for Item No.10 — Owner's Contingency as follows:
42
•43
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-7 09/28/23
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bid Item No.
Description
10
Owner's Contingency
END OF SECTION
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150-8 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 SECTION 01152
2
3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Submit Applications for Payment to the Engineer in accordance with the
10 approved payment schedule, and in the format established by the Owner.
11
12 B. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, the proposed Application
13 for Payment form, prior to the first payment request. Format shall be MS
14 Excel.
15
16 1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED
17
18 A. Submit applications typed on forms either provided in these Specifications,
19 furnished by the Owner, or as approved by the Owner, with itemized data
20 typed on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 8-1/2 inch x 14 -inch white paper
21 continuation sheets.
22
23 B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet:
• 24
25 1. Format, schedules, line items and values: those of the Schedule of
26 Values accepted by the Engineer.
27
28 1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT
29
30 A. Application Form:
31
32 1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders
33 executed prior to date of submittal of application.
34
35 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals
36 indicated on continuation sheets.
37
38 3. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of the
39 Contractor.
40
41 B. Continuation Sheets:
42
43 1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item
44 number and scheduled dollar value for each item.
45
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-1 09/28/23
1 2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when
2 work has been performed or products stored.
3 3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the
4 end of the continuation sheets.
5
6 a. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an
7 original component item of work.
8
9 4. To receive approval for payment on component material stored on
10 site, submit copies of the original invoices with the Application for
11 Payment. The application for payment must also include a table
12 summarizing the amount of each invoice and the schedule of values
13 line item to which the stored materials apply.
14
15 1.04 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
16
17 A. Provide substantiating data, containing suitable information for review of
18 costs requested with a cover letter identifying:
19
20 1. Project.
21
22 2. Application number and date.
23
24 3. Detailed list of enclosures.
25
26 4. For stored products:
27
28 a. Item number and identification as shown on application.
29
30 b. Description of specific material.
31
32 c. Supplier invoices.
33
34 d. A table identifying stored material, amount stored, amount
35 installed, and schedule of values item, which the material
36 applies.
37
38 B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application.
39
40 C. Contractor shall maintain an updated construction schedule in accordance
41 with these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments,
42 Contractor shall submit the updated construction schedule with the
43 applications for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the
44 required updated schedule within the time prescribed, the Engineer may
45 withhold progress payment estimates until such a time as the Contractor
46 submits the required updated schedule.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-2 09/28/23
•
•
1
• 2 D. Contractor shall maintain an updated set of As -Built Drawings in
3 accordance with these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly
4 progress payments, Contractor shall submit the updated As -Built Drawings
5 with the applications for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit
6 the updated As -Built Drawings, the Engineer may withhold progress
7 payment estimates until such a time as the Contractor submits same.
8
9 1.05 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
10
11 A. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments.
12
13 B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as
14 specified in the Specification.
15
16 C. All appropriate information must be entered on the application form.
17
18 1. The line title, "Application Period", must indicate the dates between
19 which all work was completed during the pay period. These dates
20 must be consecutive with the dates of the previous Payment Request
21 and they must not overlap.
22
23 2. All blank lines within the "Contract Data" and "Summary of Project
• 24 Status" section of the application must be completed. Also, if any
25 Change Orders have been approved, the "Change Orders" section
26 must include that information.
27
28 3. All calculations and arithmetic must be precise to the penny.
29
30 4. The application must be signed and dated by an authorized
31 representative of the Contractor.
32
33 1.06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
34
35 A. Prior to submitting a completed Application for Payment request, the
36 Contractor shall arrange a field meeting with the Owner and/or Engineer to
37 review and verify all installed quantities and/or stored materials. Only when
38 the Owner/Engineer and Contractor agree on installed quantities and
39 percentages, should the Application for Payment be submitted.
40
41 B. Submit six (6) copies of Applications for Payment to the Engineer at the
42 times stipulated in the General Conditions.
43
44 C. When the Engineer finds Application properly completed and correct, he will
45 transmit certificate for payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor.
•46
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-3 09/28/23
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
2
3 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
4
5
6
7 END OF SECTION
8
9
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-4 09/28/23
•
•
•1 SECTION 01153
2
3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Promptly implement Change Order procedures.
10
11 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes.
12
13 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material/force
14 account basis.
15
16 3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request.
17
18 B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization:
19
20 1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the work.
21
22 2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of
23 the authorization of changes in the work.
• 24
25 1.02 DEFINITIONS
26
27 A. Change Order: See General Conditions.
28
29 B. Work Directive Change: A written order to the Contractor, signed by Owner
30 and Engineer, which amends the Contract Documents as described,
31 authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change that affects the Contract
32 Sum or the Contract Time, and that will be included in a subsequent Change
33 Order.
34
35 C. Engineer's Supplemental Instructions: A written order, instructions, or
36 interpretations, signed by Engineer making minor changes in the Work not
37 involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
38
39 D. Field Order: A written order to the Contractor, signed by the Engineer and
40 the Contractor, which is issued to interpret/clarify the Contract Documents,
41 order minor changes in the work. The work described by a Field Order is
42 to be accomplished without change to the Contract Sum, Contract Time,
43 and/or claims for other costs.
44
45 1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
•46
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-1 09/28/23
1 A. Owner and Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a Work Directive
2 Change to the Contractor. Request will include:
3
4 1. Detailed description of the change, products, and location of the
5 change in the Project.
6
7 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.
8
9 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific
10 statement as to whether overtime work is or is not authorized.
11
12 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be
13 considered valid.
14
15 B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to the
16 Engineer, containing:
17
18 1. Description of the proposed changes.
19
20 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes.
21
22 3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
23
24 4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors.
25
26 5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract
27 Time, as appropriate.
28
29 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
30
31 A. Work Directive Change will describe changes in the Work, both additions
32 and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define
33 details of the change and will designate the method of determining any
34 change in the Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time.
35
36 B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as
37 authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes.
38
39 1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS
40
41 A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price,
42 which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating
43 data to allow the Engineer to evaluate the quotation.
44
45 B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations:
46
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 1. Labor required.
2
3 2. Equipment required.
4
5 3. Products required.
6
7 a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost.
8
9 b. Quantities required.
10
11 4. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.
12
13 5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented.
14
15 6. Overhead and profit.
16
17 7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
18
19 C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time -and -
20 material/force account basis, with documentation as required for a Lump
21 Sum proposal, plus additional information:
22
23 1 Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and
• 24 date of the order.
25
26 2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom.
27
28 3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid.
29
30 4. Receipts and invoices for:
31
32 a. Equipment used, listing dates, and times of use.
33
34 b. Products used, listing of quantities.
35
36 c. Subcontracts.
37
38 1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS
39
40 A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order and Field Order.
41
42 B. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and
43 deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details
44 of the change.
45
III
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-3 09/28/23
1 C. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract
2 Sum and in the Contract Time.
3
4 D. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract
5 Documents, order minor changes in the Work, and/ or memorialize trade-off
6 agreements.
7
8 E. Field Order work will be accomplished without change in the Contract Sum,
9 Contract Time, and/or claims for other costs.
10
11 1.07 LUMP SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER
12
13 A. Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved
14 and attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by
15 Contractor, or requests from Owner, or both.
16
17 B. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be
18 sent to Contractor for review. After review by Contractor, all copies should
19 be sent to Owner for review. Engineer should make distribution of executed
20 copies.
21
22 1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
23
24 A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either:
25
26 1. Engineer's definition of the scope of the required changes.
27
28 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer.
29
30 3. Survey of complete work.
31
32 B. The amounts of the unit prices to be:
33
34 1. Those stated in the Agreement.
35
36 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor.
37
38 C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be
39 determined prior to start of the work:
40
41 1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date a Work Directive Change as
42 authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes.
43
44 D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work:
45
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 1. Engineer or Owner will issue a Work Directive change directing the
0 2 Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices,
3 and the Engineer will cite the applicable unit prices.
4
5 2. Upon completion of the change, the Engineer will determine the cost
6 of such work based on the unit prices and quantities used.
7 Contractor shall submit documentation to establish the number of
8 units of each item and any claims for a change in Contract Time.
9
10 3. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the
11 change in Contract Sum and in Contract Time.
12
13 4. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their
14 agreement with the terms therein.
15
16 5. Owner will then sign the change order.
17
18 1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL/FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/CONSTRUCTION
19 CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
20
21 A. Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing
22 Contractor to proceed with the changes.
23
24 B. Upon completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit itemized
Alk 25 accounting and supporting data.
26
27 C. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in
28 General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
29
30 D. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in
31 Contract Sum and in Contract Time.
32
33 E. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement
34 therewith.
35
36 F. Owner will then sign the Change Order.
37
38 1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS
39
40 A. Not greater than monthly revise Schedule of Values and Application for
41 Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of work and to
42 record the adjusted Contract Amount.
43
44 B. Not greater than monthly revise the Progress Schedule to reflect each
45 change in Contract Time. Revise sub -schedules to show changes for other
46 items of work affected by the Change Order.
47
48 C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes
49 in Record Documents.
. 50
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-5 09/28/23
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
2
3 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
4
5
6
7 END OF SECTION
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-6 09/28/23
•
•
•1 SECTION 01200
2
3 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
8
9 A. In accordance with the Contract Documents, prior to the commencement of
10 Work, a preconstruction conference shall be held at a mutually agreed time
11 and place.
12
13 B. The purpose of the conference shall be to designate responsible personnel
14 and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination shall
15 be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The
16 agenda shall include as a minimum:
17
18 1. Contractor's Initial Construction Schedule
19
20 2. Procedures for Transmittal, Review and Distribution of Shop Drawings
21
22 3. Procedures for Submittal and Review of Monthly Applications for
23 Payment
• 24
25 4. Maintaining As -Built Drawings
26
27 5. Critical Work Sequencing and Construction Restrictions
28
29 6. Field Decisions and Change Orders
30
31 7. Field Office, Storage Areas and Security
32
33 8. Equipment and Material Deliveries
34
35 9. Safety Meetings and Program
36
37 10. Traffic Control Plan
38
39 11. Pre -construction Video
40
41 C. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for
42 preparation and distribution of the minutes.
43
44 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
45
• 46 A. The Owner shall schedule and conduct regular project meetings at least
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01200-1 09/28/23
1 monthly and at other times as deemed necessary by the progress of the III
2 work. The Contractor and the Engineer shall be represented at each
3 meeting. The Contractor and/or Engineer may request attendance by
4 representatives of material Supplier(s) and Subcontractor(s).
5
6 B. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping
7 the minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance. The purpose
8 of the meetings shall include but not be limited to reviewing the progress of
9 the Work, maintaining coordination of efforts, discussing changes in
10 scheduling and resolving problems that may develop; claims review; and
11 future scheduling.
12
13 PART 2 — PRODUCT (NOT USED)
14
15 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
16
17
18 END OF SECTION
19
20
21
22
23
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01200-2 09/28/23
•
•
• 1 2 SECTION 01300
3 SUBMITTALS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
8
9 A. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be transmitted in the format
10 provided to the Contractor by the Engineer, certified and signed by the
11 Contractor indicating the submittal to be correct and in accordance with the
12 Contract Documents, and noting any special instructions regarding the
13 submittal. Each submittal shall identify the submittal number in the format
14 required by the Engineer, with the name and number of this contract, the
15 Contractor's name, and references to applicable specification paragraphs
16 and Contract Drawings. Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of
17 the item in the Work. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items
18 shall be clearly identified. The current revision, issue number, and date
19 shall be indicated on all drawings and descriptive data.
20
21 B. Contractor shall stamp each submittal and said stamp shall be Contractor's
22 representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor accepts full
23 responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field
• 24 construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that
25 he has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the
26 Work and the Contract Documents.
27
28 C. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each
29 submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such
30 submittals shall indicate, as pertinent to the deviation, essential details of
31 all changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications to other
32 facilities that may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and
33 wiring diagrams.
34
35 D. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each
36 submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all
37 exceptions previously noted by Engineer have been taken into account. In
38 the event that more than one resubmission is required because of the
39 Contractor's failure to account for exceptions previously noted, Contractor
40 shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for review of the
41 additional resubmissions.
42
43 E. Resubmittals shall be made within seven (7) days of the date of the letter
44 returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within seven (7)
45 days the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the
•46 stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be
SUBMITTALS
01300-1
09/28/23
1 completed within that time.
2
3 F. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining
4 Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of
5 the Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a change
6 in the work authorized by a Change Order.
7
8 G. Contractor's letter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal,
9 the date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of
10 submission and return of any previous resubmittals.
11
12 H. Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by Contractor will cover
13 only general conformity to the drawings and specifications, external
14 connections, and dimensions which affect the layout. Engineer's review
15 does not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details
16 of the material, equipment, device or item shown. Engineer's review of
17 submittals shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors,
18 omissions, or deviations, or responsibility for compliance with the Contract
19 Documents.
20
21 I. It is intended that submittals be handled electronically whenever possible,
22 however, when necessary to employ paper copies, five copies of each
23 drawing and necessary data, plus the number of copies that the Contractor
24 wants returned, shall be submitted to Engineer. Engineer will not accept
25 submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively
26 numbered in direct sequence of submittal and without division by
27 subcontracts or trades. Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first
28 submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.), to indicate the sequence of the
29 resubmittal. If applicable, the Engineer will provide the Contractor with an
30 electronic file of the submittal format to be followed.
31
32 J. When submittals are returned marked CONFIRM or REJECTED -
33 RESUBMIT, the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as
34 instructed by Engineer and corrected copies shall resubmitted.
35
36 K. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct
37 specific attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made
38 other than those called for by Engineer on previous submissions.
39
40 L. When the submittals are returned marked APPROVED, NO EXCEPTIONS
41 TAKEN or MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED resubmittal is not required.
42
43 1.02 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
44
45 A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval a Schedule of
46 Submittals identifying the date of the initial submission, the beginning of
SUBMITTALS
01300-2
09/28/23
•
•
1 manufacture as applicable, and the delivery to the site. This Schedule shall
• 2be submitted as a separate submittal and be approved as a prerequisite to
3 the submission of any other submittal. No other shop drawing or submittal
4 will be reviewed until the Schedule of Submittals is approved.
5
6 B. The Schedule of Submittals shall include all submittals specified to be
7 submitted including shop drawings, schedules, permits, warranties, reports,
8 and other items specified to be submitted.
9
10 C. The Schedule of Submittals shall show the submittal of each shop drawing
11 and/or submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or
12 other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work
13 sections of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by
14 processing times, including disapproval and resubmittal (if required),
15 coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery,
16 and similar sequenced activities.
17
18 D. The Schedule of Submittals shall indicate those submittals that are critical
19 to the progress schedule. The Schedule shall show other, non-critical shop
20 drawing submittals spread out over the contract time as required to
21 minimize the number of concurrent reviews being performed, or as directed
22 by the Engineer. All equipment testing certifications, certifications of proper
23installation, warranties, O&M manuals, spare parts and Owner training
•24 materials specified to be provided shall be submitted in accordance with this
25 specification and shall either be submitted with the shop drawing submittal
26 for the equipment or submitted separately.
27
28 E. The Contractor shall develop the Schedule of Submittals such that the total
29 number of submittals does not exceed thirty-one (31). In developing the
30 Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor shall identify separate submittals for:
31
32 1. Construction phasing plan
33 2. Each concrete coating and lining system
34 3. Each pipe material of construction (ductile iron, steel, PVC, HDPE, etc.).
35 4. Concrete and concrete reinforcement
36 5. Construction and start-up schedules.
37
38 In developing the Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor may identify a
39 single submittal for a given Division, such as Division 5 Miscellaneous
40 Metals, or a given Section, such as 15100 Valves, incorporating all items
41 into a single submittal. However, no submittal shall include items from two
42 (or more) different Divisions.
43
44 Monthly schedule and narrative updates that are submitted with
45 Applications for Payment will not count against the total number of
•46 submittals specified above.
SUBMITTALS
01300-3
09/28/23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
F. In accordance with Section IIIA, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner
for Engineer's cost to review excess submittals and re -submittals and/or
confirmations that exceed a total ten (10) beyond that specified above (total
of 50 submittals and re -submittals).
G. Following is an example listing of the anticipated submittals for this project.
1. Schedule of Submittals
2. Surveyor Information
3. Schedule of Values
4. Construction Schedule
5. Schedule of Payments
6. Construction Phasing Plan
7. Hurricane Preparedness Plan
8. Video Subcontractor and Pre Construction Video
9. Stormwater Permit NOI
10. FDEP Groundwater Discharge Permit
11. Dewatering Plan
12. Precast Concrete Manhole
13. Cast -In Place Concrete
14. Concrete Reinforcement
15. Concrete Waterstop
16. Hatch/Hatch Grating
17. Paint and Coatings
18. DI Pipe, Fittings, Couplings & Accessories
19. 316 SS Air Pipe
20. PVC Pipe (SCH40 and 80)
21. Pipe Supports
22. Pumps
23. Bypass Pumping System and Plan
24. Large Bubble Mixing Unit (including air compressor unit),
including O&M Manual
25. Spray Nozzle Head
26. Radar Level Sensor
27. Magnetic Flow Meter, including O&M Manual
28. Knife Gate Valves, all sizes, including O&M Manual
29. Plug Valves, all sizes, including O&M Manual
30. Check Valves, all sizes, including O&M Manual
31. Raceways
32. Electrical Wiring & Cables
33. Electrical Box, Control Panels & Fittings
34. Electrical Wiring Devices
35. Electrical Supporting Devices
36. Grounding
37. Disconnect Switches
SUBMITTALS
01300-4
09/28/23
•
•
1 38. Site Lighting and Pole
• 2 39. Final Shop Drawings and O&M Manuals in Electronic Format
3 40. Contract Closeout Submittals
4
5 1.03 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
6
7 A. Before Work is started, Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review a
8 schedule of the proposed construction operations. The construction
9 schedule shall indicate the sequence of the Work, the time of starting and
10 completion of each part, the installation date for each major item of
11 equipment, and the time for making connections to existing piping,
12 structures, or facilities.
13
14 B. At least every 30 days the schedule shall be revised as necessary to reflect
15 changes in the progress of the Work.
16
17 C. Owner may require Contractor to add to his equipment, or construction
18 forces, as well as increase the working hours, if operations fall behind
19 schedule at any time during the construction period.
20
21 1.04 PROGRESS REPORTS
22
23 A. A progress report shall be furnished to Engineer with each application for
• 24 progress payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, Contractor shall
25 submit additional progress reports at such intervals as Engineer may
26 request.
27
28 B. Each progress report shall include sufficient narrative to describe current
29 and anticipated delaying factors, their effect on the construction schedule,
30 and proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which
31 is not readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory
32 evidence.
33
34 C. Each progress report shall also include three (3) prints of the accepted
35 graphic schedule marked to indicate actual progress.
36
37 1.05 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
38
39 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a Schedule of Values
40 after review of the tentative schedule and before submission of the first
41 application for payment. The schedule of values, showing the value of each
42 kind of work in sufficient detail as requested by the Engineer, shall be
43 acceptable to Engineer before any application for payment is prepared or
44 approved.
45
• 46 B. The sum of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract
SUBMITTALS
01300-5
09/28/23
1 Price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, may •
2 be listed separately in the schedule of values, provided the amounts can be
3 substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items.
4 The Schedule of Values shall contain at minimum a complete listing of the
5 various project milestones that are "critical path" items according to the
6 approved construction schedule.
7
8 C. In addition to those items listed in Paragraph B, the O&M manuals, as -built
9 drawings, start-up, training, and any other individualized component that the
10 Contractor or Engineer wants separately itemized for payment shall also be
11 included on the Schedule of Values.
12
13 D. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor
14 on items of Work that would be performed first will not be accepted. The
15 Schedule of Values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to
16 Engineer. Final acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only consent to the
17 Schedule of Values as a basis for preparation of applications for progress
18 payments and shall not constitute an agreement as to the value of each
19 indicated item.
20
21 1.06 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS
22
23 A. Within thirty (30) days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish
24 to the Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule
25 shall be revised and resubmitted each time an application for payment
26 varies more than 10 percent from the estimated payment schedule.
27
28 1.07 SURVEY DATA
29
30 A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing
31 surveys required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for
32 examination throughout the construction period. All such data shall be
33 submitted to Engineer with the other documentation required for final
34 acceptance of the Work.
35
36 1.08 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS, WORKING DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING
37 DATA
38
39 A. Shop drawings, working drawings, and engineering data shall be included
40 in the Schedule of Submittals identifying the dates for the initial submission
41 of shop and working drawings, the beginning of manufacture, testing and
42 installation of materials, supplies and equipment.
43
44 B. The Schedule of Submittals shall show the submittal of each shop drawing
45 sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable
46 activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections of the
SUBMITTALS
01300-6
09/28/23
•
•
•1 Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing
2 times including re -review and resubmittal (if required), coordination with
3 other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar
4 sequenced activities.
5
6 C. The Schedule of Submittals shall indicate those submittals that are critical
7 to the progress schedule and shall show other shop drawing submittals
8 spread out over the contract time as required to minimize the number of
9 concurrent reviews or as directed by the Engineer.
10
11 D. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will
12 become a permanent part of the Work shall be submitted to Engineer, for
13 review. These data shall include drawings and descriptive information in
14 sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of
15 component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages,
16 and supports required; performance characteristics; and dimensions
17 needed for installation and correlation with other materials and equipment.
18
19 1.09 LAYOUT DATA
20
21 A. Contractor shall keep neat and legible notes of measurements and
22 calculations made by him in connection with the layout of the Work. Copies
23 of such data shall be furnished to the Engineer for use in checking
• 24
25 B. Contractor's layout as provided under Lines and Grades. All such data
26 considered of value to Owner will be transmitted to Owner by Engineer with
27 other records upon completion of the Work.
28
29 1.10 SUBMITTALS FOR COLOR SELECTION
30
31 A. The following is a list of items that must be submitted together for color
32 selection. No single item on this list will be approved without the submittal
33 of all other items.
34
35 1. Paint for piping, valves, valve box covers, meter box covers, etc.
36
37 2. Paint for equipment.
38
39 PART 2 — PRODUCT (NOT USED)
40
41 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
42
43
44 END OF SECTION
45
III
SUBMITTALS
01300-7
09/28/23
1 SECTION 01310
•2
3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
4
5
6 PART 1 — GENERAL
7
8 1.01 GENERAL
9
10 A. Construction under this contract must be coordinated to assure that
11 construction is completed within the time allowed by the Contract Documents.
12 The Contractor will also coordinate his activities with the other contractors to
13 allow orderly and timely completion of all the work.
14
15 B. All construction schedules shall be of the critical path method, bar chart type,
16 and shall be prepared using SURETRACK, PRIMAVERA P3, or equal.
17
18 C. The Contractor is advised that the construction schedule must reflect that no
19 major pieces of equipment or systems may be shut down or started up within
20 one week prior to the toxicity screening and compliance testing events
21 highlighted on the Owner's TRE Schedule at the end of this section.
22
23 1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING GENERAL PROVISIONS
•24
25 A. Within 15 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice of Award, the
26 Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a preliminary construction
27 progress schedule. The schedule shall contain a sufficient number of tasks
28 such that no single task has a value that exceeds 2.0% of the total Contract
29 Price. Partial payments will not be approved until an acceptable construction
30 progress schedule has been accepted by the Engineer.
31
32 B. The schedule shall be updated monthly reflecting the baseline schedule and
33 the Contractor's progress on each activity. No progress payment will be
34 approved until the updated schedule is submitted and accepted by the
35 Engineer.
36
37 C. Night work may be established by the Contractor as regular procedure only
38 with the prior written permission of the Owner. Such permission, however,
39 may be revoked at any time by the Owner if the Contractor fails to maintain
40 adequate equipment and supervision for the proper execution and control of
41 the work at night.
42
43 D. The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative who shall be
44 responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and of
45 progress and payment reports. This representative of the Contractor shall
111
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-1 09/28/23
1 have direct project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the
2 Contractor in fulfilling the commitments of the Contractor's schedule.
3
4 1.03 PROGRESS OF THE WORK
5
6 A. The work shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent
7 any delay to the general completion of the work. The work shall be executed
8 at such times and in or on such parts of the project, and with such forces,
9 materials and equipment to assure completion of the work in the time
10 established by the Contract.
11
12 B. If the Contractor, for his convenience and at his own expense, should desire
13 to carry on his work at night or outside regular hours, he shall submit written
14 notice to the Engineer and he shall allow ample time for satisfactory
15 arrangements to be made for inspecting the work in progress. The Contractor
16 shall reimburse the Owner for extra inspection required for work outside
17 regular hours. The Contractor shall light the different parts of the project as
18 required to comply with all applicable Federal and State regulations and with
19 all applicable requirements of the municipality in which the work is being done.
20
21 PART 2 — PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
22
23 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
24
25 A. As required within the General Conditions, the Contractor shall submit a
26 critical path progress schedule as described herein. The schedule shall take
27 into considerations all work phasing and restrictions as specified elsewhere in
28 the Contract Documents.
29
30 B. The critical path progress schedule requirement shall consist of a detailed
31 schedule, monthly status reports (Monthly Reports), a start-up schedule, and
32 revisions to the schedules and analyses as described. The planning,
33 scheduling, management and execution of the work are the sole
34 responsibilities of the Contractor. The progress schedule shall allow the
35 Engineer to review Contractor's planning, scheduling, management, and
36 execution of the work; to assist Engineer in evaluating work progress and
37 make progress payments; to allow other contractors to cooperate and
38 coordinate their activities with those of the Contractor; and to provide Owner
39 with information about "construction schedule" and "cumulative outlay
40 schedule."
41
42 C. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall not relieve Contractor from
43 the responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless
44 Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to such deviations at the
45 time of submission and Engineer has given written concurrence to the specific
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 deviations, nor shall any concurrence by Engineer relieve Contractor from
ii• 2 responsibility for errors and omissions in the submittals.
3
4 D. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive benefit of the Owner, the Engineer
5 or the Contractor. Extensions of time for performance, as specified in the
6 General and Supplementary Conditions, will be granted only to the extent that
7 equitable time adjustments for the network activity, or activities affected,
8 exceed the total float or slack time along the affected network paths, as shown
9 in the precedence diagram and report in effect at the instant of either (a) a
10 notice to proceed with a change, or (b) a notice of suspension of work or
11 possession, or (c) detection of a subsequently acknowledged differing site
12 condition, or (d) occurrence of cause for an excusable delay. Further, use of
13 float time in the schedule, or the allocation of float time to activities by means
14 of special logic restraints or imposed dates, shall be shared to the benefit of
15 Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and his subcontractors and suppliers in
16 proportion of their scope of responsibilities. Excessive use of float time to the
17 detriment of succeeding activities may be cause for denying an extension of
18 time if it can be demonstrated that the float along the network paths affected
19 at the instant of the delaying condition would have been larger than the delay
20 had it not been for the excessive and unreasonable float usage in violation of
21 the sharing concept required by this Specification.
22
23 E. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall be only for conformance
•24 with the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to
25 the means, methods, sequences and techniques or procedures of
26 construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Engineer's
27 review of the schedule submittals will be predicated on a Contractor's stamp
28 of approval signed off by Contractor. Contractor's stamp of approval on any
29 schedule submittals shall constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer
30 that Contractor, has either determined or verified all data on the submittal, or
31 assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor and his
32 subcontractors and suppliers have reviewed and coordinated the sequences
33 shown in the submittal with the requirements of the work under the Contract
34 Documents.
35
36 2.02 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
37
38 A. Graphic network diagrams shall be on a time -scaled precedence network
39 format. The graphic network diagram shall include the following format:
40
41 1. Description of each activity, or restraint, shall be brief but convey the
42 scope of work described.
43
44 2. Activities shall identify all items of work that must be accomplished to
45 achieve Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion,
•46 such as the major disciplines of work; items pertaining to the approval
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-3 09/28/23
1 of regulatory agencies; contractor's time required for submittals, III
2 fabrication and deliveries; the time required by Engineer to review all
3 submittals as set forth in the Contract Documents; items of work
4 required of Owner to support pre -operational and start-up testing; time
5 required for the relocation of utilities. Activities shall also identify
6 interface milestones with the work of other contract work under
7 separate contracts with Owner.
8
9 3. Any activities not shown on the graphic network diagram shall be
10 considered to have no effect on the Contractor's ability to achieve
11 Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion, within
12 the Contract Time. Any delays to activities that do not appear in the
13 concurred detailed schedule shall give rise only to non -prejudicial
14 delays. Attempts to impose after -the -fact logic constraints where none
15 existed previously to justify time extensions will not be permitted.
16
17 4. Activity durations shall be in whole working days.
18
19 5. Graphic diagrams shall be time -scaled and sequenced by work areas.
20 The Diagram of Activities shall show numerical values for total float and
21 be shown on their early schedules. The diagram shall be neat and
22 legible and submitted on sheets no larger than 24 inches by 36 inches
23 on a medium suitable for reproduction.
24
25 B. Printout reports shall contain the following data for each activity or restraint:
26
27 1. Activity identification, activity description, activity duration, activity
28 man -days, computed or specified early start date, computed early
29 finish date, computed late start date, computed or specified late finish
30 date, and total float and free float.
31
32 2. Five separate reports shall be provided, including all activities and
33 restraints, and shall be submitted monthly as follows:
34
35 a. Activity, sort by early start dates in order of ascending numbers.
36 b. Activity, sort by department.
37 c. Float report, in order of ascending total float values.
38 d. Successor/predecessor report.
39
40 PART 3 — EXECUTION
41
42 3.01 DETAILED SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL
43
44 A. Submittal shall include a time -scaled graphic diagram showing all Contract
45 activities, computer printout reports, and a supporting narrative. The initial
46 Detailed Schedule submittal shall be delivered within 10 calendar days after
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-4 09/28/23
•
•
•1 the Notice to Proceed and shall use the Notice to Proceed as the "data date".
2 Upon receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall meet with Engineer
3 and discuss an appraisal and evaluation of the proposed work plan.
4 Necessary revisions resulting from this review shall be made by Contractor
5 and the detailed schedule resubmitted within 15 calendar days after the
6 meeting. The re -submittal, if agreed to by the Owner, and unless
7 subsequently changed with the concurrence of or at the direction of Owner,
8 shall be the work plan to be used by the Contractor for planning, scheduling,
9 managing, and executing the work. If Contractor fails to provide an
10 acceptable Detailed Schedule submittal, he will be deemed not to have
11 provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will further
12 constitute reasons for refusing to recommend payment.
13
14 B. The graphic diagram shall be formatted in accordance with Article 2.02(A)
15 above. The diagram shall include (1) all detailed activities grouped by major
16 areas of work. The critical path activities shall be identified, including critical
17 paths for interim dates, if applicable, by clearly highlighting the path on the
18 graphics diagram.
19
20 C. This submittal shall include five copies of the graphic diagram, the printout
21 reports, and the narrative, in accordance with Article 2.02 of these scheduling
22 requirements.
23
•24 D. The narrative shall include sufficient data to explain the basis of Contractor's
25 determination of durations, describe the contract conditions and restraints
26 plugged into the schedule, and provide a "what -if" analysis pertaining to
27 potential problems and practical steps to mitigate them. Should Engineer
28 require additional data, this information shall be supplied by Contractor within
29 ten calendar days.
30
31 3.02 MONTHLY STATUS REPORTS
32
33 A. Beginning with the first month, and every month thereafter, Contractor shall
34 submit to Engineer, with each Application for Payment, a Monthly Status
35 Report (based on the Detailed Schedule) with data as of the last day of the
36 pay period. The monthly Status Report shall include a revised copy of the
37 currently accepted graphic diagram, computer printouts and a narrative. The
38 Monthly Status Report will be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
39 address the Engineer's comments in the subsequent Monthly Status Report.
40 If Contractor fails to provide acceptable Monthly Status Reports, he will be
41 deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated,
42 which will be reason for refusing to recommend progress payments.
43
44 B. The revised diagram shall show, for the currently accepted detailed diagram,
45 percentages of completion for all activities, actual start and finish dates, and
•46 remaining durations, as appropriate. Activities not previously included in the
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-5 09/28/23
1 currently accepted detailed schedule shall be added, except that contractual •
2 dates will not be changed except by Change Order. Review of a revised
3 diagram by the Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with
4 the time frames, duration, or sequencing for such added activities; instead,
5 the corresponding data as ultimately incorporated into an appropriate change
6 order shall govern.
7
8 C. The narrative shall include the information shown in the following outline in a
9 narrative form:
10
11 1. Construction progress (refer to activity number in the Detailed
12 Schedule) including:
13
14 a. Activities completed this reporting period;
15 b. Activities in progress this reporting period;
16 c. Activities scheduled to commence next reporting period.
17
18 2. Description of problem areas
19
20 3. Current and anticipated delays
21
22 a. Cause of the delay;
23 b. Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the
24 delay;
25 c. Impact of the delay on other activities, on milestones, and on
26 completion dates.
27
28 4. Changes in construction sequence
29
30 5. Pending items and status thereof
31
32 a. Permits
33 b. Change Orders
34 c. Time extensions
35 d. Other
36
37 6. Contract completion date status
38
39 a. Ahead of schedule and number of days
40 b. Behind schedule and number of days
41
42 3.03 REVISIONS
43
44 A. All revised Detailed Schedule submittals shall be in the same form and detail
45 as the initial submittal and shall be accompanied by an explanation of the
46 reasons for such revisions, all of which shall be subject to review by Engineer.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-6 09/28/23
•
•
1 The revision shall incorporate all previously made changes to reflect current
• 2 as -built conditions. Minor changes to the submittal may be reviewed at
3 monthly meetings. Changes to activities having adequate float shall be
4 considered a minor change.
5
6 B. A revised detailed work plan submittal shall be submitted for review, when
7 required by Engineer, for one of the following reasons:
8
9 1. Owner or Engineer directs a change that affects the date(s) specified
10 in the Agreement or alters the length of a critical path.
11
12 2. Contractor elects to change any sequence of activities so as to affect
13 a critical path of the currently accepted detailed schedule documents.
14
15 C. If, prior to agreement on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Time,
16 Engineer requires revisions to the Detailed Schedule in order to evaluate
17 planned progress, Contractor shall provide an interim revised submittal for
18 review with change effect(s) incorporated as directed. Interim revisions to the
19 documents will be incorporated during the first subsequent Monthly Status
20 Report.
21
22 3.04 START-UP SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
23
• 24 A. At least 90 calendar days prior to the date of Substantial Completion,
25 Contractor shall submit a time -scaled (days after notice to proceed) graphic
26 diagram detailing the work to take place in the period between 60 days prior
27 to Substantial Completion, together with a supporting narrative. Engineer
28 shall respond within 10 calendar days after receipt of the submittal. Upon
29 receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall make the necessary
30 revisions and submit the revised schedule within ten calendar days. If
31 Contractor fails to provide acceptable Start-up Schedule Submittals, he will be
32 deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated,
33 which will be reason for refusing to recommend payment.
34
35 B. The Start-up Schedule may not be combined with the Detailed Schedule. The
36 Start-up Schedule is intended to show much greater detail than the Detailed
37 Schedule for start-up activities. Typical information required includes, but is
38 not limited to, the timing of vendor representatives, pre-op testing, individual
39 equipment start-ups, Owner's training, and performance certification testing.
40
41 C. The graphic diagram shall use the currently accepted Detailed Schedule for
42 those activities completed ahead of the last 60 calendar days prior to
43 Substantial Completion, and detailed activities for the remaining 60 -day period
44 within the time frames outlined in the currently accepted Detailed Schedule.
45
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-7 09/28/23
1 D. Contractor will be required to continue the requirement for monthly reports, as 111)
2 outlined in Articles 3.03 and 3.04 above. In preparing these reports,
3 Contractor must assure that the Detailed Schedule is consistent with the
4 progress noted in the Start-up Schedule.
5
6 E. In addition, Contractor will be required to submit a revised copy of the start-up
7 graphic diagram on a monthly basis with a start-up narrative. This revised
8 diagram shall highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish
9 dates, and remaining durations as applicable. Activities not previously
10 included in the accepted detailed work plan shall be added in these submittals,
11 except that contractual dates shall not be changed except by Change Order.
12 Reviews of these submittals by Engineer will not be construed to constitute
13 concurrence with the time frames, durations or sequence of work for each
14 added activity.
15
16 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
17
18 A. The construction period for this project is four hundred fifty (450) consecutive
19 calendar days until Substantial Completion, followed by an additional thirty
20 (30) consecutive calendar days for Final Completion.
21
22 B. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly progress evaluation
23 and updated schedule data that any milestone and/or Contract completion
24 date will not be met, the Contractor shall take appropriate action to bring the
25 work back on schedule. Actions could include:
26
27 1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as to
28 substantially eliminate the backlog of work;
29
30 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per work day,
31 work days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any
32 combination of the foregoing sufficient to substantially eliminate the
33 backlog of work; and
34
35 3. Reschedule work items to achieve concurrency of accomplishment.
36
37 C. The addition of equipment or construction forces, increasing the working
38 hours or any other method, manner, or procedure to return to the current
39 Detailed Schedule shall be at the Contractor's own cost and shall not be
40 considered justification for a Change Order or treated as an acceleration
41 order.
42
43
44 END OF SECTION
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-8 09/28/23
•
•
•1 SECTION 01340
2
3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review such working
10 drawings, shop drawings, test reports and data on materials and equipment
11 (hereinafter in this Section called data), and material samples (hereinafter
12 in this Section called samples) as are required for the proper control of work,
13 including but not limited to those working drawings, shop drawings, data
14 and samples for materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the
15 Specifications and in the Contract Drawings.
16
17 B. The Contractor shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in
18 other sections of these Specifications, including the requirement to submit
19 and have reviewed a Schedule of Shop Drawing Submittals prior to the
20 submittal of any other shop drawing, as described in Section 01300.
21
22 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
23
.24 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "shop drawings" shall be
25 considered to mean Contractor's Drawings for material and equipment that
26 will become an integral part of the Project. These drawings shall be
27 complete and detailed. Shop drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection
28 and setting drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale
29 drawings, bills of material, wiring and control diagrams, and inspection and
30 test reports including performance curves and certifications as applicable to
31 the Work.
32
33 B. All details on shop drawings submitted for review shall show clearly the
34 elevations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the
35 structure and/or equipment, and where correct fabrication of the work
36 depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall be made and
37 noted on the shop drawings before being submitted for review.
38
39 1.03 PRODUCT DATA
40
41 A. Product data as specified in individual sections, include, but are not
42 necessarily limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products
43 (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturers product
44 specification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns,
45 manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability,
•46 roughing -in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs,
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-1 09/28/23
1 standard wiring diagrams, printed performance curves and operational- •
2 range diagrams, production or quality control inspection and test reports
3 and certifications, mill reports, product operating and maintenance
4 instructions and recommended spare -parts listing storage instructions, and
5 printed product warranties, as applicable to the work.
6
7 1.04 WORKING DRAWINGS
8
9 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "working drawings" shall
10 be considered to mean the Contractor's Drawings for temporary structures
11 such as temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of
12 utilities, ground water control systems, forming and falsework; for
13 underpinning; and for such other work as may be required for construction
14 but does not become an integral part of the Project.
15
16 B. Working drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional
17 Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State and shall convey, or be
18 accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely
19 explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended
20 manner of use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must
21 have been reviewed without specific exceptions by the Engineer. Such
22 review will be for general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in
23 any way from his responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of
24 the Contract. All risks of error are assumed by the Contractor. The Owner
25 and Engineer shall have no responsibility for errors on the working drawings
26 or the finished work.
27
28 1.05 SAMPLES
29
30 A. The Contractor shall furnish, for review of the Engineer, samples required
31 by the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall
32 be delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed and in quantities and
33 sizes as specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be
34 submitted unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall prepay all
35 shipping charges on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples
36 are required shall not be used in work until reviewed by the Engineer.
37
38 B. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily
39 limited to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured
40 or fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of
41 repetitively -used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets,
42 specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of
43 work to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and
44 testing, as applicable to the Work.
45
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-2 09/28/23
•
•
•1 C. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter for each shipment of
2 sample, shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment, and shall send
3 a copy of this letter to the Engineer. Review of a sample shall be only for
4 the characteristics or use named in such review and shall not be construed
5 to change or modify any Contract requirements.
6
7 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
8
9 A. The Contractor shall review, approve, and submit, with reasonable
10 promptness and in such sequence, so as to cause no delay in the Contract
11 Work or in the Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all shop
12 drawings, product data, working drawings and samples required by the
13 Contract Documents.
14
15 B. It is intended that all shop drawing be submitted electronically by email,
16 however, when electronic submittals cannot be made, the Contractor shall
17 submit to the Engineer five (5) copies of the shop drawing, plus the number
18 of copies he wants returned. The Engineer will review the submittal and
19 electronically return to the Contractor appropriate review comments and/or
20 marked -up copies of the shop drawings if applicable.
21
22 C. Shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples shall be
23 transmitted using a form provided by the Engineer and furnished with the
• 24 following information:
25
26 1. Number and title of the drawing.
27
28 2. Date of drawing or revision.
29
30 3. Name of project building, facility or system.
31
32 4. Name of contractor, subcontractor, and manufacturer submitting
33 drawing.
34
35 5. Clear identification of contents, location of the work, and the sheet
36 numbers where the product is found in the contract drawings.
37
38 6. Contractor Certification Statement.
39
40 7. Submittal Identification Number.
41
42 8. Contract Drawing Number Reference.
43
44 9. Statement indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents.
45
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-3 09/28/23
1 D. All items specified are not necessarily intended to be a manufacturer's 1111
2 standard product. Variations from specified items will be considered on an
3 "or equal" basis. If submittals show variations from Contract requirements
4 because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall
5 describe such variations in his letter of transmittal and on the shop drawings
6 along with notification of his intent to seek contract adjustment. If
7 acceptable, proper adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where
8 appropriate. If the Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not
9 be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with
10 the Contract, even though such drawings have been reviewed. Variations
11 submitted but not described may be cause for rejection. Any variations
12 initiated by the Contractor will not be considered as an addition to the scope
13 of work unless specifically noted and then accepted as such in writing by
14 the Engineer.
15
16 E. Data on materials and equipment shall include materials and equipment
17 lists giving, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or
18 manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, material, size, finish and all
19 other pertinent data.
20
21 F. For all mechanical and electrical equipment, the Contractor shall provide a
22 single list that includes the equipment name, and address and telephone
23 number of the manufacturer's representative and service company, so that
24 service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. In addition, a
25 maintenance and lubrication schedule for each piece of equipment shall be
26 submitted as specified in Section 01730.
27
28 G. The Contractor shall use the color "green" to make his remarks on the
29 Submittals. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "red" in marking
30 submittals.
31
32 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
33
34 A. It is the duty of the Contractor to check, and coordinate with the work of all
35 trades, all drawings, data, schedules and samples prepared by or for him
36 before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each copy of every
37 drawing or data sheet 11"x17" and larger shall bear Contractor's stamp
38 showing that they have been so checked and approved. Drawings or data
39 sheets 11"x17" and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion
40 and bear the Contractor's stamp on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall
41 fully describe the packaged data and include a list of all sheet numbers
42 within the package. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the
43 Contractor's stamp will be returned to the Contractor, without review at the
44 Engineer's option.
45
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-4 09/28/23
•
•
1 B. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior
•
2 to submission to determine and verify the following:
3
4 1. Field measurements.
5
6 2. Field construction criteria.
7
8 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and similar data.
9
10 4. Conformance with Specifications.
11
12 C. Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from the
13 requirements of the Contract Documents.
14
15 D. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure
16 to transmit complete and acceptable submittals sufficiently in advance of
17 the Work.
18
19 E. The Contractor shall not begin any work affected by a submittal returned,
20 "Confirm" or "Rejected- Resubmit". Before starting this work, all revisions
21 must be corrected by the Contractor. After resubmittal they will be reviewed
22 and returned by the Engineer. If returned marked, "No Exceptions Taken"
23 or "Make Corrections Noted", the Contractor may begin this work. Any
• 24 corrections made to these shop drawings shall be followed without
25 exception.
26
27 F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop drawings and data
28 sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide not Tess than
29 twenty-one (21) calendar days for Engineer's review from the time the
30 Engineer receives them.
31
32 G. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all cost that may result
33 from the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of work
34 prior to review by the Engineer of the necessary shop drawings.
35
36 H. All shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples submitted
37 by subcontractors for review shall be sent directly to the Contractor for
38 checking. The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission
39 according to the shop drawing schedule so as to prevent delays in delivery
40 of materials and project completion.
41
42 I. The Contractor shall check all subcontractor's shop drawings, product data,
43 working drawings and samples regarding measurements, size of members,
44 materials, and details to satisfy him that they are in conformance to the
45 Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise
•46 in error shall be returned to the subcontractors for correction before
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-5 09/28/23
1 submission to the Engineer.
2
3 1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING
4 DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
5
6 A. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept
7 and contract drawings. Markings or comments shall not be construed as
8 relieving the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Drawings and
9 Specifications or departures thereof. The Contractor remains responsible
10 for details and accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated
11 work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of
12 assembly, and for performing work in a safe manner.
13
14 B. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be general. The review
15 shall not be construed as:
16
17 1. Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements;
18
19 2. Relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including
20 details, dimensions, and materials;
21
22 3. Approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except
23 as otherwise provided herein.
24
25 C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and
26 show a departure from the Contract Documents, which Engineer finds to be
27 in the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change
28 in Contract Price or Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings
29 without noting an exception.
30
31 D. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following:
32
33 "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or
34 comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor
35 may release the equipment and/or material for manufacture.
36
37 "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" is assigned when notations or comments
38 have been made on the submittal pointing out minor discrepancies as
39 compared with the Contract Documents. Resubmittal or confirmation is not
40 necessary prior to release for manufacturing.
41
42 "EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED" or "CONFIRM" is assigned when a
43 confirmation of the notations and comments is required from the Contractor.
44 The Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture;
45 however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 product addressing the omissions and/or nonconforming items that were
• 2 noted. Only the items to be "confirmed" need to be resubmitted.
3
4 "REJECTED - RESUBMIT" is assigned when the submittal is in
5 noncompliance with the Contract Documents and must be corrected and
6 the entire package resubmitted. This code generally means that the equip -
7 ment or material cannot be released for manufacture unless the Contractor
8 takes full responsibility for providing the submitted items in accordance with
9 Contract Documents.
10
11 "FOR YOUR INFORMATION" is assigned when the package provides
12 information of a general nature that may or may not require a response.
13
14 E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On
15 resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on the
16 transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision triangles
17 or other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections requested
18 by the Engineer on previous submissions. Any such revisions that are not
19 clearly identified shall be made at the risk of the Contractor. The Contractor
20 shall make corrections to any work done because of this type revision that
21 is not in accordance to the Contract Documents as may be required by the
22 Engineer.
23
•24 F. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings
25 to constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give
26 written notice thereof to the Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior
27 to release for manufacture.
28
29 G. The number of shop drawings the Engineer will review is limited as
30 described in the General Condition or Supplemental General Conditions,
31 and the Contractor will be back charged for costs incurred by the Engineer
32 due to excessive shop drawing submittals or resubmittals as described
33 therein. This limitations is intended to reduce the number of submittals to
34 be reviewed, but shall not be construed to limit the number of shop drawings
35 required and the Contractor shall submit all shop drawings required as
36 directed by the Engineer.
37
38 H. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the
39 Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance
40 therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written
41 instruction from the Engineer.
42
43 I. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge
44 as to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be
45 returned to the Contractor. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or
46 mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete.
•47
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-7 09/28/23
1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2
3 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS
4
5 Final shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format, organized by submittal
6 number, on CD.
7
8 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-8 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 01385
•
2
3 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. Scope
10
11 The Contractor shall prepare color audio/video DVDs of all work areas
12 within 20 days of the Notice to Proceed. These specifications shall
13 supplement the Owner's color audio -video construction records
14 requirements, if any, and the more stringent shall apply.
15
16 B. Requirements Included
17
18 Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color
19 audio/video DVD recording taken of the entire Project, including access to
20 the site of the work. Streets, easements, rights -of way, lots, or construction
21 sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre -
22 construction conditions. One copy of the DVD recordings and video log
23 shall be submitted to the Owner. The Engineer will designate those areas,
•24 if any, to be omitted from or added to the audio-visual coverage. All DVDs
25 and written records shall become the property of the Owner.
26
27 C. Scheduling
28
29 No construction shall begin prior to review of the DVDs covering the Project
30 construction area(s) by the Owner. The Owner will have the authority to
31 reject all or any portion of video DVD not conforming to specifications and
32 order that it be redone at no additional charge. The Contractor shall
33 reschedule unacceptable coverage within seven days after being notified.
34
35 D. Videographer Qualifications
36
37 The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer
38 known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of
39 preconstruction color audio -video DVD documentation. The videographer,
40 through the Contractor, shall furnish to the Engineer a list of all equipment
41 to be used for the audio -video recording, i.e., manufacturer's name, model
42 number, specifications, and other pertinent information.
43
44 Additional information to be furnished by the videographer is the names and
45 addresses of two references that the videographer has performed color
•46 audio -video recording on projects of a similar nature within the last 12
COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-1 09/26/23
1 months. Engineer's review of the selected videographer is required prior to
2 taking first audio -video DVD.
3
4 E. Equipment
5
6 The Contractor shall finish all equipment, accessories, materials and labor
7 to perform this service. The total audio -video system shall reproduce bright,
8 sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion,
9 tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the
10 recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with
11 proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some
12 instances, audio -video coverage may be required in areas not accessible
13 by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by
14 walking. The color video camera used in the recording shall be of Industrial
15 Grade and shall have EIA Standard NTSC type color - 1.0V 75 OHMS.
16 Video output from camera shall be capable of horizontal resolution of 350
17 lines at center and utilize a minimum of 8:1 zoom with a 2/3 Newvicon tube
18 or CCD pick-up element for optimum color imagery plus minimum lag
19 through of one foot candle. The recording shall be made with Industrial
20 Grade recorder. The recordings shall be high resolution, extended still
21 frame capable, in color. The recorded video DVDs shall be compatible for
22 playback with any American TV Standard DVD player.
23
24 F. Recorded Information, Audio
25
26 Each DVD shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed
27 by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress.
28 Accompanying the video recording of each video DVD shall be a
29 corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio
30 recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or
31 aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification,
32 differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being
33 shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also
34 be free from any conversations.
35
36 G. Recorded Information, Video
37
38 All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital
39 information to include the date and time of recording. The date information
40 shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain
41 the actual hour, minutes and seconds of the day. Additional information
42 shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be
43 limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing
44 side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left
45 hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom -out rates shall
46 be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects are clearly viewed
COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-2 09/26/23
•
•
•
1 during video DVD playback. In addition, all other camera and recording
• 2 system controls, such as Tens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal,
3 chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or
4 adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall
5 be recorded in SP mode.
6
7 H. Viewer Orientation
8
9 The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer
10 orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and
11 business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed
12 construction location will not be readily apparent to the video DVD viewer,
13 highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a
14 fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When
15 conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording
16 system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall
17 not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport
18 of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady
19 picture.
20
21 I. Lighting
22
23 AH recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No recording shall
•24 be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done
25 when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of
26 recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects.
27
28 J. Speed of Travel
29
30 The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be
31 directly proportional to the number, size, and value of the surface features
32 within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the
33 general direction of travel of any vehicle used during recording of a linear
34 project site shall not exceed 44 feet per minute.
35
36 K. Video Log/Index
37
38 All video DVDs shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified
39 by video DVD number and project title. Each video DVD shall have a log of
40 that video DVD's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of
41 coverage contained on the video DVD in terms of the names of the streets
42 or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of
43 coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate
44 values (if reasonably available) and the date.
45
•46 L. Area of Coverage
COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-3 09/26/23
1 III2 DVD coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of
3 influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such
4 coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks,
5 curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping,
6 culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.,
7 within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the
8 existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. DVD coverage shall be limited
9 to one side of the site, street, easement, or right-of-way at any one time.
10
11 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
12 (NOT USED)
13
14 PART 3 — EXECUTION
15
16 3.01 GENERAL
17
18 A. Prior to requesting Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall review the
19 pre -construction video with the Owner/Engineer and identify any work
20 needed to restore the site to pre -construction conditions.
21
22
23 END OF SECTION
COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385-4 09/26/23
•
•
1 SECTION 01410
•2
3 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing
10 Laboratory to perform that geotechnical testing (concrete, compaction)
11 specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the
12 Specifications or at any other time Contractor elects to have materials and
13 equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents.
14
15 1. Contractor shall coordinate with the laboratory to facilitate the
16 execution of its required services.
17
18 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's
19 obligations to perform the Work of the Contract.
20
21 B. Contractor shall perform and pay for all other testing (pressure, torque, etc.)
22 required in the specifications.
23
•24 1.02 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
25
26 A. Laboratory is not authorized to:
27
28 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract
29 Documents.
30 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
31
32 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.
33
34 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
35
36 A. Coordinate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to
37 Manufacturer's operations.
38
39 B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational
40 samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.
41
42 C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used
43 for concrete, and other materials mixes, which require control by the testing
44 laboratory.
45
TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-1 09/28/23
1 D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this
III
2 Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or
3 fabrication. Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are
4 indicated in the Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the
5 Contractor to provide statements or certificates from the manufacturers and
6 fabricators that the materials and equipment provided by them are
7 manufactured or fabricated in full accordance with the standard
8 specifications for quality and workmanship indicated in the Contract
9 Documents. All costs of this testing and providing statements and
10 certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, and no extra
11 charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing and
12 certification.
13
14 E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
15
16 1. To provide access to work to be tested.
17
18 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of
19 the product to be tested.
20
21 3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
22
23 4. For storage and curing of test samples.
24
25 F. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the laboratory sufficiently
26 in advance (minimum 48 hours) of operations to allow for laboratory
27 assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
28
29 G. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified
30 independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling
31 and testing required for the Contractor's convenience and as reviewed by
32 the Engineer.
33
34 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
35
36 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
37
38
39 END OF SECTION
40
TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-2 09/28/23
1 SECTION 01500
•
2
3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SANITARY FACILITIES
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the site, as
10 provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and others
11 performing work or furnishing services on the Project.
12
13 B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained
14 throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the
15 greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used,
16 at least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 persons. The Contractor
17 shall enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site.
18
19 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
20
21 A. Contractor shall conduct his work to interfere as little as possible with public
22 travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross,
23 obstruct, or close roads, driveways, and walks, whether public or private,
• 24 Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or
25 other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private
26 travel, and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before
27 interfering with them. Driveway access to commercial properties shall be
28 maintained at all times. Such maintenance of traffic shall not be required
29 when Contractor has obtained permission from the owner and tenant of
30 private property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public
31 property involved, to obstruct traffic at the designated point. At all times,
32 the Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the permits and
33 easement agreements.
34
35 B. Traffic control shall be in accordance with DOT Roadway and Traffic Design
36 Standards for Traffic Control Through Work Zones. All local Traffic
37 Regulations shall be followed.
38
39 C. In making open -cut street crossings, the Contractor shall not block more
40 than one-half of the street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall
41 widen the shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary
42 surfacing shall be provided as necessary on shoulders.
43
44 1.03 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS
45
•46 A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-1 09/28/23
1 to traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed •
2 acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest
3 intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section.
4
5 B. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades,
6 signs, and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions
7 such as material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning
8 signs and lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the
9 construction area.
10
11 C. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from
12 sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside
13 public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and
14 inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other
15 protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with
16 applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway
17 rights-of-way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereof.
18
19 D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open over weekends
20 and holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during extreme
21 weather conditions.
22
23 1.04 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY
24
25 A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all
26 underground pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction
27 uncovered or otherwise affected by his construction operations. All
28 pavement, surfacing, driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy
29 wires, fences, and other surface structures affected by construction
30 operations, together with all sod and shrubs in yards and parking areas,
31 shall be restored to their original condition, whether within or outside the
32 easement. All replacements shall be made with new materials.
33
34 1.05 PARKING
35
36 A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of
37 all construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services
38 in connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking
39 personal vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's
40 operations, or construction activities, where indicated on the drawings or
41 directed by the Engineer.
42
43 1.06 DUST CONTROL
44
45 A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust.
46 Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-2 09/28/23
•
•
1 application of a chemical dust suppressant. Dusty materials in piles or in
•
2 transit shall be covered when practicable to prevent blowing.
3
4 B. Buildings or operating facilities that may be adversely affected by dust shall
5 be adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors,
6 instrument panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust
7 screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens.
8
9 1.07 SWEEPING
10
11 A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from all pavement at the end of
12 each workday.
13
14 1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL
15
16 A. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary
17 wastes, sediment, debris, and other substances resulting from construction
18 activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or
19 watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or other
20 substance will be permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable
21 measures will be taken to prevent such materials from entering any drain or
22 watercourse.
23
•24 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
25
26 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
27
28
29 END OF SECTION
•
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-3 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-4 09/28/23
•
•
1 SECTION 01505
•
2
3 MOBILIZATION
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DEFINITION AND SCOPE
8
9 A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits, insurance, and bonds;
10 moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting
11 plants, temporary facilities, and other construction facilities; all as required
12 for the proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall
13 include, but not be limited to, the following principal items:
14
15 1. Move onto the site all plant and equipment required for first month's
16 operations.
17
18 2. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
19
20 3. Establish fire protection plan and safety program.
21
22 4. Secure construction water supply.
23
•24 5. Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities.
25
26 6. Arrange for and erect Contractor's work and storage yard and
27 employees' parking facilities.
28
29 7. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds.
30
31 8. Obtain all required permits.
32
33 9. Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, Department of
34 Labor, and all other required notices.
35
36 10. Have superintendent at the job site full time.
37
38 11. Submit a detailed construction schedule acceptable to the Engineer.
39
40 12. If required, erect project construction sign(s).
41
42 13. Submit a finalized schedule of values and schedule of payments
43 acceptable to the Owner.
44
45 14. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals.
•46
MOBILIZATION
01505-1
09/26/23
1 15. Construct, maintain, and restore temporary access and haul roads.
2
3 16. Provide a continuous color audio -videotape recording of existing
4 conditions.
5
6 PART 2 — PRODUCT (NOT USED)
7
8 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
MOBILIZATION
01505-2
09/26/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 01510
•
2
3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary utilities required for construction,
10 remove on completion of Work.
11
12 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
13
14 A. Comply with National Electric Code.
15
16 B. Comply with Federal, State, and local codes and regulations and with utility
17 company requirements.
18
19 C. Comply with Local City and County Health Department Regulations.
20
21 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
22
23 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
•24
25 A. Materials may be new or used but must be adequate in capacity for the
26 required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate
27 requirements of applicable codes and standards.
28
29 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
30
31 A. Arrange with utility company and Owner to provide service required for
32 power and lighting, and pay all costs for service and for power used in the
33 construction, testing and trial operation prior to final acceptance of the work
34 by the Owner. All cost associated with obtaining temporary and permanent
35 power shall be at Contractor expense.
36
37 B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is
38 not adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public.
39
40 2.03 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
41
42 A. Arrange with local telephone service -company to provide direct line
43 telephone service or mobile phone service at the construction site for the
44 use by personnel and employees.
45
•46 B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-1 09/26/23
1 charges.
2
3 C. In lieu of direct telephone service, provide cellular phone service for site
4 superintendent(s).
5
6 2.04 TEMPORARY WATER
7
8 A. The Contractor shall install at each connection to the local water supply
9 system a backflow preventer and meter meeting local utility requirements.
10
11 B. The Contractor shall pay for all temporary water facilities, including the
12 backflow preventers and meters, and the actual amount of water used
13 during construction.
14
15 2.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
16
17 A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations.
18
19 B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures.
20
21 PART 3 — EXECUTION
22
23 3.01 GENERAL
24
25 A. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service.
26
27 B. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires.
28
29 C. Allow the Owner and Engineer reasonable use of all temporary utilities.
30
31 3.02 REMOVAL
32
33 A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is
34 no longer required as determined by the Engineer.
35
36 B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of
37 temporary facilities.
38
39
40 END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-2 09/26/23
•
•
•
•1 SECTION 01600
2
3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work shall:
10
11 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
12
13 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically
14 identified in writing by the Engineer.
15
16 B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
17
18 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering
19 and shop practices.
20
21 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and
22 gauges, to be interchangeable.
23
•24 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same
25 manufacturer.
26
27 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
28
29 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall
30 be adhered to unless variations are specifically identified in writing.
31
32 C. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which
33 it is designed or is specified.
34
35 1.02 REVIEW OF MATERIALS
36
37 A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to
38 the inspection and review of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered
39 to the work without prior review of the Engineer.
40
41 B. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and
42 equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires,
43 either prior to beginning or during the progress of the work, the Contractor
44 shall submit samples of materials for such special tests as may be
45 necessary to demonstrate that they conform to the specifications. Such
•46 samples shall be furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-1 09/28/23
1 Contractor's expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make
2 arrangements for and pay for the tests.
3
4 C. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit
5 consideration and review before materials are necessary for incorporation
6 in the work. Any delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit
7 samples or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claims against the
8 Owner or the Engineer.
9
10 D. The materials and equipment used on the work shall correspond to the
11 accepted samples or other data previously submitted to the Engineer for
12 review.
13
14 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION
15
16 A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with
17 manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain, and distribute copies of such
18 instructions to parties involved in the installation, including four copies to the
19 Engineer.
20
21 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during
22 installation and until completion.
23
24 B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord
25 with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
26
27 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with
28 manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further
29 instructions.
30
31 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
32
33 C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any
34 preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or
35 exempted by Contract Documents.
36
37 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
38
39 A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedules,
40 coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site.
41
42 1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original
43 containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
44
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance
• 2 with requirements of Contract Documents and submittals, and that
3 Products are properly protected and undamaged.
4
5 B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to
6 prevent soiling or damage to Products or packaging.
7
8 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
9
10 A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather -protected storage structure
11 providing a clean, dry, non -corrosive environment for all mechanical
12 equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation
13 equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project.
14 Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for
15 storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection
16 of heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. The Contractor
17 shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer's instructions for storage to the
18 Engineer prior to storage of all equipment and materials. Corroded,
19 damaged or deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before
20 acceptance of the project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will
21 not be included in a payment estimate.
22
23 B. Store Products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
•24 labels intact and legible.
25
26 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight
27 enclosures.
28
29 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by
30 manufacturer's instructions.
31
32 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids,
33 prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to
34 deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate
35 ventilation to avoid condensation.
36
37 4. Store loose granular materials in a well -drained area on solid
38 surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
39
40 C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled
41 and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner
42 to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any
43 injury, theft, or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment.
44
45 D. Cement, sand, and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and
•46 shall be kept completely dry at all times. All miscellaneous steel and
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-3 09/28/23
1 reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent •
2 accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations
3 of standing water and to minimize rusting. Precast concrete sections shall
4 be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt,
5 standing water, staining, chipping, or cracking. Brick, block, and similar
6 masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce
7 breakage, chipping, cracking, and spilling to a minimum.
8
9 E. All materials that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged
10 as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed
11 from the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation
12 for the damaged material or its removal.
13
14 F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make
15 periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are
16 maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or
17 deterioration.
18
19 G. Protection After Installation:
20
21 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed
22 products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction
23 operations. Remove covering when no longer needed.
24
25 H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and
26 supplies sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final
27 inspection of the work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event
28 any such material, equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or
29 destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall
30 replace same without additional cost to the Owner.
31
32 I. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of
33 equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written
34 notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all
35 deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the
36 cosi associated with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract.
37 These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage,
38 administrative, clerical, engineering and any other costs associated with
39 making the necessary corrections.
40
41 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
42
43 A. Contractor's Options:
44
45 1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any
46 product meeting that standard.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-4 09/28/23
•
•
•1
2 2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers,
3 submit the products or manufacturers named in the Proposal, which
4 complies with the specifications.
5
6 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or
7 manufacturers and "or equal", Contractor shall submit a request as
8 for substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically
9 named.
10
11 B. Substitutions:
12
13 1. After the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Engineer will consider
14 written requests from Contractor for substitution of products.
15
16 2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with
17 complete data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including:
18
19 a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with
20 that specified.
21
22 b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of
23 the substitution.
•24
25 c. Effect on the construction schedule.
26
27 d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the
28 product specified.
29
30 e. Any required license fees or royalties.
31
32 f. Availability of maintenance service, and source of
33 replacement materials.
34
35 3. The Engineer will be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed
36 substitution.
37
38 C. Contractor's Representation:
39
40 1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that
41 Contractor:
42
43 a. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it
44 is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
45
II)
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-5 09/28/23
1 b. Shall provide the same warranties or bonds for the
2 substitution as for the product specified.
3
4 c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into
5 the Work and make such other changes as may be required
6 to make the Work complete in all respects.
7
8 d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility,
9 which may subsequently become apparent.
10
11 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
12
13 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
14
15
16 END OF SECTION
17
18
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 01625
•
2
3 START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Prior to requesting issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the
10 Contractor shall perform start-up testing services as specified herein.
11
12 B. Start-up of the facilities and appurtenances will require completion of all
13 structures, installation of all equipment, and all connections to existing
14 systems. All components of the new system shall be installed as if each
15 were ready for use by the Owner for their intended purposes. The
16 Contractor shall provide a written startup plan, for review by the Engineer,
17 for individual facilities and systems. As applicable, the startup plan shall be
18 in accordance with the construction phasing plan described in the
19 Contractor's Schedule described in Section 01310.
20
21 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
22
23 PART 3 — EXECUTION
24
•25 3.01 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
26
27 A. General Requirements:
28
29 1. Successfully execute the start-up of the system and demonstrate
30 satisfactory performance of the intended use thereof. The start-up
31 and performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior
32 to the Engineer's issuance of Substantial Completion.
33
34 2. Field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. At least thirty
35 (30) calendar days prior to testing, Contractor shall submit details of
36 all test procedures to the Engineer for review and comment. Test
37 procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with
38 Specification Section 01340. This notification shall be shown on the
39 Progress Schedule.
40
41 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all
42 necessary valves, whether shown on the Drawings or not, in order to
43 facilitate testing of pumping systems, tanks, and all other system
44 start-up testing, at no additional cost to the Owner.
45
46 B. Preparation for Systems Start -Up:
• 47
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-1 09/28/23
1 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure .
2 that each component is in good working order and properly installed
3 and connected. All systems shall be purged as required. All sumps,
4 tanks, basins, chambers, wet wells, and pipelines that are
5 hydraulically checked shall be drained and returned to their original
6 condition once the water testing is complete. All pipelines that have
7 been filled and flushed shall be drained clean.
8
9 2. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has
10 confirmed that all specified safety equipment has been installed and
11 is in good working order.
12
13 3. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Contractor
14 has submitted and the Engineer has reviewed the Certificate of
15 Proper Installation.
16
17 3.02 PRESSURE TESTS
18
19 A. Field pressure tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the Contract
20 Documents. The Contractor shall perform field tests as herein specified.
21 All tanks, water mains, piping and equipment shall be tested in the field in
22 the presence of the Engineer or his authorized agent.
23
24 B. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be performed in accordance with the
25 applicable sections of the American Water Works Association Standard for
26 Installation of Cast Iron/Ductile Iron Water Mains, AWWA C-600, Concrete
27 Pressure Pipe, AWWA M9, and Underground Installation of Polyvinyl
28 Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water Mains, AWWA C-605,
29 except as herein modified.
30
31 C. The Contractor shall submit his plan for pressure testing to the Engineer for
32 review at least ten (10) days before starting the work. The Contractor shall
33 remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after
34 completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise
35 directed by the Engineer. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired by the
36 Contractor.
37
38 D. After completion of all work and before final acceptance, a hydrostatic and
39 leakage test shall be conducted. Water required for testing new pipelines
40 will be provided by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Water mains
41 shall be tested with potable water and force mains and storm water lines
42 shall be tested with reclaimed water, if available. Where applicable, the
43 Contractor shall coordinate the development of the water supply with the
44 pipeline work in order that water will be available to meet these
45 requirements. At no time are valves on the water supply system to be
46 operated without the prior authorization of the Engineer.
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-2 09/28/23
•
•
1
• 21 E. Each newly installed pressure main shall be tested at a pressure equal 1.5
3 times the pipeline design pressure or 150 psi; whichever is greater. The
4 duration of each test shall be a minimum of two (2) hours.
5
6 F. Any test pump(s), piping connections, taps, fittings, pressure gauges,
7 compressors, and all necessary components thereof which might be
8 required for the hydrostatic tests, shall be furnished by the Contractor at no
9 additional cost to the Owner.
10
11 G. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, air valves, blow-offs and joints shall be
12 carefully examined during the test, and all joints showing a visible leakage
13 shall be made tight. All defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and
14 accessories shall be removed from the line and replaced by the Contractor
15 with new components at no additional cost to the Owner.
16
17 H. The Contractor may backfill the trench before testing the line, but he shall
18 open up the trench at his own expense to repair any Teaks.
19
20 I. All visible leaks shall be corrected regardless of the total leakage revealed
21 by the test as compared to the allowable calculated losses. All lines that
22 fail to meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until test
23 requirements are complied with. All repairs and retests shall be performed
•24 at the Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner.
25
26 J. The installation will not be accepted until the leakage is equal to or Tess than
27 the allowable leakage as determined by the formula below:
28
29 L = SD(P)o-
30 133,200
31
32 in which "L" equals the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; "S" is the
33 length of the pipe tested, in feet; "D" is the nominal pipe diameter, in inches;
34 and "P" is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per
35 square inch, gauge.
36 K. All tests shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer or authorized
37 agents thereof. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor
38 for performing the above required tests; the cost of all labor, materials,
39 lubricants, fuels, power, necessary appliances, and the coordination for
40 testing purposes shall be included in the unit price or prices bid for the
41 various items of work.
42
43 L. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of 72 hours advance
44 notice for scheduling hydrostatic and leakage tests.
45
•46 3.03 LEAKAGE TEST — GRAVITY SEWERS AND OTHER PIPELINES
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-3 09/28/23
1 •2 A. All •gravity sewer will be tested by the Contractor prior to final acceptance of
3 the work. All tests will be conducted in a manner to minimize any
4 interference with the Contractor's work or progress. The Contractor shall
5 notify the Engineer 72 hours in advance of such tests and, at his option, the
6 Engineer shall witness such tests.
7
8 B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing,
9 and tests shall be made as soon thereafter as practicable, under the
10 observation of the Engineer. Reading meters, gauges or other measuring
11 devices shall be new and furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
12 furnish all other labor, materials, services, and equipment including power,
13 fuel, meters and gauges; water and other items and apparatus necessary
14 for making leakage tests, preparing guidelines for testing, assembling,
15 placing, and removing testing equipment and placing in service.
16
17 C. Air Leakage Test
18
19 1. Tests by this method shall be limited to sewers 36 inches in diameter
20 and smaller. The maximum allowable air leakage is based on
21 pre -wetted pipe walls. The Contractor may therefore fill the pipe with
22 clear water and then empty the pipe prior to air testing. When pipe
23 walls are pre -wetted, air leakage tests shall be completed within 24
24 hours after filling the sewer section to be tested.
25
26 2. Air pressure tests shall be made by placing the sewer under 3.0 psig
27 air pressure and measuring the volume of air required to maintain
28 this pressure. The rate of air leakage shall be determined when the
29 system reaches an equilibrium state and air flow shall be read by
30 means of an approved rotometer.
31
32 3. The maximum rate of air loss shall be 0.003 cfm per square foot of
33 interior pipe surface and the maximum air flow shall not exceed 2.0
34 cfm when the total pressure on the sewer is maintained at 3.0 psig.
35 When the groundwater level is above the invert of the sewer, but
36 below a level adequate for infiltration testing, the maximum air loss
37 shall be reduced 6 percent for each foot of groundwater above the
38 sewer invert.
39
40 4. Air testing equipment shall be arranged so that compressors,
41 valving, gauges, and other test devices are located at the ground
42 surface. Air testing equipment shall have an approved air relief
43 arrangement to prevent the sewer from being pressurized to greater
44 than 10.0 psig.
45
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-4 09/28/23
•
•
•1 D. Manhole Vacuum Tests: Each manhole shall be visually inspected for
2 leakage or evidence thereof after assembly, installation, and backfilling
3 activities have been completed. This inspection shall occur by the Engineer
4 or the Engineer's authorized agent. The Contractor shall demonstrate the
5 integrity of the installed materials and construction procedures by
6 conducting a vacuum test in accordance with ASTM C1244-93. If the
7 manhole shows signs of leakage, it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of
8 the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
9
10 E. Repairing Leaks: When leakage occurs in excess of the specified amount,
11 defective manholes, pipe, pipe joints, or other appurtenances shall be
12 located and repaired at the expense of the Contractor. If the defective
13 portions cannot be located, the Contractor shall remove, reconstruct, and
14 retest as much of the original work as necessary to obtain satisfactory test
15 results.
16
17 3.05 SYSTEM START-UP
18
19 A. Contractor Responsibilities
20
21 1. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer ten (10) days' notice in writing
22 of his intent to perform systems start-up.
23
•24 2. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel to test equipment,
25 monitor and record data, as directed by the Engineer.
26
27 3. The Contractor shall obtain, install, calibrate and operate all test
28 equipment, gauges, pressure recorders, communications systems, etc.,
29 as directed by the Engineer.
30
31 4. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer, provide access to the
32 work, provide all incidental labor and facilities, and provide any
33 temporary utilities or construction aids required.
34
35 5. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, subsystems, and other
36 separable parts of the Work have been adjusted and balanced and that
37 any and all field tests have been conducted and demonstrated to be in
38 proper operating condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
39
40 B. Start -Up Tests
41
42 1. Start -Up Systems Testing shall include, but not be limited to the
43 following:
44
45 a. The Contractor shall verify that all valves (new and existing,
•46 manual and automatic) are in their proper operating position in
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-5 09/28/23
1 accordance with the specific operating scenario being tested.
2
3 b. The Contractor shall fill the pipes with water, in an approved
4 manner, taking care to allow the gradual release of air from all
5 high points.
6
7 c. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate
8 the operation of all equipment and facilities including all
9 instrumentation and controls and all manual and automatic
10 control systems. The Contractor shall be responsible for
11 calibrating and verifying the accuracy of all new instruments. The
12 Contractor shall demonstrate the proper operation of all auto -
13 shutdown features and standby power systems or devices.
14
15 d. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all aspects
16 of the Control System, PLC's, Operator Interface Terminals, and
17 all hardware and software furnished. If applicable, the Contractor
18 shall also demonstrate the full integration of the SCADA System
19 with the Owner's existing network. The Contractor shall make
20 modifications to the existing HMI screens as required or as
21 directed by the Engineer for a fully functional system.
22
23 e. Following the successful completion of these tests, the
24 Contractor shall demonstrate automatic controlled operation of
25 the equipment and facilities over a period of not less than 72
26 hours of continuous successful operation.
27
28 f. The Contractor shall also be responsible for performing all tests
29 outside of those previously described as may be required by the
30 manufacturers for all equipment, pumps and control valves.
31
32 g. Data records shall be kept by the Contractor. This information
33 shall be submitted to the Engineer for review at the end of the test
34 period.
35
36 2. Should the Contractor fail to demonstrate satisfactory performance on
37 the first and any subsequent attempt, he shall make all necessary altera-
38 tions, adjustments, repairs, and replacements. When the facility is again
39 ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and new tests shall be
40 started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until
41 the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
42 for the specified test duration.
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 01640
• 2
3 QUALITY CONTROL
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
8
9 A. Quality assurance and control of installation
10
11 B. References
12
13 C. Field samples
14
15 D. Mock-up
16
17 E. Inspection and testing laboratory services
18
19 F. Manufacturers' field services and reports
20
21 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
22
23 A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards
•24
25 B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' instructions and
26 Certificates
27
28 C. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services
29
30 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
31
32 A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services,
33 site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
34
35 B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in
36 sequence.
37
38 C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents,
39 request clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
40
41 D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except
42 when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate
43 higher standards or more precise workmanship.
44
45 E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified
•46 quality.
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-1 09/28/23
1 •2 F. •Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and
3 sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.
4
5 1.04 REFERENCES
6
7 A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner
8 Bids.
9
10 B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents,
11 request clarification for Engineer before proceeding.
12
13 C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be
14 altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in
15 any reference document.
16
17 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
18
19 A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications
20 Sections for review.
21
22 B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
23
24 C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear
25 area after field sample has been accepted by Engineer.
26
27 1.06 MOCK-UP
28
29 A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section.
30
31 B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and
32 anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.
33
34 C. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area
35 after mock-up has been accepted by Engineer.
36
37 1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
38
39 A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to
40 perform inspection and testing.
41
42 B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services
43 specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the
44 Engineer.
45
46 C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer, in
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-2 09/28/23
•
•
1 duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating
• 2 compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.
3
4 D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix,
5 equipment, tools, storage, and assistance as requested.
6
7 1. Notify Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time
8 for operations requiring services.
9
10 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional
11 samples and tests required for Contractor's use.
12
13 E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements
14 shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the
15 Engineer. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by
16 deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Price.
17
18 1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
19
20 A. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of
21 required observations. Observer shall be subject to review of Engineer and
22 Owner.
23
• 24 B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or
25 Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to
26 observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of
27 workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment
28 as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
29
30 C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
31 applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'
32 written instructions.
33
34 D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Engineer for
35 review.
36
37 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
38
39 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
40
41
42 END OF SECTION
43
•
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-3 09/28/23
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-4 09/28/23
•
•
1 SECTION 01670
•
2
3 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. General:
10
11 1. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials, tools,
12 equipment, and performing all work and services for furnishing,
13 submission, processing, and handling of requests for substitution
14 and product options. See items as indicated on drawings and as
15 specified. Any substitution or option shall be in accord with
16 provisions of Contract Documents, and completely coordinated with
17 work of other trades.
18
19 2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all
20 supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices
21 incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete
22 installation.
23
•24 3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General
25 Conditions for additional information.
26
27 B. Procedure:
28
29 1. For products, equipment, and materials that are named on drawings
30 or in specifications for which a request for substitution is made,
31 observe procedures outlined in these specifications.
32
33 C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and
34 samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and
35 transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner
36 or Engineer.
37
38 1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL:
39
40 A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified.
41
42 B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in
43 specifications by means of trade names and catalog numbers and/or
44 manufacturer's names. Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude
45 from consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing
•46 other trade names, catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names, capable
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-1 09/28/23
1 of accomplishing purpose of types of equipment or kinds of material
2 specifically indicated.
3
4 C. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner
5 and Engineer.
6
7 D. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not
8 specifically indicated must be accepted in writing by Engineer and be
9 agreed upon by Owner.
10
11 E. Conditional bids will not be accepted.
12
13 1.03 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION:
14
15 A. Within no more than 30 days after award of the Contract, the Engineer will
16 consider requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems, or other
17 items. Requests must be received by Engineer within 30 calendar days
18 after the date of Contract award. All requests for substitution shall be
19 completed as specified below.
20
21 B. Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items
22 unless specifically approved otherwise.
23
24 C. Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request:
25
26 1. Name of product located by Drawing No. or Specification No.,
27 followed by a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which
28 request for substitution is initiated.
29
30 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution
31 with Contract Documents.
32
33 3. For Products:
34
35 a. Product identification by schedule or tag no., including
36 manufacturer's name.
37
38 b. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model,
39 type, size, and options to be considered:
40
41 1) Product Description
42 2) Performance and test data
43 3) Reference standards
44 4) Difference in power demand
45 5) Dimensional differences for specified unit
46
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 c. Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves
2 right to impound sample until physical units are installed on
3 project for comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and
4 return of samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not
5 responsible for loss of or damage to samples.
6
7 d. Name and address of similar projects where product was
8 used, date of installation, and field performance data on
9 installation.
10
11 4. For construction methods:
12
13 a. Detailed description of proposed method
14
15 b. Drawings illustrating methods
16
17 5. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or
18 method specified.
19
20 6. Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
21
22 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with
23 product or method specified.
• 24
25 8. Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in
26 contract time or amount.
27
28 D. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item,
29 Supplier/Manufacturer represents:
30
31 1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method and has
32 determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified,
33 and that it will perform function for which it is intended.
34
35 2. Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product
36 or method specified.
37
38 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to
39 include but not be limited to the following:
40
41 a. Building and structure modifications as necessary;
42
43 b. Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change;
44
45 c. Piping, valving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation
•46 changes, and
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-3 09/28/23
1
2 d. All other changes required for work to be complete in all
3 respects to permit incorporation of substitution into project.
4
5 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which
6 subsequently become apparent.
7
8 E. Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative
9 consideration will be given within two weeks after request is received.
10
11 F. In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract
12 price or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a change order
13 will be issued to reflect such change. In the event the acceptance of an
14 alternate does not result in a change in Contract price or time, a field order
15 shall be issued.
16
17 G. Alternates may be rejected for the following reasons:
18
19 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents
20 or building spaces.
21
22 2. If they are, in Engineer's opinion, not equal to base product specified,
23 or will not adequately perform function for which intended.
24
25 3. If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this
26 specification section.
27
28 4. If request will require will, in the opinion of the Engineer, excessive
29 time and/or engineering resources to evaluate.
30
31 1.04 SUBSTITUTION DUE TO UNAVAILABILITY
32
33 A. Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy,
34 discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are
35 reasons for substitution after Contract award.
36
37 B. Notify Engineer in writing as soon as condition of unavailability becomes
38 apparent; include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution
39 sufficiently in advance to avoid delays.
40
41 C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.03 above.
42
43 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
44
45 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
46 END OF SECTION
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 01700
• 2
3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Comply with requirements stated in General Conditions and in
10 Specifications for administrative procedures in closing out the Work.
11
12 B. Electronic Shop Drawings and O&M Manuals
13
14 1. The Contractor shall furnish final Shop Drawings and Operations and
15 Maintenance Data in electronic ".pdf format for all equipment
16 furnished under all Specification Sections in Divisions 13 and 15.
17
18 2. The Contractor shall organize all electronic Shop Drawings and
19 Operations and Maintenance Data by specification division and
20 section number and submit two (2) copies on compact disk media
21 (CDROM).
22
23 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
•24
25 A. When Contractor considers the Work, or portion thereof, to be substantially
26 complete, he shall submit to the Engineer:
27
28 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is
29 substantially complete.
30
31 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected.
32
33 B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make
34 an inspection to determine the status of completion.
35
36 C. Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete:
37
38 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the
39 reasons therefore.
40
41 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a
42 second written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer.
43
44 3. The Engineer will re -inspect the Work.
45
•46 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will:
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-1 09/28/23
1 1111
2 1. Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial
3 Completion with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected
4 before final payment.
5
6 2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided
7 in General Conditions, and when the Engineer considers the Work
8 substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and
9 the Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a
10 revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected.
11
12 1.03 FINAL INSPECTION
13
14 A. When Contractor considers all the Work to be complete, he shall submit
15 written certification that:
16
17 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
18
19 2. Work has been inspected for compliahce with Contract Documents.
20
21 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
22
23 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the
24 Owner's representative and are operational.
25
26 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection.
27
28 B. The Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with
29 reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification.
30
31 C. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective:
32
33 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the
34 incomplete or defective work.
35
36 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated
37 deficiencies and send a second written certification to the Engineer
38 that the Work is complete.
39
40 3. The Engineer will re -inspect the Work.
41
42 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract
43 Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals.
44
45 1.04 RE -INSPECTION FEES
46
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-2 09/28/23
•
•
1 A. Should the Engineer perform re -inspections, due to failure of the Work, to
• 2 comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor:
3
4 1. Owner will compensate the Engineer for such additional services.
5
6 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final
7 payment to the Contractor.
8
9 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER
10
11 A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities.
12
13 B. Project Record Documents.
14
15 C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel.
16
17 D. Warranties and Bonds.
18
19 E. Keys and Keying Schedule.
20
21 F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
22
23 G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens.
•24
25 H. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.
26
27 I. Contractor's Final Affidavit.
28
29 J. Lien Waivers from Subcontractors and Suppliers.
30
31 K. Consent of Surety from the bonding company.
32
33 L. Contractor's Guarantee.
34
35 1.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
36
37 A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer.
38
39 B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum:
40
41 1. The original Contract Sum.
42
43 2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
44
45 a. Previous Change Orders.
•46
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-3 09/28/23
1 b. Unit Prices.
2
3 c. Deductions for uncorrected Work.
4
5 d. Penalties and Bonuses.
6
7 e. Deductions for liquidated damages.
8
9 f. Deductions for re -inspection payments.
10
11 g. Other adjustments.
12
13 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.
14
15 4. Payments.
16
17 5. Sum remaining due.
18
19 C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting adjustments to the
20 Contract Sum, which were not previously made by Change Orders.
21
22 1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
23
24 A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with
25 procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions.
26
27 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
28
29 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
30
31
32 END OF SECTION
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 01710
•
2
3 CLEANING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall execute cleaning during progress of Work and at
10 completion of the Work as required by the General Conditions.
11
12 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
13
14 A. The Contractor shall conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply
15 with all applicable Laws and Regulations.
16
17 B. Disposal of waste materials shall be in accordance with the Section III, 17.7
18 and local Ordinances.
19
20 PART 2 — MATERIALS
21
22 2.01 MATERIALS
23
•24 A. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials which do not create
25 hazards to health or property, and which do not damage surfaces.
26
27 B. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials and methods
28 recommended by the Manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned.
29
30 C. The Contractor shall use cleaning materials only on surfaces so
31 recommended by cleaning material Manufacturer.
32
33 PART 3 — EXECUTION
34
35 3.01 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
36
37 A. The Contractor shall execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site and
38 adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, water,
39 eroded material, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from construction
40 operations.
41
42 B. The Contractor shall provide suitable on-site containers for the daily
43 collection of all waste materials, debris and rubbish.
44
45 C. The Contractor shall remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site
•46 containers periodically and dispose of in accordance with Section 1.02.
CLEANING
01710-1
09/28/23
1 •2 D. The Contractor shall schedule operations so that dust and other
3 contaminants resulting from the cleaning process do not fall on wet or
4 newly -coated surfaces.
5
6 E. The Contractor shall remove from the site all surplus materials and
7 temporary structures when no further need therefore develops and as
8 approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable
9 for all spillage and shall incur all associated costs including, but not limited
10 to, costs related to repair and maintenance resulting from any such damage.
11
12 3.02 FINAL CLEANING
13
14 A. The Contractor shall employ skilled workmen for final cleaning.
15
16 B. The Contractor shall remove all grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains,
17 fingerprints, labels and all other foreign materials from sight -exposed
18 interior and exterior surfaces.
19
20 C. Prior to Final Completion, the Contractor shall conduct an inspection of
21 sight -exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all Work areas, to verify
22 that the entire Work and the entire construction area of the Work are clean.
23
24
25 END OF SECTION
CLEANING
01710-2
09/28/23
•
•
1 SECTION 01720
•
2
3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of:
10
11 1. Drawings
12
13 2. Specifications
14
15 3. Addenda
16
17 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
18
19 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions
20
21 6. Accepted Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples
22
23 7. Field Test Records
•24
25 8. Construction Photographs, if provided
26
27 9. Detailed progress schedule
28
29 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
30
31 A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from
32 documents used for construction.
33
34 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
35
36 2. Provide locked cabinet of secure storage space for storage of
37 samples.
38
39 B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format.
40
41 C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do
42 not use record documents for construction purposes.
43
44 D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the
45 Engineer.
•46
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-1 09/28/23
1 E. As a pre -requisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor shall III 2 exhibit the updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and
3 Owner.
4
5 1.03 MARKING DEVICES
6
7 A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code
8 designated by the Engineer.
9
10 1.04 RECORDING
11
12 A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters.
13
14 B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
15
16 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
17
18 C. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:
19
20 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor
21 datum.
22
23 2. Denote all underground piping elevations and dimensions; all
24 changes to piping location; horizontal and vertical locations of
25 underground utilities and appurtenances, all referenced to
26 permanent surface improvements. Actual installed pipe material,
27 class, etc.
28
29 3. Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the
30 construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the
31 structure.
32
33 4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
34
35 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
36
37 6. Details not on original Contract Documents.
38
39 7. Equipment and piping relocations.
40
41 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of
42 doors, windows, etc.
43
44 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records
45 and shop drawings.
46
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-2 09/28/23
•
•
•1 D. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record:
2
3 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each
4 product and item of equipment actually installed.
5
6 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
7
8 E. Shop Drawings (after final review):
9
10 1. Five (5) sets of shop drawings for each piece of process equipment,
11 piping, electrical and instrumentation system.
12
13 1.05 SUBMITTAL
14
15 A. At contract close-out, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for the
16 Owner.
17
18 B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
19
20 1. Date
21
22 2. Project title and number
23
•24 3. Contractor's name and address
25
26 4. Title and number of each Record Document
27
28 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative
29
30
31 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
32
33 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
34
35
36 END OF SECTION
37
•
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-3 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 01730
•
2
3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
10 maintenance and operation of new equipment and processes furnished and
11 or installed by the Contractor.
12
13 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section
14 and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications.
15
16 2. The information in the O&M Manual shall be specific and targeted for
17 the equipment and processes supplied for this project.
18
19 3. Incorporate operating and maintenance data furnished by the
20 Owner, if previously defined in the scope of work.
21
22 B. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items required to
23 supply and deliver to the Engineer, O&M Manuals for the work, mechanical
•24 equipment, instrumentation equipment, electrical equipment, process
25 control equipment, and software on a facility wide, system by system, and
26 individual equipment basis as pertinent to the project.
27
28 C. Five (5) draft O&M Manuals for each piece of equipment shall be submitted
29 to the Engineer upon delivery of the equipment. The draft O&M Manuals
30 will include the manufacturer's test results and specification and may be
31 used as a training aid.
32
33 D. Furnish the Owner five (5) complete hardcopy sets of operation and
34 maintenance data and two (2) complete set of operation and maintenance
35 data in electronic "pdf' format on a CD as specified herein for the project.
36
37 1. Any modifications required after final O&M submission shall be made
38 to the manuals by issuance of all new manuals with the revised or
39 additional information included and clearly identified.
40
41 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42
43 A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel:
44
45 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described
•46 products.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-1 09/28/23
1
2 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
3
4 3. Skilled and technical writer to the extent required to communicate
5 essential data.
6
7 4. Skilled as draftspersons competent to prepare required Drawings.
8
9 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
10
11 A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's
12 personnel.
13
14 B. Format:
15
16 1. Size: 8-1/2 inches x 11 -inches.
17
18 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum white, for typed pages.
19
20 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
21
22 4. Drawings:
23
24 a. Provide reinforced punched binder tabs, bind in with text.
25 b. Reduce larger Drawings to 11 -inches x 17 -inches and fold to
26 size of text pages and printed only on one side.
27
28 5. Provide tabbed fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of
29 operating equipment.
30
31 a. Provide typed description of the product, and of each major
32 component part of equipment.
33 b. Provide indexed tabs.
34
35 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING
36 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List:
37
38 a. Title of Project
39 b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
40 c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
41
42 C. Binders:
43
44 1. Commercial quality three -post binders with durable and cleanable
45 plastic covers.
46
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-2 09/28/23
•
1 2. Maximum post width: 2 -inches. Each binder filled to not more than
• 2 75% capacity.
3
4 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related
5 consistent groupings.
6
7 D. Refer to Specification Section 01300 for additional submittal requirements.
8
9 1.04 GENERAL CONTENT OF MANUAL
10
11 A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic
12 order. If more than one volume is required, the table of contents of each
13 volume shall be included with all volumes.
14
15 B. The contact information, address, and phone number for the Contractor and
16 the responsible principal shall be included.
17
18 C. A list of each product included, indexed to content of the volume.
19
20 D. A list, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of:
21
22 a. Manufacturer
23 b. Subcontractor or installer.
•24 c. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
25 d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
26
27 E. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set
28 forth in Contract Documents.
29
30 F. Product Data:
31
32 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
33
34 2. Annotate each sheet to:
35
36 a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
37 b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
38 c. Delete references to inapplicable information.
39
40 G. Drawings:
41
42 1. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly
43 illustrate:
44
45 a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
•46 b. Control and flow diagrams.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-3 09/28/23
1 c. Owner Tag Numbers.
2 d. Exploded views with part numbers listed and identified.
3
4 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents
5 to assure correct illustration of completed installation.
6
7 H. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular
8 installation:
9
10 1. Organized in consistent format under separate headings for different
11 procedures.
12
13 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure.
14
15 3. Provide an overview of how the complete system should operate.
16
17 I. Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued.
18
19 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel with the following
20 information:
21
22 a. Proper procedures in event of failure.
23 b. Circumstances and events that may affect validity of
24 warranties or bonds.
25
26 1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS, MOISTURE -
27 PROTECTED, WEATHER -EXPOSED, AND APPLIED MATERIALS, AND
28 FINISHES
29
30 A. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
31
32 1. Catalog number, size, and composition.
33 2. Applicable Standards
34 3. Chemical Composition
35 4. Details of Installation or Application
36 5. Color and texture designations.
37 6. Information required for re -ordering special -manufactured products.
38 7. Storage instructions and shelf life information.
39
40 B. Instructions for care and maintenance.
41
42 1. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and
43 methods.
44
45 2. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental
46 to product.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
1110 1
2 3. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
3
4 4. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
5
6
7 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
8
9 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
10
11
12 END OF SECTION
13
•
•
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-5 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 SECTION 01740
2
3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Compile warranties and bonds, as specified in the General Conditions.
10
11 B. Co -execute submittals when so specified.
12
13 C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
14
15 D. Submit to the Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner.
16
17 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
18
19 A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, executed
20 by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors.
21
22 B. Number of original signed copies required. Two each.
23
•24 C. Table of Contents. Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete
25 information for each item.
26
27 1. Product or work item.
28
29 2. Firm, with name of principal, address, and telephone number.
30
31 3. Scope.
32
33 4. Date of beginning warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
34
35 5. Duration of warranty, bond, or service maintenance contract.
36
37 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
38
39 a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
40
41 b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
42
43 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, and telephone
44 number.
45
• 46
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-1 09/28/23
1 1.03 WARRANTY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
2
3 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment
4 manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the
5 Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at the
6 time of substantial completion and/or final acceptance by the Owner, whichever
7 is later.
8
9 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment
10 warranty for all major equipment that has a 1 HP motor or that has a list price of
11 more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties for
12 equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant equipment
13 not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one-year warranty period even
14 though certificates of warranty may not be required.
15
16 C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide
17 a one-year warranty commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the
18 Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty
19 commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. The two-year
20 warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the one-year
21 warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment.
22
23 1.04 WARRANTY START DATE
24
25 A. No warranty shall start until the Engineer has issued a "Notice of Substantial
26 Completion".
27
28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
29
30 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
31
32
33 END OF SECTION
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 02062
• 2
3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals required to
10 remove all existing structures, equipment, pipe, fittings, valves, electrical,
11 instrumentation and controls, and all appurtenances as noted on the
12 Contract Drawings, as reasonably inferred and as required in order to
13 perform the work as described in the Contract Documents.
14
15 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
16
17 PART 3 — EXECUTION
18
19 3.01 GENERAL
20
21 A. The Contractor shall not proceed with the removal of any equipment without
22 specific approval from the Owner. Any facilities removed without proper
23 authorization shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner at the
•24 Contractor's expense.
25
26 B. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and
27 supports not required to be reused and not designated as being turned over
28 to the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor immediately upon
29 removal from their present locations. The Contractor shall remove such
30 material from the plant site at his own expense and it shall not be reused.
31
32 C. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and
33 supports designated as being turned over to the Owner, shall be identified,
34 cleaned, protected, crated or boxed and stored at the plant site.
35
36 D. Pieces of equipment weighing 150 lbs or more shall be provided with
37 suitable skids before storing.
38
39 E. Wherever piping is removed for disposition, adjacent pipe, and headers that
40 are to remain in service shall be blanked off or plugged and then supported
41 or anchored.
42
43 F. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against damaging the
44 material and equipment to be stored and reused. The Contractor shall
45 repair any damage resulting from his operations, as directed by and to the
II
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02062-1 09/28/23
1 satisfaction of the Engineer. Itemized lists of materials removed and stored III
2 shall be given to the Resident Project Representative daily. A final typed
3 itemized list shall be furnished to the Engineer in 6 copies at the completion
4 of construction. The list shall include items, method of packaging, and place
5 of storage.
6
7 3.02 EQUIPMENT TO BE RETAINED
8
9 A. All equipment removed shall remain the property of the Owner unless
10 designated otherwise by the Owner.
11
12 B. If the Owner elects not to retain ownership of a certain item, the item shall
13 become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the plant
14 site at the Contractor's expense.
15
16 C. If the Owner requests that the Contractor utilize a specific hauling service
17 for the removal of existing equipment or facilities, the Contractor shall utilize
18 that service at no additional cost to the Owner.
19
20
21 END OF SECTION
•
•
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02062-2 09/28/23
•1 SECTION 02064
2
3 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to modify,
10 alter and/or convert existing structures as shown or specified and as
11 required for the installation of new mechanical equipment, piping, and
12 appurtenances. Existing piping and equipment shall be removed and
13 dismantled as necessary for the performance of structural alterations in
14 accordance with the requirements herein specified.
15
16 1.02 DEWATERING FOR STRUCTURES
17
18 A. The Contractor shall take any and all precautions necessary to assure that
19 the structures affected by this project and all connecting structures,
20 pipelines, and conduits do not become buoyant and are not damaged in any
21 way as a result of the work specified herein.
22
23 B. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, operate, and remove a
•24 temporary dewatering system, in accordance with Section 02140, if
25 provided, as required to lower and control the groundwater level, such that
26 there is no danger of any structure becoming buoyant. In no event shall
27 ground water rise to such a level to cause unbalanced pressure on
28 structures. Flotation shall be prevented by maintaining a positive and
29 continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be
30 fully responsible and liable for all damages to existing structures, piping or
31 equipment that may result from failure of the groundwater dewatering
32 system.
33
34 C. Dewatering System
35
36 1. The dewatering system shall be adequate to lower the groundwater
37 levels to required levels. The dewatering system must maintain the
38 lowered water table at all times until no longer needed.
39
40 2. The Contractor shall provide and have ready on-site for immediate
41 use at all times standby pumping and/or power systems to serve the
42 dewatering system in case of failure of the primary pumping/power
43 systems.
44
•
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT
02064-1 09/26/23
1 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for creating and implementing a
2 dewatering plan and a groundwater disposal plan. The plans shall
3 be submitted to the Engineer and shall be reviewed prior to initiating
4 any dewatering activities. The Contractor shall also comply with the
5 requirements of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection
6 (FDEP) Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater
7 from any Non -Contaminated Site Activity (rule 62-621.300) for all
8 discharges to surface waters or systems that flow into surface
9 waters.
10
11 4. Removal of the dewatering system shall be accomplished after the
12 dewatering system is no longer required.
13
14 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
15
16 PART 3 — EXECUTION
17
18 3.01 GENERAL
19
20 A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish, or otherwise
21 remove parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on
22 the Contract Drawings, herein specified, or necessary to permit completion
23 of the work under this Contract. He shall dispose of surplus materials
24 resulting from the above work. The work shall include all necessary cutting
25 and bending of reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous metal
26 work found embedded in the existing structures. Any item called for to be
27 removed shall be assumed to include connecting conduit, wiring and
28 supports, unless as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
29
30 B. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove all existing equipment, piping
31 and other appurtenances required for the completion of the work. Where
32 called for or required, the Contractor shall cut existing pipelines for the
33 purpose of making connections thereto. Anchor bolts for equipment and
34 structural steel removed shall be cut off one inch below the concrete
35 surface. Surface shall be finished as specified in Specification 03740.
36
37 C. At the time that a new connection is made to an existing pipeline, additional
38 new piping, extending to and including a new valve, shall be installed.
39
40 D. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut,
41 removed, or otherwise altered except as directed by the Engineer.
42
43 E. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when
44 making openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all
45 precautions and use all necessary barriers and other protective devices so
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT
02064-2 09/26/23
•
•
•
1 as not to damage the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new
•
2 work, and not to damage the structures or contents by falling or flying debris.
3 Unless otherwise permitted, line drilling will be required in cutting existing
4 concrete.
5
6 F. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and
7 additions shall remain the property of the Owner, except that item not
8 salvageable, as determined by the Engineer and the Owner, shall become
9 the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him off the work site at
10 his own place of disposal. Operating equipment shall be thoroughly
11 cleaned, lubricated, and greased for protection during prolonged storage.
12
13 G. All alterations to existing structures shall be done at such time and in such
14 manner as will comply with the time schedule. So far as possible before
15 any part of the work is started, all tools, equipment and materials shall be
16 assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without
17 delay.
18
19 H. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations
20 shall conform to the General Specifications for the classes of work insofar
21 as such specifications are applicable.
22
23 I. All cutting of existing concrete or other material to provide suitable bonding
•24 to new work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the
25 respective section of these Specifications covering the work. When not
26 covered, the work shall be carried on in the manner and to the extent
27 directed by the Engineer.
28
29 J. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as
30 nearly as possible the adjacent surfaces.
31
32 K. Non -shrink grout shall be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, leveling
33 pump bases, doweling anchors into existing concrete and elsewhere as
34 shown.
35
36 L. Where necessary or required for the purpose of making connections, the
37 Contractor shall cut existing pipelines/couplings in a manner to provide a
38 typical joint. Where required, the Contractor shall weld beads, flanges, or
39 provide Dresser Couplings or equal, all as required.
40
41 M. The Contractor shall provide flumes, hoses, piping, and other related items
42 to divert or provide suitable plugs, bulkheads, or other means to hold back
43 the flow of water or other liquids, all as required in the performance of the
44 work under this Contract.
45
•
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT
02064-3 09/26/23
1 N. Blasting will not be permitted to complete any work under this Contract.
2 Care shall be taken not to damage any part of existing buildings or
3 foundations or outside structures.
4
5 3.02 CONNECTING TO EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
6
7 A. The Contractor shall verify the exact location, material, alignment, joint, etc.,
8 of existing piping and equipment prior to making the connections called out
9 in the Drawings. These verifications shall be performed with adequate time
10 to correct any alignment issues prior to the actual time of connection.
11
12
13 3.03 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES
14
15 A. After dewatering and before commencing work on any tank, structure,
16 channels, conduit or other structures, the Contractor shall remove and
17 dispose of the grit and other solids remaining in such structures in a lawful
18 manner.
19
20 B. If the Owner requests that the Contractor utilize a specific hauling service
21 for the removal of existing equipment or facilities, the Contractor shall utilize
22 that service at no additional cost to the Owner.
23
24 END OF SECTION
25
26
27
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT
02064-4 09/26/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 02140
0 2
3 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. The Work to be performed includes the furnishing of all equipment,
10 materials and labor necessary to design, furnish, install, operate, and
11 maintain temporary dewatering systems to remove subsurface ground
12 waters as required by local conditions in accordance with all applicable
13 laws, the requirements set forth and as shown on the Drawings, as specified
14 herein, or as required for the completion of the work.
15
16 B. The Contractor shall conduct groundwater quality sampling and testing as
17 required and shall obtain a permit to discharge groundwater and stormwater
18 as described in Section 01065.
19
20 C. It is anticipated that ground water dewatering will be required for the
21 installation of the new influent sewer structure and at all times when other
22 structures or utilities are susceptible to becoming buoyant in order to
23 perform the rehabilitation work of this project.
•24
25 D. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to conduct the necessary soil
26 testing required to design a dewatering system for this project, and to retain
27 the services of a Geotechnical Engineer to design the dewatering system.
28 Submit the geotechnical engineer's signed and sealed plan for review. The
29 Contractor shall be required to dispose of the product water from dewatering
30 activities in accordance with all laws applicable thereto.
31
32 E. The Contractor will be responsible for all costs associated with both
33 dewatering and with disposing of product water from dewatering activities.
34
35 F. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the sizing, design, and
36 construction of the dewatering system and for the disposal of product water
37 from dewatering. The Contractor may utilize the existing stormwater
38 collection and treatment system for disposal of produced groundwater.
39
40 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
41
42 A. Groundwater dewatering and disposal of product water from dewatering
43 shall be in strict accordance with the latest revision of all Laws and
44 Regulations; with the local, State and Federal permits for the project; and,
45 with the Contractor's Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and
•46 the Contractor's Dewatering Plan.
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-1 09/28/23
1
2 1.03 DEWATERING PLAN
3
4 A. Prior to commencing any excavations, the Contractor shall submit a written
5 Dewatering Plan to the Engineer for review. The Contractor shall make any
6 and all field investigations and tests necessary to properly design and
7 construct a temporary dewatering system and temporary disposal or
8 infiltration/percolation system.
9
10 B. The Dewatering Plan shall include calculations based on field measured
11 geotechnical/hydrogeological data identifying the amount of water that will
12 be produced from dewatering. The Plan shall indicate the rate at which
13 product water from dewatering is produced as well as the length of time it
14 will be produced for each distinct construction phase applicable to each
15 dewatering activity identified below:
16
17 C. Those times when any structure is prone to buoyancy, including those times
18 when the installation or replacement of ground water relief valves and
19 installation of internal structural and rotating components.
20
21 D. The Dewatering Plan shall be in conformity with the overall construction
22 plan and shall itemize all pumping equipment, ground penetration
23 equipment and piping. The pumping and piping arrangement, the volume
24 of proposed discharge, and the location of the proposed discharge shall be
25 identified in the Dewatering Plan.
26
27 E. The Dewatering Plan shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered
28 Professional Engineer.
29
30 1.04 UPLIFT AND FLOTATION
31
32 A. Uplift of a structure could occur if the groundwater elevation is higher than
33 the elevation of water inside the structure. The Contractor shall monitor the
34 groundwater elevation, by constructing piezometers where necessary, at all
35 times when any structure is susceptible to uplift.
36
37 B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for ensuring that ground water
38 levels are controlled as required to prevent flotation and shall be fully
39 responsible and liable for all damages to structures and or pipes that may
40 result from the operation and/or failure of the dewatering system.
41
42 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
43
44 PART 3 — EXECUTION
45
46 3.01 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1
2 A. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of surface
3 or subsurface waters that may accumulate in the tanks or in the excavation.
4 The Contractor shall prevent flotation and migration of fines by maintaining
5 a positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system.
6
7 B. If subsurface water is encountered, the Contractor shall utilize suitable
8 equipment to adequately dewater the tanks or the excavation so that it will
9 be dry to the bottom or to a depth of 12 -inches below the subgrade
10 compaction level or over -excavation level, as appropriate. A well point
11 system, trench drain, sump pump operation, or other dewatering method
12 selected by the Contractor shall be utilized to maintain the work area in a
13 dry condition for preparation of the bottom and until the fills, structures or
14 pipes to be built thereon have been completed to such extent that they will
15 not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to
16 natural levels. No water shall be allowed to contact masonry or concrete
17 within 24 hours after being placed.
18
19 C. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve
20 the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the proposed
21 bottom of excavations and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures
22 and utilities. Well or sump installations shall be constructed and operated
23 continuously with proper sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grained soil
•24 from the surrounding ground.
25
26 D. In the event that satisfactory dewatering cannot be accomplished due to
27 subsurface conditions, or where dewatering could damage existing
28 structures, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer before commencing
29 construction.
30
31 E. Engine -driven dewatering pumps shall be equipped with residential type
32 mufflers. Where practical and feasible, electrical "power drops" and electric
33 motor -driven equipment shall be used in lieu of portable generators.
34
35 F. The Contractor shall take all additional precautions to prevent uplift of any
36 structure during construction, including the installation of piezometers for
37 water level monitoring.
38
39 G. The Contractor shall take all precautions to preclude the accidental
40 discharge of fuel, oil, etc. to prevent adverse effects on groundwater quality.
41 All costs associated with any such adverse effects shall be borne by the
42 Contractor.
43
44 H. The Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, be required to excavate
45 below grade and refill with fill material if the Engineer determines that
•46 adequate drainage has not been provided.
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-3 09/28/23
1
2 3.02 DISPOSAL
3
4 A. The Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading or blocking up the
5 flow in the drainage facilities and shall leave the facilities unrestricted and
6 as clean as originally found. Any damage to existing facilities shall be
7 repaired or restored as directed by the Engineer or the authority having
8 jurisdiction, at no cost to the Owner.
9
10 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring and complying with all
11 permits required to dispose of the product water from dewatering and shall
12 protect adjacent waterways from product water run-off and turbidity while
13 the system is in operation.
14
15 C. In areas where adequate disposal sites are not available, partially backfilled
16 trenches may be used for water disposal. The Contractor's plan shall
17 include temporary culverts, barricades, and other protective measures to
18 prevent damage to property or injury to any person or persons.
19
20 D. No flooding of streets, roadways, driveways, or private property shall be
21 permitted.
22
23 3.03 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL AND AREA RESTORATION
24
25 A. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished after the system
26 is no longer required. All materials and equipment constituting the system
27 shall be removed by the Contractor.
28
29 B. All sock drains shall be filled with flowable fill when no longer needed and
30 abandoned in place.
31
32 C. All areas shall be restored in accordance with Specification Section 02485.
33
34
35 END OF SECTION
•
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-4 09/28/23
1 SECTION 02221
• 2
3 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. This section includes, except as elsewhere provided, all excavation for
10 pipelines and appurtenances including drainage, filling, backfilling, grading,
11 disposal of surplus material and restoration of trench surfaces.
12
13 B. Excavation shall provide suitable room for installing pipe, structures and
14 appurtenances. Pavement shall be cut with pneumatic chisels along
15 straight lines before excavating.
16
17 C. The Contractor shall furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports,
18 and shall remove from the excavation all materials which the Engineer may
19 deem unsuitable for backfilling. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm,
20 dry and in all respects, acceptable. The length of open trench shall be
21 related closely to the rate of installing pipe. All excavation shall be made in
22 open trenches.
23
•24 D. All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with the name or trademark of
25 the manufacturer, the batch number, the location of the plant and strength
26 designation, as applicable. All pipe shall be laid with a 2 -inch metallic tape,
27 appropriately color -coded and imprinted with the type of service, 12 -inches
28 below final grade, directly above the utility for identification and ease of
29 location. The appropriate tape color codes are as follows:
30
31 Grey - Gravity Sewer
32 Green - Sanitary force main
33 Blue - Potable water
34 Lavender - Reclaimed water
35
36 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
37
38 2.01 MATERIALS
39
40 A. General
41
42 1. Materials for use as fill shall be described below. For each material,
43 the Contractor shall notify the Testing Lab of the source of the
44 material at least ten calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use
45 of such material.
•46
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-1 09/28/23
1 2. Materials shall be furnished as required from off-site sources and
2 hauled to the site.
3 3. Disposal of unsuitable material is specified in this Section. See
4 Paragraph 3.10.
5
6 B. Common Fill
7
8 1. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material,
9 loam, wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be
10 compressible, or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill
11 shall not contain stones larger than 10 -in. in any dimension, broken
12 concrete, masonry, rubble, or other similar materials. It shall have
13 physical properties such that it can be readily spread and compacted
14 during filling.
15
16 2. Material falling within the above specification, encountered during
17 the excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. All
18 material, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not suitable for
19 reuse, shall be spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable
20 materials.
21
22 C. Crushed Stone
23
24 1. Crushed stone shall be used for manhole bases, as a drainage layer
25 below structures with underdrains and at other locations indicated on
26 the Drawings.
27
28 2. Crushed stone for pipe bedding shall be size No. 67 with gradation
29 as defined in Table 1 of Section 901 of Florida Department of
30 Transportation Standard Specifications for Road & Bridge
31 Construction.
32
33 D. Select Fill
34
35 1. Select fill shall be non -cohesive, non -plastic material free of all
36 debris, lumps or clods. Fill material shall be clean earth fill composed
37 of sand or a mixture of clay and sand. Backfill material placed within
38 one foot of piping and appurtenances shall not contain any stones or
39 rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter, or 3/4 -inch in diameter for
40 PVC pipe.
41
42 PART 3 — EXECUTION
43
44 3.01 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
45
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 A. Excavated material shall be stacked without excessive surcharge on the
• 2 trench bank. Inconvenience to traffic and abutters shall be avoided as much
3 as possible. Excavated material shall be segregated for use in backfilling
4 as specified below.
5
6 B. Surplus excavated material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is suitable
7 for use in backfilling or for replacing rock and boulders shall be stockpiled
8 at a satisfactory site to be obtained by the Contractor to be used as required.
9 Unsatisfactory surplus material including paving, rock or boulders, muck,
10 stumps and other material, as directed by the Engineer, shall be disposed
11 of by the Contractor.
12
13 C. It is expressly understood that no excavated material shall be removed from
14 the site of the work or disposed of by the Contractor except as directed by
15 the Engineer. When removal of surplus material has been directed by the
16 Engineer, the Contractor shall dispose of such surplus material.
17
18 D. Should conditions make it impracticable or unsafe to stack material adjacent
19 to the trench, the material shall be hauled and stored at a location provided
20 by the Contractor. When required, it shall be rehandled and used in
21 backfilling the trench. No extra compensation will be made for rehandling
22 material.
23
.24 3.02 SHEETING AND BRACING
25
26 A. The Contractor shall furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and
27 bracing required to support the sides of the excavation and prevent loss of
28 ground which could damage or delay the work or endanger adjacent
29 structures. If the Engineer is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or
30 proper supports have not been provided, he may order additional supports
31 placed at the expense of the Contractor from his responsibility for the
32 sufficiency of such supports. Care shall be taken to prevent voids outside
33 of the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled and
34 rammed.
35
36 3.03 TEST PITS
37
38 A. The Contractor may be required to excavate test pits for the purpose of
39 locating underground utilities or structures as an aid in establishing the
40 precise location of new work. Test pits shall be backfilled as soon as the
41 desired information has been obtained. The backfilled surface shall be
42 maintained in a satisfactory condition for travel until resurfaced as
43 hereinafter specified.
44
45 B. Excavation of test pits shall be considered work incidental to the project and
•46 shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-3 09/28/23
1
2 C. If, for any reason, a test pit is left open for any period of time, it shall be
3 properly barricaded and lighted by the Contractor, when directed by the
4 Engineer, in accordance with State and Local laws.
5
6 3.04 DRAINAGE
7
8 A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform all
9 incidental work required to install and maintain the drainage system he
10 proposes for handling ground water or surface water encountered. He shall
11 assume all responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, materials, and
12 equipment employed. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer is
13 assured that the proposed method will be satisfactory. The requirements
14 for a stable subgrade are indicated below, and the Contractor must alter his
15 drainage methods, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the trench bottom is
16 unsatisfactory.
17
18 B. The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment and devices to properly
19 remove and dispose of all water entering the trench and excavation. The
20 grade shall be maintained acceptably dry until structures and pipe to be
21 constructed therein are completed. All drainage shall be performed without
22 damage to the trench, pavements, pipes, electrical conduits, or other
23 utilities.
24
25 C. Pipe and masonry shall not be laid in water or submerged within 24 hours
26 after being placed. Water shall not flow over new masonry within four days
27 after placement.
28
29 D. In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on structures until
30 the concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. The Contractor shall
31 prevent flotation of the pipe promptly placing backfill.
32
33 E. If the Contractor elects to use underdrains for handling water, he shall
34 furnish and install pipe and crushed stone graded from course to fine and
35 shall furnish and install all pumps and equipment necessary to maintain the
36 water level continuously at the required elevation. Pipe underdrains shall
37 be laid with open joints and bedded in crushed stone for the full width of
38 trench, and to a depth of 6 -in. below the invert of underdrain.
39
40 F. The invert of underdrain shall be 12 -in. below the normal subgrade. Pipe
41 underdrains shall have no permanent outlet and shall be sealed at the
42 completion of the work. The length of continuous underdrain to be used
43 shall be limited as conditions require. An impervious bulkhead of clay or
44 concrete shall be constructed in the trench bottom between 100 ft. lengths
45 of the underdrain system to obstruct the free flow of ground water after
46 construction is completed. All excavation below normal grade for the
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 purpose of installing underdrains, the crushed stone and underdrain pipe
•2 shall be considered a part of the drainage work to be done under the pipe
3 items. The Contractor shall continuously guard against the Toss of earth
4 through subbase or the underdrain. Should loss of either take place, the
5 Contractor shall alter the stone size to provide a satisfactory barrier or filter.
6
7 G. Where other methods of handling water prove inadequate, the Contractor
8 shall furnish, install, operate, and remove proper well point facilities.
9
10 H. The Contractor shall submit a dewatering plan to the Engineer prior to
11 commencement of work in accordance with Section 02140.
12
13 3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION
14
15 A. Excavation shall be made for all trenches which are required for the
16 installation of pipes, culverts, manholes and drainage structures.
17
18 B. Trench width at the ground surface may vary depending on depth, type of
19 soil, and position of surface structures. The minimum clear width of the
20 trench, sheeted or unsheeted, measured at the springline of the pipe should
21 be 1 foot greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. The maximum
22 recommended clear width of the trench at the top of the pipe is equal to the
23 pipe outside diameter plus 2 feet. If the maximum recommended trench
•24 width must be exceeded or if the pipe is installed in a compacted
25 embankment, then pipe embedment should be compacted to a point of at
26 least 2-1/2 pipe diameters from the pipe on both sides of the pipe or to the
27 trench walls, whichever is less.
28
29 C. The trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below the designated
30 subgrade provided that the material remaining in the bottom of the trench is
31 no more than slightly disturbed.
32
33 D. Rock shall be removed to a minimum of 8 -in. clearance around the bottom
34 and sides of the pipe being laid.
35
36 E. The trench bottom should be constructed to provide a firm, stable and
37 uniform support for the full length of the pipe. Bell holes should be provided
38 at each joint to permit proper assembly and pipe support. Any part of the
39 trench bottom excavated below grade should be backfilled to grade and
40 should be compacted as required to provide firm pipe support. When an
41 unstable subgrade condition is encountered that could provide inadequate
42 pipe support, additional trench depth should be excavated and refilled with
43 suitable foundation material. Ledge rock, boulders, and large stones should
44 be removed to provide 4 -inches of soil cushion of all sides of the pipe and
45 accessories.
•46
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-5 09/28/23
1 3.06 PIPE BEDDING
2
3 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install pipe on the type of bedding shown
4 on the Drawings or as specified by the Engineer but shall be Type 4 bedding
5 at a minimum. Regardless of the type of bedding used by the Contractor,
6 holes in the trench shall be provided to receive the pipe bell. The hole
7 excavated shall be sufficient to relieve pipe bells of all loads and yet provide
8 support over the total length of the pipe barrel.
9
10 B. Pipe shall be installed with proper bedding providing uniform longitudinal
11 support under the pipe. Backfill material shall be worked under the sides of
12 the pipe to provide satisfactory support under the haunches of the pipe. All
13 bedding material shall be select fill. Sharp stones and crushed rock (larger
14 than 3/4 -in.), which could cause significant scratching or abrasion of the
15 pipe, shall be excluded from the embedment material. Proper compaction
16 procedures shall be exercised.
17
18 C. Where required to provide a firm bedding for the pipe crushed stone
19 bedding shall be provided from a depth of 12" below the pipe up to the pipe
20 haunches.
21
22 3.07 BACKFILLING
23
24 A. As soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, joined, and bedded,
25 backfilling shall begin and thereafter be prosecuted expeditiously.
26
27 B. Select backfill material, free from stones and other foreign material, shall be
28 placed to a depth of 12 -inches over the top of the pipe. Backfill shall be
29 thoroughly compacted by hand -tamping as placed. The remainder of the
30 trench shall be backfilled in loose 12 -inch lifts of common or structural fill as
31 applicable.
32
33 C. Any space remaining between the pipe and side of the trench shall be
34 packed full by hand shovel with selected earth, free from stones having a
35 diameter greater than 2 -inch, and thoroughly compacted with a tamper as
36 fast as placed up to a level of 12 -inches above the top of the pipe.
37
38 D. Backfilling shall be carried up evenly on both sides with at least one person
39 tamping for each person shoveling material into the trench.
40
41 E. The remainder of the trench above the compacted backfill, as just described
42 shall be filled thoroughly compacted by rolling, ramming, as the Engineer
43 may direct, sufficiently to prevent subsequent settling.
44
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 F Backfill around manholes shall be selected material and thoroughly
2 compacted. All backfill shall be compacted, especially under and over pipes
3 connected to the structures.
4
5 G. All fill shall be placed in a dry condition.
6
7 3.08 COMPACTION
8
9 A. Gravel and crushed stone in open areas, shall be placed in layers not to
10 exceed eight (8) inches in depth as measured before compaction. Each
11 layer shall be compacted by a minimum of four (4) coverages. Incidental
12 compaction due to traffic by construction equipment will not be credited
13 toward the required minimum four (4) coverages.
14
15 B. Fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12 -inches and should be
16 compacted to a minimum of 98% of the maximum modified Proctor dry
17 density, as established in accordance with ASTM D-1557. Density tests
18 should be performed in each fill lift to confirm compaction before the next
19 lift is placed.
20
21 C. Areas adjacent to structures and other confined inaccessible to the roller or
22 truck shall be compacted with hand guided mechanical compaction
23 equipment.
•24
25 D. Backfill and compaction for manholes and drainage structures shall be in
26 accordance with the requirements of Section 02220.
27
28 E. It is the intention that the fill materials, with respect to moisture, be used in
29 the condition they are excavated insofar as this is practicable. Material that
30 is too wet shall be spread on the fill area and permitted to dry, assisted by
31 harrowing if necessary, until the moisture content is reduced enough to
32 allow for proper compaction as determined by the Engineer. Muck, mud, or
33 organic material shall not be utilized as trench fill. Such matter shall be
34 removed from the trench and replaced with suitable fill material.
35
36 3.09 GRADING
37
38 A. Grading shall be performed at such places as are indicated on the
39 Drawings, to the lines, grades, and elevations shown or as directed by the
40 Engineer and shall be made in such a manner that the requirements for
41 formation of embankments can be followed. All unacceptable material
42 encountered, or whatever nature within the limits indicated, shall be
43 removed and disposed of as directed. During the process of excavation,
44 the grade shall be maintained in such condition that it will be well drained at
45 all times. When directed, temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be
•
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-7 09/28/23
1 installed to intercept or divert surface water which may affect the progress
2 or condition of the work.
3
4 B. The right is reserved to make small adjustments or revisions in lines or
5 grades if found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on
6 the Drawings of in order to obtain satisfactory construction.
7
8 C. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 -in. in their greatest dimensions will
9 not be permitted in the top 6 -inches of the subgrade.
10
11 D. All fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross-section and
12 alignment shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
13
14 E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be jarred loose
15 or otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes
16 shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross-section and alignment shown
17 on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
18
19 3.10 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE SURPLUS MATERIAL
20
21 A. Unsuitable and surplus excavated materials and pavement shall become
22 the property of the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the
23 project site.
24
25 B. Suitable excavated materials may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the
26 Specification for common fill and has been reviewed by the Engineer.
27 Excavated material shall be neatly stockpiled at the site where designated
28 by the Engineer provided there is an area available that will not interfere
29 with the operation of the plant or inconvenience traffic or adjoining property
30 owners. If space limitations do not permit stockpiling on the site, the
31 Contractor will be required to make arrangements for off-site stockpiling.
32 Transport of such material from and to the immediate site including any
33 stockpiling agreements shall by entirely at the Contractor's expense and
34 shall not constitute grounds for additional payment.
35
36 C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other
37 purposes as the Engineer may direct.
38
39 3.11 DISPOSAL AND REPLACING OF ROCK
40
41 A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all pieces of rock which are not
42 suitable for use in other parts of the work. Rock disposed of by hauling
43 away to spoil areas is to be replaced with surplus excavation obtained
44 elsewhere on the site, insofar as it is available. Any deficiency in the backfill
45 material shall be made up with acceptable material from outside sources.
46
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-8 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 B. Rock may be used in fill only after review by the Engineer.
•
3
4 END OF SECTION
5
•
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-9 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-10 09/28/23
•
1 SECTION 02222
• 2
3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals
10 necessary to perform all excavation, backfill, and grading for structures
11 required to complete the work shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
12 The work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, excavation for
13 structures, footings, all backfilling and fill; embankment grading for
14 structures; disposal of waste and surplus materials; and all related work
15 such as sheeting, bracing and dewatering.
16
17 B. Structures and structural elements shall be installed at such places as
18 indicated by the drawings at the elevations shown or as directed by the
19 Engineer.
20
21 C. Excess topsoil and fill generated during construction of the project shall be
22 stockpiled on site for the Contractor's use. All unused excess fill shall be
23 salvaged/disposed of by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
•24
25 D. During the process of grading, the subgrade shall be maintained in such
26 condition that it will be well drained at all times. Temporary drains and
27 drainage ditched shall be installed by the Contractor as required to intercept
28 or divert surface water at no additional cost to the Owner.
29
30 E. If, during the excavation sequence, any earth material that could be used
31 as fill is encountered that cannot be directly placed, it shall be stockpiled for
32 later use. No extra payment will be made for stockpiling or double handling
33 of material.
34
35 F. No grading is to be done in areas where there are existing utilities that may
36 be uncovered or damaged until such utilities have been located. Prior to
37 relocating lines, all service must be stopped, including closing required
38 valves, electrical circuits, etc. Pipeline to be abandoned must be plugged
39 and sealed according to these drawings and specifications.
40
41 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42
43 A. Soil Testing
44
III
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02222-1 09/28/23
1 1. Prior to the general placement of fill, and during such placement, the
2 Engineer may select areas within the limits of the fill for testing the
3 degree of compaction obtained. The Contractor shall cooperate fully
4 in obtaining the information desired.
5
6 2. Payment for testing shall be made by the Owner. If test results are
7 unsatisfactory, all costs involved in correcting deficiencies in
8 compacted materials to the satisfaction of the Engineer, shall be
9 borne by the Contractor. Repeated testing cost due to construction
10 deficiencies shall be paid by the Contractor.
11
12 B. Reference Standards (American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM,
13 latest edition):
14
15 1. ASTM C136 — Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Course
16 Aggregates.
17
18 2. ASTM D1556 (1974) — Density of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone
19 Method.
20
21 3. ASTM D1557 — Moisture -Density Relations of Soils using 10 -Ib. (4.5-
22 kg) Rammer and 18 -in. (457 -mm) Drop.
23
24 4. ASTM D422 — Particle Size Analysis for Soils.
25
26 5. ASTM D2216 — Laboratory Determination of Water Content of Soil &
27 Rock.
28
29 6. ASTM D2487 — Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
30
31 7. ASTM D2937 — Density of Soil in Place by the Drive -Cylinder
32 Method.
33
34 8. ASTM D2972 — Density of Soil in Place by the Nuclear Method.
35
36 9. ASTM D4643 — Determination of Water Content of Soil & Rock by
37 the Microwave Oven Method
38
39 10. ASTM D4959 — Determination of Water Content of Soil by Direct
40 Heating Method
41
42 1.03 SUBMITTALS
43
44 A. Testing laboratory reports that material for controlled fill meets requirements
45 of this Section.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02222-2 09/28/23
•
•
1
• 2 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
3
4 A. Lateral Support of Excavation for Structures
5
6 Furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and bracing required to support
7 the sides of the excavations, to prevent any movement which could in any
8 way diminish the width of the excavation below that necessary for proper
9 construction, and to protect structures, pipe, and utilities from damage due
10 to lateral movement or settlement of ground. If the Engineer is of the opinion
11 that at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, he
12 may order additional supports put in at the expense of the Contractor, and
13 compliance with such order shall not relieve or release the Contractor from
14 his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports.
15
16 B. Dewatering for Structures
17
18 Furnish, install, maintain, operate, and remove a temporary dewatering
19 system, as required to lower, and control the groundwater level, so that the
20 structures may be constructed in the dry. The Contractor shall, at his own
21 expense, correct all damage resulting from inadequacy of the dewatering
22 system or from flooding or the construction site from other causes.
23
•24 C. Dewatering System
25
26 1. The dewatering system shall be adequate to drain any excavated
27 area, to maintain the water at such a level at least 2 feet below the
28 lowest subgrade within the structure, including utilities. The
29 dewatering system must maintain the lowered water table 24 hours
30 per day, 7days per week until the structure has been completed to
31 the required stages.
32
33 2. Continuously maintain excavation in a dry condition so as to prevent
34 damage to the subsoil or fill during interruptions due to weather, labor
35 strikes, power failures or other delays. Provide and have ready for
36 immediate use at all times diesel or gasoline powered standby
37 pumping units to serve the system in case of failure of the normal
38 pumping units.
39
40 3. Piping and boiling, or any form of uncontrolled seepage, in the
41 bottom or sides of the excavation shall be prevented at all times. If
42 for any reason the dewatering system is found to be inadequate to
43 meet the requirements set forth herein, the Contractor shall, at his
44 own expense, make such additions, changes and/or replacements
45 as necessary to provide a satisfactory dewatering system.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02222-3 09/28/23
1
2 4. Contractor shall be responsible for creating and implementing a
3 dewatering plan that shall be submitted to the Engineer for
4 submission to FDEP as specified in the Environmental Resource
5 Permit. The plan should be approved prior to initiating any
6 construction activities.
7
8 D. Control of Groundwater Level
9
10 1. Maintain the groundwater level at or below subgrade of the structure
11 until the concrete structures are up high enough to: (1) prevent
12 flooding the structure, (2) support both bottom and top levels of walls,
13 and (3) prevent flotation.
14
15 2. After the structure has been completed in its entirety, backfill as
16 described hereinafter.
17
18 3. Flotation shall be prevented by maintaining a positive and continuous
19 operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully
20 responsible and liable for all damages, which may result from failure
21 of this system.
22
23 4. Disposal of drainage water shall be in an area approved by the
24 Engineer. Precautions shall be taken to prevent the flow or seepage
25 of drainage back into the drainage area. Particular care shall be
26 taken to prevent the discharge of unsuitable drainage to a water
27 supply or surface water body.
28
29 5. Removal of the dewatering system shall be accomplished after the
30 dewatering system is no longer required.
31
32 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
33
34 2.01 MATERIAL FOR CONTROLLED FILL
35
36 A. General
37
38 1. Materials for use as fill shall be as described below:
39
40 2. For each material, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's designated
41 representative of the source of the material at least ten (10) calendar
42 days prior to the date of anticipated use of such material, so that
43 necessary laboratory classification testing can be performed.
44
45 3. Structural fill shall be used to provide support for building
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02222-4 09/28/23
•
1 foundations, structure foundations and the reject pond
• 2 embankments. Common fill shall be used to as backfill over pipes.
3
4 B. Structural Fill
5
6 1. Compacted granular fill, which will provide support for building or
7 structure foundations, will be referred to as "structural fill." Backfill,
8 which is placed against the exterior side of the building walls or
9 structures, or as fill over pipelines, will be referred to as "common
10 fill."
11
12 2. Materials for compacted structural granular fill shall be gravel, sandy
13 gravel, or gravely sand free of organic material, loam, wood, trash,
14 and other objectionable material and shall be well -graded within the
15 following limits:
16
17 Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight
18
19 6 -in. 100
20 No. 4 20 - 95
21 No. 40 0 - 60
22 No. 200 0 - 8
23
•24 C. Common Fill
25
26 1. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material,
27 loam, wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be
28 compressible, or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill
29 shall not contain stones larger than 10 -in. in any dimension, broken
30 concrete, masonry, rubble or other such materials. It shall have
31 physical properties such that it can be readily spread and compacted
32 during filling.
33
34 2. Material falling within the above Specification, encountered during
35 the excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. All
36 material which, in the opinion of the Engineer is not suitable for
37 reuse, shall be spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable
38 materials.
39
40 D. Crushed Stone
41
42 1. Crushed stone shall be used for structure bases where indicated on
43 the drawings or directed by the Engineer. Crushed stone shall be
44 used for manhole bases, as a drainage layer below structures with
45 underdrains and at other locations indicated on the Drawings.
•
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02222-5 09/28/23
1
2 2. Crushed stone shall be size No. 57 with gradation as noted in Table
3 1 of Section 901 of Department of Transportation, Construction of
4 Roads and Bridges.
5
6 2.02 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
7
8 A. Unsuitable material will be designated as highly organic soil ASTM D 2487
9 Group PT, topsoil, roots, vegetable matter, trash and debris. All unsuitable
10 material shall be removed in it entirety as to provide adequate bearing
11 capacity for proposed structures, buildings, manholes, pipelines, etc.
12
13 PART 3 — EXECUTION
14
15 3.01 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND COMPACTION PROCEDURES - GENERAL
16
17 A. Excavation shall be made to such widths as will give suitable room for
18 construction of the structures, for bracing and supporting, pumping and
19 drainage; and the bottom of the excavations shall be rendered firm and dry
20 and in all respects acceptable to the Engineer.
21
22 B. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which
23 preserve the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soil which
24 becomes soft, loose, "quick," or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of
25 structures as a result of inadequate excavation, dewatering or other
26 construction methods shall be removed and replaced by structural fill as
27 required by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
28
29 C. Dewatering shall be such as to prevent boiling or detrimental under -
30 seepage at the base of the excavation as specified herein. The Contractor
31 shall install such means as required to preserve the stability of the base of
32 the operation.
33
34 D. Excavating equipment shall be satisfactory for carrying out the work in
35 accordance with the Specifications. In no case shall the earth be ploughed,
36 scraped, or dug with machinery so near to the finished subgrade as to result
37 in excavation of, or disturbance of material below grade, the last of the
38 excavated material being removed with pick and shovel just before placing
39 of concrete or working mat thereon.
40
41 E. During final excavation to subgrade level, take whatever precautions are
42 required to prevent disturbance and remolding of the subgrade. Material
43 which has become softened and mixed with water shall be removed. Hand
44 excavation of the final 3 to 6 -in. will be required as necessary to obtain a
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02222-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 satisfactory undisturbed bottom. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to
•
2 whether the work has been accomplished satisfactorily.
3
4 F. All structure areas shall be stripped, cleared and grubbed of all surface
5 vegetation and root laden topsoils.
6
7 G. After stripping, the structure areas should be leveled sufficiently to permit
8 equipment traffic and then proof -rolled. Careful observations should be
9 made during proof -rolling of the stripped subgrade area to identify any areas
10 of soft yielding soils that may require over excavation and replacement.
11
12 H. Compaction should continue until a minimum density of 95% of the
13 maximum modified Proctor dry density, as established in accordance with
14 ASTM D-1557, is achieved for a minimum depth of 2 feet below the
15 subgrade surface.
16
17 3.02 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
18
19 A. Following satisfactory proof -rolling of the stripped subgrade, the structure
20 areas may be brought up to finished subgrade level. Structural fill shall be
21 placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12 -inches and should be compacted to a
22 minimum of 95% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density, as
23 established in accordance with ASTM D-1557. Density tests should be
•24 performed in each fill lift to confirm compaction before the next lift is placed.
25
26 B. Common fill may be used as backfill against the exterior walls of the
27 structures, including manholes and storm structures, or in other areas as
28 designated by the Engineer. Common fill shall be placed in loose lifts not
29 exceeding 12 -inches and should be compacted to a minimum of 95% of the
30 maximum modified Proctor dry density, as established in accordance with
31 ASTM D-1557. Density tests should be performed in each fill lift to confirm
32 compaction before the next lift is placed. Common fill material in place shall
33 be compacted with such mechanical compaction equipment as approved
34 by the Engineer.
35
36 C. Materials placed in fill areas shall be deposited to the lines and grades
37 shown on the Drawings making due allowance for settlement of the material
38 and for the placing of topsoil thereon.
39
40 D. The surfaces of filled areas shall be grades to smooth true lines, strictly
41 conforming to grades indicated on the paving and grading Drawings, and
42 no soft spots or uncompacted areas will be allowed in the work.
43
44 E. No compacting shall be done when the material is too wet either from rain
45 or from excess application of water. At such times, work shall be suspended
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02222-7 09/28/23
1 until the previously placed and new materials have dried sufficiently to
2 permit proper compaction.
3
4 3.04 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE AND SURPLUS MATERIAL
5
6 A. Unsuitable excavated materials and pavement shall become the property
7 of the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the project site.
8
9 B. Suitable excavated material may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the
10 Specifications for common fill and is approved by the Engineer. Excavated
11 materials so approved may be neatly stockpiled at the site, where there is
12 an area available that will not interfere with the operation of the plant or
13 inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If space limitations do
14 not permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be required to make
15 arrangements for off-site stockpiling. Transport of such material from and
16 to the immediate site, including any stockpiling agreements, shall be entirely
17 at the Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds for additional
18 payment.
19
20 C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other
21 purposes as the Engineer may direct. Otherwise, it shall become the
22 property of the Contractor and shall be removed and disposed of by him off
23 the project site.
24
25
26 3.05 GRADING
27
28 A. Grading in preparation for placing of topsoil, planting areas, paved walks
29 and drives, and appurtenances shall be performed at all places that are
30 indicated on the Drawings, to the lines, grades, and elevations shown and
31 otherwise as directed by the Engineer. Such work shall be performed in a
32 manner that the requirements for formation of slopes, lines, and grades can
33 be followed. All material encountered, of whatever nature, within the limits
34 indicated, shall be removed, and disposed of as directed. During the
35 process of grading, the subgrade shall be maintained in such condition that
36 it will be well drained at all times. When directed, temporary drains and
37 drainage ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water which
38 may affect the progress or condition of the work.
39
40 B. If, at the time of grading, it is not possible to place any material in its proper
41 section of the permanent structure, it shall be stockpiled for later use. No
42 extra payment will be made for the stockpiling or double handling of
43 excavated material.
44
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02222-8 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 C. The right is reserved to make minor adjustments or revisions in lines or
•
2 grades, if found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on
3 the Drawings or in order to obtain satisfactory construction.
4
5 D. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 -in. in their greatest dimensions will
6 not be permitted in the top 6 -in. of the finished subgrade of all fills or
7 embankments.
8
9 E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be barred
10 loose or otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and
11 fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross section, and
12 alignment shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
13
14 F. No grading is to be done in areas where there are existing pipe lines that
15 may be uncovered or damaged until such lines have been located and it
16 has been determined if such lines must be maintained are relocated, or
17 where lines are to be abandoned, all required valves are closed and
18 remaining pipes are plugged.
19
20
21 END OF SECTION
22
•
•
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02222-9 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR STRUCTURES
02222-10 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 02485
•
2
3 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily return
10 all construction areas to their original conditions or better.
11
12 B. Work includes furnishing and placing seed, sod, fertilizer, gravel, concrete,
13 asphalt, planting, watering, and maintenance until acceptance by the
14 Owner.
15
16 C. The restoration of grassed areas under this project shall be by sodding.
17
18 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
19
20 A. The Contractor shall provide a satisfactory stand of grass as specified. If
21 necessary, the Contractor shall repeat any or all of the work, including
22 grading, fertilizing, watering, and seeding or sodding at no additional cost
23 to the Owner until a satisfactory stand is obtained.
• 24
25 B. A satisfactory stand of grass is defined herein as a full lawn cover over areas
26 to be seeded or sodded, with grass free of weeds, alive and growing,
27 leaving no bare spots larger than 3/4 sq. yd. within a radius of 10 ft.
28
29 1.03 SUBMITTALS
30
31 A. Provide technical data as required for shop drawings on all materials or
32 installation procedures required under this Section and in accordance with
33 the contract documents.
34
35 B. Submit representative topsoil samples for analysis by a private laboratory
36 to determine nutrient deficiencies and outline a proper fertilization program.
37
38 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
39
40 2.01 MATERIALS
41
42 A. Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, the elements of which are derived
43 from organic sources. Fertilizer shall be a standard product complying with
44 State and Federal fertilizer laws.
45
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-1 09/28/23
1 1. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on
2 laboratory tests on soils outlined in Paragraph 1.03B. For purpose
3 of bidding, assume 6% nitrogen, 6% phosphorus and 6% potash by
4 weight. At least 50% of the total nitrogen shall contain no less than
5 3% water -insoluble nitrogen.
6
7 2. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the
8 original unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and
9 name of manufacturer. Containers shall bear the manufacturer's
10 guaranteed statement of analysis, or a manufacturer's certificate of
11 compliance covering analysis shall be furnished to the Engineer.
12 Store fertilizer in a weatherproof place and in such a manner that it
13 will be kept dry and its effectiveness will not be impaired.
14
15 3. Superphosphate shall be composed of finely ground phosphate rock
16 as commonly used for agricultural purposes containing not less than
17 20% available phosphoric acid.
18
19 B. Grass seed shall be the same as existed prior to construction and shall be
20 99 percent minimum purity, 80 percent minimum germination and 1 percent
21 maximum weed seed, labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of
22 Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act in effect. Seed
23 which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or storage
24 shall not be acceptable.
25
26 C. All disturbed areas with the limits of construction shall receive vegetative
27 treatment after final grading in accordance with these plans or landscaping
28 plans. Disturbed areas not specifically designated with a vegetative cover
29 shall be vegetated as follows:
30
31 Side slopes constructed at 4:1 (H to V) shall be sodded with argentine Bahia
32 or seeded and then covered with an erosion control blanket. The blanket
33 shall be the S75BN blanket as manufactured by North America Green or
34 equal.
35
36 Side slopes less than 4:1 (H to V) shall be seeded and mulched.
37
38 D. Sodding
39
40 1. Sod shall be Argentine Bahia of firm texture having a compacted
41 growth and good root development.
42
43 2. Sod shall be certified to meet Florida State Plant Board
44 Specifications, absolutely true to varietal type, and free from weeds
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-2 09/28/23
•
•
1 or other objectionable vegetation, fungus, insects and disease of any
• 2 kind.
3
4 3. Before being cut and lifted the sod shall have been mowed 3 times
5 with the final mowing not more than a week before cutting into
6 uniform dimensions.
7
8 E. Mulch shall be fresh hay. Rate of application specified herein shall
9 correspond to depth not Tess than 1 inch or more than 3 inches according
10 to texture and moisture content of mulch material.
11
12 F It is the Contractor's responsibility to water the site, as required during
13 seeding and sodding operations and through the maintenance period and
14 until the work is accepted. The Contractor shall make whatever
15 arrangements may be necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to
16 meet the needs for his work. The Contractor shall also furnish all necessary
17 hose, equipment, attachments and accessories for the adequate irrigation
18 of lawns and planted areas as may be required.
19
20 G. Asphaltic concrete surface shall consist of either Type S-1 or Type S-3
21 asphaltic concrete meeting the specified criteria outlined by the Florida
22 Department of Transportation Specifications, and Placement & Compaction
23 Procedures.
•24
25 H. Base material shall consist of either limerock or shell material complying
26 with FDOT specifications and meeting a minimum LBR of 100.
27
28 PART 3 — EXECUTION
29
30 3.01 INSTALLATION
31
32 A. Following the subgrade preparation, the Contractor shall commence work
33 on lawns and grassed areas. Areas to be seeded or sodded shall be free
34 from soft spots and uneven grades. Apply 20 lbs. of 12-3-6 fertilizer per
35 1,000 sq. ft.
36
37 B. Seeded and sodded areas shall be protected from traffic or other use by
38 placing warning signs or erecting barricades as necessary. Any areas
39 damaged prior to actual acceptance by the Owner shall be repaired by the
40 Contractor as directed by the Engineer.
41
42 3.02 LAWN BED PREPARATION
43
44 A. Areas to be sodded shall be cleared of all rough grass, weeds, and debris
45 and the ground brought to an even grade.
•
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-3 09/28/23
1
2 B. The soil shall then be thoroughly tilled to a minimum 8 -inch depth.
3
4 C. Superphosphate at a rate for bidding purposes of 5 pounds per 1,000
5 square foot and complete fertilizer at a rate for bidding purposes of 16
6 pounds per 1000 square foot shall be evenly distributed over entire area
7 and cross -disked into a depth of 4-6 inches.
8
9 D. The areas shall then be brought to proper grade, free of sticks, stones, or
10 other foreign matter over 1 -inch in diameter of dimension. The surface shall
11 conform to finish grade, less the thickness of sod, free of water -retaining
12 depressions, the soil friable and of uniformly fill texture.
13
14 3.03 SOD HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
15
16 A. A one -foot wide strip of sod shall be provided around all structures, except
17 fencing, along the edges of slabs and along the edge of pavement.
18
19 B. During delivery, prior to planting, and during the planting of the lawn areas,
20 the sod panels at all times be protected from excessive drying and
21 unnecessary exposure of the roots to the sun. All sod shall be stacked
22 during construction and planting so as not to be damaged by sweating or
23 excessive heat and moisture.
24
25 C. After completion of soil conditioning as specified above, sod panels shall be
26 laid tightly together so as to make a solid sodded lawn area. On mounds
27 and other slopes, the long dimension of the sod shall be laid perpendicular
28 to the slope. Immediately following sod laying the lawn areas shall be rolled
29 with a lawn roller customarily used for such purposes, and then thoroughly
30 watered.
31
32 D. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and
33 shrub areas. Top dressing with clean, weed free, sand may be required at
34 no additional cost to the Owner if deemed necessary by the Engineer.
35
36 3.04 CLEANUP
37
38 A. Soil, mulch, seed, or similar materials spilled onto paved areas shall be
39 removed promptly, keeping those areas as clean as possible at all times.
40 Upon completion of seeding and sodding operations, all excess soil, stones,
41 and debris remaining shall be removed from the construction areas.
42
43 3.05 MAINTENANCE
44
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 A. Any existing landscape items damaged or altered during construction by the
• 2 Contractor shall be restored or replaced as directed by the Engineer.
3
4 B. Maintain landscape work until Owner accepts project. Watering, weeding,
5 cultivating, restoration of grade, mowing and trimming grass, protection
6 from insects and diseases, fertilizing and similar operations as needed to
7 ensure normal growth and good health for live plant material shall be the
8 responsibility of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner.
9 Sodded areas shall receive no less than 1.5 inches of water per week.
10
11 3.06 REPAIRS TO LAWN AREAS DISTURBED BY CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS
12
13 A. Lawn areas planted under this Contract and all lawn areas damaged by the
14 Contractor's operation shall be repaired by proper soil preparation,
15 fertilizing, and reseeding, in accordance with these Specifications.
16
17 END OF SECTION
18
•
•
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-5 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-6 09/28/23
•
•
•1 SECTION 03200
2
3 CONCRETE REINFORCING
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8
9 A. Section Includes:
10
11 1. Steel reinforcement bars.
12 2. Welded -wire reinforcement.
13
14 B. Related Requirements:
15
16 1. Section 034100 "Precast Structural Concrete" for reinforcing used in
17 precast structural concrete.
18
19 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
20
21 A. Product Data: For the following:
22
23 1. Each type of steel reinforcement.
•24 2. Bar supports.
25 3. Mechanical splice couplers.
26
27 B. Shop Drawings: Comply with ACI SP -066:
28
29 1. Include placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.
30 2. Include bar sizes, lengths, materials, grades, bar schedules, stirrup
31 spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, location of splices, lengths
32 of lap splices, details of mechanical splice couplers, details of welding
33 splices, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete
34 reinforcement.
35 3. For structural thermal break insulated connection system, indicate general
36 configuration, insulation dimensions, tension bars, compression pads,
37 shear bars, and dimensions.
38
39 C. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to
40 build the structure.
41
42 1. The location of construction joints is subject to approval of Engineer.
43
44 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
45
•
CONCRETE REINFORCING
03200-1 09/28/23
1 A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to
2 authorities having jurisdiction, qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and
3 ASTM E329 for testing indicated.
4
5 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
6
7 A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent
8 bending and damage.
9
10 1. Store reinforcement to avoid contact with earth.
11
12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
13
14 2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
15
16 A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed.
17
18 B. Plain -Steel Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, plain,
19 fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
20
21 2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
22
23 A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
24 supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded -wire reinforcement in
25 place.
26
27 1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete in
28 accordance with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
29 compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
30
31 a. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar
32 supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel
33 wire, all -plastic bar supports, or CRSI Class 2 stainless steel bar
34 supports.
35
36 B. Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M, annealed steel, not less than 0.0508
37 inch in diameter.
38
39 1. Finish: Plain.
40
41 2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
42
43 A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard
44 Practice."
45
CONCRETE REINFORCING
03200-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
•2
3 3.1 PREPARATION
4
5 A. Protection of In -Place Conditions:
6
7 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder.
8 2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.
9
10 B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign
11 materials that reduce bond to concrete.
12
13 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT
14
15 A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing and supporting
16 reinforcement.
17
18 B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
19
20 1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum
21 concrete cover.
22 2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
23
Ai 24 C. Preserve clearance between bars of not less than 1 inch, not less than one bar
Mr 25 diameter, or not less than 1-1/3 times size of large aggregate, whichever is
26 greater.
27
28 D. Provide concrete coverage in accordance with ACI 318.
29
30 E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
31 surfaces.
32
33 F. Splices: Lap splices as indicated on Drawings.
34
35 1. Bars indicated to be continuous, and all vertical bars to be lapped not less
36 than 36 bar diameters at splices, or 24 inches, whichever is greater.
37 2. Stagger splices in accordance with ACI 318.
38
39 G. Install welded -wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths.
40
41 1. Support welded -wire reinforcement in accordance with CRS! "Manual of
42 Standard Practice."
43
44 a. For reinforcement less than W4.0 or D4.0, continuous support
45 spacing to not exceed 12 inches.
•46
CONCRETE REINFORCING
03200-3 09/28/23
1 2. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one wire spacing plus 2
2 inches for plain wire and 8 inches for deformed wire.
3 3. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either
4 direction.
5 4. Lace overlaps with wire.
6
7 3.3 JOINTS
8
9 A. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not
10 impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
11
12 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.
13 2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise
14 indicated.
15 3. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors
16 and slabs.
17
18 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
19
20 A. Comply with ACI 117.
21
22 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
23
24 A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
25 tests and inspections and to submit reports.
26
27 B. Inspections:
28
29 1. Steel -reinforcement placement.
30
31 END OF SECTION
CONCRETE REINFORCING
03200-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 SECTION 03300
2
3 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8
9 A. Section Includes:
10
11 1. Cast -in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design,
12 placement procedures, and finishes.
13
14 B. Related Requirements:
15
16 1. Section 032000 "Concrete Reinforcing" for steel reinforcing bars and
17 welded -wire reinforcement.
18 2. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs -on -ground.
19
20 1.2 DEFINITIONS
21
22 A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or
23 more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other
•24 25 pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.
26 B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious
27 materials.
28
29 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
30
31 A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
32
33 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and
34 examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require
35 representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in-place
36 concrete to attend, including the following:
37 a. Contractor's superintendent.
38 b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design
39 mixtures.
40 c. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer.
41 d. Concrete Subcontractor.
42 e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.
43 2. Review testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control,
44 concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot -weather concreting
45 procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation
46 joints, and joint -filler strips, vapor -retarder installation, anchor rod and
III
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-1 09/28/23
1 anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation,
2 concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.
3
4 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
5
6 A. Product Data: For each of the following.
7
8 1. Portland cement.
9 2. Fly ash.
10 3. Slag cement.
11 4. Blended hydraulic cement.
12 5. Silica fume.
13 6. Performance-based hydraulic cement
14 7. Aggregates.
15 8. Admixtures:
16 a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious
17 materials, supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment,
18 aggregates, temperature at time of concrete placement, relative
19 humidity at time of concrete placement, curing conditions, and use of
20 other admixtures.
21 9. Vapor retarders.
22 10. Curing materials.
23 11. Joint fillers.
24 12. Repair materials.
25
26 B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following:
27
28 1. Mixture identification.
29 2. Minimum 28 -day compressive strength.
30 3. Durability exposure class.
31 4. Maximum w/cm.
32 5. Slump limit.
33 6. Air content.
34 7. Nominal maximum aggregate size.
35 8. Synthetic micro -fiber content.
36 9. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at
37 Project site if permitted.
38 10. Include manufacturer's certification that permeability -reducing admixture is
39 compatible with mix design.
40 11. Include certification that dosage rate for permeability -reducing admixture
41 matches dosage rate used in performance compliance test.
42 12. Intended placement method.
43 13. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials,
44 Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant
45 adjustments.
46
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 C. Shop Drawings:
•
2
3 1. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required
4 to construct the structure.
5
6 a. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer.
7
8 D. Concrete Schedule: For each location of each Class of concrete indicated in
9 "Concrete Mixtures" Article, including the following:
10
11 1. Concrete Class designation.
12 2. Location within Project.
13 3. Exposure Class designation.
14 4. Formed Surface Finish designation and final finish.
15 5. Final finish for floors.
16 6. Curing process.
17 7. Floor treatment if any.
18
19 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
20
21 A. Qualification Data: For the following:
22
23 1. Installer: Include copies of applicable ACI certificates.
•24 2. Ready -mixed concrete manufacturer.
25 3. Testing agency: Include copies of applicable ACI certificates.
26
27 B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
28
29 1. Cementitious materials.
30 2. Admixtures.
31 3. Bonding agents.
32 4. Adhesives.
33 5. Vapor retarders.
34 6. Repair materials.
35
36 C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:
37
38 1. Portland cement.
39 2. Fly ash.
40 3. Slag cement.
41 4. Blended hydraulic cement.
42 5. Silica fume.
43 6. Performance-based hydraulic cement.
44 7. Aggregates.
45 8. Admixtures:
•46
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-3 09/28/23
1 a. Permeability -Reducing Admixture: Include independent test reports,
2 indicating compliance with specified requirements, including dosage
3 rate used in test.
4
5 D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements report, indicating
6 compliance with specified tolerances.
7
8 E. Research Reports:
9 1. For concrete admixtures in accordance with ICC's Acceptance Criteria
10 AC198.
11 2. For sheet vapor retarder/termite barrier, showing compliance with ICC
12 AC380.
13
14 F. Preconstruction Test Reports: For each mix design.
15
16 G. Field quality -control reports.
17
18 H. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
19
20 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
21
22 A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel
23 qualified as an ACI -certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor
24 who is a certified ACI Flatwork Concrete Finisher/Technician or an ACI
25 Concrete Flatwork Technician.
26
27 B. Post -Installed Concrete Anchors Installers: ACI -certified Adhesive Anchor
28 Installer.
29
30 C. Ready -Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in
31 manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with
32 ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
33
34 1. Manufacturer certified in accordance with NRMCA's "Certification of
35 Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."
36
37 D. Laboratory Testing Agency Qualifications: A testing agency qualified in
38 accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated and
39 employing an ACI -certified Concrete Quality Control Technical Manager.
40
41 1. Personnel performing laboratory tests to be an ACI -certified Concrete
42 Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician,
43 Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor to be an ACI -certified
44 Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.
45
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-4 09/28/23
•
1 E. Field Quality -Control Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent
• 2 agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified in accordance
3 with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated.
4
5 1. Personnel conducting field tests to be qualified as an ACI Concrete Field
6 Testing Technician, Grade 1, in accordance with ACI CPP 610.1 or an
7 equivalent certification program.
8
9 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
10
11 A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
12 preconstruction testing on each concrete mixture.
13
14 1. Include the following information in each test report:
15
16 a. Admixture dosage rates.
17 b. Slump.
18 c. Air content.
19 d. Seven-day compressive strength
20 e. 28 -day compressive strength.
21
22 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
23
41)24 A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301
25
26 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
27
28 A. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as follows.
29
30 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that
31 could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
32 2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40
33 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture
34 temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
35 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
36 4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F, other
37 than reinforcing steel.
38 5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze
39 agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved
40 in mixture designs.
41
42 B. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1 , and as follows:
43
44 1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95
45 deg F.
•
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-5 09/28/23
1 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing
2 concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft
3 spots, or dry areas.
4
5 1.10 WARRANTY
6
7 A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement sheet
8 vapor retarder/termite barrier material and accessories for sheet vapor retarder/
9 termite barrier and accessories that do not comply with requirements or that fail
10 to resist penetration by termites within specified warranty period.
11
12 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
13
14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
15
16 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
17
18 A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless modified by requirements in the
19 Contract Documents.
20
21 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
22
23 A. Source Limitations:
24
25 1. Obtain all concrete mixtures from a single ready -mixed concrete
26 manufacturer for entire Project.
27 2. Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
28 the same manufacturer's plant.
29 3. Obtain aggregate from single source.
30 4. Obtain each type of admixture from single source from single
31 manufacturer.
32
33 B. Cementitious Materials:
34
35 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or Type II.
36 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
37 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120.
38 4. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240 amorphous silica.
39
40 C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or
41 better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.
42
43 1. Alkali -Silica Reaction: Comply with one of the following:
44
45 a. Expansion Result of Aggregate: Not more than 0.04 percent at one -
46 year when tested in accordance with ASTM C1293.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 b. Expansion Results of Aggregate and Cementitious Materials in
•
2 Combination: Not more than 0.10 percent at an age of 16 days when
3 tested in accordance with ASTM C1567.
4 c. Alkali Content in Concrete: Not more than 4 lb./cu. yd. for moderately
5 reactive aggregate or 3 lb./cu. yd. for highly reactive aggregate,
6 when tested in accordance with ASTM C1293 and categorized in
7 accordance with ASTM C1778, based on alkali content being
8 calculated in accordance with ACI 301.
9 2. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
10 3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in
11 cement.
12
13 D. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.
14
15 E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
16 admixtures that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
17 permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures
18 containing calcium chloride.
19
20 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.
21 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B.
22 3. Water -Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D.
23 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.
• 24 5. High -Range, Water -Reducing and -Retarding Admixture:
25 ASTM C494/C494M, Type G.
26 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II.
27
28 F. Water and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C94/C94M, potable.
29
30 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
31
32 A. Sheet Vapor Retarder/Termite Barrier: ASTM E1745, Class A, except with
33 maximum water -vapor permeance of 0.03 perms; 15 mils, complying with
34 ICC AC380. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -
35 sensitive tape.
36
37 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
38 following:
39 a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400.
40 b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15.
41 c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120.
42 d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16.
43 e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil.
44 f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15.
45 g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green.
•46 h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-7 09/28/23
1 2. Low -Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 15 deg F; •
2 ASTM D146/D146M.
3 3. Puncture Resistance: 224 Ibf minimum; ASTM E154/E154M.
4 4. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent weight -gain maximum after 48-hour
5 immersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D570.
6 5. Hydrostatic -Head Resistance: 231 feet minimum; ASTM D5385.
7
8 B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
9 ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and 0 to 5
10 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
11
12 2.4 CURING MATERIALS
13
14 A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or
15 kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
16
17 B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap -polyethylene
18 sheet.
19 1. Color:
20
21 a. Ambient Temperature Below 50 deg F: Black.
22 b. Ambient Temperature between 50 deg F and 85 deg F: Any color.
23 c. Ambient Temperature Above 85 deg F: White. 111
24
25 C. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M.
26
27 D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming, Curing and Sealing Compound:
28 ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A.
29
30 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
31
32 A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt -saturated
33 cellulosic fiber or ASTM D1752, cork or self -expanding cork.
34
35 B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two -component epoxy resin, capable of
36 humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application
37 temperature and of grade and class to suit requirements, and as follows:
38
39 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed
40 concrete to hardened concrete.
41
42 2.6 REPAIR MATERIALS
43
44 A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product
45 that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at
46 edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
III
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-8 09/28/23
•1
2 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M portland cement or hydraulic or
3 blended hydraulic cement, as defined in ASTM C219.
4 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for
5 substrate, conditions, and application.
6 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand, as
7 recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
8 4. Compressive Strength: Not Tess than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested in
9 accordance with ASTM C109/C109M.
10
11 B. Repair Overlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product
12 that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a
13 scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.
14
15 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M portland cement or hydraulic or
16 blended hydraulic cement, as defined in ASTM C219.
17 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate,
18 conditions, and application.
19 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as
20 recommended by topping manufacturer.
21 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested in
22 accordance with ASTM C109/C109M.
23
•24 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
25
26 A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned
27 on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance
28 with ACI 301.
29
30 1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
31 mixture designs, based on laboratory trial mixtures.
32
33 B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials
34 other than portland cement in concrete as follows:
35
36 1. Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 25 percent by mass.
37 2. Slag Cement: 50 percent by mass.
38 3. Silica Fume: 10 percent by mass.
39 4. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 50
40 percent by mass, with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent by
41 mass and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent by mass.
42 5. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans and Silica Fume: 35 percent by mass
43 with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent by mass and silica
44 fume not exceeding 10 percent by mass.
45
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-9 09/28/23
1 C. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written
2 instructions.
3
4 1. Use water -reducing, high -range water -reducing or plasticizing admixture in
5 concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
6 2. Use water -reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high
7 temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
8 3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -
9 use industrial slabs and concrete with a w/cm below 0.50.
10
11 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES
12
13 A. Class A: Normal -weight concrete used for footings.
14
15 1. Exposure Class: ACI 318 FO, S1,W1, C1.
16 2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
17 3. Maximum w/cm: 0.45.
18 4. Slump Limit: 8 inches, plus or minus 1 inch for concrete with verified
19 slump of 3 inches, plus or minus 1 inch before adding high -range water -
20 reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture at Project site.
21 5. Air Content:
22 a. 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for concrete
23 containing 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
24 6. Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15
25 percent by weight of cement.
26
27 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
28
29 A. Project -Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete
30 in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate
31 drum -type batch machine mixer.
32
33 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
34 minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer,
35 before any part of batch is released.
36 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15
37 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.
38 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work,
39 indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type,
40 mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate
41 location of final deposit in structure.
42
43 PART 3 - EXECUTION
44
45 3.1 EXAMINATION
46
47 A. Verification of Conditions:
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-10 09/28/23
•
•1
2 1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms,
3 accessories, and reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and
4 that required inspections have been performed.
5 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
6
7 3.2 PREPARATION
8
9 A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and
10 inspections, acceptable to testing agency, including the following:
11
12 1. Daily access to the Work.
13 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
14 3. Secure space for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples,
15 including source of water and continuous electrical power at Project site
16 during site curing period for test samples.
17 4. Security and protection for test samples and for testing and inspection
18 equipment at Project site.
19
20 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
21
22 A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
23 adjoining Work that is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete.
.24
25 1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions
26 furnished with items to be embedded.
27 2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and
28 complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303.
29 3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through -wall
30 flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing
31 is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.
32
33 3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER
34
35 A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in
36 accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
37
38 1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of
39 concrete pour.
40 2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour.
41 3. Lap vapor retarder over footings and grade beams not less than 6 inches,
42 sealing vapor retarder to concrete.
43 4. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
44 5. Terminate vapor retarder at the top of floor slabs, grade beams, and pile
45caps, sealing entire perimeter to floor slabs, grade beams, foundation
4046 walls, or pile caps.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-11 09/28/23
1 6. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's
2 instructions.
3 7. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete.
4 a. Repair damaged areas by patching with vapor retarder material,
5 overlapping damages area by 6 inches on all sides, and sealing to
6 vapor retarder.
7
8 3.5 JOINTS
9
10 A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
11 concrete.
12
13 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
14
15 A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement,
16 embedded items, and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections
17 are completed.
18
19 1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for
20 damage and deficient installation, and repair defective areas.
21 2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete
22 placement and make necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work
23 progresses.
24
25 B. Notify Engineer and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to
26 commencement of concrete placement.
27
28 C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during
29 placement unless approved by Engineer in writing, but not to exceed the
30 amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket.
31
32 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing
33 admixtures to mixture.
34
35 D. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site,
36 subject to limitations of ACI 301, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the
37 concrete delivery ticket.
38
39 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing
40 admixtures to mixture.
41
42 E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such
43 thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened
44 enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
45
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-12 09/28/23
•
1 1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as
•2 indicated.
3 2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
4 3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork
5 design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
6 4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in
7 accordance with ACI 301.
8
9 a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms.
10 b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations
11 to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding
12 layer.
13 c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun
14 to lose plasticity.
15 d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
16 consolidate concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement
17 and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to
18 segregate.
19
20 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
21
22 A. As -Cast Surface Finishes:
23
•24 1. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF -1.0: As -cast concrete texture imparted by
25 form -facing material.
26
27 a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches wide or 1/2 inch deep.
28 b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch.
29 c. Tie holes do not require patching.
30 d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class D.
31 e. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
32
33 2. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF -2.0: As -cast concrete texture imparted by
34 form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with
35 a minimum of seams.
36
37 a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep.
38 b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch.
39 c. Patch tie holes.
40 d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class B.
41 e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.
42
43 3. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF -3.0:
44 a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep.
45 b. Remove projections larger than 1/8 inch.
• 46 c. Patch tie holes.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-13 09/28/23
1 d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class A.
2 e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.
3
4 3.8 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
5
6 A. Filling In:
7
8 1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other
9 trades is in place unless otherwise indicated.
10 2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place
11 construction.
12 3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
13 complete the Work.
14 B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while
15 concrete is still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish
16 with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
17
18 C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:
19
20 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment
21 provided.
22 2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated on
23 Drawings, and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction
24 beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless
25 otherwise indicated on Drawings, or unless required for seismic anchor
26 support.
27 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
28 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
29 otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full
30 perimeter of concrete base.
31 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend
32 through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate.
33 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices.
34
35 a. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
36 directions furnished with items to be embedded.
37 b. Cast anchor -bolt insert into bases.
38 c. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
39 supported equipment.
40
41 3.9 CONCRETE CURING
42
43 A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
44 hot temperatures.
45
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-14 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 1. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during
2 curing.
3 2. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1 for hot -weather protection during
4 curing.
5 3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h, calculated in
6 accordance with ACI 305.1, before and during finishing operations.
7
8 B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows:
9
10 1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
11 slabs, and other similar surfaces.
12 2. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms.
13 3. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for
14 remainder of curing period, as follows:
15
16 a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface
17 until final setting of concrete.
18 b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet.
19 c. Absorptive Cover: Pre -dampen absorptive material before
20 application; apply additional water to absorptive material to maintain
21 concrete surface continuously wet.
22 d. Water -Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete
23 surfaces with sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams.
•24 e. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in
25 continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with
26 manufacturer's written instructions.
27 1) Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after
28 initial application.
29 2) Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing
30 period.
31
32 3.10 TOLERANCES
33
34 A. Conform to ACI 117.
35
36 3.11 APPLICATION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
37
38 A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing
39 compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller in accordance with
40 manufacturer's written instructions.
41
42 3.12 JOINT FILLING
43
44 A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's written
45 instructions.
•46
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-15 09/28/23
1 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month.
2 2. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
3
4 B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints;
5 leave contact faces of joints clean and dry.
6
7 C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep
8 in formed joints.
9
10 D. Overfill joint, and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
11
12 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
13
14 A. Defective Concrete:
15
16 1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer.
17 2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to
18 Engineer's approval.
19
20 B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland
21 cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough
22 water for handling and placing.
23
24 C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture
25 irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and
26 other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot
27 be removed by cleaning.
28
29 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and
30 voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete.
31
32 a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch.
33 b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.
34 c. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with
35 bonding agent.
36 d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has
37 dried.
38 e. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in
39 place with bonding agent.
40
41 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland
42 cement and standard portland cement, so that, when dry, patching mortar
43 matches surrounding color.
44
45 a. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and
46 color match before proceeding with patching.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-16 09/28/23
•
1 b. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than
•
2 surrounding surface.
3
4 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's
5 durability and structural performance as determined by Engineer.
6
7 D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces:
8
9 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify
10 surface tolerances specified for each surface.
11
12 a. Correct low and high areas.
13 b. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness;
14 use a sloped template.
15
16 2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls,
17 popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01
18 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through
19 unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable
20 conditions.
21
22 3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
23
ii• 24 4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing
25 surface -finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with
26 patching mortar.
27
28 a. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
29
30 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with repair topping.
31
32 a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4
33 inch to match adjacent floor elevations.
34 b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accordance with
35 manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform,
36 plane, and level surface.
37
38 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or
39 less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.
40
41 a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel
42 reinforcement with at least a 3/4 -inch clearance all around.
43 b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
44 apply bonding agent.
45 c. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
•46 concrete, except without coarse aggregate.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-17 09/28/23
1 d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
2 e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
3
4 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with
5 patching mortar.
6
7 a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean
8 off dust, dirt, and loose particles.
9 b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.
10 c. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
11 d. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete.
12 e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
13
14 E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using
15 epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.
16
17 F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to
18 Engineer's approval.
19
20 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
21
22 A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing and inspecting
23 agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.
24
25 1. Testing agency to be responsible for providing curing container for
26 composite samples on Site and verifying that field -cured composite
27 samples are cured in accordance with ASTM C31/C31 M.
28 2. Testing agency to immediately report to Engineer, Contractor, Owner and
29 concrete manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract
30 Documents.
31 3. Testing agency to report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to
32 Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours
33 of inspections and tests.
34
35 a. Test reports to include reporting requirements of ASTM C31/C31M,
36 ASTM C39/C39M, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable
37 to each test and inspection:
38
39 1) Project name.
40 2) Name of testing agency.
41 3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory
42 technicians performing inspections and testing.
43 4) Name of concrete manufacturer.
44 5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing.
45 6) Date and time of concrete placement.
46 7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-18 09/28/23
•
1 8) Date and time sample was obtained.
•
2 9) Truck and batch ticket numbers.
3 10) Design compressive strength at 28 days.
4 11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials.
5 12) Field test results.
6 13) Information on storage and curing of samples before testing,
7 including curing method and maximum and minimum
8 temperatures during initial curing period.
9 14) Type of fracture and compressive break strengths at seven
10 days and 28 days.
11
12 B. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit three copies of batch delivery
13 ticket to testing agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures,
14 design strength, aggregate size, design air content, design slump at time of
15 batching, and amount of water that can be added at Project site.
16
17 C. Inspections:
18
19 1. Verification of use of required design mixture.
20 2. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
21 3. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
22 4. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from
23 walls.
•24 5. Batch Plant Inspections: On a random basis, as determined by Engineer.
25
26 D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in
27 accordance with ASTM C 172/C 172M to be performed in accordance with the
28 following requirements:
29
30 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of
31 each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but Tess than 25 cu. yd., plus
32 one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
33
34 a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive -
35 strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing to be conducted
36 from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if
37 fewer than five are used.
38
39 2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M:
40
41 a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
42 less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
43 b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to
44 change.
45
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-19 09/28/23
1 3. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M pressure method, for normal -weight
2 concrete.
3
4 a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for
5 each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
6
7 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M:
8
9 a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80
10 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
11
12 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31 /C31 M:
13
14 a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of three 6 -inch by 12 -inch or 4-
15 inch by 8 -inch cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
16
17 6. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M.
18
19 a. Test one set of two laboratory -cured specimens at seven days and
20 one set of two specimens at 28 days.
21
22 b. A compressive -strength test to be the average compressive strength
23 from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample
24 and tested at age indicated.
25
26 7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of
27 any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds
28 specified compressive strength, and no compressive -strength test value
29 falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi if
30 specified compressive strength is 5000 psi, or no compressive strength
31 test value is less than 10 percent of specified compressive strength if
32 specified compressive strength is greater than 5000 psi.
33 8. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other
34 nondestructive device may be permitted by Engineer but will not be used
35 as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
36 9. Additional Tests:
37
38 a. Testing and inspecting agency to make additional tests of concrete
39 when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive
40 strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by
41 Engineer.
42 b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine
43 adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
44 ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Engineer.
45
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-20 09/28/23
•
•1 1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength to be in accordance
2 with ACI 301, Section 1.6.6.3.
3
4 10. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be
5 performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with
6 specified requirements.
7 11. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate
8 do not comply with the Contract Documents.
9
10 3.15 PROTECTION
11
12 A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows:
13
14 1. Protect from petroleum stains.
15 2. Prohibit use of pipe -cutting machinery over concrete surfaces.
16 3. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces.
17 4. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces.
18
19
20 END OF SECTION
21
•
•
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-21 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-22 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 03350
•
2
3 MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Description:
10
11 This section covers all workmanship, materials safety and quality
12 requirements for concrete wet well resurfacing and lining work. Provide and
13 apply repair mortar, sealer and primer materials as specified and as
14 indicated on drawings.
15
16 B. A general description of the work to be performed is listed below:
17
18 • Power wash the interior surface of the wet well to remove grease and
19 contaminants.
20 • Sand blast the interior surface of the wet well to obtain the correct
21 surface profile and surface mechanical grip properties.
22 • Power rinse the interior surface of the wet well to remove sand blasting
23 debris, dust, and particles
• 24 • Repair Cracks as needed
25 • Sand Blast and Power Wash Surface
26 • Apply Lining System
27
28 C. Cracks and joints that require additional materials shall be injected with
29 hydrophilic polyurethane grout.
30
31 1.02 RELATED WORK:
32
33 Division 1 - General Requirements
34
35 1.03 REFERENCES:
36
37 A. This section contains references to the documents listed below. They are
38 a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between
39 the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the more
40 stringent of the requirements shall prevail.
41
42 B. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the
43 documents in effect at the time of receipt of Bids.
44
45 C. Referenced publications found within this specification shall be the latest
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-1 09/28/23
1 revision unless otherwise specified; and applicable parts of the referenced
2 publications shall become a part of this specification as if fully included.
3
4
5 Reference Title
6
7 ASTM (American Society of Testing and Materials)
8 ASTM C 920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
9 ASTM D 3960 Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)
10 Content of Paints and Related Coatings
11 ASTM D 4259 Practice for Abrading Concrete
12 ASTM E 337 Standard Practice Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a
13 Psychrometer
14
15 Federal Standard Colors
16 F 595 B Federal Standard Colors
17 Guideline No. 03732 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface
18 Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer
19 Overlays
20
21 ICRI (International Concrete Restoration Institute)
22 Guideline No. 03732 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface
23 Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer
24 Overlays
25
26 NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers)
27 Publication 6D-173 "A Manual for Painter Safety"
28 Publication 6G-164 "Surface Preparation Abrasives for Industrial Maintenance
29 Painting"
30 Publication TPC2 Coatings and Linings for Immersion Service:
31 Chapter 1 Safety
32 Chapter 2 Surface Preparation
33 Chapter 3 Curing
34 Chapter 4 Inspection
35 Publication 6F-163 "Surface Preparation of Steel or Concrete Tank Interiors."
36 RP0892-92 Standard Recommended Practice, Lining over Concrete in
37 Immersion Service
38 RP0288-88 Standard Recommended Practice, Inspection of Linings on
39 Steel and Concrete
40
41 SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council)
42 SSPC-SP 12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard
43 Materials by High and Ultrahigh Pressure Water Jetting Prior
44 to Recoating
45 SSPC-SP 13 Surface Preparation of Concrete
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-2 09/28/23
•
1 SSPC-PA-3 "A Guide to Safety in Paint Application"
•2 SSPC-Guide 12 Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Project
3
4 OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration)
5 1915.35 Standards – 29 CFR – Painting
6
7
8 ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
9 ANSI/ASC 29.4 Abrasive Blasting Operations — Ventilation and Safe Practice
10
11 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13 A. The manufacturer and/or applicator of the liner system shall be a company
14 that specializes in the design, manufacture, or installation of corrosion
15 protection systems for wet wells. The applicator shall be completely trained
16 in leak repair, surface preparation and corrosion materials application in wet
17 wells.
18
19 B. The applicator shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer for the
20 handling, mixing, application, and inspection of the liner system as
21 described herein.
22
23 C. To ensure total unit responsibility, all materials and installation thereof shall
• 24 be furnished and coordinated with/by one supplier/applicator.
25
26 D. Requirements:
27
28 1. Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, or diluted materials for
29 resurfacing. Do not use materials from previously opened
30 containers.
31 2. Use only products of the approved Manufacturer(s). Use products
32 of one manufacturer in any one resurfacing system with compatible
33 materials. Provide same material product for touch-up as for original
34 material.
35 3. If any requirements of this specification conflict with a referenced
36 standard, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
37 4. Make all locations and phases of the work available for access by
38 the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide ventilation and egress to
39 safely access the coating work areas for construction and inspection.
40 5. Conduct work so that the resurfacing system is installed as specified
41 herein. Inspect work continually to ensure that the resurfacing
42 system is installed as specified herein. The Contractor shall inspect
43 the work to determine conformance with the specifications and
44 referenced documents. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of
45 the progress and the quality of the work through daily reports as
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-3 09/28/23
1 specified below. Any nonconforming coating system work shall be
2 corrected as specified herein or as recommended by the
3 Manufacturer.
4 6. Summarize test data, work progress, areas covered, ambient
5 conditions, quality control inspection test findings, and other
6 information pertinent to the resurfacing system installation in daily
7 reports to be submitted to the Engineer.
8 7. The methods of construction shall be in accordance with all
9 requirements of this specification.
10 8. Employ only trades people who have at least five years of experience
11 performing resurfacing work of similar size and complexity as the
12 work specified in this Section. Submittals to verify these
13 qualifications are to be made within thirty (30) days of the Notice -to -
14 Proceed and are subject to approval by the Engineer.
15
16 1.05 SUBMITTALS
17
18 A. Submit the following prior to commencing with any phase of the work
19 covered by this Section:
20
21 1. Manufacturer's current printed recommendations and product data
22 sheets for all coating system products supplied under this section
23 including performance criteria, surface preparation and applications,
24 volatile organic compound (V.O.C.) data, and safety requirements.
25 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any materials brought on -
26 site including all resurfacing system materials, solvents, and
27 abrasive blast media.
28 3. Storage requirements including temperature, humidity, and
29 ventilation for resurfacing system materials.
30 4. Manufacturer's requirements, including application procedures for
31 resurfacing materials shall be in writing and shall be followed in
32 detail. All safety precautions recommended by the Manufacturer
33 shall be strictly adhered to at all times when work is in progress.
34 5. Color samples for all surfaces to be resurfaced that have been field -
35 matched to existing colors.
36 6. Submit applicators' certification that resurfacing materials comply
37 with Federal, State, and Local regulations for VOC (Volatile Organic
38 Compounds).
39 7. Submit daily reports that contain the following information: Substrate
40 conditions, ambient conditions, application procedures, work
41 completed and location thereof. Mark-up drawings that show
42 location of work.
43 8. Submit letter(s) with associated product data signed by Manufacturer
44 certifying that submitted products are suitable for application on the
45 surfaces to be resurfaced and for the service conditions.
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-4 09/28/23
•
•
1
i2 1.06 WARRANTIES
3
4 A. All patch or filler concrete used below the lining coating shall be warranted
5 for the same length of times as the lining coating.
6
7 B. The Contractor shall warrant the lining coating for a period of 10 years. A
8 coating failure will have occurred if the lining fails to prevent damage or
9 corrosion to the structure, bubbles out from wall or metal, or fails to adhere
10 to concrete or metal. Failure does not include mechanical or chemical
11 abuse. If coatings are deemed to have failed, the Contractor shall at his
12 expense completely repair the damaged area including an expanded area
13 of a minimum of 6 -inches in any direction.
14
15 1.07 DELIVERIES AND STORAGE
16
17 A. Materials shall be stored in accordance with Manufacturer's
18 recommendations in enclosed structures and shall be protected from
19 weather and adverse temperature conditions. Flammable materials shall
20 be stored in accordance with state and local codes. Materials exceeding
21 storage life recommended by the manufacturer shall be removed from the
22 site.
23
411 24 B. Store all materials only in area or areas designated by the Engineer solely
25 for this purpose. Confine mixing, thinning, clean-up and associated
26 operations, and storage of materials -related debris before authorized
27 disposal, to these areas. All materials are to be stored on pallets or similar
28 storage/handling skids off the ground in sheltered areas in which the
29 temperature is maintained between 70°F and 90°F.
30
31 C. Mix all resurfacing materials in a mixing area supplied by the Contractor.
32 This enclosed area must protect the mixing operation and materials from
33 direct sunlight, inclement weather, freezing, or other means of damage or
34 contamination. Protect all other concrete and metallic surfaces and finishes
35 from any spillage of material(s) within the mixing area.
36
37 D. Do not use floor drains, dikes, or storm drains for disposal of resurfacing
38 systems materials.
39
40 E. The Contractor shall take all precautions and implement all measures
41 necessary to avert potential hazards associated with the resurfacing system
42 materials as described on the pertinent Material Safety Data Sheets or
43 container labels.
44
45 F. Deliver all materials to the job site in their original, unopened containers.
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-5 09/28/23
1 Each container shall bear the Manufacturer's name and label.
2
3 1. Labels on all material containers must show the following
4 information:
5
6 a. Name or title of product.
7 b. Federal Specification Number if applicable.
8 c. Manufacturer's batch number and date of manufacture.
9 d. Manufacturer s name.
10 e. Generic type of material.
11 f. Application and mixing instructions.
12 g. Hazardous material identification label.
13 h. Shelf life date.
14 i. Storage requirements.
15
16 G. All containers shall be clearly marked indicating any personnel safety
17 hazards associated with the use of or exposure to the materials.
18
19 H. All materials shall be handled and stored to prevent damage or Toss of label.
20
21 I. The Contractor shall provide resurfacing material storage and mixing areas.
22
23 J. Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, prematurely opened, diluted
24 materials, or materials which have exceeded their shelf life.
25
26 1.08 COORDINATION OF WORK
27
28 A. Work Areas:
29
30 The work areas on the job site will be limited to the immediate area around
31 the influent pump station or as designated by the Owner. The Contractor's
32 personnel shall not be permitted in any area other than those expressly
33 designated by the Owner.
34
35 B. Coordination:
36
37 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and Owner regarding
38 availability of work areas, completion times, safety, access, and other
39 factors, which can impact plant operations.
40
41 1.09 SAFETY
42
43 A. The work is inside a confined space. The Contractor's work forces shall
44 comply with all applicable documentation and safety requirements related
45 to confined spaces and all safety requirements referenced in Section 1.03.
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-6 09/28/23
•
•1
2 B. The Contractor shall provide personnel with all safety equipment necessary
3 to protect them during any phase of the work. This shall include, but not be
4 limited to safety glasses, goggles, earplugs, hard hats, steel toed work
5 shoes, appropriate personal protective clothing, gloves, and plant approved
6 escape respirators (where required).
7
8 C. Keep any flammable materials such as cleaning solvents, thinners, or
9 resurfacing materials away from open flames, sparks, or temperatures
10 higher than 150°F. Drums containing flammable materials will be grounded.
11 No solvent in any quantity shall be allowed inside containment enclosures
12 or permitted confined spaces at any time during resurfacing work.
13
14 D. Power tools are to be in good working order to avoid open sparking. No
15 spark producing tools shall be utilized in restricted areas as indicated
16 herein.
17
18 E. The Contractor shall fireproof all work areas by maintaining a clean work
19 area and having Underwriter's Laboratories approved fire extinguishers on -
20 hand. The Contractor shall furnish these fire extinguishers.
21
22 F. Workers doing abrasive blasting operations shall wear a fresh air supplied
23 protective helmet and hood and personal protective clothing acceptable to
11) 24 industry standards and all government regulations.
25
26 G. Dispose of rags used for wiping up resurfacing materials, solvents, and
27 thinners by drenching them with water and placing in a metal container with
28 a tight -fitting metal cover. Complete this disposal process at the end of each
29 day. Final disposal of these materials is the Contractor's responsibility.
30
31 H. Matches, smoking, flames, or sparks resulting from any source including
32 welding, must be remote from the work area during coating work. Smoking
33 is permitted only in designated areas of the plant.
34
35 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
36
37 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
38
39 A. Materials specified are those that have been evaluated for the specific
40 service. Equivalent materials by other manufacturers may be submitted
41 upon written approval of the Engineer. As part of the proof of equality, the
42 Contractor shall submit certified test reports from a nationally known,
43 reputable, and independent testing laboratory conducting comparative tests
44 between the product specified and the requested substitution.
45
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-7 09/28/23
1 B. Requests for substitution shall include manufacturer's literature for each
2 product giving name, product number, generic type, descriptive information,
3 solids by volume, recommended dry film thickness and certified lab test
4 reports showing results to equal the performance criteria of the products
5 specified herein. In addition, a list of five projects shall be submitted in
6 which each product has been used and rendered satisfactory service.
7
8 C. All requests for product substitution shall be made at least 10 days prior to
9 the bid opening date.
10
11 D. Any material savings shall be passed to the Owner in the form of a contract
12 dollar reduction.
13
14 A. Approved manufacturers for this project include products of Sprayroq, Raven
15 Lining Systems and Warren Environmental.
16
17 2.02 REPAIR PRODUCTS
18
19 A. Prior to application of the corrosion control coating system, all surfaces shall
20 be cleaned and prepared according to the coating product manufacturer's
21 requirements, at a minimum, and all damage to concrete and/or metal surfaces
22 shall be repaired in accordance with Division 3 of these Specifications. No
23 exceptions to the repair of underlying concrete shall be made, regardless of the
24 coating system used.
25
26 B. Prior to coating of existing concrete, cracks and spalling in the concrete shall
27 be repaired to provide a uniform bonding surface, provide minimum coverage
28 over structural steel reinforcement elements, and eliminate voids under the
29 coating product. Repair products used shall be those recommended by lining
30 manufacturer based on field investigations of the existing tank conditions
31 described below.
32
33 C. Repair materials shall be used to; fill voids, bugholes, structurally reinforce
34 and/or rebuild surfaces, etc. as determined necessary by the engineer and
35 protective coating applicator. Repair materials must be compatible with the
36 specified coating and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
37 recommendations
38
39 D. The following products may be accepted and approved as compatible repair
40 basecoat materials for approved topcoating for use within the specifications:
41
42 1. 100% solids, solvent -free grout specifically formulated for approved lining
43 system compatibility. The grout manufacturer shall provide instructions for
44 trowel or spray application procedures.
45
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-8 09/28/23
•
•1 2. Factory blended, rapid setting, high early strength, non -shrink cementitious
2 or epoxy repair mortar that can be troweled or pneumatically spray applied
3 may be approved if specifically formulated to be compatible for approved
4 lining system. Such repair mortars should not be used unless the
5 manufacturer confirms its suitability for the use with the lining system.
6 Project specific submittals should be provided including application, cure
7 time and surface preparation procedures which permit optimum bond
8 strength with the approved coating.
9
10 3. In the case of excessive infiltration, a hydraulic cement or plug may be used
11 to stop the flow of the infiltration. The hydraulic cement shall be compatible
12 with the lining system.
13
14 2.03 COATING PRODUCTS
15
16 A. Coating product shall be applied to all interior surfaces to protect the host
17 substrate and repair materials from all forms of chemical or bacteriological
18 attack typically found in municipal sanitary sewer systems and to impart a
19 degree of structural enhancement.
20
21 B. Coating product physical properties shall be substantiated through submittal of
22 accredited third party testing results and shall be representative of the actual
23 field applied product and cure mechanism(s) to be employed in the field.
0 24
25 C. Coating products selected for application on this project shall be limited to:
26
27 1 Influent Pump Station:
28 a. Walls
29 b. Flow Channel
30 c. Floor
31 d. Under Slab
32
33 2. Bypass Manhole
34
35
36 2.04 WET WELL LINER SYSTEM
37
38 A. Lining System
39
40 Only materials and products suitable for installation in a severe hydrogen
41 sulfide environment without any deterioration to the liner may be used. The
42 liner is to be applied on the top of the repair mortar. Materials specified
43 herein are the only approved standard coating systems. The approved
44 products are as follows:
45
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-9 09/28/23
1 1. Sprayroq — Spraywall
2 2. Raven Lining Systems — Raven 405
3 3. Warren Environmental — 301-14
4
5 B. Liner Properties
6
7 1. Liner shall be applied on top of the Primer and have been developed for
8 concrete restoration, corrosion protection, and waterproofing.
9
10 2. Shall not contain VOC.
11
12 3. Liner Properties
13
14 a. Tensile Strength >7,450 psi
15 b. Tensile Elongation >6%
16 c. Flexural Modulus >15,000 psi
17 d. Compressive Strength >10,500 psi
18 e. Hardness (Shore D) 87
19 f. Adhesion with Concrete >200 psi or
20 Substrate Failure
21
22 4. Shall not be applied without first priming surface with approved primer.
23
24 5. Final thickness shall be at least 125 mils.
25
26
27 PART 3 - EXECUTION
28
29 3.01 GENERAL
30
31 A. Hoisting, Scaffolding, Staging, and Planking:
32
33 Provide, set-up, and maintain all required hoists, scaffolds, and staging and
34 planking, and perform all access related hoisting work required to complete
35 the work of this section as indicated and specified. Scaffolds shall have
36 solid backs and floors to prevent dropping materials from there to the floors
37 or ground below.
38
39 B. Environmental Requirements:
40
41 Comply with the Manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental
42 conditions under which resurfacing system materials can be applied. Do
43 not apply resurfacing system materials when dust is in work site. The
44 Contractor shall provide all temporary lighting during the work.
45
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-10 09/28/23
•
•
1 C. Protection:
•
2
3 Cover or otherwise protect finish work or other surfaces not being
4 resurfaced. Erect and maintain protective tarps, enclosures and/or
5 maskings to contain debris (such as dust or airborne particles resulting from
6 surface preparation) generated during any and all work activities. This
7 includes, but is not limited to the use of dust/debris collection apparatus as
8 required.
9
10 D. Initial Inspection Of Surfaces To Be Coated:
11
12 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to inspect and report unacceptable
13 concrete substrate surface conditions to the Engineer prior to the
14 commencement of surface preparation activities. Unacceptable surface
15 conditions are defined as the presence of cracked surfaces or concrete
16 deteriorated to a depth of greater than 1 -inch or otherwise unable to
17 withstand surface preparation as specified herein.
18
19 E. Thinners and Solvents:
20
21 The Contractor shall use only solvents and thinners as recommended by
22 the Manufacturer.
23
•24 3.02 ACCEPTABLE APPLICATORS
25
26 A. Repair mortar applicators shall be trained to properly apply the cementitious
27 mortar according to manufacturer's recommendations.
28
29 B. Protective coating must be applied by a Certified Applicator of the protective
30 coating manufacturer and according to manufacturer specifications.
31
32 3.03 EXAMINATION
33
34 A. All structures to be coated shall be inspected by the Applicator prior to
35 installation of the lining system.
36
37 B. Any active flows shall be dammed, plugged or diverted as required to ensure
38 that the liquid flow is maintained below the surfaces to be coated. Flows should
39 be totally plugged and/or diverted when coating the invert. All extraneous flows
40 into the manhole or vaults at or above the area coated shall be plugged and/or
41 diverted until the coating has set hard to the touch.
42
43 C. Installation of the protective coating shall not commence until the concrete
44 substrate and any repair materials has properly cured in accordance with the
45 manufacturer's requirements and these specifications.
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-11 09/28/23
1
2 D. Temperature of the surface to be coated should be maintained between 70 deg
3 F and 110 deg F during application. Prior to and during application, care should
4 be taken to avoid exposure of direct sunlight or other intense heat source to the
5 structure being coated.
6
7 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION
8
9 A. All contaminants including: oils, grease, incompatible existing coatings, waxes,
10 form release, curing compounds, efflorescence, sealers, salts, or other
11 contaminants shall be removed.
12
13 B. Surfaces to receive protective coating shall be cleaned and abraded to produce
14 a sound surface with profile to meet as a minimum ICRI CSP3 — CSP6 profile
15 and porosity to provide a strong bond between the lining system and the
16 substrate. Generally, this can be achieved with a high pressure water cleaning
17 using equipment capable of a minimum 4,500 psi at 4.5 gpm with a turbo head
18 jet nozzle. Other methods such as high pressure water jetting (refer to SSPC-
19 SP 13/NAGE No.6), abrasive blasting, shotblasting, grinding, scarifying or acid
20 etching may also be used. Detergent water cleaning and hot water blasting
21 may be necessary to remove oils, grease or other hydrocarbon residues from
22 the concrete. Whichever method(s) are used, they shall be performed in a
23 manner that provides a uniform, sound clean neutralized surface that is not
24 excessively damaged.
25
26 C. Infiltration shall be stopped by using a material which is compatible with the
27 specified repair mortar and is suitable for topcoating with the specified lining
28 system.
29
30 D. The area between any areas that might exhibit movement or cracking due to
31 expansion and contraction, shall be grouted with a flexible grout or gel.
32
33
34 E. Abrasive Blast Cleaning
35
36 1. Sand blasting media shall be washed, graded and free of
37 contaminants that might interfere with the adhesion of the
38 resurfacing materials. Used or spent blast abrasive shall not be
39 reused on work covered by this section.
40 2. The compressed air used for blast cleaning will be filtered free of
41 condensed water or oil. Moisture traps will be cleaned at least once
42 every four hours or more frequently as is appropriate.
43 3. Oil separators shall be installed just downstream of compressor
44 discharge valves and at the discharge of the blast pot discharges.
45 Oil separators shall be cleaned at least once every four hours or
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-12 09/28/23
•
1 more frequently as is appropriate.
•
2 4. A paper blotter test shall be performed by the Contractor when
3 requested by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative to
4 determine if the air is sufficiently free of oil and moisture.
5 5. Regulators, gauges, filters, and separators will be in good working
6 order for all of the compressor air lines to blasting nozzles at all times
7 during this work.
8 6. An air dryer or drying unit shall be installed which dries the
9 compressed air prior to blast connections. This dryer shall be used
10 and maintained for the duration of surface preparation work.
11 7. The quality, volume, and velocity of life support and ventilation air
12 used during surface preparation shall be in accordance with
13 applicable safety standards and as required to ensure adequate
14 visibility and proper dissipation of volatiles without impacting the
15 prepared surface or the health of the public or personnel working for
16 the Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's
17 Representatives, or anyone who may be affected by on-site
18 maintenance coating work activities.
19 8. The abrasive blast nozzles used shall be the venturi or other high
20 velocity type supplied with a minimum of 100-psig air pressure and
21 the necessary volume to obtain the required blast cleaning
22 production rates and specified degree of cleanliness.
23 9. The Contractor must provide adequate ventilation for airborne
•24 particulate evacuation and lighting (meeting all pertinent safety
25 standards) to optimize visibility for both blast cleaning and
26 observation of the substrate during surface preparation work.
27
28 F. After abrasive blasting, the interior surface shall be power rinsed with
29 potable water to remove all loose materials and other contaminants.
30
31 3.05 APPLICATION OF REPAIR MATERIALS
32
33 A. Areas where structural steel has been exposed or removed shall be repaired
34 in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
35
36 B. Repair materials shall meet the specifications herein. The materials shall be
37 trowel or spray applied utilizing proper equipment on to specified surfaces. The
38 material thickness shall be specified by the manufacturer's recommendations.
39
40 C. If using approved cementitious repair materials, such shall be troweled to
41 provide a smooth surface with an average profile equivalent to coarse 60 grit
42 sandpaper or a minimum ICRI CSP3-CSP6 profile to optimally receive the
43 protective coating. No bugholes or honeycomb surfaces should remain after
44 the final trowel procedure of the repair mortar.
45
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-13 09/28/23
1 D. The repair materials shall be permitted to cure according to manufacturer
2 recommendations. Curing compounds should not be used unless approved for
3 compatibility with the specified lining system.
4
5 E. After high pressure water blasting and leak repair is performed, all surfaces
6 shall be inspected for remaining laitance prior to protective coating application.
7 Any evidence of remaining contamination or laitance shall be removed by
8 additional abrasive blast, shotblast or other approved method. If repair
9 materials are used, refer to these specifications for surface preparation. Areas
10 to be coated must also be prepared in accordance with these specifications
11 after receiving a cementitious repair mortar and prior to application of the
12 approved lining system.
13
14 F. All surfaces should be inspected during and after preparation and before the
15 protective coating is applied.
16
17 3.06 APPLICATION LINING SYSTEM
18
19 A. Application procedures shall conform to recommendations of the
20 manufacturer, including materials handling, mixing, environmental controls
21 during application, safety and spray equipment.
22
23 B. Spray equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply
24 the liner system.
25
26 C. Application of lining system shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's
27 recommendation. Finished thickness of the lining system shall be a
28 minimum of 125 mils thick. A permanent identification and date of work
29 performed shall be affixed to the structure in a readily visible location.
30
31 1. AH specified surface preparation shall be performed in accordance
32 with the latest version of the SSPC, NACE, ICRI and other standards
33 referenced in this section.
34
35 2. The newly applied mortar and the existing concrete surfaces shall be
36 abraded to produce a minimum surface profile of equal to 40 -grit
37 sandpaper with no loose concrete remaining by abrasive blast
38 cleaning. This preparation will be followed by vacuum cleaning to
39 remove all dust, dirt or friable substances leaving clean, dust free
40 surfaces for resurfacing.
41
42 3. Verify that the pH of the concrete surfaces to be coated is within the
43 range of 9 to 11. Application of coating materials outside this range
44 will not be permitted without written approval from the Engineer and
45 Manufacturer.
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-14 09/28/23
•
•1
2 D. All phases of surface preparation work specified herein must be inspected
3 by the Engineer before the Contractor proceeds with the subsequent phase
4 of surface preparation.
5
6 E. Observe limitation times and related temperature range restrictions
7 between successive lifts for all products specified herein per Manufacturer's
8 stated requirements.
9
10 F. Coatings must be inspected after application for pinholes.
11
12 G. All equipment and procedures used for the resurfacing system application
13 shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer. Unless specified elsewhere
14 herein, the Contractor shall comply with the Manufacturer's most recent
15 written instructions with respect to the following:
16
17 a. Mixing of All Materials
18 b. Protection and Handling of All Materials
19 c. Recoat Limitation and Cure Times
20 d. Minimum Ambient and Substrate Temperatures
21 e. Substrate's Degree of Dryness
22 f. Relative Humidity and Dew Point of Air
23 g. Application.
1110 24 h. Final Curing.
25 i. Use of Proper Application Equipment.
26
27 H. Curing of Resurfacing System:
28
29 The applied lining system shall be protected from damage during curing and
30 shall be cured as recommended by the Manufacturer. Ambient conditions
31 shall be controlled by the Contractor during curing to ensure the minimum
32 air temperature and minimum relative humidity as required by the
33 Manufacturer are maintained.
34
35 I. Safety And Ventilation Requirements:
36
37 Requirements for safety and ventilation shall be in accordance with SSPC
38 Paint Application Guide No. 3.
39
40 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION AND TESTING
41
42 A. Inspection by the Engineer or others does not limit the Contractor's
43 responsibilities for quality control inspection and testing as specified herein
44 or as required by the Manufacturer's instructions.
45
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-15 09/28/23
1 B. Perform the quality control procedures listed below in conjunction with the
2 requirements of this Section.
3
4 1. Inspect all materials upon receipt to ensure that all are supplied by
5 the Manufacturer.
6
7 2. Provide specified storage conditions for the resurfacing system
8 materials, solvents, and abrasives.
9
10 3. The pH of the concrete substrate will be measured using pH -
11 indicating papers. pH testing is to be performed once every 50 sq.
12 ft. Acceptable pH values shall be between 9.0 and 11.0 as measured
13 by a full range (1-12) color indicating pH paper with readable color
14 calibrations and a scale at whole numbers (minimum). Use Hydrion
15 Insta-Check Jumbo 0-13 or 1-12 or equal. The paper shall be
16 touched to the surface once using moderate gloved finger pressure.
17 The surface shall not be wiped or moved laterally to disturb the
18 surface during pH testing. Following the one touch, lift the paper
19 vertically to not "wipe" the surface. Compare the color indicated with
20 the scale provided and record the pH.
21
22 4. Inspect and record substrate profile (anchor pattern). Surfaces shall
23 be abraded, as a minimum, equal to the roughness of 60 grit sand
24 paper.
25
26 5. Measure and record ambient air temperature once every two hours
27 of each shift using a thermometer and measure and record substrate
28 temperature once every two hours using a surface thermometer.
29
30 6. Measure and record relative humidity every two hours of each shift
31 using a sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337.
32
33 C. Provide correct mixing of resurfacing materials in accordance with the
34 Manufacturer's instructions.
35
36 D. Inspect and record that the "pot life" of resurfacing materials are not
37 exceeded during installation.
38
39 E. Verify curing of the resurfacing materials in accordance with the
40 Manufacturer's instructions.
41
42 F. High Voltage Spark Test: After the lining coating has set hard to the touch
43 it shall be inspected with high-voltage holiday detection equipment. Surface
44 shall first be dried, an induced holiday shall then be made on to the coated
45 concrete or metal surface and shall serve to determine the
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-16 09/28/23
•
•1 minimum/maximum voltage to be used to test the coating for holidays at
2 that particular area. The spark tester shall be initially set at 100 volts per 1
3 mil (25 microns) of film thickness applied but may be adjusted as necessary
4 to detect the induced holiday (refer to NACE RPO188-99 or D4787
5 Continuity Testing of Liquid or Sheet Liners On Concrete -Holidays). All
6 detected holidays shall be marked and repaired by abrading the coating
7 surface with grit disk paper or other hand tooling method. After abrading
8 and cleaning, additional protective coating material can be hand applied to
9 the repair area. All touch-up/repair procedures shall follow the protective
10 coating manufacturer's recommendations.
11
12 G. Upon completion of the lining system installation, the lined area shall be
13 cleaned and prepared to permit close visual inspection by the Engineer or
14 the Engineer's Representative. Any and all deficiencies or defective work
15 (not in compliance with this section or related sections) will be marked for
16 repair or removal/replacement by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
17 Owner.
18
19 3.08 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
20
21 A. Acceptance Criteria for Surface Preparation Work: All surfaces shall be
22 prepared in accordance with the specification and referenced standards
23 herein.
• 24
25 B. Acceptance Criteria for Coating System Application Work: Acceptable
26 coating work will be based upon the following:
27 1. No pockmarks, trowel marks, depressions, unconsolidated areas,
28 waviness or ridges, pinholes or holidays in either size or frequency.
29 2. No inter -coat bond failures between lifts.
30 3. Proper curing of coatings.
31
32 C. Resurfaced areas shall pitch to drains. There shall be no areas that puddle
33 when flood tested.
34
35 D. The Engineer or Owner shall, at their discretion, inspect the following:
36
37 1. Profile and degree of cleanliness of substrate.
38 2. Thickness of materials/coverage rate confirmation.
39 3. Ambient temperature and humidity requirements, and substrate
40 temperature.
41 4. Curing and recoat times.
42 5. Proper curing of the resurfacing materials.
43
44 E. Rework required on any holidays or any other inadequacies found by the
45 Engineer or the Engineer's representative in the quality of the coating work
•
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-17 09/28/23
1 should be marked. Such areas shall be recleaned and reworked by the
2 Contractor according to these specifications and the manufacturer's
3 recommendations at no additional cost to the Owner.
4
5 F. The Contractor is responsible for keeping the Engineer informed of all
6 progress so that inspection for quality can be achieved.
7
8 G. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the quality performance of the
9 applied materials and workmanship. Inspections by the Engineer or the
10 Engineer's Representative do not limit this responsibility.
11
12 3.09 FINAL INSPECTION
13
14 A. Perform a final inspection to determine whether the lining system work
15 meets the requirements of the specifications. The Engineer and the Owner
16 will conduct final inspection with the Contractor.
17
18
19 END OF SECTION
20
MULTI -LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM
03350-18 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 SECTION 03480
2
3 PRECAST CONCRETE
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Scope of Work: This section includes providing all materials, labor and
10 equipment to construct and install the precast concrete sump as described
11 herein and/or shown on the Drawings.
12
13 1.02 SUBMITTALS
14
15 A. Materials and Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's catalog data on
16 precast concrete structures and accessories. Show all dimensions and
17 materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade.
18
19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
20
21 2.01 MATERIALS
22
23 A. Precast Sump
• 24
25 1. All precast structures shall be new, unused and manufactured for this
26 project.
27
28 2. Precast concrete structures shall be manufactured in a plant
29 especially designed for that purpose and shall conform to the shapes
30 and dimensions indicated on the drawings.
31
32 3. All precast structures shall be designed by a Professional Engineer
33 retained by the Contractor.
34
35 4. Design loads shall consist of dead load, live load, impact, and loads
36 due to water table, as well as other loads which may be imposed
37 upon the structure.
38
39 5. Forms used for precast concrete shall be of metal and sufficiently
40 designed and braced to maintain their alignment under pressures of
41 the concrete during placing.
42
43 B. Concrete
44
45 1. Aggregates: All aggregates, fine and coarse, other than lightweight
III
PRECAST CONCRETE
03480-1 09/28/23
1 aggregates, fine and coarse, shall conform to ASTM C-330.
2 Aggregates shall be free of deleterious substances causing reactivity
3 with oxidized hydrogen sulfide. Both types of aggregate shall be
4 graded in a manner so as to produce a homogenous concrete mix.
5 All materials are to be accurately weighed at a central batching
6 facility for mixing.
7
8 2. Precast Structures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
9 Specification C478. Concrete used in their manufacture shall have
10 a 28 -day compressive strength of not less than 4,000 pounds per
11 square inch and the absorption shall not exceed six (6) percent.
12
13 3. Placing: All concrete shall be handled from the mixer or transport
14 vehicle to the place of final deposit in a continuous manner, as rapidly
15 as practicable, and without segregation or Toss of ingredients, until
16 the approved unit is completed. Concrete shall be placed in layers
17 not over 2 feet deep. Each layer shall be compacted by mechanical
18 internal or external vibrating equipment. Duration of the vibration
19 cycle shall be limited to the time necessary to produce satisfactory
20 consolidation without causing objectionable segregation.
21
22 4. Curing:
23
24 a. For purposes of early reuse of forms, precast concrete may
25 be steam cured after an initial set has taken place. The steam
26 temperature shall not exceed 160 degrees Fahrenheit (°F),
27 and the temperature shall be raised from normal ambient
28 temperatures at a rate not to exceed 40°F per hour.
29
30 b. The steam cured unit shall not be removed from the forms
31 until sufficient strength is obtained for the unit to withstand any
32 structural strain to which it may be subjected during the form
33 stripping operation. After the stripping of forms, further curing
34 by means of water spraying or a membrane curing compound
35 may be used, and shall be of a clear or white type, conforming
36 to ASTM C-309.
37
38 5. Reinforcing steel shall be sufficiently tied to withstand any
39 displacement during the pouring operation. All bars shall be
40 intermediate or hard grade billet steel conforming to ASTM A-615.
41
42 C. Sealing Compound and Grout: Plastic sealing compound shall comply with
43 Federal Specifications SS -S-02210. Mortar shall comply with ASTM C-387,
44 Type S, or use grout complying with Section 03600: Grout.
45
PRECAST CONCRETE
03480-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 PART 3 — EXECUTION
•
2
3 3.01 INSPECTION
4
5 A. Earthwork: The Contractor shall prepare an excavation Targe enough to
6 accommodate the structure and permit sealing of openings.
7
8 B. Excavation and backfill shall be as specified in Section 02222.
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
12
•
•
PRECAST CONCRETE
03480-3 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
PRECAST CONCRETE
03480-4 09/28/23
•
•
1 SECTION 03600
•
2
3 GROUT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install grout
10 complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
11
12 1.02 SUBMITTALS
13
14 A. Submit to the Engineer shop drawings and product data showing materials of
15 construction and details of installation for:
16
17 1. Commercially manufactured non -shrink cementitious grout. The
18 submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage
19 requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature
20 considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards and Material
21 Safety Data Sheet.
22
23 2. Commercially manufactured non -shrink epoxy grout. The submittal shall
• 24 include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life,
25 working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to
26 required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet.
27
28 3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the
29 cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any
30 proposed admixtures and the proposed mix of the grout.
31
32 4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include the mix design, constituent
33 quantities per cubic yard, the water/cement ratio, and fiber reinforcement.
34
35 B. Laboratory Test Reports
36
37 1. Submit laboratory test data as requested by the Engineer.
38
39 C. Certifications
40
41 1. Where applicable, certify that commercially manufactured grout products
42 and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable
43 water after 30 days curing.
44
45 D. Qualifications
• 46
47 1. Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least
GROUT
03600-1
09/28/23
1 10 years of experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts
2 to be supplied.
3
4 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
5
6 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
7
8 1. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient
9 of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and
10 Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes
11
12 2. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
13 Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and
14 Polymer Concretes
15
16 3. ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages
17 of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures
18
19 4. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,
20 Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Non -shrink)
21
22 B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD)
23
24 1. CRD C-621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Non -shrink Grout
25
26 C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect
27 at the time of bid opening shall apply.
28
29 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
30
31 A. Qualifications
32
33 1. Grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years of experience in
34 the production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work.
35
36 B. Pre -installation Conference
37
38 1. Where specifically required, and well in advance of grouting, conduct a
39 pre -installation meeting to review the requirements for surface
40 preparation, mixing, placing, and curing procedures for each product
41 proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of the
42 meeting at least 10 days prior to its scheduled date.
43
44 C. Services of Manufacturer's Representative
45
46 1. A qualified field technician of the non -shrink grout manufacturer,
47 specifically trained in the installation of the products, shall attend the
GROUT
03600-2
09/28/23
•
•1 pre -installation conference and shall be present for the initial installation
2 of each type of non -shrink grout. Additional services shall also be
3 provided, as required, to correct installation problems.
4
5 D. Field Testing
6
7 1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by the
8 Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and shall
9 provide any ladders, platforms, etc., for access to the work. The methods
10 of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM Standards.
11
12 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
13
14 A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled
15 with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and printed
16 instructions.
17
18 B. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
19 Total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation shall be
20 limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time,
21 whichever is less.
22
23 C. Material that becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately
• 24 removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional
25 cost to the Owner.
26
27 D. Non -shrink, cement -based grouts shall be delivered as pre -blended,
28 prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water.
29
30 E. Non -shrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as pre -measured, prepackaged,
31 three component systems requiring only blending as directed by the
32 manufacturer.
33
34 1.06 DEFINITIONS
35
36 A. Non -shrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink
37 in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened
38 state and bonds to a clean base plate.
39
40 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
41
42 2.01 GENERAL
43
44 A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the
45 purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired.
•46
47 B. Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to
GROUT
03600-3
09/28/23
1 provide standardization of appearance. •
2
3
4 2.02 MATERIALS
5
6 A. Non -shrink Cementitious Grout
7
8 1. Non -shrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements of
9 ASTM C1107, Grades B or C and CRD C-621. Grouts shall be Portland
10 cement based, contain a pre -proportioned blend of selected aggregates
11 and shrinkage compensating agents and shall require only the addition
12 of water. Non -shrink cementitious grouts shall not contain expansive
13 cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no shrinkage when
14 tested in conformity with ASTM C827.
15
16 2. General purpose non -shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the
17 standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set
18 Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill &
19 Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. Grout
20 Corp. or equal.
21
22 3. Flowable (Precision) non -shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the
23 standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master Builders,
24 Inc.; Hi -Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 by Sika •
25 Corp.; Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by U. S.
26 Grout Corp. or equal.
27
28 B. Non -shrink Epoxy Grout
29
30 1. Non -shrink epoxy -based grout shall be a pre -proportioned, three
31 component, 100 percent solids system consisting of epoxy resin,
32 hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength
33 of 14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and
34 have a maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 10-6 when tested in
35 conformity with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by
36 Master Builders Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; Sikadur
37 42 Grout -Pak by Sika Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the Euclid
38 Chemical Co. or equal.
39
40 C. Cement Grout
41
42 1. Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one -part portland cement conforming
43 to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand conforming to
44 ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The water content
45 shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not to the degree •
46 that it will allow the grout to flow.
47
GROUT
03600-4
09/28/23
1 D. Concrete Grout
•2
3 1. Concrete grout shall proportioned with cement, [pozzalan,] coarse and
4 fine aggregates, water, water reducer and air entraining agent to produce
5 a mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or 2500 psi
6 nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be [3/8] [1/2] -in maximum.
7 Slump should not exceed 5 -in and should be as low as practical yet still
8 retain sufficient workability.
9
10 2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers shall be added to the concrete grout mix at
11 the rate of 1.5 lbs of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Fibers shall be added
12 from the manufacturer's premeasured bags and according to the
13 manufacturer's recommendations in a manner that will ensure complete
14 dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the
15 concrete grout.
16
17 E. Water
18
19 1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic
20 matter, or other deleterious substances.
21
22 PART 3 — EXECUTION
23
•24 3.01 PREPARATION
25
26 A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design
27 strength unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
28
29 B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost,
30 dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance, and paints and free of all loose
31 material or foreign matter that may affect the bond or performance of the grout.
32
33 C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical
34 means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken
35 concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed
36 if they are sound, free of laitance and firmly embedded into the parent concrete.
37
38 1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be the
39 oil -less type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil from
40 being blown onto the surface.
41
42 D. Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances from metal
43 embedments or bottom of base plates prior to the installation of the grout.
44
45 E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24
• 46 hours prior to the placement of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may
47 be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a
GROUT
03600-5
09/28/23
1 soaker hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer.
2 Upon completion of the 24-hour period, visible water shall be removed from the
3 surface prior to grouting. The use of an adhesive bonding agent in lieu of
4 surface saturation shall only be used when directed by the Engineer for each
5 specific location of grout installation.
6
7 F. Epoxy -based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate.
8 Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting.
9
10 G. Construct grout forms or other leak -proof containment as required. Forms shall
11 be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout manufacturer.
12 Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in place and shored to
13 resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement.
14
15 1. Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a
16 hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms.
17
18 H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with
19 the structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment
20 manufacturer.
21
22 I. Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by
23 shims, wedges, blocks, or other means. The shims, wedges and blocking
24 devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate bond
25 breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise directed by the
26 Engineer.
27
28 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
29
30 A. Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
31 recommendations and this Section.
32
33 B. Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous
34 mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at
35 hand.
36
37 C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout
38 between 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours
39 thereafter or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer.
40 Take precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of base plates and
41 grout during the curing period.
42
43 D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as
44 recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or the
45 temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and
46 90 degrees F range.
47
GROUT
03600-6
09/28/23
•
1 E. Install grout in a manner that will preserve the isolation between the elements
• 2 on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion or
3 control joint.
4
5 F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints through
6 the grout.
7
8 3.03 INSTALLATION - CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS
9 GROUTS
10
11 A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement,
12 sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior review by the Engineer.
13
14 B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is
15 recommended. Pre -wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add premeasured
16 amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with the minimum
17 amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then add the minimum
18 additional water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed the
19 manufacturer's maximum recommended water content.
20
21 C. Placements greater than 3 -in in depth shall include the addition of clean,
22 washed pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer.
23 Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of
•24 aggregate to be added.
25
26 D Place grout into the designated areas in a manner that will avoid segregation,
27 air entrapment or both. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the
28 material. Placement should proceed in a manner that will ensure the filling of
29 all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces.
30 Provide grout holes as necessary.
31
32 E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement
33 grouts in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial
34 stiffening.
35
36 F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at
37 a 45 -degree angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise
38 directed by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish.
39
40 G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep grout
41 moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24
42 hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. Saturate
43 the grout surface by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding, or other
44 appropriate means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds inhibit
45 the ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until
•46 wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished.
47
GROUT
03600-7
09/28/23
1 3.04 INSTALLATION - NONSHRINK EPDXY GROUTS •
2
3 A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. Do
4 not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of
5 the grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper
6 proportions of resin, hardener, and aggregate.
7
8 B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for
9 special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above
10 90 degrees F.
11
12 C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping air.
13 Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full contact
14 between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as necessary.
15
16 D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate).
17 In no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout
18 thickness.
19
20 E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish.
21 Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the
22 manufacturer's recommendations.
23
24 F. Epoxy grouts that are self -curing shall not require the application of water. •
25 Maintain the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature
26 range for at least 24 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the
27 manufacturer.
28
29 3.05 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT
30
31 A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the
32 surface with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface
33 clean until placement of concrete grout.
34
35 B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all dirt
36 and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of water.
37 Flushing of debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted.
38
39 C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the
40 concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or soaker
41 hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove excess water
42 just prior to placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement slurry immediately
43 ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is placed.
44 Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is coated with
45 approximately 1/16 to 1/8 -in thick cement paste. A bonding grout composed of
46 1 part portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, a bonding admixture and water, •
47 mixed to achieve the consistency of thick paint, may be substituted for the
GROUT
03600-8
09/28/23
•1 cement slurry.
2
3 D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide for
4 surface elevation and to ensure high and low spots are eliminated. Unless
5 specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper
6 mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed.
7
8 E. Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings.
9
10 F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast -in-place concrete.
11
12 3.06 SCHEDULE
13
14 A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used:
15
16 1. General purpose non -shrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations
17 where non shrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates
18 greater in area than 3 -ft wide by 3 -ft long and except for the setting of
19 anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in concrete.
20
21 2. Flowable non -shrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates
22 greater in area than 3 -ft by 3 -ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive
23 flowable non -shrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his/her
• 24 option and convenience, may also substitute flowable non -shrink grout
25 for general purpose non -shrink cementitious grout.
26
27 3. Non -shrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts
28 and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically indicated
29 to receive epoxy grout.
30
31 4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental base
32 plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base plates for
33 platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used when
34 nonshrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for grouting
35 of primary structural steel members such as columns and girders.
36
37 5. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper
38 mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface
39 grade.
40
41 END OF SECTION
42
GROUT
03600-9
09/28/23
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
GROUT
03600-10
09/28/23
•
•1 SECTION 03740
2
3 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and cut,
10 remove, repair or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or
11 appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work under
12 this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing concrete.
13
14 1.02 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Submit to the Engineer a Schedule of Demolition and the detailed methods of
17 demolition to be used at each location.
18
19 B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for
20 use, to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's
21 installation and/or application instructions.
22
23 C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are
• 24 proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions to
25 the Engineer before delivery to the project.
26
27 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
28
29 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
30
31 1. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding
32 Systems for Concrete.
33
34 2. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin
35 Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer.
36
37 3. ASTM C883 - Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of
38 Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete.
39
40 4. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
41
42 5. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
43
44 6. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
45 Plastics.
• 46
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-1 09/28/23
1 7. ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by •
2 Punch Tool.
3
4 8. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
5 Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
6
7 B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect
8 at the time of bid opening shall apply.
9
10 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
11
12 A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise
13 altered until authorization is given by the Engineer.
14
15 B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making
16 openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary
17 barriers, shoring and bracing and other protective devices shall be erected to
18 prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work,
19 protect personnel, control dust and to prevent damage to the structures or
20 contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, shown or
21 specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete.
22
23 C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall
24 have a minimum of 10 years of experience in the manufacture of such products •
25 and shall have an ongoing program of training, certifying and technically
26 supporting the Contractor's personnel.
27
28 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
29
30 A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the
31 manufacturer's name, labels, product identification and batch numbers.
32
33 B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the
34 manufacturer.
35
36 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
37
38 2.01 MATERIALS
39
40 A. General
41
42 1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local
43 regulations.
44
45 B. Epoxy Bonding Agent •
46
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-2 09/28/23
1 1 General
•
2
3 a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two -component, solvent -free,
4 asbestos -free moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to
5 bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete complying with the
6 requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the additional
7 requirements specified herein.
8
9 2. Material
10
11 a. Properties of the cured material:
12
13 1) Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8500 psi minimum at
14 28 days.
15
16 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4000 psi minimum at 14
17 days.
18
19 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
20 6,300 psi minimum at 14 days.
21
22 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5000 psi minimum at 14
23 days.
•24
25 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): One percent
26 maximum at 14 days.
27
28 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1500
29 psi minimum at 14 days moist cure.
30
31 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test.
32
33 8) Color: Gray.
34
35 3. Manufacturers include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur 32,
36 Hi -Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH - Concresive Liquid (LPL) or
37 equal.
38
39 C. Epoxy Paste
40
41 1. General
42
43 a. Epoxy Paste shall be a two -component, solvent -free, asbestos
44 free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond
45 dissimilar materials to concrete such as setting railing posts,
•46 dowels, anchor bolts and all -threads into hardened concrete and
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-3 09/28/23
1 shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type I, Grade
2 3 and the additional requirements specified herein. It may also be •
3 used to patch existing surfaces where the glue line is 1/8 -in or
4 Tess.
5
6 2. Material
7
8 a. Properties of the cured material:
9
10 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi
11 minimum at 28 days.
12
13 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14
14 days. Elongation at Break - 0.3 percent minimum.
15
16 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
17 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days.
18
19 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14
20 days.
21
22 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0 percent maximum at
23 7 days. III
24
25 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist
26 cure.
27
28 7) Color: Concrete grey.
29
30 3. Manufacturers include:
31
32 a. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur
33 Hi -mod LV 31; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive
34 1438 or equal.
35
36 b. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J. - Sikadur Hi -mod LV 32; Master
37 Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438 or equal.
38
39 D. Non -Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non -Shrink Cement Grout, Non -Shrink
40 Epoxy Grout and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600
41 GROUT.
42
43 E. Adhesive Capsule type anchor system shall be equal to the HVA adhesive
44 Anchoring System by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall
45 consist of a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of a
46 polyester or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener contained •
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-4 09/28/23
1 in a separate vial within the capsule.
• 2
3 F. Acrylic Latex Bonding Agent
4
5 G. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive
6
7 1. General
8
9 a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two -component,
10 solvent -free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material suitable for
11 crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be formulated
12 for the specific size of opening or crack being injected.
13
14 b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be
15 treated for potable use that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive
16 injection system shall be coated with an acceptable epoxy coating
17 approved by the FDA for use in contact with potable water.
18
19 2. Material
20
21 a. Properties of the cured material
22
23 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi
•24 minimum at 28 days.
25
26 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14
27 days. Elongation at Break - 2 to 5 percent.
28
29 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
30 12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi
31 minimum at 14 days (injection)
32
33 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14
34 days.
35
36 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1.5 percent
37 maximum at 7 days.
38
39 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry;
40 2,000 psi at 14 days dry plus 12 days moist.
41
42 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM 883): Passes Test.
43
44 3. Manufacturers include:
45
•46 a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst,
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-5 09/28/23
1 NJ - Sikadur Hi -Mod; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, •
2 OH - Concressive 1380 or equal.
3
4 b. For very thin applications; Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst,
5 NJ - Sikadur Hi -Mod LV; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland,
6 OH - Concressive 1468 or equal.
7
8 PART 3 — EXECUTION
9
10 3.01 GENERAL
11
12 A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate, or otherwise modify parts of the existing
13 structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or
14 necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, reinforcements,
15 sealants, etc., are specified in respective Sections. All work shall comply with
16 other requirements of this of Section and as shown on the Drawings.
17
18 B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed, and
19 applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
20
21 C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint, or
22 control joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between
23 components on either side of the joint. •
24
25 D. When drilling holes for dowels/bolts in new or existing concrete, drilling shall
26 stop if rebar is encountered, and the hole location shall be relocated to avoid
27 rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior review by the Engineer. Where
28 possible, rebar locations shall be identified prior to drilling using "rebar locators"
29 so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to avoid rebar interference.
30
31 3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL
32
33 A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the Drawings
34 or directed by the Engineer, shall be done by saw cutting or line drilling at limits
35 followed by chipping or jack -hammering as appropriate in areas where concrete
36 is to be taken out. Remove concrete in such a manner that surrounding
37 concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in place
38 equipment is not damaged.
39
40 B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting/core drilling and no
41 new material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface
42 treatment of epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a thickness
43 of 1/4 -in.
44
45 C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing concrete
46 will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or specified, •
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-6 09/28/23
1 the edge of concrete removal shall be a 1 -in deep saw cut on each exposed
•
2 surface of the existing concrete.
3
4 D. Concrete specified to be left in place which is damaged shall be repaired.
5
6 E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additional
7 repairs to existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by
8 such other methods as may be appropriate.
9
10 3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION
11
12 A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas
13 requiring patching, repairs or modifications as shown on the Drawings, specified
14 herein, or as directed by the Engineer.
15
16 B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond inhibiting
17 materials from the surface by dry mechanical means. Ensure the areas are at
18 minimum 1/2 -in in depth. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed
19 if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete,
20 subject to the Engineer's final inspection.
21
22 C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all
23 contaminants and rust. If half of the diameter of the reinforcing steel is exposed,
• 24 chip out behind the steel. The distance chipped behind the steel shall be a
25 minimum of 1/2 -in. Reinforcing to be saved shall not be damaged during the
26 demolition operation.
27
28 D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be
29 incorporated in new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to remove
30 all loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the repair.
31 It shall be cut, bent, or lapped to new reinforcing as shown on the Drawings and
32 provided with 1 -in minimum cover all around.
33
34 E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used
35 where called for on the Drawings, specified herein or as directed by the
36 Engineer.
37
38 1. Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been
39 roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with
40 water. Brush on a 1/16 -in layer of cement and water mixed to the
41 consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement
42 paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings.
43
44 2. Method B: After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and
45 cleaned, apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field
• 46 preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-7 09/28/23
1 strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete
2 or grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints •
3 recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond.
4
5 3. Method C: Drill a hole 1/4 -in larger than the diameter of the dowel. The
6 hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to installing
7 epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with [epoxy paste], then
8 dowels/bolts shall be buttered with paste then inserted by tapping.
9 Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be drilled
10 and set to a depth of ten bar diameters and smooth bars shall be drilled
11 and set to a depth of fifteen bar diameters. If not noted on the Drawings,
12 the Engineer will provide details regarding the size and spacing of
13 dowels.
14
15 4. Method D: Combination of Method B and C.
16
17 5. Method E: Capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by
18 drilling holes to the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear
19 strengths of the anchor material being used. The anchor bolts system
20 shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized
21 as required. The anchor stud bolt, rebar or other embedment item shall
22 be tipped with a double 45 -degree chamfered point, securely fastened
23 into the chuck of all rotary percussion hammer drill and drilled into the
24 capsule filled hole. The anchor may be installed in horizontal, vertical •
25 and overhead positions.
26
27 3.04 GROUTING
28
29 A. Grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600.
30
31 3.05 CRACK REPAIR
32
33 A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack sealant
34 into cracks per manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less than 1/16 -in
35 in thickness they shall be pressure injected.
36
37 B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack sealant
38 through valves sealed to surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive per
39 manufacturer's recommendations.
40
41
42 END OF SECTION
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-8 09/28/23
1 SECTION 05500
•
2
3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install
10 miscellaneous metals as shown on the Construction Drawings and as
11 specified herein. The miscellaneous metal items include but are not limited
12 to the following:
13
14 1. All metal frames, ladders, stair rails, floor opening frames including
15 gratings and supports.
16
17 2. Prefabricated access hatches and frames.
18
19 3. Anchors and anchor bolts except those specified to be furnished with
20 all equipment.
21
22 4. Railings, posts and supports both interior, and exterior.
23
• 24 5. Cast iron frames, covers, grates, drain leaders, and drains.
25
26 6. Stair nosings, steel plates, overhead steel door frames, angle
27 frames, plates, and channels.
28
29 7. Guardrails
30
31 1.02 COORDINATION
32
33 A. The work in this section shall be completely coordinated with the work of
34 other Sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other
35 trades adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and
36 installation of items herein specified.
37
38 B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are
39 to be built into the work of all other Sections.
40
41 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
42
43 A. Detail Drawings, as provided for in the General Conditions, showing sizes
44 of members, method of assembly, anchorage, and connection to other
45 members shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before fabrication.
III
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-1 09/28/23
1
2
3 B. For each fabricated item include drawings, elevations, and details. Show
4 the following:
5
6 1. Details of Sections
7 2. Jointing and Connections
8 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS symbols; indicate
9 net weld length.
10 4. Reinforcing
11 5. Fasteners and Anchors
12 6. Accessories
13 7. Location of each finish
14
15 C. Manufacturer's specifications, details, and installation instructions. Submit
16 for:
17
18 1. All manufactured products used in fabrications.
19
20 D. Samples shall be submitted at the request of the Engineer for concurrent
21 review with shop drawings.
22
23 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
24
25 A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site to verify or supplement
26 indicated dimensions and to insure proper fitting of all items.
27
28 B. Where fabricated items or their anchors are to be embedded into concrete
29 and masonry work, deliver such items to those performing the installation,
30 together with all coordination Drawings and installation instructions
31 required. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork where required
32 for installation in new concrete or other adjacent work.
33
34 1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
35
36 A. Design, manufacturing, and assembly of elements of the materials herein
37 specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed
38 organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is
39 made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of
40 the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
41
42 1. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A53
43 2. Gray Iron Castings ASTM A48 (Class 30)
44 3. Galvanizing, general ASTM A123
45 4. Galvanizing, hardware ASTM A153
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
• 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
• 24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
110
5. Galvanizing, assemblies
6. Stainless Steel Bolts, Fasteners
7. Stainless Steel Plate and Sheet Wire
8. Welding Rods for Steel
ASTM A386
AISI, Type 316
AISI, Type 316
AWS Spec. for Arc
Welding
9. ANSI/AWS D1.1-88 -- Structural Welding Code -- Steel; 1988.
10. ANSI/AWS D1.3-81 -- Structural Welding Code -- Sheet Steel; 1981
11. ASTM A 36/A 36M -88d -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel;
1988.
12. ASTM A 307-88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts
and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 1988.
13. ASTM A 501-88 -- Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded
and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 1988.
14. ASTM A 563-88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy
Steel Nuts; 1988.
15. ASTM B 221-85a -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Alumi-
num -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes; 1985.
16. FS FF -S -92B -- Screw, Machine: Slotted, Cross -Recessed or
Hexagon Head; 1974 (Amended 1975).
17. FS FF -W -84A -- Washers, Lock (Spring); 1967 (Amended 1980).
18. FS FF -W -92B -- Washer, Flat (Plain); 1974.
19. SSPC-PA 1 -- Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting; Steel
Structures Painting Council; 1982.
20. SSPC-Paint 12 -- Cold -Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film);
Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982.
21. SSPC-Paint 13 -- Red or Brown One -Coat Shop Paint; Steel
Structures Painting Council; 1982.
22. SSPC-SP 1 -- Solvent Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council;
1982.
23. SSPC-SP 3 -- Power Tool Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1982.
24. SSPC-SP 5 -- White Metal Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1985.
25. SSPC-SP 6 -- Commercial Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1985.
26. SSPC-SP 8 -- Pickling; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982.
27. SSPC-SP 10 -- Near -White Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1985.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ANCHORS, BOLTS, AND FASTENING DEVICES
A. Anchors, bolts, etc., shall be furnished as necessary for installation of the
work of this Section.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-3 09/28/23
1
2 B. Compound masonry anchors shall be of the type shown or required and
3 shall be equal to Star Slug in compounded masonry anchors manufactured
4 by Star Expansion Industries, equal by Phillips Drill Co., Rahlplug, or equal.
5 Anchors shall be minimum "two unit" type.
6
7 C. The bolts used to attach the various members to the anchors shall be the
8 sizes shown or required. Stainless steel shall be attached to concrete or
9 masonry by means of stainless-steel machine bolts and iron or steel shall
10 be attached with steel machine bolts unless otherwise specifically noted.
11
12 D. For structural purposes, unless otherwise noted, expansion bolts shall be
13 Wej-it "Ankr-Tite", Phillips Drill Co. "Wedge Anchors", or Hilti "Kwik -Bolt".
14 When length of bolt is not called for on the Construction Drawings, the
15 length of bolt provided shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the
16 bolt a minimum of 1 -inch behind the reinforcing steel within the concrete.
17 Material shall be as noted on the Construction Drawings. If not listed, all
18 materials shall be stainless steel.
19
20 2.02 ALUMINUM ITEMS
21
22 A. Aluminum gratings shall be of serrated I -Bar Aluminum Alloy 6063-T6, and
23 shall be Thompson Fabricating Company, Aluminum I -Bar Grating; or
24 equal. Bearing bars shall be 1-1/2 inch minimum. Grating to be of sufficient
25 strength to carry a uniformly distributed live load of not less than 200 pounds
26 per square foot with maximum deflection of 1/4" of the span length. Provide
27 bearing angles, anchors, and bolts constructed of aluminum or stainless
28 steel and as detailed. Grating shall be removable type with standard
29 removable fasteners. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete surfaces
30 shall be protected with a special protective lacquer, bituminous coating, or
31 other specified coating in order to keep stains to a minimum. Top surface
32 of all bars shall be flush; ends of gratings shall be provided with binding
33 strips of same depth and thickness as the main bars welded thereto. All
34 openings 2 inches and greater in diameter shall be banded with a bar of the
35 same depth and thickness as the main bearing bars of the grating or
36 furnished with continuous cross bridges. Each cut bar shall be welded to
37 the band if banding is utilized. The ends of all grating sections shall be
38 likewise banded. Clamps and bolts used for attaching grating to supporting
39 members shall be stainless steel. All grating shall be clamped unless noted
40 otherwise. Clamps shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
41
42 B. Stair treads shall be as specified above for grating and shall have abrasive
43 nonslip nosing.
44
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 C. Aluminum nosing at concrete stairs shall be an extrusion of 4 -inch minimum
•
2 width with abrasive filled and shall be Wooster Products, Inc., Alumogrit
3 Treads, Type 116; equal by Barry Pattern and Foundry Co.; Andco; or
4 equal. Embedded anchors shall be furnished with a minimum of three
5 anchors per tread.
6
7 D. Aluminum ladders shall be fabricated to the dimensions and details and
8 installed as shown on the Construction Drawings.
9
10 E. Aluminum Handrails, Mechanically Fastened Type:
11
12 All aluminum mechanically fastened type pipe handrails and guardrails shall
13 be clear anodized aluminum finish and installed as specified herein and
14 indicated on the Construction Drawings. Handrails shall be made of
15 nominal 1-1/2 inches inside diameter pipe (schedule 40 for rails, schedule
16 80 for posts) fabricated of seamless 6105-T5 or 6061-T6 alloy, ASTM B-
17 429 or ASTM B-221. The supplier of the handrail system shall supply all
18 necessary fittings, rackets, transition, corner, and connector pieces,
19 toeboards, protective gaskets, etc., for a complete job at the locations
20 indicated on the Construction Drawings. All mounting hardware including
21 bolts, studs, nuts, etc., shall be stainless steel Type 316. Bends shall be
22 smooth and accurate to the details shown. The handrail systems shall
23 comply with all OSHA codes and Section 1208.2 of the Standard Building
•24 Code. Railing systems incorporating pop -rivets or glued fittings shall not be
25 allowed.
26
27 Handrailings and components shall be as manufactured by Thompson
28 Fabricating Company, Birmingham, Alabama, or equal.
29
30 Handrails and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a 200 Ib
31 concentrated load applied in any direction at any point on the top rail.
32 Handrails and stair rails shall also be designed to withstand a load of 50
33 Ib/ft. applied horizontally to the top rail. The 200 Ib load will not be applied
34 simultaneously with the 501b/ft. load. In addition, the handrails shall be
35 designed to withstand a load of 100Ib/ft. applied vertically downward to the
36 top rail and simultaneously with the 501b/ft. horizontal load. The 100Ib/ft.
37 vertical Toad does not apply to stair rails.
38
39 Spacing of posts where posts are required shall be as noted on shop
40 drawings, but in all cases shall be uniform and shall not exceed the
41 requirements of OSHA and Section 1208.2 of the Standard Building Code.
42 Shorter spacing may be used where required to maintain the maximum
43 spacing. The fabricator of the aluminum handrail and guardrail system shall
44 be responsible for the design and preparation of shop drawings and design
•
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-5 09/28/23
1 calculations (signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer) to
2 meet OSHA requirements and Section 1208.2 of Standard Building Code.
3
4 All railings shall be erected in line and plumb. Field splicing and expansion
5 compensation shall be accomplished using internal splice sleeves. Make
6 provisions for removable railing sections, as detailed and where shown on
7 the Construction Drawings.
8
9 Where handrail or guardrail posts are set in concrete, as per the
10 manufacturer's requirements, the posts shall be set into aluminum sleeves
11 cast in the concrete and firmly cemented with 1651 epoxy resin by E -Bond
12 Epoxies, Oakland Park, Florida, or Moulded Reinforced Plastics, Inc., Fort
13 Lauderdale, Florida or equal. Collars shall be placed on the posts and
14 fastened in place, as shown and as detailed on the shop drawings.
15
16 Where handrail is supported from structural members, it shall be done by
17 the use of sockets, flanges, brackets, or other means, which will provide
18 neat and substantial support for the pipe railing.
19
20 All railing shall be properly protected by paper, plastic, a coating or by all
21 three against scratching, splashes, mortar, paint, or other defacements
22 during transportation and erection and until adjacent work by other trades
23 has been completed.
24
25 F. Toeboards:
26
27 1. Contractor shall furnish and install aluminum toeboards conforming
28 to latest OSHA requirements on all railings and other locations.
29
30 2. Toeboards shall consist of an extruded 6063-T6 aluminum shape
31 bolted by means of a pipe clamp to the railing posts without requiring
32 any drilling or welding of the toeboard to the railing posts as
33 manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company, or equal.
34 Toeboards shall have pitched top and tear drop bottom to prevent
35 accumulation of dirt, or other material.
36
37 3. Toeboards shall be aluminum alloy 6063-T6. All fastening hardware
38 shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
39
40 G. Kickplates, if required, shall be fabricated and installed as shown on the
41 Drawings.
42
43 H. Aluminum safety gate shall be fabricated of extruded aluminum.
44
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 I. Prefabricated checkerplate aluminum floor hatches shall be Type "JD", or
•
2 "KD" as manufactured by Bilco Co., equal by Babcock -Davis Associates,
3 Inc.; Type "AM" Inland -Ryerson Construction Products Co., Milcor Division;
4 or equal, sized as shown. Hatches with either dimension over 3 feet -6
5 inches shall be double leaf type. Hatches shall be designed for a live load
6 of 300 pounds per square foot. Hatches shall be watertight.
7
8 J. Ship ladders shall be of all aluminum construction as detailed. Treads shall
9 have abrasive nosing as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating
10 Company, Birmingham, Alabama.
11
12 K. Checkplate aluminum cover plates shall be fabricated to the details shown
13 and installed at the locations shown.
14
15 L. Structural aluminum angle and channel door frames shall be provided as
16 shown on the Construction Drawings and shall be anodized. Frames shall
17 be fabricated with not less than three anchors on each jamb.
18
19 M. Miscellaneous aluminum shapes and plates shall be fabricated as shown.
20 Angle frames for hatches, beams, grates, etc., shall be furnished complete
21 with welded strap anchors attached. Furnish all miscellaneous aluminum
22 shown but not otherwise detailed. Structural shapes and extruded items
23 shall conform to the detail dimensions or the Shop Drawings within the
•24 tolerances published by the American Aluminum Association.
25
26 2.03 STEEL ITEMS
27
28 A. Sleeves shall be steel or cast iron pipe in walls and floors with end joints as
29 shown on the Drawings. All pipe sleeves shall have center anchor around
30 circumference as shown.
31
32 B. Miscellaneous steel pipe for sleeves and lifting attachments and other uses
33 as required shall be Schedule 40 pipe fabricated according to the details as
34 shown on the Drawings.
35
36 C. Miscellaneous steel shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the
37 Construction Drawings and shall include: beams, angles, support brackets,
38 closure angles in roof at edge of T -beam; base plates to support ends of
39 T -beams; door frames; splice plates, anchor bolts (except for Equipment
40 furnished in Divisions 11, 13, 14 and 15); lintels and any other
41 miscellaneous steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified.
42
43 D. Guardrails shall be of a standard FDOT W -Beam design with reflectors. All
44 mounting hardware including bolts, washers, nuts shall be galvanized.
45
III
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-7 09/28/23
1 2.04 CAST IRON ITEMS
2
3 A. Outside pipe clean-out frames and covers, when and where shown on the
4 Construction Drawings, shall be heavy duty, R -6013-R-6099 series as
5 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co., or equal. All outside pipe clean -outs
6 shall be 6 -inch diameter.
7
8 B. Frames, covers and grates for wet wells, catch basins and inlets shall be of
9 a good quality, strong, tough even grained cast iron and capable of
10 supporting an H-20 loading. Castings shall be as manufactured by the U.S.
11 Foundry, Neenah Foundry, Mechanics Iron Foundry or equal. Sizes shall
12 be as shown on the Drawings. Covers to have letters "WATER", "SEWER"
13 or "DRAIN", as applicable, embossed on top.
14
15 C. Electric and telephone wet well frames and covers, when and where shown
16 on the Construction Drawings, shall be ductile iron castings conforming to
17 all requirements of ASTM A536. The covers shall be watertight and shall
18 have the letters "HIGH VOLTAGE," "LOW VOLTAGE," "SIGNAL,"
19 "TELEPHONE," as applicable, embossed on top in letters 2 inches high.
20 The clear opening shall be 36 -inches.
21
22 2.05 STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS
23
24 A. Stainless steel items, where shown on the Drawings, shall be manufactured
25 using 316 S.S., unless otherwise noted.
26
27 2.06 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS
28
29 A. Use fasteners of suitable size and length for the materials being fastened
30 and for the type of connection required.
31
32 1. For concealed interior and exterior use or built into exterior walls use
33 nonferrous stainless steel and zinc coated.
34
35 2. For embedded anchor that will be protected from the elements, use
36 fasteners of the same material as the miscellaneous stem being
37 fastened.
38
39 PART 3 — EXECUTION
40
41 3.01 FABRICATION
42
43 A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean,
44 straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and
45 texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-8 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1
2 B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely
3 withstand stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Steel
4 accessories and connections to steel or cast iron shall be steel, unless
5 otherwise specified. Threaded connections shall be made so that the
6 threads are concealed by fitting.
7
8 C. Welded joints shall be rigid and continuously welded or spot welded as
9 specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth.
10 Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous.
11
12 D. Welding of parts shall be in accordance with the Standard Code for Arc and
13 Gas Welding in Building Construction of the AWS and shall only be done
14 where shown, specified, or permitted by the Engineer. All welding shall be
15 done only by welders certified as to their ability to perform welding in
16 accordance with the requirements of the AWS Code. Component parts of
17 built-up members to be welded shall be adequately supported and clamped
18 or held by other adequate means to hold the parts in proper relation for
19 welding.
20
21 E. Welding of aluminum work shall be on the unexposed side as much as
22 possible in order to prevent pitting or discoloration.
23
• 24 F. All aluminum finish exposed surfaces, except as specified below, shall have
25 manufacturer's standard mill finish. Aluminum handrails shall be given an
26 anodic oxide treatment in accordance with the Aluminum Association
27 Specification AA -C22 -A41. A coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be
28 applied to all aluminum before shipment from the factory.
29
30 G. Castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even -grained, smooth, free
31 from scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes, and defects of any kind which render
32 them unfit for the service for which they are intended. Castings shall be
33 thoroughly cleaned and will be subjected to a hammer inspection in the field
34 by the Engineer. All finished surfaces shown on the Drawings and/or
35 specified shall be machined to a true plane surface and shall be true and
36 seat at all points without rocking. Allowances shall be made in the patterns
37 so that the thickness specified or shown shall not be reduced in obtaining
38 finished surfaces. Castings will not be acceptable if the actual weight is less
39 than 95 percent of the theoretical weight computed from the dimensions
40 shown. The Contractor, if requested by the Owner or Engineer, shall
41 provide facilities for weighing castings in the presence of the Owner or
42 Engineer showing true weights, certified by the supplier.
43
44 H. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all
45 loose mill scale, rust, and foreign matter before shipment and shall be given
•
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-9 09/28/23
1 one shop coat of primer compatible with finish coats specified in Painting
2 Section after fabrication but before shipping. Paint shall be applied to dry
3 surfaces and shall be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into
4 joints and other open spaces. Abrasions in the field shall be touched up
5 with primer immediately after erection. Final painting is specified in Painting
6 Section 09900.
7
8 I. Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot -dip zinc process after
9 fabrication. Following all manufacturing operations, all items to be
10 galvanized shall be thoroughly cleaned, pickled, fluxed, and completely
11 immersed in a bath of molten zinc. The resulting coating shall be adherent
12 and shall be the normal coating to be obtained by immersing the items in a
13 bath of molten zinc and allowing them to remain in the bath until their
14 temperature becomes the same as the bath. Coating shall be not less than
15 2 oz. per sq. ft. of surface.
16
17 J. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; use anchors of same material and
18 finish as item except where specifically indicated otherwise.
19
20 K. Fabricate to prevent water intrusion or migration.
21
22 3.02 INSTALLATION
23
24 A. Install all items furnished except items to be imbedded in concrete or other
25 masonry which shall be installed under Division 03. Items to be attached to
26 concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in
27 accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry
28 will not be permitted. All dimensions shall be verified at the site before
29 fabrication is started.
30
31 B. All steel surfaces to come in contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall
32 receive a protective coating of heavy bitumastic troweling mastic applied in
33 accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions prior to installation.
34
35 C. Where aluminum is embedded in concrete, apply a heavy coat of bitumastic
36 troweling mastic in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions prior to
37 installation.
38
39 D. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, provide a 1/32 -inch
40 neoprene gasket between the aluminum and the concrete or masonry.
41
42 E. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of
43 zinc -chromate primer and provide a 1/32 -inch neoprene gasket between the
44 aluminum and the dissimilar metal.
45
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-10 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 F. Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and
•
2 masonry paint to the wood.
3
4 G. Anchor metal fabrications to substrata indicated; set all fasteners required.
5
6 H. Cut, drill and fit items as required for installation.
7
8 1. Fit exposed connection together accurately to form tight hairline
9 joints.
10
11 2. Weld joints as indicated.
12
13 a. Comply with AWS code for welding procedures, for
14 appearance and quality of welds, and for corrective methods.
15 b. Grind exposed joints smooth.
16
17 I. Set items accurately in location, alignment and elevation; level, true and
18 free of rack, measured from established lines and levels.
19
20 J. Provide temporary bracing as required.
21
22 3.03 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP
23
•24 A. Touch up shop paint immediately after erection.
25
26 1. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded surfaces.
27
28 2. Paint with same material used for shop painting, minimum 2 mils dry
29 film thickness.
30
31 END OF SECTION
32
•
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-11 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-12 09/28/23
•
1 SECTION 09865
•
2
3 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for the
10 surface preparation and application of shop primers necessary to complete
11 this Contract in its entirety.
12
13 1.02 SUBMITTALS
14
15 A. Submit to the Engineer for review, shop drawings, manufacturer's
16 specifications and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface
17 preparation, application procedures and dry mil thickness.
18
19 B. Submit representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required
20 by the Engineer.
21
22 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
23
• 24 2.01 MATERIALS
25
26 A. Submerged Surfaces:
27
28 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals that will be submerged or that are
29 subject to splash action or that are specified to be considered
30 submerged service shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series
31 66 at 3.0-5.0 mils (D.F.T.), PPG Pitt -Guard Epoxy Coating 97-145 at
32 4.0-6.0 mils (D.F.T.), or equal.
33
34 2. Voids and bugholes in concrete surfaces must be filled with Tnemec
35 Series 218 (up to 1/4" deep) or Tnemec Series 219 (1/4" to 1 1/2"
36 deep) or equal as recommended by the manufacturer of the paint
37 system.
38
39 B. Non -submerged Surfaces:
40
41 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals other than those covered by
42 Paragraph 2.01A shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series
43 66 Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.) or equal.
44
45 C. Non -primed Surfaces:
• 46
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09865-1 09/28/23
1 1. Gears, bearings surfaces, and other similar surfaces
2 obviously not to be painted shall be given a heavy shop coat
3 of grease or other suitable rust -resistant coating. This coating
4 shall be maintained as necessary to prevent corrosion during
5 all periods of storage and erection and shall be satisfactory to
6 the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test.
7
8 D. Compatibility of Coating Systems:
9
10 1. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed
11 by the manufacturer to be compatible with their corresponding
12 primers and finish coats specified in Section 09900 for use in
13 the field and which are recommended for use together.
14
15 PART 3 — EXECUTION
16
17 3.01 APPLICATION
18
19 A. Surface Preparation and Priming:
20
21 1. Nonsubmerged components scheduled for priming, as defined
22 above, shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-6,
23 Commercial Grade, immediately prior to priming. Submerged
24 components scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be
25 sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-10. Near White,
26 immediately prior to priming.
27
28 2. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose
29 mill scale, and other foreign material before priming. Concrete
30 surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with ICRI CSP 4-6.
31
32 3. Shop prime in accordance with the paint manufacturer's
33 recommendations.
34
35 4. Priming shall follow sandblasting before any evidence of corrosion
36 has occurred and within 24 hours.
37
38 5. Allow all new concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Test for
39 moisture by plastic film tape down test (ASTM D4263).
40
41
42 END OF SECTION
43
44
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09865-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 09900
•
2
3 PAINTING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment
10 and incidentals required and performing all the painting necessary to complete
11 this Contract in its entirety.
12
13 B. It is the intent of these Specifications to paint all concrete where scheduled,
14 exposed miscellaneous metal, pipe, fittings, supports, valves, equipment and all
15 other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified. Minor
16 items omitted in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of this
17 Section where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as stated
18 herein.
19
20 C. The following surfaces or items are not required to be painted:
21
22 1. Portions of metal, other than aluminum, embedded in concrete. This
23 does not apply to the back face of items mounted to concrete or masonry
• 24 surfaces, which shall be painted before erection. Aluminum to be
25 embedded in or in contact with concrete or masonry shall be coated to
26 prevent electrolysis.
27 2. Stainless steel.
28 3. Fencing
29 4. Concealed surfaces of pipe or crawl spaces.
30 5. Acoustical ceilings.
31 6. Tile.
32 7. Fiberglass, other than piping.
33 8. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of
34 mechanical equipment.
35 9. Electrical switchgear, motor control centers, lighting and power panels,
36 and control panels.
37 10. Polyethylene chemical storage tanks.
38
39 1.02 REFERENCES
40
41 A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
42 SSPC-SP-1 through SSPC-SP-10 Surface Preparation Specifications
43
44 B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI)
45 ICRI CSP — 3 through ICRI CSP — 6 Concrete Surface Preparation Standards.
.46
47
PAINTING
09900-1
09/28/23
1 III2 1.03 SUBMITTALS
3
4 A. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions,
5 shop drawings, working drawings and product data including manufacturer's
6 specifications and data on the proposed paint systems and detailed surface
7 preparation, application procedures and dry film thickness.
8
9 B. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions,
10 color cards, including standard and special colors, for initial color selections.
11
12 C. Schedule of Painting Operations: Submit to the Engineer for review a complete
13 Schedule of Painting Operations in a timely manner and properly notify and
14 coordinate the fabricators' surface preparation and painting operations with
15 these Specifications. This Schedule shall include for each surface to be painted,
16 the brand name, the percent volume of solids, the coverage and the number of
17 coats the Contractor proposes to use in order to achieve the specified dry film
18 thickness, and color charts. Apply all material in strict accordance with the
19 Schedule and the manufacturer's instructions. Wet and dry paint film gauges
20 shall be made available to the Engineer to verify the proper application while
21 work is in progress.
22
23 1.04 SPARE MATERIAL III
24
25 A. Furnish one unopened gallon can of each type and each color of paint used.
26
27 1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
28
29 A. Contractor shall submit a list of similar projects successfully completed within
30 the past 3 years. Contractor shall also supply record of Certificates of Approval
31 from Manufacturers to show they have completed technical product and
32 application training. Contractors shall submit a list of surface preparation and
33 application equipment sufficient to mix and apply the products specified.
34
35 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
36
37 2.01 MATERIALS
38
39 A. All painting materials shall be fully equal to those manufactured by the Tnemec
40 Company Inc., Carboline, PPG/Porter Coatings, and Sherwin Williams. The
41 painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of these products and
42 recommendations for applications. No brand other than those named will be
43 considered, unless the brand and type of paint proposed for each item, together
44 with sufficient data, substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to
45 the Owner, demonstrating equality to the paint(s) named, is submitted in writing
46 to the Engineer for review within 30 days after the issuance of the Notice to •
47 Proceed. The type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the
PAINTING
09900-2
09/28/23
•1 Engineer's review.
2
3 B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken
4 containers, bearing the manufacturer's brand, date of manufacturer, batch
5 number, and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, thinned,
6 and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the applicable
7 materials and surface.
8
9 C. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the
10 manufacturer to be compatible with the finish paints to be used.
11
12 D. No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil.
13
14 E. Work areas will be designated by the Engineer for storage and mixing of all
15 painting materials. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements
16 of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the
17 buildings shall be provided and used for painting wastes, and no plumbing
18 fixture shall be used for this purpose.
19
20 F. All recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regard to the health and safety
21 of workmen shall be followed.
22
23 G. Where new painting is specified for surfaces with existing finishes, the
• 24 Contractor shall sample the existing coating(s) for compatibility with the
25 proposed new paint and notify the Engineer of any incompatibilities found.
26
27 2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS
28
29 A. Colors for pipe shall match that of existing connected piping. Colors for
30 structural steel shall match that of existing connected structural steel.
31
32 B. The following surfaces shall have the types of paint scheduled below applied at
33 the dry film thickness (D.F.T.) in mils per coat noted. Some of the painting
34 systems listed below may not be used in this project. Some colors will require
35 an additional coat beyond that listed below to obtain the proper color coverage.
36
37 1. Non -submerged concrete and precast concrete walls and ceilings:
38
39 a. Tnemec
40 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
41 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
42
43 b. Carboline
44 1st Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
45 2nd Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
•46
47 c. PPG/HPC
PAINTING
09900-3
09/28/23
1 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
2 D.F.T.)
3 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
4 D.F.T.)
5
6 d. Sherwin Williams
7 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer
8 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat
9
10 2. Submerged Concrete
11
12 a. Tnemec
13 1st Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (3.0 — 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
14 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
15
16 b. Carboline
17 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.)
18
19 c. PPG/HPC
20 2 Coats: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949
21 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
22
23 d. Sherwin Williams
24 1st Coat : Cor Cote FRE (80-100 mils D.F.T
25
26 3. Interior Exposed Masonry (above grade and interior partitions)
27
28 a. Tnemec
29 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 54-660- (80-100 sq. ft. per gal.)
30 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
31 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
32
33 b. Carboline
34 1 Coat: Sanitile 600/600TG (60-80 sq. ft. per gal.)
35 2 Coats: Sanitile 655 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
36
37 c. PPG/HPC
38 1 Coat: Aquapon Polyamide Epoxy Block Filler 97-685/686 (40 to
39 80 sq. ft. per gal @ 12.0-24.0 mils D.F.T.)
40
41 2 Coats: Aquapon High Build Semi -Gloss Polyamide Epoxy
42 Coating
43 97-130 Series. (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
44
45 d. Sherwin Williams
46 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer
47 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat
PAINTING
09900-4
09/28/23
•
•
•
•1
2 4. Interior and Exterior Exposed Masonry (Unpainted)
3
4 a. Tnemec
5 Regular CMU
6 2 Coats: Prime a Pell 200 @ 75-100 SF/gallon/coat
7 Split face CMU
8 2 Coats: Prime a Pell Plus @ 65-80 SF/gallon/coat
9
10 b. Carboline
11 CMU
12 1 Coat: Carbocrete Sealer WB @ 60-80 SF/gallon
13 Split Face CMU
14 2 Coats: Carbocrete Sealer WB, 1st coat @ 40-60 SF/gallon &
15 2nd coat @ 80-120 SF/gallon
16
17 c. PPG/HPC
18 2 Coats: PPG/HPC Canyon Tone Stain Clear at 100 to 150 SF
19 per gallon.
20
21 5. Exterior Exposed Stuccoed Walls
22
23 a. Tnemec
41) 24 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
25 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 —6.0 mils D.F.T.)
26
27 b. Carboline
28 1st Coat: Sanitile 100 (10.0-12.0 mils D.F.T.)
29 2nd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
30 3rd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T.) - OPTIONAL
31
32 c. PPG/HPC
33 1st Coat Pitt -Flex Elastomeric Coating 4-110 (5.5-7.3 mils D.F.T.)
34 2nd Coat Pitt -Flex Elastomeric Coating 4-110 (5.5-7.3 mils D.F.T.)
35
36 6. Ferrous metals submerged or subject to splashing
37
38 a. Tnemec
39 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 104-1211 High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy
40 Coating (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
41 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 104 -Color High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy
42 Coating (8.0 — 10.0 mils D.F.T.)
43
44 b. Carboline
45 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.)
•46
47 c. PPG/HPC
PAINTING
09900-5
09/28/23
1 1 Coat: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949 •
2 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
3 1 Coat: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949
4 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
5
6 d. Sherwin Williams
7 1st Coat: Cor -Cote HB 6.0-9.0 mils (D.F.T.)
8 2nd Coat: Cor -Cote HB 6.0-9.0 mils (D.F.T.)
9
10 7. Exterior non -submerged ferrous metals:
11
12 a. Tnemec
13 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
14 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
15 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 4.5 mils D.F.T.)
16
17 b. Carboline
18 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
19 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
20 3rd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
21
22 c. PPG/HPC
23 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
24 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils •
25 D.F.T.)
26 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95-8800 (2.0-6.0 mils
27 D.F.T.)
28
29 d. Sherwin Williams
30 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (3.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
31 2nd Coat: HiSolids Polyurethane (2.0-4.0 mils (D.F.T.)
32
33 8. Interior non -submerged ferrous metals:
34
35 a. Tnemec
36 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
37 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
38
39 b. Carboline
40 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
41 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
42
43 c. PPG/HPC
44 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
45 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils •
46 D.F.T.)
47
PAINTING
09900-6
09/28/23
1 9. Exterior galvanized and non-ferrous metal:
•
2
3 a. Tnemec
4 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
5 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
6
7 b. Carboline:
8 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
9 2nd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
10
11 c. PPG/HPC
12 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
13 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
14 D.F.T.)
15 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95-8800 (2.0-6.0
16 mils D.F.T.)
17
18 d. Sherwin Williams
19 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T.)
20 2nd Coat: H -Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mills D.F.T.)
21
22 10. Interior galvanized and non-ferrous metals:
23
• 24 a. Tnemec
25 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
26 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
27
28 b. Carboline:
29 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
30 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
31
32 c. PPG/HPC
33 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
34 D.F.T.)
35 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
36 D.F.T.)
37
38 11. Galvanized and non-ferrous metal submerged or subject to splashing:
39
40 a. Tnemec
41 1St Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
42 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
43
44 b. Carboline
45 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.)
.46
47 c. PPG/HPC
PAINTING
09900-7
09/28/23
1 1st Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- •
2 946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
3 2nd Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97-
4 946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
5 3rd Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97-
6 946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
7
8 12. Metal surfaces exposed to temperatures above 250°F:
9
10 a. Tnemec
11 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 39-1261(0.7 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
12 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 39-1261(0.7 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
13
14 b. Carboline
15 1 Coat: Thermaline 450, up to 450°F (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.)
16 or
17 1st Coat: Carbozinc 11 or 11 HS (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T.)
18 2nd Coat: Thermaline 4700, 400-1000°F (2.0 mils D.F.T.)
19
20 c. PPG/HPC
21 2 Coats: Speedhide Int/Ext Aluminum Paint 6-230. (1.0 -1.3 mils
22 D.F.T. per coat)
23 1111
24 13. Insulated Pipe:
25
26 a. Tnemec
27 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
28 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
29
30 b. Carboline
31 2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
32
33 c. PPG/HPC
34 2 Coats: PITT -TECH Interior/Exterior Satin DTM Industrial
35 Enamels 90-474 Series.(2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
36
37 14. Aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals:
38
39 a. Tnemec
40 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
41 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
42
43 b. Carboline
44 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
45 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.) III
46
47 c. PPG/HPC
PAINTING
09900-8
09/28/23
•1 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
3 D.F.T.)
4
5 15. Plastic Piping - Interior:
6
7 a. Tnemec
8 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
9 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
10
11 b. Carboline
12 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
13 2 Coats : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
14
15 c. PPG/HPC
16 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130
17 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
18 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130
19 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
20
21 16. Plastic Piping - Exterior
22
23 a. Tnemec
• 24 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
25 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
26
27 b. Carboline
28 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
29 2 Coats : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
30
31 c. PPG/HPC
32 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130
33 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
34 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130
35 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
36 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95-8800
37 (2.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
38
39 d. Sherwin Williams
40 1st Coat: Hi -Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T)
41 2nd Coat: Hi -Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T)
42
43 17. Interior Drywall and Plaster -Industrial Areas
44
45 a. Tnemec
•46 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51-792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
47 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900-9
09/28/23
1 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2
3 b. Carboline
4 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
5 2nd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0-5.0 mils DFT)
6 3rd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
7
8 c. PPG/HPC
9 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130
10 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
11 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130
12 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
13
14 18. Interior Drywall and Plaster -Office Areas
15
16 a. Tnemec
17 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51-792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
18 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
19 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
20
21 b. Carboline
22 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
23 2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
24
25 c. PPG/HPC
26 1st Coat: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer/Sealer 6-2
27 (1 mil DFT)
28 2 Coats: Speedhide Int Latex Eggshell 6-411
29 (2 mils D.F.T. per coat)
30
31 19. Interior Concrete Floors
32
33 a. Tnemec
34 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 201 (5.0 - 7.0 mils D.F.T>)
35 2nd Coat: Tenemec Series 280 (8.0 - 10.0 mils D.F.T.)
36
37 Note: Apply 50 - 70 mesh silica sand at 5 lbs. per 150 sq. ft.
38 between 1st and 2nd coat to provide non -slip surface.
39
40 b. Carboline
41 1st Coat: Carboguard 1340 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
42 2 Coats: Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
43
44 Note: Utilize 40-60 mesh silica sand to provide non -slip surface.
45 Consult with Carboline for application details.
46
47
PAINTING
09900-10
09/28/23
•
•
•
1 c. PPG/HPC
•2 1st Coat: Megaseal High Solids Primer 99-6639
3 (5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T)
4 2nd Coat: Megaseal Self -Leveling Epoxy 99-6680
5 (10.0-12.0 mils D.F.T.)
6
7 20. Concrete in highly Corrosive Environment Special Coating
8
9 a. Tnemec
10 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 434 Perma-Shield H2S
11 (125 mils D.F.T.)
12 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze
13 (12.0-15.0 mils D.F.T.)
14
15 b. Carboline
16 1st Coat: Plasite 5371 (125 mils)
17 2nd Coat: Plasite 4500S (12.0-15.0 mils D.F.T.)
18
19 c. PPG/HPC/Polyspec (Concrete Headworks)
20 1St Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer
21 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
22 (100 mils)
23 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
• 24 (100 mils)
25
26 d. PPG/HPC/Polyspec (Wet wells/Lift Stations -Force & Gravity
27 Mains)
28 1st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer
29 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
30 (100 mils)
31 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
32 (100 mils)
33
34 e. PPG/HPC/Enviroline (Concrete Headworks)
35 1st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3-5 mils DFT)
36 2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac
37 (20-40 mils DFT)
38 3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac
39 (20-40 mils DFT)
40
41 f. PPG/HPC/Enviroline (Manholes/Lift Stations -Force & Gravity
42 Mains)
43 1st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3-5 mils DFT)
44 2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils DFT)
45 3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils DFT)
•46
47 g. Sherwin Williams
PAINTING
09900-11
09/28/23
1 1st Coat: CorCote FRE (80-100 mils D.F.T)
2
3 21. Metals submerged or subject to splashing in highly Corrosive
4 Environment Special Coating
5
6 a. Tnemec
7 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Shield H2S (30 mils D.F.T.)
8
9 b. Carboline
10 1 Coat: Plasite 4500S (35.0-40.0 mils D.F.T.)
11
12 c. PPG/HPC/Polyspec
13
14 d. Sherwin Williams
15 1st Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0-9.0 mils D.F.T)
16 2nd Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0-9.0 mils D.F.T)
17
18 22. Secondary Containment Concrete 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite
19
20 a. Tnemec
21 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 61-5002 Tenemeliner
22 (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.)
23 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 61-5001 Tenemeliner
24 (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.)
25
26 b. Carboline
27 1st Coat: Semstone 800 primer
28 Finish Coats: Semstone 870
29 (reference Semstone 870 application spec for installation details)
30
31 23. Buried Pipe Appurtenances (Coal Tar Epoxy / Bitumastic Coating)
32
33 a. Tnemec
34 1st Coat Tnemec Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar
35 (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T)
36 2nd Coat Tnemec Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar
37 (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T)
38
39 b. Carboline
40 1st Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T)
41 2nd Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T)
42
43 c. Sherwin Williams
44 1st Coat: Tar -Guard (16-20 mils D.F.T)
45 2nd Coat: Tar -Guard (16-20 mils D.F.T)
46
PAINTING
09900-12
09/28/23
•
•
•
1 C. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically
•
2 excepted shall be prepared, primed, and painted in the manner and with
3 materials consistent with these Specifications. The Engineer shall select which
4 of the manufacturer's products, whether the type is indicated herein or not, shall
5 be used for such unnamed surfaces. No extra payment shall be made for this
6 painting.
7
8 2.03 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT
9
10 A. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed
11 conduits, through items and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquid and semi -
12 liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings,
13 fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and all operating accessories that
14 are integral to be whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit
15 system. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and Color -Coding Schedules
16 attached at the end of this Section.
17
18 B. All hangers and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and
19 with the same paint as the pipe it supports. The system shall be painted up to,
20 but not including, the flanges attached to the mechanical equipment, nor the
21 flexible conduit connected to electrical motors. When more than one pipe
22 system is supported on the same bracket, the bracket shall be painted the same
23 color as the adjacent wall or ceiling. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and
• 24 Color -Coding Schedule.
25
26 C. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from
27 the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted
28 between and up to, but not including, the fixed flanges or connections on the
29 equipment.
30
31 2.04 LETTERING OF TITLES
32
33 A. Each pipe system shall be labeled with the name of the materials in each
34 pipeline and alongside this an arrow indicating the direction of flow of liquids.
35 Titles shall be as so described in attached schedule. Titles shall not be located
36 more than twenty (20) linear feet apart and shall also appear directly adjacent
37 to each side of any wall the pipeline breaches, adjacent to each side of the valve
38 regulator, flowcheck, strainer clean-out, and all pieces of equipment.
39
40 B. Titles shall identify the contents by complete name. Identification title locations
41 shall be determined by the Engineer but, in general, they shall be placed where
42 the view is unobstructed and on the two lower quarters of pipe or covering where
43 they are overhead. Title should be clearly visible from operating positions
44 especially those adjacent to control valves.
45
•46 C. Titles on equipment shall be applied at eye level on machines, where possible,
47 or at the uppermost broad vertical surface of low equipment. Where more than
PAINTING
09900-13
09/28/23
1 one piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be numbered
2 consecutively, as indicated on the mechanical drawings, or as directed by the
3 Engineer; for example, Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles shall be composed
4 and justified on the left-hand side as follows: Pump No. 1.
5
6 D. Application of titles.
7
8 1. The color of the titles shall be black or white to best contrast with the
9 color of the pipes and equipment and shall be stencil applied.
10
11 2. Stencil text is to be in ALL CAPS worded exactly as shown in the
12 Schedule. Titles are to be printed in a single line.
13
14 3. Letter sizes.
15
16 Outside Diameter
17 of Pipe or Size of Legend
18 Covering (inches) Letters (inches)
19
20 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2
21 1-1/2 to 2 3/4
22 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4
23 8 to 10 2-1/2
24 More than 10 3-1/2
25
26 Equipment titles are to be two inches high.
27
28 4. Arrow sizes. Where "a" is equal to 3/4 of outside diameter of pipe or
29 covering, the arrow shaft shall be 2 "a" long by 3/8 "a" wide. The
30 arrowhead shall be an equilateral triangle with sides equal to "a."
31 Maximum "a" dimension shall be 6 inches.
32
33 5. When using direction arrows, point arrowhead away from pipe markers
34 and in direction of flow. If flow can be in both directions, use a
35 double -headed directional flow.
36
37 2.05 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT
38
39 A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and
40 shop or field finished.
41
42 B. All items to be shop primed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material
43 prior to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating shall have
44 been improperly applied or if material contrary to these Specifications shall have
45 been used, that coating shall be removed by sandblasting to white metal and
46 re -primed in accordance with these Specifications.
47
PAINTING
09900-14
09/28/23
•
•
•
1 C. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in accordance
• 2 with these Specifications. Remove any prime coats not in accordance with
3 these Specifications by sandblasting and apply the specified prime coat at no
4 additional cost to the Owner.
5
6 D. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots
7 retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint
8 coats in the field.
9
10 E. Be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect
11 the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other
12 cause.
13
14 F. A shop finish coat shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to a field
15 applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat does
16 not give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar nature,
17 prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint, as directed by the
18 Engineer, to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality. Submit
19 to the Engineer sufficient evidence that the standard finish is compatible with
20 the specified finish coat.
21
22 G. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, protect all
23 motors, drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment found
•24 to contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned.
25
26 PART 3 — EXECUTION
27
28 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
29
30 A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared, as specified herein or in Section
31 09865, and shall be dry and clean before painting. Special care shall be given
32 to thoroughly clean interior concrete and concrete block surfaces of all marks
33 before application of finish.
34
35 B. All metal welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth in accordance
36 with SSPC-SP-3 or in difficult and otherwise inaccessible areas by hand
37 cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP-2. All pits and dents shall be filled, and
38 all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth surface for
39 painting. All rust, loose scale, oil, grease, and dirt shall be removed by use of
40 solvents, wire brushing or sanding.
41
42 C. Concrete surfaces shall be finished as specified in Division 3. Report
43 unsatisfactory surface conditions to the Engineer. Concrete shall be free of
44 dust, oil, curing compounds, and other foreign matter. Concrete surfaces shall
45 have any laitance or weak layers removed prior to install of coatings or linings
•46 using captive shot blasting systems. Concrete shall have a minimum surface
47 tensile strength of at least 300 PSI per ASTM D-4541 standard. Testing is
PAINTING
09900-15
09/28/23
1 required to confirm this strength using ASTM D-4541 standard and methods.
2 Surface profile shall be CSP -3 to CSP -6 meeting ICRI (International Concrete
3 Repair Institute) standard guideline #03732 for Coating, Concrete, producing an
4 anchor profile equal to 60 -grit sandpaper or coarser. Prepare concrete surfaces
5 by mechanical (captive shot blast) means to achieve this desired profile.
6 Moisture Vapor Transmission should be 3 pounds or Tess per 1,000 square feet
7 over 24-hour timeframe as confirmed through a calcium chloride test as per
8 ASTM E-1907. Quantitative relative humidity (RH) testing, ASTM F-2170,
9 should confirm concrete RH results < 75%. Application of coatings and linings
10 should be made when out gassing of concrete is declining during periods when
11 surface temperatures of the concrete is falling. Use of a surface thermometer
12 to determine when surface temperatures are falling is required. When in doubt,
13 double priming may be required. All surface irregularities, cracks, expansion
14 joints and control joints should be properly addressed prior to application of
15 coatings and linings. Remove all contaminates and contaminated surface
16 layers prior to application of coatings and linings.
17
18 D. Concrete block surface shall be smooth and cleaned of all dust, efflorescence,
19 chalk, loose mortar, dirt, grease, oil, tar and other foreign matter.
20
21 E. All plastic pipe surfaces shall be lightly sanded before painting.
22
23 F. Wood surfaces shall be dry. Sand to obtain a smooth surface. All encrustations
24 shall be removed.
25
26 G. Exposed Pipe: Bituminous coated pipe shall not be used in exposed locations.
27 Pipe that will be exposed after project completion shall be primed in accordance
28 with the requirements herein. Any bituminous coated pipe that is inadvertently
29 installed in exposed locations shall be sandblasted clean before priming and
30 painting. After installation all exterior, exposed flanged joints shall have the gap
31 between adjoining flanges sealed with a single component polysulfide sealant
32 to prevent rust stains.
33
34 H. Primed or Previously Painted Surfaces and Nonferrous Surfaces: All coated
35 surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of successive coats. All
36 nonferrous metals not to be coated shall be cleaned. This cleaning shall be
37 done in accordance with SSPC-SP-1, Solvent Cleaning.
38
39 I. Shop -Finished Surfaces: All shop -coated surfaces shall be protected from
40 damage and corrosion before and after installation by treating damaged areas
41 immediately upon detection. Abraded or corroded spots on shop -coated
42 surfaces shall be "Hand Cleaned" and then touched up with the same materials
43 as the shop coat. All shop coated surfaces which are faded, discolored, or
44 which require more than minor touch-up, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall
45 receive new surface preparation before being repainted. Cut edges of
46 galvanized sheets and exposed threads, and cut ends of galvanized piping,
PAINTING
09900-16
09/28/23
•
•
1 electrical conduit, and metal pipe sleeves, that are not to be finished painted,
0 2 shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and primed with zinc dust -zinc oxide metal primer.
3
4 J. Galvanized and Zinc -Copper Alloy Surfaces: These surfaces to be painted shall
5 be "Solvent Cleaned" and treated as hereinafter specified. Such surfaces not
6 to be painted shall be "Solvent Cleaned." Brush off blasting per SSPC-SP7
7 galvanized surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion.
8
9 K. Aluminum embedded or in contact with concrete must be painted with one shop
10 coat of zinc chromate followed by one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented
11 asphalt paint. Brush off blasting per SSPC-SP7 of galvanized surfaces to insure
12 optimum coating adhesion.
13
14 3.02 WORKMANSHIP
15
16 A. General:
17
18 1. Primer (spot) and paint used for a particular surface shall, in general, be
19 as scheduled for that type of new surface. Confirm with the paint
20 manufacturer that the paint proposed for a particular repaint condition will
21 be compatible with the existing painted surface. Sample repainted areas
22 on the actual site will be required to insure this compatibility. Finished
23 repainted areas shall be covered by the same guarantee specified for
.24 remainder of work.
25
26 2. At the request of the Engineer, samples of the finished work prepared in
27 strict accordance with these Specifications shall be furnished and all
28 painting shall be equal in quality to the samples. Finished areas shall be
29 adequate for the purpose of determining the quality of workmanship.
30 Experimentation with color tints shall be furnished to the satisfaction of
31 the Engineer where standard chart colors are not satisfactory.
32
33 3. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings and
34 accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operations.
35 Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from contact
36 with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. Remove
37 all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, protect and
38 replace when completed. Mask all machinery name plates and all
39 machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or spattered paint
40 shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting
41 is being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all
42 damage during the operation and until the finished job is accepted.
43
44 4. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the
45 manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If
.46 material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun,
47 the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with
PAINTING
09900-17
09/28/23
1 undiluted material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the
2 manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun
3 than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness
4 shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On
5 masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture,
6 however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be
7 exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to
8 achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the
9 coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint.
10
11 5. Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All
12 paints shall be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred
13 while using. No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added
14 to any paint.
15
16 6. Only skilled painters shall be used on the work and specialists shall be
17 employed where required.
18
19 B. Field Priming:
20
21 1. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment and
22 other metals that are shop primed before delivery at the site will not
23 require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be
24 painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the weather,
25 and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the painting
26 schedule.
27
28 2. Equipment which is customarily shipped with a baked -on enamel finish
29 or with a standard factory finish shall normally be field painted unless the
30 prefinished equipment is specifically color selected and unless the finish
31 has not been damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces that
32 have been shop painted and have been damaged, or where the shop
33 coats or coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly cleaned and
34 retouched before any successive painting is done on them in the field.
35 All such field painting shall match as nearly as possible the original finish.
36
37 C. Field Painting:
38
39 1. All painting at the site shall be designated as Field Painting.
40
41 2. All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting
42 shall be done when the temperature is below 50°F, in dust -laden air,
43 when rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have completely
44 disappeared from the surface to be painted.
45
PAINTING
09900-18
09/28/23
•
•
1 3. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily
41,
2 distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the
3 approximate shade of the finished coat.
4
5 4. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities.
6 Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00
7 sandpaper or equal to remove defects and provide a smooth even
8 surface. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted and all exterior
9 trim shall be back -primed before installation.
10
11 5. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly
12 manner so as to facilitate inspection. All exterior concrete and masonry
13 paint shall be performed at one continuous manner structure by
14 structure. Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as
15 quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be
16 inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection.
17
18 6. All materials shall be brush painted unless spray painting is specifically
19 directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all
20 damage caused by overspray or drifting.
21
22 7. All surfaces to be painted, as well as the atmosphere in which painting is
23 to be done, shall be kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if
•24 necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint
25 shall be scraped off and repainted in accordance with the Engineer's
26 directions.
27
28 8. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall
29 be cleaned and repainted as directed by the Engineer.
30
31 9. Any pipe scheduled to be painted and having received a coating of a tar
32 or asphalt -compound shall be painted with two coats of PPG/HPC PITT -
33 GUARD® Epoxy Penetrating Sealer 95-2328 or equal before successive
34 coats are applied per the schedule. Tnemec recommends using 66
35 Hi -Build Epoxoline over tar, but a test patch must be run initially to test
36 the paint's compatibility with the tar. Carboline does not recommend
37 application of their coatings over tar. Instead, Carboline recommends
38 removal of the tar followed by the application of suitable coatings based
39 on the substrate and intended service application.
40
41 3.03 CLEANUP
42
43 A. The premises shall at all times be kept free from accumulation of waste material
44 and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the painting
45 remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and all rubbish from and about
•46 the buildings and leave work "broom clean" unless more exactly specified.
47
PAINTING
09900-19
09/28/23
1 B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed, or
2 splattered on all surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc.,
3 leaving the work ready for inspection.
4
5 C. All cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed
6 metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon completion of the
7 work, the entire job left clean and acceptable to the Engineer.
8
9 3.04 INSPECTION, TESTING EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES
10
11 A. Inspection
12
13 1. All phases of the work are subject to inspection by the Engineer to assure
14 proper performance and compliance with the specifications.
15
16 2. The Engineer shall be advised of the proper time to inspect surface
17 preparation, prime coat and each succeeding coat. The Contractor shall
18 apply additional coats only after the previous coat has been observed by
19 the Engineer or Owner's representative.
20
21 B. Testing
22
23 1. The Contractor shall have on the project site the following testing
24 equipment. Equipment shall be in calibration and proper working order.
25 Equipment shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers'
26 instructions or as directed by the Engineer.
27
28 Sling Psychrometer: Relative humidity and dew point readings shall be
29 taken at intervals throughout the days work. Readings shall be taken at
30 the start of the mornings work, mid-day and afternoon. Should
31 environmental conditions change, additional reading shall be taken to
32 assure that coatings are being applied under the conditions as outlined
33 by the coatings manufacturer.
34
35 Surface Temperature Thermometer: Surface temperatures shall be
36 taken in areas where work is being performed. Surface temperature shall
37 be that as specified by the coatings manufacturer.
38
39 Replica Tape & Micrometer: Testex X -Course Replica Tape shall be
40 employed to determine the surface profile of blasted surfaces. Surface
41 profile shall be as specified.
42
43 Dry Film Thickness Measurements: Dry film thickness reading shall be
44 taken with a properly calibrated (per the manufacturer's instructions)
45 Type 1 (magnetic) or Type 2 (electromagnetic) instrument. Dry film
46 thickness reading will be taken and recorded in the in a frequency and
47 manner as dictated by the Engineer.
PAINTING
09900-20
09/28/23
•
• 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 3.05 PAINT
13
14 A.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
• 24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
.46
47
Holiday Detection: After completion of immersion coating systems on
steel surfaces, all surfaces shall be holiday detected in accordance with
ASTM G 62 low voltage holiday detection. Holiday detector shall be a
Tinker & Rasor Model M-1 or equal. Areas found to have holidays shall
be marked and repaired in accordance with the paint manufacturer's
instructions. The Engineer shall be notified of time of testing so that he
might be present to witness testing. The Contractor shall provide ladders,
rigging, etc. as necessary to allow the Engineer to spot check paint
thickness of each coat.
General Notes & Guidelines:
1. All color numbers and names herein refer to the master color card.
Colors of specified equal manufacturers shall be submitted for review to
the Engineer.
2. Pipe lines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be
assigned a color by the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral part
of the Contract.
3. When color coding is specified or directed by the Engineer, it shall consist
of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, through
lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids, or semi -liquids,
including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings,
fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any operating
accessories which are integral to a whole functional mechanical pipe and
electrical conduit systems.
4. The colors of the Finish Schedule shall be interpreted as follows:
COLORS TNEMEC # COLORS
White 11 WH Tank Blue
Ivory 01 BR Blue
Red 06SF D. Blue
L. Green 52GN L. Blue
Green 09SF 'Aqua
D. Green 08SF
COLORS
L. Brown
Brown
Bronze
L. Gray
M. Gray
TNEMEC #
06BR
84BR
86BR
31GR
33GR
TNEMEC #
25BL
11SF
78BL
26BL
10GN
COLORS
Inter. Orange
Orange
Tan
Yellow
Safety Yellow
PAINTING
09900-21
TNEMEC #
05S F
04SF
04BR
03SF
02SF
09/28/23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D. Gray 34GR
5. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which
are potential hazards, shall be Safety Orange 04SF.
6. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA
standards.
7. All in-line equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall
be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be
painted with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges attached
to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color. Tanks
shall be painted the color of the piping system that they serve, unless the
tank is fiberglass or polyethylene.
8. All conduits shall be painted to match its background surface.
9. Building surface colors shall be painted, as scheduled in the Finish
Schedule, or as selected by the Engineer.
10. Control panels shall be factory finished.
3.06 GUARANTEE AND ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION
A. All work shall be warranted for a period of one year from date of acceptance of
the project.
B. The Owner will notify the Contractor at least 30 days prior to the anniversary
date and shall establish a date for the inspection. Any defects in the coating
system shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
Should a failure occur to 25% of the painted surface, either interior or exterior,
the entire surface shall be cleaned and painted in accordance with these
specifications.
3.07 PAINT AND COLOR CODING SCHEDULE
Piping and Legend
Backwash Waste
Blower Air
Coagulant
Compressed Air
Drains
Fuel
Potable Water
Process Sample
Reclaimed Effluent
Return Activated Sludge
Color Bands
Light Brown
Green Orange
Aqua
Dark Green Red
Black
Red White
Dark Blue
Light Grey Red
Pantone Purple 522C
Brown
PAINTING
09900-22
09/28/23
•
•
•
• 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
• 24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
•
Sodium Hypochlorite
Sprinkler
Thickened Sludge
Wastewater
Waste Activated Sludge
Yellow
Red
Dark Brown Orange
Dark Gray
White
Equipment and Building
Exterior Equipment, Valves, Gates, Fans
Interior Equipment and Pumps (including factory finished)
Structural Steel (Interior)
Ceiling
Cranes and Hoists
Ductwork
Interior Air Handling and Ventilation Equipment
Valve and Gate Operators
Electrical Conduit and Junction Boxes
Submerged Concrete
3.08 PAINT SCHEDULE
Matc
Matc
Matc
Color
Match System
Match System
White
White
Yellow
h Surface Mounted
h Surface Mounted
Match System
h Surface Mounted
Black
A. All new equipment shall be painted to match the color of the existing equipment
being replaced.
B. All new piping, valves, and supports shall be painted to match the color of the
existing equipment piping valves, and supports being replaced.
C. Painting described by additive alternate items shall match the color of the
existing items.
D. Other items to be painted are as noted on the drawings and/or in the
Specifications.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
09900-23
09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
PAINTING
09900-24
09/28/23
•
•1 SECTION 13208
2
3 SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMPS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SUMMARY
8
9 A. Contractor shall furnish and install four submersible sewage pumping units at
10 the East WRF Influent Pump Station, together with base elbows, guide rail
11 systems, liquid level controls, control panels, access covers and all
12 appurtenances necessary for a complete installation.
13
14 1.02 REFERENCES
15
16 A. Codes and standards referred to in this section are:
17
18 1. ASTM A 48 -Specification for Grey Iron Castings
19 2. Hydraulic Institute Standards
20 3. IEEE 82 -Test Procedure for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated
21 Conductors
•22 4. NEC -National Electric Code
23 5. AFBMA 9 -Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
24 6. AFBMA 10 -Specifications for Metal Balls
25
26 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
27
28 A. General: Provide pumps of the vertical, centrifugal, heavy duty, non -clog, close -
29 coupled, submersible type, each driven by submersible electric motor
30 mounted as an integral part of the pump. Design the pumping units to pump
31 raw unscreened sewage. Arrange the pumping equipment guide rails and base
32 elbow for installation in the spaces shown without appreciable revision of the
33 piping or structure. All four pumps shall be operated with variable frequency
34 drives.
35
36 B. Operating Conditions: Provide pumps to operate at the capacities and heads
37 and over the range of operating conditions specified without overloading,
38 cavitation, and vibration. Furnish the pumps in accordance with the following
39 requirements:
40
41
42
43
•44
45
46
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMPS
13208-1 09/28/23
1
Items
Requirements
Pump #1
Pump #2
Pump #3
Pump #4
Pump Model
Flgyt NP3306
Flgyt NP3306
Flygt NP3171
Flygt NP3171
Capacity at rating point (gpm)
5020
5020
2000
2000
Total head at duty point (feet)
51.8
51.8
34
34
Efficiency at duty point
80%
80%
70%
70%
Shutoff head (feet)
93
93
103
103
Pump discharge diameter,
minimum (inches)
14
14
6
6
Pump speed, maximum (rpm)
885
885
1755
1755
Motor horsepower (hp)
85
85
25
25
Rated Voltage (V)
480
480
460
460
2
3
4
5
6
7
C.
Pump Curve: Design each pump to have a continuously rising characteristic
curve from the rating point to shutoff which passes through the rating point,
and which meets or exceeds the specified heads and capacities, all within
the Hydraulic Institute tolerances.
8 D. Provide submersible units capable of sustaining full reverse runaway speed
9 without damage.
10
11 1.04 SUBMITTALS
12
13 A. General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in
14 Division 01.
15
16 B. Shop Drawings: Submit working drawings, including arrangement and erection
17 drawings of the equipment and equipment operating characteristics. Include
18 the following:
19
20 1. Pump performance curves. Draw the curves for the specified conditions
21 including those at reduced speed. Plot head, input kilowatts, and overall
22 efficiency, as a function of capacity from zero to maximum capacity.
23
24 2. Certification that the pump is physically capable of operating at the
25 specified reduced speed operating condition.
26
27 3. General arrangement drawing of pumping unit, base elbow, and guide rail
28 system. Include equipment weight and anchor methods and materials.
29
30 4. Cross section drawing of pumping unit.
31
32 5. Parts list with materials of construction identified.
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMPS
13208-2 09/28/23
•1
2 6. Motor performance characteristics.
3
4 7. Spare parts list.
5
6 a) At minimum shall include:
7
8 i. 1 set of special tools required to service the pumps
9
10 ii. 2 mechanical seals, one for each type of pump
11
12 8. Painting procedure.
13
14 C. Quality Control Submittals: Submit one (1) electronic copy of the certified Shop
15 Test results.
16
17 D. Operation and Maintenance: Submit the Operation and Maintenance manuals
18 for the pumping equipment.
19
20 1.05 PUMP WARRANTY
21
22 A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the pumps being supplied against
•23 defects in workmanship and materials for a period of five (5) years from the
24 date of system acceptance by the Owner under normal use, operation, and
25 service.
26
27 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
28
29 A. Qualifications: Provide pumping equipment produced by a manufacturer who
30 regularly engages in the design, manufacture, assembly, and production of
31 submersible sewage pumping equipment of the size and type as specified
32 for not less than five years.
33
34 B. Regulatory Requirements: Rate the motor unit, and wet well wiring for
35 service in hazardous Class 1, Division 1 locations.
36
37 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
38
39 A. Deliver, store, and handle all products and materials as specified in Division 01.
40
41 1.08 PARTS
42
43 A. Special Tools: Furnish a complete set of special wrenches, spanners,
• 44 eyebolts, and other special tools sufficient to completely dismantle and
45 reassemble each kind and size of pumping unit. Provide tools of forged steel,
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMPS
13208-3 09/28/23
1 case hardened, and full finished. Furnish the sets with a metal tool case with a
2 handle and provision for padlocking.
3
4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
5
6 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
7
8 A. Acceptable manufacturers are Flgyt, or others approved equal.
9
10 2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
11
12 A. Materials: Provide stainless steel fasteners, bolts, nuts, and washers where
13 exposed to the pumped liquid.
14
15 B. Component Joints: Provide machined metal -to -metal joints on component parts
16 that are assembled together. Fit with an "O"ring seal where watertight joints
17 are required. Arrange the "O"ring seal for automatic compression and sealing
18 without adjustment or bolt torquing procedures. Do not use flat gaskets or
19 sealing compounds to obtain watertight joints.
20
21 2.03 CASING
22
23 A. General: Provide pump casing of the centrifugal single volute, centerline
24 discharge type. Do not use diffusion vanes.
25
26 B. Materials: Construct pump casing of ASTM A48, Class 30B or 35B cast iron.
27
28 C. Wear Ring: Construct renewable wear rings of stainless steel.
29
30 2.04 IMPELLER
31
32 A. General: Design impeller of the enclosed non -clog type. Provide pump -out
33 vanes or a back ring, arranged with minimum clearances so as to preclude
34 solids and stringy material from damaging the mechanical seal, on the back of
35 the impeller.
36
37 B. Materials: Construct the impeller of cast iron ASTM A48, Class 30B or 535B.
38
39 C. Balance: Dynamically balance the impellers.
40
41 D. Wear Ring: Construct renewable impeller wear ring of stainless steel.
42
43 E. Assembly: Secure the impeller to the shaft with a stainless steel key and lock
44 nut in such a way that it cannot unscrew or become loosened due to rotation in
45 either direction.
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMPS
13208-4 09/28/23
•
•1
2 2.05 OIL CHAMBER
3
4 A. General: Provide an oil chamber to function as a buffer between the
5 pumped liquid in the casing and the motor. Arrange the oil chamber to
6 accommodate thermal expansion of the oil. Furnish an oil chamber drain plug
7 that is accessible from outside the pump unit and permits changing oil without
8 dismantling pump components.
9
10 B. Materials: Construct the oil chamber of ASTM A48 cast iron, Class 30B or
11 35B.
12
13 2.06 MECHANICAL SEAL
14
15 A. Design: Provide each pump with double tandem mechanical seals. Design
16 the upper seal unit, between the oil chamber and motor housing, with one
17 stationary silicon -carbide ring and one positively driven rotating silicon carbide
18 ring. Design the lower seal unit, between the pump casing and oil chamber,
19 with one stationary ring and one positively driven rotating ring. Furnish these
20 rings made of silicon -carbide. Use type 316 stainless steel for metal parts.
21 Protect the spring element of the lower seal from solids contained in the
22 pumped liquid. Do not rely upon the pumped liquid for lubrication. No seal
• 23 damage is to result from operating the pumping unit out of its liquid
24 environment. Conventional double mechanical seals with a single or double
25 constant differential pressure to effect sealing and subject to opening and
26 penetration by pumping forces will not be acceptable.
27
28 2.07 MOTOR
29
30 A. General: Provide submersible pump motor of 460 -volt, 3-phase, 60 -hertz. The
31 pump shall be non -overloading throughout the entire range of operation
32 without employing service factor.
33
34 B. Ratings: Design the motor to have suitable output torque and speed
35 characteristic to start and operate the pump over the range of specified
36 conditions. For constant speed pumping units do not exceed the nameplate
37 horsepower rating under maximum load conditions. Base the nameplate
38 horsepower rating on an 80 degrees C temperature rise above an ambient
39 temperature of 40 degrees C.
40
41 C. Insulation: Provide the motor with a minimum of NEMA Class H (180
42 degrees C) moisture resistant insulation. Construct stator coils with NEMA
43 Class H insulated winding wire. Apply impregnation resin to stator assembly
•44 in three dip and bake steps.
45
46 D. Stator Housing: Provide the motor with an ASTM A48, Class 30B or 35B cast
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMPS
13208-5 09/28/23
1 iron stator housing. Sewage jackets will not be considered acceptable.
2
3 E. Cables: Provide the motor cable entry with a mechanical locking ring or
4 compression type cord grip to protect the cable jacket from being pulled out of
5 the motor. Do not use epoxy for this purpose. Arrange the cable entry so as
6 to provide a watertight seal with a terminal board and terminations next to the
7 motor. Isolate the cable entry leads from the internal motor leads to prevent
8 entry of water into the motor chamber by leakage or wicking. Provide cables
9 suitable for submersible pump application and conforming to NEC
10 specifications for cable sizing. Provide permanent label on cables.
11
12 F Shaft
13
14 1. Design: Provide a one piece, fully machined pump, and motor shaft.
15 Design the shaft to limit shaft deflection under maximum pumping
16 load to .002 inches at the lower mechanical seal face and to obtain
17 a rotating assembly first critical speed of not less than 150 percent of
18 the rated speed.
19
20 2. Material: Provide shafts of stainless steel.
21
22 G. Bearings
23
24 1. Design: Provide two anti -friction bearing assemblies. Design one
25 assembly to carry only radial loads and to be free to float axially within
26 the frame. Design the other assembly to carry both radial and axial
27 loads and to be restrained from axial movement.
28
29 2. Bearing Life: Select bearings in accordance with AFBMA 9 and
30 AFBMA 10, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball and Roller Bearings,
31 to have a 100,000 -hour minimum L10 bearing life at maximum pumping
32 load that occurs under the specified operating range conditions.
33
34 2.08 PROTECTION MONITORING SYSTEM
35
36 A. General: Provide each pumping unit with a monitoring system to protect critical
37 machine functions during operation.
38
39 B. Motor Winding Temperature: Provide thermal switches, one per phase, to
40 protect against overheating. Initiate an alarm and motor shutdown on high
41 temperature.
42
43 2.09 GUIDE RAIL SYSTEM AND BASE ELBOW
44
45 A. Design: Provide each pump with a base elbow and guide rail system.
46 Design the guide rail system to permit installation and removal of the pump
47 from its base elbow discharge connection without requiring personnel to enter
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMPS
13208-6 09/28/23
•
1 the wet well.
0 2
3 B. Guide Rail System: Provide a guide bracket which is an integral part of the
4 pump casing and permits sliding the pumping unit, along two unthreaded 316
5 stainless steel guide rails. Provide the guide rails of 316 stainless steel pipe
6 connected to the base elbow at the bottom. Support the guide rails at
7 intermediate locations and at the top with stainless steel brackets bolted to the
8 wall of the wet well or concrete slab. Fit each pump with a 316 stainless steel
9 cable of adequate length and strength to permit the raising and lowering of the
10 pump for inspection and removal.
11
12 C. Base Elbow: Provide a cast iron base elbow arranged for automatic pump
13 connection. Provide the pump casing with a machined discharge flange
14 which, when the pump is lowered into the pumping position, will automatically
15 align and mate with the plain -end of the base elbow. Design the discharge
16 connection such that no motion other than vertical is required to seat the
17 mating flange of the casing to the base elbow. Accomplish sealing of the pump
18 connection by metal to metal contact or by a positive resilient seal of Buna-N
19 attached to the pump casing discharge flange. Design the base elbow to
20 support the weight of the pumping unit and prevent it from bearing directly on
21 the wet well floor.
22
23 D. Mounting Accessories: Provide anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and accessories
• 24 and other adapter equipment necessary for mounting the pumping
25 equipment and appurtenances. Construct anchor bolts, nuts, washers,
26 accessories and adaptor equipment of 316 stainless steel. Provide 3/8 -inch
27 minimum 316 stainless steel chain a minimum of 20 inches long attached to a
28 minimum 1/4 -inch minimum 316 stainless steel wire rope which is to be hung
29 on a 316 stainless steel rack at the top of the wet well. The Contractor shall
30 coordinate with the pump manufacturer and the precast manufacturer to
31 include all hardware that is required to be pre -casted into the concrete wetwell
32 in order to properly anchor the pump.
33
34 PART 3 - EXECUTION
35
36 3.01 INSTALLATION
37
38 A. Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
39 and approved shop drawings and as specified in Division 1. Complete all
40 wiring and piping and make all necessary adjustments to equipment to provide
41 a complete operational pumping installation.
42
43 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
44
•45 A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish the services of a qualified
46 representative of the manufacturer to provide instruction for proper installation
47 of the equipment, inspect the completed installation, make any necessary
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMPS
13208-7 09/28/23
1 adjustments, participate in the startup of the equipment, participate in the field
2 testing of the equipment, and place the equipment in trouble-free operation,
3 as specified in Division 1.
4
5 B. Tests: After installation of the pumping units, control equipment and all
6 appurtenances, subject each unit to a field running test as specified in
7 Division 01, under actual operating conditions. Perform the field tests in the
8 presence of and as directed by the ENGINEER. Demonstrate that under all
9 conditions of operation each unit:
10
11 1. Has not been damaged by transportation or installation.
12 2. Has been properly installed.
13 3. Has no mechanical defects.
14 4. Has been properly connected.
15 5. Is free of overheating of any parts.
16 6. Is free of overloading of any parts.
17
18 Test the pumps to demonstrate that the pumps and control system operate as
19 specified. Promptly correct any defects in the equipment or failure to meet the
20 requirements of the Specifications.
21
22 Conduct 72 hours of continuous operation test priorto acceptance.
23
24 C. Demonstrate that the pump can be properly removed from and lowered into the
25 wetwell.
26
27 3.03 CLEANING AND PAINTING
28
29 A. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the sewage, other than stainless
30 steel or brass, shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of
31 acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with a polyester resin paint finish on
32 the exterior of the pump.
33
34 END OF SECTION
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMPS
13208-8 09/28/23
•
1 SECTION 13280
•
2
3 TANK SPRAY CLEANING SYSTEM
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SUMMARY
8
9 A. Contractor shall furnish and install a tank spray cleaning system at the East WRF
10 Influent Pump Station, including: three spray nozzle heads, SCH 80 PVC piping,
11 fittings, and all appurtenances necessary for a complete installation per the
12 Contract Documents.
13
14 1.02 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division 01.
17
18 B. Shop Drawings: Submit working drawings, including arrangement and erection
19 drawings of the equipment and equipment operating characteristics. Include the
20 following:
21
22 1. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment.
•23 2. Parts list with materials of construction identified.
24 3. O&M Manual
25
26 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
27
28 A. Qualifications: Provide equipment produced by a manufacturer who regularly engages
29 in the design, manufacture, assembly, and production of such spray nozzle as
30 specified for not less than five years.
31
32 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
33
34 A. Deliver, store, and handle all products and materials as specified in Division 01.
35
36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
37
38 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
39
40 A. Spray Nozzle manufacturer shall be Spraying Systems Co., or approved equal.
41
42 2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
43
•44
NOZZLE SPRAY SYSTEM
13280-1 09/28/23
1 A. Spray Nozzle: The spray nozzles shall be manufactured by Spraying Systems Co.,
2 model TankJet 180 Tank Cleaner, or Engineer approved equal, with the following
3 specifications:
4
5 1. Maximum tank diameter of 80 ft. (24.4 m)
6 2. Flow rate range of 30 to 300 gpm (114 to 1136 Ipm)
7 3. Operating pressure range of 40 to 350 psi (2.8 to 24 bar)
8 4. No. of Nozzles: 3
9 5. Nozzle Size: 9/32 in.
10 6. Wash cycle time range of 10 to 30 min
11 7. Maximum temperature of 250°F (121°C)
12 8. Materials:
13 (a) Gears — 17-4PH stainless steel
14 (b) 0 -rings — self-lubricating EPDM or Viton
15 (c) Seals — high-performance spring -energized PTFE
16 (d) Gear shaft bearing system — PTFE or oilite bearing
17 (e) All other metallurgy — 316 stainless steel or Viton
18 9. Inlet connection: 2" NPT (F) with 2-1/2" quick -disconnect (M)
19 10. Spray Coverage: 180 degrees
20
21 2.03 Spare Parts
22
23 A. Manufacturer shall supply the following spare parts:
24
25 1. (1) Bearing -Cup Repair Kit
26 2. (1) Gear Ratio Gearset
27 3. (1) Gearbox Bearing Replacement Kit
28 4. (1) 0 -Ring Kit
29 5. (1) Tool Kit
30
31
32 PART 3 - EXECUTION
33
34 3.01 INSTALLATION
35
36 A. Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
37 approved shop drawings and as specified in Division 1. Complete all piping and
38 make all necessary adjustments to equipment to provide a complete operational
39 pumping installation.
40
41 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
42
43 A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of
44 the manufacturer to provide instruction for proper installation of the equipment,
45 inspect the completed installation, make any necessary adjustments, participate in
46 the startup of the equipment, participate in the field testing of the equipment, and
47 place the equipment in trouble-free operation, as specified in Division 1.The
NOZZLE SPRAY SYSTEM
13280-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 contractor shall provide detailed drawings and specifications of the nozzle spray
0 2 system, including the piping and nozzles, prior to installation.
3
4 B. Tests: After installation of the pumping units, control equipment and all
5 appurtenances, subject each unit to a field running test as specified in Division 01,
6 under actual operating conditions. Perform the field tests in the presence of the
7 Owner's Representative. Demonstrate that under all conditions of operation each
8 unit:
9
10 1. Has not been damaged by transportation or installation.
11 2. Has been properly installed.
12 3. Has no mechanical defects.
13 4. Has been properly connected.
14 5. Is free of overheating of any parts.
15 6. Is free of overloading of any parts.
16
•
•
17 END OF SECTION
18
NOZZLE SPRAY SYSTEM
13280-3 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
NOZZLE SPRAY SYSTEM
13280-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 13290
2
•3 LARGE BUBBLE MIXING SYSTEM
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. The Large Bubble Mixing System includes a rotary screw air compressor
10 with dryer unit which will be installed in the blower room, inside the sludge
11 handling building. The air produced by the air compressor unit will be
12 transported through a 316 stainless steel airline to the Secondary Valve
13 Enclosure (SVE) electrical control panel (PLC). On the discharge side of
14 the PLC unit, seven (7) 316 stainless steel airlines will penetrate through
15 the pump station wall and connect to the eleven (11) accumulator plates
16 installed on the bottom of the wet well. When the system is in operation,
17 oval shaped bubbles will produce from the accumulator plates and rise to
18 the top of the tank, moving the entire contents in a powerful mixing motion
19 without any moving parts inside the wet well.
20
21 1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK
22
23 A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, appliances, materials and
24 performing all operations in connection with providing and installing a
25 complete Large Bubble Mixing System as shown on the Contract
•
26 Drawings and as specified herein.
27
28 1.03 REFERENCES
29
30 A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
31
32 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): PTC 10,
33 Compressors and Exhausters.
34 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
35 a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
36 b. MG 1, Motors and Generators.
37
38 1.04 DEFINITIONS
39
40 A. Standard Cubic Foot Per Minute (scfm): Volume flow rate of air at
41 standard conditions of 60 degrees F, 14.7 psia, and 36 percent relative
42 humidity.
43
44 1.05 SUBMITTALS
45
46 1. Complete shop drawings, startup Manual, O&M manual shall be
47 submitted to the Engineer for review.
.48
49 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
50
LARGE BUBBLE MIXING SYSTEM
13290-1 09/28/23
1 A. Provide large mixing bubble system and air compressor unit produced by
2 a manufacturer who regularly engages in design, manufacturer, assembly,
3 and production of such equipment of size and type as specified for not Tess
4 than fifteen years.
5
6 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
7
8 A. Deliver, store, and handle all products and materials as specified in
9 Division0l .
10
11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
12
13 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
14
15 A. Large Bubble Mixing Unit shall be manufactured by Pulsair,or approved
16 equal.
17
18 B. Rotary Screw Air Compressor with Dryer shall be manufactured by Atlas
19 Copco, or approved equal.
20
21 2.02 NAMEPLATES
22
23 A. Provide each major item of equipment with the manufacturer's name,
24 address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a
25 plate secured to the item of equipment.
26
27 B. Nameplates shall be provided for, but not limited to, air compressor and
28 pneumatic mixing system control panel.
29
30
31 2.03 LARGE BUBBLE MIXING UNIT
32
33 A. General
34
35 1. The Large bubble mixing unit shall be designed to use with
36 compressed air to form bubbles in wastewater wet wells to induce
37 mixing, maintain a consistent suspension of material within the liquid
38 mixture, prevent the settling of material out of the liquid mixture, and
39 prevent the formation of grease caps on the liquid surface. The
40 manufacturer shall provide a complete integrated system consisting of
41 an air compression system, PLC controller, pneumatic mixing system
42 control panel, and bubble accumulator plates of the size and quantity
43 necessary for mixing.
44 2. The mixing unit shall not include any components located in the wet
45 well that pivot, rotate, oscillate, or otherwise move to create the mixing
46 action.
47 3. The large bubble mixing unit shall be designed for continuous duty
48 operation. System components installed within the wet wells shall be
49 rated for continuous submerged wastewater application.
50 4. The Targe bubble mixing unit will be installed in the wet wells will
LARGE BUBBLE MIXING SYSTEM
13290-2 09/28/23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
achieve uniform mixing throughout the entire volume of these wet wells
as described below.
Name
Wet Well
Number of Compartments
1
Tank Shape/Configuration
Rectangular
Tank Dimensions
Length
25'
Width
16.5'
Height
20'
Average Liquid Depth
5'
5. The large bubble mixing unit shall be capable of maintaining a
consistent solids concentration throughout the wet wells.
a. The liquid mixture is municipal wastewater.
9 B. Equipment Parts
10
11 1. Large Bubble Mixing Unit Controller shall be manufactured by Pulsair,
12 model PPC -1A07 -H03, or approved equal. With the following items:
13 a. Eleven (11) 12" 304 stainless steel double accumulator plates
14 with mounting eyelets.
15 b. One (1) NEMA -4X Stainless Steel Powder Coated White
16 enclosure
17 c. Color touchscreen HMI interface with standard adjustable mixing
18 modes
19 i. Continuous mixing
20 ii. Intermittent continuous mixing
21 iii. Process (batch) mixing
22 iv. Process (batch) intermittent mixing
23 d. Remote override & interrupt
24 e. Password Protection
25 f. Power Outage Restart Option
26 g. Programable Fault Monitoring
27 2. Pre -plumbed all weather NEMA -4X 304 Stainless Steel Powder Coated
28 White valve enclosure shall include:
29 a. One (1) Large Bubble Mixing Unit Controller housed inside a
30 NEMA -4X FRP enclosure
31 b. One (1) EPI -7/1 (Electro -pneumatic interface) integrated
32 c. Seven (7) 1-1/2" air injection valves mounted on air manifold
33 d. One (1) high-flow air filter with auto drain
34 e. One (1) manual air pressure regulator
35 f. One (1) Pressure transducer
36
37 2.04 AIR COMPRESSOR
38
39 A. General
40
41 1. Air Compressor unit shall be manufactured by Atlas Copco, model G
LARGE BUBBLE MIXING SYSTEM
13290-3 09/28/23
1 Series 7L-125 psi, or approved equal.
2 2. Furnish air compressors as a complete system that includes
3 compressor, motor, controls, refrigerant air dryer, filters, receiver, and
4 accessories.
5
6 B. Equipment Parts
7
8 1. Single stage, oil injected, rotary screw air compressor, includes the
9 following items and features:
10 a. Tank mounted on a 120 gallon ASME approved tank
11 b. Air Compressor Data Summary:
12 i. Inlet Condition
13 Barometric pressure 14.5 PSI
14 Ambient Temperature 68 F
15 Relative Humidity: 0%
16 ii. Performance
17 Discharge Pressure 125 PSI
18 Capacity Delivery 39.2 CFM
19 Package power input, loaded pack 10.8 kW
20 Package power input, unloaded pack 4.7 kW
21 Package power input, loaded FF 11.3 kW
22 Package power input, unloaded FF 4.9 kW
23 Sound Level 65 dB(A)
24 Minimum ambient temperature 32 F
25 Maximum ambient temperature 115 F
26 iii. Cooling Data
27 Cooling air flow pack 742 CFM
28 Discharge air temp Pack 16 F
29 Cooling air flow integrated dryer 230CFM
30 Discharge air temp FF 9 F
31 iv. Electrical Data: 460V, 60Hz, Type J or RK 25 A
32 Motor 10 HP
33 Motor Type 1E3 Prem. Eff
34 Enclosure TEFC
35 Efficiency 90.3%
36 Starter type DOL
37 v. Physical Data
38 Air discharge size 0.5" NPT
39 Condensate drain size 0.375" NPT
40 Oil sump capacity 0.8 gal
41
42 2. Filter
43 a. Filter shall be manufactured by Atlas Copco, model UD+, type 25,
44 or approved equal.
45 b. high efficient coalescing filter type, removes contaminants such as
46 liquid water, oil aerosol up to 0.01 ppm and particle size down to
47 0.01 micron. 40% pressure drop reduction, 0.0009 maximum oil
48 carry over
49 i. Smart indicator differential pressure gauge
50 ii. Non-stick float drain
LARGE BUBBLE MIXING SYSTEM
13290-4 09/28/23
1 iii. Aluminum die casted head and bowl
2
• 3
4 3. Oil Water Separator
a. Oil Water Separator shall be manufactured by Atlas Copco, model
5 OSC 12-2500 or approved equal.
6 b. Oil Water Separator shall include the following items and features:
7 i. Air Compressor Oil Type: synthetic oils and oil mixtures
8 ii. Filter Media: Orange Clay
9 iii. Condensate inlet: 1/"
10 iv. Water outlet: 3/8"
11 v. Test Outlet (ball valve) 3/8"
12 vi. Filing Volume: 0.5 gal
13
14 C. Spare Parts
15
16 1. Provide one (1) complete set of manufacturers recommended spare
17 parts.
18 2. Provide one (1) of each type of air filter per mixing system.
19
20 PART 3 - EXECUTION
21
22 3.01 GENERAL
23
24 A. Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's
•25 recommendations and approved shop drawings and as specified in
26 Division 01. Complete all wiring and piping and make all necessary
27 adjustments to equipment to provide a complete operational pumping
28 installation.
29
30 B. All equipment shall be field tested in accordance with this Section of the
31 Specifications.
32
33 3.02 WARRANTY
34
35 A. The complete system shall be warranted to be free from defects in
36 material and workmanship under normal and proper use and service, for a
37 period of one (1) year after startup and acceptance by the Owner, or 15-
38 months from the date of shipment; whichever should occur first. The
39 Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to repair or replace any
40 defective warranted items specified in this section.
41
42 B. Warranties: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Manufacturer of
43 the equipment and the Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
44 components of the equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within
45 the specified warranty period.
46
47
•48 3.03 STARTUP & FUNCTIONAL TESTING AND INSPECTION
49
50 A. Services of Manufacturer's Representative as specified herein.
LARGE BUBBLE MIXING SYSTEM
13290-5 09/28/23
1
2 B. Provide services of factory -trained Service Engineer, specifically trained
3 on type of equipment specified with at least 5 -years' experience:
4
5 1. Submit qualifications of Service Engineer for approval.
6 2. Man -day requirements listed exclusive of travel time, and do not relieve
7 Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment
8 in satisfactory operation.
9 3. Start-up & Functional Testing and Inspection: Sufficient time for
10 calibration, testing and start-up.
11 a. 1 day(s)
12 4. Instruction: Sufficient time for classroom and/or field operation and
13 maintenance instruction.
14 a. 1 day(s)
15 b. Instruction can coincide with startup if scheduling allows.
16 5. Performance Testing (Full System Performance Test and Full System
17 Demonstration Test): Sufficient time for field performance testing.
18 a. 1 day(s)
19
20 3.04 PERFORMANCE TESTING
21
22 A. Manufacturer's Services:
23
24 1. Manufacturer's Service: Contractor shall obtain the services of a
25 qualified, factory -trained representative of the equipment manufacturer
26 to provide on-site assistance, direction and supervision during
27 equipment installation, start-up, testing, calibration, and adjustment as
28 required to deliver the Work, complete and operational, to the Owner
29 as specified herein, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
30 2. Equipment Start -Up: Furnish all labor, parts, tools and lubricants for
31 start- up, testing and placing the equipment in full operational condition
32 in accordance with the requirements specified herein.
33 3. For equipment start-up inspection, calibration, adjustment, testing and
34 operator training, provide a minimum site visit of one 8 -hour day per
35 pneumatic mixing system.
36
37 B. Upon complete installation of the air supply piping to each wet well, the
38 Contractor shall isolate the entire run of pipe from the pneumatic mixing
39 system control panel to the bubble forming accumulator plate. The
40 Contractor shall apply the manufacturer -recommended operating pressure
41 to the pipe and shall hold for 10 minutes. If the pipe loses pressure, the
42 Contractor shall be responsible for identifying the location of the leak and
43 making any necessary repairs, at no cost to the Owner. Following the
44 repair to a leak, the pipe shall be tested again until meeting the
45 requirements aforementioned. The wet well shall be brought online only
46 after the supply piping passes the approved pressure test and is accepted
47 by Engineer/Owner.
48
49 C. In the event that a unit fails to pass a test, make all modifications required
50 to place the unit in proper working order.
LARGE BUBBLE MIXING SYSTEM
13290-6 09/28/23
1
2 D. In the event that a unit fails a test a second time, remove the unit and
3 replace with a satisfactory one, at no cost to the Owner.
4
5 E. The Contractor shall provide all necessary instrumentation, equipment,
6 devices, and appurtenances, as well as temporary wiring or piping,
7 required to perform performance tests.
8
9
10 END OF SECTION
11
LARGE BUBBLE MIXING SYSTEM
13290-7 09/28/23
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
LARGE BUBBLE MIXING SYSTEM
13290-8 09/28/23
•1 SECTION 13305
2
3 CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
4
5 PART 1 GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. This section is provided to clarify the control strategies to be used to program the
10 changes defined as part of this project.
11
12 B. All SCADA PLC controller programming and SCADA Operator Interface Terminal
13 (OIT) or Operator Workstation Station (OWS) graphics and programming shall be
14 performed as defined in Section 13300.
15
16 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
17
18 A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include
19 the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Item.
20
21 1.03 RELATED WORK
22
23 A. Refer to Section 13300 "I & C - General Provisions."
• 24
25 PART 2 PRODUCTS — NOT USED
26
27 PART 3 EXECUTION
28
29 3.01 GENERAL
30
31 A. The control descriptions are broken into the following.
32
33 1. Flow Meters
34
35 2. Level Transmitters
36
37 B. The control descriptions are broken into a hierarchical layer concept. There may be
38 one layer or multiple layers per loop, depending upon that loop. An example of
39 multiple layered loop is as follows. The lowest layer of control, local control, is at that
40 piece of equipment or that piece of equipment's panel or drive. The second layer of
41 control is at an intermediate control panel between the equipment and the SCADA
42 I/O or vendor's PLC I/O. The third layer would be at the vendor's PLC or
43 microprocessor touchscreen station. The highest layer of control is by the SCADA
44 PLC System with its associated operator workstations (OWS) in the main control
45 room. The SCADA PLC/ OWS refers to both the SCADA PLC, which does the actual
• 46 monitoring and control logic for the process equipment and the SCADA operator
CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
13305-1 09/28/23
1 workstation (OWS), which are computers that have graphical software that interface
2 to the PLC software for monitoring and implementing all operator -required tasks to
3 control that process equipment. Any functions done in the operator workstations also
4 take place at all the SCADA OITs.
5
6 3.02 CONTROL FUNCTION DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL CRITERIA
7
8 A. The hardware and/or software functions noted by this paragraph reference are to be
9 implemented by the SCADA PLC/OWS control system specified herein.
10
11 B. The following list of ISA abbreviations is typical of those utilized. The description,
12 following the abbreviation, summarizes the basic function to be implemented in the
13 SCADA PLC/OWS software.
14
15 1. HS: Represent selector switches or pushbuttons, which shall be implemented by
16 keyboard entry. Function shall be similar to their hardware counterparts.
17 Examples are as follows:
18 a. HSH-Open Command
19 b. HSL -Close Command
20 c. HSS-Start/Stop Command
21
22 2. YI: Represents equipment status (i.e., availability, running, in remote, etc.)
23 implemented by a change of color on the OWS symbol for this equipment. For
24 motor driven equipment such as pumps, blowers, compressors, etc., availability
25 contact represents remote operation and no alarm conditions. Examples are as
26 follows:
27 a. YCI-Selector switch in computer, auto or remote position
28 b. YRI-Motor running status
29 c. YFI-Motor failure or overload status
30 d. YMI-Selector switch in maintenance position
31
32 3. PAL, AAH, UA, etc.: Represent high or low alarms implemented on the OWS.
33
34 4. FIC, PIC, AIC, etc.: Represent PID process controllers implemented in a
35 computer logic algorithm incorporating proportional, integral, and/or derivative
36 modes. Local/remote and manual/auto capabilities shall be provided.
37
38 5. FIK, PIK, AIK, etc.: Represent control stations implemented in logic (via keyboard
39 entry and CRT display) to allow downloading of a set point to a FIC, PIC, AIC,
40 etc., and display of the process variable or controller output.
41
42 6. FI, PI, AI, etc.: Represent digital output display on the CRT of a process variable
43 in engineering units and/or a dynamic representation of the variable by symbol or
44 graphical means.
45
CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
13305-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 7. FIR, PIR, AIR, Represent values stored on the hard disk to provide the data for
2 historical trend graphics of process variables against time (or other selected
3 variables).
4
5 8. ZSH, ZSL etc.: Represent high or low, open or close limit positions implemented
6 on the OWS
7
8 C. Following are general criteria followed for SCADA system design. Not all of them will
9 be applicable for the project. Detailed control descriptions for each process area are
10 provided in the following sections.
11
12 D. All interlocks that are represented, before the local operational descriptions, or are
13 stated as hardwired interlocks, shall interlock all the controls locally and at the SCADA
14 PLC/OWS or at the vendor PLCs. The SCADA PLC shall be programmed to
15 shutdown that equipment if that hardwired interlock is also wired to the SCADA PLC.
16
17 E. All interlocks that are represented in a particular layer of the operational descriptions,
18 shall interlock all the controls in that layer and the layer after it. However, the interlock
19 shall not interlock the commands in the layer before it.
20
21 F. All motors that are requested to start by an operator or an automatic program shall
22 alarm if the run confirm status for that motor does not activate within two seconds. If
23 a motor stops by an interlock or stops without any operator or SCADA intervention,
• 24 then that motor shall go into alarm. All motors that are stopped by a program or the
25 operator shall not go into an alarm.
26
27 G. All valves that are requested to open by an operator or an automatic program shall
28 alarm if the open feedback status for that valve does not activate within ten seconds.
29 All valves that are requested to close by an operator or an automatic program shall
30 alarm if the close feedback status for that valve does not activate within ten seconds.
31
32 H. Motors that have an H/O/A shall indicate to the operator that the pump is being run
33 in the "Hand" position. A motor is being run in "Hand" when the "Auto" position is not
34 true and the run confirm status is true. If not in "Auto" the SCADA PLC shall open up
35 its output contact to stop (shutdown) the pump from SCADA.
36
37 I. All motors shall be programmed so if a motor stops for any reason, it shall not be re -
38 started automatically once the problem with the motor has been resolved. The start
39 command on the OWS shall not be a maintained contact but a momentary command
40 to the PLC. The run confirms of all motors shall seal in the control output to the motor
41 once the momentary start command drops out. The run confirms shall be on a five
42 second timer delay in that if the run confirm is not present after five seconds, the
43 contact output to the motor from the PLC shall drop out. Thus, the only way a motor
44 can be restarted after five seconds by the SCADA system is if the operator reinitiates
45 the start command for that motor on the OWS or when that motor control at the OWS
III
CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
13305-3 09/28/23
1 is placed in complete automatic mode and the SCADA computer through
2 logic/interlocks requests the motor to run.
3
4 J. Terminology associated with interlocks is as follows:
5
6 1. When a contact or status is true, the SCADA computer will receive power to its
7 input channel. The SCADA computer registers this as a binary bit of one.
8
9 2. When a contact or status is false, the SCADA computer will receive no power
10 (open circuit) to its input channel. The SCADA computer registers this as a binary
11 bit of zero.
12
13 K. When an analog signal goes outside the 4-20 mA range due to a failure at the
14 instrument or PLC card, the following SCADA programming shall take place:
15
16 1. Alarm the signal at any local OITs and in the HMI system.
17
18 2. If the analog signal is associated with a control loop or ratio control loop that loop
19 shall go into manual.
20
21 3. If the analog signal is used in a calculation, that calculation shall use the last good
22 analog signal. The computer shall place the control loop in manual if using the
23 calculation.
24
25 L. Disable all alarms on analog inputs unless specifically called for in the drawings or
26 specifications.
27
28 M. All interlocks that shutdown (Stop a piece of equipment and prevent it from being
29 restarted or moved) shall be shown on the faceplate pop-up graphic for that piece of
30 equipment.
31
32 N. The run confirms or on status of all motors and lamps shall be accumulated to
33 calculate a run time status of the equipment on the HMI graphic. Each run time
34 accumulation shall come with a reset button on the HMI screen.
35
36 O. All flow indications shall be totalized. Do not totalize if the analog signal is outside the
37 4-20 mA range. Each flow totalization shall come with a reset button on the HMI
38 screen. Do not totalize if the value of the flow input is less than 2% of the full range
39 of the input.
40
41 END OF SECTION
42
CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
13305-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 Equipment: Flow Meters
2 Tags:
3 PLC:
4
5 General:
6
7 1. One new flow meter shall be installed at the influent assembly as shown on the
8 Drawings.
9
10 2. The flow meters shall measure, record, totalize, and indicate flow at the HMI.
11
12 3. Instantaneous flow, daily maximum flow, daily minimum flow, and a daily flow
13 total shall be displayed at the HMI.
14
15 4. Historical trending shall be provided for instantaneous flow at the HMI.
16
17 Equipment: Level Transmitters
18 Tags: LIT -105
19 PLC:
20
21 1. One new level transmitter shall be installed at the influent pump station as
22 shown on the Drawings.
23
• 24 2. The level transmitters shall measure, record, and indicate level at the HMI.
25
26 3. The level transmitters shall be provided with operator adjustable low and high
27 level alarm setpoints that shall be displayed on the HMI.
28
29 4. The level transmitter shall be used for automatic controls as specified herein.
30
31 5. Historical trending shall be provided for instantaneous level on the HMI.
32
•
CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
13305-5 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
13305-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 SECTION 13340
•
2
3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all instrumentation and controls hereinafter
10 specified to perform the intended function and achieve a fully integrated and
11 operational system. The equipment and services defined herein shall be
12 furnished by a single instrumentation system integrator who shall coordinate the
13 instrument and control system for proper operation with related equipment and
14 materials provided by other suppliers of the Owner.
15
16 B. Work shall include all labor, materials, plant facilities and equipment, performance
17 of all work necessary to complete the manufacture, to make factory tests, to
18 prepare and Toad for shipment, to deliver to the site, to provide programming,
19 calibration, installation supervision, training system, start-up services, and
20 incidentals required to completely furnish and install an integrated instrumentation
21 and control system, including all work necessary during the Warranty Period, as
22 specified herein, in other specification sections as listed herein, and as shown on
23 the Drawings.
• 24
25 C. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance,
26 such as transducers or relays to interface with existing equipment or equipment
27 provided by other suppliers under other Sections of these Specifications, shall be
28 furnished, coordinated, and interfaced by the instrumentation system integrator
29 whether or not they are shown on the Drawings or specified herein.
30
31 D. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed, and placed in proper
32 operating condition in full conformity with detail Drawings and Specifications,
33 engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment
34 manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.
35
36 E. All control panel and panel assemblies shall be assembled by a UL 508 approved
37 panel shop. Each panel and panel assembly shall bear the mark of such.
38
39 1.02 SUBMITTALS
40
41 A. Submit complete documentation of all field instruments using ISA-TR20.00.01-
42 2007 data sheet formats. Submit a complete Bill of Materials (BOM) or Index that
43 lists all instrumentation equipment. The list shall be sorted by Loop Number.
44
45 B. Submit separate data sheets for each instrument including:
• 46
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-1 09/28/23
1 1. Plant Equipment Number and ISA tag number per the Drawings.
2
3 2. Product (item) name used herein and on the Drawings.
4
5 3. Manufacturer's complete model number.
6
7 4. Location of the device.
8
9 5. Input - output characteristics.
10
11 6. Range, size, and graduations in engineering units.
12
13 7. Physical size with dimensions, enclosure NEMA classification and mounting
14 details in sufficient detail to determine compliance with requirements.
15
16 8. Materials of construction for enclosure and wetted parts.
17
18 9. Instrument or control device sizing calculations where applicable.
19
20 10. Certified calibration data for all flow metering devices.
21
22 11. Two -wire or four -wire device type as applicable.
23
24 C. Submit catalog cuts for all instruments. Submit descriptive literature for each
25 hardware component, which fully describes the units being provided.
26
27 D. Submit index and data sheets in electronic format as well as hard copies on 8-
28 1/2" x 11" formats. Electronic format shall be in Microsoft Excel or Word.
29
30 1.03 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATIONS
31
32 A. Instruments for hazardous locations shall have Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian
33 Standards Association (CSA), and CENELEC approvals and certifications as
34 specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device
35 Schedule. The instrument specifications in Part 2 state the Class, Division, and
36 gas groups for FM/CSA approval, followed in parenthesis by the CENELEC
37 certification; however, instruments provided are only required to have the
38 approval/certification stated above. The instrument shall have a stainless-steel tag
39 identifying the relevant approval or certification.
40
41 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42
43 A. Instrumentation and control equipment furnished shall be manufactured by a firm
44 regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar
45 equipment. Equipment furnished shall be new and of current design.
46
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
1 B. Equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and access to
i2 critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal field adjustments
3 where permitted or required herein shall be easily accessible upon removal of a
4 panel or cover.
5
6 C. Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the referenced
7 electrical codes and standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall be
8 used for establishing the minimum quality of the materials and equipment supplied
9 and installed. Equipment of the same type shall be a product of the same
10 manufacturer. Capacities of equipment shall not be Tess than that indicated on
11 the Drawings or specified herein.
12
13 D. All exposed pneumatic tubing shall be routed through a device designed to protect
14 the tubing from crushing through incidental contact. The pneumatic tubing shall
15 be attached to the protective track as required by manufacturer's
16 recommendations and shall be protected from crimping by those attachment
17 methods. The protective track devices shall be stainless steel and shall be "Tube -
18 Track" or approved equal.
19
20 E. All exterior mounted instruments shall be furnished with appropriately sized
21 stainless steel rain and sun shields.
22
23 F. Model numbers and names for equipment listed herein are for the purpose of
• 24 establishing a standard of quality or matching existing instrumentation. Like
25 equipment of a different manufacturer must be pre -approved by the Engineer.
26
27 1.05 MANUFACTURERS' START-UP AND TRAINING SERVICES
28
29 A. If indicated in the individual instrumentation paragraphs, the instrument
30 manufacturer or manufacturer's certified service representative shall provide start -
31 up and training services. This work shall not be done by the PCSS contractor.
32
33 B. The start-up services shall be to calibrate, oversee the installations of the sensor,
34 and start-up the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at
35 the instrument and to a remote system. The vendor shall work with the PCSS and
36 AESS to verify the transmitter sends correct information to the remote system (i.e.,
37 that the scaling and units are the same at the instrument and on the remote
38 operator interface).
39
40 C. While the instrument manufacturer or manufacturer's certified service
41 representative is starting up the instrumentation, training shall be provided to the
42 Owner's instrumentation technicians. The training shall be in how to calibrate,
43 install, troubleshoot, read the diagnostics, and maintain the sensor and
44 transmitter.
45
•
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-3 09/28/23
1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2
3 2.01 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
4
5 A. Type:
6
7 1. Microprocessor based compatible with the transducer(s) provided.
8
9 B. Functional/Performance:
10
11 2. Resolution (including transducer): Pius or minus 0.1 percent of range or
12 0.08 inches (2 mm), whichever is greater.
13
14 3. Accuracy (including transducer): Plus or minus 0.25 percent of range or
15 0.24 inches (6 mm).
16
17 C. Range:
18
19 1. As required by the installation indicated on the Drawings.
20
21 D. Temperature Range:
22
23 1. -20 to 50 degrees C.
24
25 E. Output:
26
27 1. Minimum one isolated 4-20 mA output and minimum four alarm contacts
28 (number of contacts above 4 required of each device to be determined by
29 signals required as shown on the drawings adjustable to trip at any point
30 in the instrument range.
31
32 2. Output contacts shall be rated 5 A at 230 VAC.
33
34 F. Temperature Compensation:
35
36 1. Compensation over the temperature range of the sensor.
37
38 G. Display:
39
40 1. Digital indicator displaying level/differential level or volume in engineering
41 units or percent as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device
42 Schedule.
43
44 H. Diagnostics:
45
46 1. On-screen instructions and display of self -diagnostics.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1
2 I. Loss of Signal:
3
4 1. Transmitter shall ignore momentary loss -of -echo signals and shall indicate
5 loss of echo on the transmitter unit.
6
7 J. Configuration Protection:
8
9 1. Programmable parameters shall be protected using E2PROM. Battery
10 backup protection is not acceptable.
11
12 K. Physical:
13
14 1. Transmitter shall be suitable for surface or pipe stand mounting. Enclosure
15 shall be NEMA 4X (IP65). A/C power.
16
17 L. Accessories Required:
18
19 1. Hand-held programmer where required for configuration and calibration of
20 the instrument.
21
22 M. Manufacturers:
23
•24 1. Siemens Model HydroRanger 200
25
26 2.02 MAGNETIC FLOWMETER
27
28 A. Flow Element Type:
29
30 1. Proline Promag W 400 or approved equal
31
32 B. Function/Performance:
33
34 1. Operating Temperature: Process liquid temperatures of 0 to 140 degrees
35 F or greater dependent upon liner and an ambient of minus 30 to 150
36 degrees F.
37
38 2. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) protection: RFI protection shall be
39 provided as recommended by the manufacturer.
40
41 3. Pressure rating: Equal to piping system where meter is installed.
42
43 4. Additional: Meter shall be capable of running empty indefinitely without
44 damage to any component. Meter shall be capable of maintaining
45 accuracy without straight runs of pipe upstream and downstream of the
•46 meter.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-5 09/28/23
1
2 C. Physical:
3
4 1. Metering Tube: Type 304 stainless steel or equivalent.
5
6 2. Flanges: ANSI 150 Ib. or DIN PN 16 carbon steel, as required by the
7 piping system, unless otherwise indicated. ANSI 150 Ib. or DIN PN 16
8 stainless steel flanges shall be used on all SS process pipes.
9
10 3. Liner: Polyurethane or composite elastomer unless otherwise indicated
11 on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule.
12
13 4. Electrodes: Type 316 stainless steel standard minimum requirements. All
14 electrodes to be compatible with process fluid as indicated on the
15 Drawings or electrodes to be supplied as listed in the Instrument Device
16 Schedule.
17
18 5. For sludge, polymer, or any slurry application where the electrodes will be
19 coated, a self-cleaning or a removable electrode option must be provided
20 with that meter.
21
22 6. Housing: For meters with remote mounted transmitters, meters below
23 grade shall be suitable for submergence for up to 48 hours to a depth of
24 30 ft (9m). Meters above grade shall be NEMA 4X (IP65). Where
25 hazardous areas are indicated on the Drawings, the equipment shall be
26 rated for that area.
27 7. Finish: All external surfaces shall have a chemical and corrosion resistant
28 finish.
29
30 D. Power Requirements:
31
32 1. Meter shall be 24 VDC powered instrument, receiving its power from
33 transmitter.
34
35 E. Accessories/Documentation Required:
36
37 a. Factory calibration: All meters shall be factory calibrated. A copy of the
38 calibration report shall be included in the O&M manual.
39
40 F. Grounding: Meter shall be grounded in accordance with the manufacturer's
41 recommendation. Provide ground ring, ground wires, gaskets, etc., as required.
42 All materials shall be suitable for the liquid being measured and must be
43 compatible with process fluid and with the process pipe. For meters with remote
44 mounted transmitters, signal cable for installation between the flow tube and the
45 transmitter. Length shall be as required by installation as indicated on the
46 Drawings.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
1
• 2 2.03 FLOW CONVERTER/TRANSMITTER:
3
4 A. Type: Micro -processor based intelligent transmitter compatible with flow tube
5 provided. Integral mount or mounted remote from the flow tube as shown on the
6 drawings or as required by the physical location.
7
8 B. Functional/Performance:
9
10 1. Accuracy (including flow tube): Plus/minus 0.5 percent of flow rate or
11 better.
12
13 2. Operating Temperature: —20 to 140 degrees F.
14
15 3. Output: Isolated 4-20 mA with HART protocol. Current output adjustable
16 over the full range of the instrument. Provide a dry contact to indicate
17 reverse flow.
18
19 4. Diagnostics: Self diagnostics with on screen display of faults.
20
21 5. Display: Digital indicator displaying flow in engineering units indicated in
22 the Instrument Device Schedule.
23
• 24 6. Totalizer: A fully configurable totalizer integral to the transmitter. Totalized
25 flow shall be displayed.
26
27 7. Empty Tube Zero: The transmitter shall include a feature that will lock the
28 output at zero when no flow is detected. The empty tube zero feature shall
29 be enabled automatically when the transmitter detects no flow or manually
30 through a contact input. Provide electrode cleaning unit to match flow
31 element requirements.
32
33 C. Physical:
34
35 a. Transmitter shall be suitable for surface or pipe stand mounting. Enclosure
36 shall be NEMA 4X (IP65).
37
38 b. Power Requirements: The transmitter shall be 120 VAC powered
39 instrument.
40
41 c. Accessories/ Required: Keypad where required for transmitter
42 configuration.
43
44 d. Manufacturer: Endress + Hauser Proline Promag W400 ODN (for post filter
45 flow) Or equal.
•46
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-7 09/28/23
1 2.04 PRESSURE GAUGE
2
3 A. Type:
4
5 i. Bourdon tube actuated dial face pressure gauge.
6
7 B. Function/Performance:
8
9 1. Accuracy:
10
11 a. Plus or minus 1.0 percent of span or better.
12
13 C. Physical:
14
15 1. Case:
16
17 a. Phenolic shock resistant or Type 316 stainless steel for surface/stem
18 mounting with a pressure relieving back. The case shall be vented for
19 temperature/atmospheric compensation. Gauge shall be callable of
20 being liquid filled in the field or at the factory.
21
22 2. Window:
23
24 a. Clear acrylic or shatter proof glass.
25
26 3. Bourdon tube:
27
28 a. Stainless steel.
29
30 b. Connection:
31
32 1. 1/2 in. NPT.
33
34 c. Gauge size:
35
36 1. Minimum 4 -in. viewable.
37
38 D. Pointer travel:
39
40 1. Not less than 200 degrees not more than 270 -degree arc.
41
42 E. Range:
43
44 1. As indicated in the instrument device schedule. Range may include inches
45 of water vacuum.
46
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-8 09/28/23
•
•
•
• 1 2 F. Accessories/Options Required:
3 1. Shutoff valve: Each gauge shall have a process shutoff valve that can also
4 be used as an adjustable pressure snubber.
5
6 2. Special scales: Engineer reserves the right to require special scales and/or
7 calibration if the manufacturer's standard is not suitable for the application.
8
9 3. Gauges listed as liquid filled in the instrument device schedule shall be liquid
10 filled at the factory.
11
12 G. Manufacturers: Ashcroft, Ametek US Gauge, Weksler, Or equal.
13
14 2.05 NON -CONTACT RADAR LEVEL TRANSMITTER
15
16 A. Type:
17
18 1. Non -contact, microwave type level meter.
19
20 2. Low 6.3 GHz radar frequency for continuous level measurement of liquid,
21 slurry and sludge processes in storage vessels that may be turbulent, have
22 heavy vapors and foaming conditions in nominal pressure and temperature.
23
• 24 3. Antenna: Rod, Horn, Parabolic, or Encapsulated. The type chosen shall be
25 based upon the type of process being measured and in what storage vessel
26 is being used.
27
28 B. Function/Performance:
29
30 1. Measuring Range: Range shall be suitable for the installation indicated.
31
32 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.32 inches (8 mm).
33
34 3. Operating Temperature: —40 to 65 degrees C.
35
36 4. Output: Isolated 4-20 mA output.
37
38 5. Display: Digital indicator displaying level or volume in engineering units or
39 percent, as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule.
40
41 6. Diagnostics: On-screen instructions and display of self -diagnostics.
42
43 C. Physical:
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-9 09/28/23
1 •2 1. Antenna shall be PVDF, Type 316 stainless steel, Hastelloy C or other
3 material depending upon its compatibility to the process in which it is
4 measuring. Transmitter and antenna shall be integral.
5
6 2. Instrument shall be provided with a minimum Class 150 pound (DN 80, PN16)
7 mounting flange to match vessel flange size, material and class.
8
9 3. Housing shall be NEMA 4X (IP66). Where the instrument is installed in a
10 hazardous area, the housing shall be explosion -proof, approved for Class I,
11 Division 1, Groups C and D (EEx d IIB T4) installation. The instrument shall
12 be certified for installation of the antenna in a Class I, Division 1, Groups C
13 and D (Zone 0) environment.
14
15 4. Power Requirements: 120VAC power.
16
17 5. Remote Display: Digital indicator displaying level or volume in engineering
18 units or percent, as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument List.
19 Display unit shall also be used to remotely program the transmitter.
20
21 D. Accessories Required:
22
23 1. Where required for calibration/programming, a hand-held programmer shall
24 be provided.
25
26 E. Manufacturer Start-up and Training services:
27
28 1. Provide manufacturer's start-up and training services as specified in the
29 start-up and training services paragraph.
30
31 F. Manufacturers:
32
33 1. Endress & Hauser FMR20
34
35 2. Siemens
36
37 3. Rosemount
38
39 4. VEGA Americas, Inc. (formerly Ohmart Vega)
40
41 5. Or equal
42
43 2.06 SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
44
45 A. General requirements for spare parts are specified in Section 13300.
46
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-10 09/28/23
• 2 1 B. Furnish following field Instrument related Spare Parts:
3 One flow indicating transmitter for each type of flow element provided.
4 One level indicating transmitter for each type of level element provided.
5 One spare level switch for each type provided.
6 One spare pressure gauge for each type of gauge provided.
7 One spare pressure switch for each type of switch provided.
8
9 C. Furnish following Accessories:
10
11 1. All mounting hardware required for pipe stand, surface, or other mounting.
12 Each instrument shall be provided with a manufacturer installed stainless
13 steel tag identifying the instrument tag number.
14
15
16 PART 3 — EXECUTION
17
18 3.01 INSTALLATION
19
20 A. Field mounted elements shall be installed, calibrated, and started -up in strict
21 compliance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
22 Conflicts between the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations and
23 these Specifications or the Drawings shall be presented to the Engineer for
• 24 resolution before any affected work is started. Installed equipment shall be
25 certified as appropriate for the application and process by the Contractor.
26
27 B. Connections of instruments to process piping shall include, as close as practical
28 to the point of connection, a tight closing block valve suitable for the maximum
29 process pressure and temperature and for the material involved. If connections
30 are of threaded or welded pipe, there shall be a union or flanged connection
31 located to facilitate disassembly of the connection and removal of the instrument
32 without interrupting process operation.
33
34 C. All field -mounted instruments shall be protected and isolated from vibration,
35 temperature extremes, radiant heat, rain, sleet or falling water, and similar
36 adverse conditions.
37
38 3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND CALIBRATION
39
40 A. Factory Tests and Calibration. All field -mounted elements shall be
41 factory -tested by the manufacturer to assure satisfactory performance prior to
42 shipment to the job site. Whenever possible, this shall include calibration to
43 the actual range and conditions of use. Calibration shall be traceable to the
44 National Bureau of Standards with an uncertainty not more than 1/2 of the
45 specified or claimed accuracy of the instruments.
•
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-11 09/28/23
1
2 3.03 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING PLC AND SCADA HMI SYSTEM
3
4 A. The bypass pumping system shall be equipped with a flow meter with 4-
5 20mA output that shall be installed on the temporary bypass piping and
6 connected to the existing CompactLogix PLC located in the administration
7 building. The facility currently has an Influent Sampler that is flow -paced
8 from the existing clamp -on flow meter at the headworks structure. As part
9 of the work, the installation of the new magnetic flow meter will require the
10 removal of the existing clamp -on flow meter. As such, through the Systems
11 Integrator, the Contractor shall modify the Owner's existing CompactLogix
12 PLC program and Citect SCADA HMI System to flow pace the existing
13 Influent Sampler from the flow meter installed on the temporary bypass
14 piping, while the clamp -on flow meter is out -of -service. Once the new
15 magnetic flow meter is placed in-service, the Systems Integrator shall
16 modify the PLC program to flow pace the Influent Sampler from the new
17 magnetic flow meter.
18
19 B. The Systems Integrator shall be responsible to modify, reprogram, and
20 reconfigure the existing PLC and SCADA HMI graphic screens to which all
21 new process instrumentation are installed as part of this project. This shall
22 include but not be limited to re -scaling, re -mapping, etc. of all new I/O
23 installed as part of this project.
24
25 END OF SECTION
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13340-12 09/28/23
•
•
•
• 1 2 SECTION 13567
3 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall design, furnish, install, startup, operate, maintain, and
10 coordinate continuous bypass pumping systems as required to perform the
11 work at the East WRF Influent Pump Station
12
13 B. The temporary bypass pumping system shall be disassembled and
14 removed after all work is completed, tested, and accepted ready for service.
15 All areas. structures, and landscaping disturbed or removed by the bypass
16 pumping operations shall be restored.
17
18 C. The Contractor shall employ the services of a subcontractor specializing in
19 the design, furnishing and operation of temporary bypass pumping systems.
20 The bypass subcontractor shall provide 5 references for projects of similar
21 size and complexity as the proposed system for approval by the Engineer.
22 The proposed bypass pumping system shall meet the requirements of all
23 codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.
• 24
25 D. Information provided by the City shows the influent pump station has four
26 Flygt submersible pumps currently installed as listed below:
27
28 Two pumps at 6,000 gpm and 85 HP.
29 Two pumps at 2,000 gpm and 25 HP.
30 All four pumps are variable speed.
31 The static head on the pumps based on the drawings is 32.75 feet.
32
33 E. The bypass pumping system shall be designed for a firm average pumping
34 rate of 1500 gpm, a firm peak pumping rate of 5400 gpm, and a firm low
35 pumping rate of 700 gpm. Velocity in the temporary force main(s) shall not
36 exceed 5 feet per second. The bypass pumping system shall be operate
37 using variable frequency drives (VFD).
38
39 E. The bypass pumping system shall be equipped with a flow meter with 4-
40 20mA output that shall be installed on the temporary bypass piping and
41 connected to the existing CompactLogix PLC located in the administration
42 building. The facility currently has an Influent Sampler that is flow -paced
43 from the existing clamp -on flow meter at the headworks structure. As part
44 of the work, the installation of the new magnetic flow meter will require the
45 removal of the existing clamp -on flow meter. As such, through the Systems
•46 Integrator, the Contractor shall modify the Owner's existing CompactLogix
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13567-1 09/28/23
1 PLC program and Citect SCADA HMI System to flow pace the existing
2 Influent Sampler from the flow meter installed on the temporary bypass
3 piping, while the clamp -on flow meter is out -of -service. Once the new
4 magnetic flow meter is placed in-service, the Systems Integrator shall
5 modify the PLC program to flow pace the Influent Sampler from the new
6 magnetic flow meter.
7
8 F. The bypass pumping system shall include both primary and standby pumps.
9 The standby pumping capacity shall be equal to the primary pumping
10 capacity. All standby pumps shall be completely piped, wired, fueled, and
11 ready to run should a primary bypass pump fail. All pumps shall be
12 equipped with VFD's. A constant speed bypass pump system is NOT
13 acceptable.
14
15 G. The Contractor shall furnish and install temporary plugs in the existing
16 sewer pipes entering the wet wells as needed and as shown on the
17 drawings.
18
19 1.02 BYPASS PUMPING PLAN SUBMITTAL
20
21 A. The Contractor shall submit a written Bypass Pumping Plan/Working
22 Drawings (Plan) and attend a meeting with the Engineer and the Owner to
23 review the Plan. The Bypass Pumping Plan shall be submitted in
24 accordance with Section 01310 to the Engineer prior to beginning any work
25 at the site.
26
27 B. The Plan shall consist of detailed descriptions and diagrams of the
28 proposed pumping system that describes equipment schedules, time
29 schedules, locations, power, controls, instrumentation, piping, and valves.
30 Cut sheets for all equipment and materials shall be submitted. All pumps
31 and valves shall be enumerated and shown on the diagrams.
32
33 C. The Plan shall be detailed and specific for each location and for this project.
34
35 D. The Plan shall show at minimum the following information:
36
37 1. Staging areas for all pumps
38 2. Number, size, material, and location of suction and discharge
39 piping and valves
40 3. Pump curves, sizes, capacities, size, power requirements,
41 and rpm operating range of each pump
42 4. Fuel type, estimated consumption rate, on-site fuel storage
43 and detailed refueling plan
44 5. Temporary pipe supports, pipe restraints, pipe anchors, and
45 thrust blocks.
46 6. Control system details
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13567-2 09/28/23
•
•1 7. Schematics showing the control circuits for each pump.
2 8. List of Personnel to be called by the autodialer.
3
4 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
5
6 2.01 BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS - GENERAL REQUIRMENTS AND
7 RESTRICTIONS
8
9 A. The bypass pumping system shall have dedicated suction and discharge
10 piping. The suction shall be taken from those manholes and structures
11 shown on the Drawings. The discharge shall be upstream of the screens
12 at the influent pump station.
13
14 B. The bypass pumping system shall utilize fully automatic, self -priming pumps
15 that do not require foot valves.
16
17 C. The bypass pumping system shall comply with local noise ordinances.
18
19 D. Fuel storage on site shall only be permitted in dedicated fuel tanks attached
20 to portable pumps and portable generators. No other fuel sources or
21 auxiliary fuel storage shall be permitted.
22
23 E. None of the existing emergency generators at the East WRF may be used
• 24 for the bypass pumping system.
25
26 2.02 CAPACITY
27
28 A. The capacity of the bypass pumping systems is specified in Section 1.01.
29
30 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for designing the bypass pumping
31 systems to have adequate flow and pressure capacity to maintain flow to
32 and from each lift station without accumulation in the collection system.
33
34 2.03 REDUNDANCY AND RELIABILITY
35
36 A. The temporary bypass pumping system shall be designed to maintain
37 continuous uninterrupted service at all times.
38
39 B. The temporary bypass pumping system shall consist of a primary and a
40 backup pumping system. The primary and backup system shall be
41 complete, independent, and redundant and be capable of starting and
42 operating automatically based on a water level signal. The primary and
43 backup system shall each have dedicated power and control components.
44
45 2.04 POWER AND CONTROLS
•46
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13567-3 09/28/23
1 A. The bypass pumping system shall be controlled by a water level signal from III 2 the supply suction manhole. The bypass pumping system shall utilize a 4-
3 20mA level transducer and transmitter that will serve as the primary controls
4 for the bypass pumps and will provide actual water level in the supply
5 suction manhole. The bypass pump system shall also be equipped with
6 float switches to active the bypass pump(s) should the level
7 transducer/transmitter fail.
8
9 B. The level transducer/transmitter shall be used increase or decrease the
10 speed of the bypass pump(s) to maintain a user adjustable level setpoint.
11
12 C. The Contractor shall design, furnish, and install temporary power and
13 controls for the bypass pumping system and shall pay all power or energy
14 costs for the bypass pumping effort.
15
16 D. If electric power is proposed for the temporary bypass pumping system, two
17 sources of power shall be provided. One of the sources may be from the
18 Utility Company. The second power source shall be a temporary portable
19 generator of sufficient size to power all the pumps running at the same time.
20 The temporary generator shall also be capable of supporting two pumps
21 starting at locked rotor conditions at the same time.
22
23 2.05 ALARMS
24
25 A. The temporary bypass pumping system shall have a high level/alarm based
26 on the water level signal in the suction manhole. Activation of this alarm
27 shall cause a visual and audible alarm to occur at the pump controls. The
28 high level/alarm shall also activate an auto dialer and temporary telephone
29 service to notify the Contractor and the Owner of the high-level alarm. The
30 Contractor shall be responsible for responding to the alarms and shall
31 provide the Owner with the phone numbers and emergency contacts of
32 response personnel capable of being reached 24 hours per day, 7 days per
33 week.
34
35 PART 3 — EXECUTION
36
37 3.01 STARTUP AND OPERATION
38
39 A. The Contractor shall demonstrate, mechanical, electrical, control, and alarm
40 function integrity of the bypass pumping system to the Engineer and the
41 City prior to beginning any rehabilitation work. The bypass pumping system
42 must function without failure for a period of 24 consecutive hours prior to
43 beginning any other site work.
44
45 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for operation and maintenance of the
46 temporary bypass pumping system 24 hours per day and shall not depend
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13567-4 09/28/23
•
•
•1 on the Owner to perform any operations or maintenance tasks.
2
3 C. If diesel or gasoline powered pumps are used, the Contractor shall be
4 responsible for operating the pumps 24 hours per day and for keeping the
5 pumps fueled and maintained. The Contractor shall pay all fuel costs for
6 bypass pumping if diesel or gasoline powered pumps are used.
7
8 D. The Contractor shall be responsible for any wastewater spills that occur as
9 a result of the bypass pumping operation and shall pay any and all fines,
10 fees, property damage, environmental damage, and cleanup costs that are
11 associated with the wastewater spills.
12
13 END OF SECTION
14
•
•
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13567-5 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS
13567-6 09/28/2`3
•
•
•
1 SECTION 15010
•2
3 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8
9 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all specification
10 sections apply to the work.
11
12 1.02 SUMMARY
13
14 This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and
15 includes requirements common to more than one section of these specifications.
16
17 1.03 ACCESSIBILITY
18
19 Equipment and materials shall be installed allowing for adequate access for
20 service and. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment with the final
21 location of access panels and doors. Allow ample space to remove all parts that
22 may be replaced or require service. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible
23 location.
• 24
25 1.04 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
26
27 A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other
28 building components. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify
29 final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the
30 requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. Arrange for chases,
31 slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical
32 installations.
33
34 B. Coordinate the installation of supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
35 poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are
36 constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of
37 mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give
38 particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning.
39
40 C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical
41 services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom
42 possible. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and
43 equipment above ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other
44 installations.
45
• 46 D. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-1 09/28/23
1 and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing III 2 regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.
3 Provide required connection for each service.
4
5 1.05 NAMEPLATE DATA
6
7 Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated
8 mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number,
9 serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested
10 compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible
11 location.
12
13 1.06 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION
14
15 All packaged equipment shall be Independently Third Party labeled as a system
16 for its intended us by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in
17 accordance with OSHA Federal Regulation 29CFR1910.399 and NFPA 70,
18 "National Electrical Code" (NEC), Article 90-7.
19
20 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
21
22 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
23
24 END OF SECTION
25
26
27
28
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-2 09/28/23
•
•1 SECTION 15062
2
3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and
10 appliances for and properly install, connect, adjust, test and place in
11 continuous satisfactory service all ductile iron pipe and fittings at the
12 locations and to the elevations indicated, specified or required for the proper
13 completion of all work.
14
15 B. Wherever Construction activities disturb existing conditions or work already
16 completed, Contractor shall restore the same to its original condition in
17 every detail. All such replacement and repair shall be a no additional
18 expense to the Owner.
19
20 C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings are not necessarily completely indicated or
21 detailed on the Construction Drawings. The Drawings are schematic only,
22 and indicate pipe and fittings in a general way. It is the Contractor's
23 responsibility to furnish all materials, pipe and fittings required.
• 24
25 D. It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation,
26 complete in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Construction
27 Drawings, or specified herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be
28 responsible for all details, devices, accessories, and special construction
29 necessary to properly furnish, install, adjust, test, place into continuous
30 satisfactory service, and complete the Work in an acceptable manner.
31
32 E. Full responsibility for designing, fabricating, and installing the ductile iron
33 pipe and fittings, for selecting materials of construction, and for
34 demonstrating compliance with specified performance requirements shall
35 rest with the Contractor, and through the Contractor, the Manufacturer and
36 the Material Supplier. The Engineer's review of 1) the manufacture and
37 installation of the ductile iron pipe and fittings 2) the use of materials
38 included in this Specification, and 3) alternative materials offered by the
39 Contractor, shall not relieve the Contractor and Supplier of full responsibility
40 for meeting all performance requirements and guarantees.
41
42 F. The requirements of this specification 15062 supersede relevant articles in
43 Section IV.
44
45 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
•46
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-1 09/28/23
1 A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings and as
2 specified herein.
3
4 B. All pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances used for potable water piping
5 shall be NSF -61 certified for continuous contact with potable water.
6
7 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
8
9 All Work specified herein shall be in accordance with the standards of the below
10 listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is
11 made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the
12 standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
13
14 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
15 BI.1 - Standard Specification for Unified Inch Screw Threads.
16 B16.5 - Standard Specification for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings and
17 other special Alloys.
18 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
19 A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi
20 Tensile Strength.
21 C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
22 C128 - Standard Specification for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine
23 Aggregate.
24 C144 - Standard Specification for Masonry Mortar.
25 C150 - Portland Cement.
26 D75- Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
27 E8 - Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials.
28 E23 - Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.
29 G95 - Cathodic Disbondment Test.
30
31 American Water Works Association (AWWA)
32 0104 - Standard for Cement - Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
33 for Water.
34 C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Piping for
35 Water and Other Liquids.
36 C111 - Standard for Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe
37 and Fittings.
38 C115 - American National Standard for Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with
39 Threaded Flanges.
40 C150 - Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe.
41 C151 - Standard for Ductile - Iron Pipe. Centrifugally Cast for Water or
42 Other Liquids.
43 C153 - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings. 3 -inch through 16 -inch
44 for Water and Other Liquids.
45 C600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their
46 Appurtenances.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-2 09/28/23
•
0 1 C651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.
2
3 NSF International, The Public Health and Safety Company
4
5 No. 60 - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects.
6 No. 61 -Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
7
8 1.04 SUBMITTALS
9
10 A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer of pipe, fittings,
11 and all appurtenances in accordance with these Contract Documents and
12 Sections 01300 and 01340. The requirements of AWWA C110, C150, C151
13 and the following supplemental requirements are applicable:
14
15 1. Certified dimensional drawings of all pipe, specials and fittings.
16
17 2. Joint and pipe/fitting wall construction details, which indicate the type
18 and thickness of the wall; manufacturing tolerances; performance
19 history; and all other pertinent information required for the
20 manufacture of the product.
21
22 3. Details of fittings and specials such as elbows, wyes, tees, outlets,
23 connections, test bulkheads, bosses and nozzles or other specials
• 24 where shown on the Construction Drawings, which indicate amount
25 and position of reinforcement. All fittings and specials shall be
26 properly reinforced to withstand the internal pressure both
27 circumferential and longitudinal, and the external loading conditions
28 as indicated in the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings shall clearly
29 detail special castings indicating all pertinent dimensions.
30
31 B. The Contractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe
32 and other products or materials furnished under this Section of the
33 Specifications, as specified in ANSI/AWWA C105, C110, C150, and C151;
34 respectively, and certified copies of the following supplemental data for all
35 pipe, fittings, and specials:
36
37 1. The Supplier shall provide, through the Contractor, a sworn
38 statement that the inspection and all specified tests have been made
39 and all results thereof comply with the requirements of these
40 Specifications.
41
42 C. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests and in the
43 preparation of any design reports shall be borne by the Contractor.
44
45 D. Review of the Shop Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the
• 46 responsibility to ensure that the pipe is designed and installed in strict
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-3 09/28/23
1 accordance with the Contract Documents.
2
3 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
4
5 A. The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Section that are new,
6 unused and as specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best
7 of their respective kind, free of defects and imperfections, and suitable for
8 the service intended, subject to review by the Engineer.
9
10 B. The Contractor shall provide workmanship that is first class in every respect,
11 and have the installation performed by workmen thoroughly experienced in
12 such work. A neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished Work shall
13 be required.
14
15 C. The Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws
16 and regulations and in accordance with all applicable permits and
17 easements.
18
19 D. The ductile iron pipe furnished under this Specification shall comply with
20 AWWA C151 except as it may be modified herein.
21
22 E. Welders and welding methods shall be certified to a nationally recognized
23 welding specification for the type of ductile iron used to manufacture the
24 pipe and fittings.
25
26 F. All test equipment used in activities affecting quality control shall be
27 calibrated and certified at not longer than annual intervals, unless otherwise
28 specified or required.
29
30 G. All pipe shall be clean, sound, and without defects. No manner of repair will
31 be accepted, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
32
33 H. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall perform all the
34 testing and recording that is required in these Specifications unless
35 otherwise specified.
36
37 I. The Engineer shall have the right to determine the amount of pipe to be
38 rejected as defined in AWWA C151 Section 5.7.1 "Determining Rejection."
39
40 1.06 SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS
41
42 All pipe shall be manufactured, fabricated, coated, cement mortar -lined or epoxy -
43 lined by a single qualified Manufacturer. Fittings may be fabricated and the lining
44 for force main pipe and fittings may be applied at a site other than where the pipe
45 is manufactured. The Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years of experience in
46 work similar in specification to that which is to be furnished on this project. The
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-4 09/28/23
•
•
•1 Manufacturer shall be required to show experience in supplying pipe in
2 environments similar to those expected to exist on this project and that the pipe
3 supplied in those environments has functioned satisfactorily.
4
5 1.07 SHOP TESTS
6
7 All pipes shall be tested by the Manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C104,
8 C110, C150, and C151, the Manufacturer's standard procedures, and this
9 Specification. Shop Tests shall be subject to witness by the Engineer and/or
10 Owner, and/or the Owner's Representative and certified test reports shall be
11 submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor. No lot of pipe shall be shipped to the
12 site of the Work until acceptable shop tests are completed and have been reviewed
13 by the Engineer.
14
15 1.08 INSPECTION
16
17 A. All Work under this Specification, including but not limited to proof of design
18 testing, shop testing and the production of the pipe, fittings and specials,
19 shall be subject to inspection by the Owner's representatives and/or the
20 Engineer in the Supplier's plant. All travel, lodging and meal costs
21 associated with this plant inspection shall be incurred by the Owner and/or
22 the Engineer.
.23
24 B. The Engineer shall have the right to order any pipe that, in the Engineer's
25 opinion, does not meet the Specifications to be rejected and not shipped to
26 the Project site.
27
28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
29
30 2.01 GENERAL
31
32 A. All ductile iron pipes, including flanged, mechanical joint, push -on joint,
33 restrained joint, and plain end pipe, shall be manufactured in accordance
34 with ANSI/AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51.
35
36 B. Where ductile iron pipe is supplied for the Project or shown on the Drawings,
37 above ground pipe shall be flanged and buried (underground) pipe shall be
38 mechanical joint, restrained joint or push -on joint, as required.
39
40 C. All ductile iron fittings shall be marked in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C
41 110/A 21.10 Section 10-9, "Markings on Fittings." All ductile iron pipe shall
42 be marked in accordance with Section 51-10, "Marking Pipe" of
43 ANSI/AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51.
44
45 D. Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 20 feet with shorter lengths provided
•46 as required by the Construction Drawings or to complete the Work and as
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-5 09/28/23
1 allowed by AWWA C151.
2
3 E. Shop cement -mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces
4 and shall be free from fracture, excessive interior surface crazing and
5 roughness.
6
7 F. Pipe joints shall not be bonded for electrical conductivity in accordance with
8 these Specifications and the details as shown on the Construction Drawings
9 and the following schedule:
10
11 1. All blow -offs, air valve assemblies, and lateral connections to or from
12 the pipe shall not be fitted with dielectric gaskets and/or couplings.
13
14 G. All materials that may be in contact with the water being conveyed (linings,
15 gaskets, lubricants, grout, disinfecting agents, etc.) shall be in accordance
16 with and approved by the appropriate NSF Standard 60 or 61.
17
18 2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA
19
20 A. The pipe furnished under this section shall be ductile iron pipe, cement
21 mortar or epoxy lined and asphalt coated, with EPDM gasket joints. The
22 pipe shall consist of a cast ductile iron wall, shop lined with Portland cement
23 mortar (potable water and reclaimed water) or epoxy (sanitary force main)
24 and an exterior coating of asphalt.
25
26 B. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked
27 according to applicable requirements stated herein and except as modified,
28 shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C104, C150, C151.
29
30 C. Pipe supplied for this project shall be suitable for use with neutral pH
31 (approximately 7.0) meeting FDEP Part IV water quality standards
32 (reclaimed water), domestic raw sewage (force mains) or chloraminated
33 drinking water (potable water).
34
35 2.03 PIPE DESIGN
36
37 A. All ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness corresponding to
38 Class 150, as calculated according to AWWA C150.
39
40 B. Where threaded flanges are used on ductile iron pipe, the minimum
41 thickness of the pipe wall at the last critical thread after threading shall not
42 be Tess than the minimum calculated thickness of the pipe including net
43 thickness, casting tolerance and service allowance.
44
45 C. The Contractor shall provide design data on the pipe including calculations
46 showing the separate and combined stresses in the wall of the pipe due to
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-6 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 the design loads.
2
3 2.04 MATERIALS
4
5 A. All ductile -iron pipes shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C
6 151/A21.51. The interior of the pipe shall be finished so that the
7 Hazen -Williams friction factor will not be less than 130. Each length of pipe
8 shall be hydrostatically tested to at least 500 psi by the manufacturer in
9 accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 151/A21.51. Additionally, 30 -inch and
10 larger pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to 75% of the yield strength of the
11 metal, based on the nominal thickness of the pipe.
12
13 B. Castings and connecting pieces, such as bell and bell, bell and spigot, bell
14 and flange, flange and flange, flange and spigot, and flange and flare, shall
15 meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. Connecting pieces
16 may be fabricated.
17
18 C. The exterior of exposed ductile iron pipe, fittings, glands and bolts shall be
19 field coated with one prime coat of Tnemec 66, 3.0 to 5.0 mils minimum dry
20 film thickness, a second coat of compatible Tnemec Enamel, 4.0 to 6.0 mils
21 per coat minimum dry film thickness and a final coat of Tnemec 73, 2.5 to
22 4.5 mils per coat minimum dry film thickness. Field coatings shall be applied
23 in strict conformance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations and
• 24 Section 09900.
25
26 D. Pipe that is to be buried shall have the standard asphaltic outside coating
27 specified in ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.
28
29 E. The weight and class designation shall be painted conspicuously in a
30 contrasting color on the outside of each pipe, fitting, and special casting
31 after the shop coat has cured.
32
33 F. Epoxy lining for force mains shall be an amine cured epoxy containing at
34 least 20% ceramic quartz pigment by volume. The standard of quality is
35 Proteco 401 Ceramic Epoxy.
36
37 2.05 JOINTS
38
39 A. Flanges and flanged joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the
40 dimensions and requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1. Where
41 threaded flanges are used, they shall be ductile iron and conform to the
42 requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15. All flanged
43 ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be rated for 250 pound working pressure
44 and shall be faced and drilled to match ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flanges
45 unless special drilling is called for or required. Where tap or stud bolts are
•46 required, flanges shall be drilled and tapped accordingly.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-7 09/28/23
1
2 B. All pipe flanges shall be coated with a rust preventive coating, as specified
3 in ANSI/AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15, immediately after they have
4 been faced and drilled.
5
6 C. Flanged bolt holes on each end of flanged pipe and fittings shall accurately
7 straddle the same horizontal and vertical centerlines unless special drilling
8 is called for, or required.
9
10 D. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe
11 are compatible with the flanges of the various components and/or
12 appurtenances.
13
14 E. Flanged pipe, approximately twelve (12) inches or less in length, shall have
15 flanges cast solidly to pipe barrel. Flanges on pipe longer than twelve (12)
16 inches in length may be of the threaded type. Pipe threads shall be of such
17 length that, with flanges screwed home, the end of the pipe shall project
18 beyond the face line of the flange. Flange and pipe shall then be faced to
19 give a flush finish to the flange and the flange surface shall be normal to the
20 axis of the pipe. Flanges shall be of such design that the flanged neck
21 completely covers the threaded portion of the pipe to protect it against
22 damage and corrosion.
23
24 F. Push -on joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and
25 requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C111/A 21.11 as they apply to
26 push -on joints.
27
28 G. Mechanical joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and
29 requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 111/A 21.11. Where stud
30 bolts are required, bells shall be drilled and tapped accordingly. The
31 Contractor shall tighten joint bolts with appropriate wrenches, to a tension
32 recommended by the pipe Supplier.
33
34 H. Where joints are in contact with liquids, or buried underground, the
35 Contractor shall paint all bolts and nuts with two (2) heavy coats of coal tar
36 pitch and where joints are buried, the joints, including glands and bolts, shall
37 be wrapped with two laps of 8 mil polyethylene film and sealed to the pipe
38 with polyethylene adhesive tape.
39
40 I. Restrained Joints:
41
42 1. All buried pipe shall be restrained as shown on the Drawings and as
43 specified herein. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a
44 pumping system shall be restrained based on the pressures shown
45 on the drawings or specified elsewhere herein. Pipes subject to
46 gravity flow shall be restrained based on 30 psi of working pressure.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-8 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 Restrained joint length indicated in the Tables included on the
2 Drawings represents the length on all sides of fittings and valves
3 within which all joints must be restrained. As a minimum, the joints
4 at all fittings and valves shall be restrained.
5
6 2. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for
7 line pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure, but
8 not Tess than 200 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push -
9 on joints or restrained mechanical joints.
10
11 3. The pipe Supplier's standard restrained joints shall be of the type
12 utilizing cast Tugs, shop welded retainer lugs or retainer rings bearing
13 against pipe shoulders. Field installed joint restraint systems, such
14 as Megalugs, as manufactured by EBAA Iron, or equal, are required
15 for restraining mechanical joint fittings. Field welding or grooving of
16 the restrained joint or components shall not be acceptable.
17 Restrained joints shall be capable of withstanding full bulkhead thrust
18 that can be developed within the pipeline due to the sum of the
19 working and surge pressures.
20
21 4. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically identified on
22 the Drawings.
S23
24 5. Joints in tunnels and casings shall be restrained joints as defined
25 previously.
26
27 2.06 FITTINGS
28
29 A. All restrained joint, flanged, mechanical joint, and push -on joint shall be
30 ductile iron and shall be manufactured in accordance with, and shall meet
31 the requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 110/A 21.10 or C153.
32
33 B. Dimensions of flanged fittings not included under ANSI/AWWA
34 Specification C110/A 21.10 shall conform to the requirements of ANSI
35 Specification B 16.1, Class 125. Fittings shall be short radius (compact)
36 type were possible.
37
38 C. All fittings shall meet the requirements, as to dimensions and weights, as
39 shown in the current Edition of the "Handbook of Ductile Iron Pipe" of the
40 Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association.
41
42 D. All fittings furnished under ANSI/AWWA Specification C110/A 21.10 or
43 C153 shall be ductile iron and shall have the same minimum pressure rating
44 as the pipe to which it is connected.
45
• 46 E. Special fittings, where required, shall have the same diameters and
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-9 09/28/23
1 thickness as standard fittings, unless otherwise required, but their laying
2 lengths and other functional dimensions shall be determined by their
3 positions in the pipelines and by the particular piping materials to which they
4 connect.
5
6 2.07 INTERIOR LINING
7
8 A. Potable Water and Reclaimed Water Piping:
9
10 1. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be Tined with standard single
11 thickness cement mortar lining and bituminous seal coated inside, at
12 the point of manufacture, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
13 Specification C 104/A 21.4. Portland cement for cement mortar lining
14 shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C150, Type II
15 cement. Shop cement -mortar Tined pipe shall have smooth dense
16 interior surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior
17 surface crazing, disbondment, and roughness.
18
19 2. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent damage to the
20 interior lining and shall repair all damaged linings to the satisfaction
21 of the Engineer.
22
23 3. Test records shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
24
25 4. The use and type of any admixtures must be reviewed by the
26 Engineer prior to their use. All material batching shall be by weight.
27
28 5. The method of placing and curing of the mortar lining shall be one
29 with which the manufacturer has experience and can demonstrate a
30 successful history. The lining shall be cured in a manner acceptable
31 to the Engineer so that it will provide a hard and durable lining with a
32 minimum of cracks, surface crazing and disbonded areas.
33
34 B. Epoxy Lining for Wastewater Service
35
36 1. All pipe and fittings for sewer force mains shall be Coated with
37 Protecto 401 as specified.
38
39 2. Prior to abrasive blasting, the entire area to receive the protective
40 compound shall be inspected for oil, grease, etc. Any areas with oil,
41 grease, or any substance that can be removed by solvent, shall be
42 solvent cleaned to remove those substances. After the surface has
43 been made free of grease, oil or other substances, all areas to
44 receive the protective compounds shall be abrasive blasted using
45 sand or grit abrasive media. The entire surface to be lined shall be
46 struck with the blast media so that all rust, loose oxides, etc., are
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-10 09/28/23
•
• 1 2 removed from the surface. Only slight stains and tightly adhering
oxide may be left on the surface. Any area where rust reappears
3 before lining must be re -blasted.
4
5 3. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface
6 preparation, the interior of the pipe shall receive 40 mils nominal dry
7 film thickness of Protecto 401. No lining shall take place when the
8 substrate or ambient temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit.
9 The surface also must be dry and dust free. If flange pipe or fittings
10 are included in the project, the lining shall not be used on the face of
11 the flange.
12
13 4. Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to
14 6 inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6
15 mils nominal, 10 mils maximum using Protecto Joint Compound. The
16 Joint Compound shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care
17 should be taken that the Joint Compound is smooth without excess
18 buildup in the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. Coating of the
19 gasket seat and spigot ends shall be done after the application of the
20 lining.
21
22 5. The number of coats of lining applied shall be as recommended by
•23 the lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this material be
24 applied above the dry thickness per coat recommended by the lining
25 manufacturer in printed literature. The maximum or minimum time
26 between coats shall be that time recommended by the lining material
27 manufacturer. To prevent delamination between coats, no material
28 shall be used for lining which is not indefinitely recoatable with itself
29 without roughening of the surface.
30
31 6. Protecto Joint Compound shall be used for touch-up or repair in
32 accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
33
34 2.08 EXTERIOR COATINGS
35
36 A. The exterior of all pipe and fittings to be submerged in water and for
37 underground installation shall be given a bituminous coating at the point of
38 manufacture, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51.
39
40 2.09 PIPE APPURTENANCES
41
42 A. Threaded flanges shall be ductile iron and shall meet the requirements of
43 ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15. Flanges with long hubs for flanged pipe shall
44 be screwed on the threaded end of the pipe in the shop. The face of the
45 flange and the end of the pipe shall be refaced together. There shall be no
•46 leakage through the pipe threads, and the flanges shall be designed to
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-11 09/28/23
1 prevent corrosion of the threads from outside. Flanges shall meet the
2 requirements of ANSI B16.1, and shall be faced and drilled to that standard,
3 unless special drilling is called for or required. The Contractor shall be
4 responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe are compatible with the
5 flanges of the various components and/or appurtenances. They shall be
6 faced accurately at right angles to the pipe axis, drilled smooth and true,
7 and the machined faces covered with zinc dust and tallow or equivalent
8 material. The back of the flanges and bolt holes shall be coated with
9 asphaltic coating meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51,
10 Section 51-8.1. Coating material shall be applied immediately after facing
11 and drilling. Where tap or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be tapped.
12 All flanged joints shall be thoroughly bolted through, stud or tap bolts of
13 required size. All flanged joints buried underground shall also be protected
14 as specified under Section 2.08. Only flanges made in USA shall be
15 supplied to the Project.
16
17 B. All bolts, studs, and threaded rods used in the finished work for flanges shall
18 be of carbon steel and shall conform to the ASTM A 307 Grade B. The
19 ends of all bolts shall be finished to the standard radius in an acceptable
20 manner. All screw threads shall be "American Standard, Coarse Thread
21 (N.C.). Stud bolts shall be hexagonal, cold pressed semi -finished and made
22 of medium open-hearth steel. All dimensions shall be in accordance with
23 "American Standard, Heavy." Nuts used shall be "Grade A Heavy Hex" in
24 conformance with ASTM A563 and be compatible with the bolts. Bolts and
25 nuts shall be cadmium or zinc plated at the point of manufacture with a
26 plating thickness of 0.0003 to 0.0005 inches. All bolts and nuts furnished
27 shall be delivered to the field free from grease, rust, and dirt.
28
29 C. All nuts and bolts that come into contact with water or that are to be buried
30 shall be painted with two (2) heavy coats of an coat tar pitch, in accordance
31 with Section 09900.
32
33 D. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full-faced type EPDM gaskets one-eighth
34 (1/8) inch thick. All gaskets for flanged joints shall be EPDM having a
35 Durometer of 75 to 85 or neoprene having a Durometer of 55 to 65. As an
36 alternate, the Contractor may supply the pipe Supplier's (manufacturer's)
37 gasket such as American Cast Iron Pipe Company's "Toruseal" gasket or
38 U.S. Pipe's "Flange Tyte" gasket. Gaskets for bell and spigot joints shall be
39 fabricated and tested in accordance with AWWA C111.
40
41 E. Subject to the Engineer's review, welded outlets shall be allowed; however,
42 the welded -on outlet diameter shall not be greater than one quarter the
43 diameter of the main line.
44
45 2.10 COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS
46
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-12 09/28/23
•
•1 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install where required or where shown on
2the Drawings, manufactured compression couplings equal to Style 38 or
3 Style 39 where isolating dielectric couplings are required, as manufactured
4 by the Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries or equal. The
5 compression couplings shall consist of two (2) steel follower flanges, one
6 (1) steel middle ring with pipe stops removed, and sufficient rolled thread,
7 track -head bolts to properly compress the gaskets. After fabrication, the
8 middle and follower rings shall be cold expanded to size and dimension.
9 Thickness of the middle ring shall be suitable for the pressures specified,
10 and the application, and in no case be less than one-half (1/2) inch thick.
11 All parts of the compression coupling shall be galvanized or heavily
12 cadmium plated at the point of manufacture and shall be epoxy coated in
13 accordance with AWWA C210 or AWWA C203.
14
15 B. The entire compression sleeve coupling unit shall be rated for working
16 pressure plus surge pressure as a minimum.
17
18 C. The Contractor shall provide field coating for buried couplings in accordance
19 with AWWA C203 and these Contract Documents.
20
21 D. Small deflections in the pipe alignment shall be allowed at compression type
22 coupling joints, but such deflections shall not exceed three (3) degrees
23 between any two (2) adjacent pipe sections. Where changes in line and/or
ID24 grade in excess of three (3) degrees are required the deflections shall be
25 made by deflecting multiple joints.
26
27 2.11 Restrained Flange Adapter
28
29 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install where required or where shown on
30 the Drawings. The restrained flange adapters shall be used in lieu of
31 threaded, or welded, flanged spool pieces. Flange adapters shall be made
32 of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 and have flange bolt circles that
33 are compatible with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10.
34
35 B. Restraint for the flange adapter shall consist of a plurality of individual
36 actuated gripping wedges to maximize restraint capability. Torque limiting
37 actuating screws shall be used to insure proper initial set of gripping
38 wedges.
39
40 C. The flange adapter shall be capable of deflection during assembly, or permit
41 lengths of pipe to be field cut, to allow a minimum of 0.6" gap between the
42 end of the pipe and the mating flange without affecting the integrity of the
43 seal.
44
45 D. For PVC pipe, the flange adapter will have a pressure rating equal to the
•46 pipe.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-13 09/28/23
1
2 E. For ductile iron pipe, the flange adapter shall have a safety factor of 2:1
3 minimum.
4
5 F. The flange adapter shall be SERIES 2100 MEGAFLANGE adapter, as
6 produced by EBAA Iron, Inc., or approved equal.
7
8 PART 3 — EXECUTION
9
10 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
11
12 A. The Contractor shall transport, deliver and distribute along the line of the
13 work, the pipe, specials and appurtenances. All Work shall be in strict
14 accordance with the provisions of applicable permits and easements.
15
16 B. Pipe shall be loaded for shipment upon suitable cars or trucks that shall be
17 provided with padded bunks with nylon belt tie -down straps or padded
18 banding. In loading and unloading the pipe, more than ordinary care shall
19 be taken to prevent any injury to the pipe, ends, coatings and connections.
20 Such work shall be done slowly with the pipe at all times under control, and
21 under no condition shall the pipe be dropped. Field repair of damaged pipe
22 shall not be allowed, except for linings and coatings. The pipe shall be
23 protected during shipping by covering or some other means acceptable to
24 the Engineer to prevent contamination of the pipe and to protect the lining
25 from drying during transport.
26
27 C. All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and protected against
28 damage to the lining and coating/interior and exterior surfaces, impact
29 shocks, and free fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to
30 the Engineer. Pipe handling equipment shall consist of wide belt slings,
31 padded cradles, or other devices designed and constructed to prevent
32 damage to the pipe or coatings. The use of forks, chains, hooks, or other
33 equipment that may damage the pipe or its lining or coating shall not be
34 allowed.
35
36 D. In distributing the pipe in the field, each pipe shall be placed as nearly as
37 possible to the point where it is to be laid, and facing in the proper direction.
38 Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in
39 a manner that will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the
40 trench site or elsewhere. Coated pipe shall be stored on padded skids,
41 sand or dirt berm, sandbags, or other suitable means so that coating will not
42 be damaged. Coated pipe shall be handled with wide belt slings. Pipe
43 fittings and specials which are placed in storage, streets or drives must be
44 so arranged as not to cause undue inconvenience to traffic and must be
45 protected sufficiently to prevent any damage including but not limited to the
46 interior lining and exterior coatings. Chains, cables or other equipment
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-14 09/28/23
•
•
•
• 1 2 likely to cause damage to the pipe, fitting or special coating or lining shall
not be used. Pipe which has been improperly distributed and which must
3 be moved longitudinally along the trench shall be reloaded on a suitable car
4 or truck or lifted and swung by a derrick or moved by such means as may
5 be satisfactory to the Engineer.
6
7 E. If in the process of manufacture, transportation, or handling, any ductile iron
8 pipe, fitting or special receives any deformation to the pipe wall, ends or
9 connections, such pipe, fitting or special shall be rejected and replaced at
10 the Contractor's expense.
11
12 F In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall inspect upon delivery
13 all pipe, fittings, and specials and mark as "rejected" all pipe lengths and
14 fittings or specials exhibiting signs of damage to the exterior coating, interior
15 cement mortar linings, joint ends, or pipe wall and the Contractor shall at
16 the Contractor's expense immediately remove the same from the job site,
17 or repair to the Engineer's satisfaction. Any pipe, fittings or specials
18 deemed not suitable for installation shall be replaced in kind by the
19 Contractor at the Contractor's own expense.
20
21 G. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to ensure that there are
22 no damaged portions of the pipe. If any defective pipe is discovered after
•23 having been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe or
24 fitting in a satisfactory manner, by the Contractor at the Contractor's own
25 expense.
26
27 H. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean each pipe or fitting of any foreign
28 substance that may have collected on or in it prior to the pipe or fitting being
29 placed in the trench. The openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench
30 shall be closed during any interruption of the Work. As pipe laying
31 progresses, the Contractor shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The
32 Contractor shall completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt,
33 mortar splatter, and any other debris following completion of pipe laying,
34 pointing of joints and any necessary interior repairs prior to testing and
35 disinfecting the completed pipeline.
36
37 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE
38
39 A. Ductile iron piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manu-
40 facturer's instructions. Pipe shall be laid only after the trench has been
41 excavated as described Division 2 of the Specifications. Pipe laid in trench
42 shall be laid to a firm and even bearing for its full length. Precautions shall
43 be taken against flotation. The pipe shall be backfilled with selected fine
44 excavated material as shown on the Drawings and thoroughly compacted
45 to one foot above the top of the pipe and thereafter backfilled as specified
•46 in Section 02221.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-15 09/28/23
1 •2 B. Precautions shall be taken against flotation. Pipe shall be laid directly on
3 the bedding material. Pipe shall be laid in the trench where the bedding
4 forms a continuous and uniform support for the full length of the pipe except
5 that the grade may be disturbed for the removal of lifting tackle. Bell holes
6 shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells
7 or couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal
8 trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field
9 connection operations.
10
11 C. Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and position shown on the
12 laying schedule. In laying pipe, it shall be laid to the set line and grade,
13 within plus or minus one inch.
14
15 D. The maximum obtainable separation between raw water, potable water,
16 reclaimed water and sewage lines shall be practiced. A minimum horizontal
17 separation of 3 feet, outside to outside, shall be maintained between raw
18 water lines, potable water mains and reclaimed water mains or a minimum
19 of 6 feet separation between sewage lines and either water or potable water
20 lines. In instances where water lines cross a potable water main or a
21 sewage collection line, a minimum vertical separation of 12 inches shall be
22 maintained between the invert of the upper pipe and the crown of the lower
23 pipe. In instances where a vertical separation of 12 inches between a raw
24 water line and a potable water main or a sewage collection line cannot be
25 achieved, then the raw water line shall be placed in a cast iron sleeve or
26 encased in concrete centered at the point of crossing.
27
28 E. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions
29 or other causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades.
30 Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, or by the use of
31 additional fittings.
32
33 F. Except for short runs that may be permitted by the Engineer, pipe shall not
34 be laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid on a downhill
35 grade shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished
36 by the following pipe to prevent movement.
37
38 G. Contractor shall coordinate yard piping installation such that a minimum of
39 36 inches of cover is maintained over piping at all times, unless otherwise
40 indicated on the plans. At crossings, a minimum of 6 inches of vertical
41 separation between pipes shall be maintained while also maintaining 36-
42 inch minimum cover, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
43
44 H. Bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 02221 of these
45 Specifications and the details shown on the Construction Drawings.
46
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-16 09/28/23
• 1 2 I. Bedding shall be carefully worked into the area between the trench bottom
and the pipe wall to keep it round. Bedding shall not be deposited on top of
3 the pipe, but alongside it, and in such a way that it rises evenly on both
4 sides.
5
6 J. All joints shall be assembled in accordance with the Manufacturer's
7 recommended procedures. In general, the procedure shall be as described
8 herein. Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell of the pipe shall be
9 thoroughly cleaned, and a clean gasket shall be placed in the bell groove.
10 The spigot shall be carefully cleaned and the bell containing the gasket and
11 the spigot lubricated with a vegetable-based lubricant. The spigot of the
12 pipe section shall then be aligned with the bell end and inserted into the bell
13 of the previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of
14 the pipe to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted.
15
16 K. Restrained joints shall be assembled in a similar manner as described
17 above except that the restraining device shall be installed in accordance
18 with the Manufacturer's recommended procedures.
19
20 L. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the field horizontal and field vertical
21 centerlines of the pipe. The Contractor shall clean flanges by wire brushing
22 before installing flanged fittings. The Contractor shall clean flange bolts and
23 nuts by wire brushing.
• 24
25 M. The Contractor shall insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and
26 progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the
27 flange to the proper tension. The Contractor shall execute care when
28 tightening joints to prevent any strain upon valves, pumps and other
29 equipment. After tightening all bolts any stulls shall be removed from the
30 interior of the pipe if it is not to be buried.
31
32 N. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts,
33 reset or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and
34 retest the joints. Flanged joints shall be watertight.
35
36 0. Pipe stulls, if recommended by the Supplier, shall be left in place until
37 bedding and backfilling operations have been completed. After the backfill
38 has been placed, the stulls shall be removed and shall remain the property
39 of the Contractor.
40
41 P. After stulls are removed, the Contractor shall check the inside diameter of
42 the pipe to verify that deflection has not exceeded the allowable 3 percent.
43 The frequency of checking shall be as directed by the Engineer but in no
44 case shall be less than the frequency of soil density testing.
45
• 46 Q. All pipes shall be laid with a 2 -inch metallic tape, appropriately color coded
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-17 09/28/23
1 and imprinted with the type of service, 12 inches below final grade and
2 directly above the utility, for identification and ease of location. The
3 appropriate tape color codes are as follows:
4
5 Sanitary Force Main: Green
6 Potable Water: Blue
7 Reclaimed Water: Purple
8
9 R. Care shall be taken in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on
10 the opposite end of one piece which would induce stresses in the pipe or
11 fitting or prevent pressure from being evenly and uniformly applied upon the
12 gasket. The pipe or fitting shall be free to move in any direction while bolting.
13 Bolts shall be gradually tightened, each in turn, at a uniform rate of gasket
14 compression around the entire flange.
15
16 S. No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated
17 or at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of
18 frost at the bottom of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be
19 established that the trench will be backfilled before the formation of ice and
20 frost occurs.
21
22 T. Pipes underneath structures and slabs shall be ductile iron and shall have
23 a 6 -inch minimum concrete encasement for pipes 24 inches and smaller
24 (except pipes 3 inches and smaller, which shall be SCH 80 PVC). 8 -inch
25 minimum concrete encasement for pipes larger than 24 inches up to and
26 including 36 inches and 9 inches minimum concrete encasement for pipes
27 larger than 36 inches. Concrete encasement shall extend a minimum of 12
28 inches past edge of structure or slab.
29
30 U. All pipe and fitting joints occurring within restrained joint limits as required
31 on the Construction Drawings, or as ordered, shall be properly secured to
32 prevent thrust forces from pulling the pipeline joints apart. All tied joints
33 shall be harnessed by using the pipe Manufacturer's standard restrained
34 joint arrangements conforming to these Specifications. Certain joints may
35 be restrained by the use of rods and clamps as directed by the Engineer.
36 The rods and clamp harnessing arrangements shall be installed utilizing
37 lugged fittings and pipe with saddle clamps placed to bear against the pipe
38 bells. Saddle clamps around the barrel of the pipe that depend on friction
39 or set screws to prevent sliding of the clamp are not acceptable. The pipe
40 clamps, tie rods and their assembly shall meet the requirements of the
41 National Fire Protection Association Bulletin No. 24. After each tied joint is
42 connected up, all pipe clamps, bolts, heads, tie rods and nuts shall be
43 coated as recommended by the Supplier.
44
45 V. Careful inspection shall be made of every joint to insure a smooth
46 continuous interior surface. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean the
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-18 09/28/23
•
.1 interior of the pipe and remove any obstructions that may reduce the pipe's
2 carrying capacity. Following completion of pipeline progressively or in
3 sections, including completion of inside inspections, insofar as might be
4 possible or practicable, the line shall be kept partially filled with water.
5
6 W. The Contractor shall patch the cement mortar lining of any pipe that has a
7 crack exceeding the allowable crack as determined by the Engineer. Lining
8 failures that exceed 100 square inches and that have dimension greater
9 than 12 -inches shall be cause for the pipe to be rejected. There shall not
10 be more than one patch on the lining of any one joint of pipe, fitting or
11 special.
12
13 X. Wherever necessary and directed by the Engineer, patches shall be made
14 by the Contractor with a mortar of one part Portland cement and two parts
15 clean, sharp sand; all measurements to be by weight. No pipe requiring the
16 lining to be patched shall be installed until the patch is placed. Pipe thus
17 patched shall not be installed until the patch has been properly and
18 adequately cured and observed by the Engineer.
19
20 Y. All buried process piping (excluding drainage and stormwater piping) shall
21 be restrained in accordance with the restrained joint table provided in the
22 Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping system
23 shall be restrained based on a 150 psi working pressure. Pipes subject to
• 24 gravity flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working pressure.
25 Restrained joint length indicated in the Tables represents the length on all
26 sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must be restrained. As a
27 minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall be restrained. Restrained
28 joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line pressures 50
29 percent above the normal working pressure but not less than 150 psi on
30 pipe subject to pressure and 30 psi on pipe subject to gravity flow. The pipe
31 and fittings shall be restrained mechanical joints.
32
33 3.03 CUTTING PIPE
34
35 Whenever pipes require cutting to fit into the lines, the work shall be done in a
36 satisfactory manner so as to leave a smooth end, at right angles to the axis of the
37 pipe. Pipe cutting shall only be done by saws specifically designed for that
38 purpose. After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be beveled to the dimensions of
39 the Manufacturer's specifications.
40
41 3.04 COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS
42
43 A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean with a wire brush all surfaces that will
44 be in contact with the gaskets.
45
ii• 46 B. The follower rings shall be placed over the pipe ends, then the Contractor
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-19 09/28/23
1 shall slip the lubricated gaskets (vegetable based lubricant) over the pipe
2 ends. The Contractor shall place the middle ring over the previously laid
3 pipe then insert the end of the joining pipe into the middle ring, and position
4 both gaskets evenly in the middle ring gasket grooves. The Contractor shall
5 insert bolts in bolt holes of follower rings and tighten nuts in the sequence
6 and with the torque requirements of the coupling manufacturer. After
7 tightening all bolts the stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if
8 it is not to be buried.
9
10 3.05 DRILLING AND TAPPING
11
12 A. Where shown on the Construction Drawings or where required, ductile iron
13 pipe, fittings or specials shall be drilled and tapped to receive drainage
14 outlets, air relief outlets, or other pipe or plugs for pressure testing and/or
15 chlorination. Holes shall be drilled accurately and at right angles to the axis
16 of the pipe or fitting.
17
18 B. Where size of the outlet pipe to be connected is such as to require bosses
19 or reinforcement saddles for making the connection, the Contractor shall
20 furnish such outlet connections with bosses or reinforcement saddles drilled
21 and tapped as indicated on the Construction Drawings or as directed by the
22 Engineer.
23
24 3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING
25
26 A. The Contractor shall remove all debris, dirt, grease, mortar and other foreign
27 material by the use of soap and water or other solvent as may be required.
28
29 B. After each joint has been made the Contractor shall give all steel bolts and
30 nuts a chemical wash of the phosphate type followed by one (1) coat of
31 primer especially prepared for the finish of the bolt and nut installed. After
32 this pretreatment, the Contractor shall coat all bolts and nuts as follows:
33
34 C. Give all bolts and nuts that will be exposed one (1) coat of primer.
35
36 D. Paint all bolts and nuts that will be underground in accordance with these
37 Contract Documents.
38
39 E. AH piping and fittings shall have its surface prepared and painted as
40 specified in Sections 09865 and 09900.
41
42 3.07 SUPPLIER'S FIELD SERVICE
43
44 Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, arrange for pipe Manufacturer's
45 field representative to be on-site and provide instruction to each crew working
46 during the installation of a minimum of four push -on joints and four restrained joints
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-20 09/28/23
•
• 1 2 The Manufacturer's field representative shall certify that the installations observed
were satisfactorily completed and all pipe installation crews were familiar with the
3 proper methods and procedures for the pipeline installations.
4
5 3.08 FLUSHING AND TESTING
6
7 A. The Contractor shall remove all sand and foreign matter from the pipeline
8 as work progresses. The ends of all pipes shall be suitably closed at each
9 break or pause in pipe laying, and at the end of each work day, so as to
10 minimize the amount of materials that can enter the pipe.
11
12 B. Prior to pressure testing, all 24 -inch and smaller mains shall be flushed to
13 remove all sand and other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water
14 shall not be less than 2 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the
15 direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water
16 without causing property damage or violation of environmental regulations
17 or permits.
18
19 C. Prior to pressure testing, all 30 -inch and larger mains shall be televised. All
20 dirt and foreign matter shall be removed and the pipe shall be cleaned. After
21 cleaning, the mains shall be re -televised. Pre -and post -cleaning videotapes
22 shall be furnished to the Owner.
23
• 24 D. Testing of lines shall be as specified in Section III.
25
26
27 END OF SECTION
28
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-21 09/28/23
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-22 09/28/23
•
• 1 2 SECTION 15094
3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. It is the intent of the project to remove existing pipe supports, hangers, and
10 straps and furnish and install new pipe supports, hangers, and straps as
11 shown on the Drawings.
12
13 B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals and install hangers,
14 supports, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, including metallic hanging and
15 supporting devices for supporting exposed piping.
16
17 C. All new pipe supports, hangers, straps hardware, clips, unistrut, and
18 anchors shall be 304 stainless steel and shall match the number, type,
19 location, and capacity of the existing supports.
20
21 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
22
•23 A. Hangers and supports shall be of standard design and shall be adequate to
24 maintain the supported Toad in proper position under all operating
25 conditions. The minimum working factor for pipe supports shall be five (5)
26 times the ultimate tensile of the material, assuming 10 feet of water filled
27 pipe being supported.
28
29 B. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in
30 such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment.
31 When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall
32 not be transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a
33 certification stating that such requirements have been complied with.
34
35 1.03 SUBMITTALS
36
37 A. Submit to the Engineer for review, as provided in the General Conditions,
38 shop drawings of all items to be furnished under this section.
39
40 B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein.
41
42 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
43
44 2.01 GENERAL
45
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-1 09/28/23
1 A. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant
2 stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves and fittings, and to support
3 and secure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports
4 shall be designed to adequately secure the pipe against excessive
5 dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces,
6 and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe and personnel
7 contact. All pipe supports shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to
8 installation.
9
10 B. All materials used in manufacturing hangers and supports shall be capable
11 of meeting, the respective ASTM Standard Specifications with regard to
12 tests and physical and chemical properties, and be in accordance with MSS
13 SP -58.
14
15 C. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0
16 that the maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10 feet otherwise
17 specified herein.
18
19 D. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be
20 manufactured by Piping Technology & Products, Inc. or equal. Any
21 reference to a specific figure or number is for the purpose of establishing a
22 type and quality of and shall not be considered as proprietary.
23
24 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR METAL PIPE
25
26 A. Suspended single pipes shall be supported by 304 SS hangers suspended
27 by steel from 304 SS concrete inserts, beam clamps or ceiling mounting as
28 follows:
29
30 1. Hangers:
31
32 Pipe Size, Inches Piping Technology & Products Fig. No.
33 1/2" to 3" 50
34 3" to 30" 83
35 Above 30" See SPECIAL SUPPORTS,
36 Paragraph 2.04
37
38 2. Hanger rods shall be rolled 304 stainless steel machine threaded
39 with load ratings conforming to ASTM Specifications and the strength
40 of the rod shall be based on root diameter. Hanger rods shall have
41 the following minimum diameters:
42
43 Pipe Size, Inches Min. Rod Diameter, In.
44 Less than 2-1/2 3/8
45 2-1/2 though 4 1/2
46 4 5/8
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-2 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 6 3/4
2 8-12 7/8
3 14-16 1
4 20-30 1-1/2
5 Above 30 See SPECIAL SUPPORTS,
6 Paragraph 2.04
7
8 3. Where applicable, structural attachments shall be beam clamps.
9 Beam clamps, for rod sizes 1/2 -inch through 3/4 -inch shall be equal
10 to Grinnell Fig. No. 229, and for rod sizes 7/8 -inch through 1-1/4
11 inches shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 228 or equal.
12
13 4. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers shall be designed to be used in
14 ceilings, walls or floors, spot inserts for individual pipe hangers or
15 ceiling mounting bolts for individual pipe hangers, and shall be as
16 manufactured by Ramset/Red Head, or equal, and shall be as
17 follows:
18
19 a. 304 SS Multi Set II drop in style anchors shall be used where
20 applicable and shall be used for hanger rods up to and
21 including 7/8 -inch diameter.
22
23 b. Ceiling mounting plates shall be used, where applicable, and
II) 24 be for hanger rod sizes 1 -inch through and including 1-1/4
25 inches, shall be Fig. 47, Fig. 49 or Fig, 52 as manufactured by
26 Grinnell or equal. All pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical
27 adjustment under load and after erection. Turnbuckles, as
28 required and where applied, shall 304 SS be equal to Grinnell
29 Fig. No. 230. Wall or column supported pipes shall be
30 supported by welded steel brackets equal to Grinnell Fig. 194,
31 195, and 199, as required, for pipe sizes up to and including
32 20 -inch diameter. Additional wall bearing plates shall be
33 provided where required.
34
35 5. Where the pipe is located above the bracket, the pipe shall be set on
36 a 0.5 -inch neoprene pad and U -bolt assembly supported by the
37 bracket for pipes 4 -inches and larger or by a U -bolt for pipes smaller
38 than 4 -inches. U -bolts shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 120 and 137.
39
40 6. Where the pipe is located below the bracket, the pipes shall be
41 supported by pipe hangers suspended by steel rods from the
42 bracket. Hangers and steel rods shall be as specified above.
43
44 7. Wall or column supported pipes 8 -inches and smaller may be
45 supported by hangers equal to Grinnell Figures 103, as required.
•46
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-3 09/28/23
1 B. Floor supported pipes 3 -inches and larger in diameter shall be supported
2 by either cast -in-place concrete supports or adjust -able pipe saddle
3 supports as directed by the Engineer. In general, concrete supports shall
4 be used when lateral displacement of the pipes is probable (unless lateral
5 support is provided), and adjustable pipe saddle type supports shall be used
6 where lateral displacement of the pipes is not probable.
7
8 1. Each concrete support shall conform to the details shown on the
9 Drawings. Concrete shall be poured after the pipe is in place with
10 temporary supports. Top edges and vertical corners of each
11 concrete support shall have 1 -inch bevels. Each pipe shall be
12 secured on each concrete support by a wrought iron or steel anchor
13 strap anchored to the concrete with cast -in-place bolts or with
14 expansion bolts. Where directed by the Engineer, vertical
15 reinforcement bars shall be grouted into drilled holes in the concrete
16 floor to prevent overturning or lateral displacement of the concrete
17 support. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, maximum
18 height shall be five (5) feet.
19
20 2. Concrete piers used to support base elbows and tees shall be similar
21 to that specified above. Piers may be square or rectangular.
22
23 3. Adjustable pipe saddle support shall be screwed or welded to the
24 corresponding size 150 Ib. companion flanges or slip-on welding
25 flanges respectively. Supporting pipe shall be of Schedule 40 steel
26 pipe construction of the size recommended by the pipe support
27 manufacturer. Each flange shall be secured to the concrete floor by
28 a minimum of two (2) expansion bolts per flange. Adjustable saddle
29 supports shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 259. Where used under
30 base fittings, a suitable flange shall be substituted for the saddle.
31 Floor supported pipes Tess than 3 -inches shall be supported by
32 fabricated steel supports.
33
34 C. Vertical piping shall be supported as follows:
35
36 1. Where pipes change from horizontal to vertical, the pipes shall be
37 supported on the horizontal runs within 2 feet of the change in
38 direction by pipe supports as previously specified herein.
39
40 2. For vertical runs exceeding 15 feet pipes and greater than eight -
41 inches in diameter shall be supported by the fabricated pipe support
42 as shown in the drawings.
43
44 3. Where vertical piping passes through a steel floor sleeve, the pipe
45 shall be supported by a friction type pipe clamp which is supported
46 by the pipe sleeve. Pipe clamps shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 262.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 Anchor bolts shall be equal to Kwik -Bolt as manufactured by the
2 McCullock Industries, Minneapolis, Minnesota or Wej-it
3 manufactured by Wej-it Expansion Products, Inc., Bloomfield,
4 Colorado.
5
6 D. All rods, hangers, inserts, brackets, and components shall be 304 Stainless
7 Steel.
8
9 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLASTIC PIPE
10
11 A. Single plastic pipes shall be supported by pipe supports as previously
12 specified herein.
13
14 B. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and
15 rubber hose shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as the
16 Electray Ladder by Husky-Burndy, the Globetray by the Metal Products
17 Division of United States Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel
18 construction. Rung spacing shall be approximately 18 inches for plastic
19 pipe and 12 inches for rubber nose. Tray width shall be approximately 6
20 inches for single runs of rubber hose and 12 inches for double runs of rubber
21 hose. Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger
22 rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc., required for a
•23 complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured to the
24 rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps fasteners equal to Globe Model
25 M -CAC, Husky-Burndy Model SCR or equal. Spacing between clamps shall
26 not exceed 9 feet. The cable shall provide continuous support along the
27 length of the pipe.
28
29 C. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact plastic pipe shall
30 provide firm support, but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal due to thermal
31 expansion and contraction.
32
33 2.04 SPECIAL SUPPORTS
34
35 A. Pipes, requiring special supports as defined in this specification or shown
36 on the drawing, shall be supported by means of a supporting framework
37 anchored into the floor or curbing. The vertical piping shall be suitably
38 secured to horizontal support members connected at each end vertical
39 support members and spaced as required to provide a rigid installation.
40
41 1. The complete supporting system shall be as manufactured by the
42 Unistrut Corporation, Globe -Strut as manufactured by the Metal
43 Products Division of U.S. Gypsum, or equal. Vertical and horizontal
44 supporting members shall be U-shaped channels similar to Unistrut
45 Series P1000.
•46
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-5 09/28/23
1 2. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe •
2 clamps or pipe straps equal to Unistrut Series P1100M and Series
3 P2558. All components shall be of 304 stainless steel.
4
5 3. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts, and
6 fittings required for a complete assembly.
7
8 4. The design of each individual framing system shall be the
9 responsibility of the Contractor. Shop drawings shall be submitted
10 and shall show all details of the installation including dimensions and
11 types of supports.
12
13 B. Any required pipe supports for which the supports specified in this Section
14 are not applicable, including pipe supports for above 30 -inch diameter pipe;
15 high temperature and high pressure (greater than 150 psi) shall be
16 fabricated or constructed from standard aluminum shapes in accordance
17 with Specifications, concrete and anchor hardware similar to items
18 previously specified herein and shall meet the minimum requirements listed
19 below and be subject to review by the Engineer.
20
21 1. Pipe support systems shall meet all requirements of this Section and
22 all related Sections of this Specification.
23
24 2. Complete design details of the entire pipe support systems shall be
25 provided, for review by the Engineer.
26
27 3. The pipe support system shall not impose loads on the supporting
28 structures, in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure
29 is designed.
30
31 Hanger rods for above 30 -inch pipe shall be a minimum of 1 -1/2 -inch
32 diameter and shall not exceed the Manufacturer's standard maximum
33 recommended safe Toad.
34
35 2.05 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING
36
37
38
39
40
41
Pipe hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1.1.0 and
MSS SP -69. In no case shall the spacing of hangers or supports exceed the
following:
d Pipe Span (feet
Nominal Pipe Size -
Inches
Ductile Iron
Steel
PVC -1 and PVC -2
(Sch. 80)
1/2
N/A
5
3.5
3/4
N/A
6
3.5
1
N/A
7
3.8
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-6
09/28/23
•
1-1/4
N/A
7
4.0
1-1/2 - 3
N/A
9
4.0
4
7
10
5.5
5-10
10
10
10
12-48
10
per manufacturer
or as shown on
drawings
10
1
2
3 PART 3 — EXECUTION
4
5 3.01 INSTALLATION
6
7 A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, shall be rigidly supported from the building
8 structure with supports. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction
9 and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No piping
10 shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders and
11 walkways, unless it is so indicated on the Drawings, or specifically directed
12 or authorized by the Engineer.
13
14 B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to
15 support the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak
•16 loading conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement,
17 and pressure forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations and all
18 probable externally applied forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports
19 shall be reviewed by the Engineer.
20
21 C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves,
22 both sides of split type couplings, and sleeve type couplings and to minimize
23 all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to
24 support connecting pipes.
25
26 D. Pipe supports shall be provided as follows:
27
28 1. Cast iron and ductile iron shall be supported at a maximum support
29 spacing of 10 feet -0 -inches with a minimum of one support per pipe
30 section at the joints.
31
32 2. Supports for multiple PVC pipes shall be continuous wherever
33 possible. Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as
34 recommended by the manufacturer except that support spacing shall
35 not exceed five (5) feet.
36
37 3. Support spacing for galvanized steel pipe and copper tubing shall not
38 exceed five (5) feet.
• 39
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-7 09/28/23
1 4. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of at
2 least 15 feet by pipe collars, clamps, brackets or wall rests, and at all
3 points necessary to insure rigid construction.
4
5 E. Pipe supports shall not result in point loadings, but shall distribute pipe Toads
6 evenly along the pipe circumference.
7
8 F. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted
9 for in pipe support selection and installation.
10
11 G. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before
12 concrete is poured. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures
13 shall be checked which have a direct bearing on the pipe location.
14 Responsibility for the proper location of pipe supports is included under this
15 Section.
16
17 H. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete
18 surface.
19
20 3.02 PRIME COATING
21
22 A. Prior to prime coating, all pipe hangers and supports shall be thoroughly
23 clean, dry, and free from all mill -scale, rust, grease, dirt, paint and other
24 foreign substances to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
25
26 B. All submerged pipe supports shall be prime coated with Koppers 654 Epoxy
27 Primer or equal. AH other pipe supports shall be prime coated with Rust -
28 Inhibitive Primer No. 621 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc.,
29 Pittsburgh, Pa. or equal.
30
31 C. Finish coating shall be compatible with the prime coating used and shall be
32 applied, as specified in Section 09900.
33
34 3.03 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS
35
36 A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable
37 insulation shall be provided between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct
38 contact and any resulting electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous
39 impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or
40 washers.
41
42
43 END OF SECTION
44
45
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-8 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 SECTION 15100
2
3 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for complete
10 and ready operation of all valves and appurtenances shown on the Construction
11 Drawings and as specified herein.
12
13 B. All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the drawings.
14
15 C. All new valves 3 -inch and larger shall be provided by the same manufacturer.
16
17 D. All new pneumatic actuators shall be provided by the same manufacturer.
18
19 E. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer cast in
20 raised letters on some appropriate part of the body.
21
22 F The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
23
410 24 1. Eccentric Plug Valves
25 2. Swing Check Valves
26 3. Knife Gate Valves
27 4. Valve Actuators
28 5. Gauges
29 6. Flange Adapter Couplings
30
31 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
32
33 A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard
34 for use in controlling the flow of wastewater, waste activated sludge, return
35 activated sludge, scum, etc., depending on the application.
36
37 B. Unless otherwise specified herein or on the drawings all resilient seats, seals,
38 and other sealing components of valves and flexible fittings shall be of EPDM
39 construction.
40
41 C. All replacement valves are to be provided with an actuator to match the type of
42 the existing actuator and mounted in an identical fashion as the existing
43 actuator.
44
45 D. In the case of existing valves that are being replaced with new valves, all
•46 replacement valves shall have the identical lay length as the existing valves.
47 This applies to all types of valves. Prior to ordering any replacement valve, the
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-1 09/28/23
1 contractor shall notify the Engineer if the valve in questions has to be special •
2 manufactured or ordered because of a non-standard lay length.
3
4 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
5
6 All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well-established
7 reputable firms who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the
8 particular equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed
9 and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with
10 these Specifications, as applicable.
11
12 1.04 SUBMITTALS
13
14 Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to the
15 Engineer for review.
16
17 1.05 TOOLS
18
19 Special tools, if required for normal operation and maintenance, shall be supplied with
20 the equipment.
21
22 1.06 VALVE INDICES
23
24 The Contractor shall submit a valve schedule containing all valves required for the •
25 work. The schedule shall the location, type, a number, words to identify the valve's
26 function, and the normal operating position for each valve.
27
28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
29
30 2.01 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES
31
32 A. Replacement plug valves shall be supplied with end connections identical to
33 those valves they are replacing and have identical lay lengths as those valves
34 they are replacing.
35
36 B. All plug valves shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with standard
37 ANSI/AWWA C517 Table 1, Resilient -Seated Cast -Iron Eccentric Plug Valves,
38 of the latest revision unless otherwise specified. MANUFACTURER shall
39 provide affidavit of compliance with AWWA Standard. Valves shall be as
40 manufactured by DeZurik, Val -Matic, Homestead or equal.
41
42 C. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C504, latest edition.
43 Each valve shall be performance tested in accordance with Paragraph 5.2 of
44 the above reference and shall be given a leakage test and hydrostatic test as
45 described in Paragraphs 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 of the above reference. The leakage
46 test shall be applied to the face of the plug tending to unseat the valve. The •
47 manufacturer shall furnish certified copies of reports covering proof of design
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-2 09/28/23
•1 testing as described in Section 5.2.4 of the above reference.
2
3 D. Valves shall be of the non -lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs
4 and shall be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans. The metal
5 plug shall meet the standards of ANSI/FCI 70-2 Class IV. Flanged valves shall
6 be faced and drilled to the ANSI B16.1 125/150 Ib. standard. Mechanical joint
7 ends shall be in full compliance with ANSI/ AWWA C111/A21.11. Screwed ends
8 shall be to the NPT standard.
9
10 E. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B or ASTM A48, Class 40 cast iron.
11
12 F. Port areas for valves 20 inches and smaller shall be a minimum of 80 percent
13 of full pipe area. Valves 24 -inch and larger shall have a minimum port area of
14 100 percent of full nominal pipe area.
15
16 G. The plug shall have a cylindrical seating surface eccentrically offset from the
17 center of the shaft. Plug shall not contact the seat until at least 90% closed.
18
19 H. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers, etc., shall be zinc or cadmium plated.
20 Valve plugs shall be constructed of ASTM A-48, Class 40 cast iron or ASTM A-
21 536 ductile iron. Resilient plug facings shall be of Neoprene.
22
23 I. Valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated stainless steel,
• 24 oil -impregnated bronze or non-metallic upper and lower plug stem bearings.
25
26 J. Valve seats shall be either nickel or stainless steel. Epoxy seats are not
27 acceptable. Seats shall be 1/8" thick welded overlay of not less than 95% pure
28 nickel. Seat shall be at least'/2" wide, 1/8" thick through entire width and raised.
29 The raised surface shall be completely covered with nickel to insure that the
30 resilient plug face contacts only the nickel seat.
31
32 K. Plug valves greater than 6 inches in diameter shall be supplied with manual
33 gear actuators unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
34
35 L. Bearings shall be sleeve type and made of 316 stainless steel, ASTM A743
36 Grade CF8M through 36".
37
38 M. Shaft seals shall be of the multiple V -ring type with a packing gland follower.
39 Shaft seals shall be externally adjustable and repackable without removing the
40 actuator or bonnet from the valve.
41
42 N. Valves shall have a factory -applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy
43 resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable
44 requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90
45 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants".
.46
47
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-3 09/28/23
1 2.03 SWING CHECK VALVES
2
3 A. Air cushioned check valves shall be APCO Series 6000, as manufactured by
4 DeZURIK, or approved equal.
5 B. Air cushion shall be totally enclosed. The cylinder shall have an anodized
6 aluminum alloy cap, head and barrel. The bottom cylinder head shall be hinged
7 mounted to follow the change of angular force as the lever rises and lowers.
8 C. Swing check valves body shall be ASTM A536 ductile iron. End connections
9 shall be flanged class 125/150 or 250/300 per ASME B16.1. Valves 6" and
10 larger shall have a drain plug located on the bottom of the valve.
11 D. Body seat shall be 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276 with an 0 -ring seal, and
12 locked into place with stainless steel screws.
13 E. Disc and Disc Arm shall be ASTM A536 ductile iron. The disc shall be attached
14 to the disc arm with a double clevis hinge to assure self -leveling and even load
15 distribution upon closure, minimizing seat wear. Disc shall have an independent
16 adjustable full open stop. The disc arm, valve body or cover is not to be used
17 as the disc stop. Disc seat shall be nitrile butadiene (NBR) and field replaceable
18 without use of special tools.
19 F. Pivot shaft shall be a large one-piece 303 stainless steel per ASTM A582,
20 protruding through the body with a lever and weight mounted on one side. The
21 pivot shaft shall have an integral retainer to prevent axial shaft movement. The
22 pivot shaft shall have 0 -Ring seals on both sides of the shaft. Braided type
23 packing is not acceptable. Valve is to be tested by the manufacturer as a
24 complete assembly per AWWA C508.
25 G. Valve shall be warranted by the manufacturer for defects in materials and
26 workmanship for a period of two years from date of shipment.
27
28 2.04 Knife Gate Valves
29
30 A. Knife gate valves shall be H200 -B, as manufactured by DeZURIK, or approved
31 equal
32 B. The valve shall meet the applicable requirements of MSS SP -81, MSS SP -135,
33 or AWWA C520.
34 C. The valve should have a relief groove to allow the gate to push solid particles
35 aside to prevent material packing in the seat area. If required, groove flush ports
36 shall be provided and fabricated from the same material as the wetted parts.
37 D. Valve shall have a pressure retaining bonnet that fully encloses the gate. The
38 bonnet shall be rated at the same pressure as the valve body and shall not
39 include an internal gate packing or gate wiper. A packing gland shall be located
40 at the top of the bonnet to provide a tight seal around the stem. The packing
41 shall be replaceable without disassembling the valve or removing the valve from
42 the pipeline.
43 E. The valve stem shall have an integral back -seating ring to allow repacking under
44 pressure. The back -seating ring sealing surface shall be designed to mate with
45 the bottom of the packing gland.
46 F. The valve stem shall Acme threaded.
47 G. Metal -seated valves shall be full -port design with the clear port ID to or greater
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-4 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 than the pipe ID.
2 H. Resilient seals shall be designed to fit in a self-retaining groove that is cut into
3 the seat ring and be replaceable without removing the valve from the pipeline.
4 The seal shall not require mechanical fasteners or sealants to hold it in place.
5 I. Provide gate guides for valves where the valve stem is not installed in the
6 vertical position. Gate guides shall fully support the gate and allow it to seat as
7 required.
8 J. The pressure class of valve flanges shall be equal to or greater than the
9 pressure rating of the valve.
10 K. Maximum rim pull to seat and unseat valve at rated valve pressure is 60Ibf.
11 L. For a maximum handwheel rim pull greater than 60 pounds at the rated valve
12 pressure, a bevel gear operator shall be provided. The bevel gear operator shall
13 have fully enclosed steel gears, be permanently lubricated, and possess a gear
14 ratio such that the maximum handwheel rim pull at the rated valve pressure
15 does not exceed 60 pounds. Bevel gear operator shall be IP68 rated continuous
16 duty to 50 ft and shall be Rotork model IB -RAW -FB, or approved equal.
17 M. The bonneted knife gate valve shall be installed in a vertical orientation, per
18 valve Manufacturer's installation instructions.
19
20
21 2.05 VALVE ACTUATORS
22
23 A. General
• 24
25 1. All valve actuators shall conform to the latest version of Section 3.8 of
26 AWWA Standard Specification C504, and shall be manual, motor -
27 operated, or air operated and shall match the existing valve operator.
28
29 2. Actuators shall be capable of seating and unseating the disc against the
30 full design pressure and velocity, as specified for each class, into a dry
31 system downstream, and shall transmit a minimum torque to the valve.
32 Actuators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body.
33
34 4. The Contractor and the actuator manufacturer are responsible for
35 providing actuators of adequate size, pressure, and torque ratings for the
36 respective application.
37
38 5. The Contractor is responsible for handling and installing the valve and
39 actuator in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The
40 Contractor shall replace any damaged actuator without cost to the
41 Owner.
42
43 6. Valves located seven (7) feet or more above the floor level shall be
44 equipped with an actuator that allows operation of the valve less than five
45 (5) feet from floor level. Manual operators shall have a chainwheel and
•46 electric actuator shall have a remote mounted control panel.
47
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-5 09/28/23
1 B. Manual Actuators •
2
3 1. Manual actuators shall have permanently lubricated, totally enclosed
4 gearing with handwheel and gear ratio sized on the basis of required
5 opening and closing torque values. Actuators shall be equipped with
6 handwheel, position indicator, and mechanical stop -limiting locking
7 devices to prevent over travel in the open and closed positions. They
8 shall turn counter -clockwise to open valves. Manual actuators shall be
9 of the traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the
10 valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed
11 without creeping or fluttering. Actuators shall be fully enclosed and
12 designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80
13 pounds on the handwheel or chainwheel. Actuator components shall
14 withstand an input of 450 -foot pounds for 30" and smaller and 300 -foot
15 pounds for larger than 30" size valves at extreme actuator positions
16 without damage. Valves located above grade shall have handwheel or
17 chain wheel and position indicator, and valves located below grade shall
18 be equipped with a 2 -inch square AWWA operating nut located at ground
19 level and cast iron extension type valve box. Valve actuators shall
20 conform to AWWA C504, latest revision.
21
22 2. Handwheels or chainwheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to
23 open the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an
24 arrow and the word OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of •
25 opening.
26
27 3. Chainwheels shall be provided for valves 6 feet or more above the
28 operator walkway. Process air piping valves in the aeration basins shall
29 have actuators and handle extensions to allow actuation of the valve a
30 minimum of 24 inches above the operator walkway.
31
32
33 2.06 PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAUGES
34
35 A. All pumps furnished under this contract shall have pressure/ vacuum gauges
36 installed on their respective suction lines and pressure gauges installed on their
37 discharge lines. All pressure and vacuum gauges furnished under this Contract
38 shall be mounted per manufacturer requirements using tapping saddles and
39 sleeves specified in Section 15100, 2.19.
40
41 B. Each gauge shall be direct mounted, phenolic, shock resistant or 304 stainless
42 steel case with a 4 -1/2 -inch diameter dial and furnished with a clear glass crystal
43 window, 1/4 -inch shut-off valve, and a bronze pressure snubber. Provide
44 stainless steel diaphragm seals between shut-off valve and pressure gauge on
45 all lines with unclear matter in suspension of solution. All gauges shall be
46 weatherproofed. The face dial shall be white finished aluminum with jet black •
47 graduations and figures. The face dial shall read in units of both pounds per
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-6 09/28/23
•1 square inch and feet of head.
2
3 C. Suction gauges shall read from 10 inches of mercury vacuum to 50 feet of head.
4 Discharge gauges shall read from zero feet of head to the expected shutoff head
5 of the respective pump.
6
7 D. Gauges shall be as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Marshalltown
8 Instruments, Dwyer, Ametek, Ashcroft, Helicoid, Wekslar or equal
9
10 2.07 FLANGE ADAPTER COUPLINGS
11
12 A. Flange adapter couplings shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings.
13
14 B. Flange adapter couplings shall have a 150 psi minimum pressure rating.
15
16 C. All couplings shall be restrained and shall have a sufficient number of anchor
17 studs to meet or exceed the test pressure rating for this project, 150 psi
18 minimum.
19
20 D. Couplings shall be EBAA Iron Series 2100 Megaflange Restrained Flange
21 Adapter, JCM Model 301R, or equal.
22
.23
24 PART 3 — EXECUTION
25
26 3.01 INSTALLATION
27
28 A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to
29 alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be
30 repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are installed.
31
32 B. After installation, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least 2 hours
33 at the working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different
34 test pressure is specified. If any joint proves to be defective, it shall be repaired
35 to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
36
37 C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of
38 operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings that are in masonry
39 floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon as
40 forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these items,
41 the Contractor shall check all plans and figures which have a direct bearing on
42 their location and he shall be responsible for the proper location of these valves
43 and appurtenances during the construction of the structures.
44
45 D. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the
•46 respective pipe sections in Division 15.
47
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-7 09/28/23
1 E. Flanged joints shall be made with high strength, low alloy Corten bolts, nuts and
2 washers. Mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant alloy
3 steel bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as the
4 pipe. All buried bolts and nuts shall be heavily coated with two (2) coats (14-20
5 mils DFT) of bituminous paint comparable to Carboline Bitumastic 300M,
6 Tnemec Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar, or equal.
7
8 F. Prior to assembly of split couplings, the grooves, as well as other parts, shall be
9 thoroughly cleaned. The ends of the pipes and outside of the gaskets shall be
10 moderately coated with petroleum jelly, cup grease, soft soap or graphite paste,
11 and the gasket shall be slipped over one pipe end. After the other pipe has
12 been brought to the correct position, the gasket shall be centered properly over
13 the pipe ends with the lips against the pipes. The housing sections then shall
14 be placed. After the bolts have been inserted, the nuts shall be tightened until
15 the housing sections are firmly in contact, metal -to -metal, without excessive bolt
16 tension.
17
18 G. Prior to the installation of sleeve -type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned
19 thoroughly for a distance of 8 inches. Soapy water may be used as a gasket
20 lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe
21 to a distance of about 6 inches from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed
22 on the substantial completion date unless otherwise requested by the Owner.
23
24 H. Valve boxes with concrete bases shall be installed as shown on the
25 Construction Drawings. Mechanical joints shall be made in the standard
26 manner. Valve stems shall be vertical in all cases. Place cast iron box over
27 each stem with base bearing on compacted fill and top flush with final grade.
28 Boxes shall have sufficient bracing to maintain alignment during backfilling.
29 Knobs on cover shall be parallel to pipe. Remove any sand or undesirable fill
30 from valve box.
31
32 3.02 SHOP PAINTING
33
34 Ferrous surfaces of above ground valves and appurtenances to be painted shall
35 receive a coating of rust -inhibitive primer compatible to paint system specified in
36 Section 09900. All pipe connection openings shall be capped to prevent the entry of
37 foreign matter prior to installation.
38
39 3.03 FIELD PAINTING
40
41 All metal valves and appurtenances specified herein and exposed to view, except ball
42 valves, shall be painted as part of the work in Section 09900.
43
44 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
45
46 Completed pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure and leakage in
47 accordance with pipe specifications. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-8 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1
3
4
5
6
•
•
Prior to testing, the pipelines shall be supported in a manner to prevent movement
during tests.
END OF SECTION
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-9 09/28/23
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-10 09/28/23
•
•
•
• 1 SECTION 16010
2
3 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
8
9 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions, Divisions 00 & 01 Specification sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 1.02 CODES
14
15 A. The work shall be in conformance with the latest adopted version of the
16 following:
17 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Codes
18 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
19 FBC Florida Building Code
20
21 B. The installation shall also comply with all applicable rules and regulations
22 of local and state laws and ordinances. Include in the work, without extra
•23 cost, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings required to
24 comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. Inform
25 the architect of any work or materials which conflict with any of the
26 applicable codes, standards, laws, and regulations before submitting their
27 bid.
28
29 1.03 ROUGH -IN
30
31 A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the
32 requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
33
34 B. Refer to equipment specifications in for rough -in requirements.
35
36 1.04 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
37
38 A. Existing services shall not be interrupted without prior consent of the
39 owner's authorized representative and may be interrupted only at, and for,
40 the specific time designated by the owner's authorized representative.
41
42 B. Make a thorough examination of the site and the contract documents. No
43 claim for extra compensation will be recognized if difficulties are
44 encountered which an examination of site conditions and contract
Ai 45 documents prior to executing contract would have revealed.
46
16010-1 BID DOCUMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 09/28/2023
1 C. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other
2 building components.
3 D. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
4
5 E. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to
6 allow for electrical installations.
7
8 F. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to
9 be set in poured -in-place concrete and other structural components, as
10 they are constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of
11 electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give
12 particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to
13 closing -in the building.
14
15 G. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to
16 accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials.
17
18 H. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or
19 replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect
20 equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with
21 other installations.
22
23 I. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above
24 ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and
25 structural components.
26
27 J. Temporary electrical service and construction lighting shall be provided
28 under this section. Provide for all electrical service for construction
29 period, making all connections and removal of same at job conclusion.
30 Furnish and install temporary lighting for construction period. At job
31 completion, all temporary lamps shall be removed and replaced with new
32 lamps.
33
34 K. All existing and new conduit/raceways within the project area shall be
35 properly supported; minimum spacing of conduit supports shall be 4 feet.
36 Add support to existing conduit as required to comply with the NEC.
37
38 L. All enclosures for new electrical equipment shall be NEMA 4X stainless
39 steel (type 316). All outdoor enclosures for Programmable Logic
40 Controllers (PLC), Control Panels, Process Monitoring Panels shall have
41 solar shield panels located at top, bottom, back and sides of enclosures.
42 All enclosures shall be painted white to match existing. All enclosures
43 shall have internal mounting plates for components and an interior safety
44 door.
45
46 M. All conduits entering wet wells, pits, tanks, aerators and similar vessels or
16010-2 BID DOCUMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 09/28/2023
•
•
• 1 containment structures shall have conduit seals installed as prescribed by
2 the NEC.
3 N. There shall be no penetrations of existing clarifier tank or process basin
4 walls. All conduits shall be run surface mounted or on top of walls.
5 Conduit supports or associated hardware shall NOT penetrate existing
6 clarifier tank walls or process basin walls.
7
8 1.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING
9
10 A. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and
11 processes of cutting and patching.
12
13 B. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work because of damage
14 caused as a result of electrical installations.
15
16 C. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching
17 work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non -conforming
18 installations.
19
20 D. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials
21 required to:
22
•23 1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
24
25 2. Remove and replace defective work.
26
27 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the
28 contract documents.
29
30 4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
31
32 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
33
34 6. Upon written instructions from the architect/engineer, uncover and
35 restore work to provide for architect/engineer observation of
36 concealed work.
37
38 E. Cut, remove and legally dispose of, selected electrical equipment,
39 components, and materials as indicated; including, but not limited to,
40 removal of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made
41 obsolete by the new work.
42
43 F Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not
44 indicated or scheduled to be removed.
.45
46 G. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to
16010-3 BID DOCUMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 09/28/2023
1 prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
2
3 H. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through
4 remodeling or demolition area and serving other areas required to be
5 maintained operational. When transit services must be interrupted,
6 provide temporary services for the affected areas and notify the owner
7 prior to changeover.
8
9 1.06 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS
10
11 A. Refer to the Section 01300 for submittal definitions, requirements, and
12 procedures.
13
14 B. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted
15 only when submitted by the contractor. Data submitted from
16 subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the architect/engineer will
17 not be processed.
18
19 C. As a minimum, shop drawings shall be furnished for the following; control
20 panels, cables, conductors, Variable Frequency Drives, Soft Starters,
21 raceways, conduits, supports and accessories, grounding devices and
22 hardware, surge protectors, motors, wiring devices, connection lugs, outlet
23 and pull boxes, identification devices and materials, lights and control
24 stations.
25
26 1.07 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
27
28 Refer to the Section 01670 for requirements in selecting products and requesting
29 substitutions.
30
31 1.08 PRODUCT LISTING
32
33 A. Prepare listing of major electrical equipment and materials for the project.
34
35 B. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in
36 Section 01300.
37
38 C. When two or more items of the same material or equipment are required,
39 they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity
40 does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, wire, conduit, fittings,
41 sheet metal, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for
42 dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in work, except as
43 otherwise indicated.
44
45 D. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other
46 connected items.
16010-4 BID DOCUMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 09/28/2023
•
•
• 1
2 E. No substitution will be considered unless written request has been
3 submitted to the architect at least ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt
4 of bids.
5
6 F. If the architect approves any proposed substitutions, such approval will be
7 set forth in an addendum.
8
9 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
10
11 A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers,
12 types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for
13 distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent
14 damage during shipment, storage, and handling.
15 B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is
16 authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from
17 damage.
18
19 C. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize
20 construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and
21 equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient
22 flow of installation.
•23
24 1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS (AS-BUILTS)
25
26 A. Refer to Section 01720 for requirements. The following paragraphs
27 supplement the requirements of Division 01.
28
29 1. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location,
30 both exterior and interior; actual equipment locations, dimensioned
31 from column lines; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column
32 lines; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit
33 breaker size and arrangements; support and hanger details;
34 change orders; concealed control system devices. Wiring diagram
35 and/or schedule shall be furnished indicating identification of all
36 wiring run and labeled from point-to-point (power source to end -of -
37 use).
38
39 2. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; change
40 orders; actual equipment and materials used.
41
42 3. Contractor shall provide engineer with record drawings (AutoCAD
43 compatible file format) and one set of blueprints.
44
•
45 4. Furnish one set of conductor meggar readings as listed in Section
46 16120
16010-5 BID DOCUMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 09/28/2023
1
2 1.11 WARRANTIES
3
4 A. Refer to Section 01740 for procedures and submittal requirements for
5 warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty
6 requirements.
7
8 B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 16 into a
9 separated set of vinyl- covered, three-ring binders, tabulated and indexed
10 for easy reference.
11
12 C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or
13 equipment; date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or
14 bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for
15 filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
16
17 1.12 CLEANING
18
19 A. Refer to Section 01700 for general requirements for final cleaning.
20
21 B. Clean all light fixtures, lamps, and lenses prior to final acceptance.
22 Replace all inoperative lamps.
23
24
25 END OF SECTION
16010-6 BID DOCUMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 09/28/2023
•
•
•
• 1 2 SECTION 16110
3 RACEWAYS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to
15 electrical raceways specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
18
19 A. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
20
21 B. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following:
22
23 Heavy Wall Aluminum
• 24 PVC Schedule 80
25 Liquid -tight flexible PVC coated metal conduit
26
27 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
28
29 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway
30 systems of types and sizes require, whose products have been in
31 satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
32
33 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least three (3) years of successful
34 installation experience on projects with electrical raceway work similar to
35 that required for this project.
36
37 C. Codes and Standards:
38
39 1. UL Compliance Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of
40 UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems.
41 Provide raceway products and components which have been UL
42 listed and labeled.
43
44
45
16110 - 1
RACEWAYS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS •
2
3 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
4
5 A. General: Provide aluminum conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades,
6 sizes and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated.
7
8 B. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection
9 determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with
10 applicable portions of NEC for raceways.
11
12 C. Rigid aluminum Conduit: Provide rigid aluminum, heavy wall, threaded
13 type.
14
15 D. Liquid -Tight Flexible Metallic Conduit: Provide liquid -tight flexible PVC
16 coated metallic conduit for all motor connections.
17
18 E. Conduit Fittings: Couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 2" and
19 smaller shall be aluminum hex -nut, expansion -gland type. Aluminum set
20 screw type fittings may be used for conduit sizes 21/2" and larger.
21
22 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS
23 •24 A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes
25 and weights for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not
26 indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring
27 requirements which comply with provisions for NEC for raceways.
28
29 B. Electrical Plastic Conduit:
30
31 1. Heavy Wall Conduit: Schedule 80, 90°C, UL -rated, constructed of
32 Schedule 80, 90 polyvinyl chloride. For direct burial, UL listed and
33 in conformity with NEC Article 347.
34
35 C. Conduit and Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit, tubing and duct
36 accessories of types, sizes and materials, complying with manufacturer's
37 published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing.
38
39 D. Conduit Bodies: Provide aluminum cast -metal conduit bodies of types,
40 shapes and sizes as required to fulfill job requirements and NEC
41 requirements. Construct conduit bodies with threaded conduit -entrance
42 ends, removable covers, either cast or galvanized aluminum and
43 corrosion -resistant screws.
44
45 PART 3 — EXECUTION
46
16110 - 2
RACEWAYS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
•
•1 3.01 OBSERVATION
2
3 A. Examine areas and conditions under which raceways are to be installed
4 and substrate which will support raceways. Notify contractor in wiring of
5 conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
6 with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
7 acceptable to installer.
8
9 3.02 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS
10
11 A. General: Raceways run below grade, under floors on grade or in concrete
12 shall be PVC heavy wall type (Schedule 80) conduit, provided rigid
13 aluminum conduit is used on elbows and risers to boxes, cabinets, etc.
14
15 B. Sizes of raceways shall be not less than NEC requirements and shall not
16 in any case be less than indicated on drawings. Larger size raceways
17 and/or pull boxes shall be installed if there is excessive length unbroken
18 run or excessive number of bends. Combining of circuits other than those
19 indicated on the drawings will not be permitted.
20
21 C. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, boxes and panel work
22 as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and
23 components with other work.
• 24
25 1. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate
26 possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact,
27 coast surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before
28 assembling.
29
30 2. Use roughing -in dimensions of electrically operated unit furnished
31 by supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only
32 after receiving review of dimensions and after checking location
33 with other trades.
34
35 3. Provide nylon pullcord in empty conduits where indicated. Test all
36 empty conduits with ball mandrel. Clear any conduit which rejects
37 ball mandrel. Pay costs involved for restoration of conduit and
38 surrounding surfaces to original condition.
39
40 4. Use liquid -tight flexible conduit where subjected to one or more of
41 the following conditions:
42
43 a. Exterior location.
44 b. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be
45 expected to accumulate.
•46 c. Corrosive atmosphere.
16110 - 3
RACEWAYS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
1 d. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.
2
3 D. Cut conduits straight, ream properly and cut threads for heavy wall conduit
4 deep and clean.
5
6 E. Field -bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort
7 nor vary internal diameter.
8
9 F. Fasten conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures by two (2) locknuts
10 and terminate with bushing. Install lock nuts inside and outside enclosure.
11
12 G. Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings.
13
14 H. Keep conduits a minimum distance of 6" from parallel runs of flues, hot
15 water pipes or other sources of heat. Do not install horizontal raceway
16 runs below water and steam piping.
17
18 I. Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.
19
20 J. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited.
21 Where required, use 3 -piece union or split couplings.
22
23 K. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of
24 cables/wires within raceways.
25
26 L. Concealed Conduits:
27
28 1. Metallic raceways installed underground or in floors below grade, or
29 outside are to have conduit threads painted with corrosion -inhibiting
30 compound before couplings are assembled. Draw up coupling and
31 conduit sufficiently tight to ensure water tightness.
32
33 2. For floors -on -grade, install conduits under concrete slab.
34
35 3. Install underground conduits a minimum of 24" below finished
36 grade.
37
38 4. All conduits installed below grade or under concrete slab to be
39 minimum of 3/4 inch.
40
41 M. Conduits in Concrete Slab:
42
43 1. Place conduits between bottom reinforcing steel and top reinforcing
44 steel. Place conduits either parallel or at 90° to main reinforcing
45 steel.
46
16110 - 4
RACEWAYS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
•
•
•
• 21 2. Separate conduits by not less than diameter of largest conduit to
ensure proper concrete bond.
3
4 3. Conduits crossing in slab must be reviewed for proper cover by
5 engineer.
6
7 4. Embedded conduit diameter is not to exceed one-third (1/3) of slab
8 thickness.
9
10 N. Install conduits as not to damage or run through structural members.
11 Avoid horizontal or cross runs in building partitions or side walls.
12
13 0. Exposed Conduits:
14
15 1. Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit
16 systems neatly, parallel with or at right angles to walls of building.
17
18 2. Install exposed conduit work as not to interfere with ceiling inserts,
19 lights or ventilation ducts or outlets.
20
21 3. Support exposed conduits by use of hangers, clamps or clips.
22 Support conduits minimum of 18" on each side of bends and outlet
23 boxes and on spacing not to exceed 6'-0".
•24
25 4. Run conduits for outlets on waterproof walls exposed. Set anchors
26 for supporting conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement.
27
28 5. Above requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits
29 installed in space above hung ceilings and in crawl spaces.
30
31 6. Provide rigid aluminum, heavy wall, threaded type for all exposed
32 and in -wall installations.
33
34 P. Non -Metallic Conduits:
35
36 1. Make solvent cemented joints in accordance with recommendations
37 of manufacturer.
38
39 2. Install PVC conduits in accordance with NEC and in compliance
40 with local utility practices.
41
42 Q. Conduit Fittings:
43
44 1. Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with
45 sharp edge for digging into metal and ridged outside circumference
•46 for proper fastening.
16110 - 5
RACEWAYS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
1 •2 2. Bushings •for terminating conduits smaller than 1" and are to have
3 flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent
4 injury to cable insulation.
5
6 3. Install insulated type bushings for terminating conduits 1" and
7 larger. Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides.
8 Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing.
9
10 4. Bushing of standard or insulated type to have screw type grounding
11 terminal.
12
13 5. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3 -piece
14 unions, split couplings and plugs to be specifically designed for
15 their particular application.
16
17 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
18
19 A. General: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures and raceways for
20 conductors to form continuous electrical conductor and connect to
21 electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical
22 continuity and rigid mechanical assembly.
23
24 B. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of
25 electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with
26 corrosion -inhibiting compound before assembling.
27
28 C. Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion
29 joints are crossed.
30
31 D. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings supplied by
32 raceway manufacturer. No field bends of raceway sections will be
33 permitted.
34
35 E. Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length by structural
36 materials. Raceways are not to span any space unsupported.
37
38 F. Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull,
39 or device boxes are required. Standard electrical "handy" boxes, etc. shall
40 not be permitted for use with surface raceway installations.
41
42 G. Raceway penetrations of fire -rated walls and/or floors shall be sealed to
43 maintain integrity of construction. All products, materials and methods of
44 installation shall be UL approved and meet NFPA requirements.
45
46 H. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, notified by engineer and/or
47 authorities having jurisdiction, the following materials may be used:
16110 - 6
RACEWAYS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
•
•
•1
2 1 Rock Wool: Minimum four pound cubic foot density; flame spread
3 15, smoke developed 0, fuel contribution 0 by ASTM 384; minimum
4 melting point 2000°F.
5
6 2. Concrete and masonry are also approved fire stop materials by
7 NFPA 90A.
8
9 3. UL approved products such as Nelson Type CLK Silicon Sealant.
10 Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly followed.
11
12 I Submit complete data on fire -stopping materials and construction methods
13 for review by engineer before proceeding with work.
14
15 END OF SECTION
•
•
16110 - 7
RACEWAYS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
1
2
3
4
5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
16110 - 8
RACEWAYS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
•
•
•
• 1 SECTION 16120
2
3 WIRES AND CABLES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions, Divisions 00 & 01 Specification sections, apply
11 to work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wires
15 and cables specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
18
19 A. Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and
20 schedules.
21
22 B. Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this Section
•23 include the following:
24
25 Copper conductors (copper only conductors)
26 Split -bolt connectors
27 Polaris insulated type lug splice connectors
28
29 C. Applications of electrical wire, cable, and connectors required for project
30 are as follows:
31
32 1. For power distribution circuits
33 2. For motor -branch circuits
34 3. For equipment circuits
35 4. For control circuits
36
37 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
38
39 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire
40 and cable products of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products
41 have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
42
43 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three years of successful
44 installation experience with projects utilizing electrical wiring and cabling
45 work similar to that required for this project.
III 46
16120-1 BID DOCUMENTS
WIRES AND CABLES 09/28/2023
1 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to
2 construction, installation, and color -coding of electrical wires and cables.
3
4 D. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Stds. 82,
5 "Test Procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors",
6 and Std. 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems
7 in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to wiring systems.
8
9 E. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2,
10 3, 8 and D-753. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less
11 than 98% at 20°C (68°F).
12
13 F. The following systems of color -coding shall be strictly adhered to:
14 Isolated Grounded Leads Green and Yellow
15 Grounded Leads Green
16 Grounded Neutral Leads White
17
18 277/480 Volt, Ungrounded Phase Wires (Brown, Orange and Yellow)
19 120/208 Volt, Ungrounded Phase Wires (Red, Blue, Black)
20
21 G. The color code assigned to each phase wire shall be consistently followed
22 throughout.
23
24 H. Where existing base building color -coding differs from color -coding
25 assigned herein. Contractor shall use existing color coding as required to
26 maintain consistency. Advise engineer in writing of color -coding to be
27 used.
28
29 I. All conductors (power and controls) shall be labeled at all termination
30 locations, pull boxes and cabinets and panels. Labels shall include
31 identification of circuit, instrument number, or equipment terminal number;
32 or other means for identifying the equipment/system served.
33
34 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
35
36 A. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory -fabricated type
37 containers, or wound on NEMA specified type wire and cable reels.
38
39 B. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect
40 products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic.
41
42 C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing and tearing
43 wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance
44 integrity of wires/cables is maintained.
45
16120-2 BID DOCUMENTS
WIRES AND CABLES 09/28/2023
•
•
•
• 1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2
3 2.01 BUILDING WIRES
4
5 A. All conductors shall be copper and be rated for 600 volt use. Provide
6 factory -fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials for
7 applications and services indicated.
8
9 B. Conductor insulation shall be dual type THHN/THWN 75°C (167°F) for
10 dry, damp, and wet locations. Conductor insulation with single type
11 marking THHN 90°C (194°F) may be used for above grade and dry
12 locations only.
13
14 PART 3 — EXECUTION
15
16 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES
17
18 A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as
19 indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL,
20 and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized
21 industry practices.
22
•23 B. Unless otherwise noted, all branch circuit conductors shall be No. 12
24 AWG. Branch circuits over 75 feet in length shall be No. 10 AWG unless
25 noted otherwise.
26
27 C. Install UL Type XHHW wiring in conduit, for feeders and branch circuits.
28
29 D. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in
30 same raceway.
31
32 E. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary. Compound used
33 must not deteriorate conductor or insulation.
34
35 F. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave
36 wire/cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway.
37
38 G. Keep conductor splices to minimum.
39
40 H. Install splices and tapes which possess equivalent -or -better mechanical
41 strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Use splices
42 and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.
43
44 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
41)45
16120-3 BID DOCUMENTS
WIRES AND CABLES 09/28/2023
1 A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed feeder wires and cables
2 with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure
3 requirements are fulfilled. Readings shall be taken at 30 second, 1
4 minute, and 3 minutes (at a 1 kV) at test voltage applied. A list of feeders
5 tested shall be submitted to the engineer indicating the insulation
6 resistance level for each cable. As a minimum the following feeders shall
7 be tested:
8 • New VFD feeders
9 • Branch circuit conductors in excess of 100 feet
10 • Pump motor feeders
11
12 B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for
13 short-circuits.
14
15 C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and
16 demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where
17 necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate
18 compliance.
19
20
21 END OF SECTION
16120-4 BID DOCUMENTS
WIRES AND CABLES 09/28/2023
•
•
• 1 SECTION 16135
2
3 ELECTRICAL BOXES, CONTROL PANELS AND FITTINGS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions , Divisions 00 & 01 Specification sections,
11 apply to work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to
15 electrical wiring boxes and fittings specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
18
19 A. Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by
20 drawings and schedules.
21
22 B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this Section include the
•23 following:
24 Pump Control Panels
25 Outlet boxes
26 Junction boxes
27 Pull boxes
28
29 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
30
31 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical
32 boxes and fittings of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products
33 have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not Tess than three (3)
34 years.
35
36 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least three (3) years of successful
37 installation experience on projects utilizing electrical boxes and fittings
38 similar to those required for this project.
39
40 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and
41 installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings.
42
43 D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514-
44 Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide
•
45 electrical boxes and fittings which are UL listed and labeled.
46
16135-1 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL BOXES, CONTROL PANELS AND FITTINGS 09/28/2023
1 E. ASTM C857: Comply with applicable requirements for design Toad
2 capability for concrete pull boxes, covers and supporting members.
3
4 1.04 CODES
5
6 A. The work shall be in conformance with the latest adopted version of the
7 following:
8
9 NFPA 70
10 National Electric Code
11 FBC - Florida Building Code
12
13 B. The installation shall also comply with ail applicable rules and regulations
14 of local and state laws and ordinances. Include in the work, without extra
15 cost, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings required to
16 comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. Inform
17 the architect of any work or materials which conflict with any of the
18 applicable codes, standards, laws, and regulations before submitting their
19 bid.
20
21 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
22
23 2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS
24
25 A. Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat -rolled sheet -steel outlet
26 wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes (including box
27 depths as indicated), suitable for installation at respective locations.
28 Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes and with cable and conduit -
29 size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Exterior located boxes shall
30 be cast metal boxes with suitable stainless steel gasketed covers, or, if
31 located in a classified hazardous area, NEMA 7 box.
32
33 1. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required
34 for each installation; including box supports, mounting ears and
35 brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs,
36 cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which
37 are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation
38 requirements for individual wiring situations.
39
40 2. Ceiling boxes shall be 4" square or octagonal, 11/8" deep for
41 exposed work or furred ceiling work and 3" deep for concrete work.
42 Plaster rings and/or fixture studs shall be provided where required.
43
44 B. Device Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat -rolled sheet -steel, non -
45 gangable device boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes
46 (including box depths as indicated), suitable for installation at respective
16135-2 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL BOXES, CONTROL PANELS AND FITTINGS 09/28/2023
•
•
• 1 locations. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with mounting holes,
2 and with cable -size knockout openings in bottom and ends and with
3 threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening devices. Provide cable
4 clamps and corrosion -resistant screws for fastening cable clamps and for
5 equipment type grounding. Exterior located boxes shall have suitable
6 stainless steel gasketed covers, or, if located in a classified hazardous
7 area, NEMA 7 box.
8
9 1. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as
10 required for each installation; including mounting brackets, device
11 box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster
12 board expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device
13 boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual
14 wiring situations.
15
16 2. Flush mounted wall outlets shall be 4" square boxes or gang
17 boxes, not Tess than 1'/2 deep. Boxes shall be provided with
18 extension rings and/or covers with sufficient depth to bring the
19 covers flush with the finished wall.
20
21 3. Boxes for flush mounting in concrete block work with one or two
22 devices shall have covers with square corners on the raised portion
•23 of the cover. The covers shall have a sufficient amount of depth to
24 be flush with the face of the block. Covers shall be Steel City 52-C
25 series. Boxes for more than two devices shall be Steel City "GW"
26 gang boxes. The bottom side of the covers or boxes shall be
27 installed at the masonry course nearest to the dimension specified
28 or noted.
29
30 4. Outlet boxes for exposed wall mounting and outdoor installation
31 shall be cast metal type "FS" or "FD" boxes with suitable cast
32 aluminum covers. Weatherproof receptacle covers shall have
33 spring hinged lids.
34
35 C. Rain -Tight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion -resistant, cast -metal, rain -tight
36 outlet wiring boxes; of types, shapes and sizes (including depth of boxes),
37 with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, stainless steel
38 face plates with spring -hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each
39 application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion- resistant stainless
40 steel plugs and fasteners. All hardware shall be stainless steel.
41
42 D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide stainless steel junction and heavy
43 walled PVC pull boxes, with screw -on covers; of types, shapes and sizes,
44 to suit each respective location and installation; with stainless steel nuts,
•
45 bolts, screws and washers.
46
16135-3 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL BOXES, CONTROL PANELS AND FITTINGS 09/28/2023
1 E. In -Grade Pull Box: Provide concrete pull box, minimum of 13 inches wide
2 by 24 inches long, 18 inches deep with cast iron bolted down cover, open
3 bottom. Pull box shall be capable of withstand 8,000 pounds of live load
4 and comply with AASHTO and ASTM C857 design load of 22,568
5 pounds.
6
7 F. Control Panels/Enclosures:
8
9 1. The control panel/enclosures shall contain, as a minimum, devices
10 and equipment indicated on the drawings or other sections of these
11 specifications. All control panel/enclosures shall contain interior
12 mounting plate.
13
14 2. The control panel enclosure shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel (type
15 316), Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 50 type 4 listed.
16
17 3. There shall be permanently affixed to the interior side of the
18 exterior enclosure door both a nameplate and a 10" x 12" pocket
19 for drawing storage. The nameplate shall contain the following
20 information: voltage, phase, date manufactured and intended use
21 — equipment service or function.
22
23 4. Inner safety door (dead front) shall be aluminum.
•
•
24 5. Provide surge arrestor per county requirements.
25
26 6. Contractor shall furnish shop drawings for control panel. Include
27 dimension, mounting and material requirements of control panel.
28 Furnish wiring diagrams of all internal components and devices.
29 Schematic diagram of system and PLC connection diagrams and
30 data sheet and programming functions. Furnish operating and
31 maintenance and programming manuals.
32
33 PART 3 - EXECUTION
34
35 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
36
37 A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance
38 with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC,
39 and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project
40 requirements.
41
42 B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable,
43 wiring devices, and raceway installation work.
44
III
45 C. Provide weather -tight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to
16135-4 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL BOXES, CONTROL PANELS AND FITTINGS 09/28/2023
• 1 weather or moisture.
2
3 D. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks
4 have been removed.
5
6 E. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility
7 to enclosed electrical wiring. All existing and new junction boxes within
8 the project area shall be made accessible. Relocate existing junction
9 boxes as required to comply with the NEC.
10
11 F. Metallic and approved nonmetallic electrical outlet boxes may be installed
12 in vertical fire resistive assemblies classified as 2 -hour or Tess without
13 affecting the fire classification, provided such openings occur on one side
14 only in each framing space and that openings do not exceed 16 square
15 inches. Boxes located opposite sides of walls or partitions shall be
16 separated by a horizontal distance of 24".
17
18 G. In openings larger than 16 square inches, the wall shall be built around
19 openings so as not to interfere with the integrity of the wall rating.
20
21 H. All clearances between such boxes and the gypsum board shall be
22 completely filled with joint compound or other approved material.
.23
24 I. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish
25 thickness.
26
27 J. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural
28 surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete
29 or masonry.
30
31 K. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction
32 debris and damage.
33
34 L. For in grade concrete pull boxes; excavate approximately 6 inches deeper
35 than the overall height of the pull box. The length and width of the
36 excavation shall be determined by adding 4 to 6 inches to the overall
37 length and width of the pull box. Place approximately 6 inches of
38 compacted fine gravel; level compacted gravel so that the top of the pull
39 box is flush with finished grade. Place fine sand backfill into the
40 excavation and compact the material.
41
42
43 END OF SECTION
16135-5 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL BOXES, CONTROL PANELS AND FITTINGS 09/28/2023
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
16135-6 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL BOXES, CONTROL PANELS AND FITTINGS 09/28/2023
•
• 1 SECTION 16142
2
3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions, Divisions 00 & 01 Specification sections, apply
11 to work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to
15 electrical connections for equipment specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
18
19 A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings
20 and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include
21 connections used for providing electrical power to equipment.
22
• 23 B. Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of
24 equipment, are specified in other Division 16 sections, and are work of
25 this Section.
26
27 C. Motor starters and controllers not furnished as integral part of equipment
28 are specified in applicable Division 16 sections and are work of this
29 Section.
30
31 D. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors
32 and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division
33 16 sections, and are work of this Section.
34
35 E. Electrical identification for wire/cable conductors is specified in Division 16
36 section, "Electrical Identification", and is work of this Section.
37
38 F. Raceways and wires/cables required for connecting motors and other
39 electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division 16
40 sections, and are work of this Section.
41
42 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
43
44 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical
•45 connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary
16142-1 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 09/28/2023
1 connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, soldering fluxes,
2 and cable ties; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
3 service for not less than five (5) years.
4
5 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least two (2) years of successful
6 installation experience with projects utilizing electrical connections for
7 equipment similar to that required for this project.
8
9 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to
10 type products used and installation of electrical power connections
11 (terminals and splices) for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect
12 switches.
13
14 D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and
15 Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors" including, but not limited
16 to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. Provide
17 electrical connection products and materials which are UL listed and
18 labeled.
19
20 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
21
22 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
23
24 A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete
25 assembly of materials; including, but not necessarily limited to, pressure
26 connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, cable ties,
27 solderless wirenuts, and other items and accessories as needed to
28 complete splices and terminations of types indicated.
29
30 B. Conduit and Fittings, General: Provide PVC conduit and fittings of types,
31 grades, sizes and weights (minimum sch 80 for above grade installation)
32 indicated for each type service. Where types and grades are not
33 indicated, provide proper selection as determined by installer to fulfill
34 wiring requirements and comply with NEC requirements for raceways.
35 Provide products complying with Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and
36 Methods section "Raceways", and in accordance with the following listing
37 of metal conduit, tubing and fittings:
38
39 PVC Schedule 80 for underground installation
40
41 C. Wires, Cables, and Connectors:
42
43 1. General: Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with
44 Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods section "Wires
45 and Cables".
16142-2 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 09/28/2023
•
• 1
2 2. Wires/Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables
3 (conductors) for electrical connections which match (including sizes
4 and ratings) wires/cables which are supplying electrical power.
5 Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not Tess than 98% at
6 20°C (68°F).
7
8 D. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals
9 which mate and match (including sizes and ratings) with equipment
10 terminals, and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended
11 applications. All conductor connections shall be made with terminal lugs,
12 #PSR type, as manufactured by Polaris; or equal.
13
14 PART 3 — EXECUTION
15
16 3.01 OBSERVATION
17
18 A. Observe area and conditions under which electrical connections for
19 equipment are to be installed and notify contractor in writing of conditions
20 detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
21 work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
22 acceptable to installer.
• 23
24 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
25
26 A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment
27 manufacturer's written instructions, with recognized industry practices, and
28 complying with applicable requirements of UL and NEC to ensure that
29 products fulfill requirements.
30
31 B. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway, and
32 equipment installation as necessary to properly interface installation of
33 electrical connections for equipment with other work.
34
35 C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in
36 accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring
37 diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper
38 interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.
39
40 D. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to occupied areas and
41 operational facilities unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized
42 otherwise in writing by owner or architect/engineer. Provide temporary
43 service during interruptions to existing facilities. When necessary,
44 schedule momentary outages for replacing existing wiring systems with
III
16142-3 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 09/28/2023
1 new wiring systems. When that "cutting -over" has been successfully
2 accomplished, remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated.
3
4 E. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater
5 insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those
6 conductors being spliced.
7
8 F. Prepare cables and wires by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket,
9 and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where
10 cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through
11 tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper
12 conductors while skinning wire.
13
14 G. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to
15 facilitate inspection, testing, and maintenance.
16
17 H. Provide flexible conduit for motor connections and other electrical
18 equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration.
19
20 I. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and other
21 electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration; and also
22 where connections are subjected to one or more of the following
23 conditions:
24
25 1. Exterior location.
26 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to
27 accumulate.
28 3. Corrosive atmosphere.
29 4. Water spray.
30 5. Dripping oil, grease, or water.
31
32 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
33
34 A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry
35 has been energized with rated power source, test connections to
36 demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that
37 direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct
38 malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
39
40 3.04 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES
41
42 A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
43 written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of
44 Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill
45 project requirements.
16142-4 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 09/28/2023
•
•
•
• 1
2 B. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from
3 excess building materials, dirt, and debris.
4
5 C. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
6
7 D. Install wallplates after painting work is completed.
8
9 3.05 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES
10
11 A. Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise contractor
12 regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of
13 substantial completion, replace those items which have been damaged,
14 including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
15
16 3.06 GROUNDING
17
18 A. Provide equipment grounding connections for all wiring devices, unless
19 otherwise indicated.
20
21 3.07 TESTING
22
•23 A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity and for
24 short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained.
25 Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate
26 compliance with requirements.
27
28
29 END OF SECTION
•
16142-5 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 09/28/2023
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
16142-6 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 09/28/2023
•
•
•
• 1 SECTION 16143
2
3 WIRING DEVICES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions, Divisions 00 & 01 Specification sections, apply
11 to work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wiring
15 devices specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
18
19 A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
20 Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution
21 systems which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy.
22
• 23 B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:
24
25 Receptacles
26 Ground -fault circuit interrupters
27 Wallplates
28 Switches
29
30 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31
32 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical
33 wiring devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have
34 been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
35
36 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least two (2) years of successful
37 installation experience on projects utilizing wiring devices similar to those
38 required for this project.
39
40 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and
41 wiring of electrical wiring devices.
42
43 D. UL Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are UL listed and labeled.
44
•45 1.04 SUBMITTALS
46
16143-1 BID DOCUMENTS
WIRING DEVICES 09/23/2023
1 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices per
2 Section 01300.
3
4 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
5
6 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
7
8 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
9 providing wiring devices which may be incorporated in the work include;
10 but are not limited to, the following (for each type and rating of wiring
11 device):
12
13 Arrow -Hart, Cooper Industries
14 Harvey Hubbell Inc.
15 Pass and Seymour Inc.
16
17 2.02 FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES:
18
19 A. General: Provide factory -fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and
20 electrical ratings for applications indicated and which comply with NEMA
21 Stds. Pub/No. WD1. Provide ivory color devices except as otherwise
22 indicated.
23
24 B. Receptacles:
25
26 1. Duplex receptacles for 20 ampere, 120 volt service shall be two -
27 pole, three -wire receptacles, rated 20 amperes at 125 volts.
28 Receptacles shall be Harvey Hubbell, Inc., Catalog No. 5362-1.
29
30 2. Single receptacles for 20 amps, 120 volts service shall be two -pole,
31 three -wire rated 20 amperes at 125 volts. Receptacles shall be
32 Harvey Hubbell Inc., Catalog No. 5361-1.
33
34 2.03 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES
35
36 A. 'In Use' covers for receptacles.
37
38 B. Weatherproof caps for switches.
39
40 PART 3 — EXECUTION
41
42 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES
43
44 A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
45 written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of
16143-2 BID DOCUMENTS
WIRING DEVICES 09/23/2023
•
•
•
• 1 Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill
2 project requirements.
3
4 B. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from
5 excess building materials, dirt, and debris.
6
7 C. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
8
9 D. Install wallplates after painting work is completed.
10
11 3.02 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES
12
13 A. Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise contractor
14 regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of
15 substantial completion, replace those items which have been damaged,
16 including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
17
18 3.03 GROUNDING
19
20 A. Provide equipment grounding connections for all wiring devices, unless
21 otherwise indicated.
22
•23 3.04 TESTING
24
25 A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity and for
26 short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained.
27 Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate
28 compliance with requirements.
29
30
31 END OF SECTION
32
•
16143-3 BID DOCUMENTS
WIRING DEVICES 09/23/2023
1 SECTION 16170
2
3 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to circuit
15 and motor disconnects specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
18
19 A. Extent of circuit and motor disconnect switch work is indicated on
20 drawings and schedules.
21
22 B. Types of circuit and motor disconnect switches in this Section include the
23 following:
24
25 Equipment disconnects.
26 Appliance disconnects.
27 Motor -circuit disconnects.
28
29 C. Wires/cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings required in
30 connection with circuit and motor disconnect work are specified in other
31 Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections.
32
33 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
34
35 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of circuit and
36 motor disconnect switches of types and capacities required, whose
37 products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not Tess than
38 three (3) years.
39
40 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
41 installation experience with projects utilizing circuit and motor disconnect
42 work similar to that required for this project.
43
44 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to
45 construction and installation of electrical circuit and motor disconnect
46 devices.
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS BID DOCUMENTS
16170 - 1 09/28/23
•
•
•
•1 D. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and
2 Dead -Front Switches." Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches
3 which have been UL listed and labeled.
4
5 E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds.
6 Pub No. KS 1, "Enclosed Switches" and 250, "Enclosures for Electrical
7 Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)."
8
9 1.04 SUBMITTALS:
10
11 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on circuit and motor
12 disconnect switches.
13
14 B. Submit shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each circuit
15 and motor disconnect with proposed switch and accessories clearly
16 identified on each sheet. Identify each device with corresponding names,
17 abbreviations (numbers and lettering) to match terminology of contract
18 documents.
19
20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21
22 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
23
• 24 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
25 manufacturers offering circuit and motor disconnects which may be
26 incorporated in the work are limited to:
27
28 Square D Company.
29 Westinghouse/Cutler-Hammer
30 General Electric Co.
31
32 2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES:
33
34 A. Heavy -Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface -mounted, heavy-duty type,
35 NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and
36 electrical characteristics indicated; incorporating quick -make, quick -break
37 type switches. Construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position
38 with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of
39 enclosure base and whose operating position is easily recognizable, and
40 is padlockable in OFF position. Construct current carrying parts of high -
41 conductivity copper, with silver -tungsten type switch contacts.
42
43
44
45
• 46
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS BID DOCUMENTS
16170 - 2 09/28/23
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
4
5 A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with
6 manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC,
7 NEMA, NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with
8 recognized industry practices.
9
10 B. Install disconnect switches for use with motor -driven appliances and
11 motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise
12 indicated.
13
14 C. Unless otherwise indicated, protective devices shall be mounted with top
15 of cabinet or enclosure 6'-6" above finished floor; shall be properly
16 aligned; and shall be adequately supported independently of the
17 connecting raceways and other equipment. All steel shapes, etc.,
18 necessary for the support of the equipment shall be furnished and
19 installed where the building structure is not suitable for mounting the
20 equipment directly thereon. Unless otherwise indicated, all branch circuit
21 protective devices enclosures shall be NEMA type I, general purpose
22 type. Branch circuit protective devices installed outdoors or exposed to
23 the weather shall have weatherproof enclosures, NEMA Type 4X.
24
25 3.02 GROUNDING:
26
27 A. Provide equipment grounding connections sufficiently tight to assure a
28 permanent and effective ground for electrical disconnect switches where
29 indicated.
30
31 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
32
33 A. Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches,
34 energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with
35 requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at project site,
36 then retest to demonstrate compliance. Otherwise remove and replace
37 with new units and retest.
38
39
40
41 END OF SECTION 16170
42
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS BID DOCUMENTS
16170 - 3 09/28/23
•
•
•
•
1
2
3
4
5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS BID DOCUMENTS
16170 - 4 09/28/23
1 SECTION 16190
2
3 SUPPORTING DEVICES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions, Divisions 00 & 01 Specification sections, apply
11 to work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to
15 electrical supporting devices specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
18
19 A. Extent of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals is indicated by drawings
20 and schedules and/or specified in other Division 16 sections.
21
22 B. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified in this Section
23 include the following:
24 Concrete Posts.
25 Clevis hangers.
26 One -hole conduit straps.
27 Two -hole conduit straps.
28 Round steel rods.
29 Expansion anchors.
30 Toggle bolts.
31 Wall and floor seals.
32 U -Channel Strut.
33 Steel/Aluminum Pipes/Angles.
34
35 C. Supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals furnished as part of factory
36 fabricated equipment are specified as part of that equipment assembly in
37 other Division 16 sections.
38
39 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
40
41 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supporting
42 devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been
43 in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
44
45
46
16190-1 BID DOCUMENTS
SUPPORTING DEVICES 09/28/2023
•
•
•
• 1 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
2 installation experience with projects utilizing electrical supporting device
3 work similar to that required for this project.
4
5 C. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors
6 Association's "Standard of Installation", pertaining to anchors, fasteners,
7 hangers, supports, and equipment mounting.
8
9 D. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL listed and
10 labeled.
11
12 1.04 SUBMITTALS
13
14 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on supporting devices,
15 including catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions for each
16 type of support, anchor, sleeve, and seal per Section 01300.
17
18 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
19
20 2.01 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES
21
•22 A. General: Provide stainless steel supporting devices with stainless steel
23 hardware which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design
24 and construction, in accordance with published product information and as
25 required for complete installation and as herein specified. Where more
26 than one type of supporting device meets indicated requirements,
27 selection is installer's option.
28
29 B. Supports (Interior locations): Provide supporting devices of types, sizes,
30 and materials indicated and having the following construction features:
31
32 1. Clevis Hangers: For supporting conduit; stainless steel with %"
33 diameter hole for round steel rod, approximately 54 pounds per 100
34 units.
35
36 2. Reducing Couplings: A stainless steel rod reducing coupling, %2' by
37 5/8", approximately 16 pounds per hundred 100 units.
38
39 3. One -Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit; stainless steel.
40
41 4. Two -Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit; stainless steel.
42
43 5. Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2' rod size, stainless steel.
44
•
45 6. Round rod: '/" diameter, stainless steel.
46
16190-2 BID DOCUMENTS
SUPPORTING DEVICES 09/28/2023
1 7. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit;
2 stainless steel.
3
4 C. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes, and materials indicated with
5 the following construction features: (all stainless steel)
6
7 1. Expansion Anchors: '/2".
8
9 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead, 3/16" by 4".
10
11 D. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals (all as manufactured by
12 3M), of types, sizes and materials indicated, with the following
13 construction features:
14
15 1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory -assembled watertight wall
16 and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated, suitable for sealing
17 around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and
18 walls. Construct seals with PVC sleeves, neoprene sealing
19 grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and
20 cap screws. Seals shall be fire -rated where required.
21
22 E. U -Channel Strut Systems for exterior locations: Provide U -channel strut
23 system for supporting electrical equipment on walls or from ceilings. All
24 materials shall be stainless steel of types and sizes required. Construct
25 with 3/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, and with the following
26 fittings which mate and match with U -channel:
27
28 Channel hangers.
29 End caps.
30 Beam clamps.
31 Wiring studs.
32 Rigid conduit clamps.
33 Conduit hangers.
34
35 2.02 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES
36
37 A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of PVC Pipe: Fabricate from
38 schedule 40 PVC pipe. Remove burrs.
39
40 B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeves for piping which penetrate foundation walls
41 below grade or exterior walls. Caulk between sleeve and pipe with
42 nontoxic, UL classified caulking material to ensure watertight seal. Seals
43 shall be fire -rated where required.
44
45 C. Stainless steel pipe, 6061 -TS, Schedule 40, Plates, angles and struts.
46 Stainless steel bolts, washers and nuts shall be used to fasten stainless
16190-3 BID DOCUMENTS
SUPPORTING DEVICES 09/28/2023
•
• 1 steel supports. See drawings for details.
2
3 PART 3 — EXECUTION
4
5 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES
6
7 A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as indicated, in accordance
8 with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry
9 practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply
10 with requirements of NECA and NEC for installation of supporting devices.
11
12 B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work,
13 as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other
14 work.
15
16 C. Install hangers, supports and attachments to support piping properly from
17 building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
18 conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where
19 possible. Install supports with spacing indicated and in compliance with
20 NEC requirements.
21
22
023 END OF SECTION
16190-4 BID DOCUMENTS
SUPPORTING DEVICES 09/28/2023
1 SECTION 16195
2
3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to
15 electrical identification specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
18
19 A. Extent of electrical identification work is indicated by drawings and
20 schedules.
21
22 B. Types of electrical identification work specified in this Section include the
23 following:
24
25 Equipment/panels/boxes/conduit//system identification signs.
26
27 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
28
29 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
30
31 A. Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs
32
33 1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in
34 sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard
35 letter style of sizes and wording indicated; black face and white
36 core plies (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for
37 mechanical fastening.
38
39 2. Signs shall be black face with white core plies (letter color).
40
41 a. Thickness: 1/16", except as otherwise indicated.
42
43 b. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless-steel screws, except
44 contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot, or
45 should not, penetrate substrate. Screens shall be sealed
46 with high temperature RTV sealant.
47 c. Nameplates shall be furnished and installed for VFDs,
16195-1 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 09/28/2023
•
• 1 Terminal Boxes, power panels, control panels, PLC
2 cabinets, equipment disconnect switches and pull boxes.
3
4 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
5
6 A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used
7 in electrical identification work with corresponding designations shown,
8 specified, or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as
9 indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturer
10 or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of
11 electrical systems and equipment.
12
13 PART 3 — EXECUTION
14
15 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
16
17 A. General Installation Requirements
18
19 1. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance
20 with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC.
21
•22 2. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces
23 which require finish, install identification after completion of
24 painting.
25
26 3. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of
27 governing authorities for identification of electrical work.
28
29 B. Equipment/System Identification
30
31 1. General: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major unit
32 of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit
33 of each electrical system including communication/ control/signal
34 systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory
35 identification or signal system. Provide text matching terminology
36 and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings.
37 Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical
38 work:
39
40 a. Electrical cabinets and enclosures.
41 b. Access panels/doors to electrical facilities.
42 c. Disconnect switches, motor starters, contactors, including
43 current origination.
44
•45 2. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise
46 indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without
16195-2 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 09/28/2023
1
2
3
4
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure
to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners
should not, or cannot, penetrate substrate.
5 3. Emergency Systems: Where the grounded circuit conductor from
6 an emergency source is connected to a grounding electrode
7 conductor anywhere except at the source, install an engraved
8 plastic -laminate sign stating "WARNING: STANDBY AND
9 NORMAL POWER SYSTEMS BOTH GROUNDED AT THIS
10 LOCATION". Install at the location of the remote grounding
11 connection.
12
13
14 END OF SECTION
16195-3 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 09/28/2023
•
• 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
16195-4 BID DOCUMENTS
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 09/28/2023
1 SECTION 16452
2
3 GROUNDING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions, Divisions 00 & 01 Specification sections, apply
11 to work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is
14 part of each Division 16 Section making reference to grounding specified
15 herein.
16
17 1.02 SUMMARY
18
19 A. The extent of electrical grounding and bonding work is indicated by
20 drawings and schedules, and as specified herein. Grounding and bonding
21 work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and equipment. All new
22 grounding electrodes (rods) and new ground conductors shall be bonded
23 to the existing grounding grid at four locations, minimum. All new control
24 panels, electrical panels and cabinets shall be grounded with new ground
25 rods and shall also be bonded to the existing grounding grid. All new
26 connections to the existing grounding grid shall be made by exothermic
27 weld process. Contractor shall obtain approval the grounding connections
28 from owner before installation. Contractor shall furnish and install one
29 grounding test station at each control panel. Test station shall include in
30 grade box with removable lid to exposed top of ground rod and grounding
31 conductor; all connections in test station shall be mechanical type — not
32 exothermic weld.
33
34 B. The type of electrical grounding and bonding work specified in this Section
35 includes the following:
36
37 Solidly grounded system.
38
39 C. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work in this Section
40 include the following:
41
42 Electrical power systems.
43 Grounding electrodes.
44 Separately derived systems.
45 Raceways.
46 Enclosures/Control Panels/PLC.
16452-1
GROUNDING
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
•
•
•
. 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
•23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
046
47
Equipment.
D. Refer to other Division 16 sections for wires/cables, electrical raceways,
boxes and fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction
with electrical grounding and bonding work; not work of this section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding
products (Ground rods, connectors, clamps, exothermic welds and
grounding conductors) and associated accessories per Section 01300.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the
manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types and ratings
required, and ancillary grounding materials; including stranded cable,
copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and
bonding jumpers; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
installation experience on projects with electrical grounding work similar to
that required for project.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical
code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as
applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to
systems, circuits, and equipment.
2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL
Standards No.'s 467, "Electrical Grounding and Bonding
Equipment", and 869, "Electrical Service Equipment", pertaining to
grounding and bonding of systems, circuits, and equipment. In
addition, comply with UL Std. 486A, "Wire Connectors and
Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide
grounding and bonding products that are UL listed and labeled for
their intended usage.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Materials and Components, General: Except as
provide electrical grounding and bonding systems
16452-2
GROUNDING
otherwise indicated,
to all new electrical
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
1 equipment (power and controls) with assembly of materials, including, but
2 not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals,
3 grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge
4 arresters, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation.
5 Where more than one type component product meets indicated
6 requirements, selection is installer's option. Where materials or
7 components are not indicated, provide products that comply with NEC and
8 UL, requirements, and with established industry standards for those
9 applications indicated.
10
11 B. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding
12 conductors for grounding system connections that match power supply
13 wiring materials and are sized according to NEC. All conductors shall be
14 copper.
15
16 C. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide copper
17 bonding plates, connectors, terminals, Tugs, and clamps as recommended
18 by bonding plate, connector, terminal, and clamp manufacturers for
19 indicated applications.
20
21 D. Ground Electrodes: Solid copper, 5 Ohms, three-quarter inch (3/")
22 diameter by twenty feet (20').
23
24 PART 3 — EXECUTION
25
26 3.01 EXAMINATION
27
28 A. Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding and
29 bonding connections are to be made, and notify contractor in writing of
30 conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with
31 work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
32 acceptable to installer.
33
34 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS
35
36 A. General: Install electrical grounding and bonding systems as indicated, in
37 accordance with manufacturer's instructions; applicable portions of NEC,
38 NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized
39 industry practices, to ensure that products comply with requirements.
40
41 B. All power, lighting, control circuits shall have a fully sized insulated copper
42 conductor run the entire length of the circuit. The raceway/conduit system
43 shall not be used as a means of the grounding system.
44
45 C. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation
46 of electrical grounding and bonding system work with other work.
47
16452-3
GROUNDING
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
•
•
•
• 1 D. All raceways with No. 10 or 12 AWG phase conductors for receptacles,
2 lighting fixtures, and similar circuits shall be provided with a parity -sized
3 (same size as phase conductor) green equipment ground conductor.
4 Ground conductor shall be installed in entire raceway system, including
5 wall switches and flexible conduit to light fixtures. Equipment ground
6 conductor sizes for circuits with phase conductors larger than No. 12
7 AWG are indicated on drawings. Ground conductors shall be connected
8 to ground buss in panelboards.
9
10 E. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment -grounding
11 conductors with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. Conductors looped under
12 screw or bolt heads will not be permitted.
13
14 F. All raceways with No. 10 or 12 AWG phase conductors for receptacles,
15 lighting fixtures, and similar circuits shall be provided with a parity -sized
16 green equipment ground conductor. Ground conductor shall be installed
17 in entire raceway system, including wall switches and flexible conduit to
18 light fixtures. Equipment ground conductor sizes for circuits with phase
19 conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are indicated on drawings. Ground
20 conductors shall be connected to ground buss in panelboards.
21
22 G. Install clamp -on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces to ensure
•
23 electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.
24
25 H. Provide a grounding bushing and a continuous copper bonding jumper
26 from the bushing to the equipment ground bus in all feeders. The bonding
27 jumper shall be the same size as the equipment ground conductor.
28
29 I. Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed
30 noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway
31 systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground
32 connectors, and piping systems.
33
34 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
35
36 A. Upon completion of new installation of electrical grounding and bonding
37 systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where
38 tests show resistance -to -ground is over ten (10) ohms, take appropriate
39 action to reduce resistance to ten (10) ohms or Tess by driving additional
40 ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance.
41
42 B. Submit test results (3 copies) to engineer of record. Test results shall
43 include grounding test method used, equipment used (manufacturer and
44 model number) with certification of calibration and data results.
.45
46
END OF SECTION
16452-4
GROUNDING
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
1 SECTION 16480
2
3 MOTORS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 Furnish and install the motors as hereinafter specified and as called for in other
10 sections of these Specifications.
11
12 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
13
14 Motor shall be sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed
15 their full -rated load when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity.
16
17 1.03 SUBMITTALS
18
19 A. The motor manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer certified dimension
20 prints showing nameplate data and outline dimensions within three weeks
21 of the date they receive the order.
22
23 B. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manual and parts lists as specified in
24 Division 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT.
25
26 C. Guarantee: All equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall
27 be guaranteed against defects of workmanship, materials and improper
28 installation for a period of eighteen month from date of acceptance. All
29 such equipment or parts proven defective, due to the above noted causes,
30 shall be replaced in the machines by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to
31 the Owner.
32
33 D. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Division 1.
34
35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
36
37 2.01 RATING
38
39 A. Unless otherwise noted, all motors shall be of the low voltage type. All
40 motors 2 through 100 horsepower shall be rated 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60
41 Hertz A.C.; motors 125 horsepower through 300 horsepower shall be
42 rated 460 volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz, and motors below 2 horsepower shall
43 be rated 115/230 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hertz A.C.
16480-1
MOTORS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
•
•
•
•1
2 2.02 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
3
4 A. Motors 25 HP and larger shall have a 120 -volt space heater for moisture
5 control.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
.13
21 2.03 CONSTRUCTION
22
23 A. General:
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
1.Alik 34
35
B. Unless specifically noted in other sections of these Specifications, all
motors shall have an efficiency as indicated in the table below. Motors
shall be "premium efficiency" type.
TABLE 1
Motor
HP
Min.
Eff.
Max.
dba
Motor
HP
Min.
Eff.
Max.
dba
1-2
84.0%
74
25-30
92.0%
92
3-5
86.5%
79
40-50
93.0%
97
7.5-10
90.2%
84
60-75
94.0%
100
15-20
91.0%
89
100
94.1%
102
C. Motors operating with variable frequency drives shall indicate on the
nameplate that they are suitable for their intended applications (Inverter
duty Rated) and they shall be provided with an integral temperature switch
that opens on high temperature. Motors operating with Variable
Frequency Drives (VFD's) shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG1
Part 31.
All dripproof and weather protected Type 1 motors shall have epoxy
encapsulated windings. Totally enclosed motors shall not be
encapsulated. Motors not readily available with encapsulated
windings may be standard type. Motors exposed to the outside
atmosphere shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) unless
otherwise specified.
2. Squirrel -cage rotors shall be made from high-grade steel
laminations adequately fastened together and to the shaft, or shall
be cast aluminum or bar -type construction with brazed end rings.
16480-2
MOTORS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
1 B. Low Voltage, Three Phase Motors:
2
3 1. Motors shall be of the squirrel -cage induction type, NEMA design
4 B. Horizontal, vertical solid shaft, vertical hollow shaft, normal
5 thrust and high thrust types shall be furnished as specified herein.
6 All motors shall be built in accordance with current NEMA, IEEE,
7 ANSI and AFBMA standards where applicable. Motors shall be of
8 the type and quality described by these Specifications, fully
9 capable of performing in accordance with manufacturer's
10 nameplate rating, and free from defective material and
11 workmanship.
12
13 2. Motors shall have normal or high starting torque (as required), low
14 starting current (not to exceed 600 percent full load current), and
15 low slip.
16
17 3. Outdoor motors shall be totally enclosed fan -cooled construction
18 with 1.15 service factor unless otherwise noted. Indoor motors
19 shall be ODP unless otherwise noted.
20
21 4. Outdoor motors shall be mill and chemical duty suitable for
22 operation in moist air with hydrogen sulphide gas present.
23
24 5. The output shaft shall be suitable for direct connection or belt drive
25 as required.
26
27 6. Motors shall have a Class B nonhygroscopic insulation system.
28 Class F insulation may be used but shall be limited to Class B
29 temperature rise.
30
31 7. All motors shall have a final coating of chemical resistant corrosion
32 and fungus protective epoxy fortified enamel finish sprayed over
33 red primer over all interior and exterior surfaces. Stator bore and
34 rotor of all motors shall be epoxy coated.
35
36 8. All fittings, bolts, nuts, and screws shall be 316 stainless steel.
37 Bolts and nuts shall have hex heads.
38
39 9. All machine surfaces shall be coated with rust inhibitor for easy
40 disassembly.
41
42 10. Conduit boxes shall be gasketed. Lead wires between motor frame
43 and conduit box shall be gasketed.
44
45 11. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with condensate drain
46 hole and epoxy coated motor windings to protect against moisture.
16480-3
MOTORS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
•
•
•
0 1
2 12. Nameplates shall be stainless steel. Lifting lugs or "0" type bolts
3 shall be supplied on all frames 254T and larger. Enclosures will
4 have stainless steel screen and motors shall be protected for
5 corrosion, fungus and insects.
6
7 13. Low voltage, three phase motors shall be manufactured by General
8 Electric, U.S. Motors, Westinghouse or approved equal.
9
10 14. Fractional Horsepower:
11
12 a. Fractional horsepower motors shall be rigid, welded -steel,
13 designed to maintain accurate alignment of motor
14 components and provide adequate protection. End shields
15 shall be reinforced, lightweight die-cast aluminum. Windings
16 shall be of varnish -insulated wire with slot insulation of
17 polyester film, baked -on bonding treatment to make the
18 stator winding strongly resistant to heat, aging, moisture,
19 electrical stresses and other hazards.
20 b. Motor shaft shall be made from high-grade, cold -rolled shaft
21 steel with drive -shaft extensions carefully machined to
22 standard NEMA dimensions for the particular drive
23connection.
•24 c. AH motors shall be equipped with vacuum -degassed
25 (sealed) antifriction bearings made to AFBMA Standards,
26 and be of ample capacity for the motor rating. The bearing
27 housing shall be large enough to hold sufficient lubricant to
28 minimize the need for frequent lubrication, but facilities shall
29 be provided for adding new lubricant and draining out old
30 lubricant without motor disassembly. The bearing housing
31 shall have long, tight, running fits or rotating seals to protect
32 against the entrance of foreign matter into the bearings, or
33 leakage of lubricant out of the bearing cavity.
34
35 15. Integral Horsepower:
36
37 a. Motor frames and end shields shall be cast iron or heavy
38 fabricated steel of such design and proportions as to hold all
39 motor components rigidly in proper position and provide
40 adequate protection for the type of enclosure employed.
41 b. Windings shall be adequately insulated and securely braced
42 to resist failure due to electrical stresses and vibrations.
43 c. The shaft shall be made of high-grade machine steel or steel
44 forging of size and design adequate to withstand the load
45 4)stresses normally encountered in motors of the particular
6 rating. Bearing journals shall be gound and polished.
16480-4
MOTORS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
1 d. Rotors shall be made from high-grade steel laminations
2 adequately fastened together, and to the shaft. Rotor
3 squirrel -cage windings may be copper or bar -type
4 construction with brazed end rings.
5 e. All motors shall be equipped with vacuum -degassed
6 (sealed) antifriction bearings made to AFBMA Standards,
7 and be of ample capacity for the motor rating. The bearing
8 housing shall be large enough to hold sufficient lubricant to
9 minimize the need for frequent lubrication, but facilities shall
10 be provided for adding new lubricant and draining out old
11 lubricant without motor disassembly. The bearing housing
12 shall have long, tight, running fits or rotating seals to protect
13 against the entrance of foreign matter into the bearings, or
14 leakage of lubricant out of the bearing cavity.
15 f. Bearings of high thrust motors will be locked for momentary
16 up thrust of 30% down thrust. All bearings shall have a
17 minimum B10 life rating of 100,000 hours in accordance with
18 AFBMA life and thrust values.
19 g. Vertical hollow -shaft motors will have nonreverse ratchets to
20 prevent backspin.
21
22 C. Low Voltage, Single Phase Motors:
23
24 1. Single phase motors shall be split -phase and capacitor -start
25 induction types rated for continuous horsepower at the rpm called
26 for on the Drawings. Motors shall be rated 115/230 volts, 60 Hertz,
27 single phase, open drip proof, or totally enclosed fan cooled as
28 called for on the Drawings, with temperature rise in accordance
29 with NEMA Standards for Class B insulation.
30
31 2. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall be designed for
32 severe -duty.
33
34 3. Motors shall have corrosion and fungus protective finish on internal
35 and external surfaces. All fittings shall have a corrosion protective
36 plating.
37
38 4. Mechanical characteristics shall be the same as specified for
39 polyphase fractional horsepower motors.
40
41 PART 3 - EXECUTION
42
43 3.01 INSTALLATION
44
45 A. Motor Connections: All motors shall be connected to the conduit system
46 by means of a short section of flexible conduit, 18 inch minimum and 60
16480-5
MOTORS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
•
•
•
1 inches maximum, unless otherwise indicated. For all motor connections,
2 the CONTRACTOR shall install a grounding conductor in the conduit and
3 terminate at the motor control center with an approved grounding clamp.
4
5 B. Connection to motor leads shall be compression type with 3M brand heat
6 shrink boot.
7
8 3.02 TESTS AND CHECKS
9
10 A. The following tests shall be performed on all motors after installation but
11 before putting motors into service.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
•
The CONTRACTOR shall megger each motor winding before
energizing the motor, and, if insulation resistance is found to be
low, shall notify the Engineer and shall not energize the motor. The
CONTRACTOR shall check direction of rotation of alt motors and
reverse connections if necessary. The following table gives
minimum acceptable insulation resistance in megohms at various
temperatures and for various voltages with readings being taken
after one minute of megger test run.
TABLE 2
Degree
Winding
Temperature
Voltage
°F
°C
115V
230V
460V
37
3.9
60
108
210
50
10
32
60
120
68
20
13
26
50
86
30
5.6
11
21
104
45
2.4
4.5
8.8
122
50
1
2
3.7
140
60
.5
.85
1.6
2. The CONTRACTOR shall check each motor for correct clearances
and alignment and for correct lubrication, and shall lubricate if
required in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
16480-6
MOTORS
BID DOCUMENTS
09/28/2023
APPENDIX
FORMS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION
•
Table of Contents
VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY FORM 1
APPENDIX i Updated 12/3/2020
APPENDIX — FORMS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION
VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY FORM
• PER FLORIDA STATUTE 448.095, CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS MUST REGISTER WITH AND USE THE
E -VERIFY SYSTEM TO VERIFY THE WORK AUTHORIZATION STATUS OF ALL NEWLY HIRED EMPLOYEES.
THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID/PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS
FORM AS REQUIRED MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE.
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
1. The Contractor and its Subcontractors are aware of the requirements of Florida Statute 448.095.
2. The Contractor and its Subcontractors are registered with and using the E -Verify system to verify the
work authorization status of newly hired employees.
3. The Contractor will not enter into a contract with any Subcontractor unless each party to the contract
registers with and uses the E -Verify system.
4. The Subcontractor will provide the Contractor with an affidavit stating that the Subcontractor does
not employ, contract with, or subcontract with unauthorized alien.
5. The Contractor must maintain a copy of such affidavit.
6. The City may terminate this Contract on the good faith belief that the Contractor or its
Subcontractors knowingly violated Florida Statutes 448.09(1) or 448.095(2)(c).
7. If this Contract is terminated pursuant to Florida Statute 448.095(2)(c), the Contractor may not be
awarded a public contract for at least 1 year after the date on which this Contract was terminated.
8. The Contractor is liable for any additional cost incurred by the City as a result of the termination of
this Contract.
STATE OF
COUNTY OF
Authorized Signature
Printed Name
Title
Name of Entity/Corporation
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me by means of 0 physical presence or 0 online
notarization on, this day of , 20 by
(name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the (title) of
(name of corporation/entity), personally known ., or
produced (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take
an oath.
Notary Public
Printed Name
My Commission Expires:
NOTARY SEAL ABOVE
APPENDIX 1 Updated 12/3/2020
SECTION V •
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 1
CONTRACT 3
CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 7
PROPOSAL/BID BOND 8
AFFIDAVIT 9
NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10
PROPOSAL 11
CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 13
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 14
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA
CERTIFICATION FORM 16
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES THAT BOYCOTT ISRAEL LIST CERTIFICATION FORM 17
SECTION V Page i Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Bond No.:
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND
(1)
This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under
this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections
(2) and (10).
Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the
work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified copy
of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt
payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the
contractor has complied with this paragraph."
CONTRACTOR SURETY OWNER
[name] [name]
[principal business address] [principal business address]
City of Clearwater
Engineering
100 S. Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, FL 33756
(727) 562-4750
[phone number] [phone number]
PROJECT NAME: East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation Project
PROJECT NO.: 13 -0016 -UT
PROJECT DESCRIPTION: The East Water Reclamation Facility Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation Project
includes civil, mechanical, electrical, instrumental and controls improvements for the influent pump station, the
influent meter assembly and the blower room inside the sludge handling building. The rehabilitated areas include, but
not limited to the installation of a bypass manhole, replacements of influent pumps, a influent flow meter, piping,
valves and appurtenances. For the influent wet well, a new baffle wall will be installed, as well as a spray cleaning
system to break up the oil and grease (FOG) on top of the wastewater. In addition, a new large bubble mixing system
will be installed to not only break up the FOG, but also keep solids suspended in the wet well to reduce maintenance
requirements. The air compressor unit supplying the air for the large bubble system will be installed inside the blower
room at the sludge handling building.
BY THIS BOND, We, , as Contractor, and
, a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the
City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of $[x,xxx,xxx.xx], for payment of which we
bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally.
THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor:
1. Performs the contract dated , between Contractor and Owner for construction
of [project name], the contract documents being made a part of this bond by reference (which
include the Advertisement for Bids, Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders,
General Conditions, Plans, Technical Specifications and Appendix, and such alterations as may be
made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for), at the times and in the manner
prescribed in the contract; and
2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes,
supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in
the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and
SECTION V Page 1 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Bond No.:
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND
(2)
3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate
proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and
4. To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their
officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to,
reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional
wrongful misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the
performance of the construction contract; and
5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified
in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise, it remains in full force.
6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the
notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes.
7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any
formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under
this bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or
addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of
20
(If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required).
Of Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal).
[TYPE LEGAL NAME OF CONTRACTOR]
By:
Title:
Print Name:
WITNESS: WITNESS:
Corporate Secretary or Witness Print Name:
Print Name:
(affix corporate seal)
(Corporate Surety)
By:
ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
Print Name:
(affix corporate seal)
(Power of Attorney must be attached)
SECTION V Page 2 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(1)
This CONTRACT made and entered into this _ day of , 20 by and between the City
of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and
, of the City of County of
and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
[Or, if out of state:]
This CONTRACT mach and entered into
of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal
business in the State of Florida,
and State
WITNESSETH:
this day of , 20 by and between the City
corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and
a/an (State) Corporation. authorized :to do
of the City of County of
of , hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the
part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums
of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own
cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following:
• PROJECT NAME: East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation Project
•
PROJECT NO.: 13 -0016 -UT
in the amount of $
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement,
instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract,
and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall
be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as
contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor,
then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the
right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the
provisions as contained herein.
SECTION V Page 3 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(2)
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE
TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT
AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT
OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS,
STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE
CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF
SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS
CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB
CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES
BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR
EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2).
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate
against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin.
The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading,
demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other
forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post
hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be
provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub -contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event
that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then
further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor
the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains
incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely
represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the
work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but
is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work
within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this
contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms
and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases
to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City.
If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions
of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work
under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it.
SECTION V Page 4 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(3)
In addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement
agrees to comply with public records law.
IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF
CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC
RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC
RECORDS, Rosemarie Call, City Clerk, AT Rosemarie.Call@myclearwater.com, 727-562-4092,
600 Cleveland St. Clearwater, FL 33756.
The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to:
a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public
agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder.
b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency
with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a
reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida
Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law.
c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records
disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the
contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the
records to the public agency.
d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in
possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency
to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon
completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are
exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the
contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor
shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored
electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's
custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology
systems of the public agency.
e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services
must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested
records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the
contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or
copied within a reasonable time.
f) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the
public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in
accordance with the contract.
g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable
time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes.
h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a
public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor
the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if:
1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public
records request within a reasonable time; and
SECTION V Page 5 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(4)
2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the
public records request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the
request, to the public agency and to the contractor.
i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public
records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public
agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by common carrier
delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or
shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic
format.
j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice
is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have
executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By: (SEAL)
Jennifer Poirrier
City Manager Attest:
Countersigned:
Rosemarie Call
City Clerk
By: Approved as to form:
Brian J. Aungst Sr.
Mayor
Owen Kohler
Assistant City Attorney
Contractor must indicate whether:
Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Individual
(Contractor)
By: (SEAL)
Print Name:
Title:
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title;
where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the
Corporation — provide Affidavit.
SECTION V Page 6 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT
TO OWNER: City of Clearwater PROJECT NAME: East WRF Influent Pump Station
Rehabilitation Project
Engineering PROJECT NO.: 13 -0016 -UT
100 S. Myrtle Ave. CONTRACT DATE: [ 1
Clearwater, FL 33756 BOND NO.: [ 1, recorded in O.R. Book [ 1,
Page [ 1, of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida.
CONTRACTOR: [ 1
Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between
the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the:
[insert name of Surety]
[address]
[address] ,SURETY,
on bond of
[insert name of Contractor]
[address]
[address] ,CONTRACTOR,
hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor
shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to
City of Clearwater
[Dept. owning project]
100 S. Myrtle Ave.
Clearwater, FL 33756
as set forth in said Surety's bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this _ day of
Attest:
(Seal):
,OWNER,
(Surety)
(Signature of authorized representative)
(Printed name and title)
SECTION V Page 7 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSAL/BID BOND
(Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted)
KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned,
as Contractor, and
as Surety, whose address is
, are held and firmly bound unto the City
of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Dollars
($ ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which,
well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns.
The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of
as Contractor, and as Surety, for
work specified as:
all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and
specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the
above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract,
in writing, and furnish the required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the
City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and
the full amount of this Proposal/Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages.
Principal must indicate whether:
Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Individual
Signed this day of , 20
Contractor
Principal
By:
Title
Surety
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title;
where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the
Corporation — provide Affidavit.
SECTION V Page 8 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
AFFIDAVIT
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation)
STATE OF FLORIDA
)
COUNTY OF )
Secretary of
a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its
principal office at:
, being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is
(Street & Number) (City) (County) (State)
Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of
(Name of Corporation)
Affiant further says that is
(Officer's Name) (Title)
of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for
• or said corporation by virtue of
(state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of
Board of Directors. if by Resolution give date of adoption).
•
Sworn to before me this
Affiant
day of 20
Notary Public
Type/print/stamp name of Notary
Title or rank, and Serial No., if any
SECTION V Page 9 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF
SECTION V — Contract Documents
NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
of
the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that
said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder
on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly,
with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and
has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or
conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit
or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of
Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements
contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly
submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association
or to any member or agent thereof.
Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of
Affiant
, 20
Notary Public
SECTION V Page 10 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSAL
(1)
TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP STATION REHABILITATION PROJECT (PROJECT #13 -0016 -UT)
and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked
EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP STATION REHABILITATION PROJECT (PROJECT #13 -0016 -UT)
Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents
signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the
City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a
certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or
without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent
documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged
with this notice.
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties
interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement,
Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions,
Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation
as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the
Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto
annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the
work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according
to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the
required surety bonds for the following prices to wit:
If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall
fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at
its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be
null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the
property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City,
or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or
liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of
said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein.
SECTION V
Page 11 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSAL
(2)
Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on
Bank, for the sum of
($ )
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the
names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name
of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements,
enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub -contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or
employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder).
NAMES: ADDRESSES:
Signature of Bidder:
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title.
Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by
affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation.
Principal:
By: Title:
Company Legal Name:
Doing Business As (if different than above):
Business Address of Bidder:
City and State: Zip Code
Phone: Email Address:
Dated at , this day of , A.D., 20 .
SECTION V Page 12 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUM SHEET
PROJECT: EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP STATION REHABILITATION PROJECT
(PROJECT #13 -0016 -UT)
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and
Specifications.
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
(Name of Bidder)
(Signature of Officer)
(Title of Officer)
(Date)
SECTION V Page 13 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
PROJECT: EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP STATION REHABILITATION PROJECT (PROJECT
#13 -0016 -UT)
CONTRACTOR:
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ (Numbers)
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL:
(Words)
THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES
AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH
SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS.
THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM
PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE
CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COPIES OF A CURRENT CONTRACTOR
LICENSE/REGISTRATION WITH THE STATE OF FLORIDA AND PINELLAS COUNTY IN
THE BID RESPONSE.
BID FORM IS ATTACHED BELOW:
SECTION V
Page 14 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Item
et
No.1
BID ITEMS
of
Mealsure
Quantity
Unit Price
Total Price
Mobilization/Demobilization
LS
1
2
Demolition
LS
1
3
Sitework
LS
1
4
Pump Station Improvement
LS
1
5
Large Bubble Mixing System
LS
1
6
Tank Spray Cleaning System
LS
1
7
Temporary Bypass Pumping
LS
1
8
Electrical, Instrumentation & Controls
LS
1
SUB -TOTAL
9
Permit Allowance
LS
1
$ 5,000
$ 5,000
10
Owner's Contingency
(10% of Item 1 to 8)
LS
1
1
BID TOTAL
•
SECTION V Page 15 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH
CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM
PER SECTION III, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE
COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS
FORMAS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE.
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements
of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities
in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or
engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and
2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in
this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business
operations in Cuba and Syria; and
3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce
in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning,
selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal
property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and
4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary,
affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5)
calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in
Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in
business operations in Cuba and Syria.
Authorized Signature
Printed Name
Title
Name of Entity/Corporation
STATE OF
COUNTY OF
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of
20 , by (name of person whose signature is being notarized)
as the (title) of (name of
corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a
(type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath.
Notary Public
Printed Name
My Commission Expires:
NOTARY SEAL ABOVE
SECTION V Page 16 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES THAT BOYCOTT ISRAEL LIST
CERTIFICATION FORM
PER SECTION III, ITEM 25, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH
THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORMAS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR
SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE.
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements
of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott
Israel List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel; and
2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in
this solicitation and is not listed on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or engaged in a
boycott of Israel; and
3. "Boycott Israel" or "boycott of Israel" means refusing to deal, terminating business activities, or taking
other actions to limit commercial relations with Israel, or persons or entities doing business in Israel or
in Israeli -controlled territories, in a discriminatory manner. A statement by a company that it is
participating in a boycott of Israel, or that it has initiated a boycott in response to a request for a boycott
of Israel or in compliance with, or in furtherance of, calls for a boycott of Israel, may be considered as
evidence that a company is participating in a boycott of Israel; and
4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary,
affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5)
calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel
List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel.
STATE OF
COUNTY OF
The foregoing instrument was
20 , by
as the
corporation/entity), personally
My Commission Expires:
NOTARY SEAL ABOVE
SECTION V
Authorized Signature
Printed Name
Title
Name of Entity/Corporation
acknowledged before me on this day of
(name of person whose signature is being notarized)
(title) of (name of
known to me as described herein , or produced a
(type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath.
Notary Public
Printed Name
Page 17 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
APPENDIX
APPENDIX — FORMS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION
2
Updated 12/3/2020
•
•
•
SECTION V
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 1
CONTRACT 3
CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 7
PROPOSAL/BID BOND 8
AFFIDAVIT 9
NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10
PROPOSAL 11
CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 13
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 14
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA
CERTIFICATION FORM 16
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES THAT BOYCOTT ISRAEL LIST CERTIFICATION FORM 17
SECTION V Page i Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Bond No.: 1002282
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND
(1)
This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under
this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections
(2) and (10).
Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the
work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified copy
of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt
payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the
contractor has complied with this paragraph."
CONTRACTOR
C & T Contracting Services, LLC.
[name]
11023 Countryway Blvd.
Tampa, FL 33626
[principal business address]
(813) 616-3210
[phone number]
SURETY OWNER
FCCI Insurance Company
[name]
6300 University Parkway
Sarasota, FL 34240-8424
[principal business address]
(800) 266-3224
[phone number]
City of Clearwater
Engineering
100 S. Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, FL 33756
(727) 562-4750
PROJECT NAME: East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation Project
PROJECT NO.: 13 -0016 -UT
PROJECT DESCRIPTION: The East Water Reclamation Facility Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation Project
includes civil, mechanical, electrical, instrumental and controls improvements for the influent pump station, the
influent meter assembly and the blower room inside the sludge handling building. The rehabilitated areas include, but
not limited to the installation of a bypass manhole, replacements of influent pumps, a influent flow meter, piping,
valves and appurtenances. For the influent wet well, a new baffle wall will be installed, as well as a spray cleaning
system to break up the oil and grease (FOG) on top of the wastewater. In addition, a new large bubble mixing system
will be installed to not only break up the FOG, but also keep solids suspended in the wet well to reduce maintenance
requirements. The air compressor unit supplying the air for the large bubble system will be installed inside the blower
room at the sludge handling building.
BY THIS BOND, We, C & T Contracting Services, LLC. , as Contractor, and
FCCI Insurance Company , a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the
City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of $2,840,530.00 - Two Million Eight Hundred
Forty Thousand Five Hundred Thirty Dollars and 00/100, for payment of which we bind ourselves, our
heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally.
THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor:
1. Performs the contract dated , 2024 between Contractor and Owner for
construction of East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation Project - 13 -0016 -UT, the contract
documents being made a part of this bond by reference (which include the Advertisement for Bids,
Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Plans, Technical
Specifications and Appendix, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications
as therein provided for), at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and
2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes,
supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in
the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and
SECTION V Page 1 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Bond No.: 1002282
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND
(2)
3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate
proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and
4. To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their
officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to,
reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional
wrongful misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the
performance of the construction contract; and
5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified
in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise, it remains in full force.
6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the
notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes.
7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any
formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under
this bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or
addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of
, 2024.
(If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required).
(If Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal).
•
WITNESS:
•
Corporate Secret or Witness
Print Name: Karen Alvarenga, Witness
By:
Title:
Print Name:
WITNESS:
C & T Contract Services, LLC.
President
Print Name:
Christopher Telson
Ve46tvi, vicaar
FCCI Insurance Company
(Corporate Surety)
By:
baOaaaOH ..
A 1"1 ORNEY-IN-FACTtat
? e
Jessie Sloan, Attorney -In -Fac 'rA
Print Name: Florida Licensed Resident, ento
Inquiries: (32 I)` 800.4
(affix corporate seal)
(Power of Attorney must be attached)
SECTION V Page 2 of 17
Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
FCCI
INSURANCE
GROUP
GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY
Know all men by these presents: That the FCCI Insurance Company, a Corporation organized and existing under
the laws of the State of Florida (the "Corporation") does make, constitute and appoint:
Jorge Bracamonte; Jessie Sloan; Karla Tomaszewski
Each, its true and lawful Attorney -In -Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf as surety, and
as its act and deed in all bonds and undertakings provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed
under this authority shall exceed the sum of (not to exceed $20,000,000.00): $20,000,000.00
This Power of Attorney is made and executed by authority of a Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors. That
resolution also authorized any further action by the officers of the Company necessary to effect such transaction.
The signatures below and the seal of the Corporation may be affixed by facsimile, and any such facsimile
signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Corporation when so affixed and in the future with regard to any
bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached.
In witness whereof, the FCCI Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by its duly authorized
officers and its corporate Sealtobe hereunto affixed, this 23rd day of July , 2020 .
.......... ...„.
Attest: () �` "'� °� -- a�JP Poc .co...
Christina D. Welch, President
FCCI Insurance Company
State of Florida
County of Sarasota
Before me this day personally appeared Christina D. Welch, who is personally known to me and who executed
the foregoing document for the purposes expressed therein.
c••9
LL SEAL ':
1994
F� OR\aP
Christopher Shoucair,
EVP, CFO, Treasurer, Secretary
FCCI Insurance Company
My commission expires: 2/27/2027 i'a'"N, PEGGYSNow
.46. Commission IfNH32e6a
IlIpon'` Expires February 27.2021
State of Florida
County of Sarasota
Notary Public
Before me this day personally appeared Christopher Shoucair, who is personally known to me and who executed
the foregoing document for the purposes expressed therein.
f
My commission expires: 2/27/2027 ;
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(1)
This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of , 20 by and between the City
of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and
, of the City of County of
and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
[Or, if out of state:]
This CONTRACT made and entered into
of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal
business in the State of Florida,
WITNESSETH:
this day of , 20_ by and between the City
corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and
, a/an(State) Corporation authorized to do
of the City of County of
and State of , hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the
part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums
of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own
cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following:
PROJECT NAME: East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation Project
PROJECT NO.: 13 -0016 -UT
in the amount of $ 2,840,530.00
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement,
instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications. proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract,
and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall
be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as
contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor,
then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the
right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the
provisions as contained herein.
SECTION V
Page 3 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(2)
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE
TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT
AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT
OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS,
STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE
CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF
SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS
CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB
CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES
BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR
EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2).
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate
against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin.
The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading,
demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other
forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post
hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be
provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub -contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event
that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then
further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor
the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains
incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely
represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the
work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but
is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work
within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this
contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms
and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases
to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City.
If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions
of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work
under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it.
SECTION V
Page 4 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(3)
In addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement
agrees to comply with public records law.
IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF
CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC
RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC
RECORDS, Rosemarie Call, City Clerk, AT Rosemarie.Callnn,mvclearwater.com, 727-562-4092,
600 Cleveland St. Clearwater, FL 33756.
The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to:
a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public
agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder.
b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency
with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a
reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida
Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law.
c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records
disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the
contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the
records to the public agency.
d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in
possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency
to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon
completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are
exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the
contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor
shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored
electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's
custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology
systems of the public agency.
e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services
must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested
records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the
contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or
copied within a reasonable time.
f) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the
public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in
accordance with the contract.
g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable
time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes.
h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a
public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor
the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if:
1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public
records request within a reasonable time; and
SECTION V
Page 5 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(4)
2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the
public records request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the
request, to the public agency and to the contractor.
1) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public
records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public
agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by common carrier
delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or
shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic
format.
A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice
is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have
executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written.
.1)
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By:
er Poirrier
City Manager
Countersigned:
By:
Attest:
c
�
ykLJ.L.ivuelka,
Rosemarie Call
City Clerk
Brian J. A
Mayor
Contractor must indicate whether:
Corporation, Partnership,
A • • roved to fo A
W
Owen Kohler
Assistant City Attorney
any, or
Indjyidual
(Contractor)
By: C4 G 4"e..
Print Name:
Title: -Pres
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own nail* and his title;,
where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bina the
Corporation — provide Affidavit.
SECTION V Page 6 of 17
Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
CONSENT OF
TO OWNER: City of Clearwater
Engineering
100 S. Myrtle Ave.
Clearwater, FL 33756
SECTION V — Contract Documents
SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT
PROJECT NAME: East WRF Influent Pump Station
Rehabilitation Project
PROJECT NO.: 13 -0016 -UT
CONTRACT DATE: [ 1
BOND NO.: [ 1, recorded in O.R. Book [
Page [ 1, of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida.
CONTRACTOR: [
Pursuant to § 255.05(1 1), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between
the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the:
,SURETY,
[insert name of Surety]
[address]
[address]
on bond of
[insert name of Contractor]
[address]
[address]
,CONTRACTOR,
hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor
shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to
City of Clearwater
[Dept. owning project]
100 S. Myrtle Ave.
Clearwater, FL 33756
as set forth in said Surety's bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this day of
Attest:
(Seal):
SECTION V
,OWNER,
(Surety)
(Signature of authorized representative)
(Printed name and title)
Page 7 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSALBID BOND
(Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted)
KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, C & T Contracting Services, LLC.
as Contractor, and FCCI Insurance Company
as Surety, whose address is
6300 University Parkway, Sarasota, FL 34240-8424 , are held and firmly bound unto the City
of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Dollars
($ ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which,
well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns.
The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of C & T Contracting Services, LLC.
as Contractor, and FCCI Insurance Company as Surety, for
work specified as: East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation Project
Project # 13 -0016 -UT
all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and
specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the
above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract,
in writing, and furnish the required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the
City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and
the full amount of this Proposal/Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages.
Principal must indicate whether: Liability
Corporation, Partnership, x Company, or
Limited
Individual
Signed this 6th day of December , 2023 .
C & T Contracting Services, LLC.
11023 Countryway Blvd.
Tampa, FL 33626
Contractor
C & T Contractin• S-rvices LC.
Principal
By:
Title - Christopher Te son, President
FCCI Insurance Company
Surety
1
.,..,.. ay. -o. 0Jessie Sloan, Attomey-In-Fact &
'da Licensed Resident Agent
Inquiries: (321) 800-6594 ti
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title;
where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the
Corporation — provide Affidavit.
SECTION V Page 8 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
AFFIDAVIT
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation)
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY O h bp ai
til
C I d \f e is e ••
Secretary of ...4. _ I. ► c.
a corporation organized and existing under : d by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its
principal office at:
, being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is
1\02.3 Iva,
(City)
(Street & Number)
(State)
Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of
Cal -7 63‘..-kr.,.a..
(Name of Corporation)
Ls
Affiant further says that C 1„ r S �r k►ti is D�� .. L� ��.. s �L -► .'ti
(Officer's Name) (Title) n - l
of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for C 1-,%O�' �h�u,-er.� 7p c r41^b
or said corporation by virtue of
ci.veja.
(state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of
Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption).
Affiant
Sworn to before me this day of Dt/j.tk-b p.A/
, 20
otary Public
•
Type/pr
L LII E B. ECKHDUSE
-itA
lolfiltMaityte of Florida
commission if HH 22814
s; `' My Commission Expires
July 22. 2024
Title or ran , an . eria o., i
SECTION V Page 9 of 17
Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
• NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF HILLSBOROUG)-i
CHRISTOPHER TELSON
being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
OPERATIONS MANAGER of C&T CONTRACTING SERVICES
the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that
said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder
on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly,
with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and
has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or
conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit
or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of
Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements
contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly
submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information data relative thereto to any association
or to any member or agent thereof.
• Sworn to and subscribed before me this :11day of
•
SECTION V
Affiant
otary Public
1p`n'r"o'1,,.,,LOUISE B. ECKHOUSE
'
i Notary Public -State of Florida
Commission # HH 22914
My Commission Expires
July 22, 2024
Page 10 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSAL
(1)
TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP STATION REHABILITATION PROJECT (PROJECT #13 -0016 -UT)
and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked
EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP STATION REHABILITATION PROJECT (PROJECT #13 -0016 -UT)
Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents
signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the
City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a
certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or
without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent
documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged
with this notice.
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties
interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement,
Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions,
Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation
as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the
Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto
annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the
work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according
to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the
required surety bonds for the following prices to wit:
If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall
fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at
its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be
null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the
property of the City of Clearwater, Florida. and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City,
or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or
liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of
said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein.
SECTION V
Page 11 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
Attached hereto is
SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSAL
(2)
certified check on 12 / 6/23
Bank, for the sum of
($ )
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the
names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name
of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements,
enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub -contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or
employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder).
NAMES: ADDRESSES:
CHRISTOPHER TELSON 11023 COUNTRYWAY BLVD. TAMPA, FL
JOSE CISNEROS 11023 COUNTRYWAY BLVD. TAMPA FL
Signature of Bidder: L
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title.
Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by
affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation.
Principal: Christopher Telson
By: Chris Telson
Title: Operations Manager
Company Legal Name: C&T Contracting Services
Doing Business As (if different than above):
Business Address of Bidder: 11023 Countryway Blvd .
City and State: Tampa Fl Zip Code 33626
Email Address: chris@ctcontractingservices.com
Phone: 727-483-1594
Dated at 1 : 50 pm
SECTION V
, this 5th day of December , A.D., 2023
Page 12 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
• CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUM SHEET
•
•
PROJECT: EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP STATION REHABILITATION PROJECT
(PROJECT #13 -0016 -UT)
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and
Specifications.
Addendum No. 1 Date: 11/7/2023
Addendum No. 2 Date: 11/29/2023
Addendum No. 3 Date: 11/30/2023
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
C&T Contracting Services
(Name of R der)
(Signature of OTficer
Operations Manager
(Title of Officer)
12/5/2023
(Date)
SECTION V Page 13 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
SECTION V — Contract Documents
• BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
PROJECT: EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP STATION REHABILITATION PROJECT (PROJECT
#13 -0016 -UT)
CONTRACTOR: C&T Contracting Services
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ a, O 4 0 IS- 30 (Numbers)
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: I 0 1••1; `� •�-. er
„L-) 4t— J.110,0
(Words)
THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES
AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH
SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS.
• THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM
PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE
CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COPIES OF A CURRENT CONTRACTOR
LICENSE/REGISTRATION WITH THE STATE OF FLORIDA AND PINELLAS COUNTY IN
THE BID RESPONSE.
•
BID FORM IS ATTACHED BELOW:
SECTION V
Page 14 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
•
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Ilio
BID ITEMS
of
Unit re
Quantity
Unit Price
Total Price
1
Mobilization/Demobilization
LS
1
2
Demolition
LS
1
3
Sitework
LS
1
4
Pump Station Improvement
LS
1
5
Large Bubble Mixing System
LS
1
6
Tank Spray Cleaning System
LS
1
7
Temporary Bypass Pumping
LS
1
8
Electrical, Instrumentation & Controls
LS
1
SUB -TOTAL
9
Permit Allowance
LS
1
$ 5,000
$ 5,000
10
Owner's Contingency
(10% of Item 1 to 8)
LS
1
BID TOTAL
SECTION V
Page 15 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
EAST WRF INFLUENT PUMP
DBE DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE
Bid Tabulations are not public until 30 days after bid opening or upon award by City Council, whichever occurs first.
1iKl:"H"Y'.A2W? 8L'AtrrIFt,L-»AV Y'C, If, CtY
C&T CONTRACTING SERVICES
11023 COUNTRYWAY BLVD.
TAMPA, FL. 33636
DBE Y/N
BID ITEMS
QTY
UNIT
UNIT PRICE
AMOUNT
1
Mobilization/Demobilization
1
LS
$ 75,500.00
$ 75,500.00
2
Demolition
1
LS
$ 78,800.00
$ 78,800.00
3
Sitework
1
LS
$ 230,000.00
$ 230,000.00
4
Pump Station Improvement
1
LS
$ 1,120,000.00
$ 1,120,000.00
5
Large Bubble Mixing System
1
LS
$ 120,000.00
$ 120,000.00
6
Tank Spray Cleaning System
1
LS
$ 37,000.00
$ 37,000.00
7
Temporary Bypass Pumping
1
LS
$ 418,000.00
$ 418,000.00
8
Electrical, Instrumentation & Controls
1
LS
$ 498,000.00
$ 498,000.00
9
Permit Allowance
1
LS
$ 5,000.00
$ 5,000.00
10
$ -
11
$ -
12
$ -
13
$ -
14
$ -
15
$ -
16
$ -
17
$ -
18
$ -
19
$ -
20
$ -
21
$ -
22
$ -
23
$ -
24
$ -
25
$ -
26
$ -
27
$ -
28
$ -
29
$ -
30
$ -
31
$ -
32
$ -
33
$ -
34
$ -
35
$ -
36
$ -
37
$ -
38
$ -
39
$ -
40
$ -
SUBTOTAL
$ 2,582,300.00
41
10% CONTINGENCY (BID ITEM 1
to 8)
$ 258,230.00
TOTAL CONTRACT
$ 2,840,530.00
DBE DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE
Bid Tabulations are not public until 30 days after bid opening or upon award by City Council, whichever occurs first.
SECTION V — Contract Documents
. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH
CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM
PER SECTION III, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE
COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS
FORMAS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE.
•
•
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements
of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities
in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or
engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and
2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in
this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business
operations in Cuba and Syria; and
3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce
in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning,
selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal
property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and
4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary,
affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5)
calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in
Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Ir Petr um Sector List, or engages in
business operations in Cuba and Syria.
STATE OF GOA tPt,
COUNTY 0
The fQQregoin
20___A2:-° by
as the
corporation/entity), persona
f i %oko u
nstrument as acknow
54I kLA/
ly kn.
Authorized Signatu
Christopher Telson
Printed Name
Operations Manager
Title
C&T Contracting Services
Name of Entity/Corporation
ged before me on this day of VI. 0.1-7 L.b t
1
title) of
wn to me as described herein
me of person whose signature is being notarized)
1 __, (name of
, or produced a
(type of identification) as.iEleptification, . n., who cj /did not take an oath.
,tomo,,; LOUISE B. ECKHOUSE
;.01 ss Notary Public -State of Florida
Commission ,# HH 22814
Of r
-.,,� a�� My Commission Expires
„;:±io ;Jul' 22, 2024
My uuuii1JAL,“
NOTARY SEAL. BOVE
SECTION V
y�Publi P. ret olt5E-
Printed Name
Page 16 of 17 Updated: 1/10/2023
•
SECTION V — Contract Documents
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES THAT BOYCOTT ISRAEL LIST
CERTIFICATION FORM
PER SECTION HI, ITEM 25, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH
THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORMAS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR
SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE.
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements
of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott
Israel List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel; and
2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in
this solicitation and is not listed on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or engaged in a
boycott of Israel; and
3. "Boycott Israel" or "boycott of Israel" means refusing to deal, terminating business activities, or taking
other actions to limit commercial relations with Israel, or persons .or entities doing business in Israel or
in Israeli -controlled territories, in a discriminatory manner. A statement by a company that it is
participating in a boycott of Israel, or that it has initiated a boycott in response to a request for a boycott
of Israel or in compliance with, or in furtherance of, calls for a boycott of Israel, may be considered as
evidence that a company is participating in a boycott of Israel; and
4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary,
affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5)
calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized mpanies that Boycott Israel
List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel.
STATE OF
COUNTY OF\/(.1'5110
lir
Authorized Signature
Christopher Telson
Printed Name
Operations Manager
Title
C&T Contracting Services
Name of Entity/Corporation
dg ed before me on this (O day of Dte.tiltetit.
The foregoing ' strument was ac J.�
2016 by v _ /
as the I �_ y �jY,212A(title) of
corporation/entity), personally known to me as
(type of identi
�RY ,, , LOUISE B. ECKHOUSE
.:°/ *.i Notary Public -State of Florida
Commission 0 HH 22814
My Commission Expires
. July 22, 2024
My raraolaala
111, NOTARY SEAL" AfiGt
fication) as
. me of person who,signature is being notarized)
Kt / , i t L %--g eV (name of
described rein i.,-/ , or produced a
entification, a d o di..id not take an oath.
L b
h
NU'i # € /& u5�
Printed Name
ary Public
Page 17 of 17
Updated: 1/10/2023
ADDENDUM NO. 1
for
13 -0016 -UT East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation
Clearwater, Florida
DATE: November 7, 2023
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
•
Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to the
Contract Documents:
1.
Question:
What is the location address?
Answer:
The East WRF is located at 3141 Gulf to Bay Blvd, Clearwater, FL 33759-4506
2.
Question:
End Date & Time?
Answer:
The estimated end date is July of 2025
3.
Question
At the pre-bid it was mentioned that the contract period is 480
days. However, the specs call for 153 days to substantial and 183 days to
final completion.
Please advise.
Answer:
It's 480 consecutive/calendar days
4.
Question
What is the Engineer's estimated budget?
Answer:
The City will release the EOPCC after the bid is awarded
5.
Question:
Confirming the submission package should consist of 1 original 1 copy
Answer:
Only 1 original is needed.
6.
Question:
Can Quadex Structure Guard (multi -layered wet well lining system) be
considered for this project?
Answer:
Section 03350 Part 2.01 indicates "Approved manufacturers for this project
include products of Sprayroq, Raven Lining Systems and Warren
Environmental." During the shop drawing review phase, if the contractor fails
to submit products from the manufacturers referenced above, substitutions
will then be considered for replacement. The contractor is warned that
substitutions may not be approved in which case the contractor will be
responsible to furnish and install the specified product.
7.
Question:
Can GeoKrete Geopolymer (one-step lining system in lieu of multi -layered
lining system) be considered for this project?
Addendum 1
Page 1
•
•
•
Addendum 1
Page 2
Answer:
Section 03350 Part 2.01 indicates "Approved manufacturers for this project
include products of Sprayroq, Raven Lining Systems and Warren
Environmental." During the shop drawing review phase, if the contractor fails
to submit products from the manufacturers referenced above, substitutions
will then be considered for replacement. The contractor is warned that
substitutions may not be approved in which case the contractor will be
responsible to furnish and install the specified product.
8.
Question:
Are structural and electrical drawings available?
Answer:
Structural and electrical drawings are attached to this addendum. Structural
and electrical drawings were uploaded to the website as well.
•
•
Addendum 1
Page 2
ADDENDUM NO. 2
for
13 -0016 -UT East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation
Clearwater, Florida
DATE: November 29, 2023
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 2
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
The final addendum will be posted on November 30th, 2023.
•
•
Addendum 1
Page 1
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL BAY TO BEACH
ADDENDUM NO. 3
for
13 -0016 -UT East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation
Clearwater, Florida
DATE: November 30, 2023
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 3
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
•
Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to the
Contract Documents:
1.
Question:
Sheet E3:00: Note 5 reads to provide new disconnect switches, do we need to
provide a new stand or can we re -use existing?
Answer:
Furnish and install a new aluminum support system for the entire electrical
equipment.
2.
Question:
Sheet E3:00: Note 13 reads to provide new 120v circuit from panel R2 in the
sludge building. Do we have any information on existing infrastructure (ie
duct banks or underground conduits) that provide an existing route to the
Sludge building, or shall we assume installing new?
Answer:
Refer to Sheet C1.02 for known electrical line in the project area. Additional
information is not available to provide. This will be a new installation.
3.
Question
Sheet E3:00: Note 14 reads to provide new 8c #14awg cable to the PLC in
the Main Electrical room. Do we have any information on existing
infrastructure (ie duct banks or underground conduits) that provide an
existing route to the Main Electrical room, or shall we assume installing
new?
Answer:
Refer to Sheet C1.02 for known electrical line in the project area. Additional
information is not available to provide. This will be a new installation.
4.
Question
Sheet E3:00: If we are to install new conduits, is there a preferred routing path
from the influent pump location to the sludge building and to the main
electrical room?
Answer:
For the secondary valve enclosure panel, the new conduit will extend northwest
behind the existing sludge holding tank, turn east and enter the west wall of the
sludge handling building.
5.
Question:
Sheet E4:00: Please confirm that new cabling is being called for from the
source to the new pump disconnects etc? Per Notes 7, 8, 12, 13, 15, 24, 25 &
26.
Answer:
Correct, new cabling to be installed from the source (VFDs) to the new pump
disconnect switches.
Addendum 2
Page 1
6.
Question:
Sheet E4:00: If cable replacement is being requested, we would need to
know the existing routing from the influent pump station back to the source,
ie MCC 1000. Are there existing drawings indicating the underground
conduit routing etc so we know how much cable to approximate replacing?
Are there existing underground electrical drawings to possibly provide this
information.
Answer:
The existing conduit extends northwest behind the sludge holding tank, turns
east and enters the west wall of the control building. The record drawing
included in Appendix A shows the approximate existing underground routing.
7.
Question:
Sheet C1:04: Sheet 8 of the plans (Note 1) calls for removal of the existing
coatings inside the wetwell and then repair interior concrete. Can you please
tell us what the existing coatings consist of as well as defining the required
concrete repair (type, amount, etc)? Perhaps a sf amount or linear foot price
could be added to the bid form for bidding purposes? Without a defined scope
the bidders will only be guessing as to what is required here.
Answer:
The wet well was initially constructed in 1992. The existing coating and the
interior concrete condition of the wet well is unknown. The removal, repair
and repaint job applies to all the interior surfaces including the bottom floor
of the wet well. Refer to Section 03350 Multi -Layered Wet Well Lining System
and Section 03740 Modification and Repair to Concrete for the scope of work
to be performed. An updated bid form will not be provided. Based on the
information provided, bidders should use their judgement to best estimate
the cost of the task.
8.
Question:
Section 13300: We would like to request either a drawing or a picture of the
inside of the panel that shows the current configuration of the PLC panel and
associated components? We need to determine whether additional I/O's are
required and if the existing CompactLogix PLC can support any needed
addition to the current I/O's. We can only do this if we have information on
the existing PLC panel configuration.
Answer:
Pictures of the existing pump PLC panel are included in Appendix B. Also
included are the existing PLC panel's record documents.
Ardurra would like to note that the existing PLC is SLC 5/05, not CompactLogix.
The new l&C components should be compatible with the existing system.
Therefore, in the bid documents, Replace All "CompactLogix PLC" with "SLC
5/05 PLC" for the existing system.
9.
Question:
Section 13300: There are three references to Section 13300 (see below) that
are important to understanding the scope for the l&C portion of the specs.
There is no Section 13300 in the specifications provided. Can you please
provide this section of the solicitation?
Addendum 2
Page 2
l
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • SAY TO BEACH
Addendum 2
Page 3
•
•
a. Page 559 — All SCADA PLC controller programming and SCADA Operator
Interface Terminal 12 (OIT) or Operator Workstation Station (OWS) graphics
and programming shall be 13 performed as defined in Section 13300.
b. Refer to Section 13300 "I & C - General Provisions."
c. Page 574 — General requirements for spare parts are specified in Section
13300.
Answer:
Section 13300 Instrumentations and Controls — General Provisions is included
in Appendix C. The l&C portion of the project scope is also included in Section
13300.
10. Question:
I am currently working on the electrical portion of the above referenced
project bid and would like to gain access to the site tomorrow, 11/28, to
research existing gear manufacturer and work area conditions. Please let
me know what I need to do for that to happen.
Answer:
A public site visit can be accommodated if requested early in the bidding
process. Since the bid opening is next week December 6th, the City cannot
arrange one on such a short notice.
11. Question:
Section 13567: I have no way of limiting the velocity in temporary force main
to less than 5 ft/s. And if I did, through an 18" ID pipe, water would need to
move in excess of 6.3 ft/s to achieve the 5,400 gpm peak flow required.
Answer:
According to Section 13567 1.01 E, the bypass pumping system should be
designed for an average pumping rate of 1,500 gpm, a low flow pumping rate
of 700 gpm and a peak hourly pumping rate of 5,400 gpm. During the peak
flow, it is acknowledged and acceptable that the velocity will exceed 5 ft/s in
the 18" ID pipe. Therefore, the following changes will be made to Section
13567 1.01 paragraph E:
Delete the sentence that reads "Velocity in the temporary force main(s) shall
not exceed 5 feet per second."
12. Question:
Section 13567: I assume a level transducer operating an electric governed
engine will suffice as a VFD, this transducer will speed up and down the
engine as needed.
Answer:
This is correct provided that the transducer can operate within the designed
pump range.
13. Question:
Section 13567: I cannot run both a transducer and float on a single pump. I
will need to run a transducer on the primary pump and a float on the backup
pump.
Answer:
Correct. The setup should run a transducer on the primary pump and a float
on the backup pump.
Addendum 2
Page 3
•
•
•
Appendix A — Conduit Routing Record Drawing
•
•
NO
INA
A
60139
DOTE
RV, fiaageLorr
raw NAN oF Roo.
GULF TO BAY 9100 B.F. 50
•
1
SNFLUENT SEWER
TRUCTURE NO I
STRUC
TN/CKENER5 (2) 0 I M H.
- ,/RIA V
wAS 0/005 n�X
4 Aim -
201 22, (22 0 24, H O
FEED BF /NFL. ,RUMP STAT/O
I /NFL UeN7 SOUCT
CONTROL B100.
'D TO MCC 2000
F /0 MP 0004
CONTROL FAN
NOTE 2
I-OhNP
SIMPLE PUMP
2. 2 HP PEEN
5440(4EENS
NOTE .1
FINAL CLARIFIER
NO.1
TO NW *3 • _...
FINAL CLARIFIER
N0.
/SNP SCUM PUMP
nOSHP
RM/SE PUMP
NPN
XER
2 -/OHF EL. 550
NUMFS
— NEW ELECTRICAL
DI4TRICUTION RACEWAY
(TYPICAL)A
2/46NP
PUMPS
2' TO MN 05
V•ENTATINg
./-O.NP SAMPLE RUMP
I -O L HP SIMPLC /UNA
• • • \ •
I ST ANOXIC
M
TRANSFORMER
051001101.
REACTOR
. • TAN N19
\ OUTLET STRUCTURE
-----,--•-11-554 MIXERS
/ (TIP/CAL) 3 -UGH
OVERHEAD. • • ROLL
{LFT
RUMPS
—
NAL
RECYCLE
PULP
2 NO. ANOXIC r Nmoat
44'0 /N S/w
4.2'S.
REAERATION TANK ❑
OUTLET STRUCTURE
/ O.LNP
SAMPLE PUMP
/P 00
A/R COMPRE,ABRR.
is ANP A/R DRYER
NPINPOCNCOR/TE RUMP/
',FLUENT FILTERS
2 40NP EFN e-SU„PMP
PUMPS) PUMPS
CHLORIN
STOROSE
BLOC. •
2 SNP
SAMPLE PUMPS
1 -SNP MIXER
/-0.6NP SAMPLE
PUMP
NEwero0areo ED,o0Ra/0070 WAIN 5LCORO M,Oww6 ,,LS
Or4V,141,254.201,2nfe. —.6.
REV/SED 'ER' DCN. 006
REVISION DESCRIPTION
•
1
LEGEND
• NEN MOTOR
O EXISTING MOTOR - RELOCATED
— OF 'AFA B4F_
.,PIC EON/PREEN" NOT SHOWN- SEE IND/VIDLWL 57RUC TURF PLRN5.
1
EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITY
SITE MOTOR LOCATION PLAN
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
•
NOTE /
EXIST/NG FRC PAD AIOJNT
TRANSFORMER 277/4607 50 05
N 2'C
'20X/SP 5/ 4/N 140
@XFMR LOCAT/CN
wU En/ST,
SERO/CECUTO CRN,
NOrE 2
L,111
-3 'S/O /3N,
'44 //i 2'C
ATE 9 LOCATION
POWER SUPPLY FOR
Y
/TEMPORARPUMPS
00'13 2/N-9 47X
s --
TRIS RECORD 020091 R IS BASED N
PMT 0V AIFORMATIoN Fl 00S'IE0
BY OTHERS
NOT PRINTED PROW
ORIGINAL TRACING
A OURICA REPRODPRINT WAS MIN UCIBLE
OF AN ORIBANAL DRAWEES
PREPARED BY BRIEY. WED
AND A89MMTEN NC.
sour AND ASSOCIATES.
HRNEREBY DiSNARIE ANY
P-SPDI••uW DR LAMP
FOR KgRHTNN COMPILED
ON TNN OW OLIN TO REW50N4
5/102061.NNREPRESEMBY MEWL
OR
NOTE 4
EOL2"-MEN/ /0'1
69,
00/SP SEN -4.1
152
\i
TEMPORARY PUMPS
(BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR)
3.53/N2
•60 /N14'C.
TEMPORARY POWER R/SER DIAGRAM
NOT TO SCALE
ENC/. (/NUT MOL/NTE 0E0CES
3 N4 MOA, PR/ FF7 X4
90 HEX HOA, PR, FFly 04
NOTE$: / EX/S;/NG PAD MOUNT TRANSFORMER
2 ELECTRICAL MANHOLE 12
5. TEMPORARY POWER JUPPLY fj PEED TO ER /.
4 EOU/P,MEN'' RACK ER /
J CONSTROC'ION POWER SUPPLIES AND
LOC/17,015 NOT VHOWN. TNQ5E MAY BE
DER/ VED FROM EX/ST/NG TRANSFORMER OR
OTHER SOL/4(E, ✓ER/FY REQUIREMENTS N T
GENERAL CONRACTOR
RECORD DRAWING
DESIGNED
PANE
01. No. 87072 -2
FOR SHEET PILING SEAWALL
CONFIGURATION SEE SHT. B
FOR RETENTION POND NO. 1
CONFIGURATION SEE SIMS
ERA TOR
DRAWN
CHEW°
V5B
PANE
011E' OCT /985
S OLE. 1'•30'
•CtrOlo Part
/-51-95
R0,17500202
0.13321
Briley,IPS
WildT
CWMWhIsq ER911W«B And Ploos.,4
92015
•
Appendix B — Existing PLC Pictures and Record Documents
•
•
Addendum 2
Page 7
•
•
•
•
•
Addendum 2
Page 8
Addendum 2
Page 9
•
•
•
V
•
•
CITY OF CLEARWATER
EAST ADV. POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITY
MOTOR CONTROL UPGRADES
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS BY:
SCANDIA TECHNOLOGIES
w
DWG. NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
39253-000
39253-001
39253-002
39253-003
39253-004
39253-005
39253-006
39253-007
39253-008
39253-009
39253-010
39253-011
39253-012
39253-013
39253-014
39253-015
39253-016
39253-017
39253-018
39253-019
39253-020
STANDARD SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PS -CP PANEL LAYOUT
PS -CP ENGRAVING LAYOUT
PS -CP CONTROL WIRING A
a -CP CONTROL WIRING B
PS -CP CONTROL WIRING C
PS -CP CONTROL WIRING 0
PS -CP CONTROL WIRING E
PS -CP CONTROL WIRING F
LOOP DIAGRAM A
LOOP DIAGRAM B
LOOP DIAGRAM C
LOOP DIAGRAM 0
LOOP DIAGRAM E
LOOP DIAGRAM F
POWER WIRING A
POWER WIRING B
POWER WIRING C
NOT USED
PS -CP CUST. CONNECTION TB3
DWG. NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
39253-021
39253-022
39253-023
39253-024
39253-025
39253-026
39253-027
PS -CP LOOP DIAGRAM E
PC -CP LOOP DIAGRAM F
PS -CP LOOP DIAGRAM G
LEVEL TRANSMITTER PANEL LAYOUT
NOT USED
SURGE SUPPRESSION DETAILS
DEVICENET WIRING DETAILS
ao— rID/tL.M eNrtM11[
PROW° O► SCAM tOCMMMMMOIL OM IIMM$O
MO COMM NOR ANI .l1arMNtoN COIICOMMP1e
INC ONMMMO VOW Q Ip mOUMMM. (MIMO1W. Me
. u. OM
1M coma or imam
Atilti
INONCINN
u� oMtelMMMi I M O
MAM • 4-11W NU • •/-
OMR • • -AOr
a .rat
aR
— ON MN
M
A
CO
M
a-wu
O MOMI
OMNI
ONAIMANIMI
ONIMMINER
M
IMENC 41. ILMIIS NO NNW MOM
MMII OMNI A sm' Y.1;
MaralolCIA MM .014 MM/M.t —
.p.
IME
or
mom OCIDIRMOR
MOOD NNW Met
communications
M.M.r.TMMM..IMMM.OM ..
tiMMIMMenw.101•S
OD MOO AMMO MO
TABLE -OF-CONTENTS
XXX
ITY-OF-CLEARWATER
• 3.5253- • 81 B
MOM >=at OF fort
--
O 0
O 0 0
O 0 0 0
Y
r
e e
OM
3.
0
-0
0
O 0
o e
-
Y '
I,." ,
w•MO
••.
• 1
• •
•
1 1
• •
• •
•
• 1
• •
• .
I. 1
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
•
• •
• -
• $
041,
1
• •
•
■
SI •
• •
• •
•
1• •
111
=111111
1
1
•••••••••
mg wow Mj.ofrowns ON 17 111
naeanr or mom mouotaw. wc. P.M
IMO MUM NMI MMr w/CArllbr eottetrwwC
MC MOM WV oc w6Mwmtt000. 101010w. O0
IIIIINIPHO wow not wow T a 1CHC ►
a
Mrs
Oat
41)
WOO a MN
00 • yea•• '- • •
NNW Dall MO DOW 10011
et«te0
AO" UJL
0
a
M
OMAN
0000000
7
ormion
communications
...i,....wsl.ewwrl
Ass 10101111,11•01Mos
4
111 101 woos ■w104:T---,,rootthe t IMI ~SO Ma
PS -CP
PANEL -LAYOUT
CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
39253-002 I A
sem t00r low tet Or 10t
•
Mr❑■❑■■❑■■■o❑❑■o■`❑`❑❑o■❑IIIII■
o
1;1:111=L*1!1'L=`=1:
11.1�Y• I
I:1 !I:II:L:illkiL'
111.E W1
inivirkim
21111
4
II
mdb]
-
•••UMW
J
.
7
1N.w••1
I
I-
r.
f••VIE III
• 4 -
--
O 0
O 0 0
O 0 0 0
Y
r
e e
OM
3.
0
-0
0
O 0
o e
-
Y '
I,." ,
w•MO
••.
• 1
• •
•
1 1
• •
• •
•
• 1
• •
• .
I. 1
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
•
• •
• -
• $
041,
1
• •
•
■
SI •
• •
• •
•
1• •
111
=111111
1
1
•••••••••
mg wow Mj.ofrowns ON 17 111
naeanr or mom mouotaw. wc. P.M
IMO MUM NMI MMr w/CArllbr eottetrwwC
MC MOM WV oc w6Mwmtt000. 101010w. O0
IIIIINIPHO wow not wow T a 1CHC ►
a
Mrs
Oat
41)
WOO a MN
00 • yea•• '- • •
NNW Dall MO DOW 10011
et«te0
AO" UJL
0
a
M
OMAN
0000000
7
ormion
communications
...i,....wsl.ewwrl
Ass 10101111,11•01Mos
4
111 101 woos ■w104:T---,,rootthe t IMI ~SO Ma
PS -CP
PANEL -LAYOUT
CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
39253-002 I A
sem t00r low tet Or 10t
4
e
w
1188 01111111 NO AL I! ON IT 1i AR
.loran 0► IONa. INNOSOUNNa NIL
IOIIO
TM OWNS NON NII ONON16,UON ammo
no aura tow to r1 _oucoo. MOM or Ri mu
ANPNINID WNW ii* cow Or !MON majgcm
e
m1
al
ON AM NM
00 NOT ow►WINO
ammooNml 1 /08
&LIM MO -
a1NIONNONll ra TAA,
CONON
ONOUNION
1/77/01
ONO=
on wok
4180 1I /YL
rat art
p
NONSION OODINDrON
sonars
INOONID MIN= MINI
cOMMUniCil
«.r.i
NrrI.o,,l«■
rlrrrM11111CC
s
Is
TRO
PS—CP
ENGRAVING—LAYOUT
CIONNOt
1R N
CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
39253 3
maxowarrN
A
ti
tNt"L PUMP 1
aSEI.EIZEQ
INi%L PWp 1
MED
111,2111E2
MAINZ
iL_ PUifp 2
111L. PWF 3
21110.21111E-.4
SEILBLIMING
SEM
RACK 11, SLOT 101
1746-1A16
(A016) ® 1:0100
(0018) ® 1:0102
E018 ®• 1:0104
IN 0
1N 2
IN 1 11
:0101 I 11
IN 4
1N 3 1:0103
G018) 1:0106
1:0106
IN
L018 ® 1:0110
PGIS-18)
wasor,ffiugat mama *a on
m �i11 maw WIC a Ormet)
--- nooMOIR
120VAC
® 1:0112
® I:0114
IN
IN g 1:0105
IN 7 1:0107
IN 10
9 1:0109
IN
IN 12
IN 11 1:0111
{� (M018)
IN 14
IN 13 1113
r-
I
L
AC
COM
IN 15 10115_®
INFL PUMP 1,
BMW
NEUTRAL (N1e)
INFL PUMP 2
ALIICLIELECIED
INFL PUMP 2
VF0 FAIUQ
INFL PUMP 2
THERMAL ALARM
INFL PUMP 41
In -BMW
INFL PUMP 4
INFL PUMP 4
VFD ESED
SPARE
NOVO OCICOPOON
_Man wawa *oma nt'V
communications
OtasarrashmeleallsOMelen
uwaltigin
OD ROM anew NN
al+aia>�C TY-OF-CLEARVATER
1 30253-004 (a
1 ala Isar a a a
411,
FILT. PUMP 1
ALMIZLIMED
e FLT. PUMP 1
a ET.P(W2
VFD A1JNNING
• ALT. PUMP 2
l�I�I3lSt`N)Ei!!
y FLLT. PUMP 3
• F1LT. PUMP 3
ID FNLED
• MLT. PUMP 4
ADJURING
a
RACK ,1, SLOT 102
1746-IA16
TB1 1:0200
R016
(Tole) ® 1:0202
X017 ® 1:0204
2017 ® 10206
IN 0
IN 2
IN 1
1:0201 1131
IN 4
IN 6
(Mit tiO 1:0206 11
1:0210
(,,.2212)c �u
(p1 1:0212 IN 12
® 1:0214 IN 14
IN 3
1:0203
IN 5
:0205
!1 7
IN 9
IN 11
:0207 Qmoi
1:0209 •
(AC017)
:0211
IN 13
r--
1
L
® let reur soretv. mom. wants% me SW
al NuNODIS UN= rano on Oolag
H7 E
120VAC
AC
COM
IN 15
1:0213 co
AC
COM
CAG017
NEUTRAL (N1B)
ALT. PUMP 1,
RUNWNW
f 1LT. PUMP 2
AUBLIELEITED
ALT. PUMP 2
VFD FAILED
ALT. PUMP 2
FIT. PUMP 3
EMMEN
FlLT. PUMP 4
LB S ECTED
ALT. PUMP 4
WD FAILED
s
r
u
n
H
M
soo nn worwma+ art
a 1rt
NEM
a1
"mo swat
mem
�I�l.,t.t>11E'?1t 41..?1.�. ,
mai Mae
communication
„ ,,
PS -CP
CONTROL—WIRING—B
err MM.
....r
or sumo m amore
neoNwnor
s. sc.
ooraerwo
MOM
et
es MEM Na son
e
eI: mom ow R Mrooasao.
nrrsuao AMAIR Inc came or mom
AL
0A • .i-,0 maw . 41, v
ear ; /..ew swat ../_ as
CITY—OF—CLEARWATER
NNpO°w'
OW
orae ON MA
In.
my=
' TM,� °1
39253 —
A
7 T
0
an 111______
Al
Ok1CIM
*MOM
r'■ '-: X11 1'-i. _'1..
WY MINA wove alll
AAA all wIQT It
I RAS PUMP 1
N 116.1.13/1E_1
VFD FAN_ED
a RAS PUMP 2
VFD RUNNING
• RAS PUMP 3
$
3162111E1
3
VFD FSEO
• SCBE
▪ MBE
® INI na.o art maw Maws AAE soar
As Not AA IMM mass NOA{A of€* 3
H8
120VAC
181
( 12
RACK /1, SLOT /03
1746—IA16
I:
(AK017) ® 1:0302
1:
IN 0
IN 2
IN 1 1:0301 1411
AP017 ® 1:0306
(molt® I:
IN 4
IN 3 1:0303
IN 6
IN 5 1:0305
IN 8
IN 10
IN 12
IN
14'.
r--
1
L
AC
c0M
IN 7 1:0307
IN 9 1:0309
IN 11 10311
IN 13 1:0313
IN 15 1:0315
NEUTRAL (N18)
RAS PUMP 1
VFD RUNNING
RAS PUMP 2
AUTO SELECTED
RAS PUMP 2
MAILED
RAS PUMP 3
VFD RU RitiO
SEISRE
SEA
Ms
PININO NO MI NNAa wase ON M s M[
Moran or loon so HNIONI l NN:. roma
MO MN NS NON MOT UiONIIa lON ONNoaAMO
Mt ONN IRO NAM K Nrroma% calm ON
FURNIMO iODIOUTitE cCNWfl Or SOMA
41,
DON *NOM
madarou
OESON0
ara5
ONIZOKNER
s
AI7
Ma, Mar
ONNORIKRI
ONO
LINO ON ASIN
OM
!!NOON Osar/NON
Man
AwNma
yt ate i..
Oor
O * /- o. 41- RS
Nps
AIL *NIs MO Mr ant
ooNCsa am %Ito.
NAM
IfIVI OIIM; .DOS NMI �+
mai ream sumo ram,'Y WN !ONO MNOKb
communications
ROONSOINNirik
PS -CP
CONTROL -WIRING -C
e.CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
17mmei
39253-006 A
+:�Cd:A1CCt Ir NI[ •ar ICI
Re
RACK /1. SLOT /04
120YAC HOT - r16AWG RED 1746-0W16
RAS PUMP 2
IWILGIMien
f1T. PUMP 1.
SINSetalate
FLT. PUMP 3
BIALCUMMO
NFL. PUMP 1
NFL. PUMP 3
17-14
16-16
17-18
16-3
16-3
0:0401
RAS PUMP 1
RUN COMMAND
RAS PUMP 3
RUN COMMAND
FLT. PUMP 2
RUN COMMON()
FlLj. PUMP 4
RUN COMMAND
K2 KI 0:0409
OUT 10 0.0410
PS -CP
CONTROL -WIRING -D
4-7/2V02
oN
rot Mrd w
1
H5, 120VAC HOT — /16AWG RED
RACK /1, SLOT /05
1746-0W16
OUT 0 0:0500
OUT 10 0:0510
OUT 140:0514
NEUTRAL. /16AWG WHITE
c
1/0/03 04118,
M
110.4994-
n
MOM Ontfoolobi
no Corm MO SA. NellimaioN Nine
NIOnco or tm« NC.R NOW
coo owe MN Nig 0AelircoN e0NPOeOle
lot oNMooI0 1* e[ esNooNND. oeeeMIo. 0 Two mu
rum* wawa iN[ MOOR 0► =OM ON macioN
7i11Ol IZOI . we
sr N+a WM _ .UM a cox Roo
oeNaso 7/27/01
MOO
CWOCO
AMMO
efferamen
7/17/02
ea • 4, -as ..>- yaT
see •y-aNr Mat •./-0
WO • .ir
•Ai
MIK wa am ars WOW goon
COWOMWOO ..00r
pairun as a0.) .� /r►
wr•I_ calm cora. Moo li'
cormminications
aomosenzidoiompre
OW MOM WIDOW WOO
PS—CP
CONTROL—WIRING—E
CITY-IIF-CLEARWATER
6a moot
39253-008
INNIETNo ora
B
j H5. 120VAC HOT — /16AWG RED
0:0601
RACK /1, SLOT 106
1746-0W16
VAC
1
OUT 1
OUT 0
Egl
0:0609
0:0511
O:oe13
OUT 3
OUT 2
0:0605
OUT 5
OUT 4
OUT 7
OUT 6
0:0600
0:060
0:0604 Ei
0:0�
OUT 9
VAC H5. 120VAC HOT — /16AWG RED
2
OUT 11
OUT 8 0:
OUT 13
Naa mow maw. IRK 1110.013 MUD NOD orurwna�wrs'IprR
1110
10010
N. NEfTRAL. 6AWG WHJT!
OUT 15
OUT 10 0:0610
El
OUT 12 0:0612
OUT 14 0:0514
Kirri
144
SEM
SEM
® . sem
SENN
El , BABE
El .2BSSE
MB
13
14
u
u
It
n
El
TWO MOM MDM.11.0113110011011Ir•RIC
PIMPIR f Of 11pI11044 1121101000. NC. M OIR
t1r13
OWING 14011 Off MroRIr001 mlCflrMs
11R: 13RIR010 111111 RE IRo111oo11c0. alsaiN f. OR
114114041f111E 41OM00M1 411 UC$C$
TIORIOLOORI. 111C.
w MwK
0411
40.
000 011 /0013 ort.
1.44MO 01111314[
41.0 - •/-47 /114111111":7- 14f
030 - 4/-.010` M101[ - 4/-
41Aoo - ./•.119
nom 41 MRS /Io — UM
owns LManRsol
4101.1100 4110241,1.101
41+10210
0.14040
7/37/01
7rn/o2
011001111pn AW UR,
.11laOdRMIM Am
MMRLOuaM AL1
communications
limas r.ewiss114 POW
1411114111.1111
uw1►3174 1%
PS—CP
CONTROL—WIRING—F
CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
410 1111M1L 11Rei10 1e4 PPM 11111
39253-109 A
Cr Ms
e
A -B 1336 PLUS I1
CVFD'S BY OTHERS)
CABLE 1
3 RAS PUMP 1 VFD
SPEED 0-1007.
4
s
D
7
T82 CABLE 2
;Nr
JUMPER J5 SET ON PINS 1 & 2
C0-20 nA)
RAr
-.:14P 2 VFD
id ISTD 0-100%
La
N
a
vs
a
De
a
a
T82
JUMPER J5 SET ON PINS 1 & 2
CO -20 nA)
RAS PUMP 3 VFD
SPEED 0-100%
1:09/00+
1:09/00
O CHO +
CABLE 4
T82
JUMPER J5 SET ON PINS 1 & 2
C0-20 r*A)
INFL. PUMP 1 VFD
SPEED 0-100%
TB2
1:09/01 +
o CHO -
1:09/01
0011+
CABLE 6
CABLE 8
JUMPER J5 SET ON PINS 1 & 2
(0-20 mA)
1:09/02+
1:09/02-
1:09/03+
-OCHI -
o CH2+
-0042 -
1:09/03-
-0043
CH3 -
ANALOG INPUT
1746-14I8
RACK 1, SLOT 10
NOTES!
1. Use 2/C 1116sh twisted shielded
pair
2. VFD ANALOG TERMINSL ON
ANALOG INTERFACE BOARD
MO AMO AID ALL am aNNON am
mamas or scow 1[NNaosos. Nle.
Non Aa ansaano vu-aaawrD
a A "1
i ''. 4411 , -T - rr
{-'•�•.
PS -CP
woo
qs
L.!
nos mum
TO MOM WM a 10070
RM orwno.
maw Or
ORImmo Nosao
1feAl10M
„� e:......._:_..............0.
AswNl
Ito
• At �, • .�-'
ALO ...1; ANP MI01[ . y- Tr
-AMS
awwt ALL ORAE MO swa. [oats
IDi
communications
LOOP -DIAGRAM --A
ligoalnallirjergr Oa
zi.r4iftCI T Y -OF -CL EAR WA TER
a
are
1444,14.4107/
39-2531.-0.1 0 8
"LW
M
ammo
mamma=
r„ *i
aMlm
,ow
roam
GD AMOR AMDOAD MO,„4.4
ooNo or >a
RVVI4N maw=
APr�DOIItD
ram wawa flames
RV.
Ola[
M
IIP
a
3
A -B 1336 PLUS II
(VFD'S BY OTHERS)
CABLE 9 TB2
A
4 INFL. PUMP 2 VF
s SPEED 0-1007.
i
7
•
JUMPER J5 SET ON PINS 1 & 2
(0-20 mA)
""` IIIS'i PUMP 3 VFD
'St -LED 0-1007.
s
n
14
TB2
0
Z�]
CABLE 10
.)(X
1:09/04
1:09/04
o CH4 +
CABLE 12
JUMPER J5 SET ON PINS 1 & 2
(0-20 mA)
• INFL. PUMP 4 VFD
SPEED 0-100%
a
a
•a
a
CABLE 13
•
1_
TB2
A
1:09/05+
0044 -
1:09/05
CABLE 14
JUMPER J5 SET ON PINS 1 & 2
(0-20 mA)
an FILT. PUMP 1 VFD
SPEED 0-100%
:s
JUMPER J5 SET ON PINS 1 & 2
(0-20 rtA)
TB2
A
1:09/06+
0015+
-0045-
CABLE
CH5-
1:09/06
o CH6+
CABLE 16
1:09/07+
oCH6 -
1:09/07-
o CH7
oCH7 -
ANALOG INPUT
1746-NI8
RACK 1, SLOT 10
NOTES
1. Use 2/C M16sh twisted shielded
pair
2. VFD ANALOG TERMINSL ON
ANALOG INTERFACE BOARD
1101OWNS MoNit.001001110110w1001*aK
wnwaw Or Mor 100.1014001. PC. IO
1411 011.0181 NOS M.r .1.o1.wlow Oo1100.1.0
11S 01.01.01 am 00 nomoa 10. MOM 011
100111000 NOHOW MC 0000011 OF wawa
31
a
Or
0100.00
0001411
IONS
1311000.101101
aIOliaMaw
7H7
7/27
411,
mat
1.4010104
NW 01 NM
1111/.
0 p • •/-Af . • 44tipgp
On
.ilAWf Mae ../. as
pagenowt au. awn ono saw 01001
0a100.l.u- ; sa ru '-'-
04010
Nor 1100
110110011 001011/10111
10.10.001
Atl
00801 NAM Waft
communications
Iowa 11714MgY.011/Y4a
Ism 5. oWn
D
PS -CP
LOOP -DIAGRAM -8 •
00 RIM 4111400 MOO
CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
39253 11 B
Gaut OM
Ora
a
3 FILT. PUMP 2 VF
SPEED 0-100%
s
a
s
•
m
n
a
n
u
u
JUMPER J5 SET DN PINS 1 1 2
(0-20 r•A)
FILT. PUMP 3 VFD
SPEED 0-IOOY. _
JUMPER J5 SET ON PINS 1 6 2
C0-20 r•A)
CABLE 19
4_
T82
CABLE 18
1:10/00+
1:10/00
oCHO +
CABLE 20
FILT. PUMP 4 VF
SPEED 0-1007.
TB2
■ JUMPER J5 SET ON PINS 1 1 2
(0-20 mA)
at
s
a
e SPARE
1s
s.
s
1:10/01 +
oCHO -
1:10/01
0C/1I+
CABLE 22 1:10/02+
oCH1-
1:10/02-
o CH2+
oCH2 -
CH3
OCH3 -
ANALOG INPUT
1746-NI8
RACK L SLOT 11
NOTES*
1. See deg. 026 for Edco SS65
series surge protection wiring
details
2. Use 2/C 1116sh twisted shielded
pair
3. VFD ANALOG TERNINSL ON
ANALOG INTERFACE BOARD
ars arum no as WOOM101 a If
s s[
MCC
+m. as
somas
a a,
„is max
moms
..•,
$
,,, ". an C. „ .,r
!row'.
1
communications
PS -CP
LOOP -DIAGRAM -C
rroraiT v CCM snwo�saa. me
nos mann ran on mismrmon oowcamris
,
srs0rs
nos owns
nmanro
"0`V°`s`
vos�.
W
wry st snrssuten
.nNOW ms
w e
00«0011 or
eac
se .. -r . q-
so .. -air wNs ../- Tar
:'ai 7 wo sur, WKS
+�� w
mom
CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
as
s4,0,.r
MOO
pwZOWNO
r
r
se TAR
_ KIK
"�"�42
Look Playa
=x253 — 012 I
s
siaofos
_T
_
o
sat
�ant
2
001:010
POILID/Olt isa
w,
Ammo
...r, wawa suraeacme
00 roma 1001110 NOS
sato 103111 DOW SO a' e
NIP
SPARE 1:10/07+
1:10/07-
SPARE
1:10/07
ANALOG INPUT
1746—N18
RACK 1. SLOT 11
1:10/07+
SPARE
1:10/07+
TM os+osls NO Ml on R 1 RR .11C1,1-.17"---. _ 1 JA .I:I
rsvsoros arM or os Tsa_osae la sosssb, u
off r11mos0 NOM MIM 00.000201 oonor+IMO �c�
MH[ awn rs s sasawiaw_ o. nm. os Iso �Iat p .. -:rr
name= ummour tic moon or sola. • - Nall ,'
a « arae nroa a MIF!
3171:;..isr srsr saw ocwoMtq DJNISMml t mopsseam ua
oe+� a+woawear _ r �l �r w NA ---
aeon is.) yr.
PS—CP
A r-
PS—CP
P—OIAGtt
•
i
a
MILLTRONICS
INFL. P.S.
LEVEL N0. 1
COAX CABLE
120 VAC
MILLTRONICS
INFL. P.S.
LEVEL NO. 2
f C"►'w
1`•
D
N
Edco SS65
CABLE 23 CABLE 24
111�11,I
See note 1
Ecco PC642
TB2
32
As—.5 4
25
S/S•1
Edco SS65 Edco PC642
CABLE 26 r1 CABLE 27 T112 CABLE 28
120 VAC
MILLTRONICS
FILT. P.S.
LEVEL NO. 1
See note 1
A 76
9 8
1:11/01+
1:11/
S/S-2
Edco SS65 Edco PC642
CABLE 29 I—'I CABLE 30 TB2 CABLE 31
32
AS 5 4
17
COAX CABLE
•
M
120 VAC
MILLTRONICS
FILT. P.S.
LEVEL N0. 2
See note 1
Edco SS65
.+0CH1+
OCH1-
1:11 /02+
Edco PC642
CABLE 32 CABLE 33 TB2 CABLE 34
COAX GABLE
120 VAC
See note 1
7 6
9 6
1:11/03+
44 zh, Iat/03-Nsg
oCH3 +
CH3 -
ANALOG INPUT
1746-NI8
RACK 1. SLOT 12
NOTES'
1. See deg. 026 For Edco SS65
series surge protection wiring
details
2. Use 2/C 1116sh twisted shielded
Wily"
The 0111110114 NO I0L NFOrM1b11 O1 11
oswein' O' MVOs 111:7NOt04II NO.
aolrca4N14
OI Oa
40
1MI4 mar
„mem
$
.f. ". J1f1i -1 ' `R
'
D7,
communications
PS -CP
LOOP—DIAGRAM—E
ISSO
-461'."si"'..
` -� 4loe�lm
MI mow non AMI Nroln�ulow
011
_
DR MOOG 1MV K AIf001Rof. OO11NIm,
7101,111101111) sos` INC. DC s oluan OF
scam*
GA • T%4f • •h 170?
O'00�ee : i alga "/- �s
OF-OF-CLEARVATER
w
__
awl
`"��
, UM
a MN
.4R
IOP OIL 11111111 NO IMP twoMOM
0.1111118/1101
-;/`'alt%
—
quitowswomm
'm
1
39253-014 f A
+,:M
Mi.
OM
'CO
I,LIlrgll maroon
ammo
raw wan= saw nom
aw awn .MONO 2114
$5**St 70001 J.R. lot OF Al
t
3
s
7
$
•
c,r
MILL TRONICS
RAS P.S.
LEVEL NO. 1
Edco SS65
CABLE 35 CABLE 36 TB2
noE
COAX CABLE
120 VAC
"4:1!";.12CMCS
..,,o P.S.
LEVEL NO. 2
S/S-3
Edco PC642
CABLE 37
3 2
See note 1
Edco SS65
CABLE 38 CABLE 39
w-- ---+ A
■
COAX CABLE
0
N 120 VAC
a
s
a
wr
n
H
SPARE
SPARE
5 4
1:11/04+
-OCH4 +
+4 1:11/04-
et)810 '
19
S/S-3
Edco PC642
TB2 CABLE 40
See note 1
7 6
9 8
1:11/05+
CH4 -
CH5-
5/5-3
1:11/06+
1:11/06-
1:11/07+
1:11/07-
o CH6+
oCH6 -
o CH7 +
OCH7 -
ANALOG INPUT
1746-NI8
RACK 1. SLOT 12
NOTE&
1. See dwg. 026 for Edco SS65
series surge protection wiring
details
2. Use 2/C 1116sh twisted shielded
pair
1123 MOW MIO SIL NCIII&UION ON
R w TIE
maw.
*AD gym
'.'1t.;4E:al11311411':JI:(
ID
communications
F'S -CP
LOOP-01AGRAM-F
mown a sow �eolwaoas. Pc.
oera0se
was ware NON NIX wrowranauoN
we lig orrOOOVOW °
,.---.7
. 4. 113 ..-e
Co • /-arr, Rale ../-Ys
MOM ALL auriw,lus OAP
mum
80•000.r Tie
CONaaT aisw
r►rr
ea mwNampa
LOADoN
.._r_____•0
MIA
- • ARVATER
( A
7 --
0300001n22 us
ra.woalrarrnn ,rr
Mrosummessimo1ria
.
MAW
ONLO3A71
/LUIINAl11N11UM,
ALMA
Na
3LIAM
;' 3 — 15
Nd._9ryi
A
n11r1tl
CAO M1Y MACAO 31110
SCAM 1001:11. O/ wt
0'
slew OHOwT+ON
i
4 ; as
to p;S: o *•:
zic !a s ;i i •s ;a
I -at k
1=
1 1
11:101/ 14V
g
co
N
1
a
1
1
1
1
Le
1
1
1
i
3
a
4
1
1
1
1
a
O
gp
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
1
1
1
3
'r$
1
1
1
1
1
a
1
1
1
i
E,E
i�
111
1
1
1
1
1
1
•
— K
to sr1 a �'
1 �
Mr
Ow
_ niar mos oa
r
owei
r «we
4—
AV
041
lac
ere nu mu) Nam Maw mom me ME
As ss[ MMOiw uaas rorty O1I€ $3
---- nno woe
Loom op VIM Mast aura swot
1116 MOM N40 ALL O/OO MMON ON R M M
rawer r w ■'ANON 11000001010. $C. rdn101
11110 MUM NON Nn VOM110011 CONCaON$
1110 maw wet R 00111wOCar MOM. ON
RN11A14D 40111018 TIC =OW 0► $CMCIM
14p010f000E„ .
e
MUM
00 NOT SCALE ORAWINO
7=o11�.Q MVO
000 • •/-.S W SOLO • •/-
UN • 41-0100'
1111N
Ad
_>
7/07/07
CM m -w
04041110001
0114
COMO
7/07/05
tin ON Awn O@S MOM ALL UM MO *OW SOUS
CWRaONdln Ao TJJL
0 7uaauS
..
00010
7/t7/or
moon 04oC11 na
0010140
APPROWOI
raroacaparo an
Io,L4ia8 »,t Ilia
05154 111drR0 SOW= IMO*
communications
OurisTsMOMMgllsad ii
mmrnrwu.
tr .RO1A
CMO 05151* 111100111 0100
CONTROL—PANEL
POWER—WIRING—C
coma
CITY-Of-CLEARWATER
39253-018 L&
Mob XI= SNW>« 07 XX
•
3
4
a
a
s
n
to
D
14
R
17
N
n
01
at
ea
as
N
as
r3A
T83
FO- Y -16A-
-0 19
Y 6— 9 T� 11
T83. 19
179- Tim. 11
18A- -0 19
180
T93,
11
CR -19
19Ar T83. 19
1`90 T-0 11
INFL
1
START PUMINP 2
=US
INFL. PUMP 3
START VFD
INFL. PUMP 4
Y12 -0. 19 START S
103. 11 ALT. PUMP 1 12
TT -0. 19
T83,11
222102N 19 MIMEDT83. 11 TILT. PUMP 3
CR -21
CR -22
CR -23
Y 220 -0
1A -
STABLYED
FILT. PUMP 2
183. 19
O Y 23A. -0 MOUS
Y 230 T83. it
ALT. PUMP 4
Y: DENOTES 116 AWG YELLOW WIRE
0 Denotes terminals in WD
183. inputs 20, 24. and 30 must be present for VFD to start.
T83 CONT.
103. 19
7833. 11
-0
T83. 19
T83, 11
T83 19
T83,
11
51613L 10
RAS PUMP 1
=BUD '
RAS PUMP 2
START VFD
RAS PUMP 3
00 MINNS NO ML e0 100.1 ON R • 1I
POMMY Or 10004 1ae+waLootf, Nm MOM
1101 Olresq NON Off 01101110011 OONOorwa
aIle 0e11010 wr K IOr!OOOCss. 170101001. ON
MONO°° 001MN1 11R camas OP sates
wasmounet. Ne.
ONO OW
PIONCION
00 NOT S L DRAWING
444111 a1Nar.1c
u -.-
sae - y-aav mu • /-
aea - •�- ee�
NM[ OM Ma
ON gam Ob.
ILL NMI MO SNAP OM
e
A
0
Op_
+rna�a
as
M
S11
000100
wean
a'Y
OANIOJNNOI
OMOLOPMN
7/Viet
assess M as' aJ&
7/17/07
MOON OlaCaPaON
000740
MO
w
communications
OswasTmaeleMsaddes
riN01MaNM1N
tare. PL 1e71
>n1C PS -CP
CUSTOMER-CONNECTION-TB3
CcuseueITY-OF-CLEARWATER
39253 •0 11
OM PNMT NA011e SIMa. Erna
WORM SWAN Mast
Man aNOt
3
3
4
s
•
3
7
3
MI
a
12
1.
a
$
w
r
10
i
m
R
13
N
is
INFL. P. S.
LEVEL NO. 1
INFL. P.S.
LEVEL NO. 2
NOTE&
1. Use 2/C •l6sh twisted shielded
Pair
2. CXX is cable nutter
3. VFD ANALOG TERMINSL ON
ANALOG INTERFACE BOARD
CR -1A C53 C51 r- CR -1A
1
120VAC
C54
5 6 INFL. P.S.
tri:LEVEL
I0 DIGITAL IND.
TB2
TB2
11011 MOM MO M1 110101110 0011 a 13 • 7+t
1101311111 a 10334* 7aa3moocs. 3IC. 11111010
11q 31rw10 NO3 M13 3/omsore• CONCE 3wq
IN! WNW Wt/ K 11000011013. COMM 03
n1mm03 w1110u3 11113 Comm OF 1034110*
liaaelAMES. MC.
DO NOT
YANG
nae sow
roompora
MAW
ILO • •/-.w
330 • %,w'
.0300 ■ •!-ate
100100 • •!-
MOIL • •/-
c VIVO
01 0010-00000
CM M1 -0x13
:21V10111'4
3441111011 0001/1MII
0000
00010
MOM
OPIMC EO
Hart
010303111101
Ome0311a1
3x11
7/27/33
7
MO 00/WM
0101.
MOW Mi 301110) MO 111110 taw
X171 ,as 3m.
111110001.411110 303
WAIUMMIt .w
M010.11010mao Rana toss
communications
Sommio Tool0O0110110111M18
torkwalms
PS—CP
LOOP—DIAGRAM—E
CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
39253-021 C
000 1011110 M11011M 2000 11041' 10001 101 or IOL
3
4
3
7
1
■
u
It
D
14
a
17
•
vs
as
12
�.0
FILT. P. S.
in
LEVEL NO. 1
FILT. P.S.
LEVEL ND. 2
NOTES:
in
I Use 2/C 1116sh twisted shielded
pair
r' 2. CXX is cable number
n 3. VFD ANALO TERMINSt. ON
L
ANAOG INTERFACE
1
CR -2A
C63 C61
120VAC
5
11
6
0
CR -2A
FILT. P.S.
LEVEL
DIGITAL IND.
T82
6
7
6
7
e
0
A
0
■a.
5-
a
71/24/0►
7/27/07
010[
ott
Oa-0w1ot
.neat
w
a
MOM WINNI1011
01111110 NO ALL Halla II'4 ON 0 as M
NINON or swam laorlp000n, to puha
on wawa on -v reorrsaaI ooMa no
ea arras Ira R otriao let . WNW ON
DK canna Or MOON
100010=113. NC.
We wwd olav
00011:0 ammaavet
ovum wamrwaw
mow
wwwwwo
00 NOT
magi • moo
100•:
•
i
0
3
4
$
•
s
•
u
16
13
N
I0
17
le
10
s
s
IN
0,
RAS P. S.
LEVEL NO. 1
RAS P.S.
LEVEL NO. 2
NOTES'
1. See deg. XXX for Edco SS65
series surge protection wiring
details
2. Use 2/C *16st, twisted shielded
pair
3. VFD ANALOG TERNINSL ON
ANALOG INTERFACE BOARD
CR -3A
1
C74
6
11
17
!0
4-20nA
)
CR -3A
RAS P.S.
LEVEL
DIGITAL IND.
-F4
TB2
1Ns 0NNw16 MID MA. 1100111110311 ON R 16 UK
wmran CO NNNaCV. 1KON16t000. OW WNW
aas 0N1tlMNo , J1AM TWO- WMON 11011E0100
INK 001.-16 Wit Na 111.1I00Uaa, o0OM ON
7•1111101113) 00NO NT IIQ 0000011 a WINwaA
lON301aaO. w0.
Thim mai
6
7
+ VFD2 -
6 7
00 NOT ranDRAVANO
uosana.c of
o4ao - .i-.0sr
--i+ VFD3
6
TB2
a
cpm-cowat
a NNW NNR
LN D 001 WWI
Na.
Wit
3N -w
A
0
ON
ININAWA
03113140 wwwwawot 7/"
'Oman oJNNNOANa, 7/27At
NOOK NLL OUM NO IMP Ne:O
CONTWINICATT Air TJJL
ant
ON's
OKse0.no0
10r11101O Mw: A03 N1.Ju
IVOINIOWNA 101 N L
maw Nra30O 00000 fl*3
communications
WwWWWWNWNWs MOW
Nowwwwwoo
tam aura
PS—CP
LOOP—DIAGRAM—G
ONO INann DROWN DOD
CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
sow Mot !KR O 0► NN
• •
DOOR LAYOUT
TYPICAL OF TFREE
RACK PANEL LAYOUT
ea Mb
rs__ waw 000011A070 ON 0 ■ 1N1
1/10,00Y or woos Wowaoors. 1 . Nolo
110 1Ae1110 11011 A1/r 11/011M110 10NCOK1010
011E mom Wet K W1100YOoo. 110MO. 011
1,100000113 VITIOUT nQ C0NWIT Or MAIM
7020014001 AL
1010 AMU
702011101
DO NOT SCALE DRAWIWO
utvw mown mono
�1 • •!-.43 OWN + N-1/�
OA0 • ./-.010' 11101 . */. 0.S
0100 - •I -11E
o r
ma=
N M 0111
MS ON MIA
ILA .MOS 01t, 111211 lea •101► 1001E
A
0
7 /00
ON
LWOW 20201110N
OCCNCO
AMM OVID
0.1171111011101 7/17/01
01002;1111/1 7 7
000000110131 A00` 7.1*
110ms
1111//100 pow rim 'ir
communIcatIons
t marww
issoolowlg1.RN070
W /021031 101010 1000
LEVEL—TRANSMITTER
PANEL—LAYOUT
011101*
CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
39253 24
' IOML ICIU I or la
111\Y
A
vs
-11112.1001.
.110.010.1.20a
Nnaea tar
Ma y. NI 00
1 : •
. .
. .
. 1
1111 00010 AND SAL MF0010211CN nd<11K
MOM OF MON 1000 0001. pG NOMA
t/N3 01000 NON an o ronvanon o0NeClemo
nl[ snow wet et 070010 OR
110Maismoio00701 et ur naatante or WNW
e
1012
ONLOCNIN
a
7/11/02
DUD
oN
NANNItAL
UMW ON MON
e n
00 NOT CAtE DRAWING
oo•«T-off-.•/-.11W•/-.11W
ONO •/- NSM �/-
0,0) - .1-
I117104 ALL MO IMP 12013
Wawa or«:nav tltt
component .33i' .an
awiQa1N01
en00N OCKNIMON
MOM
.creaccwant a3{ rA/OL
w lak ./02
1111040111 IIAa I= nNall
communications
sanditedmids.0210Da
Lift Warm
CAO IOWA MOW MO
LEVEL—TRANSDUCER
PANEL—LAYOUT
000702
CITY—OF—CLEARWATER
op000tNS.
39253-025
IDLE 10012 3ticQ a ar MN
•
w
i
3
•
7
•
•
M
u
•
•13
N
17
r
a
as
a
EDCO SS65-036-2, PIPE ENCAPSULATED
SURGE PROTECTOR DETAIL
BLK.
CINE YEL.
EQUIP.
BLK./RED
YEL./RED
GRN.
11011 OOMaq MS ILL OOaWei 0A A $ 11R
Chore al SOWS Wals 1o00i, Oa NUNN
as oa1a5M rot NM 5saa•ala aMROnaa
la mem Ira K lOal0oalCm. MOM OR
II$UT ns COMMA a (CARO t
easallea INC
y
11.01 Mals
AARON
00 NOT SCALE DRAWN0
Mal OMEN Mena
00 • 41 -hi ram . 4/. id
0.00 - .hA1e• Nau • ./-
•A03 - .t -mer
MMR
5N3
Oa OM Na
adC
l0MA At Maas NCO IMP 50oa
A
0
7/37/00
057
a
M
07
55555 0000101011
al aRa
OR1M11a
MOON®
alwananol
NMu0Y50t
MEM
7/57/50
0 scala ant A10` 7.1*
MIS Kik
Ab
woe= saw mat
comm nice tions
0 nnaT 1Un11MesMin
ILLOIPAMINAL
tAAVISRA
11100
SURGE—SUPPRESSION
DETAILS
coma
CITY—OF—CLEARWATER
1 392536 17
510 /041Mh AM100a
1
1
1
3
a
•
•
•
M
11
12
17
M
DEVICENET SCANNER IN PS -CP
A/B Devicenet Tronstector
Scanner Surge Protector
g 0 Red g
4 Whitt 4
3 /��Bnrt 3
2 _ mom' 2
Allen Bradley
VFD *1 enclosure
Tronstector Allen Bradley
Surge Protector VFD N1
Red 5
White 4
Bare 3 O
Blue
Red
5
White
4
0
Bore
3
Red
TERM. COLOR
SIGNAL FUNCTION
g
Red
VDC+
Power
4
White
CAN_H
Sig. High
3
Bare
SHIELD
SHIELD
2
Blue -
CAN_L
Sig. Low
I
Block
COMM
Common
Allen Bradley
VFD MX enclosure
Tronstector Allen Bradley
Surge Protector VFD *X
5
0
Blue
Black
0
White
Bare
Blue
I Black I Block 1 1�
T
DEVICENET TRUNK LINE OR DROP LINE
Black
Red
4
0
3
0
2
Q
0
1
Note 1. The ground wire shall be as close to the first VFD in the network as posSlble•
es For each Dev ceNet network with multiple devices, only one device must be grounded.
Note 2. Install resistor between terninol 2 and terninol 4 on each end of devicenet network
00 Net SCM DRAWING
White
Bare
Blue
Black
4 O
11M1 021120 MW M. MOIIIM110N O1 11 111113
rM9rwMr 9r sum no10101,0001. NM;. NOM
IMM MONO 1101 MM 10010101N CON1111010
1113 MOM NMR 1100001000. 0010180. OR
n01NOME0 •amour 1R mow w 0r sawnPIOICOON
V
NOR
IMMO
000.90:./ --.OW war:727 :./-103
own ..i-a9r
w ems
A 2/n/o3� CSN sm--ewit�
MP. OrR If
MONO 0.1270/0101
0311A10 anutu rM01
memo
0030
7[37/2
7137/02
VIM w /MMn
MOL
MOON ML OHO /M0 ONO W
001101 MINOlri •000. 11,1
MIPINOMMOIM00i 01
1MMMLMIIMre .003O
tp
comtnun{cadons
On11rTwamMolm01M1NN
IN,VMb11 OESCRwrgr,
2411000
w01Ml wO0I00 swam VIMW
00 100011 /MOW MN
DEVICENET-WIRING
DETAILS
mar—
CITY-OF-CLEARWATER
34253-027 A
MNc lona IwsR a or >a
Appendix C — Section 13300 Instrumentations and Controls —
General Provisions
•
•
•
•1 SECTION 13300
2
3 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
4
5 PART 1 GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The existing PLC located in the administration building is an Allen Bradley SLC -
10 5/05 PLC. All new I/O as part of this project shall be connected to this existing
11 PLC.
12
13 B. The Contractor shall procure the services of a Process Control System Supplier
14 (PCSS) to furnish and install all materials, equipment, labor and services,
15 required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein,
16 in the Specification Sections listed below, and in related drawings, except for
17 those services and materials specifically noted.
18
19 Section No. Title
13305 Control Descriptions
13340 Process Instrumentation and Equipment
20
•21 C. The PCSS shall supply, install and configure all the instruments specified in
22 Division 13 and as shown on the Drawings.
23
24 D. An Applications Engineering Services Supplier (AESS) shall modify and
25 configure the existing Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and Human Machine
26 Interface (HMI) programming to integrate the modifications as described in the
27 Contract Documents and as shown on the Drawings into the existing SCADA
28 system. The AESS shall provide configuration of the existing SCADA Historian
29 software and Reporting software as per Owner requirements.
30
31 E. It is considered acceptable for the PCSS and AESS to be the same company.
32
33 F. Provide instruments for process control as shown on the P&IDs except for those
34 identified as vendor provided instruments.
35
36 G. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to complete the
37 testing of all devices and systems furnished and installed as detailed on the
38 Drawings.
39
40 H. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance,
41 such as transducers, relays, signal amplifiers, intrinsic safety barriers, signal
42 isolators, software, and drivers to interface with existing equipment or equipment
41043 provided by others under other Sections of these specifications, shall be included
44 whether they are shown on the Drawings or not.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-1 11/30/23
1 ill2 I. All equipment and installations shall satisfy applicable Federal, State and local
3 codes.
4
5 J. Use the equipment, instrument, and loop numbering scheme shown on the
6 Drawings and specifications in the development of the submittals. Do not deviate
7 from or modify the numbering scheme without the Engineer's approval.
8
9 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
10
11 A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section.
12 Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Item.
13
14 1.03 RELATED WORK
15
16 A. Instrumentation and Controls conduit systems are specified in Division 16.
17
18 B. Instrumentation signal cable and alarm and status wiring are specified Division
19 16.
20
21 C. Relevant equipment Sections in Divisions 11, 13, 15, and 16 with specific
22 requirements called out.
23
24 1.04 SUBMITTALS
25
26 A. General Requirements:
27
28 1. Refer to Section 01300 for general submittal requirements.
29
30 2. Shop drawings shall demonstrate that the equipment and services to be
31 furnished comply with the provisions of these specifications and shall provide
32 a complete record of the equipment as manufactured and delivered.
33
34 3. Submittals shall be complete; giving equipment specifications, details of
35 connections, wiring, ranges, installation requirements, and specific
36 dimensions. Submittals consisting of only general sales literature shall not be
37 acceptable.
38
39 4. Substitutions on functions or type of equipment specified shall not be
40 acceptable unless specifically noted.
41
42 5. Separate submittals shall be made for each submittal listed below.
43
44 B. Project Plan, Deviation List, and Schedule Submittal:
45
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-2 11/30/23
• 2 1 1. Submit, within 45 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, a Project plan. The
Project Plan shall be submitted and approved before further submittals shall
3 be accepted. The Project Plan shall, at a minimum, contain the following:
4
5 a. Understanding of the project work, interfaces to other systems, schedule,
6 startup, and coordination. A discussion of startup, replacement of
7 existing equipment with new, switchover (Maintaining Plant Operations
8 during system transition), approach to testing and training, and other
9 tasks as required by these specifications shall be included as applicable.
10
11 b. Project personnel and organization including the PCSS project manager,
12 project engineer, and lead project technicians. Include resumes of each
13 these individuals and specify in writing their commitment to this project.
14
15 c. Sample formats of the shop drawings to be submitted and in
16 conformance with the requirements of the Specifications. At a minimum
17 include samples of panel fabrication drawings, loop, and I/O wiring
18 diagrams.
19
20 2. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings shall be clearly defined in a
21 Deviation List. The Deviation List shall consist of a paragraph -by -paragraph
22 review of the Specifications indicating acceptance or any proposed
i23 deviations, the reason for exception, the exact nature of the exception and
24 the proposed substitution so that an evaluation may be made by the
25 Engineer. If no exceptions are taken to the specifications or drawings the
26 PCSS shall make a statement as such. If there is no statement by the PCSS,
27 then it is acknowledged that no exceptions are taken.
28
29 3. Project schedule shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. A
30 schedule prepared in Gantt chart format clearly showing task linkages for all
31 tasks and identifying critical path elements. PCSS schedule must be based
32 on the General Contractor schedule and must meet all field installation,
33 testing, and start-up milestones in that schedule. The project schedule shall
34 illustrate I&C related major project milestones including the following:
35
36 a. Schedule for all subsequent project submittals. Include the time required
37 for Contractor submittal preparation, Engineer's review time, and a
38 minimum of two complete review cycles.
39
40 b. Proposed dates for all project coordination meetings.
41
42 c. Hardware purchasing, fabrication, and assembly (following approval of
43 related submittals).
44
45 d. Shipment of instrument and control system equipment.
•46
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-3 11/30/23
1 e. Installation of instrument and control system equipment.
2
3 f. Testing: Schedule for all testing.
4
5 g. Schedule for system cutover and startup.
6
7 h. Schedule for all training including submittal and approval of O&M
8 manuals and site training.
9
10 C. Input/Output (I/O) List Submittal:
11
12 1. Submit, within 60 days after Notice to Proceed, a complete system
13 Input/Output (I/O) address list for equipment connected to the control system
14 under this Contract.
15
16 2. I/O list shall be based on the Drawings, the design I/O list (if included), and
17 requirements in the Specifications.
18
19 3. The I/O list shall be submitted in both a Microsoft Excel readable electronic
20 file format and an 8-1/2 inch by 11 -inch hard copy.
21
22 4. The I/O list shall reflect all active and spare I/O points. Add points to
23 accommodate spare I/O as required in the specifications.
24
25 5. The I/O list shall be arranged such that each control panel has a dedicated
26 worksheet. At a minimum, I/O worksheet shall include the following
27 information:
28
29 a. DESCRIPTION: A description of the function of the device (text that
30 includes signal source, control function, etc.) Include the text "Spare
31 Points" for all I/O module points that are not connected to equipment.
32
33 b. PHYSICAL LOCATION: The Control Panel designation of where the I/O
34 point is wired to.
35
36 c. Physical POINT ADDRESS: Rack, Slot, and Point (or Channel)
37 assignment for each I/O point.
38
39 d. I/O TYPE: use DO - Discrete Output, DI - Discrete Input, AO - Analog
40 Output, Al - Analog Input, PI - Pulse Input, or PO - Pulse Output.
41
42 e. RANGE/STATE: The range in engineering units corresponding to an
43 analog 4-20 mA signal, or, the state at which the value of the discrete
44 points are "1."
45
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-4 11/30/23
•
•1 f. ENGINEERING UNITS: The engineering units associated with the
2 Analog I/O.
3
4 g. ALARM LIMITS: Include alarm limits based on the control descriptions
5 and the Drawings.
6
7 6. The I/O list shall be sorted in order by:
8
9 a. Physical location.
10
11 b. I/O Type.
12
13 7. Once the I/O list is approved, the PLC I/O addresses shall not be modified
14 without approval by the Engineer.
15
16 D. Field Instruments Submittal:
17
18 1. Refer to the Instruments section for submittal requirements.
19
20 E. Hardware and Software Packages Submittal:
21
22 1. For each hardware and software packages component specified in the
0 23 sections above, submit a cover page that lists, at a minimum, date,
24 specification number, product name, manufacturer, model number,
25 Location(s), and power required. Preferred format for the cover page is ISA -
26 TR20.00.01-2001 (updated in 2004-2006), general data sheet; however,
27 other formats will be acceptable provided they contain all required
28 information.
29
30 F. Testing Submittals - Submit, in one submittal, the following testing related
31 documents:
32
33 1. Status signoff forms:
34
35 a. Develop and submit project specific I/O Status and Automatic Control
36 Strategy signoff forms to be used during factory and field testing to
37 organize and track each loop's inspection, adjustment, calibration,
38 configuration, and testing status and sign off. Include sign -off forms for
39 each testing phase showing all loops. Submit testing forms prior to start
40 of testing.
41
42 2. Testing Procedures:
43
44 a. Submit detailed procedures proposed to be followed for each of the tests
45 specified herein. The test procedures shall serve as the basis for the
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-5 11/30/23
1 execution of the required tests to demonstrate that the system meets and •
2 functions as specified.
3
4 b. Documents shall be structured in an orderly and easy to follow manner
5 to facilitate an efficient and comprehensive test.
6
7 c. Test procedures shall indicate all pre -testing setup requirements, all
8 required test equipment, and simulation techniques to be used.
9
10 d. Test procedures shall be structured in a cause -and -effect manner where
11 the inputs are indicated, and the outputs are recorded.
12
13 e. Test procedures shall include the demonstration and validation under
14 normal operating conditions and under various failure scenarios as
15 specified in Contract Documents.
16
17 f. Testing may not start until Testing Submittal has been approved.
18
19 G. Test Documentation:
20
21 1. Upon completion of each required test, document the test by submitting a
22 copy of the signed off Testing Status forms. Testing shall not be considered
23 complete until the signed -off forms have been submitted and approved. •
24 Submittal of other test documentation, including "highlighted" wiring
25 diagrams with field technician notes, are not acceptable substitutes for the
26 formal test documentation.
27
28 H. Training Plan Submittals:
29
30 1. Submit a Training Plan submittal, which outlines of each training course
31 including course objectives and target audience, resumes of instructors,
32 prerequisite requirements for each class, and samples of handouts for
33 review.
34
35 I. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment Lists Submittal:
36
37 1. Submit a list of, and descriptive literature for, spares, expendables, and test
38 equipment.
39
40 2. Submit a list of, and descriptive literature for, additional spares, expendables,
41 and test equipment recommended by the manufacturer.
42
43 3. Submit unit and total costs for the additional spare items specified or
44 recommended for each subsystem.
45
46 J. Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-6 11/30/23
•1
2 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700.
3
4 2. The operations and maintenance manuals shall, at a minimum, contain the
5 following information:
6
7 a. Table of Contents:
8
9 1) A Table of Contents shall be provided for the entire manual with the
10 specific contents of each volume clearly listed. The complete Table
11 of Contents shall appear in each volume.
12
13 b. Instrument and Equipment Lists:
14
15 1) The following lists shall be developed in Microsoft Excel format and
16 provided not only as a hardcopy in O&M but also electronically.
17
18 2) An instrument list for all devices supplied including tag number,
19 description, specification section and paragraph number,
20 manufacturer, model number, serial number, range, span, location,
21 manufacturer phone number, local supplier name, local supplier
22 phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other
•23 pertinent data.
24
25 3) An equipment list for all non -instrument devices supplied listing
26 description, specification section and paragraph number,
27 manufacturer, model number, serial number, location, manufacturer
28 phone number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number,
29 completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data.
30
31 c. Equipment Operations and Maintenance Information:
32
33 1) ISA-TR20.00.01-2001(updated in 2004-2006) data sheets shall be
34 provided for all field instruments. For non -field instrumentation
35 devices, provide a cover page for each device, piece of equipment,
36 and OEM software that lists date, specification number, product
37 name, manufacturer, model number, Location(s), and power
38 required. Preferred format for the cover page is ISA-TR20.00.01-
39 2001(updated in 2004-2006), general data sheet; however, other
40 formats will be acceptable provided they contain all required
41 information.
42
43 2) Vendor O&M documentation for each device, piece of equipment, or
44 OEM software shall be either new documentation written specifically
S45 for this project or modified standard vendor documentation. All
46 standard vendor documentation furnished shall have all portions that
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-7 11/30/23
1 apply clearly indicated with arrows or circles. All portions that do not •
2 apply shall be neatly lined out or crossed out. Groups of pages that
3 do not apply at all to the specific model supplied shall be removed.
4
5 d. As -Built Drawings:
6
7 1) Complete as -built drawings, including all drawings and diagrams
8 specified in this section under the "Submittals" section. These
9 drawings shall include all termination points on all equipment the
10 system is connected to, including terminal points of equipment not
11 supplied by the PCSS.
12
13 2) As built documentation shall include information from submittals, as
14 described in this Specification, updated to reflect the as -built system.
15 Errors in or modifications to the system resulting from the Factory
16 and/or Functional Acceptance Tests shall be incorporated in this
17 documentation.
18
19 e. Electronic O&M Information:
20
21 1) In addition to the hard copy of O&M data, provide an electronic
22 version of all equipment manuals and data sheets, along with any
23 software back-up of configuration files. Electronic documents shall
24 be supplied in Portable Document Format.
25
26 2) Provide electronic files for all custom -developed manuals including
27 training manuals. Text shall be supplied in both Microsoft Office
28 format and Adobe Acrobat format.
29
30 3) Provide electronic files for all drawings produced. Drawings shall be
31 in AutoCAD ".dwg" format and in Adobe Acrobat format. Drawings
32 shall be provided using the AutoCAD eTransmit feature to bind
33 external references, pen/line styles, fonts, and the drawing file into
34 individual zip files.
35
36 4) If specified in the training section, provide digital copies of all training
37 videos. Videos shall be in a format that is readable by standard DVD
38 players and by standard PC DVD drives. Format shall be a minimum
39 of 800 by 600 pixels and shall include sound.
40
41 3. The cover and edge of each volume shall contain the information as specified
42 in Section 01700.
43
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-8 11/30/23
.1 1.05 COORDINATION MEETINGS
2
3 A. Schedule the mandatory coordination meetings as described herein. The
4 meetings shall be held at the Owner's designated location and shall include
5 attendance by the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor, and the PCSS's Project
6 Engineer. Other Division 13 specifications may require additional meetings.
7 Prepare and distribute an agenda for this meeting a minimum of one week before
8 the scheduled meeting date. Meeting shall be scheduled a minimum of one week
9 before the requested meeting date.
10
11 1. A project kickoff coordination meeting shall be held within two weeks after
12 submitting the Project Plan. The purpose of the meeting shall be to discuss
13 the PCSS's Project Plan, to summarize the PCSS's understanding of the
14 project; discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives; schedule testing
15 and delivery deadline dates; provide a forum to coordinate hardware and
16 software related issues; and request any additional information required from
17 the Owner. The meeting will last up to one business day.
18
19 2. A submittal review coordination meeting shall be held after the Hardware,
20 Panel Drawing, and Loop Drawing Submittal package has been reviewed by
21 the Engineer and returned to the PCSS. The purpose of this meeting shall be
22 to review comments made on the submittal package; to refine scheduled
•23 deadline dates; coordinate equipment installation activities. The meeting will
24 last up to one business day.
25
26 3. Regular on-site meetings when the PCSS staff is at the plant site.
27
28 1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS
29
30 A. Publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. Where a date is
31 given for reference standards, that edition shall be used. Where no date is given
32 for reference standards, the latest edition in effect at the time of bid opening shall
33 apply.
34
35 B. International Society of Automation (ISA):
36
37 1. ISA S5.2, Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations.
38
39 2. ISA S5.3, Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display
40
41 3. Instrumentation Logic and Computer Systems.
42
43 4. ISA S5.4, Instrument Loop Diagrams.
44
455. ISA S20, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
• 46 Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-9 11/30/23
1
2 6. ISA RP60.3, Human Engineering for Control Centers.
3
4 7. ISA RP60.6, Nameplates, Labels, and Tags for Control Centers.
5
6 8. ISA -99, Industrial Automation and Control Systems Security.
7
8 C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
9
10 D. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA):
11
12 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
13
14 2. NFPA 79, Industrial Control Equipment.
15
16 E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
17
18 1. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment - for custom fabricated equipment.
19
20 2. A nationally recognized testing laboratory, as approved by the Authority
21 having jurisdiction, may substitute for UL listing on commercial off the shelf
22 products.
23
24 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
25
26 A. The Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall be a "systems integrator"
27 regularly engaged in the design and the installation of instrumentation systems
28 and their associated subsystems as they are applied to the municipal water and
29 wastewater industry. For the purposes of this Specification Section, a "systems
30 integrator" shall be interpreted to mean an organization that complies with all of
31 the following criteria:
32
33 1. Employs personnel on this project who have successfully completed ISA or
34 manufacturers training courses on general process instrumentation and
35 configuration and implementation of the specific programmable controllers,
36 computers, and software proposed for this project. Key personnel shall hold
37 ISA CCST Level 1 certification or have a minimum of 10 years of verifiable
38 plant startup experience. Key personnel shall include, as a minimum, the lead
39 field technician.
40
41 2. Has successfully completed work of similar or greater complexity on at least
42 three previous projects within the last five years. Successful completion shall
43 be defined as a finished project completed on time, without any outstanding
44 claims or litigation involving the PCSS. Potential references shall be for
45 projects where the PCSS's contract was of similar size to this project.
46
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-10 11/30/23
•
•
•1 3. Has been actively engaged in the type of work specified in this Section for a
2 minimum of five years.
3
4 B. The PCSS shall maintain a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility
5 within 200 miles of the project site with full time employees capable of designing,
6 fabricating, installing, calibrating, and testing the systems specified herein. At a
7 minimum, the PCSS shall be capable of responding to on-site problems within 12
8 hours of notice. Provide an on-site response within 4 hours of notification starting
9 at two months before scheduled startup to two months after startup completion.
10
11 C. PCSS shall hold a valid UL -508 certification for their panel fabrication facility.
12
13 D. Actual installation of the instrumentation system need not be performed by the
14 PCSS's employees; however, the PCSS as a minimum shall be responsible for
15 the technical supervision of the installation by providing on site supervision to the
16 installers of the various components.
17
18 E. Being listed in this specification does not relieve any potential PCSS from
19 meeting the qualifications specified in this Section. The listed PCSS may have to
20 submit a qualifications submittal at the request of the County.
21
22 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.23 24 A. Delivery, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with Section 01600.
25
26 B. Shipping Precautions:
27
28 1. After completion of shop assembly, factory test and approval of all
29 equipment, cabinets, panels and consoles shall be packed in protective
30 crates and enclosed in heavy duty (5 mil) polyethylene envelopes or secured
31 sheeting to provide protection from damage, dust and moisture.
32 Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. The
33 equipment shall then be skid -mounted for final transport. Lifting rings shall be
34 provided for moving without removing protective covering. Boxed weights
35 shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,
36 transporting, storing and handling at the job site.
37
38 2. Manufacturer's special instructions for field handling, storage and installation
39 required for protection, shall be securely attached to the packaging for each
40 piece of equipment prior to shipment. The instructions shall be stored in
41 resealable plastic bags or other means of protection.
42
43 3. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no
44 additional cost to the Owner.
45
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-11 11/30/23
1 1.09 WARRANTY •
2
3 A. Provide warranty per Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds, and as specified
4 herein.
5
6 1.10 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS
7
8 A. Environmental Requirements. Refer to Section 16010 and Electrical Drawings for
9 specific environmental and hazardous area classifications.
10
11 B. Elevation: Equipment shall be designed to operate at the project ground
12 elevation.
13
14 C. Temperature:
15
16 1. Outdoor areas' equipment shall operate between -30 to 50°C degrees
17 ambient.
18
19 2. Equipment located in indoor locations shall operate between 10 to 35°C
20 degrees ambient minimum.
21
22 3. Storage temperatures shall range from 0 to 50°C degrees ambient minimum.
23
III
24 4. Additional cooling or heating shall be furnished if required by the equipment
25 as specified herein.
26
27 D. Relative Humidity. Air conditioned area equipment shall operate between 20 to
28 95 percent relative, non -condensing humidity. All other equipment shall operate
29 between 5 to 100 percent relative, condensing humidity.
30
31 PART 2 PRODUCTS
32
33 2.01 GENERAL
34
35 A. All instrumentation and electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest
36 design, utilizing printed circuitry and epoxy or equal coating to prevent
37 contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. The field mounted equipment and
38 system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid and slightly
39 corrosive service conditions.
40
41 B. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands, wall
42 brackets, or instrument racks unless otherwise noted. Fasteners for securing
43 control panels and enclosures to walls and floors shall be either hot -dipped
44 galvanized after fabrication or stainless steel. Provide stainless steel fasteners
45 only in corrosive areas rated NEMA 4X on the Drawings or as defined under
46 Division 16. Provide minimum size anchor of 3/8 -inch.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-12 11/30/23
•
•1
2 C. All indicators shall be linear in process units, unless otherwise noted. All
3 transmitters shall be provided with indicators in process units, accurate to two
4 percent or better.
5
6 D. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished shall be heavy-duty type, designed
7 for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain similar products of a
8 single manufacturer, and shall consist of equipment models, which are currently
9 in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and shall
10 be capable of field expansion.
11
12 E. All electronic/digital equipment shall be provided with radio frequency
13 interference protection.
14
15 F. Electrical:
16
17 1. Equipment shall operate on a 60 Hertz alternating current power source at a
18 nominal 120 volts, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted.
19 Regulators and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall
20 be provided between power supply and interconnected instrument loop.
21 Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers
22 shall be supplied.
.23
24 2. With the exception for field device network connected devices, all electronic
25 instrumentation shall utilize linear transmission signals of isolated 4 to 20 mA
26 DC (milliampere direct current) capable of driving a Toad up to 750 ohms,
27 unless specified otherwise. However, signals between instruments within the
28 same panel or cabinet may be 1-5 VDC (volts direct current).
29
30 3. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as outlined, shall
31 have the output immediately raised and/or converted to compatible standard
32 signals for remote transmission. No zero based signals will be allowed.
33
34 4. All switches shall have double -pole, double -throw contacts rated at a
35 minimum of 600 VA, unless noted otherwise.
36
37 5. Switches and/or signals indicating an alarm, failure or upset condition shall
38 be wired in a fail-safe manner. A fail-safe condition is an open circuit when in
39 an alarm state.
40
41 6. Materials and equipment shall be UL approved whenever such approved
42 equipment and materials are available.
43
44 7. All equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed so that in the
45 event of power interruption, the systems specified herein shall go through an
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-13 11/30/23
1 orderly shutdown with no loss of memory, and shall resume normal operation •
2 without manual resetting when power is restored, unless otherwise noted.
3
4 2.02 ELECTRICAL SURGE PROTECTION
5
6 A. General - Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic
7 instrumentation system from induced surges propagating along the signal and
8 power supply lines from lightning, utility, or the plant electrical system. The
9 protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with
10 normal operation but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level.
11 Protection shall be maintenance free and self -restoring. Devices shall have a
12 response time of Tess than 50 nanoseconds and be capable of handling a
13 discharge surge current (at an 8x2Ops impulse waveform) of at least 8 kA.
14 Ground wires for all instrumentation device surge protectors shall be connected
15 to a low resistance ground in accordance with Section 16452.
16
17 B. Provide protection of all analog signal (4-20 mA) circuits where any part of the
18 circuit is outside of the building envelope. Circuits shall be protected at both the
19 transmitter and the control system end of the circuit. Protection devices located
20 near the transmitter shall be mounted in a separate NEMA 4X stainless steel
21 enclosure (plastic is not acceptable) or conduit mounted, and shall be Phoenix
22 Contact PT Series, MTL Surge Technologies (Telematic) TP48, Citel TSP -10
23 series, or equal. Substitution of a single device to protect both 120 VAC and 4-
4110
24 20 mA wires to an instrument is acceptable. Protection devices in control panels
25 shall be MTL Surge Technologies (Telematic) SD Series, Phoenix Contact PT
26 Series, Citel DLA series, or equal.
27
28 C. Provide protection of all 120 VAC power feeds into control panels, instruments,
29 and control room equipment. Surge arresters shall be Transtector ACP-100BW
30 Series, Phoenix Contact "Mains-PlugTrab", MCG Surge Protection 400 Series,
31 Citel DS40 series, or equal.
32
33 D. Non -Fiber Based Data Highway or Communications Circuits - Provide protection
34 on all communication and data highway circuits that leave a building or are routed
35 external to a building. Circuit protection shall be provided at both ends of the line.
36 Surge protection devices shall be Phoenix Contact PlugTrab Series, Transtector
37 FSP Series, MTL Surge Technologies (Telematic) NP Series, Citel DLA series or
38 MJ8 series, or equal.
39
40 E. RF Coaxial Cable - Provide protection on communication cables between radios
41 and antennas, mounted either inside the panel, or in the wall of the enclosure in
42 accordance with NEMA and UL standards. Surge protection devices shall be Citel
43 P8AX series, Polyphaser, or equal.
44
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-14 11/30/23
•1 F. Inductive Loads - Provide coil surge suppression devices, such as varistors or
2 interposing relays, on all process controller outputs or switches rated 120 VA or
3 less that drive solenoid, coil, or motor Toads.
4
5 G. Telephone Circuits - At a minimum, provide Telephone Company approved line
6 protection units for all telephone lines used for telemetry or SCADA system use
7 under this Contract.
8
9 2.03 I/O MODULES
10
11 A. The existing PLC located in the administration building is an Allen Bradley SLC -
12 5/05 PLC with two spare (unused) slots. If necessary, the PCSS shall furnish
13 and install the necessary I/O modules into the existing SLC -5/05 PLC in order to
14 incorporate the new I/O signals as part of the project. The AESS shall be
15 responsible for performing programming and configuring of PLC and SCADA HMI
16 to incorporate the new I/O signals as part of the project.
17
18 2.04 SPARE PARTS
19
20 A. All spare parts shall be wrapped in bubble wrap, sealed in a polyethylene bag
21 complete with dehumidifier, then packed in cartons and labeled with indelible
22 markings. Complete ordering information including manufacturer's contact
•23 information (address and phone number), part name, part number, part ordering
24 information, and equipment name and number(s) for which the part is to be used
25 shall be supplied with the required spare parts. The spare parts shall be delivered
26 and stored in a location directed by the Owner or Engineer.
27
28 B. Furnish one of each type of installed Surge protection devices.
29
30 C. Other spare parts are specified in each section. An overview follows:
31
32 1. Instrument related Spare Parts - see the Instrument section(s).
33
34 D. I/O Cards: Provide spares for each unique I/O module type installed. Provide two
35 or 10 percent of installed quantity, whichever is greater.
36
37 2.05 TEST EQUIPMENT
38
39 A. Provide all test equipment, instruction manuals, carrying/storage cases, unit
40 battery charger, special tools, calibration fixtures, cord extenders, patch cords,
41 test leads, and miscellaneous items for checking field operation of all supplied
42 equipment.
43
44 B. All test equipment shall be wrapped in bubble wrap, sealed in a polyethylene bag
45 with a dehumidifier, then packed in cartons and labeled with indelible markings.
• 46 Complete ordering information including manufacturer's part number, and
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-15 11/30/23
1 equipment name shall be supplied. The test equipment shall be delivered and
1111
2 stored in a location directed by the Engineer.
3
4 PART 3 EXECUTION
5
6 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION
7
8 A. Instrumentation and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with
9 manufacturer instructions. The indicated locations of equipment, transmitters,
10 alarms and similar devices indicated are approximate only. Exact locations of all
11 devices shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the
12 field, all information relevant to the placing of process control equipment and in
13 case of interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer and
14 furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved
15 manner at no additional cost to the Owner.
16
17 B. Provide brackets and hangers required for mounting of equipment.
18
19 C. The shield on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from
20 source to destination and be grounded at only one ground point for each shield.
21
22 D. Investigate each space in the building through which equipment must pass to
23 reach its final location. If necessary, ship material in sections sized to permit
24 passing through restricted areas in the building. Provide on-site service to ID
25 oversee the installation, the placing and location of system components, their
26 connections to the process equipment panels, cabinets and devices, subject to
27 the Engineer's approval. Certify that field wiring associated with the equipment is
28 installed in accordance with best industry practice. Coordinate work under this
29 Section with that of the electrical work specified under applicable sections of
30 Division 16.
31
32 E. Provide sunshades for equipment mounted outdoors in direct sunlight.
33 Sunshades shall include standoffs to allow air circulation around the cabinet.
34 Orient equipment outdoors to face to the North or as required to minimize the
35 impact of glare and ultraviolet exposure on digital readouts.
36
37 3.02 TESTING
38
39 A. Results of all testing shall be tracked on a project specific status sign off form or
40 similar document. PCSS shall be responsible for maintaining the sheet.
41
42 B. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and
43 data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and
44 data, provide all special testing materials and equipment required for a suitable
45 means of simulation.
46
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-16 11/30/23
III1 C. PCSS shall coordinate all required testing with Contractor, affected
2 Subcontractors, Engineer, and Owner.
3
4 D. Deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing
5 requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no
6 additional cost to Owner.
7
8 E. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is
9 made until specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no
10 additional cost to the owner.
11
12 F. Following tests shall be performed:
13
14 1. Instrument calibration, configuration, and set-up.
15
16 2. Input/Output (I/O) Testing to HMI and OITs.
17
18 3. Testing of control strategies.
19
20 G. Following successful completion of all tests, PCSS shall submit a Certification of
21 Installation for system in accordance with Section 01625.
22
23 3.03 TRAINING
• 24
25 A. Provide training for the Owner's personnel in the operation, maintenance,
26 troubleshooting, of the PLC and HMI programming changes provided as part of
27 this project. The training shall be held before the testing, but not more than two
28 months before.
29
30 B. Provide manufacturer's training for the instruments provided as part of this
31 project. The training shall be provided for maintenance staff and shall be of
32 minimum 2 hours duration.
33
34 END OF SECTION
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS
ADDENDUM NO. 2 13300-17 11/30/23